Sanskrit Dictionary

Select your preferred input and type any Sanskrit or English word. Enclose the word in “” for an EXACT match e.g. “yoga”.

Grammar Search

"nu" has 1 results

Root Search

nu has 4 results

Root Word (Pāṇini Dhātupāṭha:)	Full Root	Marker	Sense	Class	Sutra
√ṅu	ṅuṅ	ṅ	śabde	1	672
√ṇu	ṇu		stavane	6	98
√ṇu	ṇu		stutau	2	30
√ṇū	ṇū		stavane	6	98

nu has 1 results

Root Word	IAST	Meaning	Monier Williams Page	Class
√ङु	ṅu	sounding / śabda	1052/2	Cl.6

Amarakosha Search

Results for nu

Word	Reference	Gender	Number	Synonyms	Definition

abhisaṅgaḥ	3.3.29	Masculine	Singular	prādhānyam, sānu

abhram	1.3.6-7	Neuter	Singular	mudiraḥ, ambubhṛt, jaladharaḥ, stanayitnuḥ, dhūmayoniḥ, jīmūtaḥ, vāridaḥ, dhārādharaḥ, vārivāhaḥ, jalamuk, ghanaḥ, taḍitvān, balāhakaḥ, meghaḥ	cloud

agniḥ		Masculine	Singular	jvalanaḥ, barhiḥ, śociṣkeśaḥ, bṛhadbhānuḥ, analaḥ, śikhāvān, hutabhuk, saptārciḥ, citrabhānuḥ, appittam, vaiśvānaraḥ, dhanañjayaḥ, jātavedāḥ, śuṣmā, uṣarbudhaḥ, kṛśānuḥ, rohitāśvaḥ, āśuśukṣaṇiḥ, dahanaḥ, damunāḥ, vibhāvasuḥ, vahniḥ, kṛpīṭayoniḥ, tanūnapāt, kṛṣṇavartmā, āśrayāśaḥ, pāvakaḥ, vāyusakhaḥ, hiraṇyaretāḥ, havyavāhanaḥ, śukraḥ, śuciḥ, vītihotraḥ	fire god

alpam	3.1.61	Masculine	Singular	tanuḥ, sūkṣmam, stokaḥ, kaṇaḥ, truṭiḥ, kṛśam, ślakṣaṇam, leśaḥ, mātrā, dabhram, kṣullakaḥ, aṇuḥ, lavaḥ

anucaraḥ	2.8.73	Masculine	Singular	abhisaraḥ, anuplavaḥ, ‍sahāyaḥ

anuhāraḥ	2.4.17	Masculine	Singular	anukāraḥ

anupadam	3.1.77	Masculine	Singular	anvak, anvakṣam, anugam

ānupūrvī	2.7.38	Feminine	Singular	āvṛt, paripāṭiḥ, anukramaḥ, paryāyaḥ

anurodhaḥ	2.8.12	Masculine	Singular	anuvartanam

ārāt	3.3.250	Masculine	Singular	khedaḥ, anukampā, santoṣaḥ, vismayaḥ, āmantraṇam

asuraḥ	1.1.12	Masculine	Singular	ditisutaḥ, indrāriḥ, daityaḥ, suradviṣ, śukraśiṣyaḥ, danujaḥ, pūrvadevaḥ, dānavaḥ, daiteyaḥ	giant

ātmajaḥ	2.6.27	Masculine	Singular	tanayaḥ, ‍sunuḥ, ‍sutaḥ, putraḥ

churikā	2.8.93	Feminine	Singular	śastrī, asiputrī, asidhenukā

dhamanī		Feminine	Singular	hanuḥ, haṭṭavilāsinī, añjanakeśī

dhanurdharaḥ	2.8.70	Masculine	Singular	dha‍nuṣmān, dhānuṣkaḥ, niṣaṅgī, atrī, dhanvī

gaṃgā	1.10.31	Feminine	Singular	bhāgīrathī, tripathagā, trisrotā, viṣṇupadī, bhīṣmasūḥ, jahnutanayā, suranimnagā	ganges(river)

gauḥ	2.9.67-72	Feminine	Singular	upasaryā, rohiṇī, bahusūtiḥ, kapilā, navasūtikā, ekahāyanī, droṇakṣīrā, bandhyā, saurabheyī, garbhopaghātinī, arjunī, acaṇḍī, dhavalā, vaṣkayiṇī, dvivarṣā, pīnoghnī, tryabdā, samāṃsamīnā, sandhinī, vaśā, praṣṭhauhī, naicikī, pareṣṭukā, pāṭalā, suvratā, caturabdā, droṇadugdhā, avatokā, usrā, kālyā, aghnyā, sukarā, kṛṣṇā, dhenuḥ, ekābdā, pīvarastanī, trihāyaṇī, māheyī, vehad, śṛṅgiṇī, bālagarbhiṇī, śavalī, cirasūtā, dvihāyanī, sukhasaṃdohyā, caturhāyaṇī, dhenuṣyā, sravadgarbhā, mātā(49)	cow

glānaḥ	2.6.58	Masculine	Singular	glāsnuḥ

indrāyudham		Neuter	Singular	śakradhanuḥ, rohitam	rainbow

jagaraḥ	2.8.66	Masculine	Singular	kaṅkaṭakaḥ, kavacaḥ, tanutram, varma, daṃśanam, uraśchadaḥ

jāyakam	2.6.126	Neuter	Singular	kālīyakam, kālānusāryam

kāmaṃgāmī	2.8.77	Masculine	Singular	anukāmīnaḥ

kāmukaḥ	3.1.23	Masculine	Singular	kamanaḥ, kamitā, kāmanaḥ, anukaḥ, abhikaḥ, kamraḥ, kāmayitā, abhīkaḥ

kariṇī	2.8.37	Feminine	Singular	dhenukā, vaśā

kāruṇyam		Neuter	Singular	kṛpā, dayā, anukampā, anukrośaḥ, karuṇā, ghṛṇā	pity

kiraṇaḥ	1.3.33	Masculine	Singular	dhṛṣṇiḥ, aṃśuḥ, karaḥ, ghṛṇiḥ, mayūkhaḥ, dīdhitiḥ, bhānuḥ, gabhasti, usraḥ, marīciḥ	ray

kuberaḥ	1.1.68-69	Masculine	Singular	ekapiṅgaḥ, paulastyaḥ, dhanādhipaḥ, manuṣyadharmā, tryambakasakhaḥ, śrīdaḥ, yakṣaḥ, vaiśravaṇaḥ, rājarājaḥ, guhyakeśvaraḥ, aiḍaviḍaḥ, naravāhanaḥ, kinnareśaḥ, dhanadaḥ, yakṣarāṭ, puṇyajaneśvaraḥ	kuber

lastakaḥ	2.8.86	Masculine	Singular	dhanurmadhyam

mandaḥ	2.10.18	Masculine	Singular	alasaḥ, a‍nuṣṇaḥ, ‍tundaparimṛjaḥ, ālasyaḥ, śītakaḥ

manuṣyaḥ	2.6.1	Masculine	Singular	mānuṣaḥ, martyaḥ, manujaḥ, mānavaḥ, naraḥ

mayūraḥ	2.5.32	Masculine	Singular	meghanādānulāsī, nīlakaṇṭhaḥ, bhujaṅgabhuk, śikhāvalaḥ, śikhī, barhiṇaḥ, kekī, barhī

meruḥ	1.1.52	Masculine	Singular	sumeruḥ, hemādriḥ, ratnasānuḥ, surālayaḥ	mountain

mūrtiḥ	3.3.73	Feminine	Singular	pīḍā, dhanuṣkoṭiḥ

nirākariṣṇuḥ	3.1.28	Masculine	Singular	kṣipnuḥ

nīvī	3.3.220	Feminine	Singular	vaiśyaḥ, manujaḥ

nu	3.3.256	Masculine	Singular	saha, samīpam

pādaḥ	3.3.96	Masculine	Singular	anurodhaḥ

padāyatā	2.10.31	Feminine	Singular	anupadīnā

pakṣatiḥ	3.3.79	Feminine	Singular	yoṣit, janitātyarthānurāgāyoṣit

paṇḍitaḥ	3.3.107	Masculine	Singular	strī, jāyā, snuṣā

parjanyaḥ	3.3.154	Masculine	Singular	dīrghadveṣaḥ, anutāpaḥ

paścād	3.3.251	Masculine	Singular	harṣaḥ, anukampā, vākyārambhaḥ, viṣādaḥ

paścāttāpaḥ	1.7.25	Masculine	Singular	anutāpaḥ, vipratīsāraḥ	repeantance

pelavam	3.1.66	Masculine	Singular	viralam, tanu

prabodhanam	2.6.123	Neuter	Singular	anubodhaḥ

pradhānam	3.1.58	Neuter	Singular	agryaḥ, agraḥ, pravarhaḥ, mukhyaḥ, pravekaḥ, agriyaḥ, prāgryaḥ, parārdhyaḥ, vareṇyaḥ, uttamaḥ, pramukhaḥ, agrīyaḥ, prāgraharaḥ, anavarārdhyaḥ, varyaḥ, anuttamaḥ

praśnaḥ		Masculine	Singular	anuyogaḥ, pṛcchā	a question

preritaḥ	3.1.86	Masculine	Singular	kṣiptaḥ, nuttaḥ, nunnaḥ, astaḥ, niṣṭhyūtaḥ, āviddhaḥ

pṛśniḥ	2.6.48	Masculine	Singular	alpatanuḥ

purā	3.3.261	Masculine	Singular	jijñāsā, anunayaḥ, niṣedhaḥ, vākyālaṅkāraḥ

purastāt	3.3.254	Masculine	Singular	anunayaḥ, āmantraṇam, praśnaḥ, avadhāraṇam, anujñā

rājādanam		Masculine	Singular	sannakadruḥ, dhanuṣpaṭaḥ, piyālaḥ

śaṃbhuḥ		Masculine	Singular	kapardī, kapālabhṛt, virūpākṣaḥ, sarvajñaḥ, haraḥ, tryambakaḥ, andhakaripuḥ, vyomakeśaḥ, sthāṇuḥ, ahirbudhnyaḥ, paśupatiḥ, mahānaṭaḥ, maheśvaraḥ, īśānaḥ, bhūteśaḥ, giriśaḥ, kṛttivāsāḥ, ugraḥ, śitikaṇṭhaḥ, mahādevaḥ, kṛśānuretāḥ, nīlalohitaḥ, bhargaḥ, gaṅgādharaḥ, vṛṣadhvajaḥ, bhīmaḥ, umāpatiḥ, īśaḥ, gajāriḥ, śūlī, śarvaḥ, candraśekharaḥ, girīśaḥ, mṛtyuñjayaḥ, prathamādhipaḥ, śrīkaṇṭhaḥ, vāmadevaḥ, trilocanaḥ, dhūrjaṭiḥ, smaraharaḥ, tripurāntakaḥ, kratudhvaṃsī, bhavaḥ, rudraḥ, aṣṭamūrtiḥ, śivaḥ, īśvaraḥ, śaṅkaraḥ, khaṇḍaparaśuḥ, mṛḍaḥ, pinākī(51)	shiva, god

sarakaḥ	2.10.43	Masculine	Singular	anutarṣaṇam

śarīram	2.6.71	Neuter	Singular	tanūḥ, dehaḥ, varṣma, gātram, tanuḥ, kāyaḥ, saṃhananam, kalevaram, mūrtiḥ, vigrahaḥ, vapuḥ

sevakaḥ	2.8.9	Masculine	Singular	arthī, anujīvī

sīhuṇḍaḥ		Masculine	Singular	vajraḥ, snuk, snuhī, guḍā, samantadugdhā

skandhaḥ	3.3.107	Masculine	Singular	lepaḥ, amṛtam, snuhī

snuḥ		Masculine	Singular	prasthaḥ, sānuḥ

stavaḥ	1.6.12	Masculine	Singular	stutiḥ, stotram, nutiḥ	praise

sūraḥ	1.3.28-30	Masculine	Singular	sahasrāṃśuḥ, raviḥ, chāyānāthaḥ, jagaccakṣuḥ, pradyotanaḥ, lokabāndhavaḥ, aryamā, dhāmanidhiḥ, divākaraḥ, braghnaḥ, bhāsvān, haridaśvaḥ, arkaḥ, aruṇaḥ, taraṇiḥ, virocanaḥ, tviṣāṃpatiḥ, haṃsaḥ, savitā, tejasāṃrāśiḥ, karmasākṣī, trayītanuḥ, khadyotaḥ, sūryaḥ, bhagaḥ, dvādaśātmā, abjinīpatiḥ, ahaskaraḥ, vibhākaraḥ, saptāśvaḥ, vikartanaḥ, mihiraḥ, dyumaṇiḥ, citrabhānuḥ, grahapatiḥ, bhānuḥ, tapanaḥ, padmākṣaḥ, tamisrahā, lokabandhuḥ, dinamaṇiḥ, inaḥ, ādityaḥ, aṃśumālī, bhāskaraḥ, prabhākaraḥ, vivasvān, uṣṇaraśmiḥ, mārtaṇḍaḥ, pūṣā, mitraḥ, vibhāvasuḥ, aharpatiḥ(53)	the sun

syannam	3.1.92	Masculine	Singular	snutam, rīṇam, srutam

tamas	1.3.26	Neuter	Singular	saiṃhikeyaḥ, vidhuntudaḥ, rāhuḥ, svarbhānuḥ	the acending node

tīrtham	3.3.93	Neuter	Singular	sānuḥ, mānam

udyānam	3.3.124	Neuter	Singular	upakaraṇam, māraṇam, anuvrajyā, mṛtasaṃskāraḥ, gatiḥ, dravyopapādanam, nirvartanam

upalambhaḥ	2.4.27	Masculine	Singular	anubhavaḥ

vivadhaḥ	3.3.103	Masculine	Singular	doṣotpādaḥ, prakṛtyādivinaśvaraḥ(vyākaraṇe), mukhyānuyāyīśiśuḥ, prakṛtasyānuvartanam

anumatiḥ	1.4.8	Feminine	Singular		moon,a little gibbous

janus		Neuter	Singular	janma, janiḥ, utpattiḥ, udbhavaḥ, jananam	birth

anulāpaḥ		Masculine	Singular	muhurbhāṣā	tatulogy

anubhāvaḥ	1.7.20	Masculine	Singular		indication of passion

atinu		Masculine	Singular		landed from boat

snuḥ		Masculine	Singular	prasthaḥ, sānuḥ

sarvānubhūtiḥ		Feminine	Singular	tripuṭā, trivṛtā, trivṛt, tribhaṇḍī, rocanī, saralā

kālānusāryam		Feminine	Singular	śaileyam, vṛddham, aśmapuṣpam, śītaśivam

manuṣyaḥ	2.6.1	Masculine	Singular	mānuṣaḥ, martyaḥ, manujaḥ, mānavaḥ, naraḥ

snuṣā	2.6.9	Feminine	Singular	janī, vadhūḥ

anujaḥ	2.6.43	Masculine	Singular	jaghanyajaḥ, kaniṣṭhaḥ, yavīyān, avarajaḥ

ūrdhvajānuḥ	2.6.47	Masculine	Singular	ūrdhvajñuḥ

saṃhatajānukaḥ	2.6.47	Masculine	Singular	saṃjñuḥ

hanuḥ	2.6.91	Feminine	Singular

gātrānulepanī	1.2.134	Feminine	Singular	varttiḥ

ānupūrvī	2.7.38	Feminine	Singular	āvṛt, paripāṭiḥ, anukramaḥ, paryāyaḥ

anukalpaḥ	2.7.44	Masculine	Singular

anurodhaḥ	2.8.12	Masculine	Singular	anuvartanam

anukarṣaḥ	2.8.58	Masculine	Singular

dhanurdharaḥ	2.8.70	Masculine	Singular	dha‍nuṣmān, dhānuṣkaḥ, niṣaṅgī, atrī, dhanvī

anucaraḥ	2.8.73	Masculine	Singular	abhisaraḥ, anuplavaḥ, ‍sahāyaḥ

dhanuḥ	2.8.84	Feminine	Singular	kārmukam, iṣvāsaḥ, cāpaḥ, dhanva, śarāsanam, kodaṇḍam

gṛdhnuḥ	3.1.21	Masculine	Singular	gardhanaḥ, lubdhaḥ, abhilāṣukaḥ, tṛṣṇakaḥ

sthāsnuḥ	3.1.72	Masculine	Singular	sthirataraḥ, stheyān

anupadam	3.1.77	Masculine	Singular	anvak, anvakṣam, anugam

anugrahaḥ	3.4.13	Masculine	Singular	abhyupapattiḥ

anuhāraḥ	2.4.17	Masculine	Singular	anukāraḥ

mānuṣyakam	2.4.42	Neuter	Singular	bhuvanam, janaḥ

dhenukā	3.3.15	Feminine	Singular	mukhyaḥ, anyaḥ, kevalaḥ

tamonud	3.3.96	Masculine	Singular	vyañjanam

anubandhaḥ	3.3.105	Masculine	Singular	budhaḥ, vṛddhaḥ

citrabhānuḥ	3.3.112	Masculine	Singular	pakṣī, śaraḥ

bhānuḥ	3.3.112	Masculine	Singular	śailaḥ, taruḥ

tanuḥ	3.3.120	Feminine	Singular	utsāhanam, hiṃsā, sūcanam

anuśayaḥ	3.3.156	Masculine	Singular	āpat, yuddhaḥ, āyatiḥ

anuttaraḥ	3.3.198	Masculine	Singular	anyaḥ, nīcaḥ

anubhāvaḥ	3.3.217	Masculine	Singular	ātmīyaḥ, ghanaḥ

nanu	3.3.256	Masculine	Singular

nanu	2.4.14	Masculine	Singular

manuḥ	3.5.38	Ubhaya-linga	Singular

Monier-Williams Search

Results for nu

ind. (in

also n/ū-; especially at the beginning of a verse, where often equals n/u-+ u-), now, still, just, at once

ind. so now, now then

ind. indeed, certainly, surely

etc.

ind. confer, compare

(often connected with other particles, especially with negatives exempli gratia, 'for example' nah/i n/u-,"by no means", n/akir n/u-,"no one or nothing at all", m/ā n/u-,"in order that surely not";often also gha nu-, ha nu-, in nu-, nu kam-etc.[ n/ū cit-,either"for ever, evermore;at once, forthwith "or,"never, never more";so also nū-alone

];with relat. = -cunque or -soever;sometimes it lays stress upon a preceding word, especially an interr. pronoun or particle, and is then often connected with khalu-

etc.;it is also employed in questions, especially in sentences of two or more clauses[ confer, compare

]where nu-is either always repeated[

] or omitted in the first place [ib. i, 8] or in the second place and further replaced by svid-, yadi vā-etc., and strengthened by vā-, atha vā-etc.) [ confer, compare 1. n/ava-, n/ūtana-, nūn/am-; Zend nu1; Greek , ; Latin nun-c; German nu,nun; Anglo-Saxon nu,nu1; English now.]

m. a weapon

m. time

cl.1 A1. navate- (nauti-with apa-), to go

: Causal nāvayati-, to move from the place, remove

or nū- cl.2.6. P. (

) nauti-, nuvati-, (present tense also n/avate-, ti-

etc.; parasmE-pada P. nuv/at-, n/avat- A1. n/avamāna-

; perfect tense nunāva-

; Aorist /anūnot-, /anūṣi-, ṣata-, anaviṣṭa-

; anauṣit-, anāvit-, anuvīt- grammar; future naviṣyati-, nuv-; navitā-, nuv-

; ind.p. -nutya-, -nāvam-

; infinitive mood lavitum- varia lectio nuv-

), to sound, shout, exult ; praise, commend

etc. etc.: Passive voice nūyate-

etc.: Causal nāvayati- Aorist anūnavat- grammar : Desiderative nunūṣati-

; Desiderative of Causal nunāvayiṣati-

: Intensive n/onavīti-, nonumas- (imperfect tense anonavur- subjunctive n/avīnot-; perfect tense n/onāva-, nonuvur-

; nonūyate-, nonoti- grammar), to sound loudly, roar, thunder

m. praise, eulogium

Caus. nāvayati-, to cause to be drawn into the nose

(see 3 nava-).

(in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') equals nau-, a ship

nuḍ

cl.6 P. nuḍati-, to hurt, strike, kill,

(

)

nud

cl.6 P. A1. (

) nud/ati-, te- (perfect tense nunoda-

; nunud/e-,3. plural dre-

etc.; Aorist P. anautsīt- grammar; A1. anutthās-

; nudiṣṭhās-

; preceding -nudyāt-

; future -notsyati-

; te-

etc.; nottā- grammar; ind.p. -nudya-

; infinitive mood -n/ude-

; -nudas-

; -nodam-

), to push, thrust, impel, move, remove

etc. etc.: Causal nodayati- (Passive voice nodyate-), to push on, urge, incite

etc.: Intensive nonudyate-, to push or drive away repeatedly

nud

mfn. pushing, impelling, driving away, removing

(in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' or with accusative)

nuda

mfn. pushing, impelling, driving away, removing

(in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' or with accusative)

nudita

mfn. equals nutta- or nunna-

nunna

mfn. equals nutta-

nunutsu

mfn. (fr. Desiderative) desirous of impelling or inciting or removing

nuta

mfn. praised, commended

nutamitra

m. "having praised friends", Name of a man

nuti

f. praise, laudation

nuti

f. worship, reverence

nutta

mfn. pushed or driven away

nutta

mfn. despatched, sent, ordered

nutta

m. Name of a plant

nutti

f. driving away, removing, destroying

abhimānuka

mfn. insidious (with accusative)

(see /an-abhimānuka-.)

abhinu

A1. (3. plural abh/īnavante-) to turn one's self towards (accusative)

abhinu

P. A1. (proper 1. plural -navāmahe-,3. plural -navante-; imperfect tense P.3. plural -anāvan-; Aorist 1. sg. -anūṣi-,3. dual number -anūṣātām-,3. plural -anūṣata-[very frequently] or -nūṣata-

) to shout towards (accusative)

: Intensive (1. plural -nonumas-) idem or 'A1. (3. plural abh/īnavante-) to turn one's self towards (accusative) '

abhinud

to push, press: Caus. -nodayati-, to excite, spur or urge on.

abhisaṃnu

A1. (3. plural -navante-; Aorist 3. plural -anūṣata-) to rejoice or cheer together at or towards (accusative)

abhivinud

Caus. -nodayati-, to gladden, cause to rejoice

abhyanujñā

to assent to, approve, allow, permit, concede

etc. ; to authorize, direct

; to allow one to depart, dismiss

etc. ; (ind.p. -jñaya-; infinitive mood -jñātum-) to take leave, ask for leave to depart

: Causal (ind.p. -jñāpya-; future parasmE-pada -jñāpayiṣyat-) to ask for leave to depart

abhyanujñā

f. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-).) assent, approval

abhyanujñā

f. authorization, permission

abhyanujñā

f. granting leave of absence, dismissing

abhyanujñāna

n. assenting to, approval commentator or commentary on

abhyanujñāna

n. authorization, permission

abhyanujñāpana

n. causing to assent to.

abhyanujñāta

mfn. assented to, approved

abhyanujñāta

mfn. authorized, allowed to

etc.

abhyanujñāta

mfn. (an-- negative)

abhyanujñāta

mfn. favoured by (instrumental case)

abhyanujñāta

mfn. allowed to depart, dismissed

abhyanujñeya

mfn. to be admitted or assented to,

abhyanumodana

n. agreement with, approval,

abhyanumud

Caus. (perf. Passive voice p. -modita-; parasmE-pada necess. -modanīya-) to assent to, approve of.

abhyanuprach

to inquire after, ask for

abhyanuśās

(Imper. 1. p. -śāsāni-) to indicate, denote

abhyanusṛ

(ind.p. -sṛtya- varia lectio -sṛjya-) to learn by investigating

abhyanusṛj

(ind.p. -sṛjya-) idem or '(ind.p. -sṛtya- varia lectio -sṛjya-) to learn by investigating '

abhyanuvac

(perf. -anūvāca-) to declare or state or utter with reference to (accusative)

: Passive voice (3. plural -anūcyante-) to be referred to by some statement or verse

abhyanuvad

P. (equals abhy-anu-vac-) to utter with reference to (accusative)

abhyanuyuj

(ind.p. -yujya-) to apply to, ask

acchānu

to call out to, to cheer

adharahanu

f. the lower jaw-bone

adhenu

mfn. yielding no milk

adhenu

mfn. not nourishing

adhijānu

ind. on the knees

adhojānu

ind. below the knee

ādityānuvartin

mfn. following the sun

ādityasūnu

m. "the sun's son", Name of sugrīva- (the monkey king), of yama-, of manu-, etc.

adrisānu

mfn. lingering on the mountains

agninunna

(agn/i-) mfn. struck by fire or lightning

agnīṣomīyapaśvanuṣṭhāna

n. the rite connected with that victim at the jyotiṣṭoma- sacrifice

agnitanu

f. plural Name (also title or epithet) of particular texts,

agrasānu

m. the front part of a table-land

ahalyākāmadhenu

f. Name (also title or epithet) of a modern law-book

ahibhānu

mfn. shining like serpents (Name of the marut-s)

(vocative case)

ājānu

ind. (generally in compound) as far as the knee.

ājānubāhu

mfn.

ājānubāhu

mfn. See sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order 3. /ā-.

ājānulambin

mfn. reaching down to the knee

ājānusama

mfn. as high as the knee

ajātānuśaya

mfn. having no regret.

ākhaṇḍaladhanus

n. idem or 'm. n. "indra-'s bow", the rainbow '

ākhaṇḍalasūnu

m. " indra-'s son", arjuna-

alaṃkārānusāriṇī

f. Name (also title or epithet) of work

alpatanu

mfn. small-bodied

amānuṣa

mf(ī-)n. not human, anything but a man

amānuṣa

mf(ī-)n. superhuman, divine, celestial

etc.

amānuṣa

mf(ī-)n. inhuman, brutal

amānuṣa

mf(ā-)n. , without men, not inhabited by men

amānuṣa

m. not a man

amānuṣaloka

m. "the celestial world", heaven

amānuṣī

f. a female animal

amanuṣya

m. no man, any other being but a man

(nā-manuṣye-,"only with men")

amanuṣya

m. a demon

amānuṣya

mfn. not human

amanuṣyaniṣevita

mfn. not inhabited by men.

amanuṣyatā

f. unmanliness.

anabhimānuka

mfn. not having evil intentions against (accusative)

anabhyanujñā

f. non-permission.

anāmayitnu

mfn. salubrious, curative

ananubhāṣaṇa

n. "not repeating (for the sake of challenging) a proposition"

ananubhāṣaṇa

n. tacit assent.

ananubhāvaka

mfn. unable to comprehend.

ananubhāvakatā

f. non-comprehension

ananubhāvakatā

f. unintelligibility.

ananubhūta

mfn. not perceived, not experienced unknown.

anānubhūti

f. "inattention, neglect" (tayas-) plural neglectful or irreligious people

anānuda

mfn. (1. da-with ānu-for anu-), not giving way, obstinate

ananudhyāyin

mfn. not missing, not missing anything

ananudhyāyin

mfn. not insidious

anānudiṣṭa

mfn. ( diś-with ānu-or anu-), unsolicited

anānujā

f. (being) no younger sister

ananujñāta

mfn. not agreed to, not permitted

ananujñāta

mfn. denied.

ananukhyāti

f. not perceiving

anānukṛtya

mfn. (ānu-for anu-), inimitable, unparalleled

ananumata

mfn. not approved or honoured, not liked, disagreeable, unfit.

anānupūrvya

n. separation of the different parts of a compound word by the intervention of others

anānupūrvya

n. the not coming in regular order, tmesis

anānupūrvyasaṃhitā

f. the manner of constructing a sentence with the above tmesis.

ananuṣaṅgin

mfn. not attached to, indifferent to.

ananuṣṭhāna

n. non-observance, neglect

ananuṣṭhāna

n. impropriety.

ananuvākya

mfn. not teaching recitation of the veda-,

ananuyāja

or an-anūyāj/a- ([

]) mfn. without a subsequent or final sacrifice.

ananuyoga

mfn. not inquired after,

ananyānubhava

m. Name of the teacher of prakāśātman-.

aṅgajanus

m. a son.

aṅgānukūla

mfn. agreeable to the body

aṅgānulepana

n. anointing the body.

anīcanuvartin

mfn. not keeping low company

anīcanuvartin

m. a faithful lover or husband.

aniyantraṇānuyoga

mfn. to be questioned unreservedly,

antaḥsānu

ind. in the mountain ridge,

antarjānu

ind. between the knees

antarjānu

ind. holding the hands between the knees

antarjānu

mfn. holding the hands between the knees.

āntrānucārin

mfn. being in the bowels, mantra-br.

ānu

A1. (Aorist 3. plural /ānūṣata-

) to sound, roar towards or near ; (parasmE-pada -nuvāna-

) to cry ; to twitter (as birds): Intensive (/ā-navinot-

) to roar towards.

ānu

mfn. (fr.2. an-), living, human

anu

mfn. equals aṇu- q.v

anu

m. a non-Aryan man

anu

m. Name of a king (one of yayāti-'s sons)

anu

m. of a non-Aryan tribe

anu

ind. (as a prefix to verbs and nouns, expresses) after, along, alongside, lengthwise, near to, under, subordinate to, with. (When prefixed to nouns, especially in adverbial compounds), according to, severally, each by each, orderly, methodically, one after another, repeatedly. (As a separable preposition, with accusative) after, along, over, near to, through, to, towards, at, according to, in order, agreeably to, in regard to, inferior to

(As a separable adverb) after, afterwards, thereupon, again, further, then, next.

anubaddha

mfn. bound to, obliged to, connected with, related to, belonging to

anubaddha

mfn. followed by.

anubādh

Passive voice (p -bādhyamāna-) to be oppressed or tormented

anubadhnat

mfn. following, seeking

anubala

n. rear-guard, an auxiliary army following another.

anubandh

to attach, tie ; to bind (by an obligation) ; to stick, adhere, follow, endure ; to be followed by

anubandha

m. binding, connection, attachment

anubandha

m. encumbrance

anubandha

m. clog

anubandha

m. uninterrupted succession

anubandha

m. sequence, consequence, result

m. intention, design

m. motive, cause

m. obstacle

m. inseparable adjunct or sign of anything, secondary or symptomatic affection (supervening on the principal disease)

anubandha

m. an indicatory letter or syllable attached to roots, etc. (marking some peculiarity in their inflection; exempli gratia, 'for example' an i-attached to roots, denotes the insertion of a nasal before their final consonant)

anubandha

m. a child or pupil who imitates an example set by a parent or preceptor

anubandha

m. commencement, beginning

anubandha

m. anything small or little, a part, a small part

anubandha

m. (in arithmetic) the junction of fractions

anubandha

m. (in philosophy) an indispensable element of the vedānta-

anubandhaka

mf(ikā-)n. connected, allied

anubandhaka

mf(ikā-)n. related.

anubandhana

n. binding, connection, succession, unbroken series.

anubandhī

f. hickup

anubandhī

f. thirst

ānubandhika

mfn. of continued influence or efficacy,

anubandhin

mfn. connected with, attached

anubandhin

mfn. having in its train or as a consequence, resulting

anubandhin

mfn. continuous, lasting, permanent.

anubandhitva

n. the state of being accompanied or attended or followed.

anubandhya

mfn. principal, primary, liable to receive an adjunct (as a root, a disease) (see anū-b/andhya-.)

anubha

mfn. (dual number) neither, no one (of two),

anubhā

to shine after another (accusative)

anubhaj

to worship

anubhartṛ

mf(tr/ī-)n. supporting, strengthening (

), penetrating (

)

anubhāṣ

to speak to, address ; to confess.

anubhāsa

m. a kind of crow.

anubhāṣaṇa

am-. See an-anubhāṣaṇa-.

anubhāṣita

n. spoken words, talk, speech,

anubhāṣitṛ

mfn. speaking to, saying

anubhava

m. perception, apprehension, fruition

anubhava

m. understanding

anubhava

m. impression on the mind not derived from memory

anubhava

m. experience, knowledge derived from personal observation or experiment

anubhava

m. result, consequence.

anubhava

cognition, consciousness,

anubhava

custom, usage,

anubhāva

m. sign or indication of a feeling (bhāva-) by look or gesture

anubhāva

m. dignity, authority, consequence

anubhāva

m. firm opinion, ascertainment, good resolution, belief.

anubhāvaka

mf(ikā-)n. causing to apprehend, making to understand.

anubhāvakatā

f. understanding.

anubhavam

ind. at every birth,

anubhāvana

n. the act of indicating feelings by sign or gesture

anubhavārūḍha

mfn. subjected to trial or experiment.

anubhavasiddha

mfn. established by experience or perception.

anubhāvin

mfn. perceiving, knowing

anubhāvin

mfn. being an eye-witness

anubhāvin

mfn. showing signs of feeling.

anubhāvya

mfn. to be (or being) perceived,

anubhaya

mfn. idem or 'mfn. (dual number) neither, no one (of two), ',

anubhayātman

mfn. of neither kind,

anubhayātmatā

(f.)

anubhid

to split or break along

anubhitti

ind. along a mat

anubhoga

m. (in law) enjoyment, a grant of hereditary land in return for service.

anubhṛ

to support

; to insert, enter

anubhrāj

to illuminate.

anubhrātṛ

m. a younger brother.

anubhū

to enclose, embrace

; to be after, attain, equal

etc. ; to be useful, to help

; to turn or incline to

; to notice, perceive, understand ; to experience, to attempt.

anubhū

mfn. perceiving, understanding (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound')

anubhuj

to suffer the consequence of one's actions ; to enjoy successively

; to enjoy, participate ; to pass (an asterism)

anubhūta

mfn. perceived, understood, apprehended

anubhūta

mfn. resulted, followed as a consequence

anubhūta

mfn. that has experienced, tasted, tried or enjoyed.

anubhūti

f. perception

anubhūti

f. knowledge from any source but memory

anubhūti

f. (in philosophy) knowledge gained by means of the four pramāṇa-s (perception by the senses, inference, comparison, and verbal authority)

anubhūti

f. dignity, consequence.

anubhūtiprakāśa

m. Name of a metrical paraphrase of the twelve principal upaniṣad-s by vidyāraṇya-muni-.

anubhūtisvarūpācārya

m. Name of the author of the grammar sārasvatī-prakriyā-.

anubhūya

ind. having experienced.

anubhūyamāna

mfn. being under trial

anubhūyamāna

mfn. being experienced or enjoyed.

anubimba

m. n. reflected image,

anubimbana

n. the being a reflected image, ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding

anubimbita

mfn. reflected, ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding

anubodha

m. recollection

anubodha

m. an after-thought

anubodha

m. reviving the scent of a faded perfume, replacing perfumes.

anubodha

perception,

anubodhana

n. recollecting, reminding.

anubodhita

mfn. reminded

anubodhita

mfn. convinced by recollection.

anubrāhmaṇa

n. a work resembling a brāhmaṇa-

anubrāhmaṇam

ind. according to the brāhmaṇa-

anubrāhmaṇika

([Comm. on

]) ([

]) m. a knower of an anu-brāhmaṇa-.

anubrāhmaṇin

([

]) m. a knower of an anu-brāhmaṇa-.

anubrū

cl.2 P. -bravīti- to pronounce, recite ; to utter ; to address, invite (with dative case)

etc. ; to repeat another's words, learn by heart (by repeating another's words)

anubudh

to awake ; to recollect ; to learn (by information): Caus. -bodhayati-, to communicate, to remind,

anucakṣ

(perf. -cac/akṣa-; imperfect tense A1. -acaṣṭa-) to look at or up to

anucar

to walk or move after or along ; to follow, pursue, seek after ; to follow out, adhere to, attend ; to behave: Caus. -cārayati-, to let or cause to traverse: Intensive p. -carcūry/amāṇa-, continuing following

anucara

mf(/ī-)n. following, attending

anucara

m. companion, follower, servant

anucarā

f. (rarely ā-) a female attendant.

ānucāraka

mfn. (fr. anu-cāraka-), belonging to an attendant

anucāraka

m. a follower, attendant, (gaRa mahiṣy-ādi- q.v)

anucaraṇa

n. going after, wandering,

anucaraṇacarita

n. acts, deeds, adventures,

anucarci

mfn. reciting or repeating (in a chorus)

anucarī

f. a female attendant.

anucārikā

f. a female follower or attendant.

anucārin

mfn. following, attending.

anucca

mfn. not high, low, humble

anucca

mfn. (equals an-udātta-), accentless

anuccais

ind. not aloud, in a low voice.

anuccalat

mfn. not moving or going from (ablative),

anuccāra

m. non-pronunciation, skipping words (in reciting hymns). See uc-car-.

anuccāraṇa

n. non-pronunciation, skipping words (in reciting hymns). See uc-car-.

anucchāda

m. ( chad-), a garment which hangs down (probably that part of the lower garment which hangs down in front from the waist to the feet)

anuccheda

m. equals an-uc-chitti-.

anucchedya

mfn. indestructible, not severable.

anucchid

( chid-) to cut along or lengthwise.

anucchindat

mfn. not destroying.

anucchindat

mfn. cutting lengthwise.

anucchinna

mfn. not cut off

anucchinna

mfn. unextirpated.

anucchiṣṭa

mfn. ( śiṣ-with ud-), without remains or leavings of food, pure

anucchiṣṭa

mfn. not mere remains

anucchitti

f. ( chid-), not cutting off, non-extirpation, non-destruction, indestructibility.

anucchittidharman

(/anucchitti--) mfn. possessing the virtue (or faculty) of being indestructible

anuccho

( cho-) cl.4 P. (Imper. 2. sg. -chya-) to cut open or cut up

anuci

(Imper. A1. -cikitām-) to remember

anucint

to meditate, consider, recall to mind ; Caus. to make to consider.

anucintā

f. thinking of, meditating upon, recalling, recollecting

anucintā

f. anxiety.

anucintana

n. thinking of, meditating upon, recalling, recollecting

anucintana

n. anxiety.

anucintita

mfn. recollected, recalled, thought of.

anucita

mfn. (1. ci-), set or placed along or lengthwise or in rows

anucita

mfn. improper, wrong, unusual, strange.

anucitārtha

m. an unusual meaning.

anudā

(Passive voice -dāyi-) to permit, restore

; to give way, yield

; to remit

; to pay one out (?)

anuda

See anānud/a-.

anudagra

mfn. not lofty, low

anudagra

mfn. not projecting.

anudah

to burn up

etc. ; to take fire (aor.Subj. 2. sg. -dakṣi-[for dhakṣi-])

; to be consumed by fire subsequently after (accusative)

anudairghya

mfn. longitudinal.

anudaka

mf(/ā-)n. waterless

anudaka

mf(/ā-)n. without adding water

anudakam

ind. without touching water

anudaṇḍi

f. back bone

anudapāna

n. "non-water-drinking", thirst,

anudara

mf(ā-)n. (See 3. a-) thin, lank

anudāra

mfn. niggardly, mean.

anudāra

mfn. adhered to or followed by a wife.

anudarśa

m. representation, admonition,

anudarśana

n. consideration, regard.

anudarśin

mfn. considering, foreseeing.

anudatta

mfn. granted, remitted, given back

commentator or commentary

anudātta

mfn. not raised, not elevated, not pronounced with the udātta- accent, grave

anudātta

mfn. accentless, having the neutral general tone neither high nor low (id est both the grave or non-elevated accent explained by pāṇini- as sannatara- q.v - which immediately precedes the udātta-, and also the general accentless, neutral tone, neither high nor low, explained as eka-śruti-)

anudātta

mfn. having the one monotonous ordinary intonation which belongs to the generality of syllables in a sentence

anudātta

m. one of the three accents to be observed in reading the veda-s, the grave accent.

anudāttadi

n. (in grammar) a nominal base of which the first syllable is anudātta-.

anudāttatara

m. "more than anudātta-, still lower in sound than anudātta-" id est the very anudātta- accent (or a syllable having this accent which immediately precedes a syllable having the udātta- or svarita- accent, and is therefore more depressed than the ordinary anudātta-

Scholiast or Commentator)

anudāttet

m. a verbal root having for its anubandha- the anudātta- accent to indicate that it takes the ātmane-pada- terminations only

anudāttet

m. also anudāttopadeśa-.

anudāttodaya

n. a syllable immediately preceding the anudātta- accent.

anudaya

m. non-rising, the not rising (of a luminary).

anudbhaṭa

mfn. not exalted, unassuming.

anuddhāna

n. non-abandonment,

anuddhāra

m. non-partition, not taking a share

anuddhāra

m. non-removal.

anuddharaṇa

n. ( hṛ-), non-removal

anuddharaṇa

n. not offering, not establishing or proving.

anuddhata

mfn. ( han-), not lifted up, humble

mfn. unsurpassed

mfn. unopposed

m. not a high place

mfn. non-removed, not taken away

anuddhṛta

mfn. uninjured, undestroyed

anuddhṛta

mfn. unoffered

anuddhṛta

mfn. undivided, unpartitioned

anuddhṛta

mfn. unestablished, unproved.

anuddhṛtābhyastamaya

m. sunset (abhy-astamaya-) taking place whilst the āhavanīya- fire continues unremoved from the gārhapatya-

anudeham

ind. behind the body

anudeśa

m. a rule or injunction pointing back to a previous rule

anudeśa

m. reference to something prior.

ānudeśika

mfn. belonging to an anu-- deśa- (q.v) rule

anudeśin

mfn. pointing back, referring back

anudeśin

mfn. being the object of an anudeśa-

anudeśin

mfn. residing at the same place

anudeya

n. a present

anudeyī

f. a bride's maid (

and

)

anudeyī

f. (["gift"

])

anudghāta

m. no blow or jolt or jerk,

anudgīrṇa

mfn. not vomited forth, not disdained

anudgīrṇa

mfn. not spurned.

anudgṛhṇat

mfn. not ceasing,

anudhā

to add in placing upon

; to stimulate to

; to concede, allow, (Passive voice Aorist -dhāyi-)

anudham

(3. plural dh/amanty /anu-) to sprinkle over

anudhanv

(perf. A1.3. sg. -dadhanv/e-) to run near

anudhāv

to run after, run up to ; to follow ; to pursue.

anudhāv

to cleanse.

anudhāvana

n. chasing, pursuing, running after

anudhāvana

n. close pursuit of any object, going after a mistress.

anudhāvana

n. cleaning, purification.

anudhāvita

mfn. pursued, run after (literally or figuratively).

anudhe

Caus. -dhāpayati-, to cause to suck, to put to the breast

anudhī

(parasmE-pada A1. -d/īdhyāna-; imperfect tense P.3. pl. -dīdhiyuḥ-) to think of

anudhūpita

mfn. ( dhūp-), puffed up, proud

anudhvaṃs

A1. (perf. -dadhvas/e-) to fall or drop upon

anudhyā

f. sorrow

anudhyai

to consider attentively, think of, muse ; to miss,

; to bear a grudge

anudhyāna

n. meditation, religious contemplation, solicitude.

anudhyāyin

mfn. contemplating, meditating

anudhyāyin

mfn. missing

anudigdha

mfn. ( dih-), covered (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound')

anudinam

ind. every day.

anudiś

to point out for, assign.

anudiśam

ind. in every quarter.

anudita

mfn. not risen, not appeared.

anudita

mfn. unsaid, unuttered

anudita

mfn. unutterable, blamable (see a-vady/a-)

(See 1. /an-udita- sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order an-udaya-).

anudivasam

ind. idem or 'ind. every day.'

anudṝ

Passive voice -dīryate-, to break through after (another) ; to be scattered or confused in consequence of the confusion of others.

anudra

mfn. waterless

anudraṣṭavya

mfn. to be observed, visible.

anudraṣṭavya

(

) mfn. unextinguished

anudravaṇa

n. quick recitation,

, Scholiast or Commentator

anudṛbh

to make into bundles or chains,

anudṛś

(ind.p. -d/ṛśya-

) to survey, behold ; to keep in view or in mind, to foresee: Causal P. -darśayati-, to show, tell, teach: Passive voice -dṛśyate- (also perf. A1. -dadṛśe-

), to become or be visible.

ānudṛṣṭeya

mfn. idem or 'mf. a descendant of anu-dṛṣṭi-, q.v '

anudṛṣṭi

f. Name of the ancestress of ānudṛṣṭineya-, (gaRa śubhrādi-and kalyāṇy-ādi-.)

ānudṛṣṭineya

mf. a descendant of anu-dṛṣṭi-, q.v

anudru

to run after, follow ; to accompany ; to pursue ; to run over in reciting

anudruta

mfn. followed, pursued

anudruta

mfn. having followed or pursued

anudruta

mfn. accompanied

anudruta

n. a measure of time in music (half a druta-, or one-fourth of a mātrā- or of the time taken to articulate a short vowel).

ānuḍuha

n. varia lectio for ānaḍuha- q.v

anuduṣ

to become demoralized as a result of

anudvāha

m. non-marriage, celibacy.

anudvāra

mfn. having a door or entrance behind,

anudvāta

mfn. unextinguished,

anudvega

mfn. free from anxiety

anudvega

m. freedom from uneasiness.

anudvegakara

mfn. not causing apprehension, not overawing.

anudvejayat

mfn. not stimulating,

anudvigna

mfn. free from apprehension or perplexity, easy in mind

anudvīpa

m. Name (also title or epithet) of six islands (as aṅga-dvīpa- etc.),

anudviṣ

to wreak one's anger upon

anudya

mfn. unutterable

anudyamāna

mfn. not being spoken

anudyata

mfn. ( yam-), inactive, idle, destitute of perseverance.

anudyoga

m. absence of exertion or effort, inactivity, laziness.

anudyogin

mfn. inactive, lazy, indifferent.

anudyūta

n. continuation of the play at dice, Name of the chapters 70-79 in the second book of the

anuga

mf(/ā-)n. going after, following, corresponding with, adapted to

anuga

mf(/ā-)n. a companion

anuga

mf(/ā-)n. a follower, a servant

anuga

mf(/ā-)n. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') followed by

anugā

f. Name of an apsaras-.

anugā

to undergo,

anugā

to go after, follow ; to act in conformity to, or according to the wishes of

anugāḍha

mfn. plunged or immersed in.

ānugādika

mfn. (fr. anu-gādin-), belonging to one who repeats another's words, repeating another's words

anugādin

mfn. repeating another's words

anugāh

to plunge after, be immersed in.

anugai

to sing after or to (a person or tune) ; to celebrate in song: Caus. -gāpayati-, to make one sing after or to.

anugam

cl.1 P. -gacchati-, -gantum-, to go after, follow, seek, approach, visit, arrive ; to practise, observe, obey, imitate ; to enter into ; to die out, be extinguished: Causal -gamayati-, to imitate cause to die out.

anugama

m. following, going after in life or death

anugama

m. post-cremation of a widow

anugama

m. imitating, approaching.

anugamana

n. following, going after in life or death

anugamana

n. post-cremation of a widow

anugamana

n.imitating, approaching.

anugāmin

mfn. following, a companion.

anugāmuka

mfn. habitually or constantly following or attending.

anugamya

mfn. to be followed or imitated.

anugaṇ

to count over.

anugāna

n. "after-song", (- śas-),

anugānaśas

(ind.)

anugaṇḍikā

f. a chain of hills,

anugaṅgam

ind. along the Ganges

ānugaṅgya

mfn. (fr. anu-gaṅga-), being along the gaṅgā-

anugaṇita

mfn. counted over.

anugaṇitin

mfn. one who has counted over, (gaRa iṣṭādi- q.v)

anugantavya

mfn. to be followed (as a husband by a wife in death)

anugantavya

mfn. worthy of being imitated, to be looked for or discovered

anugantī

f. (for anu-- gantrī-?) a message,

anugāpana

n. causing to sing after,

anugara

m. invitation addressed to a reciter,

anugarj

to shout or roar after.

anugarjita

n. roaring after, echo

anugata

mfn. followed by, having anything (as a skin) hanging behind

mfn. following

mfn. a follower

mfn. acquired

mfn. extinguished

anugata

mfn. tallying with

anugata

n. moderate time (in music).

anugatārtha

mfn. having a corresponding meaning.

anugati

f. following, imitation, dying out.

ānugatika

mfn. (fr. anu-gata-), relating to or proceeding from, following

anugatika

m. a follower, an imitator.

ānugatya

n. following

ānugatya

n. acquaintance, familiarity

anugavam

ind. so as to suit (or follow) the cows

anugavīna

m. a cowherd

anugāyas

mfn. ( gai-), followed by shouts or hymns

anugāyas

mfn. ("to be praised in hymns"

)

anugeya

mfn. to be sung after,

anughaṭana

n. continuation (of a tale),

anughaṭṭ

to stroke, rub lengthwise.

anughrā

"to smell at", kiss

anughuṣ

(Ved. ind.p. -gh/uṣyā-) to name aloud

anugiram

ind. on the mountain

anugīta

mfn. (also) sung after,

anugīta

n. an imitative song,

anugītā

f. "an after-song", Name of part of the fourteenth book of the mahābhārata- (chaps. 16-92).

anugīti

f. Name of a metre (of two verses, the first containing twenty-seven, the second thirty-two mātrā-s)

anugodam

ind. near the godāvarī-.

anugoptṛ

m. a protector, defender,

anugṝ

-gṛṇāti-, to join in praising

, to rejoin, answer

; to repeat

anugra

or an-ugr/a- mf(ā-)n. not harsh or violent, mild, gentle

anugrah

to follow in taking or plundering

, to support ; to uphold ; to receive, welcome ; to treat with kindness, favour, oblige ; to foster.

anugraha

m. favour, kindness, showing favour, conferring benefits, promoting or furthering a good object

anugraha

m. assistance

anugraha

m. facilitating by incantations

anugraha

m. rear-guard

anugraha

m. Name of the eighth or fifth creation

anugrāhaka

mf(ikā-)n. favouring, furthering, facilitating

anugrāhaka

mf(ikā-)n. favourable, kind, gracious.

anugrahakātara

mfn. anxious to please or for favour.

anugrahaṇa

n. anu-graha-.

anugrahaṇa

practising, practice,

anugrahasarga

m. (in sāṃkhya- philosophy) creation of the feelings or mental conditions.

anugrahin

m. proficient in magic skill.

anugrāhin

mfn. gracious, favourable.

anugrahita

mfn. occupied, engaged

anugrahītṛ

m. a favourer, furtherer,

anugrāhya

mfn. to be favoured or furthered.

anugrāmam

ind. village after village

, into, a village

ānugrāmika

mfn. (fr. anu-grāma-), belonging or conformable to a village, rustic, rural

anugrāsaka

m. a mouthful (of boiled rice, etc.)

anugrāsaka

m. the equivalent of a mouthful.

anugṛdh

(pr. p. -gṛdhyat-) to be reedy after (locative case)

anugṛhīta

mfn. favoured, obliged.

anugu

ind. behind the cows

anuguṇa

mf(ā-)n. having similar qualities, congenial to

anuguṇa

mf(ā-)n. according or suitable to

anuguṇa

m. natural peculiarity.

anuguṇam

ind. according to one's merits

anuguṇaya

Nom. P. -guṇayati-, to favour

ānuguṇika

mfn. (fr. anu-guṇa-), knowing or studying the anu-guṇa- (id est according to

a manual of the art of keeping within the bounds of one's faculties ?)

ānuguṇya

n. homogeneousness

anugupta

mfn. protected, sheltered, concealed.

anuha

m. Name of a son of vibhrātra- and father of brahma-datta-

anuhā

cl.3 A1. -jihīte-, to run after, catch

etc. ; to follow, join

anuhāraka

mf(ikā-)n. imitating.

mfn. imitating.

n. imitation

n. resemblance.

inheriting,

m. imitation

m. resemblance.

mfn. imitating

m. (an-) Name of a man, (gaRa anuśatikādi- q.v)

ānuhārati

mf. a descendant of anu-harat-

anuhārya

mfn. to be imitated

anuhārya

m. equals anv-ā-hārya-

anuhava

See anu-hve-.

anuhava

m. inviting, stirring up

anuhlāda

m. Name of a son of hiraṇya-kaśipu-

anuhoḍa

m. a cart (?), (gaRa anuśatikādi- q.v)

anuhoma

m. after-oblation,

anuhṛ

to imitate ; to resemble: A1. -harate-, to take after (one's parents).

anuhṛ

to carry behind,

anuhrāda

m. Name of a son of hiraṇya-kaśipu-

anuhuṃkṛ

to roar in imitation of.

anuhurch

to fall down after another

anuhve

to call again, call after, call back

: Intensive -johavīti-, to call repeatedly

anuja

mfn. born after, later, younger

anuja

m. a younger brother, a cadet

anuja

m. the plant trāyamāṇa-

anuja

n. the plant prapauṇḍarīka-

anujā

f. a younger sister

anujāgṛ

to watch as an attendant.

anujalp

to follow in talking ; A1. -jalpate-, to entertain by conversation.

anujan

cl.4 A1. -jāyate-, to follow in being born or produced or arising ; to take after (one's parents)

anujanam

ind. according to people, popularly.

anujanman

m. a younger brother, younger.

anujap

to follow or imitate in muttering.

anujāsutā

f. the son of a younger sister,

anujāta

mfn. after-born, later, younger

anujāta

mfn. taking after (one's parents)

anujāta

mfn. born again, regenerated by the sacred cord

anujāta

m. a younger brother

anujātā

f. a younger sister.

ānujāvara

mfn. (fr. anu-and jan-), posthumous ([

])

ānujāvara

mfn. common

anuji

to subdue: Desiderative -jigīṣate-, to be desirous of subduing.

anujighra

mfn. snuffling at

anujighra

See anu-ghrā-.

anujighṛkṣā

f. desire to show favour or kindness

anujighṛkṣā

f. intention to include

anujighṛkṣā

See anu-grah-.

anujīrṇa

mfn. grown old or decayed after or in consequence of

anujīv

to follow or imitate in living ; to live for any one ; to live by or upon something ; to live submissively under, be dependent on: ; Caus. -jīvayati-, to restore to life

anujīvin

mfn. living by or upon

anujīvin

mfn. dependent

anujīvin

m. a dependent, follower

anujīvin

m. Name of a crow

anujīvisātkṛta

mfn. made wholly subservient

anujīvya

mfn. to be followed in living.

anujjhat

mfn. not quitting.

anujjhita

mfn. undiminished, unimpaired, not left or lost.

anujñā

to permit, grant, allow, consent ; to excuse, forgive ; to authorize ; to allow one to depart, dismiss, bid farewell to ; to entreat ; to behave kindly: Caus. -jñāpayati-, to request, ask permission, ask for leave to depart, to take leave: Desiderative -jijñāsati- or -te-, to wish to allow or permit

anujñā

f. assent, assenting, permission

anujñā

f. leave to depart

anujñā

f. allowance made for faults

anujñā

f. an order or command.

anujñaiṣaṇā

f. asking permission, taking leave.

anujñākṣepa

m. (in rhetoric) an objection expressed by a feigned consent,

anujñāna

n. equals 2. anu-jñā-.

anujñāpaka

m. one who commands or enjoins.

anujñāpana

n. equals anu-jñapti-.

anujñāpana

taking leave,

anujñāpana

asking l,

, Scholiast or Commentator

anujñāprārthanā

f. asking permission, taking leave.

anujñapti

f. authorization, permission.

anujñāpya

mfn. to be allowed or permitted,

anujñāta

mfn. assented to, permitted, allowed

anujñāta

mfn. ordered, directed, instructed

anujñāta

mfn. accepted

anujñāta

mfn. authorized, honoured

anujñāta

mfn. allowed to depart, dismissed.

anujuṣ

to seek

; to devote one's self to, indulge in

anujyeṣṭha

mfn. next eldest

anujyeṣṭham

ind. after the eldest, according to seniority

anuka

mf(ā-)n. subordinate, dependent

anuka

mf(ā-)n. "being after", lustful

anukā

P. - kāyati- = abhidhatte-,

anukaccham

ind. along or on the shore,

anukāla

mfn. opportune, occasional

anukālam

ind. opportunely, occasionally.

anukalam

ind. by the sixteenth (part),

anukalpa

See anu-kḷp-.

anukalpa

m. permission to adopt an alternative or substitute (exempli gratia, 'for example' instead of kuśa- grass you may use Durba)

ānukalpika

mfn. (fr. anu-kalpa- q.v gaRa ukthādi-

), one who knows or studies the alternative rules

ānukalpika

mfn. obtained by alternative rules

ānukalpika

n. a substitute

anukalpita

mfn. followed by (instrumental case)

anukam

Caus. (imperfect tense -akāma-yata-) to desire (with infinitive mood)

anukāma

m. desire

anukāma

mfn. according to one's desire, agreeable

anukāmakṛt

mfn. fulfilling one's desire

anukāmam

ind. as desired, at pleasure

anukāmin

mfn. desirous

anukāmīna

mfn. one who acts as he pleases

anukamp

to sympathize with, compassionate: Causal P. (imperfect tense -akampayat-) idem or 'mfn. one who acts as he pleases '

anukampā

f. idem or 'mfn. pitiable.'

anukampaka

m. "sympathizer", Name of a king

anukampaka

mfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' sympathizing with, compassionating.

anukampana

n. sympathy, compassion.

anukampanīya

mfn. pitiable.

anukampāyin

mfn. condoling.

anukampin

mfn. sympathizing with.

anukampita

mfn. compassionated.

anukampitātman

mfn. having a compassionate spirit.

anukampya

mfn. pitiable, worthy of sympathy

anukampya

m. an ascetic

, expeditious (explained by tarasvin-,perhaps for tapasvin-)

anukampya

m. (also) a relative, friend,

anukanakhalam

ind. over kanakhala-,

anukaniyas

an-, asi-, as-, the next youngest

anukāṅkṣ

to long for, desire.

anukāṅkṣā

f. desire after.

anukāṅkṣin

mfn. longing for.

anukaṇṭhī

f. a necklace consisting of one string,

anukapolam

ind. along the cheek

anukara

mfn. imitating

anukara

m. an assistant

anukāra

m. imitation, resemblance.

anukāra

dancing, a dance,

anukaraṇa

n. the act of imitation or of following an example

anukaraṇa

n. resemblance, similarity.

anukārin

mfn. imitating, acting, mimicking.

anukarman

n. imitation

anukarman

n. a subsequent rite or ceremony

anukarman

m. Name of one of the viśvedevā-s

anukarṣa

See anu-kriṣ-.

anukarṣa

m. attraction, drawing

anukarṣa

m. invoking, summoning by incantation

anukarṣa

m. the bottom or the axle-tree of a carriage, grammatical attraction (including a subsequent in a preceding rule)

anukarṣa

m. lagging behind in a ceremony, delayed performance of a duty.

anukarṣan

m. the bottom of a carriage

anukarṣaṇa

n. equals anu-karṣa-.

anukarṣaṇa

a drinking vessel,

anukartṛ

mfn. an imitator, imitating

anukartṛ

m. a mimic, actor, performer.

anukārya

mfn. to be imitated or copied, to be acted (dramatically)

anukārya

n. subsequent business

anukath

to relate after (some one or something else) ; to repeat (what has been heard).

anukathana

n. orderly narration, discourse conversation.

anukathita

mfn. related after (something else)

anukathita

mfn. repeated.

ānukhaḍgya

mfn. (fr. anu-khaḍga-), being along the sword commentator or commentary on

anukhañja

m. Name of a country.

anukhyā

(perf. 2. dual number -cakhya-thuḥ-) to descry

anukhyāti

f. act of descrying or revealing

anukhyātṛ

m. a discoverer, revealer

anukīrṇa

mfn. crowded, crammed foll.

anukīrt

to relate after or in order ; to narrate.

anukīrtana

n. the act of narrating or proclaiming or publishing.

anukḷp

to follow in order

: Causal -kalpayati-, to cause to follow or imitate in order.

anukḷpti

f. (in vaiśeṣika- philosophy) agreement.

anukṛ

to do afterwards, to follow in doing ; to imitate, copy ; to equal ; to requite ; to adopt: Caus. -kārayati-, to cause to imitate.

anukṝ

(1. sg. -kir/āmi-) to scatter along

; to strew, fill with, crowd: Passive voice -kīryate-, to become crowded or filled.

anukrakaca

mfn. dentated like a saw, serrated.

anukram

to go on, go after, follow ; to go through in order, enumerate, supply with an abstract or index.

anukrama

m. succession, arrangement, order, method

anukrama

m. an index showing the successive contents of a book

anukramam

ind. in due order.

anukramaṇa

n. proceeding methodically or in order

anukramaṇa

n. following.

anukramaṇī

f. a table or chapter of contents, index to a collection of Vedic hymns (giving the first word of each hymn, the number of verses, name and family of poets, names of deities and metres).

anukramaṇikā

f. a table or chapter of contents, index to a collection of Vedic hymns (giving the first word of each hymn, the number of verses, name and family of poets, names of deities and metres).

anukrand

(perf. A1. -cakrad/e-) to shout or cry after one

anukrānta

mfn. gone over, read, or done in due order

anukrānta

mfn. enumerated, mentioned in the anukramaṇī-.

anukrī

mfn. ( krī-), bought subsequently (id est not early on the first day)

(see pari-krī-, śata-krī-.)

anukrīḍ

to play

anukriyā

f. imitation, doing anything in like manner or subsequently

anukriyā

f. a subsequent rite.

anukrośa

m. tenderness, compassion.

anukrośākṣepa

m. (in rhetoric) an objection based on compassion or sympathy,

anukrośin

mfn. compassionate, sympathetic,

anukṛp

-kṛpate-, to mourn for, long for

Nom. A1. -kṛpāyate-, to compassionate, condole with

anukṛś

Caus. -karśayati-, to emaciate.

anukṛṣ

to drag or draw after, attract: Caus. -karṣayati-, to cause to drag after, draw, attract ; to subject.

ānukṛṣṭa

mfn. (equals anu-kṛṣṭa- q.v) vArttika on

anukṛṣṭa

mfn. drawn after, attracted

anukṛṣṭa

mfn. included or implied in a subsequent rule.

anukṛt

(p. -kṛntat-) to go on destroying

anukṛta

mfn. imitated, made like.

anukṛti

f. imitation, a copy, compliance.

anukṛtya

mfn. fit to be imitated

anukruś

to shout at

: Caus. (ind.p. -krośya-) to join in lamenting, show sympathy for

anukṣaṇam

ind. momentarily, perpetually, every instant.

anukṣapam

ind. night after night

anukṣar

(3. plural -kṣāranti-;Imper. 2. sg. -kṣara-) to flow into or upon

anukṣattṛ

m. a doorkeeper's or charioteer's mate or attendant

anukṣetra

n. stipend given to temple-servants in Orissa (in commutation probably of the proceeds of an endowment).

anukṣi

-kṣiyati- (Imper. 2. sg. -kṣiya-) to settle along

anukṣi

Passive voice (p. -kṣīyamaṇa-) to decay or vanish gradually

anukta

mfn. ( vac-), unuttered, unsaid, unheard of, extraordinary.

anuktanimitta

n. a reason which is unuttered or unheard of or extraordinary

anuktanimitta

mfn. having such a reason.

anuktasiddhi

f. (in dramatic language) a veiled or indirect compliment,

anuktha

mfn. hymnless, not singing hymns

anuktha

mfn. not followed by an uktha-

anukti

f. the not speaking, improper speech.

anukūj

to follow in cooing or singing or groaning.

anukūla

mf(ā-)n. following the bank (kūla-) or slope or declivity

anukūla

mf(ā-)n. according to the current

anukūla

mf(ā-)n. favourable, agreeable

anukūla

mf(ā-)n. conformable to

anukūla

mf(ā-)n. friendly, kind, well-disposed

anukūla

m. a faithful or kind and obliging husband

anukūlā

f. Croton Polyandrum

anukūla

m. Name of a metre

anukūla

n. (in poetry) narrative of calamity leading finally to happiness.

anukūlanāyaka

m. a kind husband or lover.

anukūlatā

f. concord, good-will, favour, conformity, consent

anukūlatā

f. prosperity.

anukūlavāyu

m. a favourable wind.

anukūlaya

Nom. P. anukūlayati-, to act in a friendly way towards, favour.

ānukūlika

mfn. (fr. anu-kūla-), conformable, favourable, inclined to help

ānukūlya

n. conformity, suitableness

ānukūlya

n. favour, kindness, humouring

ānukūlya

n. agreement of minds, friendliness.

ānukūlyatas

ind. conformable to one's wishes,

anukuñcita

mfn. bent, made, crooked.

anukuṣ

to drag along

anulā

f. Name of a female arhat- or Buddhist saint

anulā

f. also of a queen of Ceylon.

anulabh

to grasp or take hold of (from behind)

: Desiderative -lipsate-, to intend to grasp

anulagna

mfn. attached to

anulagna

mfn. followed

anulagna

mfn. intent on, pursuing after.

anulakṣya

ind.p. conforming to.

anulamba

mfn. dependent, subordinate,

anulāpa

m. ( lap-), repetition of what has been said, tautology.

anulāsa

a peacock.

anulāsya

m. a peacock.

anulbaṇa

mf(ā-)n. not excessive, not prominent, keeping the regular measure

anulepa

m. unction, anointing, bedaubing.

anulepaka

mfn. anointing the body with unguents

anulepana

n. anointing the body

anulepana

n. unguent so used

anulepana

n. oily or emollient application.

anulepikā

f. (gaRa mahiṣy-ādi- q.v)

anulepin

mfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') smeared or anointed with,

anulī

to disappear after

anulip

P. to anoint, besmear ; A1. to anoint one's self after (bathing): Causal -lepayati-, to cause to be anointed.

anulipta

mfn. smeared, anointed.

anuliptāṅga

mfn. having the limbs anointed.

anuloma

mf(ā-)n. "with the hair or grain"(opposed to prati-loma- q.v), in a natural direction, in order, regular, successive

anuloma

mf(ā-)n. conformable

anulomā

f. a woman of a lower caste than that of the man's with whom she is connected

anuloma

m. plural "descendants of an anulomā-", mixed castes, (gaRa upakādi- q.v)

anulomaja

mfn. offspring of a mother inferior in caste to the father ([

]), (as the mūrdhāvasikta- of a Brahman father and kṣatriyā- mother, and so on with the ambaṣṭha- niṣāda- or pāraśava-, māhiṣya-, ugra-, karaṇa-.)

anulomakalpa

m. the thirty-fourth of the atharva-pariśiṣṭa-s.

anulomakṛṣṭa

mfn. ploughed in the regular direction (with the grain).

anulomam

ind. in regular order

anulomana

n. due regulation, sending or putting in the right direction

anulomana

n. carrying off by the right channels, purging

anulomapariṇītā

f. married in regular gradation.

anulomapratiloma

(said of a mythical sea and mountain),

anulomārtha

mfn. one who holds favourable views on any question.

anulomāya

mfn. having fortune favourable.

anulomaya

Nom. P. anu-lomayati-, to stroke or rub with the hair

; to send in the right direction or so as to carry off by the right channels

anulomaya

to make favourable,

ānulomika

mf(ī-)n. (fr. anu-loma-), in the direction of the hair, in natural or regular order, in due course

ānulomika

mf(ī-)n. conformable, favourable, benevolent

anulomikī

f. (with kṣānti-) resignation to natural consequences,

(confer, compare an-- utpattika-- dharma-- kṣānti-, and ghoṣā- nugā-,

ānulomya

mf(ī-)n. in the direction of the hair, produced in natural or direct order

ānulomya

n. a direction similar to that of hairs, natural or direct order

ānulomya

n. the state of being prosperous, doing well

ānulomya

n. bringing to one's right place

ānulomya

n. favourable direction, fit disposition, favourableness

ānulomya

n. regular series or succession

anulubh

Caus. -lobhayati-, to long for, desire

anumā

Intensive (imperfect tense amīmed /anu-) to roar or bleat towards

anumā

to be behind in measure, to be unable to equal

; to infer, conclude, guess, conjecture: Passive voice -mīyate-, to be inferred or supposed.

anumā

f. inference, a conclusion from given premises.

anumad

to rejoice over, to gladden, to praise

anumadhyama

mfn. next oldest to the middle

anumādya

(4, 5) mfn. to be praised in succession, to be granted with acclamation or praise

anumādya

See anu-mad-.

anumālinītīram

ind. on the bank of the mālinī-,

anuman

to approve, assent to, permit, grant: Causal P. -mānayati-, to ask for permission or leave, ask for (accusative)

; to honour.

anumāna

m. permission, consent

anumāna

n. the act of inferring or drawing a conclusion from given premises

anumāna

n. inference, consideration, reflection

anumāna

n. guess, conjecture

anumāna

n. one of the means of obtaining true knowledge (See pramāṇa-).

anumānacintāmaṇi

m. works on anumāna-.

anumānakhaṇḍa

n. works on anumāna-.

anumānamaṇidīdhiti

f. a similar work written by raghunātha-.

anumanana

n. assenting

anumānaprakāśa

m. works on anumāna-.

ānumānika

mf(ī-)n. (fr. anumāna-), relating to a conclusion, derived from inference, subject to inference, inferable, inferred

ānumānika

mf(ī-)n. making conclusions

ānumānikatva

n. the state of being inferable

anumānokti

f. inferential argument, reasoning.

anumantavya

mfn. to be consented to or acknowledged,

anumantṛ

mfn. consenting to, permitting

anumantr

to accompany with or consecrate by magic formulas ; to dismiss with a blessing.

anumantraṇa

n. consecration by hymns and prayers.

anumantraṇamantra

m. a hymn used in consecrating.

anumantrita

mfn. so consecrated.

anumanyamāna

mfn. minding, assenting.

anumāpaka

mf(ikā-)n. causing an inference (as an effect).

anumaraṇa

See anu-mṛ-.

anumaraṇa

n. following in death

anumaraṇa

n. post-cremation or concremation of a widow

anumaraṇa

n. the burning of a widow with (her husband's corpse or with part of his dress when his body is not on the spot; see saha-maraṇa-).

anumārg

to search through,

anumārga

m. following, seeking (eṇa-, with genitive case ="after"),

anumārgāgata

mfn. met half-way,

anumariṣyat

mfn. about to follow in death.

anumarśam

ind. so as to seize or take hold of

anumaru

m. (used in the plural) a country next to a desert

anumāṣam

ind. like a kidney bean, (gaRa parimukhādi- q.v)

ānumāṣya

mfn. (fr. anu-māṣa-), belonging or conformable to kidney-beans commentator or commentary on

ānumata

mf(ī-)n. belonging to the goddess anu-mati- (q.v)

anumata

mfn. approved, assented to, permitted, allowed, agreeable, pleasant

anumata

mfn. loved, beloved

anumata

mfn. concurred with, being of one opinion

anumata

n. consent, permission, approbation

anumatakarmakārin

mfn. doing what is allowed. acting according to an agreement.

anumatavajra

mfn. one who has received the thunderbolt by consent (?),

anumate

ind. with consent of.

anumati

f. assent, permission, approbation

anumati

f. personified as a goddess

etc.

anumati

f. the fifteenth day of the moon's age (on which it rises one digit less than full, when the gods or manes receive oblations with favour)

anumati

f. also personified as a goddess

, oblation made to this goddess.

anumatipattra

n. (in law) a deed expressing assent.

anumātṛ

mfn. drawing inferences,

, Scholiast or Commentator

anumeya

mfn. to be measured

anumeya

mfn. inferable, to be inferred, proved or conjectured.

anumid

-medyati-, to become fat after another

anumimāna

mfn. parasmE-pada A1. concluding, inferring.

anumita

mfn. inferred, conjectured.

anumiti

f. conclusion from given premises.

anumīyamāna

mfn. Passive voice parasmE-pada being inferred.

anumlocā

([

]) f. Name of an apsaras-.

anumlocantī

([

]) ([

]) f. Name of an apsaras-.

anumluc

(only used for the etymol. of anu-ml/ocantī-,below), to rise from the resting-place (?)

anumoda

m. a subsequent pleasure, the feeling of pleasure from sympathy.

anumodaka

mf(ikā-)n. assenting, showing sympathetic joy.

anumodana

n. pleasing, causing pleasure, applauding

anumodana

n. assent, acceptance

anumodana

n. sympathetic joy.

anumodin

mfn. causing pleasure to (genitive case),

anumodita

mfn. pleased, delighted, applauded

anumodita

mfn. agreeable, acceptable.

anumṛ

to follow in death

anumṛgya

mfn. ( mṛg-), to be sought after

anumṛgyadāśu

mfn. granting all that is sought.

anumṛj

to rub lengthways for polishing or cleaning

etc. Intensive participle -m/armṛjāna-, stretching (the arms) repeatedly towards

anumroka

see mrokā- numroka- (parasmE-pada 837).

anumṛś

to grasp, seize

etc. ; to consider, think of, reflect: Caus. -marśayati-, to touch or take hold of for the sake of examining

anumṛt

mfn. dying after, following in death,

anumṛtā

f. the woman who burns with a part of her husband's dress.

anumud

to join in rejoicing

; to sympathize with, to rejoice ; to allow with pleasure, express approval, applaud, permit: Caus. -modayati-, to express approval, permit.

anumuh

to feel distressed at, to be troubled about or after another

anunad

to sound towards (accusative): Causal P. -nādayati-, to make resonant or musical.

anunāda

m. sound, vibration

anunāda

m. reverberation, echo.

anunadi

ind. along the river,

anunādin

mfn. resounding, echoing, resonant.

anunādita

mfn. made to resound.

anunam

A1. to incline to

: Causal P. -nāmayati-, to cause to bow

anunand

to enjoy.

anunāsika

mfn. nasal, uttered through the nose (as one of the five nasal consonants, or a vowel, or the three semivowels y-, v-, l-,under certain circumstances;in the case of vowels and semivowels, the mark ँ is used to denote this nasalization)

anunāsika

mfn. the nasal mark ँ

anunāsika

n. a nasal twang

anunāsika

n. speaking through the nose (a fault in pronunciation).

anunāsikādi

m. a compound letter commencing with a nasal.

anunāsikalopa

m. dropping of a nasal sound or letter.

anunāsikānta

m. a radical ending in a nasal.

anunāsikatva

n. nasality.

anunāsikopadha

mfn. having a nasal penultimate

anunāsikopadha

mfn. succeeding a syllable with a nasal sound.

ānunāsikya

n. (fr. anu-nāsika-), nasality (of a sound)

ānunāśya

mfn. (fr. anu-nāśa-), belonging or conformable to destruction

anunaya

m. conciliation, salutation, courtesy, civility, showing respect or adoration to a guest or a deity

anunaya

m. humble entreaty or supplication, reverential deportment

anunaya

m. regulation of conduct, discipline, tuition

anunaya

mfn. conciliatory, kind

anunāyaka

mf(ikā-)n. submissive, humble.

anunayam

ind. fitly becomingly.

anunayamāna

mfn. conciliating, honouring.

anunayāmantrana

n. conciliatory address.

anunayapratighaprahāṇa

n. abandoning the obstacles to conciliatory behaviour

anunāyikā

f. a female character subordinate to a nāyikā- or leading female character in a drama.

anunayin

mfn. courteous, supplicating.

anuneya

mfn. to be conciliated

anunī

(subjunctive 2. sg. -nayas-; Aorist subjunctive 2. sg. -neṣi-,2 plural -neṣathā-) to bring near, lead to

; to induce, win over, conciliate, pacify, supplicate.

anunidhānam

ind. according to position, in right order,

anunikram

-krāmati- (subjunctive -krāmāt-) to follow in the steps

anunikṣ

to pierce along

anuninīṣā

f. the wish to propitiate,

anuninīṣu

mfn. desirous of conciliating.

anunipad

-padyate-, to lie down by the side of

anunirdah

(Imper. 2. sg. -daha) to burn down in succession

anunirdeśa

m. description or relation following a previous model.

anunirjihāna

mfn. (pr.p. A1.2. hā-), proceeding out of

anunirvā

-vāti-, to become extinct, go out after.

anunirvap

to take out from for scattering or sharing subsequently

anunirvāpya

mfn. to be taken out and shared subsequently

anunirvāpyā

f. Name of a ceremony,

anuniśam

(ind.p. -śamya-) to hear, perceive

; to consider

anuniśam

ind. every night

anuniśītham

ind. at mid night

anunīta

mfn. disciplined, taught

anunīta

mfn. obtained

anunīta

mfn. respected

anunīta

mfn. pleased, pacified

anunīta

mfn. humbly entreated.

anunīti

f. conciliation, courtesy, supplication.

anunitud

(imperfect tense 3. plural -atudan-) to wound with a stab, goad,

anunivṛj

(imperfect tense 3. sg. -vṛṇak-) to plunge into (locative case)

anunivṛt

Caus. -vartayati-, to bring back

anuniyuj

to attach to, place under the authority of

anunmāda

m. not being mad, soberness

anunmāda

mfn. equals an-unmatta-.

anunmadita

mfn. idem or 'mfn. not mad, sane, sober, not wild.'

anunmatta

mfn. not mad, sane, sober, not wild.

anunnata

mfn. not elevated, not lifted up.

anunnatagātra

mfn. having limbs that are not too stout, prominent or protuberant

anunnatānata

mfn. not raised nor lowered, level.

anunṛt

to dance after (accusative)

; to dance before (accusative)

anunu

Intensive (imperfect tense 3 plural -nonavur-; pr. p. Nominal verb plural m. -n/onuvatas-) to follow with acclamations of praise

anupā

to drink after or there upon, follow in drinking, drink at ; Caus. (Potential -pāy/ayet-) to cause to drink afterwards

anupā

Causal P. A1. -pālayati-, te-, to preserve, keep, cherish ; to wait for, expect.

anupabādha

mf(/ā-)n. unobstructed

anupabhujyamāna

mfn. not being enjoyed.

anupabhukta

mfn. unenjoyed, unpossessed.

anupac

to make ripe by degrees

: Passive voice to become ripe by degrees

anupacarita

mfn. not transferred, Sa1m2khyas., Scholiast or Commentator

anupad

to follow, attend, be fond of ; to enter ; to enter upon ; to notice, understand ; to handle.

anupad

mfn. coming to pass

anupada

mfn. following closely

anupada

m. Name of a man or tribe, (gaRa upakādi- q.v)

anupada

n. a chorus, refrain, burden of a song or words sung again after regular intervals

anupada

n. Name of an upāṅga- belonging to the sāma-veda-

anupada

n. word for word

anupada

n. on the heels of, close behind or after.

anupadam

ind. step by step

anupādāna

n. not mentioning, omission, ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding

anupadasta

([

]) or an-upadasya- ([

]) or /an-upadasyat- ([

]) or /an-upadasvat- ([

]) or /an upadāsuka- ([

]) mfn. not drying up, not decaying.

anupadasūtra

n. a commentary explaining the text (of a brāhmaṇa-) word for word.

anupadavī

f. a road followed after another

anupāde

ind. behind (a person's feet),

anupadeṣṭavya

mfn. not to be commended,

anupadeṣṭṛ

m. one who does not teach.

anupadha

m. "having no penultimate", a letter or syllable (as a sibilant or h-) not preceded by another.

anupādhirāmaṇīya

see 1. upā- dhi- (parasmE-pada 213).

anupadhiśeṣa

mfn. in whom there is no longer a condition of individuality

anupadhmāta

mfn. not blown upon,

ānupadika

mfn. (fr. anu-pada-), following, pursuing, tracking

ānupadika

mfn. knowing or studying the anupada- (q.v) song

anupadin

m. a searcher, an inquirer, one who follows or seeks for

anupadīnā

f. a boot, buskin

anupadiṣṭa

mfn. untaught, uninstructed.

ānupadya

mfn. being behind any one's steps

anupagatajara

mfn. not impaired by old age or infirmity,

anupaghātārjita

mfn. acquired without detriment (to the paternal estate).

anupaghnat

mfn. not detrimental

anupaghnat

mfn. not touching

anupagītam

ind. so that no other person accompanies in singing

anupagṛhīta

mfn. unchanged,

anupahata

mfn. unimpaired, unvitiated

anupahata

mfn. not rendered impure.

anupahatakarṇendriyatā

f. having the organ of hearing uninjured (one of the 80 minor marks 0f a buddha-),

anupahatakruṣṭa

mfn. whose organs of hearing are unimpaired

anupahita

mfn. unconditioned,

anupahūta

mfn. not called upon or invited

anupahūta

mfn. not accompanied with invitations

anupahūyamāna

mfn. not being invited

anupajīvanīya

mfn. yielding no livelihood, (Compar. -tara-,"yielding no livelihood at all")

anupajīvanīya

mfn. having no livelihood

anupakārin

mfn. not assisting, disobliging, ungrateful, not making a return for benefits received

anupakārin

mfn. unserviceable, useless.

anupākhya

mfn. not clearly discernible

anupakiñca

mfn. "having nothing defective", not hoarse, not faltering (voice),

anupakṛta

mfn. unassisted.

anupākṛta

mfn. not rendered fit for sacrificial purposes

anupākṛtamāṃsa

n. flesh of an animal not prepared for sacrifice.

anupākruṣṭa

mfn. irreproachable,

anupakṣita

mfn. uninjured, undecaying

anupāl

See 2. anu-- 2. pā-.

anupalabdha

mfn. unobtained, unperceived, unascertained.

anupalabdhi

f. non-perception, non-recognition.

anupalabdhisama

mf(ā-) trying to establish a fact (exempli gratia, 'for example' the reality and eternity of sound) from the impossibility of perceiving the non perception of it, sophistical argument

anupalābha

m. not catching

anupalabhyamāna

mfn. not being perceived

anupalakṣita

mfn. untraced, unperceived, unmarked, indiscriminated.

anupalakṣya

mfn. not to be traced, imperceptible.

anupalakṣyavartman

mfn. having ways that cannot be traced.

anupalāla

m. Name of a demon dangerous to children

anupalambha

m. non-perception.

anupalambhana

n. want of apprehension or knowledge.

anupālana

n. preserving, keeping up.

anupālayat

mfn. keeping, maintaining.

anupalīḍha

mfn. unlicked,

anupālin

mfn. preserving, keeping up.

anupalipta

m. Name (also title or epithet) of a tathāgata-,

anupālu

n. Name of a plant, wild Calladium (?).

anupālya

mfn. to be guarded or kept or maintained (as truth),

anupama

mf(ā-)n. incomparable, matchless

anupama

mf(ā-)n. excellent, best

anupamā

f. the female elephant of the south-east or of the north-east.

anupamamati

m. Name of a contemporary of śākya-muni-.

anupamardana

n. non-demolition or refutation of a charge.

anupameya

mfn. incomparable.

anupamita

mfn. uncompared, matchless.

anupāna

n. a fluid vehicle in medicine

anupāna

n. drink taken with or after medicine

anupāna

n. drink after eating

anupāna

n. drink to be had near at hand, (Comm. on)

anupāna

See 1. anu-- 1. pā-.

anupanāha

m. want of close attachment or adherence (?)

anupanāha

m. not a perpetual enmity,

anupanata

mfn. not occurred,

, Scholiast or Commentator

anupānatka

mfn. shoeless

anupānīya

n. drink to be had near at hand commentator or commentary on

anupānīya

mfn. fit to be drunk after

anupānīya

mfn. serving as a liquid vehicle of medicine.

anupanyāsa

m. failure of proof or determination, uncertainty, doubt.

anupanyasta

mfn. not laid down clearly, not established

anupapādaka

m. plural "having no material parent", Name of a class of buddha-s, called dhyānibuddha-s.

anupapanna

mfn. not done, unaccomplished, uneffected

anupapanna

mfn. unproved

anupapanna

mfn. irrelevant, inconclusive, inapplicable

anupapanna

mfn. impossible

anupapanna

mfn. inadequately supported.

anupapatti

f. non-accomplishment

anupapatti

f. failure of proof

anupapatti

f. inconclusive argumentation

anupapatti

f. irrelevancy, inapplicability

anupapatti

f. insufficiency of means, adversity.

anupaplava

mfn. free from disaster or overwhelming calamity.

anupapluta

mfn. not overwhelmed (with calamity).

anuparābhū

to spoil or destroy after another

: Causal -bhāvayati- idem or 'to fly or hasten by the side of another '

anuparāga

mfn. free from passion,

anuparāgam

to follow one who is escaping

anuparāmṛś

to seize

anuparāpat

to fly or hasten by the side of another

anuparāsru

(said of a leaky vessel) to flow with water subsequently

anuparata

mfn. uninterrupted, not stopped.

anupare

( -parā-i-), (Imper. 2. sg. -p/arehi-; imperfect tense -p/araīt-) to follow in walking off

anuparī

( i-), -pary-eti- (3. plural -p/ari-yanti-

,irreg. -paryanti-

), to follow in going round, to make the round of.

anuparicāram

ind. equals anuparikr/āmam-

anuparidhi

ind. along or at the three paridhi-s of the sacrificial fire

anuparigā

to make the round of, traverse

anuparigrah

to grasp all round, surround,

anuparigrah

to favour, befriend,

anuparihāram

ind. surrounding

anuparikṝ

to scatter alongside, to bestrew

anuparikram

to walk round in order, to make the circuit of, visit in a regular round.

anuparikrāmam

ind. while walking round in order

anuparikramaṇa

n. walking round in order

anuparimṛj

(Causal ind.p. - mārjya-), to wipe all round,

anupariṇī

( nī-) to lead or carry about

anuparipāṭikrama

m. regular order

anupariplu

(Causal - plāvayati-), to wash,

anuparisic

to pour round,

anupariśrit

ind. along or at the surrounding fence

anuparisru

to run after

anuparivārita

mfn. surrounded, ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding

anuparivṛt

to return, be repeated

anupariyā

to pass through in order

anuparodha

m. not prejudicing or injuring,

anuparodhatas

(with genitive case ="without prejudice to"),

anupārśva

mfn. along or by the side

anupārśva

mfn. lateral.

anuparvata

m. a promontory, headland,

anuparyādhā

(Potential -dadhyāt-) to place round in order

anuparyāgā

(Aorist 3. plural -āgur-) to revolve, return to

anuparyāvṛt

to follow in going off, to follow

anuparye

( -ā-i-), -pary-aiti-, to make the whole round of

anuparyukṣ

to sprinkle round

anupaś

P. A1. -paśyati-, te-, to look at, perceive, notice, discover

etc. ; to consider, reflect upon (accusative)

etc. ; to look upon as, take as

; (perf. A1. parasmE-pada -paspaśān/a-) to show (as the path)

(

)

anupāsana

n. want of attention to.

anupaśānta

mfn. not calm

anupaśānta

m. Name of a Buddhist mendicant.

anupasarga

m. a word that is not an upasarga- q.v , or destitute of one

anupasarga

m. that which needs no additions (as a divine being)

anupaśaya

m. any aggravating circumstance (in a disease).

anupasecana

mfn. having nothing that moistens (exempli gratia, 'for example' no sauce)

anupāsita

mfn. not attended to, neglected.

anupaskṛta

mfn. unfinished, unpolished

mfn. not cooked

mfn. genuine

mfn. blameless

mfn. unrequited.

n. not coming near

n. not being at hand, absence.

anupasthāpana

n. not placing near, not producing, not offering

anupasthāpana

n. not having ready or at hand.

anupasthāpayat

mfn. not presenting, not having at hand.

anupasthāpita

mfn. not placed near, not ready, not at hand, not offered or produced.

anupasthāyin

mfn. absent, distant.

anupasthita

mfn. not come near, not present, not at hand

anupasthita

mfn. not complete

anupasthita

n. a word not upasthita- q.v

anupasthiti

f. absence, not being at hand

anupasthiti

f. incompleteness

anupastīrṇaśāyin

mfn. lying upon the bare ground,

anupaśya

mfn. perceiving, seeing

anupat

to pass by (accusative) flying

; to fly after, run after, go after, follow: Caus. (Imper. 2. sg. -pātaya-) to fly along

; to throw (a person) down together with oneself

anupāta

See sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order

anupāṭa

m. splitting or cutting down (a kind of torture),

anupāta

m. falling subsequently upon, alighting or descending upon in succession

anupāta

m. following

anupāta

m. going, proceeding in order, or as a consequence

anupāta

m. a degree of latitude opposite to one given, the Antaeci (?)

anupāta

m. proportion (in arithmetic)

anupāta

m. arithmetical progression, rule of three.

anupātaka

n. a crime similar to a mahāpātaka- q.v (falsehood, fraud, theft, adultery, etc.)

anupātam

ind. in regular succession.

anupatana

n. falling on or upon

anupatana

n. following

anupatana

n. (in mathem.) proportion.

anupaṭh

to say after, read through, repeat

anupatha

mfn. following the road

anupatha

m. a road followed after another

anupatha

m. a servant

anupatham

ind. along the road.

anupaṭhita

mfn. read through (aloud), recited.

anupaṭhitin

m. (one who has read through or recited) , proficient, (gaRa iṣṭādi- q.v)

ānupathya

mfn. (fr. anu-patha-), along the way commentator or commentary on

anupati

ind. after the husband

anupātin

mfn. following as a consequence or result.

anupatita

mfn. fallen, descended

anupatita

mfn. followed.

anupātta

mfn. not caught (as fire),

anupātta

not mentioned explicitly,

anupavītin

m. one uninvested with the sacred thread.

anupāvṛtta

m. plural Name of a people

anupāya

m. bad means (ena-,"to no purpose"),

anupāya

mfn. (a Stobha) in which the chorus of chanting priests does not join,

(Scholiast or Commentator)

anupayat

mfn. not going to (a wife varia lectio yāt-),

anupāyin

mfn. not using means or expedients.

anupayoga

m. unserviceableness, uselessness.

anupayogin

mfn. unsuitable, useless.

anupayukta

mfn. unsuited, unsuitable, improper

anupayukta

mfn. useless, unserviceable

anupeta

([

]) or anupeta-pūrva- ([

]), mfn. not yet entered at a teacher's (for instruction).

anupeta

not affected by, devoid of (compound),

anupeya

mfn. not to be married,

anupeyamāna

mfn. not being approached (sexually),

anupiṇḍam

ind. at every piṇḍa- (quod vide),

anupiś

(perf. -pipeśa-) to fasten along

anupiṣ

(ind.p. -piṣya-) to strike against, to touch

anuplava

m. a companion or follower

anuplu

to float (as clouds) after ; to follow.

anupopta

mfn. not filled up or covered by heaping up,

anupoṣaṇa

n. not fasting.

anupṝ

Caus. (Imper. -pūrayatu-) to fill

anuprabhā

to shine upon

anuprabhūṣ

(p. -bh/ūṣat-) to serve, attend, offer

anuprabhūta

mfn. passing through, penetrating, (/anu pr/a-bhuta-)

anuprabhūta

mfn. penetrated

anuprach

(with accusative of the person and thing) , to ask, to inquire after.

anupradā

to surrender, make over

; to additions

anupradāna

n. a gift, donation

anupradāna

n. addition, increase

anupradātṛ

m. an increaser,

anupradhāv

to rush after

: Caus. (perf. -dhāvay/āṃ cakāra-) to drive after

anupradhāvita

mfn. hurried, eager

anupraharaṇa

n. throwing into the fire

anuprahita

mfn. ( hi-), sent after

anuprahita

shot off,

anuprahṛ

to throw into the fire

anuprahṛtabhājana

n. the substitute for what is thrown into the fire,

anuprahṛtya

mfn. to be thrown into the fire, ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding

anupraiṣa

m. a subsequent invitation

anuprajan

to be born after ; (with prajām-) to propagate again and again

: Causal -janayati-, to cause to be born subsequently.

anuprajñā

(pr. p. -jān/at-) to track, trace, discover

anuprajñāna

n. tracking, tracing.

anuprakamp

Caus. (Potential -kampayet-,3. plural yeyur-) to follow in shaking or agitating

anupramāṇa

mfn. having a suitable size or length.

anupramuc

to let loose or go successively

anupramud

Caus. -modayati-, to consent

anuprāṇ

( an-) cl.2 P. -prāṇiti-, to breathe after

anupraṇud

( nud-) to push away from one's self ; to frighten away, put to flight.

anuprāp

( āp-) to come or go up to, reach, attain ; to arrive ; to get ; to get back ; to get by imitating.

anuprapā

P. (3. plural -pibanti-) to drink one after the other

; A1. (3. plural -pipate-[sic] and -pibate-) to drink after another (accusative)

anuprapad

to enter or approach or arrive after ; to follow, act in conformance to.

anuprapādam

ind. going in succession

anuprapanna

mfn. following after, conformed to.

anuprapat

(Aorist 3. pl. -paptan-) to fly towards

anuprapātam

ind. going in succession

anuprapattavya

n. (impersonal or used impersonally) it is to be followed or conformed to,

anuprāpta

mfn. arrived, returned

anuprāpta

mfn. obtained

anuprāpta

mfn. having reached, having got.

anupraroha

mfn. coming up or growing in accordance with.

anupraruh

to grow in accordance with

anuprās

(2 as-), -pr/āsyati-, to throw after

anuprāsa

m. alliteration, repetition of similar letters, syllables, and words

anuprasad

to be content or satisfied with (accusative)

anuprasakta

mfn. strongly attached

anuprasakti

f. close connection with.

anuprasañj

to adhere to, fasten

anuprasarpaka

creeping after (

, Scholiast or Commentator)

anuprasarpin

(

), mfn. creeping after

anupraśna

See sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order

anupraśna

m. a subsequent question (having reference to what has been previously said by the teacher).

anuprasṛ

Causal (imperfect tense 3. plural -prāsārayanta-) to extend over

: Intensive participle -s/arsrāṇa-, moving along (accusative)

anuprasṛp

to creep towards or after

: Causal (optative 3. plural -sarpayeyuḥ-) to cause to pass round (accusative),

anuprasṛptin

mfn. one who has crept after,

anuprasthā

to start after another: Caus. -sthāpayati-, to cause to follow

anuprastha

mfn. latitudinal

anuprastha

mfn. according to width, following the breadth or latitude.

anupraṣṭṛ

mfn. (from anu-- prach-) inquiring after all things, desirous of knowledge,

anuprastṛ

to scatter along or upon

anupraśuc

-śocate-, to regret or mourn deeply

anuprasūta

mfn. (4. su-), created afterwards

anuprath

A1. -prathate-, to extend or spread along (accusative)

; to praise, (Comm. on)

anupratidhā

to offer after another (accusative)

(Passive voice -dhīyate-).

anupratikrāmam

ind. ( kram-), returning

anupratiṣṭhā

( sthā-) to follow in getting a firm footing or in prospering

: Desiderative -tiṣṭhāsati-, to wish to get a firm footing after

anupravacana

n. study of the veda- with a teacher.

anupravacanādi

a gaRa of

anupravacanīya

mfn. belonging to, or necessary for anupravacana-

anupravad

to repeat another's words

; to speak of

: Causal -vādayati-, to cause to resound, to play (an instrument)

anupravah

to drag (or carry) about ; to go or get forward

anupravap

(Atmane-pada - vapate-), to shave or be shaved in turn,

anupravartana

n. urging to (locative case),

anupravartita

mfn. set going again,

anupraveśa

m. entrance into

anupraveśa

m. imitation

anupraveśana

n. ([ gaṇa- anupravacanādi- q.v ]) entrance into

anupraveśana

n. imitation

anupraveśanīya

mfn. connected with entering, (gaRa anupravacanādi- q.v)

anupraviś

to follow in entering, enter ; to attack.

anupraviś

(Causal - veśayati-), to send home, ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding

anupraviśya

ind.p. having entered into.

anupravraj

to follow into exile

anupravraj

to become an ascetic after, ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding

anupravrajana

n. the becoming an ascetic after (another), ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding

anupravṛj

-pr/a-vṛṇakti-, to send or throw after

anupravṛt

(imperfect tense -pr/āvartata-; perf. -vāvṛte-) to proceed along or after

anupravṛtta

mfn. following after (accusative)

anupravṛtti

f. (accusative with kṛ-,"to pay attention to"), ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding

anuprayā

to follow after

; to start after, accompany.

anuprayam

to offer

anuprayoga

m. additional use.

anuprayoktavya

mfn. to be joined or employed in addition or after.

anuprayuj

to employ after, add after (ablative)

to join, follow

anuprayujyamāna

mfn. being employed in addition or after or afterwards.

anupre

( i-) cl.2 P. -praiti-, to follow

etc. ; to follow in death

; to seek after

anuprekṣ

( īkṣ-) to follow with the eyes.

anupreṣ

( iṣ-), Causal P. -preṣayati- to send forth after.

anupreṣaṇa

n. sending after,

, Scholiast or Commentator

anupriya

mfn. liked, dear,

anupṛkta

mfn. mixed with

anuproh

(1 ūh-), to insert

anupṛṣṭhya

mf(ā-)n. (held or extended) lengthwise

anupta

mfn. (2. vap-), unsown (as seed).

anuptasasya

mfn. fallow, meadow (ground, etc.)

anuptrima

mfn. grown without being sown

anupū

A1. (/anu-pavate-) to purify in passing along

anupūraṇa

n. subsequent filling, Sa1m2khyas., Scholiast or Commentator

anupuruṣa

m. the before mentioned man

, a follower

ānupūrva

nf(ī-). (fr. anu-pūrva-), order, series, succession

etc.

ānupūrva

n. (in law) direct order of the castes

ānupūrva

n. (generally only instrumental case -eṇa-and -yā-,one after the other, in due order.)

anupūrva

mf(ā-)n. regular, orderly, in successive order from the preceding

anupūrvadaṃṣṭra

mfn. having regular hair, regularly shaped limbs, regular teeth, a regularly shaped navel, regular lines in the hands (all these are epithets given to buddha-, some of them also to mahāvīra-)

and

anupūrvadaṃṣṭratā

f. having regular eye teeth (idem or 'mfn. having regular hair, regularly shaped limbs, regular teeth, a regularly shaped navel, regular lines in the hands (all these are epithets given to buddha-, some of them also to mahāvīra-) and '), ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding

anupūrvagātra

and

anupūrvagātratā

f. having regular members (one of the 80 minor marks of a buddha-),

anupūrvaja

mfn. descended in a regular line

anupūrvakeśa

and

anupūrvam

ind. in regular order, from the first

anupūrvanābhi

and

anupūrvāṅgulitā

f. having regular fingers (idem or 'ind. equals anu-pūrv/am-.'), ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding

anupūrvapāṇilekha

and

anupūrvaśas

ind. equals anu-pūrv/am-.

anupūrvavatsā

(anupūrv/a--) f. a cow which calves regularly

anupūrveṇa

ind. in regular order or succession, from the first, from the beginning, from above downwards.

anupūrveṇa

gradually, by degrees,

ānupūrvya

n. order, succession

ānupūrvya

n. (generally ablative -āt-,in due order.)

anupūrvya

mfn. regular, orderly

anupuṣ

to go on prospering

; to prosper after another (accusative)

anupuṣpa

m. a kind of reed (Saccharum Sara Roxb.)

anurāddha

mfn. effected, accomplished

anurāddha

mfn. obtained

anurādh

to carry to an end ; to finish with (genitive case)

anurādha

mfn. See anūrādh/a-

anurādha

mfn. born under the asterism anurādhā-

anurādha

m. Name of a Buddhist

anurādha

m. plural the seventeenth of the twenty-eight nakṣatra-s or lunar mansions (a constellation described as a line of oblations).

anurādhā

([

etc.]) f. the seventeenth of the twenty-eight nakṣatra-s or lunar mansions (a constellation described as a line of oblations).

anurādhagrāma

m. the ancient capital of Ceylon founded by the above-named anurādha-.

anurādhapura

n. the ancient capital of Ceylon founded by the above-named anurādha-.

anurāga

m. attachment, affection, love, passion

anurāga

m. red colour

anurāgavat

mfn. affectionate, attached, in love with

anurāgavat

mfn. red

anurāgeṅgita

n. gesture expressive of passion.

anurāgin

mfn. impassioned, attached

anurāgin

mfn. causing love

anurāgiṇī

f. personification of a musical note.

anuragitā

f. the state of being in love with.

anurahasam

ind. in secret, apart

ānurāhati

mf. a descendant of anu-rahat-

(see ānuhārati-).

anurāj

to be brilliant or shine in accordance with (said of corresponding metres)

anurajju

ind. along the rope

anurakṣ

to guard while following

; to guard, take care of.

anurakṣaṇa

n. the act of guarding.

anurakta

mfn. fond of, attached, pleased

anurakta

mfn. beloved.

anuraktaloka

m. a person to whom every one is attached.

anuraktapraja

mfn. beloved by his subjects.

ānurakti

f. (equals anu-rakti- q.v), passion, affection

anurakti

f. affection, love, devotion.

anuram

P. -ramati-, to cease to go or continue, stop

: A1. to be fond of

anuraṇana

n. sounding conformably to, echoing

anurañj

to become red in imitation of ; to be attached or devoted: Causal P. -rañjayati-, to win, conciliate, gratify.

anurañjaka

mf(ikā-)n. attaching, conciliating.

anurañjana

n. the act of attaching or conciliating affection, love

anurañjana

n. pleasing.

anurañjita

mfn. conciliated, delighted.

anuras

to answer to a cry or to a sound.

anurasa

m. (in poetry) a subordinate feeling or passion

anurasa

m. a secondary flavour (as a little sweetness in a sour fruit, etc.)

anurasita

n. echo

anurata

mfn. fond of, attached to.

anuratha

m. Name of a son of kuruvatsa- and father of puruhotra-

anuratham

ind. behind the carriage

anurathyā

f. a path along the margin of a road, side road

anurati

f. love, affection

anurati

f. attachment.

anurātram

ind. in the night

anurevatī

f. Name of a plant.

anurī

cl.4 A1. -rīyate-, to flow after

; (parasmE-pada -r/īyamāṇa-)

anuric

Passive voice -ricyate-, to be emptied after

anuriṣ

cl.4 P. -riṣyati-, to be injured after (accusative)

anurodha

m. obliging or fulfilling the wishes (of any one)

anurodha

m. obligingness, compliance

anurodha

m. consideration, respect

anurodha

m. reference or bearing of a rule.

anurodhana

n. obliging or fulfilling the wishes of

anurodhana

n. means for winning the affection of.

anurodhin

mfn. complying with, compliant, obliging, having respect or regard to.

anurodhitā

f. the state of being so

anuroha

m. mounting or growing up to

ānurohati

mf. a descendant of anu-rohat- (according to

varia lectio for hārati- q.v)

ānurohiṇa

mf(ī-)n. belonging to the constellation rohiṇī-.

anuru

to imitate the cry or answer to the cry of (accusative)

anuru

mf(us-or vī-)n. not great.

anuruc

Causal P. -rocayati-, to choose, prefer

anurud

to lament, bewail.

anuruddha

mfn. checked, opposed

anuruddha

mfn. soothed, pacified

anuruddha

m. Name of a cousin of śākyamuni-.

anurudh

to bar (as a way)

; to surround, confine, overcome

etc. ; cl.4 A1. -rudhyate- or Epic P. -rudhyati- (2. sg. -rudhyase-

), to adhere to, be fond of, love ; to coax, soothe, entreat.

anurudh

mfn. adhering to, loving

(see anū-r/udh-.)

anuruh

P. to ascend, mount

; A1. to grow

anuruhā

f. a grass (Cyperus Pertenius).

anurūpa

mfn. following the form, conformable, corresponding, like, fit, suitable

anurūpa

mfn. adapted to, according to

anurūpa

m. the Antistrophe which has the same metre as the stotriya- or Strophe

anurūpa

m. the second of three verses recited together

anurūpa

n. conformity, suitability

anurūpaceṣṭa

mfn. endeavouring to act becomingly.

anurūpam

ind. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' conformably, according.

anurūpatas

ind. conformably.

anurūpeṇa

ind. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' conformably, according.

ānurūpya

n. (fr. anu-rūpa-), conformity, suitableness

anuruta

mfn. resounding with

anuṣa

m. a demon,

anuśabdita

mfn. verbally communicated

anuśabdita

mfn. spoken of.

anuśabdya

ind.p. having communicated

anuṣac

( sac-) to adhere to, keep at the side of

anusainya

n. the rear of an army

ānuṣak

ind. (fr. anu-sañj-[ gaṇa- svarādi-]), in continuous order, uninterruptedly, one after the other

(see anuṣak-).

ānuṣak

(according to to some also,"regularly","thoroughly"),

anuśak

to be able to imitate or come up with

: Desiderative Causal P. -śikṣayati-, to teach, instruct.

anuṣak

ind. in continuous order, one after the other, (gaRa svar-ādi- q.v)

anuṣak

ind. see ānuṣ/ak-.

anuṣakta

mfn. closely connected with, supplied from something preceding.

anusaktham

ind. along the thigh,

anuṣakti

f. clinging to, adherence,

anuśam

to become calm after or in consequence of

anusāma

mfn. at every sāman- verse (?)

anusamācar

to carry out, accomplish

anusamādhā

to calm, compose.

anusamāhṛ

to join or bring in order again

anusamāp

Causal P. to complete or accomplish further or subsequently

anusamāpana

n. regular completion

anusamārabh

A1. to place one's self in order after, cling to (accusative)

: Causal A1. (imperfect tense -/ārambhayata-) to cause to cling to one's self (locative case)

anusamāruh

to rise after

anusamaś

to overtake, reach

anusamas

-s/am-asyati-, to add further

anusamaya

See anu-sam-i-.

anusamaya

m. regular connection (as of words)

anusambaddha

mfn. ( bandh-), connected with, accompanied by.

anusambhid

to bring into contact, combine

anusambhū

to be produced after, proceed after

anusaṃcar

to walk along side, to follow, join ; to visit ; to pursue, seek after ; to penetrate, traverse, cross ; to become assimilated: Causal P. -cārayati-, to join, become identified or assimilated with.

anusaṃcara

mfn. following or accompanying (with accusative)

anusaṃcint

to meditate.

anusaṃdah

to burn up along the whole length

anusaṃdhā

to explore, ascertain, inspect, plan, arrange ; to calm, compose, set in order ; to aim at.

anusaṃdhāna

n. investigation, inquiry, searching into, close inspection, setting in order, arranging, planning

anusaṃdhāna

n. aiming at

anusaṃdhāna

n. plan, scheme, congruous or suitable connection

anusaṃdhāna

n. (in the vaiśeṣika- philosophy) the fourth step in a syllogism (id est the application) .

anusaṃdhānin

mfn. investigating, searching, skilful at concerting or carrying out schemes.

anusaṃdhānīya

mfn. to be attended to,

anusaṃdhātavya

mfn. to be explored, to be investigated, to be looked after, etc.

anusaṃdhāyin

mfn. idem or 'mfn. to be attended to, '

anusaṃdheya

mfn. to be investigated, worthy of inquiry or scrutiny, etc.

anusaṃdhi

m. (in dramatic language) juncture of a patākā- or episode,

anusaṃdiś

to assign, to make over.

anusaṃdṛś

(ind.p. -dṛśya-) to consider successively

anusaṃgrah

to oblige, favour ; to salute by laying hold of the feet.

anusaṃhitam

ind. according to the saṃhitā- text

anusaṃhṛ

to drag (the foot)

; to compress, reduce a subject

anusami

cl.2 P. -eti-, to visit conjointly or successively ; to join in following or being guided by ; to join, become assimilated with.

anusamīkṣ

to keep in view, have in view

anusaṃjñapti

f. explanation,

anusaṃjvar

to feel distressed after (another)

(anu-saṃ-car-

) ; to be troubled, become envious.

anusaṃkal

to drive or convey along or after

anusaṃkhyā

Causal P. -khyā-payati-, to cause to observe, show

anusaṃkram

to walk or go up to, to reach

anusamman

to approve

anusamprāp

( āp-) to arrive, reach, get.

anusamprāpta

mfn. arrived, come.

anusamprayā

to go towards

anusaṃrabh

A1. to catch hold of

; to catch hold of mutually

anusaṃrakta

mfn. attached or devoted to.

anuśaṃs

to recite or praise after another

etc. ; (Vedic or Veda infinitive mood (dative case) anu-ś/ase-) to join in praising

anuśaṃsa

m. speaking ill,

anuśaṃsa

comfort, privilege,

anusaṃsarpam

ind. creeping after

anuśaṃsaśaṃsana

n. subsequent recitation,

, Scholiast or Commentator

anusaṃsmṛ

to remember, to long for (the dead or absent).

anusaṃspṛś

Caus to cause to touch after

anusaṃsṛ

Causal P. -sārayati-, to cause to follow, to pass or go on before

anusaṃsṛ

(Causal, also) to make progress through, ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding

anusaṃsṛp

to creep or crawl after

anusaṃsṛṣṭa

mfn. joined to (instrumental case)

anusaṃsthā

P. to follow (a road)

: A1. to become finished after

: Causal P. -sthāpayati-, to encourage

anusaṃsthita

mfn. following

anusaṃsthita

mfn. dead or deceased after (another)

anusaṃsyand

Intensive (parasmE-pada Nominal verb m. /anu saṃ-s/aniṣyadat-) to run after

(see

)

anusaṃtan

to overspread, diffuse, extend everywhere ; to join on, continue.

anusaṃtāna

m. offspring, a son,

anusaṃtati

f. continuation

anusaṃtṝ

to carry to the end, go on (in spinning)

anusamudram

ind. along the sea

anusaṃvā

to blow towards in order

anusaṃvah

to draw or run by the side of

; to convey along

anusaṃvarṇ

to approve of,

anusaṃvatsaram

ind. year after year.

anusaṃvicar

to visit successively, make the round of

anusaṃvid

to know together with, or in consequence of (something else)

anusaṃviś

to retire for sleep after

anusaṃvīta

mfn. ( vye-), wrapped up, covered

anusaṃvraj

to go after, follow

anusaṃvṛjin

mfn. blameless (?),

anusaṃvṛjina

mfn. blameless (?),

anusaṃyā

to go up and down (as guards) ; to go to or towards.

ānuṣaṇḍa

mfn. belonging to the country anu-ṣaṇḍa- (q.v)

anuṣaṇḍa

mn. Name of a place or country, (gaRa kacchādi- q.v)

anusandhyam

ind. evening after evening, every twilight.

anuṣaṅga

m. close adherence, connection, association, conjunction, coalition, commixture

anuṣaṅga

m. connection of word with word, or effect with cause

anuṣaṅga

m. necessary consequence, the connection of a subsequent with a previous act

anuṣaṅga

m. (in the dhātupāṭha-) the nasals connected with certain roots ending in consonants (as in tṛmph-)

anuṣaṅga

m. tenderness, compassion

ānuṣaṅgika

mf(ī-)n. (fr. anu-ṣaṅga-), closely adherent, following, concomitant, inherent, implied

ānuṣaṅgika

mf(ī-)n. consistent

ānuṣaṅgika

mf(ī-)n. lasting, enduring

ānuṣaṅgika

mf(ī-)n. necessarily following, necessary as a result or consequence, inevitable

ānuṣaṅgika

mf(ī-)n. occasional, unimportant, secondary

ānuṣaṅgika

mf(ī-)n. (in grammar) elliptical, including or agreeing with words not comprised in the sentence.

anuṣaṅgika

mfn. consequent, following as a necessary result

anuṣaṅgika

mfn. connected with, adhering to, inherent, concomitant.

ānuṣaṅgikatva

n. the being occasional, secondary

anuṣaṅgin

mfn. addicted or attached to, connected with, or"common, prevailing"

anuṣañj

( sañj-) cl.1 A1. or Passive voice -ṣajjate-, -ṣajyate-, to cling to, adhere, be attached to.

anuṣañjana

n. connection with what follows, concord

anuṣañjana

n. grammatical relation.

anuṣañjanīya

mfn. to be connected, supplied.

anusānu

ind. along a table-land or summit, from ridge to ridge.

anuśap

to curse

anuśara

m. ( śṝ-), Name of a rākṣasa-.

anusāra

anu-sārin-, etc. See under anu-sṛ- below.

anusara

mf(ī-)n. following, a companion.

anusāra

m. going after, following

anusāra

m. custom, usage

anusāra

m. nature, natural state or condition of anything

anusāra

m. prevalence, currency

anusāra

m. received or established authority, especially of codes of law

anusāra

m. accordance, conformity to usage

anusāra

m. consequence, result

anusāra

m. (eṇa-), or

anusāraka

mfn. following, attendant on, according or conformable to

anusāraka

mfn. penetrating, scrutinizing, investigating.

anusaraṇa

n. following, going after

anusaraṇa

n. tracking, conformity to, consequence of

anusaraṇa

n. custom, habit, usage.

anusaraṇa

visiting,

anusāratas

ind. conformably to.

anusarga

m. secondary creation,

anusārin

mfn. following, attendant on, according or conformable to

anusārin

mfn. penetrating, scrutinizing, investigating.

anusarpa

m. a serpent-like being

anusarpaṇa

n. following,

anusartavya

mfn. to be followed,

anusartavya

n. (impersonal or used impersonally) it is to be conformed to,

anusartṛ

mfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') visiting in turn,

anusartṛ

following, seeking,

anusāryaka

n. a fragrant substance.

anuśās

to rule, govern ; to order ; to teach, direct, advise, address ; to punish, chastise, correct.

anuśāsaka

mfn. one who governs, instructs, directs or punishes.

anuśāsana

n. instruction, direction, command, precept

anuśāsanapara

mfn. obedient.

ānuśāsanika

mfn. (fr. anuśāsana-), relating to or treating of instruction

anuśāsanīya

mfn. to be instructed.

anuśāsanīyaśāsya

mfn. to be instructed.

anuśāsat

mfn. showing (the way)

mfn. punishing

ruling,

mfn. directed

mfn. defined by rule.

anuśāsitṛ

mfn. governing, instructing

anuśāsti

f. instruction,

anuśastra

n. any subsidiary weapon or instrument, anything used in place of a regular surgical instrument (as a finger-nail)

anuṣaṭ

ind. in continuous order, one after the other (gaRa svar-ādi- q.v)

anuṣaṭ

ind. see ānuṣ/ak-.

anusātam

ind. according to delight.

ānuśātika

mfn. (fr. anu-śatika-

), belonging to a person or thing accompanied with or bought for a hundred.

anuśatika

mfn. accompanied with or bought for a hundred.

anuśatikādi

a gaRa of

, containing the compounds the derivatives of which have vṛddhi- in both parts, as ānuśātika-, etc.

anuṣatya

mfn. being conformable to truth (satya-)

anusavanam

ind. at every sacrifice

etc.

anusavanam

ind. constantly

anuśaya

m. close connection as with a consequence, close attachment to any object

anuśaya

m. (in philosophy) the consequence or result of an act (which clings to it and causes the soul after enjoying the temporary freedom from transmigration to enter other bodies)

anuśaya

m. repentance, regret

anuśaya

m. hatred

anuśaya

m. ancient or intense enmity

anuśayākṣepa

m. (in rhetoric) objection expressing (or resulting from) repenting,

anusāyam

ind. evening after evening, every evening, (gaRa parimukhādi- q.v)

anuśayāna

mfn. repenting, regretting

anuśayānā

f. a heroine or female character who regrets the loss of her lover (in dramas).

anuśayavat

mfn. equals anu-śayin-.

anuśayī

f. a disease of the feet, a boil or abscess on the upper part

anuśayī

f. a boil on the head.

anuśayin

mfn. having the consequence of an act, connected as with a consequence

anuśayin

mfn. devotedly attached to, faithful

anuśayin

mfn. repentant, penitent, regretful, sorry for

anuśayin

mfn. hating deeply.

anuśayin

indifferent to everything,

anuśāyin

mfn. lying or extending along

anuśayitavya

mfn. to be regretted.

ānusāyya

mfn. (fr. anu-sāya-), being every evening commentator or commentary on

anuṣeka

m. rewatering or sprinkling over again

anuṣekaṣecana

n. rewatering or sprinkling over again

anusev

to practise, observe.

anusevin

mfn. practising, observing, habitually addicted to.

anuśī

cl.2 A1. -śete-, to sleep with, lie along or close, adhere closely to.

anuṣic

( sic-), Ved. to pour upon or into ; to drip upon.

anusic

See anu-ṣic-.

anusiddha

mfn. (3. sidh-), gradually effected or realized

anuṣidh

( sidh-), Intensive (parasmE-pada -s/eṣidhat-) to bring back along the path

anuśikha

m. Name of a nāga- or snake priest

anuśikṣā

f. learning or striving after,

anuśikṣin

mfn. exercising one's self in, practising

anuṣikta

mfn. dripped upon

anuśīlana

n. constant practice or study (of a science, etc.), repeated and devoted service.

anuśīlaya

Nom. P. -śīlayati-, to practise in imitation of

anuśīlita

mfn. studied carefully, attended to.

anusīram

ind. along the plough, (gaRa parimukhādi-, q.v)

ānusīrya

mfn. (fr. anu-sīra-) being along the plough

anuśiṣṭa

mfn. taught, revealed

anuśiṣṭa

mfn. adjudged, done conformably to law.

anuśiṣṭa

mfn. giving false evidence (?),

anuśiṣṭi

f. instruction, teaching, ordering.

anuśiśu

f. followed by its young (as by a foal, etc.)

anuśiṣya

ind.p. having ruled or ordered.

anusītam

ind. along the furrow

anusītam

ind. (gaRa parimukhādi- q.v)

ānusītya

mfn. (fr. anu-sīta-), being along the furrow

anuśivam

ind. after śiva-.

anuskandam

ind. having gone into in succession

anuśloka

m. Name (also title or epithet) of a sāman-,

anusmaraṇa

n. remembering, repeated recollection.

anusmṛ

to remember, recollect: Causal P. -smārayati-, or -smarayati-, to remind (with accusative)

anusmṛta

mfn. remembered.

anusmṛti

f. cherished recollection, recalling some idea to the exclusion of all others.

anusmṛti

Name (also title or epithet) of a poem (consisting of 72 verses from

on the necessity of remembering viṣṇu- at death).

anuṣṇa

mf(ā-)n. not hot, cold

anuṣṇa

mf(ā-)n. apathetic

anuṣṇa

mf(ā-)n. lazy

anuṣṇa

n. the blue lotus, Nymphaea Caerulea

anuṣṇā

f. Name of a river.

anuṣṇagu

m. "having cold rays", the moon.

anuṣṇaka

mfn. not hot, cold

anuṣṇaka

mfn. chilly, etc.

anuṣṇāśīta

mfn. neither hot nor cold.

anuṣṇavallikā

f. the plant Niladurba.

anusneham

ind. after (adding) oil

anuśobhin

mfn. shining.

anuśocaka

mfn. grieving, one who repents

anuśocaka

mfn. occasioning repentance.

anuśocana

n. sorrow, repentance.

anuśocin

mfn. regretful, sorrowful.

anuśocita

mfn. regretted, repented of.

anuśoka

m. sorrow, repentance, regret

anusomam

ind. according to the (practice with the) soma-, as with the soma-

anuspandyam

ind. along the cord,

mfn. noticed

See anu-paś-.

to whizz towards

mfn. whizzing (as an arrow)

anuspṛś

to touch, extend to

anusṛ

to go after: Causal P. -sārayati-, to pursue.

anuśrath

cl.6 P. -śṛnthati-, to untie

: Causal P. (Aorist subjunctive 2. sg. -śiśrathaḥ-) to frighten ([

;"to abolish"

])

: A1. -śrathayate-, to annihilate or soften the effect of.

ānuśrava

mfn. according to hearing, resting on tradition, derived from the veda- or tradition

anuśrava

m. Vedic tradition (acquired by repeated hearing)

ānuśravika

mfn. idem or 'mfn. according to hearing, resting on tradition, derived from the veda- or tradition '

ānuśrāvika

mfn. idem or ' mfn. idem or 'mfn. according to hearing, resting on tradition, derived from the veda- or tradition ' '

anusrayāman

m. not going out during daylight

anusṛj

to dismiss, let go

: P. A1. -sṛjati-, te-, to create successively

etc.: Passive voice to be created in succession to

anusrotasa

mfn. in the direction of the current of a river,

anuśrotavya

mfn. to be heard,

anusṛp

to glide after or towards, to approach.

anusṛṣṭa

mfn. created in succession

ānusṛṣṭineya

mf. a descendant of anu-sṛṣṭi-

anusṛta

mfn. followed, conformed to.

anusṛtavatsā

f. (scilicet vivṛtti-) hiatus between a long or short syllable,

anusṛti

f. going after, following, conforming to

anusṛti

f. Name of a woman, (gaRa kalyāṇy-ādi- q.v)

ānusṛtineya

mf. a descendant of anu-sṛti-

anuśru

cl.5 P. -śṛṇoti-, to hear repeatedly (especially what is handed down in the veda-): Desiderative A1. -śuśrūṣate-, to obey.

anuśru

(Causal - śrāvayati-), to announce,

anuśruta

mfn. handed down by Vedic tradition.

anuṣṭabdha

mfn. ( stambh-), (used for an etymology) raised,

anustanita

n. continual thundering,

anustaraṇa

m. ( stṛ-), an animal which is fit to be chosen as a secondary victim

anustaraṇī

f. the cow sacrificed at the funeral ceremony

anuṣṭhā

( sthā-) to stand near or by ; to follow out ; to carry out, attend to ; to perform, do, practise ; to govern, rule, superintend ; to appoint: Passive voice -ṣṭhīyate-, to be done ; to be followed out: Desiderative -tiṣṭhāsati-, to be desirous of doing, etc.

anuṣṭhā

mfn. standing after id est in succession

anuṣṭhāna

n. carrying out, undertaking

anuṣṭhāna

n. doing, performance

anuṣṭhāna

n. religious practice

anuṣṭhāna

n. acting in conformity to

anuṣṭhānakrama

m. the order of performing religious ceremonies.

anuṣṭhānaśarīra

n. (in sāṃkhya- philosophy) the body which is intermediate between the liṅga-- or sūkṣma-- and the sthūla-śarīra- (generally called the adhiṣṭhāna-śarīra- q.v)

anuṣṭhānasmāraka

mf(ikā-)n. reminding of religious ceremonies.

anuṣṭhānī

f. performance, action

anuṣṭhānika

m. Name (also title or epithet) of a class of Theistic Reformers,

anuṣṭhāpaka

mf(ikā-)n. causing to perform.

anuṣṭhāpana

n. the causing to perform an act.

anuṣṭhātavya

mfn. to be accomplished.

anuṣṭhātṛ

m. the undertaker of any work

anuṣṭhāyin

mfn. doing, performing an act.

anuṣṭheya

mfn. to be effected, done or accomplished

anuṣṭheya

mfn. to be observed

anuṣṭheya

mfn. to be proved or established.

anuṣṭhi

f. "being near, present, at hand"

anuṣṭhita

mfn. done, practised

anuṣṭhita

mfn. effected, executed, accomplished

anuṣṭhita

mfn. followed, observed

anuṣṭhita

mfn. done conformably.

anuṣṭhu

presently, immediately.

anuṣṭhuṣṭhuyā

presently, immediately.

anuṣṭhyā

ind. only inst. immediately

anuṣṭhyā

See anu-ṣṭhi-.

anuṣṭobhana

n. praising after

anustotra

n. "praising after", Name of a treatise relating to the sāma-veda-.

anuṣṭra

m. no camel id est a bad camel.

anuṣṭra

mfn. that from which camels are excluded,

anuṣṭu

( stu-) to praise

anuṣṭubgarbhā

f. a metre (like that in

) of the class uṣṇih-

anuṣṭubh

( stubh-) to praise after, to follow in praising

anuṣṭubh

f. p- (Nominal verb ṣṭ/uk-

) following in praise or invocation

anuṣṭubh

f. a kind of metre consisting of four pāda-s or quarter-verses of eight syllables each (according to the

,quoted in

,so called because it anuṣṭobhati- id est follows with its praise the gāyatrī-, which consists of three pāda-s)

anuṣṭubh

f. (in later metrical systems, the anuṣṭubh- constitutes a whole class of metres, consisting of four times eight syllables)

anuṣṭubh

f. hence the number eight

anuṣṭubh

f. speech, sarasvatī-

anuṣṭubh

mfn. praising

anuṣṭubh

see 2. st/ubh- (parasmE-pada 1259)

ānuṣṭubha

mf(ī-)n. consisting of anu-ṣṭubh-s

ānuṣṭubha

mf(ī-)n. formed like the anu-ṣṭubh- metre (exempli gratia, 'for example' composed of four divisions)

ānuṣṭubhauṣṇiha

mfn. consisting of the two metres anu-ṣṭubh- and uṣṇih-

anuṣṭupchandas

mfn. having anuṣṭubh- for metre

anuṣṭupkarmīṇa

mfn. being performed with an anuṣṭubh- verse

anuṣṭupsampad

f. completion of an anu-ṣṭubh-,

anuṣṭupśiras

([

]) mfn. having an anuṣṭubh- verse at the head.

anuṣṭupśīrṣan

([

]) mfn. having an anuṣṭubh- verse at the head.

anuṣṭuti

f. praise

anusū

m. Name of work

commentator or commentary

anuśuc

to mourn over, regret, bewail: Causal P. -śocayati-, to mourn over.

anusūcaka

mf(ikā-)n. ( sūc-), indicative of, pointing out.

anusūcana

n. pointing out, indication.

ānuśūka

mfn. (fr. anu-śūka-), being with or within the awns (as rice).

ānuṣūka

mfn. (probably fr. anu-ṣūka-,"after-shoot of rice"[according to native interpretation from anu-sū-]),"in the manner of the after-shoot of rice" id est shot after

ānusuka

mfn. studying or knowing the work anusū- (q.v)

ānusūka

equals ānuṣūka- (?) q.v

anusūpam

ind. in every condiment.

anuśuṣ

to dry up gradually

etc. ; to become emaciated by gradual practice of religious austerity

; to languish after another.

anuśuśrūṣā

f. obedience,

ānusūya

mfn. given by anu-sūyā- (atri-'s wife)

anuṣvadham

(fr. sva-dhā-) ind. according to one's will, voluntary

anusvan

(3. sg. Aorist Passive voice - ṣv/aṇi-), to roar after,

anusvāna

m. sounding conformably

anuṣvāpam

ind. ( svap-), continuing to sleep

anusvāra

m. ( svṛ-), after-sound, the nasal sound which is marked by a dot above the line, and which always belongs to a preceding vowel.

anusvārāgama

m. an augment consisting in the addition of an anusvāra-.

anusvāravat

mfn. having the anusvāra-.

anusvāravyavāya

m. separation between two sounds caused by an anusvāra-.

anuśvas

to breathe continually.

anuṣyand

( syand-), Ved. infinitive mood -ṣy/ade- ([

]) and Causal -syanday/adhyai- ([

]) , to run along: -syandate- and -ṣyandate- with a differentiation in meaning like that in abhi-ṣyand- q.v

anuṣyanda

m. a hind-wheel

anusyūta

mfn. ( siv-), sewed consecutively, strung together or connected regularly and uninterruptedly.

anutakṣ

(imperfect tense 2. plural -/atakṣata-) to create or procure for the help of (dative case)

anutamām

(superl.) ind. most

anutan

to extend along, to carry on, continue, develop.

anutap

to heat

; to vex, annoy

: Passive voice -tapy/ate- (rarely -tapyati-[

]) , to suffer afterwards, repent ; to desiderate, miss: Causal -tāpayati-, to distress.

anutāpa

m. repentance, heat.

anutāpaka

mf(ikā-)n. causing repentance,

anutāpana

mfn. occasioning remorse, repentance or sorrow.

anutāpāṅka

Name (also title or epithet) of a drama.

anutāpin

mfn. penitent, regretting.

anutapta

mfn. heated

anutapta

mfn. filled with regret

anutaptā

f. Name of a river

anutara

See anu-tṝ- below.

anutara

n. fare, freight

anutark

to follow in thought, to regard as or take for.

anutarṣa

m. thirst, wish, desire

, a drinking vessel (used for drinking spirituous liquors)

anutarṣa

m. "thirst"and"an intoxicating drink",

anutarṣaṇa

n. a vessel from which spirituous liquor is drunk

anutarṣaṇa

n. distributing liquor

anutarṣula

mfn. causing desire

anutaṭam

ind. along the shore

anutilam

ind. grain after grain (of Sesamum), by grains, very minutely, (gaRa parimukhādi- q.v)

ānutilya

mfn. (fr. anu-tila-), belonging or conformable to grains of Sesamum commentator or commentary on

anutiṣṭhamāna

See 1. anuṣṭhā-.

anutiṣṭhamāna

mfn. following out, carrying out, performing, attending to.

anutiṣṭhāsu

mfn. intending to perform anything,

anutka

mfn. free from regret, not regretting, self-complacent, not repenting of.

anutkarṣa

m. non-elevation, inferiority.

anutoda

m. repetition (of a song),

anutoda

n. (with gautamasya-) Name (also title or epithet) of a sāman-,

anutpāda

m. non-production, not coming into existence

anutpāda

m. not taking effect.

anutpāda

mfn. having no origin,

anutpādakṣānti

f. acquiescence in not having to undergo another birth.

anutpādana

n. not producing, non-production.

anutpādya

mfn. not to be created, eternal.

anutpanna

mfn. unborn, unproduced

anutpanna

mfn. uneffected, unaccomplished.

anutpatti

f. failure, non-production

anutpatti

mfn. not (yet) produced

anutpattikadharmakṣānti

f. acquiescence in the state which is still future, preparation for a future state

anutpattikadharmakṣānti

f. (with Buddhists) resignation to consequences which have not yet arisen,

(confer, compare

anutpattisama

mf(ā-) (in nyāya- philosophy) arguing against a thing by trying to show that nothing exists from which it could spring.

anutpūta

mfn. not completely purified,

anutṝ

(3. plural -taranti-) to follow across or to the end

anutṛd

(Imper. 2. sg. -tṛndhi-; imperfect tense 2. dual number -atṛntam-; perf. -tatarda-) to split open

anutṛp

to take one's fill (or refreshment) after or later than another.

anutsāha

m. non-exertion, want of effort

anutsāha

m. want of energy or determination

anutsāha

m. listlessness

anutsāha

mfn. deficient in determination.

anutsāhatā

f. want of determination

anutsanna

mfn. not lost

anutseka

m. absence of arrogance or highmindedness.

anutsekin

mfn. not arrogant or puffed up

anutsikta

mfn. not overflown or filled up,

anutsṛṣṭa

mfn. not letting loose a sacrificial victim,

anutsṛṣṭa

not discontinued, incessantly celebrated,

anutsuka

mfn. not eager, calm, retiring

anutsuka

mfn. moderate.

anutsukatā

f. moderateness

anutsūtra

mfn. not anomalous.

anutta

mfn. not cast down, invincible

anutta

(according to to some) = /anu-- tta- (for anu-- datta-), admitted.

anuttama

mf(ā-)n. unsurpassed, incomparably the best or chief, excellent

anuttama

mf(ā-)n. excessive

anuttama

mf(ā-)n. not the best

anuttama

mf(ā-)n. (in grammar) not used in the uttama-, or first person.

anuttamāmbhas

n. (in sāṃkhya- philosophy) indifference to and consequent abstinence from sensual enjoyment (as fatiguing) .

anuttamāmbhasika

n. indifference to and abstinence from sensual enjoyment (as involving injury to external objects).

anuttamanya

(/a-nutta--) m. "of invincible wrath", indra-

anuttāna

mfn. lying with the face towards, the ground

anuttāna

mfn. not supine

anuttāna

mfn. not flat

anuttara

mfn. chief, principal

anuttara

mfn. best, excellent

anuttara

mfn. without a reply, unable to answer, silent

anuttara

mfn. fixed, firm

anuttara

mfn. low, inferior, base

anuttara

mfn. south, southern

anuttara

n. a reply which is coherent or evasive and therefore held to be no answer

anuttara

m. plural a class of gods among the jaina-s.

anuttaraṃga

mfn. not surging or billowy,

anuttarapūjā

f. (with Buddhists) highest worship (of seven kinds

anuttarapūjā

confer, compare vandana-),

anuttarayogatantra

n. title of the last of the four bauddhatantra-s.

anuttaropapātika

m. plural a class of gods

anuttaropapātikadaśā

f. plural title of the ninth aṅga- of the jaina-s treating of those gods.

anutthāna

n. ( sthā-), the not rising, want of exertion or of energy

anutthita

mfn. not risen, not grown up (as grain).

anuttuṇḍita

mfn. not having the front protruding,

anutūlaya

Nom. P. -tūlayati-, to rub lengthwise (with a brush or cotton).

anutunna

mfn. ( tud-), depressed or repressed (in sound), muffled

anuvā

cl.2 P. -vāti-, to blow upon, blow along or after

anuvā

f. blowing after

(see anuvā-.).

anuvac

to recite the formulas inviting to the sacrificial ceremony ; to repeat, reiterate, recite ; to communicate ; to study: Caus. -vacayati-, to cause to recite the inviting formulas, to cause to invite for some sacrificial act

anuvāc

f. equals anu-vāky/ā-

anuvacana

n. speaking after, repetition, reciting, reading

anuvacana

n. lecture

anuvacana

n. a chapter, a section

anuvacana

n. recitation of certain texts in conformity with injunctions (praiṣa-) spoken by other priests.

anuvācana

n. the act of causing the hotṛ- to recite the passages of the ṛg-- veda- in obedience to the injunction (praiṣa-) of the adhvaryu- priest

anuvācanapraiṣa

m. an injunction to recite as above

anuvacanīya

mfn. referring to the anuvacana-, (gaRa anupravacanādi- q.v)

anuvad

P. (with accusative) to repeat the words of ; to imitate (in speaking) ; to resound ; to repeat, insist upon ; (according to

,also A1.if without object or followed by a Gen.) Passive voice (anūdyate-) to be expressed correspondingly ; see anudita- sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order

anuvāda

m. saying after or again, repeating by way of explanation, explanatory repetition or reiteration with corroboration or illustration, explanatory reference to anything already said

anuvāda

m. translation

anuvāda

m. a passage of the brāhmaṇa-s which explains or illustrates a rule (vidhi-) previously propounded (such a passage is sometimes called anuvāda-vacana-)

anuvāda

m. confirmation

anuvāda

m. slander, reviling

anuvāda

(used in explaining dhvani-),

anuvādaka

mfn. repeating with comment and explanation, corroborative, concurrent, conformable, in harmony with

anuvādaka

mfn. (the masculine of the last is also the name of any one of the three notes of the gamut.)

anuvādin

mfn. repeating with comment and explanation, corroborative, concurrent, conformable, in harmony with

anuvādin

mfn. (the masculine of the last is also the name of any one of the three notes of the gamut.)

anuvādinī

f. a lute,

anuvādita

mfn. translated.

anuvādya

mfn. to be explained by an anuvāda-, to be made the subject of one

anuvādya

n. the subject of a predicate.

anuvādyatva

n. the state of requiring to be explained by an anuvāda-.

anuvah

to convey or carry along ; to take after commentator or commentary on

anuvaha

m. "bearing after", one of the seven tongues of fire.

anuvaineya

Name of a country.

anuvāka

m. saying after, reciting, repeating, reading

anuvāka

m. a chapter of the veda-s, a subdivision or section.

anuvāka

See anu-vac-.

anuvākānukramaṇī

f. a work referring to the ṛg-- veda-, attributed to śaunaka-.

anuvākasaṅkhyā

f. the fourth of the eighteen pariśiṣṭa-s of the yajur-veda-.

anuvakra

mfn. somewhat crooked or oblique.

anuvakraga

mfn. having a somewhat oblique course (as a planet, etc.)

anuvaktavya

mfn. to be repeated

anuvaktṛ

mfn. speaking after

anuvaktṛ

mfn. replying.

anuvākya

mfn. to be recited

anuvākya

mfn. to be repeated, reiterated

anuvākyā

f. the verse to be recited by the hotṛ- or maitrāvaruṇa- priest, in which the god is invoked to partake of the offering intended for him

anuvākyavat

([

]) ([

]) mfn. furnished or accompanied with an anuvākyā-.

anuvākyāvat

([

]) mfn. furnished or accompanied with an anuvākyā-.

anuvaṃśa

m. a genealogical list or table

anuvaṃśa

m. collateral branch of a family

anuvaṃśa

mf(ā-)n. , of a corresponding family, of equal birth.

anuvaṃśam

ind. according to race or family

anuvaṃśaśloka

m. plural śloka-s containing genealogies (exempli gratia, 'for example'

etc.),

n. 1.

ānuvaṃśya

mfn. (fr. anu-vaṃśa-), belonging to a race, conformable to a genealogical list (according to

,"behind a bamboo")

anuvaṃśya

mfn. relating to a genealogical list.

anuvanam

ind. along side of a wood

(see

)

anuvanāntam

ind. along or in the forest,

anuvap

P. to scatter over

; A1. to scatter as dust

: Passive voice /anu upy/ate-, to be scattered as dust

anuvapram

ind. along the shore, ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding

anuvāram

ind. time after time.

anuvarṇ

to mention, describe, recount ; to praise.

anuvartana

n. obliging, serving or gratifying another

anuvartana

n. compliance, obedience

anuvartana

n. following, attending

anuvartana

n. concurring

anuvartana

n. consequence, result

anuvartana

n. continuance

anuvartana

n. supplying from a previous rule.

anuvartanīya

mfn. to be followed

anuvartanīya

mfn. to be supplied from a previous rule.

anuvartin

mfn. following, compliant, obedient, resembling.

anuvartitā

f. compliance,

anuvartitṛ

m. a wooer

anuvartitva

n. the state of being so.

anuvartman

mfn. following attending

etc.

anuvartman

n. a path previously walked by another

anuvartya

mfn. to be followed,

anuvartya

to be supplied from the preceding,

anuvas

to clothe, cover

anuvas

to settle after another (accusative) ; to dwell near to ; to inhabit along with: Caus. -vāsayati-, to leave (the calf) with (the cow)

anuvas

(only - vāvase-), to rush at,

anuvāś

to roar in reply to (accusative)

anuvās

to perfume.

anuvaśa

m. obedience to the will of

anuvaśa

mfn. obedient to the will of.

anuvāsa

m. perfuming (especially the clothes)

anuvāsa

m. an oily enema

anuvāsa

m. administering oily enemata.

anuvāsana

n. idem or 'm. administering oily enemata.'

ānuvāsanika

mfn. (fr. anuvāsana-), suitable for an oily enema.

anuvāsaram

ind. day by day,

anuvaṣaṭkāra

m. a secondary exclamation of vaṣaṭ-.

anuvaṣaṭkāravaṣaṭkṛta

n. a secondary exclamation of vaṣaṭ-.

anuvaṣaṭkṛ

(1 kṛ-), -karoti- (Potential -kuryāt-) to make a secondary exclamation of vaṣaṭ-

anuvāsin

mfn. residing, resident.

anuvasita

mfn. dressed up, wrapped.

anuvāsita

mfn. scented, perfumed, fumigated

anuvāsita

mfn. prepared or administered as an enema.

anuvāsya

mfn. to be scented or fumigated

anuvāsya

mfn. requiring an enema.

anuvāsyavāsanīya

mfn. to be scented or fumigated

anuvāsyavāsanīya

mfn. requiring an enema.

anuvāte

ind. with the wind blowing in the same direction, to windward

anuvatsara

m. the fourth year in the Vedic cycle of five years

etc.

anuvatsara

m. a year

anuvatsaram

ind. every year, yearly.

anuvatsarīṇa

([

etc.]) ([

]) mfn. referring to the anuvatsar/a-.

anuvatsarīya

([

]) mfn. referring to the anuvatsar/a-.

anuvedha

m. piercing

anuvedha

m. obstructing

anuvedha

m. blending, intermixture.

anuvedi

ind. along the ground prepared for sacrifice

anuvedyantam

ind. along the edge of the sacrificial ground

anuvelam

ind. now and then.

anuvellita

n. ( vell-), bandaging, securing with bandages (in surgery)

anuvellita

n. a kind of bandage applied to the extremities

anuvellita

mfn. bent in conformity with, bent under.

anuven

to allure, entice

anuveśa

m. entering after, following.

anuveśaveśana

n. entering after, following.

anuveṣṭ

to be fixed to, cling to

: Causal P. -veṣṭayati-, to wind round, cover.

ānuveśya

mfn. (fr. anu-veśa-

), a neighbour living on the same side

anuvī

( i-) cl.2 P. -vyeti-, to follow or join in going off or separating

; to extend along

anuvibhū

to equal, correspond to

anuvical

to follow in changing place

anuvicar

to walk or pass through

; to walk up to

anuvicint

to recall to mind

; to meditate upon

anuvid

cl.2 P., Ved. -vetti-, to know thoroughly

anuvid

cl.6 P. A1. -vindati-, te-, to find, obtain, discover

etc. ; to marry

; to deem

anuviddha

mfn. pierced, penetrated

anuviddha

mfn. intermixed, full of, abounding in

anuviddha

mfn. set (as a jewel).

anuvidhā

to assign to in order ; to regulate, lay down a rule: Passive voice -dhīyate-, to be trained to follow rules ; to yield or conform to (genitive case)

anuvidha

mfn. conforming or adhering to,

anuvidhāna

n. acting conformably to order, obedience.

anuvidhātavya

mfn. to be performed according to an order.

anuvidhāv

to flow or run along (accusative or locative case)

; to flow through

anuvidhāyin

mfn. conforming to, compliant

anuvidhāyin

mfn. imitating

anuvidheya

mfn. to be followed,

anuvidheya

to be prescribed according to (instrumental case),

ānuvidhitsā

f. (probably for an-anuvi-,fr. anu-vi--and the Desiderative of dhā-), ingratitude

anuvidvas

mfn. perf. p. having found

anuvihan

to interrupt, derange

anuvīj

to fan.

anuvikas

to blow, expand, as a flower.

anuvikāś

Intensive -cākaśīti-, to penetrate with one's vision

anuvikṛ

to shape after

anuvikṝ

to bestrew

; to scatter separately

anuvikram

A1. to step or walk after, follow

anuvīkṣ

( īkṣ-) to survey, examine.

anuvilī

to dissolve (as salt in water)

anuvilok

(P. - lokayati-), to survey,

anuvimṛś

to consider

anuvinad

Causal P. -nādayati-, to make resonant or musical.

anuvinard

to answer with roars

anuvinaś

to disappear, perish, vanish after or with another (accusative)

anuvināśa

m. perishing after.

anuvinda

m. Name of a king of Oujein.

anuviniḥsṛ

to go or come out in order

anuvipaś

-v/i-paśyati-, to look at, view

anuvirāj

to be bright after or along

anuviś

to enter after ; to enter ; to follow.

anuviṣaṇṇa

mfn. ( sad-), fixed upon

anuviṣic

( sic-) to pour in addition to (accusative)

anuvismita

mfn. one who is astonished after another

anuviṣṇu

ind. after viṣṇu-.

anuviṣṇu

ind. after viṣṇu-,

anuvisṛ

to extend or stream over

anuvisraṃs

Caus. -sraṃsayati-, to separate, loose

anuvisṛj

to shoot at or towards ; to send along (accusative)

anuviṣṭambha

m. the being impeded in consequence of

anuviṣṭhā

( sthā-) to extend over

anuvistṛta

mfn. ( stṛ-),"extended, spread out", large, roomy

anuviśva

m. plural Name of a people in the north-east

anuviṣyand

( syand-) to flow over or along or upon

anuvitan

to extend all along or all over

anuvitta

mfn. found, obtained, at hand

anuvitti

f. finding

anuvivā

to blow while passing through

anuviviś

to settle along separately

anuvivṛt

to run along

: Causal A1. -vartayate-, to follow hastily

anuvṛ

to cover,

; to surround: Causal A1. -vārayate-, to hinder, prevent.

anuvraj

to go along

; to follow (especially a departing guest, as a mark of respect) ; to visit seriatim ; to obey, do homage.

anuvrajana

n. following as above, Heat.

anuvrajya

mfn. to be followed (as by the relatives of a dead person to the cemetery)

anuvrajyā

f. equals anu-vrajana-

anuvrata

mfn. devoted to, faithful to, ardently attached to (with genitive case or accusative)

anuvṛdh

to grow, increase.

anuvṛṣ

to rain upon or along

anuvṛt

A1. to go after ; to follow, pursue ; to follow from a previous rule, be supplied from a previous sentence ; to attend ; to obey, respect, imitate ; to resemble ; to assent ; to expect ; Causal P. -vartayati-, to roll after or forward ; to follow up, carry out ; to supply.

anuvṛt

mfn. walking after, following

anuvṛtta

mfn. following, obeying, complying

anuvṛtta

mfn. rounded off

anuvṛtta

n. obedience, conformity, compliance.

anuvṛtti

f. following, acting suitably to, having regard or respect to, complying with, the act of continuance

anuvṛtti

f. (in pāṇini-'s grammar) continued course or influence of a preceding rule on what follows

anuvṛtti

f. reverting to

anuvṛtti

f. imitating, doing or acting in like manner.

anuvṛtti

f. (in dramatic language) politeness, courtesy,

anuvyadh

cl.4 P. -vidhyati-, to strike afterwards

; to penetrate, pierce through, wound.

anuvyādha

m. piercing

anuvyādha

m. obstructing

anuvyādha

m. blending, intermixture.

anuvyāhāra

m. cursing, execration

anuvyāharaṇa

n. repeated utterance

anuvyāhārin

mfn. execrating, cursing

anuvyāhṛ

to utter in order or repeatedly

; to curse

anuvyāhṛta

n. curse, imprecation,

anuvyākhyā

to explain further

anuvyākhyāna

n. that portion of a brāhmaṇa- which explains or illustrates difficult sūtra-s, texts or obscure statements occurring in another portion

anuvyam

ind. ( vī-), behind, after, inferior to

anuvyañjana

n. a secondary mark or token

anuvyāpin

mfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') spreading over, covering, filling,

anuvyaś

to overtake, reach

anuvyāsthā

Caus. -sthāpayati-, to send away in different directions

anuvyavagā

cl.3 P. -jigāti-, to come between in succession to another

anuvyavaso

to perceive.

anuvyave

( i-) cl.2 P. -avaiti-, to follow in intervening or coming between

anuvyuccar

to follow in going forth

anuvyūh

to move apart after

; to distribute

anuyā

to go towards or after, follow ; to imitate, equal.

anuyā

mfn. following

anuyāga

m. a subsequent or after sacrifice

anuyāja

m. a secondary or final sacrifice

anuyājānumantraṇa

n. reciting those formulas

anuyājapraiṣa

m. plural the formulas belonging to the anuyāja-

anuyājaprasava

m. permission to perform an anuyāja-

anuyājārtha

mfn. belonging to or used at an anuyāja-

anuyājavat

(anuyāj/a--) mfn. having secondary sacrifices

ānuyājika

mf(ī-)n. relating to the after-sacrifice,

anuyajus

ind. according to the yajus--formula

anuyam

(3. plural -yacchanti-;Imper. -yacchatu-; parasmE-pada fem. -y/acchamānā-) to direct, guide, give a direction to

; (perf. 3. plural -yemuḥ- A1.3. dual number -yem/āte-) to follow

anuyam

to give over,

anuyāna

n. going after, following.

anuyat

A1. -yatate-, to strive to attain to or to reach

anuyata

mfn. followed (in hostile manner)

mfn. following

mfn. followed

mfn. practised.

mfn. to be followed.

anuyātṛ

m. a follower, companion.

anuyātra

f(ā-)n. retinue, attendance

anuyātra

f(ā-)n. that which is required for a journey.

ānuyātrika

mfn. (fr. anu-yātra-), belonging to a servant

ānuyātrika

mfn. belonging to a retinue

ānuyātrika

mfn. a servant

anuyātrika

mfn. following, attendant

anuyavam

ind. like barley, (gaRa parimukhādi-, q.v)

ānuyavya

mfn. (fr. anu-yava-), belonging to barley

anuyāyin

mfn. going after

anuyāyin

mfn. a follower, a dependant, attendant

anuyāyin

mfn. following, consequent upon.

anuyāyitā

f. succession.

anuyāyitva

n. succession.

anuyiyāsu

mfn. wishing to follow,

anuyoga

m. a question, examination

anuyoga

m. censure, reproof

anuyoga

m. religious meditation, spiritual union.

anuyogadvāra

Name (also title or epithet) of a sacred book,

anuyogakṛt

m. an ācārya- or spiritual teacher.

anuyogin

mfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' combining, uniting

anuyogin

mfn. connected with

anuyogin

mfn. questioning.

anuyojana

n. question, questioning.

anuyojya

mfn. to be examined or questioned

anuyojya

mfn. to be enjoined or ordered

anuyojya

mfn. censurable

anuyojya

mfn. a servant, agent, delegate

anuyoktavya

mfn. to be questioned,

anuyoktṛ

m. an examiner, inquirer, teacher.

anuyū

mfn. (2. yu-), depending, dependent

anuyugam

ind. according to the yuga-s or four ages

anuyuj

to join again

; to question, examine ; to order ; to enjoin: Causal -yojayati-, to place upon ; to add

: Desiderative -yuyukṣati-, to intend to question

anuyukta

mfn. ordered, enjoined

anuyukta

mfn. asked, inquired

anuyukta

mfn. examined, questioned

anuyukta

mfn. reprehended.

anuyuktin

m. one who has enjoined, examined, (gaṇaiṣṭādi- q.v)

anuyūpam

ind. along the yūpa- or sacrificial post, (gaRa parimukhādi- q.v)

ānuyūpya

mfn. (fr. anu-yūpa-), being along or belonging to a sacrificial post

anvānu

Intensive -n/onavīti-, to sound through

anyonyānurāga

m. mutual affectinn,

apahnu

A1. (1. sg. -hnuv/e-) to refuse

; to conceal, disguise, deny

etc. ; to excuse one's self, give satisfaction to

apahnuta

mfn. concealed, denied.

apahnuti

f. "denial, concealment of truth", using a simile in other than its true or obvious application

apahnuvāna

mfn. pr. p. A1. concealing, denying (any one dative case)

to deny, conceal

to put aside

to remove

(the ā-of apā-always in the antepenultimate of a śloka-, therefore apā-metrically for apa-See apa-nud-), to remove, repel, repudiate

apanuda

mfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' exempli gratia, 'for example' śokāpanuda- q.v) removing driving away.

apanunutsu

mfn. desirous of removing, expiating (with accusative)

apānunutsu

mfn. wishing to remove or dispel,

apanutti

f. removing, taking or sending away

apanutti

f. expiation

and

apihnu

(3. dual number /api hnutaḥ-) to refuse

aprameyānubhāva

mfn. of unlimited might.

apuronuvākyaka

mfn. without a puronuvākyā-

araṇyenuvākya

mfn. to be recited in the forest

arātinud

mfn. expelling enemies

ardhamānuṣa

m. an actor dressed as a god,

ardhatanu

f. half a body.

ārdradānu

mfn. granting or having moisture

ārdrānulepana

mfn. wet with unguents,

arinuta

mfn. praised even by enemies

arkasūnu

m. (equals -ja- q.v) the planet Saturn

arkasūnu

m. Name of yama-

ārujatnu

mfn. breaking

aruṇānuja

m. "the younger brother of aruṇa-", garuḍa-

(see aruṇāgraja-above and aruṇāvaraja-below)

arutahanu

mfn. one whose cheeks or jaws are not broken

aśaknuvāna

mfn. (parasmE-pada A1.) idem or 'mfn. (p. P.) unable to (Inf.) '

aśaknuvat

mfn. (p. P.) unable to (Inf.)

asidhenu

f. a (small) knife

asidhenukā

f. idem or 'f. a (small) knife '

aśīrtatanu

mfn. having an indestructible body,

asitajānu

mfn. having black knees

aśītatanu

mfn. (only vocative case) having a hot body

and

(varia lectio for aśītama-of

)

asthāsnu

mfn. impatient

aśvahanu

m. Name of a man

aśvānusaraṇa

n. (= aśva-- caryā-),

atanu

mfn. not thin, not small.

atanu

us-, m. equals an-aṅga- Name of kāma-.

atidhenu

mfn. distinguished for his cows

atimānuṣa

mfn. superhuman, divine

atimanuṣyabuddhi

mfn. having a superhuman intellect.

atinihnutya

ind.p. ( hnu-), denying obstinately.

Caus. to turn away

to drive by

mfn. over timid.

([

]) or a-trāsa- mfn. fearless.

atyanusṛ

Caus.

atyanusṛ

Causal -sārayati- to pursue excessively

aupajānuka

mfn. (fr. upa-jānu-), being on or near the knees

aupānuvākya

mfn. (fr. upānuvākya-), contained in the portion of the

called upānuvākya-

aupānuvākyakāṇḍa

n. equals upānuvākya- commentator or commentary on

avacatnuka

m. (?) , Name of a country

avanu

A1. (3. plural -navante-) to move towards (accusative)

avaprasnuta

mfn. wetted by the fluid excretion (of a bird)

avyaktānukaraṇa

n. the imitating of inarticulated sound

ayohanu

(/ayo--) mfn. iron-jawed

baddhānurāga

mf(ā-)n. feeling affection, enamoured

baddhānuśaya

mfn. conceiving an intense hatred

bādhapūrvapakṣagranthānugama

bādhasiddhāntagranthānugama

m. Name of work

bahalānurāga

mfn. deep red

bahirjānu

ind. so that the hands are outside (not between) the knees

bahumānuṣasaṃkīrṇa

n. "crowded with many people", an arbour, bower

bālakundānuviddha

mfn. adorned with young jasmine blossoms

bālānucaragopta

m. Name of śiva-

bālānucaragupta

m. Name of śiva-

balānuja

m. the younger brother of baladeva- id est kṛṣṇa-

bārhatānuṣṭubha

mfn. consisting of a bṛhatī- and an anuṣṭubh-

bhadrakālīmanu

m. Name of work or chapter of work

bhāgānubandhajāti

f. assimilation of quantities by fractional increase, reduction of quantities to uniformity by the addition of a fraction

bhāgānubhāgena

ind. wish a greater or smaller share, at a different rate

bhāgavatasaptāhānukramaṇikā

f. Name of work

bhagnajānu

m. having a broken knee or leg

bhāṇḍānusārin

mfn. hanging to a pot or vessel

bhānu

m. appearance, brightness, light or a ray of light, lustre, splendour

etc.

bhānu

m. the sun

etc.

bhānu

m. a king, prince, master, lord

bhānu

m. Name of the chapters of the dictionary of an anonymous author

bhānu

m. Name of śiva-

bhānu

m. of an āditya-

bhānu

m. of a deva-gandharva-

bhānu

m. of a son of kṛṣṇa-

bhānu

m. of a yādava-

bhānu

m. of the father of the 15th arhat- of the present avasarpiṇī-

bhānu

m. of a prince (son of prati-vyoma-)

bhānu

m. of a son of viśva-dhara- and father of hari-nātha-

bhānu

m. of a pupil of śaṃkarācārya-

bhānu

m. of various authors (also with dīkṣita-, paṇḍita-, bhaṭṭa-etc.)

bhānu

m. plural the āditya-s (children of bhānu-)

bhānu

m. the gods of the 3rd manv-antara-

bhānu

f. a handsome wife (equals bhānu-matī-)

bhānu

f. Name of a daughter of dakṣa- (wife of dharma- or manu- and mother of bhānu- and āditya-)

bhānu

f. of the mother of devarṣabha-

bhānu

f. of a daughter of kṛṣṇa-

bhānu

f. of the mother of the dānava- śakuni- etc.

bhānubhṛt

m. the sun,

bhānucandra

m. "ray-moon", Name of a prince

bhānucandra

m. of an author

bhānucandragaṇi

m. Name of Scholiast or Commentator on vasantarāja-'s śakunārṇava-.

bhānucaritra

n. Name of a poem.

bhānudatta

m. Name of various authors (also with miśra-)

(see

)

bhānudatttaka

m. endearing form fr. deva-datta-

bhānudeva

m. Name of a king

bhānudina

n. Sunday

(see -vāra-),

bhānuja

m. "son of the sun", the planet Saturn

bhānuji

(also with dīkṣita-) m. Name of authors

bhānujit

m. Name of authors

bhānukara

m. Name of a poet

bhānukesara

m. "ray-maned", the sun

bhānula

m. (endearing form fr. bhānu-datta-

) Name of a prince

bhānumat

mfn. luminous, splendid, beautiful

etc.

bhānumat

mfn. containing the word bhānu-

bhānumat

m. the sun

bhānumat

m. Name of a man with the patronymic aupamanyava-

bhānumat

m. of a warrior on the side of the kuru-s (son of kaliṅga- Scholiast or Commentator)

bhānumat

m. of a son of kuśa-dhvaja- or keśi-dhvaja-

bhānumat

m. of a son of bṛhad-aśva-

bhānumat

m. of a son of bharga-

bhānumat

m. of a son of kṛṣṇa-

bhānumat

m. of a daughter of kṛta-vīrya- (wife of ahaṃ-yāti-)

bhānumat

m. of a daughter of the yādava- bhānu-

bhānumat

m. of a daughter of vikramāditya-

bhānumat

m. of the mother of śaṃkara- (Scholiast or Commentator on

)

bhānumataliṅgaśāstra

n. Name of work

bhānumataśilpaśāstra

n. Name of work

bhānumatī

f. Name of a daughter of aṅgiras-

bhānumatin

m. (fr. bhānumat-or -matī-) Name of a man

bhānumatīpariṇaya

m. Name of a poem.

bhānumaya

mf(ī-)n. consisting of rays

bhānumitra

m. Name of a prince (son of candra-giri-)

(see next)

bhānumitra

m. of a son of udaya-siṃha-

bhānunātha

m. (with daiva-jña-) Name of an author

bhānupaṇḍita

m. (with vaidya-) Name of a poet

bhānuphalā

f. Musa Sapientum

bhānuprabandha

m. Name of a prahasana- by veṅkaṭeśa-.

bhānuratha

m. Name of a prince (son of candra-giri-)

(see prec.)

bhānuratha

m. of a son of bṛhad-aśva-

, (see -mat-).

m. Name of a king

m. Name of a poet

m. Name of a man

f. the state or condition of being the sun

bhānuvana

n. "sun-wood", Name of a forest

bhānuvāra

m. Sunday

(see -dina-).

bhānuvarman

m. "sun-armoured", Name of a man

bhāṣānuśāsana

(ṣānuś-) n. Name of a Prakrit grammar.

bhāṣyabhānuprabhā

f. Name of work

bhāvānuga

mfn. "following the object", natural, simple

bhāvānugā

f. a shadow

(see bhāvālinā-).

bhīmajānu

m. Name of a king

bhojadevaśabdānuśāsana

n. Name of work

bhrātṛvyāpanutti

f. equals vya-parāṇutti-

bhṛgusūnu

m. " bhṛgu-'s son", equals -suta-

bhūmisnu

m. an earthworm

bhūtānukampā

f. compassion towards all beings

bhūtārthānubhava

m. the apprehension of any matter of fact

bimbānubimbatva

n. equals bimba-pratibimba-tva-

bodhisattvabuddhānusmṛtisamādhi

m. Name of work

brahmadeyānusaṃtāna

mfn. brahmadeya

brahmagītāparātmānusaṃdhāna

n. Name of work

brahmanutta

(br/ahma--) mfn. driven away by a sacred text or spell

brahmasūnu

m. (with jaina-s) Name of the 12th king of bhārata-

brahmasūtrānubhāṣya

n. Name of Comm. on the brahma-sūtra-

brahmasūtrānubhāṣyapradīpa

m. Name of Comm. on Comm. on the brahma-sūtra-

brahmasūtrānubhāṣyavivaraṇa

n. Name of Comm. on Comm. on the brahma-sūtra-

brahmasūtrānuvyākhyāna

n. Name of Comm. on the brahma-sūtra-

bṛhadbhānu

mfn. (bṛh/ad--) shining brightly

bṛhadbhānu

m. fire or the god of fire

bṛhadbhānu

m. Name of a particular agni-

bṛhadbhānu

m. of a son of sattrāyaṇa- and a manifestation of viṣṇu-

bṛhadbhānu

m. of a son of kṛṣṇa-

bṛhadbhānu

m. of a king

bṛhaddhanus

(

) m. Name of king.

bṛhanmanu

m. "the larger manu-", Name of a law-book (prob. the precursor of the present version, mentioned by mādhava- and other commentators).

bṛhatsarvānukuramaṇī

f. Name of an anukramaṇī-.

buddhānusmṛti

f. continual meditation on Buddha

buddhānusmṛti

f. Name of a Buddhist sūtra-.

budhasānu

m. equals parna- or equals yajña-puruṣa-

cakrabhānu

m. Name of a Brahman

cakradhanus

m. Name of a ṛṣi-,

caṇḍabhānu

m. Name of a man

candanabhānu

Name (also title or epithet) of a tathāgata-,

candrabhānu

m. Name of a son of kṛṣṇa-

candrahanu

m. Name of a dānava-, 12939.

carmānurañjana

n. "skin-colouring", white cinnabar

caturanugāna

n. Name of a sāman-.

caturhanu

mfn. (c/at-) having 4 jaws

caturhanu

m. Name of a dānava-

(varia lectio candra-h-).

chandānugāmin

mfn. complying with the wishes (of others), submissive

chandānuvartin

mfn. idem or 'mfn. complying with the wishes (of others), submissive '

chandānuvartin

mfn. following one's own will

chandānuvṛtta

varia lectio for do-'nuv-.

chandonuśāsanavṛtti

f. Name of work

chandonuvṛtta

n. compliance with any one's wishes

(

; varia lectio dānuv-).

chekānuprāsa

m. a kind of alliteration (with single repetitions of several consonants as in

;opposed to lāṭān-),

chidrānusaṃdhānin

mfn. looking out for faults or flaws

chidrānusārin

mfn. idem or 'mfn. looking out for faults or flaws '

citrabhānu

mfn. (tr/a--) of variegated lustre, shining with light

citrabhānu

mfn. Name of fire

citrabhānu

mfn. equals trārcis-

citrabhānu

mfn. Plumbago zeylanica

citrabhānu

mfn. Calotropis gigantea

citrabhānu

mfn. the 16th year in the 60 years' cycle of Jupiter

citrabhānu

mfn. Name of bhairava-

citrabhānu

mfn. of a prince

(varia lectio)

citrabhānu

mfn. of bāṇa-(-bhat2t2a)'s father.

citratanu

m. "having a speckled body", the partridge

cittānubodha

m. "instruction of mind", Name of a work.

cittānuvartin

mfn. equals tta-cārin-

( cittānuvartitva rti-tva- n.abstr.)

(in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound')

cittānuvartitva

n. cittānuvartin

cittānuvṛtti

mfn. idem or 'mfn. equals tta-cārin- ( cittānuvartitva rti-tva- n.abstr.) (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound')'

( cittānuvṛtttitva tti-tva- n.abstr.)

cittānuvṛtti

f. gratification of wishes

cittānuvṛtttitva

n. cittānuvṛtti

dadhidhenu

f. a cow represented by d/adhi- (offered to priests)

daivamānuṣaka

mfn. belonging to gods and men

daivānurodhin

mfn. obedient to fate or to the will of the gods

dānu

mfn. liberal (

)

dānu

mfn. courageous

dānu

m. prosperity, contentment

dānu

m. air, wind

dānu

mfn. valiant, victor, conqueror

dānu

m. a class of demons (see dānava-)

dānu

n. a fluid, drop, dew (nas p/atī- m.du, Name of mitra-- varuṇa- or of the aśvin-s

; see ārdr/a--, jīr/a--).

danu

f. Name of a daughter of dakṣa- (by kaśyapa- [or danāy/ū-

],mother of the dānava-s)

etc.

danu

m. Name of a son of śri- (also called dānava-;originally very handsome, but changed into a monster[ kabandha-]by indra- for having offended him)

dānucitra

(d/ā-) mfn. brilliant with dew or moisture

dānuda

mfn. trickling

danuja

m. "born from danu-", a dānava-

danujadviṣ

m. " dānava--enemy", a god

danujāri

m. idem or 'm. "dānava--enemy", a god '

danujedra

m. a dānava- prince

danukabandha

m. the monster dānava-

dānumat

(d/ā-) mfn. trickling, fluid

dānupinva

mfn. swelling with drops (soma-)

danusambhava

m. = - ja-

danusūnu

m. id.

dartnu

m. idem or 'm. a breaker, .'

daśadhanus

m. Name of an ancestor of śākya-muni-

dāsanu

m. Name of a semi-divine being

dāsānudāsa

m. a slave of a slave (sometimes applied by a humble speaker to himself)

daśānugāna

n. Name of several sāman-s

dayitnu

mfn. ?

devakīsūnu

m. Name of kṛṣṇa-

devamanuṣya

(

) (

) m. plural gods and men.

devamanuṣya

(

) m. plural gods and men.

devānucara

m. a follower or attendant of a god

devānukrama

m. "series or order of the gods."Name of work

devānuyāyin

m. idem or 'm. a follower or attendant of a god '

devatānukrama

(tān-) m.

devatānukramaṇī

f. index of the Vedic deities.

dhainuka

n. a herd of cows

dhainuka

n. a kind of coitus

dhanadānuja

m. the younger brother of kubera-, Name of rāvaṇa-

dhanu

m. or (

) 2. dhanū- f. (fr.2. dhan-?) a bow

dhanu

m. a measure of 4 hasta-s or cubits

(see dhanv-antara-below)

dhanu

m. the sign of the zodiac Sagittarius

dhanu

m. Buchanania Latifolia

dhanu

m. Semecarpus Anacardium

dhanu

according to to some also,"water, juice etc."; confer, compare dhanv-, dhanutṛ-.

dhanu

f. (dh/anu-,or dhan/ū-) a dry sandbank, a sandy shore ([ confer, compare English bight, German Bucht])

(Nominal verb n/ūs-).

dhanugupta

m. Name of a man

dhanuḥ

in comp. for nus-.

dhanuhastā

f. Name of a being attendant on devī-

dhanuḥkāṇḍa

equals dhanuṣ-k-, -kh-, -p- (below) .

dhanuḥkhaṇḍa

equals dhanuṣ-k-, -kh-, -p- (below) .

dhanuḥpaṭa

equals dhanuṣ-k-, -kh-, -p- (below) .

dhanuḥśākhā

f. equals nur-guṇā- (below)

dhanuḥśālā

f. bow-room

dhanuḥsaṃstha

mfn. shaped like a bow

dhanuḥśata

n. 100 dhanus- or 400 hasta-s or cubits

dhanuḥśreṇī

f. equals dhanu-ś- or = mahendra-vāruṇī-.

dhanuḥstambha

tn. a kind of spasmodic contraction of the body

dhanuketakī

f. a kind of flower

dhanur

in compound for nus-.

dhanurāja

m. Name of one of the ancestors of śakya-- muni-

dhanurākāra

mfn. bow-shaped, curved, bent

dhanurākṛti

mfn. bow-shaped, curved, bent

dhanurārtnī

f. the end of a bow (where the string is fastened)

dhanurāsana

n. a particular mode of sitting

dhanurāśi

m. the sign of the zodiac Sagittarius

dhanurbhṛt

(

) m. bow-man, archer.

dhānurdaṇḍika

mf(ī-)n. (fr. dhanus-+ daṇḍa-) living by bow and club

dhanurdhara

m. equals -graha-

etc. (also as Name of śiva-)

dhanurdhara

m. the sign of the zodiac Sagittarius

dhanurdhara

m. Name of a son of dhṛta-rāṣṭra-

dhanurdhārin

(

) m. bow-man, archer.

dhanurdruma

m. "bow tree", the bamboo (used for bows)

dhanurdurga

mfn. made inaccessible or protected by a desert

dhanurdurga

n. a place so protected

(

dhanva--).

dhanurdvitīya

mfn. furnished with a bow

dhanurgraha

m. bearing a bow, an archer

dhanurgraha

m. the art of managing a bow

dhanurgraha

m. Name of a son of dhṛta-rāṣṭra-

dhanurgrāha

(

) m. an archer.

dhanurgrāhin

(

) m. an archer.

dhanurguṇa

m. a bow-string

dhanurguṇā

f. Sanseviera Zeylanica (from the leaves of which a tough thread is extracted of which bow-strings were made)

dhanurhasta

mfn. bow in hand, having a bow

dhanurjyā

f. a bowstring

dhanurjyātalaśabda

m. the mere twanging noise of the bow-string

dhanurlatā

f. a bow (literally bow-creeper)

dhanurlatā

f. equals soma-vallī-

dhanurmadhya

n. the middle part of a bow (= lastaka-)

dhanurmaha

m. the consecration of a b

dhanurmakha

varia lectio for -maha-.

dhanurmālā

f. equals -guṇā-

dhanurmārga

m.,"bow line", curve

dhanurmāsamāhātmya

n. Name of work

dhanurvakra

mfn. crooked like a bow

dhanurvaktra

m. "bow-mouth", Name of one of skanda-'s attendants

dhanurvāta

m. a kind of disease

dhanurveda

m. the science of archery, an archery treatise (regarded as an upa-veda- connected with the yajur-veda-, and derived from viśvāmitra- or bhṛgu-)

etc.

dhanurveda

m. Name of work by śārṅga-datta-

dhānurveda

m. equals dhanur-veda-

dhanurvedacintāmaṇi

m. Name of work

dhanurvedapara

mfn. devoted to archery

dhanurvedaparāyaṇa

mfn. devoted to archery

dhanurvedaprakaraṇa

n. Name of work

dhanurvedasāra

m. Name of work

dhanurvedin

mfn. versed in archery

dhanurvedin

m. Name of śiva-

dhanurvidyā

f. "bow-science", archery

dhanurvidyādīpikā

f. Name of work

dhanurvidyārambhaprayoga

m. Name of work

dhanurvṛkṣa

m. "bow-plant", the bamboo

dhanurvṛkṣa

m. Ficus Religiosa

dhanurvṛkṣa

m. Semecarpus Anacardium

dhanurvṛkṣa

m. Isora Corylifolia

dhanurvṛkṣa

m. a measure of 4 cubits

dhanurvṛkṣa

m. (geometry) an arc

dhanuryantra

n. (

) a bow (literally bow-instrument, bow stick) .

dhanuryāsa

m. Alhagi Maurorum

dhanuryaṣṭi

f. (

) a bow (literally bow-instrument, bow stick) .

dhanuryogyā

f. bow-exercise, archery

dhanuṣ

in compound for nus-.

dhanus

n. (m. gaRa ardharcādi-; see dhanu-) a bow

etc.

dhanus

n. a measure of length = 4 hasta-s or 1/2000 gavyūti-

etc.

dhanus

n. (geometry) an arc or part of a circle

dhanus

n. (astronomy) an arc or quadrant for ascertaining the sun's altitude and zenith-distance

dhanus

n. a fiddlestick

dhanus

n. the sign of the zodiac Sagittarius

dhanus

n. Buchanania Latifolia

dhanus

n. Name of śiva-

(armed with a bow

, or equals dhanuḥsvarūpa-

)

dhanus

n. a desert, arid land (see nur-/aur-.ga) .

dhanuṣa

m. Name of a ṛṣi- (ṣākhya-

) .

dhanuṣākṣa

(or ṣākṣa-?) idem or 'm. Name of a ṛṣi- (ṣākhya- ) .' ,

dhanuṣka

mfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' equals dhanus- See sa--

dhanuṣka

n. a small bow

dhānuṣka

mf(ī-)n. armed with a bow

dhānuṣka

m. bowman, archer

( dhānuṣkatā -tā- f.

varia lectio)

dhānuṣkā

f. Achyranthes Aspera

dhanuṣkāṇḍa

n. sg. bow and arrow

dhanuṣkapāla

n. gaRa kaskādi-. 1.

dhanuṣkara

m. a bow-maker

dhanuṣkara

mfn. bow in hand, armed with a bow

dhanuṣkāra

m. a bow-maker

dhanuṣkarī

f. a kind of flower

dhānuṣkari

Name of a plant (prob. wrong reading for dhanuṣ-k-)

dhanuṣkarṣaṇa

n. bending a bow

dhānuṣkatā

f. dhānuṣka

dhanuṣkhaṇḍa

n. a portion of a bow

dhanuṣkhātā

f. Name of a river

dhanuṣkoṭi

f. the curved end of bow

dhanuṣkoṭī

f. the curved end of bow

dhanuṣkṛt

m. a bow-maker

dhanuṣmat

mfn. armed with a bow, an archer

etc.

dhanuṣmat

m. Name of a mountain to the north of madhya-deśa-

dhanuṣmatī

f. Name of the tutelary deity in the family of vyāghra-pād-

dhanuṣmattā

f. archery

dhanuṣpāṇi

mfn. bow in hand, armed with a bow

dhanuṣpaṭa

m. Buchanania Latifolia

dhanuśreṇī

f. Sanseviera Zeylanica

dhanustambha

See dhanuḥ-st-.

dhanustambha

See nuḥ-st-.

dhānuṣya

m. "suitable for bows", a bamboo

dhanutṛ

mfn. running, moving quickly

dhānyadhenu

f. a heap of rice (like a cow) to be presented to a Brahman

(see -gava-).

dhārānuyāja

(rān-) m. a secondary sacrifice connected with a libation

dhārāsnuhī

f. Name of a plant

dharāsūnu

m. equals -putra-

dharmadhenu

f. equals -dogdhrī-

dharmānukāṅkṣin

mfn. striving after justice or what is right

dharmānusāra

m. conformity to law or virtue, course or practice of duty

dharmānusmṛti

f. continual meditation on the law

dharmānusmṛtyupastkāna

n. Name of work

dharmānuṣṭhāna

n. fulfilment of duty, virtuous or moral conduct

dhenu

mfn. milch, yielding or giving milk

dhenu

f. a milch cow or any cow

etc. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' of names of animals also denoting the female of any species of khaḍga--, go--, vaḍava--)

dhenu

f. any offering or present to Brahmans instead or in the shape of a cow (mostly in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' [ see ghṛta--, jala--, tila--etc.] , where it also forms diminutives; see asi--, khaḍga--)

dhenu

f. metaph. = the earth

dhenu

f. plural any beverage made of milk

dhenu

n. Name of a sāman-

(also marutāṃ dh-and dhenu-payasī- dual number)

dhenubhavyā

f. about to become a milch cow

dhenudakṣiṇa

mfn. (sacrifice) whereat a cow is given as a fee

n. cow's milk

n. a kind of gourd

n. cow and milker

m. a kind of coitus

(see dhain-)

dhenuka

m. Name of an asura- slain by kṛṣṇa- or bala-bhadra-

dhenuka

m. of a son of dur-dama-

dhenuka

m. plural Name of a people

dhenukā

f. milch cow, cow

dhenukā

f. any female animal (also a woman)

and

etc.

dhenukā

f. equals dṛṣṭa-puṣpā-

dhenukā

f. equals dhenu- in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' to form diminutive

dhenukā

f. a vein which when cut bleeds only at intervals

dhenukā

f. coriander

(varia lectio dhenikā-)

dhenukā

f. Name of the wife of kīrti-mat- (son of aṅgiras-)

dhenukā

f. of a river

dhenuka

n. Name of a herd of milch cows

dhenuka

n. Name of a place of pilgrimage

dhenukadhvaṃsin

m. "slayer of dhenuka-", kṛṣṇa-

n. cow's milk

n. a kind of gourd

m. Daucus Carota

m. "enemy of dhenukāri-", kṛṣṇa-

dhenukāri

m. a kind of small tree

dhenukāśrama

m. Name of a hermitage

dhenukasūdana

m. equals -dhvaṃsin-

dhenukavadha

m. the killing of dhenuka-

dhenukavadha

m. Name of chapter of

dhenumakṣikā

f. horse-fly, gad-fly

dhenumat

mfn. containing or yielding a nourishing beverage

dhenumat

mfn. containing the word dhenu-

dhenumatī

f. Name of the wife of deva-dyumna-

dhenumbhavyā

f. equals nu-bh-

(

Va1rtt. 3) .

dhenuṣṭarī

f. (fr. starī-) a milch cow ceasing to give milk

dhenuṣyā

f. a cow whose milk has been pledged

(see

) .

dhenuṣyita

mfn. one who has pledged the milk of his cows (?) gaRa tārakādi-.

dhenutva

n. the state of being a cow

dhṛtadhanus

m. equals -cāpa-

dhṛtrānuja

m. younger brother of dhṛta-rāṣṭra-, Name of pāṇḍu-

dhūmānubandha

m. a thick cloud of smoke

dhumāvatīmanu

m. Name of particular magical formulas

dhūmrajānu

mfn. having grey knees

dhūmravarṇāmanu

m. Name of a magic formula

dhūrtamānuṣā

f. Name of a plant (equals rāsnā-)

dīnānukampana

mfn. pitying the poor

dīrghajānuka

m. "long kneed", Ardea Sibirica

dīrghānuparivartin

mfn. having a long after-effect

dīrghatanu

mf(vī-)n. "having a long body", tall

divyamānuṣa

m. "divine man", demi-god

divyasānu

m. "divine eminence", Name of one of the viśve- devā-s

divyasraganulepin

mfn. adorned with divine garlands and unguents

doṣānudarśin

mfn. perceiving faults

doṣānuvāda

m. talking over faults, tale-bearing

drāvayitnu

mfn. melting

dravitnu

mfn. running, quick

dṛḍhadhanus

m. "having a strong bow", Name of an ancestor of gautama- (varia lectio -hanu-and ḍhāśva-)

dṛḍhahanu

m. "strong-jawed", Name of a prince

(see ḍha-dh-).

dṛḍhānutāpa

mfn. deep repentance

duḥśīrtatanu

mfn. having an indestructible body

duranubodha

mfn. difficult to be recollected

duranuga

mfn. difficult to be followed,

duranujñāta

mfn. badly allowed or granted

duranuneya

mfn. difficult to be won over

duranuneyatā

duranupālana

mfn. difficult to be kept or preserved

duranusamprāpya

mfn. difficult to be completely attained,

duranuṣṭheya

mfn. difficult to perform

duranuṣṭhita

mfn. badly done or acted

duranuvartya

mfn. difficult to follow

duratyayānukramaṇa

mfn. whose ways are past finding out (God)

durhanu

mf(u-)n. "ugly-jawed"

durmanuṣya

m. a wicked man, villain

dūṣayitnu

m. idem or 'm. corrupter (See kanyā-d-).'

duṣṭanu

mfn. having an ugly body

dviranugāna

n. Name of a sāman-,

dvitīyacakravartilakṣaṇānugama

m. Name of work

dvitīyamiśralakṣaṇānugama

m. Name of work

dvitīyapragalbhalakṣaṇaṇānugama

m. Name of work

dvitīyasvalakṣaṇānugama

m. Name of work

ekadhenu

f. a unique or excellent cow

ekānudiṣṭa

n. N. (scilicet śrāddha-) a funeral ceremony having reference to only one ancestor recently dead

ekānugāna

n. Name of a sāman-

ekaśnuṣṭi

varia lectio for - śruṣṭi-,

ekasūnu

m. an only son.

gaḍayitnu

m. idem or 'm. (fr. pr. p.)"covering" , a cloud (see gaṇḍ-.)'

(see garday-.)

gadayitnu

mfn. loquacious, talkative

gadayitnu

mfn. libidinous, lustful

gadayitnu

m. a sound

gadayitnu

m. a bow

gadayitnu

m. a Name of kāma- (the god of love)

gadayitnu

m. for gaḍay- (a cloud)

gādhisūnu

m. idem or 'm. equals -ja- '

gagnu

varia lectio for vagnu-

gaṅgāsūnu

m. (equals -ja-) bhīṣma-

garbhanud

m. equals -ghātinī-

gardayitnu

m. (equals gaḍay-) "rumbler", a cloud

garhitānuāśana

mfn. eating forbidden food,

gatānugata

n. the following what precedes, following custom gaRa akṣadyūtādi-.

gatānugatika

mfn. following what precedes, following custom or the conduct of others, imitative

gātānugatika

mf(ī-)n. (fr. gatānugata-), caused by following or imitating what precedes

gātrānulepanī

f. fragrant unguents etc. smeared upon the body, perfume for the person

gatyanusāra

m. following the way of another

gaudhenuka

n. (fr. go-dhenu-), a herd of milch-cows

gehānuprapādam

ind. so as to go into one house after the other

gehānuprapātam

ind. so as to rush into one house after the other

gehānupraveśam

ind. idem or 'ind. so as to go into one house after the other '

gehānupraveśanīya

gharmabhānu

m. equals -dīdhiti-

gharmatanu

f. Name of 2 sāman-s

gharmatanu

f. (rmasya tanvau-)

and

ghaṭajānu

mfn. having knees swollen like jars,

ghaṭajānuka

m. "having pot-shaped knees", Name of a ṛṣi-

(vara-j-C) .

ghnu

see śata-- ghnu-, parasmE-pada 1049.

ghoṣayitnu

m. a crier, proclaimer, herald

ghoṣayitnu

m. a Brahman

ghoṣayitnu

m. the Koil or Indian cuckoo

ghoṣayitnu

See 1. ghuṣ-.

ghṛtadhenu

f. ghee in the shape of a milch-cow

ghṛtānuṣikta

mf(ā-)n. sprinkled with ghee

ghṛtasnu

mfn. (1. snu-) idem or 'mfn. dropping or sprinkling ghee ' ,

ghṛtasnu

(t/a--) mfn. (fr. 2. snu-) equals -pṛṣṭha- (

) , one whose surface is brilliant with ghee

girisānu

n. equals -prastha-

glāsnu

mfn. exhausted by fatigue or disease, languid

gobhānu

m. Name of a son of vahni-

gobrāhmaṇamanuṣya

m. plural cows, Brahmans, and men

godhenu

f. a milk-cow

(see gaudhenuka-.)

gṛdhnu

mfn. (

) hasty, swift

gṛdhnu

mfn. greedily desirous of (locative case [

] or in compound

[ varia lectio ]

)

gṛdhnu

mfn. (a--,"not greedy"

)

gṛdhnu

mfn. ([ confer, compare Gothic gairns,gairnja; Lithuanian godu4s.])

gṛdhnutā

f. greediness

gṛdhnutā

f. great desire for (in compound)

gṛhānubaddha

mfn. confined to the house

gṛhītadhanus

mfn. armed with a bow,

guḍadhenu

f. a sugar-cow (presented to Brahmans)

guṇagṛdhnu

mfn. desiring good qualities

guṇānurāga

m. delight in good qualities, approbation

guṇānurodha

m. conformity to good qualities

gurutalpāpanutti

f. the violation of a teacher's bed, 107

hanu

f. (only

) "anything which destroys or injures life", a weapon

hanu

f. death

hanu

f. disease

hanu

f. various kinds of drugs

hanu

f. a wanton woman, prostitute

hanu

m. Name of a particular mixed tribe

hanu

f. (according to to

also m.;not fr. han-See cognate words below) a jaw (also h/anū-)

etc.

hanu

n. "cheek", a particular part of a spearhead

[ confer, compare Greek , , ; Latin gena,genui1nus; Gothic kinnus; German Kinn; English chin.]

hānu

m. a tooth (varia lectio hālu-)

hanubheda

m. the gaping or parting asunder of the jaws

hanubheda

m. Name of a particular form of the end of an eclipse

hanugraha

m. "jaw-seizure", lock-jaw

hānuka

mfn. killing, hurting, mischievous (equals ghātuka-)

hanukā

f. a jaw

hānuka

hāntra- See .

hanula

mfn. having strong jaws gaRa sidhmādi-.

hanumac

in compound for mat-.

hanumacchata

(for -śata-) n. Name of work on bhakti- by śrī-nivāsācārya-.

hanumad

in compound for mat-.

hanumadaṅgadasaṃvāda

hanumadaṣṭaka

hanumadaṣṭottaraśatanāman

m. Name of work

m. Name of work

n. Name of work

m. or n. Name of work

hanumaddīpa

m. Name of work

hanumaddurga

n. Name of work

hanumaddvādaśanāman

n. Name of work

hanumadekamukhakavaca

hanumadgahvara

n. (equals man-mantra-g-) Name of work

hanumadīya

mfn. written or composed by hanumat-

n. Name of work

n. Name of work

m. Name of work

m. Name of work

in compound for mat-.

hanumajjayantī

f. the day of full moon of the month caitra- (being the supposed birthday of hanumat-)

hanuman

m. Calcutta edition for mat- (in hanumādi-)

hanuman

in compound for mat-.

hanumanmālāmantra

m. Name of work

hanumanmantragahvara

n. (= mad-gahvara-) Name of work

hanumanmantroddhāra

m. Name of work

hanumannāṭaka

n. Name of a drama (containing the story of the rāmāyaṇa- dramatized equals mahā-n- q.v)

hanumannighaṇṭu

hanumanta

in compound for mat-.

hanumantabhaṭṭīya

n. Name of a poem.

hanumanteśvara

n. Name of a tīrtha-

hanumanteśvaratīrtha

n. Name of a tīrtha-

hanumat

m. "having (large) jaws", Name of a monkey-chief (one of the most celebrated of a host of semi-divine monkey-like beings, who, according to

,were created to become the allies of rāma-candra- in his war with rāvaṇa-; hanumat- was held to be a son of pavana- or māruta-,"the Wind";and is fabled to have assumed any form at will, wielded rocks, removed mountains, mounted the air, seized the clouds, and rivalled garuḍa- in swiftness of flight;according to other legends, hanumat- was son of śiva-;his mother's name was añjanā- q.v;in modern times hanumat- is a very common village god in the Dekhan, Central and Upper India see

)

etc.

hanumat

m. a particular sort of monkey, Simia Sinica

hanumatkalpa

m. Name of a chapter of the sudarśana-saṃhitā-.

hanumatkavaca

n. " hanumat-'s breast-plate", Name of various hymns (addressed to the five-headed hanumat- in various purāṇa-s).

hanumatkāvya

n. Name of work

hanumatkīrtana

n. Name of work

hanumatpaddhati

f. Name of work in 5 chapters (four of which are taken from the sudarśana-saṃhitā- and the last from the rāmāyaṇa-) describing the rites to be observed in the worship of hanumat-.

hanumatpañcāṅga

n. Name of work

hanumatpaṭala

mn. Name of work

hanumatprabandha

m. Name of work

hanumatprātaḥstotra

n. Name of work

hanumatpratiṣṭhā

f. Name of work

hanumatpratiṣṭhākalpa

m. Name of work

hanumatsahasranāman

n. Name of work

hanumatsaṃhitā

f. Name of a poem describing the festivities on the occasion of the presence of rāma- and sītā- at a pastoral dance (rāsotsava-) on the banks of the sarayū-.

hanumatstotra

n. Name of work

hanumattailavidhi

m. Name of work

hanumokṣa

m. relaxation of the jaws

hanuṣa

m. anger, wrath

hanuṣa

m. a rākṣasa-

hanusaṃhanana

n. (

) a particular form of lock-jaw.

hanusaṃhati

f. (

) a particular form of lock-jaw.

hanuṣkambha

m. equals -graha-

hanustambha

m. equals -graha-

hanusvana

m. sound made with the jaws

harasūnu

m. " śiva-'s son", Name of kārttikeya-

haribhānu

m. Name of authors

haribhānuśukla

m. Name of authors

hariharānusaraṇayātrā

f. Name of work

harihayānuja

m. " indra-'s younger brother", Name of viṣṇu-kṛṣṇa-

harisūnu

m. "son of hari-", Name of arjuna-

harṣadattasūnu

m. Name of authors

harṣayitnu

mfn. gladdening, causing delight

harṣayitnu

m. a son

harṣayitnu

n. gold

hatnu

mfn. destructive, fatal, mortal

hatnu

m. a weapon

hatnu

m. disease

himabhānu

m. "having cool lustre", the moon

hīnadīnānukampaka

mfn. feeling compassion for the wretched and miserable

hiraṇyadhanus

m. "golden-bowed", Name of a king

hiraṇyakāmadhenu

f. a golden figure representing the kāma-dhenu- (one of the 16 mahā-dāna-s;See mahā-dāna-, tulā-puruṣa-), cit-.

hiraṇyakāmadhenudāna

n. Name of work

hiraṇyakāmadhenudānaprayoga

m. Name of work

hitānubandhin

mfn. having welfare as a consequence, having salutary consequence

hitānukārin

mfn. acting conformably to what is right or kind

hnu

cl.2 A1. (

) hnut/e- (Vedic or Veda and Epic also hnauti-and hnavati-, te-; perfect tense juhnuve- grammar; Aorist ahnoṣṭa-

; future hnotā-, hnoṣyate-

; infinitive mood hnotum-

; ind.p. hnutya-

; generally with prepositions; see apa--, api--, ni-hnu-etc.) , to hide from (dative case)

; to drive or take away

: Passive voice hnūyate- (Aorist ahnāvi-) grammar : Causal hnāvayati- (Aorist ajuhnavat-)

: Desiderative juhnūṣate-

: Intensive johnūyate-, johnoti-

hnuta

mfn. taken away, withheld, secreted etc. (See apa--, ni-hnuta-etc.)

hnuti

f. abstraction, concealment, denial

homadhenu

f. a cow yielding milk for an oblation

hṛdayānuga

mf(ā-)n. gratifying the heart

hṛdayitnu

mfn.

hṛṣṭatanu

mfn. equals next

indradhanus

n. indra-'s bow, the rainbow

indrajānu

m. Name of a monkey

indrānuja

m. "the younger brother of indra-", Name of viṣṇu- or kṛṣṇa-.

indrasūnu

m. "the son of indra-", Name of the monkey-king vālin-.

indusūnu

m. Name of the planet Mercury.

inu

m. Name of a gandharva-

m. a living being

m. fire

m. a living being

m. fire

gannu-, etc. See jaga-.

jaghnu

mfn. striking, killing

jahnu

m. Name of an ancient king and sage (son of aja-mīḍha-, of su-hotra-, of kuru-, of hotraka-;ancestor of the kuśika-s;the Ganges, when brought down from heaven by bhagī-ratha-'s austerities, was forced to flow over the earth and to follow him to the ocean and thence to the lower regions in order to water the ashes of sagara-'s sons;in its course it inundated the sacrificial ground of jahnu-, who drank up its waters but consented at bhagī-ratha-'s prayer to discharge them from his ears;hence the river is regarded as his daughter)

jahnu

m. Name of viṣṇu-

jahnu

m. of a ṛṣi- of the 4th manv-antara-

(varia lectio janyu-)

jahnu

m. of a himālaya- cavern (from which the gaṅgā- is bursting forth)

jahnu

m. plural jahnu-'s race

jahnukanyā

f. " jahnu-'s daughter", gaṅgā-

jahnukanyā

f. (hnoḥ k-

)

jahnuprajā

f. idem or 'f. idem or 'f. (hnoḥ k- )' '

jahnusaptamī

f. the 7th day in the light half of vaiśākha-

jahnusutā

f. equals -kanyā-

jahnutanayā

f. idem or 'f. (hnoḥ k- )'

jaladhenu

f. a cow in the shape of water

jalamānuṣa

m. equals -pūruṣa-

jalamānuṣa

m. (n.

) equals -nara-

jalamānuṣī

f. the female of -pūruṣa-,

m. going like water

m. a father,

f. equals n/ū-

f. the soul

f. see sa--.

n. (rarely m.

) the knee

etc. (nubhyām avaniṃ-gam-"to fall to the ground on one's knees"

)

jānu

n. (as a measure of length) = 32 aṅgula-s

jānu

n. ([ confer, compare Latin genu; Gothic kniu; German Knie.])

jānucalana

n. balancing on the knees

jānudaṅgha

mf(ī-)n. reaching up or down to the knees

jānudaṅghe

ind. as far up as the knee

januḥpaddhati

f. Name of work on nativities.

jānujaṅgha

m. Name of a king

jānukā

f. (a woman) bringing forth

jānuka

n. (gaRa yāvādi-) the knee

(in compound)

jānuka

mfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' (f(ā-).)

(see ūrdhva--, virala--)

jānuka

m. Name of a man

jānukā

See jātṛ-.

jānumaṇḍala

n. idem or 'n. the knee-pan '

jānumātra

mfn. reaching up to the knee

jānumātra

n. the height of the knee

jānunikuñcana

n. a particular posture in yoga-,

jānupracalana

n. varia lectio for -cal-.

jānuprahṛta

gaRa akṣa-dyūtādi- (not in

)

jānuprahṛtaphalaka

n. the knee-pan

jānuprahṛtika

mfn.

janus

m. n. (Nominal verb [fr. n/ū-] n/ūs-

; accusative n/uṣam-

;

) birth, production, descent

janus

m. "nativity" See nuḥ-paddhati-

m. birthplace

m. a creature, being

m. creation

m. genus, class, kind

(

)

janus

m. see aṅga--.

januṣā

ind. instrumental case by birth, from birth, by nature, originally, essentially, necessarily

jānusaṃdhi

m. the knee-joint

januṣāndha

mfn. born blind

vArttika

jānuśiras

n. equals -phalaka-

jatānukampa

mfn. compassionate,

jaṭharanud

m. "removing the jaṭhara- disease", Cathartocarpus fistula

jāyānujīvin

m. (jāyānujīvin-) equals jāy/ānujīva-

jāyānujīvin

m. the husband of a harlot

jāyānujīvin

m. a pauper

jāyānujīvin

m. the crane Ardea nivea

jāyānujīvin

m. equals āśvina-

jigatnu

mfn. ( gam- reduplicated) going quickly, fleet

jigatnu

m. breath

jighatnu

mfn. ( han- reduplicated) endeavouring to hurt,

jihnu

m. plural Name of a country, iv, 2, 104 Va1rtt. 28

jīradānu

mfn. (r/a--) (

Va1rtt. 1 and vi, 1, 66) dropping or sprinkling abundantly

jīradānu

mfn. see jīva-a-

jīvadānu

(v/a--) mfn. for jīr/a-d-

jīvānusiddhikulaka

n. Name of a Jain treatise.

jīvitagridhnutā

f. great desire for life

jñānānutpāda

m. non-production of knowledge, ignorance

jyeṣṭhānujyeṣṭhatā

f. regular succession according to seniority

kaitavāpahnuti

f. a kind of rhetorical figure commentator or commentary on

kalānunādin

m. "giving out a low note", a sparrow

kalānunādin

m. the cātaka- bird

kalānunādin

m. a kind of bee

kālānunādin

for kal- q.v

kālānusāraka

n. Name of the powder called tagara-, q.v

kālānusāraka

n. yellow sandal

kālānusārin

m. benzoin or benjamin

kālānusāriṇī

f. idem or 'm. benzoin or benjamin '

kālānusārivā

f. idem or 'f. idem or 'm. benzoin or benjamin ' '

kālānusārya

m. n. idem or 'f. idem or 'f. idem or 'm. benzoin or benjamin ' ' '

kālānusāryā

f. idem or 'm. n. idem or 'f. idem or 'f. idem or 'm. benzoin or benjamin ' ' ' '

kālānusārya

mn. a yellow fragrant wood

kālānusārya

mn. Dalbergia Sissoo

kālānusārya

n. the powder tagara- q.v

kālānusāryaka

n. gum benzoin or benjamin

kālīmanu

m. plural Name of certain mystical prayers.

kalpadhenu

f. Name of the cow of plenty.

kalpānupada

n. Name of work belonging to the sāma-veda-.

kāmadhenu

f. the mythical cow of vasiṣṭha- which satisfies all desires, cow of plenty (equals surabhi-)

kāmadhenu

f. Name of a goddess

kāmadhenu

f. Name of several works

kāmadhenugaṇita

n. Name of work

kāmadhenutantra

n. Name of work on the mystical signification of the letters of the alphabet.

kāṇḍānukrama

kāṇḍānukramaṇī

f. an index of the kāṇḍa-s of the taittirīya-- saṃhitā-.

kāṇḍānukramaṇikā

f. an index of the kāṇḍa-s of the taittirīya-- saṃhitā-.

kāṇḍānusamaya

m. the performance of all prescribed acts of ritual in orderly succession for a particular object before performing the same acts in the same order for a second object commentator or commentary on

kāṇḍānusamaya

m. on

kāṇḍānusamaya

m. on

(see padārthānusamaya-).

kāntānuvṛtta

m. compliance with a beloved one.

kaṇṭatanu

f. a sort of Solanum

karatanu

m. (see karatantarvika-)

karmānubandha

m. connection with or dependance upon acts

karmānubandhin

mfn. connected with or involved in works

karmānurūpa

mfn. according to action, according to function or duty

karmānurūpatas

ind. conformably to act or function

karmānusāra

m. consequence of or conformity to acts

karmānusāratas

ind. according to one's deeds

karmānuṣṭhāna

n. the act of practising one's duties, discharging peculiar functions

karmānuṣṭhāyin

mfn. practising duties, performing rites etc.

karṇānuja

m. " karṇa-'s younger brother", Name of yudhiṣṭhira-

karpāsadhenumāhātmya

n. Name of work

kāruṇyadhenu

m. "compassion-cow", Name of buddha-

kāruṇyadhenu

(applied to buddha-),

kāśimanuja

m. a man from kāśi-

kaśyapasūnujyeṣṭha

m. "eldest of the sons of kaśyapa-", Name of hiraṇyākṣa-

kathānurāga

(kathānu-) m. taking pleasure in a story, attention to a discourse.

kavatnu

mfn. (fr. 2. kava-), avaricious, stingy

kāvyakāmadhenu

f. Name of a commentator or commentary by vopa-deva- on his work called kavi-kalpadruma-.

kevalamānuṣa

m. a mere man (and nothing else)

khaḍgadhenu

f. a female rhinoceros

khaḍgadhenu

f. (equals asi-dh-) a small knife

khaḍgidhenukā

f. a female rhinoceros

khānula

m. Name of a man (father of bahula-

;of vopula-

.).

kiṃnu

See sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order k/im-.

kiṃtanu

-tu-ghna-, etc. See k/im-.

kiṃtanu

m. an insect (described as having eight legs and a very slender body), a species of spider

knu

or knū- cl.9 P. A1. knunāti-, nīte- or knūnāti-, nīte-, to sound

kramānusāra

m. regular order, due arrangement.

kramānuyāyin

mfn. following the methodical order.

krandanu

m. roaring, shaking

krayavikrayānuśaya

m. repenting of a purchase, annulling of purchase or sale

krītānuśaya

m. repenting a purchase, returning a purchase upon the seller (admissible in some cases by law).

kriyānurūpa

mfn. conformable to the act, according to the action.

kṛśānu

m. (fr. kṛś-for kṛṣ-?),"bending the bow", N. applied to a good archer (connected with /astṛ-,"an archer", though sometimes used alone; kṛśānu-, according to some, is a divine being, in character like rudra- or identified with him;armed with the lightning he defends the "heavenly" soma- from the hawk, who tries to steal and bear it from heaven to earth)

kṛśānu

m. Name of agni- or fire

kṛśānu

m. (hence) fire

kṛśānu

m. Name of viṣṇu-

kṛśānu

m. of a gandharva-

kṛśānu

m. Plumbago zeylanica

kṛśānuga

m. Naravelia zeylanica

kṛśānuka

([

]) mfn. containing the word kṛśānu- gaRa goṣad-ādi-.

kṛśānuretas

m. "whose semen virile is fire", Name of śiva-

kṛśānuśakala

m. a spark of fire,

kṛṣṇasūnu

m. equals -ja-

kṛtābhyanujña

mfn. one who has obtained leave,

kṛtānukara

mfn. imitating what has been done by another, following another's example, not independent

kṛtānukṛtakārin

mfn. doing anything before and after

kṛtānukūlya

mfn. compliant, kind, favouring.

kṛtānusāra

m. established practice, custom.

kṛtānuvyādha

mfn. mixed, combined

kṛtānuyātra

mfn. accompanied by,

kṛtatanutrāṇa

mfn. covered with armour, mailed.

kṛtnu

mfn. working well, able to work, skilful, clever, an artificer or mechanic, artist

kṛtnu

according to to some also,"winning the prize, victorious".

kṛtnu

m. Name of a ṛṣi- (author of

)

kṛtnu

kṛtya- See 1. kṛ-.

kṣaṇamātrānurāgin

mfn. one whose affection lasts only a moment

kṣaṇanu

m. a wound, sore

kṣatradharmānuga

mfn. following or observing the duty of a soldier.

kṣepnu

m. springing or flying (of a bowstring)

kṣipnu

mfn. (

) equals nirākariṣṇu- ("throwing obstacles in the way" , obstructive

;scornful or fond of abusing

)

kṣīrābdhimānuṣī

f. idem or 'mfn. dwelling in the ocean of milk, '

kṣīradhenu

f. a milk-cow (symbolically represented by milk etc. offered as a gift to a Brahman),

kṣitidhenu

f. the earth considered as a milch-cow

kṣudrānukṣudra

n. plural, (with śikṣāpadāni-) minor observances of discipline,

kumbhahanu

m. "having a chin shaped like a kumbha-", Name of a rākṣasa-

kusumadhanus

m. equals -kārmuka-

kutanu

m. "deformed", Name of kubera- (this deity being of a monstrous appearance, having three legs and but eight teeth)

labdhānujña

mfn. one who has obtained leave of absence

lalitānurāga

m. Name of a poet

lāṭānuprāśa

m. " laṭa- repetition", the repetition of a word in the same sense but with a different application

lavaṇadhenu

f. an offering of salt, a cow symbolically represented with salt

līlāmānuṣavigraha

mfn. having or taking a human form merely for amusement or in mere semblance (said of kṛṣṇa-)

līlāmanuṣya

m. a sham man, one not really a man

līlātanu

f. a form assumed for mere sport or pleasure

liṅgānuśāsana

n. the doctrine or laws of grammatical gender

liṅgānuśāsana

n. Name of various works.

liṅgānuśāsanavṛtti

f. Name of work

lohitajahnu

m. Name of a man (plural his descendants)

lokakṛtnu

mfn. creating space

(prob. uloka-k-).

lokānugraha

m. the welfare of the world, prosperity of mankind

lokānugrahapravṛtta

m. Name of gautama- buddha-

lokānukampaka

mfn. pitying the world

lokānurāga

m. the love of mankind, universal love or benevolence

lokānuvṛtta

n. obedience of the people

lokānuvṛtti

f. accommodating one's self to other, dependence on others

lokasīmānurodhin

mfn. conforming to ordinary limits, moderate,

madayitnu

m. "intoxicating etc.", (only

) the god of love

madayitnu

m. a distiller of spirituous liquor

madayitnu

m. a drunken man

madayitnu

m. a cloud

madayitnu

mn. spirituous liquor.

mādayitnu

mfn. intoxicating

madhudhenu

f. honey offered to Brahmans in the form of a cow

mahābhāratādhyāyānukramaṇī

f. Name of work

mahādānānukramaṇikā

f. Name of work

mahādhanurdhara

m. (

) a great archer.

mahādhanus

mfn. having a great bow (śiva-)

mahādhanuṣmat

m. (

) a great archer.

mahāghoṣānugā

f. Name of a tantra- deity

mahāhanu

mfn. having large jaws

mahāhanu

m. Name of a nāga-

mahāhanu

m. of a dānava-

mahāhanu

m. of a being attending on śiva-

mahājānu

m. "large-kneed", Name of a Brahman

mahājānu

m. of one of śiva-'s attendants

mahāmantrānusāriṇī

f. Name of a Buddhist goddess

mahāmanuṣya

m. a man of high rank

mahāmanuṣya

m. Name of a poet

mahānubhāva

mf(ā-)n. (hān-) of great might, mighty

etc.

mahānubhāva

mf(ā-)n. high-minded, noble-mighty, generous

mahānubhāvatā

f. (

[in Prakrit])magnanimity, generosity.

mahānubhāvatva

n. (

) magnanimity, generosity.

mahānurāga

(hān-) m. great love, excessive affection

mahānuśaṃsaka

(hān-) mfn. being of great comfort or advantage

mahāvrataprayogānukrama

m. Name of work

mahīsūnu

m. equals -suta-

mālāmanu

m. a sacred text or spell written in the form of a wreath

mandānusārin

mfn. passing away slowly

mandasānu

m. sleep or life

(prob. wrong reading for prec.)

maṇḍayitnu

m. one who adorns,

maṇḍayitnu

a lover,

maṇḍūkānuvṛtti

f. "frog-course", skipping over or omitting at intervals

(see maṇḍūka-pluti-).

maṇidhanu

m. (

) (Gaut

) "jewel-bow", a rain-bow.

maṇidhanus

n. (Gaut

) "jewel-bow", a rain-bow.

maṇisānu

m. "jewel-ridged", Name of mount meru-

mannurāma

(?) m. Name of an author

manonuga

mfn. "suiting the mind", agreeable, pleasing

manonuga

m. Name of a district

manonukūla

mfn. pleasant to the mind,

mantrānukramaṇikā

mantrānuṣṭhāna

n. Name of work

mantrānuṣṭhānāṅgatarpaṇa

n. Name of work

mantrarājānuṣṭhānakrama

m. Name of work

mantrisūnu

m. equals -putra-

manu

mfn. thinking, wise, intelligent

manu

m. "the thinking creature(?)", man, mankind

(also as opp. to evil spirits

;the ṛbhu-s are called manor n/apātaḥ-,the sons of man,

)

manu

m. the Man par excellence or the representative man and father of the human race (regarded in the

as the first to have instituted sacrifices and religious ceremonies, and associated with the ṛṣi-s kaṇva- and atri-;in the

described as dividing his possessions among some of his sons to the exclusion of one called nābhā-nediṣṭha- q.v;called sāṃvaraṇa- as author of

; āpsava- as author of

;in

he is numbered among the 31 divine beings of the upper sphere, and

as father of men even identified with prajā-pati-;but the name manu- is especially applied to 14 successive mythical progenitors and sovereigns of the earth, described

and in later works as creating and supporting this world through successive antara-s or long periods of timeSee manv-antara-below;the first is called svāyambhuva- as sprung from svayam-bhū-,the Self-existent, and described in

as a sort of secondary creator, who commenced his work by producing 10 prajāpati-s or maharṣi-s, of whom the first was marīci-,Light;to this manu- is ascribed the celebrated"code of manu-"See manu-saṃhitā-,and two ancient sūtra- works on kalpa- and gṛhya- id est sacrificial and domestic rites;he is also called hairaṇyagarbha- as son of hiraṇya-garbha-, and prācetasa-, as son of pra-cetas-;the next 5 manu-s are called svārociṣa-, auttami-, tāmasa-, raivata-, cākṣuṣa- see

;the 7th manu-, called vaivasvata-,Sun-born, or from his piety, satya-vrata-,is regarded as the progenitor of the present race of living beings, and said, like the Noah of the Old Testament, to have been preserved from a great flood by viṣṇu- or brahmā- in the form of a fish: he is also variously described as one of the 12 āditya-s, as the author of

,as the brother of yama-, who as a son of he Sun is also called vaivasvata-, as the founder and first king of ayodhyā-, and as father of ilā- who married budha-, son of the Moon, the two great solar and lunar races being thus nearly related to each otherSee

;the 8th manu- or first of the future manu-s according to to

,will be sāvarṇi-;the 9th dakṣa-sāvarṇi-;the 12th rudra-sāvarṇi-;the 13th raucya- or deva-sāvarṇi-;the 14th bhautya- or indra-- sāvarṇi-)

manu

m. thought (equals manas-)

manu

m. a sacred text, prayer, incantation, spell (equals mantra-)

manu

m. Name of an agni-

m. of a rudra-

m. of kṛśāśva-

m. of an astronomer

m. (plural) the mental Powers

manu

m. Name of the number"fourteen"(on account of the 14 manu-s)

manu

f. manu-'s wife (equals manāvī-)

; Trigonella Corniculata

[ confer, compare Gothic manna; German Mannus,son ofTuisto[TM], mentioned by Tacitus, in his work Germania,as the mythical ancestor of the West-Germans,mann,man; Anglo-Saxon man; English man.]

manubhū

m. a man

manudivi

(?) , Name of work

manuga

m. Name of a son of dyuti-mat-

manuga

n. Name of the varṣa- ruled by him

manuja

m. " manu--born", a man

etc.

manujā

f. a woman

manujādhipa

m. "sovereign of men", a prince, king

manujaloka

m. "world of men", the earth

manujanātha

m. "lord of men", a prince, king (

)

manujapati

m. "lord of men", a prince, king (

etc.)

manujāpati

m. "sovereign of men", a prince, king

manujāta

mfn. (m/anu--) descended from men or from manu-

manujāta

m. a man

manujātmaja

m. "son of man", a man,

manujātmajā

f. a woman

manujavyāghra

m. "man-tiger", any eminent or illustrious man

manujendra

m. "lord of men", a prince, king

( manujendraputra jendra-putra- m. manujendraputrī jendra-putrī- f.a prince, princess

)

manujendraputra

m. manujendra

manujendraputrī

f. manujendra

manujeśvara

m. equals manuj/ondra-

manujī

f. a woman

manujīkṛ

P. -karoti-, to change into a man

manujottana

m. best of men

manujyeṣṭha

m. a sword

manukapāla

n. manu-'s bowl or dish

manukulāditya

m. Name of a king

manumuktāvali

f. Name of work

manupraṇīta

mfn. taught or promulgated by manu- ( manupraṇītatva -tva- n.)

n. manupraṇīta

m. Name of

m. Name of

(m/anu--) mfn. beloved by men

manurāj

m. "king of men", Name of kubera-

manurhita

(nus-+ h-) mfn. friendly to men, good for men

manus

m. man or manu- (the father of men)

(see m/anur-hita-, manuṣ-v/at-,and m/ānuṣa-).

manuṣa

m. (or ṣ/a-

) (fr. manus-) a man

mānuṣa

mf(ī-)n. or mānuṣ/a- (fr. manus-) belonging to mankind, human

etc.

mānuṣa

mf(ī-)n. favourable or propitious to men, humane

mānuṣa

m. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-).) a man, human being (plural the races of men, 5 in number)

etc.

mānuṣa

m. Name of the signs of the zodiac Gemini, Virgo, and Libra

mānuṣa

n. the condition or manner or action of men, humanity, manhood

etc.

mānuṣa

n. Name of a place

mānuṣāda

m. a man-eater

mānuṣadaivika

mfn. human and divine

mānuṣādatva

n. cannibalism

mānuṣaka

See laiva-m-.

mānuṣalaukika

mfn. belonging to the world of men, human

mānuṣamāṃsāda

mfn. eating man's flesh

manusaṃhitā

f. Name of the collection of laws commonly known as"the laws or institutes of manu-"

manusaṃhitā

f. of a tantra- work

mānuṣanikāśana

mfn. human-like,

mānuṣapradhana

(m/ān-) mfn. fighting for men

mānuṣarākṣasa

m. a fiend in human form

mānuṣarākṣasī

f. a she-demon in human form

mānuṣasambhava

mfn. coming from or produced by men

mānuṣatā

mānuṣatva

n. the state or condition or nature of man, manhood, manliness, humanity

manusava

m. equals manuṣya-sava-

(others" manu-'s libation") .

manuṣendra

wrong reading for manujendra- q.v

manuṣī

f. a woman

mānuṣī

f. a woman

etc.

mānuṣī

f. (scilicet cikitsā-),"human medicine", a branch of medicine, the administering of drugs (opp. to āsurī-and daivīcik-)

mānuṣībhū

P. -bhavati-, to become a man

mānuṣibuddha

m. a human buddha- (opp. to dhyāni-b-)

manusmṛti

f. manu-'s law-book

manusmṛtimāhātmya

n. Name of work

mānuṣopeta

mfn. joined with human effort

manuśreṣṭha

m. "best among men", Name of viṣṇu-

manuṣvat

ind. (fr. manus-) as (among or for or with) men

manuṣvat

ind. like or as (with) manu-

manuṣya

mf(ā-)n. human, manly, useful or, friendly to man

manuṣya

m. a man, human being

etc.

manuṣya

m. a man (as opp. to woman)

manuṣya

m. a husband

manuṣya

m. a class of deceased ancestors (those who receive the piṇḍa- offering)

mānuṣya

n. (fr. manuṣya-) human nature or condition, humanity, manhood, manliness

etc.

mānuṣya

mf(ā-)n. human, manly

manuṣyacara

mfn. having dealings or intercourse with men

manuṣyacchandasa

n. the metre of men

manuṣyacitta

n. the thought or will of men

manuṣyadeva

m. "man-god", a Brahman

manuṣyadeva

m. a prince, king

manuṣyadharma

m. the law or duty or state or character of man

manuṣyadharma

m. (with uttara-), highest condition

manuṣyadharman

m. "having the nature or character of man", Name of kubera-

manuṣyadharman

m. = child of men

manuṣyadurga

mfn. inaccessible owing to men

manuṣyadurga

n. a place inaccessible etc.

manuṣyagandha

m. human odour

manuṣyagandharva

m. plural the human gandharva-s (inferior to the deva-- gandha-)

manuṣyagavī

f. plural Name of particular verses or formulas

manuṣyagranthi

m. a knot formed by men

m. man-stealing

m. a man-stealer

n. sin of men

mfn. born of men

mfn. begotten by a man

manuṣyajāta

n. the human race, mankind

manuṣyajātaka

n. Name of work

manuṣyajāti

f. equals -jāta-

mānuṣyaka

mfn. human

etc.

mānuṣyaka

n. human nature or condition

(locative case as far as lies in man's power

)

mānuṣyaka

n. a multitude of men

manuṣyakāra

m. the deed of a man, human exertion

manuṣyakāya

mfn. having a human body,

manuṣyakilbiṣa

n. transgression against men

manuṣyakṛta

(ṣy/a--.) mfn. committed against men

manuṣyālaya

(in the beginning of a compound) human dwelling, house

f. Name of work

n. Name of work

m. the world of men

m. plural men and not men,

manuṣyamāraṇa

n. manslaughter, (unintentionally) killing a man

manuṣyamātra

mfn. only a man

manuṣyanāma

m. plural Name of particular verses or formulas

manuṣyanāman

n. a human name

manuṣyapātra

n. cup or bowl of men,

manuṣyapota

m. a little boy

manuṣyaprakṛti

mfn. of human origin

manuṣyarāj

m. a king of men,

manuṣyarāja

m. a human king

manuṣyarājan

m. idem or 'm. a human king '

manuṣyaratha

m. chariot of men

manuṣyarūpa

n. human form

manuṣyasabhā

f. an assembly or crowd or meeting-place of men

manuṣyasākṣya

n. the presence of men as witnesses

manuṣyasākṣye

ind. in the presence of men

manuṣyasava

m. libation or sacrifice (performed) by men

manuṣyaśiras

m. a particular aquatic animal with a human head

manuṣyaśoṇita

n. human blood

manuṣyaśṛṅga

n. "man's-horn"(as an example of what cannot exist), impossibility, sāṃkhya-s. Scholiast or Commentator

manuṣyat

ind. equals next

(printed ṣv/at-; see

manuṣyatā

f. manhood, humanity, the state or condition of man (accusative with ā-i-,to become a man)

manuṣyatrā

ind. among men, to men

manuṣyatva

n. equals -tā- f. (accusative with yā-,to become a man)

manuṣyaviś

f. (

) mankind, the human race.

manuṣyaviśa

n. (

) mankind, the human race.

manuṣyaviśā

f. (

) mankind, the human race.

manuṣyayajña

m. "man-offering", the act of devotion due to men (id est atithi-pūjana-,the honouring of guests or hospitality, one of the 5 mahā-yājñas- q.v)

manuṣyayāna

n. a litter, palanquin

manuṣyayaśasa

n. human glory or splendour

manuṣyayaśasin

mfn. possessing human glory

manuṣyayoni

m. human womb

manuṣyāyuṣa

n. the life-time of men

manuṣyendra

m. "best of men"(in addressing a good man)

manuṣyeṣu

m. or f. (?) an arrow thrown by men

manuṣyeśvara

m. "lord of men", a prince, king

mānutantavya

m. (fr. manu-tantu-) patronymic of aikādaśākṣa-

manutantu

m. Name of a man

manutīrtha

n. Name of a tīrtha-

manutva

n. the rank or office of a manu-

manuvaśa

m. Name of a king

manuvat

ind. like men or as becomes men

manuvat

ind. as with manu-

manuvṛta

mfn. chosen by men

manuyuga

n. the age or period of a manu- (= 311, 040, 000 years)

mārgadhenu

m. a yojana-, a measure of distance (perhaps originally"a mile-stone in the form of a cow")

mārgadhenuka

n. a yojana-, a measure of distance (perhaps originally"a mile-stone in the form of a cow")

mārgavaśānuga

(

) mfn. going or situated along the road.

mārutasūnu

(

) m. "son of the wind", Name of hanumat-.

marutsūnu

"son of the Wind", Name of hanumat-

marutsūnu

m. of bhīma-

māsānumāsika

mfn. performed or occurring every month, monthly

mataṃgānucara

m. the keeper or driver of an elephant

matānujñā

f. admission of a fault in one's own reasoning while insisting on a similar one in that of the opponent

matimānuṣa

(?) m. Name of work

meghanādānulāsaka

m. "rejoicing in the rumbling of clouds", a peacock

meghanādānulāsin

m. "rejoicing in the rumbling of clouds", a peacock

menula

m. Name of a man

mithyātvānumānakhaṇḍana

n. Name of work

mithyāvadhyānukīrtana

n. the proclaiming that any one has been unjustly sentenced to death

mitrabhānu

m. Name of a king

mitrānugrahaṇa

n. the act of favouring friends or causing them prosperity

mlāsnu

mfn. idem or 'mfn. fading, withering away, languishing '

moṣayitnu

m. (fr. Causal) a Brahman

moṣayitnu

m. the Indian cuckoo

mṛṣānuśāsin

(mṛṣān-) mfn. punishing unjustly

mṛṣṭānulepana

mfn. smeared with ointment

mṛtitattvānusmaraṇa

n. Name of work

muñjasūnu

m. "son of muñja-", Name of dāsa-śarman- (q.v)

nabhanu

nadanu

m. noise, din

nadanu

m. the sound of approbation

nadanu

m. war, battle

nadanu

m. a cloud (nad/anu-)

nadanu

m. a lion

nadanu

m. a cloud,

nadanumat

mfn. roaring, thundering

nāgahanu

m. Unguis Odoratus

nāmaliṅgānuśāsana

n. Name of work

nāmānuśāsana

n. Name of a dictionary of nouns.

nānārthaśabdānuśāsana

n. Name of dictionary

nānātanu

mfn. one who has assumed different bodies

nandasūnu

m. equals -suta-,

nandayitnu

m. joy,

nandayitnu

a son,

nandayitnu

mfn. joyful, ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding

nanu

See nan/u-

nanu

ind. (2. n/a-+ nu-) not, not at all, never

; (interr.) not? is it not? = nonne

etc. etc. (hence often =) certainly, surely, indeed, no doubt (especially in questions amounting to an affirmation exempli gratia, 'for example' nanv ahaṃ te priyaḥ-,am I not your friend id est certainly I am your friend

[so also na ca-,there can be no doubt

],or to a request exempli gratia, 'for example' nanu gacchāmi- bhoḥ-,surely I may go

, and even as a responsive particle exempli gratia, 'for example' akārṣīḥ kaṭamnanu karomi bhoḥ-,indeed I have made it

;with another interr. or an imperative = pray, please exempli gratia, 'for example' nanu ko bhavān-,pray who are you?

; nanūcyatām-,please tell

;in argument often as an inceptive particle implying doubt or objection,"now it may be said, well, but then"etc., especially in nanv astu-,or nanu mā bhūt-tathāpi-,well, be it so or not so-nevertheless)

nanu

ind. a vocat. particle implying kindness or reproach or perplexity etc.

nānurakta

mfn. not attached, unkind

(varia lectio)

nārāyaṇadīkṣitasūnu

m. Name of author

natajānu

f. a knockkneed girl unfit for marriage,

navanītadhenu

f. a quantity of butter presented to Brahmans (see under dhenu-)

navānupūrvasamāpattikuśala

m. Name of buddha-

navatidhanus

m. Name of an ancestor of gautama- buddha-

navyānumitiparāmarśakāryakāraṇabhāvavicāra

m. Name of work

navyānumitiparāmarśavicāra

m. Name of work

nicaknu

m. Name of a prince

(varia lectio nicakru-).

nihnu

A1. -hnavate- (rarely P. ti-), to make reparation or amends to (dative case) for (accusative) ; to beg pardon for (see below)

; to disown, deny, dissimulate, conceal, evade

nihnuta

mfn. denied, disowned, concealed, hidden, secreted, given out for something else

nihnuti

f. denial, dissimulation, reserve, secrecy, concealment

nihnuvana

n. idem or 'f. denial, dissimulation, reserve, secrecy, concealment '

nihnuvana

n. varia lectio for hnavana-

nihnuvāna

mfn. dissimulating, prevaricating. insinuating

niḥsūnu

mfn. sonless

nijānandānubhūtiprakaraṇa

n. Name of work

nijānukā

f. shaking or trembling of the knees,

nīlasarasvatīmanu

m. Name of an incantation or magic. formula

nīmānuja

m. Name of a vaiṣṇava- teacher

niranubandha

mfn. showing no secondary or symptomatic affection

niranubandhaka

mfn. having no indicatory letter

niranuga

mfn. having no followers, unattended

niranugraha

mfn. ungracious, unkind

niranukrośa

mf(ā-)n. pitiless, hard-hearted ( niranukrośatā -tā- f.)

niranukrośa

m. mercilessness, cruelty

niranukrośakārin

mfn. acting pitilessly

niranukrośatā

f. niranukrośa

niranukrośatas

ind. in a cruel manner

niranukrośayukta

mfn. uncompassionate, hard-hearted

niranumāna

mfn. not bound to conclusions or consequences

niranunāsika

mfn. not marked with the anunāsika-, not nasal

niranurodha

mfn. unfavourable, unfriendly, unamiable ( niranurodhatva -tva- n.)

niranurodha

mfn. unkind towards, regardless of (locative case)

niranurodhatva

n. niranurodha

niranuśaya

mfn. without the consequences or results of acts

niranuyojya

mfn. unblamable, faultless

niranuyojyānuyoga

m. the blaming of anything faultless

nirbhinnatanu

mfn. having the body pierced through or transfixed

nirmanuja

mfn. unpeopled, uninhabited, desolate

nirmānuṣa

mf(ā-)n. unpeopled, desolate

nirmānuṣe

ind. in a solitary place

nirmānuṣīkṛ

to depopulate

nirmanuṣya

mf(ā-)n. idem or 'mfn. unpeopled, uninhabited, desolate '

(with mātaṅga- m.an elephant without riders

)

nirmanuṣyamṛga

mfn. (a forest) without men or deer

niṣatsnu

mfn. sitting fast

nityakarmānuṣṭhānakrama

m. Name of work

nityānubaddha

mfn. always approached or resorted to

nityānubaddhā

f. (with devatā-) tutelary deity

nityānugṛhīta

mfn. constantly maintained or kept (fire)

nityānusaṃdhāna

n. Name of work

nityānuṣṭhānapūjāpaddhati

f. Name of work

niyatānupūrvya

mfn. limited as to the order of words

nonuva

mfn. (4. nu-, Intensive) sounding, resounding

(sadā-n-).

nṛpānucara

m. a king's attendant, a minister

nṛpasnuṣā

f. the daughter-in-law of a king

nyāyānusāraśāstra

n. Name of work

oṣadhyanuvāka

m. a particular anuvāka-.

pādānudhyāna

mfn. "thought of by (the feet of) such a one", the rightful successor of any one (thought of by his predecessor)

pādānudhyāta

mfn. "thought of by (the feet of) such a one", the rightful successor of any one (thought of by his predecessor)

padānuga

mfn. following at one's (genitive case) heels, an attendant or companion

(in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound')

padānuga

mfn. suitable, agreeable to

pādānukramaṇī

f. Name of work

pādānuprāsa

m. alliteration in verses

padānurāga

m. a servant

padānurāga

m. an army

padanuṣaṅga

m. anything appended to a pada- or quarter of a verse

(see padānuṣ-).

padānuṣaṅga

m. anything added or appended to a pada-

(see pad-anuṣ-).

padānusāra

m. following at one's heels

padānusāra

m. reṇa upa-labh-, to overtake

padānuśāsana

n. the science of words, grammar

padānusvāra

n. Name of particular sāman-s

padārthānusamaya

m. the performance of one ritual act for all objects in orderly succession before performing another act for all objects in the same order

etc. (see kāṇḍānus-)

padmasnuṣā

f. (

) Name of gaṅgā-

padmasnuṣā

f. of śrī-

padmasnuṣā

f. of durgā-.

pakṣimanuṣyālayalakṣaṇa

n. Name of work

palālānupalāla

m. dual number palāla- and anupalāla- (see above)

pañcadhanus

m. Name of a prince

pañcalakṣaṇyanugama

m. Name of work

pāñcālānuyāna

n. Name of a particular play with puppets

(see next f.)

pañcamantratanu

m. "whose body consists of 5 mantra-s", Name of śiva- (with śaiva-s)

pañcānugāna

n. Name of several sāman-s

pāṇinīyaliṅgānuśāsana

n. Name of work

pāṇnu

locative case of 2. pāṇi- in compound

pāṇnukarana

n. the taking (of a bride) by the hand, marrying

panu

panū f. admiration

pāpānubandha

m. bad result or consequences

pāpānubandha

mfn. ill-intentioned

pāpānuvasita

mfn. addicted to sin, sinful

pāpāpanutti

f. "removal of sins", expiation

paracchandānuvartana

n. paracchanda

pāradhenu

m. Name of a low mixed caste, an āyogava- (q.v)

pāradhenuka

m. Name of a low mixed caste, an āyogava- (q.v)

parāmarśapūrvapakṣagranthānugama

m. Name of work

parasparānumati

f. mutual concurrence or assent

paritatnu

mfn. embracing, surrounding

pārśvānucara

m. "attending at the side", an attendant, body. servant

paryanubandha

m. ( bandh-) binding round

paryanuyoga

m. asking, inquiring, questioning

paryanuyoga

m. an inquiry with the object of refuting a statement

paryanuyoga

m. censure, reproach

paryanuyojya

mfn. to be blamed or censured ( paryanuyojyopekṣaṇa jyopekṣaṇa- n.omitting to blame what ought to be blamed)

paryanuyojyopekṣaṇa

n. paryanuyojya

paryanuyoktavya

mfn. to be questioned, to be urged to answer a question

paryanuyuj

(ind.p. -yujya-

), to ply with questions.

paryanuyukta

mfn. asked, questioned

paryavanud

P. -nudati-, to push towards (accusative)

paśānupūrvī

f. a repeated or recurring series

paścānutāpa

m. repentance, regret

paścimānupāka

m. Name of a prince

patanu

m. a falcon,

payomānuṣī

f. a water-nymph

phalānubandha

m. sequence of results, the consequences or results of (compound),

phalānumeya

mfn. inferable from consequences or roots

phalānusaraṇa

n. rate or aggregate of profits

phālgunānuja

m. "younger brother of the month phālguna-", the vernal month caitra-

pīyatnu

mfn. scornful

pīyūṣabhānu

m. equals -dyuti-

poṣayitnu

mfn. causing to grow or thrive, nourishing, fostering

poṣayitnu

m. the Indian cuckoo

prabhānu

m. Name of a son of kṛṣṇa-

prabhāsakṣetratīrthayātrānukrama

m. Name of work

pradakṣiṇānuloma

mfn. respectful and obedient (said of a slave)

prāganurāga

m. former affection

pragatajānu

mfn. having the knees far apart, bandy-legged, bow-legged

pragatajānuka

mfn. having the knees far apart, bandy-legged, bow-legged

prajanu

mf. the organ of generation (of females)

prajanuka

(?) m. the body

prajānuka

m. the body.

prajotpattyānupūrvyeṇa

ind. according to seniority,

prākṛtakāmadhenu

f. Name of work

prākṛtamānuṣa

m. a common or ordinary man

prākṛtanāmaliṅgānuśāsana

pramāṇānurūpa

mfn. corresponding to (a person's) physical strength

pranud

mfn. wrong reading for -ṇud- (q.v)

prānuga

mfn. following a person's breath id est following him (accusative) unto death

prapañcamithyātvānumāna

n. Name of work

prapañcamithyātvānumānakhaṇḍana

n. Name of work

prapañcamithyātvānumānakhaṇḍanaparaśu

m. Name of work

prāptānujña

mfn. allowed to withdraw or depart

prāsādānukīrtana

n. Name of work

prasaṅgānusaṅgena

ind. by the way, by the by, sāṃkhya-s. Scholiast or Commentator

praśnānuṣṭhānapaddhati

prasnu

P. A1. -snauti-, -snute-, to emit fluid, pour forth, flow, drip, distil

; (A1.) to yield milk (Aorist prāsnoṣṭa-)

: Desiderative -susnūṣiṣyate-,

Va1rtt. 2

prasnuṣā

f. the wife of a grandson

prasnuta

mfn. yielding milk

etc.

prasnutastanī

f. having breasts that distil milk (through excess of maternal love)

prastāvānugatam

ind. on a suitable occasion

pratanu

mfn. very thin or fine, delicate, minute, slender, small, insignificant

(also -ka-; pratanukam -kam- ind.)

pratanukam

ind. pratanu

prātaranuvāka

m. "morning recitation", the hymn with which the prātaḥ-savana- begins

prathitānurāga

mfn. manifesting or showing affection

pratijñālakṣaṇānugama

m. Name of work

pratilomānuloma

mfn. speaking against or for anything

pratilomānuloma

mfn. (in the beginning of a compound and pratilomānulomam am- ind.) in inverted order or course and in the natural order or course

pratilomānulomam

ind. pratilomānuloma

pratilomānulomatas

ind. in an unfriendly and friendly manner

pratinu

P. -nauti-, to commend, approve

pratinud

P. A1. -nudati-, te-, to thrust back, repulse, ward off

prātipadikānurodhāt

ind. prātipadika

prativinud

P. -nudati-, to get rid of.

pratyabhyanujñā

f. ( jñā-) leave, permission

pratyabhyanujñāta

mfn. dismissed on taking leave, allowed to depart

pratyakṣānumāna

n. Name of work

pratyakṣānumānaśabdakhaṇḍana

n. Name of work

pratyakṣānumānaṭīkā

f. Name of work

pratyanubhū

P. -bhavati-, to enjoy singly or severally

pratyanujñā

P. -jānāti-, to refuse, reject, spurn

pratyanumāna

n. a contrary deduction, opposite conclusion

pratyanunī

P. A1. -nayati-, te-, to speak friendly words, induce to yield, persuade

; (A1.) to beg a person's (accusative) pardon for (accusative)

pratyanuprāsa

m. a kind of alliteration

commentator or commentary

pratyanusmṛ

P. -smarati-, to remember

pratyanutap

Passive voice -tapyate-, to feel subsequent remorse, repent, regret

pratyanuvāśita

mfn. ( vāś-) roared against, answered by roaring

pratyanuyāc

P. -yācati-, to beseech, implore (with accusative)

pratyanuyoga

m. a counter-question, question in return

prayājānuyāja

m. plural preliminary offering and after-sacrifice

pṛdākusānu

(p/ṛd-) mfn. having a surface like that of a serpent, smooth or shining like a serpent

premarasāyanānurāga

m. Name of work

priyamālyānulepana

m. "fond of garlands and ornaments", Name of an attendant of skanda-

priyatanu

(priy/a--) mfn. loving the body, loving life

pṛṣṭhānuga

(

) mfn. going behind, following.

pṛṣṭhānugāmin

(

) mfn. going behind, following.

pṛṣṭhānupṛṣṭhaka

mf(ikā-)n. being behind a person's back, pursuing, following.

pṛthāsūnu

m. "id.", Name of yudhi-ṣṭhira-

pucchalakṣaṇānugama

m. Name of work

pumanujā

f. "born after a male child", having an elder brother

(see puṃsānuja-).

puṃsānuja

m. (instrumental case of puṃs-+ an-) having an elder brother (?)

Va1rtt. 2 (see pum-anuja-).

punardhenu

f. a cow that again gives milk

puṇyānubhāva

m. pleasing majesty or dignity

purajānu

varia lectio for puru-j-

puronuvākyā

f. (sc. ṛc-) an introductory or invitatory verse

puronuvākyāvat

mfn. having an introductory verse

puruṣārthānuśāsana

n. Name of work

pūrvanivāsānusmṛti

f. "recollection of former habitations", reminiscence of formerly existence (one of the 10 powers of a buddha-)

pūrvānubhūta

mfn. formerly felt or enjoyed

pūrvānuṣṭhita

mfn. observed or performed before

pūrvānuṣṭhitatva

pūrvānuyoga

m. Name of a jaina- work belonging to the dṛṣṭi-vāda-.

pūrvapakṣagranthānugama

m. Name of work

pūrvapūrvānugaṇḍikā

f. Name of a range of hills (see apara-gaṇḍikā-)

pūṣānuja

m. "son or younger brother of pūṣa-", Name of parjanya-

(

)

puṣpadhanus

m. "armed with a bow of flower"Name of the god of love

puṣpānuga

n. a powder promoting menstruation

puṭadhenu

f. a not yet full-grown cow with a calf

puṭakānuvāsana

n. a funnel-like enema

rādhānurādhīya

(rādhān-) mfn. relating to the nakṣatra-s rādhā- and anurādha-

rāgānugā

f. (with vivṛti-) Name of a commentator or commentary on a musical work

rāghavānuja

mfn. referring to the younger brother of rāma-

rājadharmānuśāsana

n. "instruction in a kings's duties", Name of

rājakulānumantavya

mfn. to be approved by kings

rājamānuṣa

m. a royal officer or minister

rājānujīvin

m. the dependent of a king, a king's servant

rajasānu

m. a cloud

rajasānu

m. soul, heart (equals citta-)

rājasūnu

m. a kind's son, prince

raktasraganulepin

m. (prob.)"wearing a red garland and being anointed" , Name of śiva-

rāmānuja

m. "younger brother of rāma-"(this title would be applicable to kṛṣṇa- as born after bala-rāma- of the same father)

rāmānuja

m. Name of a celebrated vaiṣṇava- reformer (founder of a particular Vedantic school which taught the doctrine of viśiṣṭādvaita-or qualified non-duality id est that the human spirit is separate and different from the one Supreme Spirit though dependent on it and ultimately to be united with it;he lived at Kancipuram and Sri-rangam in the South of India, in the 12th century, and is believed by his followers to have been an incarnation of śeṣa-;he is also called rāmānujācārya- and yati-rāja-; n.or jam matam-, rāmānuja-'s doctrine)

rāmānuja

m. (with dīkṣita-) Name of another author

rāmānujabhāṣyagāmbhīrya

n. Name of work

f. Name of work

n. Name of work

n. Name of work

mn. Name of work

rāmānujadarśana

n. Name of wks.

rāmānujadarśana

m. Name of an author

rāmānujadivyacaritra

n. Name of work

rāmānujagrantha

m. Name of work

rāmānujaguruparamparā

f. Name of work

rāmānujamatadhvaṃsana

n. Name of work

n. Name of work

n. Name of work

m. Name of work

f. Name of work

rāmānujasiddhāntapadavī

f. Name of work

rāmānujasiddhāntasaṃgraha

m. Name of work

rāmānujasiddhāntavijaya

m. Name of work

n. Name of work

n. Name of work

n. Name of work

m. Name of an author

f. Name of work

m. Name of work

n. Name of work

m. Name of work

f. Name of a chapter of the

rāmānuṣṭubh

f. Name of a particular prayer addressed to rāma-

ramyasānu

mfn. having pleasant peaks or summits (said of a mountain)

randhrānusārin

mf(iṇī-)n. seeking for weak or assailable points

raṅganāthānuśāsana

n. Name of work

raṅgarāmānuja

m. Name of an author (also jācārya-)

raṅgarāmānujīya

n. his work

rasadhenu

f. a cow consisting of fruit-juice

rasānupradāna

n. the bestowing of moisture (one of the functions of indra-)

rāśibhāgānubandha

m. the addition of a fraction

ratnadhenu

f. a cow symbolically represented by jewels

ratnānuviddha

mfn. set or studded with jewels

ratnasānu

m. Name of the mountain meru-

ravisūnu

m. "son of the sun", the planet Saturn

rebhasūnu

m. dual number two sons of rebha-, authors of

revantamanusū

f. "mother of manu- revanta-", Name of saṃjñā- (wife of sūrya-)

ṛgvedānukramaṇikā

f. the anukramaṇikā- or index of the ṛg-- veda-.

rohitendradhanus

n. plural imperfect and perfect rainbows

rudrānuja

m. Name of an author

rudrānuṣṭhānapaddhati

f. Name of work

rūpabhāgānubandha

m. addition of the fraction of an unit

sabalānuga

mfn. followed by an army

sabalānuga

mfn. equals sa-balavāhana-

śabdānukaraṇa

mfn. imitating sounds

śabdānukṛti

f. imitation of sounds, onomatopoeia

śabdānurūpa

n. conformity to or imitation of sound

śabdānusāra

m. following a sound

śabdānusāreṇa

ind. in the direction of a sound

śabdānuśāsana

n. "word-instruction or explanation", Name of pāṇini-'s grammar and similar works (by śākaṭāyana-, hemacandra- etc.)

śabdānuśāsanadurgapadāvali

f. Name of work

śabdānuśāsanasūtrapāṭha

m. Name of work

śabdānuśiṣṭi

f. teaching of words or sounds, grammatical knowledge

śabdānuviddhasamādhipañcaka

n. Name of a yoga- work

saccidānandānubhavadīpikā

f. Name of work

saccidānandānubhavapradīpikā

f. Name of work

sadānonuva

mfn. (fr. Intensive of nu-) used to explain next

sadanugraha

m. favour towards the good

sadānukāladarśinī

(dān-) f. Name of kiṃ-narī-s

sadānuvṛtti

(dān-) f. Name of kiṃ-narī-s

sadevamanuṣya

mfn. together with gods and men

sadhanus

mfn. having or armed with a bow

sadhanuṣka

mfn. idem or 'mfn. having or armed with a bow '

sadhanuṣka

mfn. together with a bow

sadhanuṣpāṇi

mfn. bow in hand

sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇānupasaṃhārivirodhagrantha

m. Name of work

sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇānupasaṃhārivirodhagrodhin

n. Name of work

sadyonugata

mfn. just received (into the womb)

sāgarānukūla

mfn. situated on the sea-coast

sāgarasūnu

m. "son of the Ocean" patronymic of the Moon

sahadānu

(sah/a--) mfn. with a dānu- or with dānu-s

sahajānuṣa

(sahd--) mfn. with offspring

sahānugamana

n. equals saha-maraṇa-

sahānuja

mfn. with a younger brother

sahanumaraṇa

n. (equals saha-maraṇa-)

sahanumaraṇaviveka

m. Name of work on widow-burning.

sāhānusāhi

m. Name of a king

sāhasaikāntarasānuvartin

mfn. one who follows or yields to the one passion of cruelty or rashness

sahasānu

mfn. patient, enduring

sahasānu

m. equals prec.

sahasrabhānu

mfn. thousand-rayed

sahasrākṣadhanuṣmat

mfn. provided with a rainbow

sajanu

mfn. born or produced together

śaknu

mfn. kind or pleasant in speech (equals priyaṃ-vada-)

śaknuvāna

See a-ś-.

śakradhanus

n. equals -kārmuka-

śakrajānu

m. Name of a monkey

samanubandha

m. equals anubandha-

samanubhū

P. -bhavati- to enjoy together, feel, perceive

samanucint

P. -cintayati-, to reflect deeply about, meditate on, remember (accusative)

samanudhāv

P. -dhāvati-, to run after together, follow, pursue

samanudhyai

P. -dhyāyati-, to reflect upon, think of (accusative)

samanudiś

P. -diśati-, to assign or apportion anything (accusative) to any one (dative case)

samanudṛś

See sam-anupaś-.

samanudru

P. -dravati- (Epic also A1. te-), to run after together, follow, pursue

samanugā

(only Aorist -anv-agāt-), to go after together, follow quite closely, follow

samanugai

P. -gāyati-, to repeat in verse or metre

samanugam

P. -gacchati-, to go after, follow, pursue (accusative)

; to penetrate, pervade

samanugata

mfn. gone after or through, followed, pervaded

samanugata

mfn. coherent or connected with (instrumental case)

samanugrah

P. A1. -gṛhṇāti-, -gṛhṇīte-, to collect or gather together, arrange or put in order

; to show favour or grace to (accusative)

samanugrāhya

mfn. to be favoured or treated graciously

samanuja

mfn. together with a younger brother

samanujan

A1. -jāyate-, to be born similar to or resembling (accusative)

samanujñā

P. A1. -jānāti-, -janīte-, to fully permit or allow or consent to, wholly acquiesce in or approve of (accusative)

; to authorize, empower

; to indulge, pardon, forgive, excuse (genitive case of Persian)

; to grant leave of absence, allow to go away, dismiss

; to favour

: Causal -jñāpayati-, to beg or request any favour from (ablative)

; to ask leave, beg permission from (ablative)

; to take leave of, bid adieu (accusative)

etc. ; to greet, salute

samanujñā

f. leave, permission

samanujñāna

mfn. entirely acquiesced in, permitted, allowed

samanujñāna

mfn. assent, permission

samanujñāta

mfn. entirely consented or agreed to etc.

samanujñāta

mfn. authorized, empowered

samanujñāta

mfn. allowed to go away, dismissed

samanujñāta

mfn. favoured, treated kindly

samanukamp

A1. -kampate-, to sympathize with, have pity on (accusative)

samanukīrtana

n. praising highly, high praise

samanukḷp

Caus. -kalpayati-, to make any one (acc) attain to any state or condition (locative case)

samanukram

(only ind.p. -kramya-), to go or pass through completely, run through (accusative)

samanuman

A1. -manyate-, to assent, consent to (See next) ; to recognize together as (accusative)

samanumata

mfn. consented to, agreed upon

samanumata

n. consent

samanuniśam

(only ind.p. -śamya-), to perceive, learn

samanupad

A1. -padyate- (Epic also P. ti-), to enter into or upon, attain to

(varia lectio -vatsyati-for -patsyati-).

samanupāl

P. -pālayati-, to maintain or observe well, keep (a promise etc.)

samanupaś

P. A1. -paśyati-, te- (only present tense base) , to look well after, look at or on

; to perceive, observe

; to regard as, consider

samanuprach

P. -pṛcchati-, to ask or inquire about (accusative)

samanuprāp

( -pra-āp-) P. -prāpnoti-, to attain or reach or arrive at (accusative)

samanuprāpta

mfn. come, arrived at

samanuprāpta

mfn. one who has attained to (accusative)

samanuprāpta

mfn. obtained, assumed

samanuprāpta

mfn. entirely covered or overspread

samanuśās

P. -śāsti-, to teach thoroughly, instruct (two accusative)

; (with rājyam-,or rājya-akṣmīm-) to rule or regulate well, govern

samanuśiṣṭa

mfn. well taught or instructed in (accusative)

samanusmṛ

P. -smarati-, to remember together, recollect

samanusṛp

P. -sarpati-, to come near together, approach

samanuṣṭeya

mfn. to be accomplished or performed

samanuṣṭhita

mfn. ( sthā-) furnished or provided with, rich in (compound)

samanuśuc

P. -śocati-, to mourn over, regret (accusative)

samanusvṛ

P. -svarati-, to resound, leave a sound

samanuṣya

mfn. together with men

samanuṣya

mfn. visited or frequented by men

samanuṣyarājanya

mfn. together with the princely among men

samanutap

Passive voice -tapyate-, to suffer great subsequent pain, be very penitent, repent

samanuvarṇita

mfn. ( varṇ-) well described or narrated, explained

samanuvartin

mfn. obedient, willing, devoted to (genitive case)

samanuvas

P. -vasati-, to abide by, follow, conform to (accusative)

(varia lectio -patsyati-for -vatsyati-).

samanuvid

Caus -vedayati-, to cause to know or remember, remind

samanuvīkṣ

( -vi-īkṣ-) A1. -vīkṣate-, to well observe, behold

samanuvraj

P. -vrajati-, to go after, follow or pursue with others

samanuvrata

mf(ā-)n. entirely devoted or attached to (accusative)

samanuvṛt

A1. -vartate-, to follow after, obey, conform to (accusative)

etc. ; to ensue, be the result or consequence

: Causal -vartayati-, to cause to take place or happen

samanuyā

P. -yāti-, to go after, follow

samanuyāta

mfn. gone after, followed

samanuyojya

mfn. to be combined or mixed with (instrumental case)

samanuyuj

(only ind.p. -yujya-and Passive voice -yujyate-), to inquire after, ask about

; to appoint, order, enjoin

sāmānyaniruktyanugama

m. Name of work

samayānusāreṇa

ind. according to the occasion, suitably to the time or season

samayānuvartin

mfn. following established rules, observant of duties

śambhutattvānusaṃdhāna

n. Name of a śaiva- work by śambhu-nātha-.

saṃgatyanumiti

f. Name of work

saṃgatyanumitivāda

m. Name of work

saṃhanu

mfn. striking the jaws together

saṃhanu

ind. (with kṛ-) to seize between the jaws

saṃhatajānu

mfn. knock-kneed

saṃhatajānuka

mfn. knock-kneed

saṃkhyātānudeśa

m. a subsequent enumeration the members of which correspond successively to those of a previous one

saṃkṣiptarāgānugāpūjāpaddhati

f. Name of work

saṃnipātanud

m. "removing the above fever", a species of Nimba tree

saṃnu

A1. -navate-, to come together, meet

saṃnu

A1. -navate-, to roar or sound together, bellow, bleat

saṃnud

P. -nudati-, to impel or bring together

: Causal -nodayati-, to bring together or near, procure, find

; to push or urge on, impel

; to drive or scare away (?)

(

)

saṃśayānumiti

f. Name of work

saṃśayānumitirahasya

n. Name of work

saṃśritānurāga

m. the affection of dependants

saṃsthāsnu

See sa-sthāsnu-cārin-.

śaṃtanu

mfn. (ś/aṃ--) wholesome for the body or the person ( śaṃtanutva -tv/a- n.)

śaṃtanu

m. (also written śāṃtanu-) Name of an ancient king with the patronymic kauravya- (he was fourteenth descendant of kuru-, son of pratīpa- and younger brother of devāpi-, and usurped the sovereignty whilst the latter became a hermit;he married gaṅgā- and satya-vatī-;by the former he had a son named bhīṣma-, and by the latter citrāṅgada- and vicitravīrya- see

)

etc.

śaṃtanu

m. (with cakra-vartin-) Name of an author (son of uddharaṇa-, of the tomara- race)

śāṃtanu

m. Name of the father of bhīṣma- (in older language ś/aṃtanu- q.v)

etc.

śāṃtanu

m. a particular inferior kind of grain

saṃtanu

m. Name of a youth attending on rādhā-

śāṃtanunandana

m. " śāṃtanu-'s son", patronymic of bhīṣma-

śaṃtanutanūja

m. "son of śaṃtanu-", Name of bhīṣma-,

śāṃtanutva

n. the state or condition of (being) śāṃtanu-

śaṃtanutva

n. śaṃtanu

saṅgaguptasūnu

m. Name of an author

śantanu

śantama- etc. See śaṃ-tanu-, ś/aṃtama-, .

sānu

m. n. (according to to

fr. san-;collateral form 3. snu-) a summit, ridge, surface, top of a mountain, (in later language generally) mountain-ridge, table-land

etc. (

also, "a sprout;a forest;road;gale of wind;sage, learned man;the sun") .

sānubandha

mf(ā-)n. possessing connection or continuity, uninterrupted, continuous

sānubandha

mf(ā-)n. having results or consequences

sānubandha

mf(ā-)n. together with one's (or its) belongings

sānubandhaka

mfn. having an indicatory letter or syllable (See anubandha-)

sānucara

mf(ī-)n. idem or 'mfn. having attendants, with followers '

sānuga

mfn. having attendants, with followers

sānuja

m. (for sānuja-See)"produced on table-land" , Xanthoxylon Alatum

sānuja

n. the flower of Hibiscus Mutabilis

sānuja

mfn. (fo sānu-ja-See) accompanied by or along with a younger brother

sānuka

mfn. eager for prey

sānuka

mfn. elevated, arrogant (

;butSee) .

sānukampa

mf(ā-)n. full of pity, compassionate, tender, kind ( sānukampam am- ind.)

sānukampam

ind. sānukampa

sānukrośa

mf(ā-)n. full of compassion, compassionate, merciful, kind ( sānukrośam am- ind.; sānukrośatā -tā- f.)

sānukrośam

ind. sānukrośa

sānukrośatā

f. sānukrośa

sānukūla

mfn. (equals anukūla-) favourable, agreeable

sānukūlya

n. favour, service, assistance

sānumāna

mfn. (in philosophy) dependent on or associated with an inference (opp. to nir-anumāna-)

sānumat

mfn. having a summit or ridge

sānumat

m. a mountain, hill

sānumatī

f. Name of an apsaras-

sānunaga

mf(ā-)n. having courtesy, courteous, polite, civil, kind ( sānunagam am- ind.)

sānunagam

ind. sānunaga

sānunāsika

mfn. nasalized (as a vowel)

sānunāsika

mfn. singing through the nose

sānunāsikavākya

mfn. Speaking with a nasal sound ( sānunāsikavākyatva -tva- n.)

sānunāsikavākyatva

n. sānunāsikavākya

sānunāsikya

mfn. nasalized, nasal

sānunāsikya

n. nasality.

sānunāsyam

ind. with a nasal sound, in a nasal tone.

sānuplava

mfn. accompanied by followers or attendants

sānuprāsa

mf(ā-)n. containing alliteration

sānuprastha

m. Name of a monkey

sānurāga

mf(ā-)n. feeling or betraying passion, affectionate, enamoured of (locative case)

sānuruha

mfn. growing on a mountain-ridge (as a wood)

sānuṣak

ind. (prob.) equals ānuṣak-, continually, perpetually (according to to

equals next; according to to others sa ānuṣag-are two separate words)

sānuṣaṅga

m. an uninterrupted series

sānusāra

mf(ā-)n. together with all followers or belongings

(

)

sānuśaya

mfn. filled with remorse

sānuśaya

mfn. irritable, angry ( sānuśayam am- ind.,"remorsefully")

sānuśaya

mfn. affected by the remainder of the consequences of action which brings the soul back to the earth

sānuśayam

ind. sānuśaya

sānuṣṭi

m. plural , a patronymic

sānusvāra

mfn. having the nasal mark anusvāra-

sānusvarita

mfn. (prob.) resounding, re-echoing

sānutāpa

mf(ā-)n. feeling repentance

sanutar

ind. (perhaps originally identical with prec.) aside, away, off, far from (ablative;with yu-and dhā-,"to keep away, ward off")

sanutar

ind. secretly, clandestinely

sanutara

mfn. furtive, clandestine

sānutarṣam

ind. by or through thirst

sanutṛ

mfn. (only in f(s/anutrī-).) gaining, procuring

sanutṛ

saneru- See column 1.

sanutya

mfn. furtive, lying furtively in ambush

sānuvakraga

mfn. equals anuvakraga-

sānuvaṣaṭkāra

mfn. accompanied with the exclamation vaṣaṭ-

sānuyātra

mfn. attended by followers, with a retinue

saptamānuṣa

(t/a--) mfn. dwelling among the 7 races of mankind, present among all

sapuronuvākya

mfn. together with the puronuvākyā- (q.v)

sarasiruhasūnu

m. "lotus-son" idem or 'm. "lotus-born", Name of brahmā- '

śarkarādhenu

f. a gift of sugar moulded in the shape of a cow

śārṅgadhanurdhara

m. śārṅgadhanus

śārṅgadhanus

m. "armed with the bow śārṅga-", Name of viṣṇu-kṛṣṇa-

( śārṅgadhanurdhara nurdhara- m. idem or 'm. Name of the author of the saṃgīta-ratnākara- '

)

sarpatanu

f. a species of Solanum (bṛhatī-)

sarvajanavaśyahanumanmantra

m. Name of work

sarvajñasūnu

m. patronymic of skanda-

sarvānubhū

mfn. all-perceiving

sarvānubhūti

f. universal experience

sarvānubhūti

f. a white variety of the tri-vṛt- plant

sarvānubhūti

f. Convolvulus Turpethum

sarvānubhūti

m. "all-perceiving", (with jaina-s) Name of two arhat-s

sarvānudātta

mfn. entirely accentless ( sarvānudāttatva -tva- n.)

sarvānudāttatva

n. sarvānudātta

sarvānukārin

mfn. all-imitating

sarvānukāriṇī

f. Desmodium Gangeticum

sarvānukrama

m. a complete index (especially to the veda-) (

)

sarvānukrama

m. Name of work

sarvānukramaṇī

f. (

) a complete index (especially to the veda-)

sarvānukramaṇī

f. Name of work

sarvānukramaṇikā

f. (

) (

) a complete index (especially to the veda-)

sarvānukramaṇikā

f. Name of work

sarvānukramaṇīvṛtti

f. Name of commentator or commentary

sarvānumati

f. the consent of all

sarvānunāsika

mfn. speaking through the nose,

sarvānuṣṭubha

mfn. entirely consisting of anuṣṭubh-

sarvānusyūta

mfn. strung together with everything ( sarvānusyūtatva -tva- n.)

sarvānusyūtatva

n. sarvānusyūta

sarvārthānusādhin

mfn. effecting all things

sarvārthānusādhinī

f. Name of durgā-

sarvatamonuda

mfn. driving away all darkness (as the sun)

sarvatanu

mfn. (s/arva--.) complete in regard to the body or person

sarvatathāgatānurāgaṇajñānamudrā

f. a particular position of the fingers

sarvatathāgatānurāgaṇī

f. Name of a tantra- deity

sarvopaniṣadarthānurbhūtiprakāśa

m. Name of work

sasthāsnucārin

mfn. equals sthāṇujaṅgama-

(wrong reading saṃ-sth-and saṃ-sthāna-cārin-).

śāstrānanuṣṭhāna

n. disregard of the śāstra-

śāstrānusāra

m. conformity to the śāstra-

śāstrānuṣṭhāna

n. observance of the śāstra-

śāstrānuṣṭhāna

n. applying one's self to books

śāstrānuṣṭhita

mfn. established by the śāstra-, obeying sacred precepts

sasūnu

(s/a--) wrong reading in

śatadhanu

(

) (

) m. Name of various men.

śatadhanus

(

) m. Name of various men.

śatadhanutantra

n. Name of work

śataghnu

(for -hanu-?), a kind of plant, Sil.

satanu

(s/a--) mfn. having a body, together with the body

satpratipakṣasiddhāntānugama

m. Name of work

ṣaṭsthalānubhava

m. Name of work

satsukhānubhava

m. "fruition of real happiness", Name of work

sattvānurūpa

mfn. according to nature, according to one's innate disposition

sattvānurūpa

mfn. acc to one's substance or means

sātvatīsūnu

m. "son of sātvatī-", Name of śiśu-pāla-

satyānurakta

mfn. devoted to truth, upright, true

śaurisūnu

m. Name of two authors

sautrāmaṇadhanus

n. " indra-'s bow", the rainbow

savanānukalpam

ind. according to the three periods of day

saveṇuvīṇāpaṇavānunāda

mfn. resounding with flutes and lutes and tabours

savyajānu

n. a mode of tighting (by using the left knee)

siddhāntasvānubhūtiprakāśikā

f. Name of work

siṃhahanu

mfn. having the jaws of a lion

( siṃhahanutā -tā- f.one of the 32 signs of perfection

)

siṃhahanu

m. Name of the grandfather of gautama- buddha-

f. siṃhahanu

m. Name of work

m. patronymic of jālaṃ-dhara-

śipavitnuka

m. a kind of worm

śirojānu

n. gaRa rāja-dantādi-.

śiromaṇinyāyānusārivivṛti

f. Name of work

śītabhānu

m. "cool-rayed", the moon

sītārāmānujīya

n. Name of work

śivadhanurveda

m. Name of work attributed to vyāsa-

śivānubhavasūtra

n. Name of work

śivasūnu

m. Name of an author

smaraṇānugraha

m. the favour of remembrance, kind remembrance

smārtānuṣṭhānapaddhati

f. Name of work

smayanutti

f. the driving away or pulling down of pride

snātānulipta

mfn. one who is both bathed and anointed

snehānuvṛtti

f. continuance of affection, affectionate or friendly intercourse

śnu

(in gram.) a technical term for the affix nu- (added to the root in the 5th class of verbs) .

snu

(confer, compare 1. snā-) cl.2 P. (

) snauti- (according to to

also snute-;only in present tense base; grammar also perfect tense suṣṇāva-, suṣṇuve-; future snotā-or snavitā-etc.) , to drip, distil, trickle, emit fluid, yield milk

(confer, compare pra-snu-): Causal snāvayati- (Aorist asuṣṇavat-) grammar : Desiderative of Causal sisnāvayiṣati- or susnāvayiṣati-

: Desiderative susnūṣati-

: Intensive soṣṇūyate-, siṣṇavīti-, soṣṇoti-

[ confer, compare Greek , ] .

snu

(in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') dripping, trickling, sprinkling (See ghṛta-snu-).

snu

n. (according to to

also m.abridged fr. sānu-and occurring only in instrumental case ablative sg., sn/unā-, sn/os-;and in instrumental case locative case plural sn/ubhis-, sn/uṣu-) the level summit or edge of a mountain, table-land, surface, height

snu

f. equals snāyu-, a sinew, tendon, muscle (only occurring in snu-tas-,"from the sinews or muscles")

snu

a kṛd-anta- affix to roots forming adjectives expressive of an aptitude to do what is implied by the root

snuc

(prob. for stuc-) cl.1 A1. snocate-, to be bright or clear

snughnikā

(?) f. natron, mineral alkali

snuh

cl.4 P. snuhyati-, to vomit

; to be moist (= snih-See snūhan-).

snuh

mfn. (Nominal verb snuk-or snuṭ-) vomiting, one who vomits

snuh

f. a kind of spurge, Euphorbia Antiquorum (its milky juice is used as an emetic etc.;it has 17 synonyms see sīhuṇḍa-etc.)

snuhā

f. idem or 'f. a kind of spurge, Euphorbia Antiquorum (its milky juice is used as an emetic etc.;it has 17 synonyms see sīhuṇḍa-etc.) '

snuhi

f. idem or ' f. idem or 'f. a kind of spurge, Euphorbia Antiquorum (its milky juice is used as an emetic etc.;it has 17 synonyms see sīhuṇḍa-etc.) ' '

snuhī

f. idem or 'f. idem or ' f. idem or 'f. a kind of spurge, Euphorbia Antiquorum (its milky juice is used as an emetic etc.;it has 17 synonyms see sīhuṇḍa-etc.) ' ' '

snuk

in compound for 2. snuh-.

snukchada

m. a kind of reed, Lipeocercis Serrata

snus

(varia lectio snas-) cl.4 P. snusyati-, to eat

; to disappear

; to take

snuṣā

f. (accord. to some connected with sūnu-) the son's wife, a daughter-in-law

etc.

snuṣā

f. the spurge plant (equals snuhī-)

[ confer, compare Greek ; Latin nurus; Slavonic or Slavonian snu8cha; Anglo-Saxon snoru; German snura,snur,Schnur.]

snuṣāga

mfn. having sexual intercourse with a daughter-in-law

snuṣāśvaśurīyā

f. (scilicet iṣṭi-) a sacrifice intended to subdue an adversary as a daughter-in-law is subject to a father-in-law

snuṣātva

n. the condition of a daughter-in-law

snuṣāvat

ind. like (with) a daughter-in-law

śnuṣṭi

f. (prob.) either"a little heap"or"a small measure"(for measuring grain)

śnuṣṭi

m. Name of an āṅgirasa-

snuta

mfn. trickling, flowing (especially said of milk flowing from a mother's breast)

snuti

f. trickling, distilling, stream, flow

śokānuśoka

n. sorrow upon sorrow, continual sorrow

śokāpanuda

mfn. removing or alleviating sorrow

somamantrānukramaṇikā

f. Name of work

somānandasūnu

m. Name of men

sparśānukūla

mfn. pleasant to the touch, cooling

śrāddhānukramaṇikā

f. Name of work

śraddhānusārin

(śraddhān-) m. "a follower or observer of faith", one who acts faithfully, a śrāvaka- at a particular stage of his religious life

śramanud

mfn. removing fatigue

śrautānukramaṇikā

f. Name of work

śrāvakānuṣṭhānavidhi

m. Name of jaina- work

śrībhānu

m. Name of a son of kṛṣṇa-

śrīlahanumat

m. the celebrated hanumat-

srotonugata

m. a particular samādhi-

śrotrānukūla

mfn. equals śrotra-ramya-

śrotrapadānuga

mfn. agreeable to the ear

sṛpradānu

(pr/a--) mfn. sprinkling fat or oil

śrutaśravonuja

m. the planet Saturn (said to be one of the sons of sūrya-)

śrutimatānumāna

n. Name of a vedānta- work (by try-ambaka- śāstrin-).

śrutyanuprāsa

m. a kind of alliteration consisting in the repetition of consonants belonging to the same class or organ of utterance (exempli gratia, 'for example' the palatal letter j-and y-etc.)

stabdhahanu

mfn. having stiff or immovable jaws

stanayitnu

m. (sg. or plural) thunder (plural personified as children of vidyota-, "Lightning")

etc.

m. a thunder-cloud

m. lightning

m. sickness

m. death

m. a kind of grass (equals mustaka-)

stanayitnughoṣa

mfn. loud as thunder

stanayitnumat

or (wrong reading)

stanayitnusani

mfn. bringing thunder

stanayitnuvat

mfn. connected with thunder

stanutṛ

(?)

sthāsnu

mfn. firm, stationary, immovable

etc.

sthāsnu

mfn. durable, permanent, eternal

sthāsnu

mfn. patient enduring (in a-sth-)

sthāsnu

mfn. a tree or plant (equals vṛkṣa-; see sthāvara-)

sthāsnu

See .

sthāsnutā

f. firmness, stability, durability

sthirānurāga

mfn. constant in affection or love

sthirānurāgatva

n. faithful attachment

sthirānurāgin

mfn. equals rāga-

sthirānurāgitva

n. equals rāga-tva-

sthirapsnu

mfn. (Ved.) having constant food

stobhānusaṃhāra

m. Name of a pariśiṣṭa- of the sāma-veda-.

strītānukaroga

m. a kind of disease

stryanuja

mfn. born after a female child or sister

subhānu

mfn. shining beautifully or brightly

subhānu

m. Name of the 17th (or 51st) year of Jupiter's cycle of 60 years

subhānu

m. of a son of kṛṣṇa-

śubhrabhānu

m. "white-rayed", the moon

sudānu

mfn. pouring out or bestowing abundantly, bounteous, munificent (said of various gods)

sūdayitnu

mfn. flowing, yielding sweetness (as waters)

śuddhānumāna

n. "correct inference", a particular figure of rhetoric

śuddhāpahnuti

f. "entire denial", a particular figure of rhetoric (exempli gratia, 'for example'"this is not the moon, it is a lotus of the heavenly Ganges")

sudhanus

m. Name of a son of kuru-

sudhanus

m. of an ancestor of gautama- buddha-

suhanu

mfn. having handsome jaws

suhanu

m. Name of an asura-

śukānuśāsana

n. " śuka--narrative", Name of an episode of the śānti-parvan- of the mahā-bhārata-,

sukhānubhava

m. perception or consciousness of pleasure

śuklamālyānulepana

mfn. having a white garland and unguents (id est wearing a white garland and anointed with unguents)

sūktānukramaṇī

f. an index of Vedic hymns (attributed to śaunaka- by ṣaḍ-guruśiṣya-).

sukumāratanutvac

mfn. having very soft and delicate skin

sumānuṣavid

mfn. one who knows men well

sunu

See -nau-. =

sunu

See su-nau-, .

sūnu

m. one who urges or incites, an inciter

sūnu

m. the sun (equals savitṛ-)

sūnu

m. a son, child, offspring

etc.

sūnu

m. a younger brother

sūnu

m. a daughter's son

sūnu

m. Name of a ṛṣi- (having the patronymic ārbhava- or kāśyapa-, author of

), Auukr.

sūnu

f. a daughter

[ confer, compare Zend hunu; Lithuanian su1nu4s; Slavonic or Slavonian synu8; Gothic sunus; Anglo-Saxon sunu; English son; German Sohn.]

sūnu

m. (for 1. 2.See under1.2. sū-) one who presses out or extracts the soma--juice

(= sotṛ-1

)

sūnu

1. 2. 3. sūnu-. See under 1. 2. sū-, and .

sūnumat

mfn. having sons

sūnurūpa

(?) mfn. having the form of a son

sūnutā

f. sonship

suradhanurlekhāya

to resemble a rainbow (yita- mfn.)

suradhanus

n. "bow of the gods", a rainbow

surapatidhanus

n. (equals -cāpa-)

sureśvaradhanus

n. " indra-'s bow", the rainbow

surūpakṛtnu

mfn. forming beautiful things

sūryabhānu

m. Name of a yakṣa-

sūryabhānu

m. of a king

sūryānuvādinī

f. Name of commentator or commentary

susnuṣa

mf(ā-)n. having a good daughter-in-law

sutanu

mfn. very thin or slender ( sutanutā -tā- f.)

(varia lectio)

sutanu

mfn. having a beautiful body

sutanu

m. Name of a gandharva-

sutanu

m. of a son of ugra-sena-

sutanu

m. of a monkey

sutanu

f(u-or ū-). a fair woman (vocative case sutanu- see

)

sutanu

m. Name of a daughter of āhuka- (wife of akrūra-)

sutanu

m. of a concubine of vasu-deva-

sutanu

m. of a daughter of ugra-sena-

sutanuja

mf(ā-)n. having beautiful children,

sutanutā

f. sutanu

sūtrapāṭhānukrama

m. Name of work

suvarṇadhenu

f. a golden offering in the shape of a cow

suvarṇadhenudānavidhi

m. Name of work

svabhānu

(sv/a--) mfn. self-luminous

svāmikārttikānuprekṣā

f. Name of work

svānubhava

m. one's own personal experience or observation

svānubhāva

m. enjoyment of or love for property

svānubhavādarśa

m. Name of work

svānubhūti

f. one's own experience

svānubhūti

f. self-enjoyment (See compound)

svānubhūtiprakāśa

m. Name of work

svānubhūtiprakāśavivṛti

f. Name of work

svānubhūtivākya

n. Name of work

svānubhūtyabhidhanāṭaka

n. Name of work

svānubhūtyekasāra

mfn. whose only essence consists in self-enjoyment

svanugupta

mfn. well hidden

svanujā

f. having a beautiful younger sister

svanurakta

mfn. truly devoted to (locative case)

svānurūpa

mfn. resembling one's self, suited to one's character

svānurūpa

mfn. natural, innate

svanurūpa

mfn. well suited

svānusāra

m. (only eṇa-,"according to one's property")

svanuṣṭhita

mfn. well observed, duly practised or performed

śvāpadānusaraṇa

n. the chase after wild beast

svapramāṇānurūpa

mfn. suited to one's strength

svarbhānu

m. (sv^ar--) Name of a demon supposed to eclipse the sun and the moon (in later language applied to rāhu- or the personified ascending node)

etc.

svarbhānu

m. of a kaśyapa-

svarbhānu

m. of a son of kṛṣṇa-

svarbhānusūdana

m. "destroyer of rāhu-", Name of the Sun

svardhenu

f. equals -kāma-dhenu-

svārthānumāna

n. "inference for one's self", (in logic) a particular process of induction

svarūpānusaṃdhāna

n. Name of work

svarūpānusaṃdhānastotra

n. Name of work

śvaśrūsnuṣā

f. dual number mother-in-law and daughter-in-law

śvaśrūsnuṣādhanasaṃvāda

m. "agreement in respect of the property of mother and daughter-in-law", Name of work

m. Name of work

m. Name of work

n. Name of work

n. one's own performance or achievement

svāyambhuvamanupitṛ

m. "father of manu- svāyambhuva-", Name of brahmā-

śvetabhānu

mfn. white-rayed (as the moon)

śvetabhānu

m. the moon

śvetahanu

m. a kind of snake

śvetānukāśa

See śvetānūkāśa-.

śvetānulepana

mfn. covered with white ointment

śvetānulepana

m. Name of bala-rāma-

tadanu

ind. after that, afterwards

tadanukṛti

ind. conformably to that, accordingly

tadanusaraṇa

n. going after that

tadanusaraṇakrameṇa

ind. instrumental case See sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order kr/ama-.

tamonud

mfn. dispersing darkness,

tamonud

m. light

tamonud

m. the sun (for accusative dam-See da-)

tamonud

m. the moon (for accusative dam-See da-)

tamonud

m. fire

tamonud

m. a lamp

tamonuda

mf(ā-)n. dispersing darkness

(sarva--,

) etc.

tamonuda

m. the sun, 11892

tamonuda

m. (accusative dam-)

tamonuda

m. the moon

(accusative dam-).

tāmramṛṣṭānulepin

mfn. smeared with coppery red unguents

tāmratanu

mfn. having a ruddy body

tanayitnu

mfn. (equals stan-) roaring, thundering,

tanayitnu

See 2. tan-.

tanonu

a kind of ṣaṣṭika- rice

tanu

mf(us-, /ūs-, vī-)n. thin, slender, attenuated, emaciated, small, little, minute, delicate, fine (texture

)

etc. (in compound gaRa kaḍārādi-;also equals -dagdha-

)

tanu

mf(us-, /ūs-, vī-)n. (said of a speech or hymn) accomplished (in metre)

(accusative f. nv/am-)

tanu

m. (gaRa 2. lohitādi-,not in

) Name of a ṛṣi- with a very emaciated body

tanu

f. (us-) (once m.

) equals n/ū- (See sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order), the body, person, self (see duṣ-ṭanu-, priy/a--)

(in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound')

(svakā t-,"one's own person",

)

(accusative plural irregular navas-,

) etc. (iyaṃ tanur mama-,"this my self. id est I myself here "

; nuṃ-tyaj-or hā-,"to give up one's life"

)

tanu

m. form or manifestation

tanu

m. the skin

tanu

m. equals -gṛha-

tanu

m. Desmodium gangeticum

tanu

m. Balanites Roxburghii (vv.ll. tannī-, nni-,"Hemionitis cordifolia"; tajvi-)

tanu

m. a metre of 4 + 24 syllables

tanu

m. Name of a wife of kṛṣṇa- (?)

tanu

m. ([ confer, compare ; Latin tenuisetc.])

tanubala

mf(ā-)n. "of small strength", a-- negative , strong

tanubhastrā

f. "body-bellows", the nose

tanubhava

m. equals -ja-

tanubhāva

m. equals -tā-

tanubhṛt

m. any being possessing a body, especially a human being

tanubhūmi

f. "stage of personality", Name of a period in a śrāvaka-'s life

tanubīja

m. "small-seeded", the jujube

tanucchad

tanucchada

m. (see

) equals -tra- (often in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound')

tanucchada

m. plural feathers

tanucchāya

m. "shading little", a kind of Acacia

tanudagdha

mfn. (said of a kleśa- in yoga- philosophy)

tanudāna

n. offering the body (for sexual intercourse)

tanudāna

n. a scanty gift.

tanudhī

mfn. little-minded

tanudīrghaghoṇa

mfn. one who has a thin long nose,

tanugṛha

n. the 1st lunar mansion,

tanuhrada

m. the rectum, anus

tanuja

m. equals -ruh-,

m. a son

f. a daughter

m. equals -ja-

n. sonship

f. the having a thin tongue (one of the 80 minor maeks of a buddha-),

tanuka

mfn. (gaRa yāvādi-) thin

and (said of a liquid)

tanuka

mfn. small

tanuka

m. Grislea tomentosa

tanuka

m. Terminalia bellerica

tanuka

m. the cinnamon tree

tanukā

f. Diospyros embryopteris

tānuka

See stri-tānuka-roga-.

tanukeśa

mf(ī-)n. delicate-haired

tanukeśā

f. plural See kṣemavṛddhi-.

tanukṣīra

m. "thin-sapped", Spondias mangifera

tanukūpa

m. pore of the skin

tanula

mfn. spread, expanded,

tanulatā

f. a slender body

tanumadhya

n. "body-middle", the waist

tanumadhya

mf(ā-)n. equals dhyama-

tanumadhyā

f. a metre of 4x6 (- - u u - -) syllables.

tanumadhyama

mf(ā-)n. slender-waisted

tanumat

mfn. embodied

tanumūrti

mfn. thin-shaped

tanupādakṣapāṭana

n. Name of one of 18 ceremonies performed with particular kuṇḍa-s

tanupattra

m. "thin-leaved", Terminalia Catappa

tanupattra

m. leafy orpiment

tanurasa

m. "body fluid", sweat

tanuruh

n. "growing on the body", a hair of the body

tanuruha

n. idem or 'n. "growing on the body", a hair of the body '

tanuruha

n. a feather

tanus

n. (

) the body

tanusaṃcāriṇī

f. "moving the body coquettishly (?)", a girl

tanuśarīra

mfn. delicate-bodied.

tanusatya

n. a simple truth (?)

tanuśiras

f. "small-headed", a kind of uṣṇih- metre (of 2 x 11 and 1 x 6 syllables).

tanusthāna

n. equals -gṛha-

tanutā

f. thinness, tenuity, littleness

tanutara

mfn. equals t/anīyas-

tanutra

n. "body-guard", armour

tanutrāṇa

n. equals -tra-

tanutravat

mfn. having armour

tanutrin

mfn. equals -tra-vat-

tanutva

n. equals -tā-

tanutvac

m. idem or 'mfn. thin-skinned ' , (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound')

m. the cinnamon tree

m. Cassia Senna

m. Premna spinosa

mfn. thin-skinned

tanutyāga

mfn. spending little

tanutyāga

m. risking one's life

tanutyaj

mfn. giving up one's body, dying,

tanutyaj

mfn. equals nū-t-

tanuvarman

n. armour for the boly,

tanuvāta

m. a highly rarified atmosphere (constituting a kind of hell;opposed to ghana-v-)

tanuvraṇa

m. "body-wound", elephantiasis

tapastanu

mfn. equals paḥ-kṛśa-

tapastanu

mfn. having penance as a body,

taponubhāva

m. equals paḥ-prabh-

tarkānubhāṣā

f. equals rka-bhāṣā-prakāśa-.

tatanuṣṭi

See tan-.

tatanuṣṭi

mfn. "wishing to show one's self", fond of ornaments (

)

tiladhenu

f. a sesamum cow (presented to Brahmans)

tiladhenudāna

n. "presenting a tila-dhenu- ", Name of

tiladhenukā

f. equals nu-

timiranud

m. "darkness-dispeller", sun, moon

traisānu

varia lectio for śāni-.

trasnu

mfn. (

) equals sura-

trasnu

mfn. see /a--.

trayītanu

m. equals -deha-

trayītanu

m. śiva-

trayītanu

m. equals -mukha-

tribhānu

m. Name of a descendant of yayāti- and father of karaṃ-dhama-

tribhānu

m. (-sānu-

)

tridhārasnuhī

f. idem or 'f. Euphorbia antiquorum '

tridhārasnuhī

f. the plant dhārā-snuhī-

triśānu

m. for -bhānu-

trisānu

See -bhānu-.

trivedītanu

m. (with deva-) idem or 'm. equals trayī-deha- '

tulyānumāna

n. like inference, analogy.

ubhayānumata

mfn. agreed to or accepted on both sides.

udāharaṇānugama

m. Name of work

uditānudita

mfn. "risen and not risen", not quite risen

uditānuvādin

mfn. one who repeats what is said by others

uktānukta

mfn. spoken and not spoken.

uktānuśāsana

mfn. one who has received an order

upadhenu

ind. near the cows,

upahatnu

mfn. hitting, hurting, destroying (enemies)

upajānu

ind. in or near the knee

upanunna

mfn. driven near, wafted

upānuvākya

mfn. to be invoked with anuvākyā-s (q.v)

upānuvākya

m. Name of agni-

upānuvākya

n. Name of a particular section of the taittirīya-saṃhitā-.

uparijānu

ind. above the knee

upasaṃnud

P. (imperative 2. sg. -s/aṃ-nuda-) to impel near or towards, bring near, procure

upasnuta

mfn. caused to flow, streaming forth

ūrdhvajānu

mfn. raising the knees (in sitting),

ūrdhvajānu

mfn. long-shanked,

ūrdhvajānuka

mfn. raising the knees (in sitting),

ūrdhvaṃjānu

mfn. being above the knee

ūrdhvasānu

mfn. having a high back (as a horse), high, surpassing

ūrdhvasānu

mfn. having an elevated edge

utathyānuja

m. " utathya-'s younger brother", Name of bṛhaspati- (regent of the planet Jupiter)

uttarahanu

f. the upper jaw-bone

vacaknu

mfn. talkative, loquacious, eloquent

vacaknu

m. a brahman-

vacaknu

m. Name of a man,

vacanānuga

mfn. following advice or orders, obedient, submissive

vaḍabadhenu

f. a mare

vādānuvāda

m. dual number assertion and reply, plea and counterplea, accusation and defence, controversy, dispute, disputation

vadhasnu

mfn. wielding a deadly weapon

vagnu

vagvana-, vagvanu- See .

vagnu

m. a cry, call, roar, sound (especially of animals;but also applied to the noise produced by dice)

vagnu

m. a speaker

vagnu

mfn. loquacious, talkative

m. a sound, noise

m. vaidyuta

m. lasting enmity

m. beginning of hostilities

vairānubandha

mfn. continuing in enmity

vairānubandhin

mfn. leading to or resulting in enmity or hostility ( vairānubandhitā dhi-tā- f.)

vairānubandhin

m. the calorific or heating solar ray

vairānubandhin

m. Name of viṣṇu-

vairānubandhitā

f. vairānubandhin

vaiṣṇavadharmānuṣṭhānapaddhati

f. Name of work

vaiśravaṇānuja

m. "younger brother of kubera-", Name of rāvaṇa-

vāmanatanu

mfn. dwarf-bodied

vaṃśānucarita

n. the history of a family or dynasty, a genealogical list (one of five distinguishing marks of a purāṇa-)

vaṃśānuga

mfn. being on or along the central projecting part of a sword

vaṃśānuga

mfn. passing from family to family

vaṃśānukīrtana

n. the recounting or proclaiming a family or a genealogy

vaṃśānukrama

m. family succession, genealogy, lineal inheritance

vaṃśānuvaṃśacarita

n. the history of both old and recent families (See prec.)

vaṃśyānucarita

varia lectio for vaṃśān-

vanadhenu

f. the cow or female of the Bos Gavaeus

vanamānuṣa

m. "wild-man", the orang-utang

vanamānuṣī

f. a (little) forest woman. (

)

vanamānuṣikā

f. a (little) forest woman. (

)

vandhyāsūnu

m. equals -tanaya-

vaṇiksūnu

m. equals -suta-

vanu

m. "zealous, eager", (either) an assailant, injurer, enemy

vanu

m. (or) an adherent, friend

vanus

mfn. zealous, eager

vanus

mfn. (either) anxious for, attached or devoted to, a friend

vanus

mfn. (or) eager to attack, a foe, enemy

vanuṣa

(fr. van/us-), Nom. A1. ṣate- (only vanuṣanta-), to obtain, acquire

vanuṣya

(fr. van/us-) Nom. P. A1. ṣy/ati-, te-, to plot against, attack, assail

; (A1.) to wish for, desire

varadanāthācāryasūnu

m. Name of author. (

)

vārāhyanugrahāṣṭaka

n. Name of work

varajānuka

m. Name of a ṛṣi-

varatanu

mf(ū-)n. having a beautiful body

varṇānuprāsa

m. alliteration, paronomasia

varṇānupūrveṇa

ind. according to the order of caste,

varṇatanu

f. Name of a particular mantra- addressed to sarasvatī-

vārttānujīvin

(ttān-) mfn. living by trade or business

vārttānukarṣaka

(ttān-) m. "news-bringer", a spy, emissary

vārttānuyoga

(ttān-) mfn. inquiring after news or health

vasantabhānu

n. Name of a king

vaśānuga

mf(ā-)n. following one's own will

vaśānuga

mf(ā-)n. obedient or subject to the will of, submissive to (with genitive case or in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound')

vaśānuga

mf(ā-)n. equals -vaśāgata- above (in mārga-vaśānuga-)

vaśānuga

mf. a male or female servant

vāsudevānubhava

m. Name of a medical work

vasumatīsūnu

m. metron. of naraka-

vātanulomana

mfn. forcing the wind in the right direction or downwards (as in inflating she lungs)

vātanulomin

mfn. forcing the wind in the right direction or downwards (as in inflating she lungs)

vatsahanu

m. Name of a son of sena-jit-

vatsajānu

mfn. formed like a calf's knee

vatsānusārinī

f. (scilicet vivriśti-) a hiatus between a long and short syllable

vatsānusṛj

(perhaps wrong reading for sṛt-), a common N. for prec. and next

vatsānusṛtā

(

) f. a hiatus between a short and long syllable.

vatsānusṛti

(

) f. a hiatus between a short and long syllable.

vayonurūpa

mfn. suitable to one's age, ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding

vāyusūnu

m. patronymic of hanumat-

vedamantrānukramaṇikā

f. Name of work

vedānukramaṇikā

f. Name of work

vedānusmṛti

f. Name of work

vedānuvacana

n. repetition or recitation of the veda-

vedānuvacana

n. sacred doctrine

vibhānu

mfn. shining, beaming, radiant

vibudhānucara

m. a god's attendant

vicakhnu

or vicakhyu- m. Name of a king

vidhanus

mfn. having no bow

vidhanuṣka

mfn. having no bow

vidyānulomālipi

(!) f. (yān-) a particular manner of writing

vidyānupālana

n. (yān-) encouragement or cultivation of science

vidyānupālana

n. acquiring learning, studying

vidyānupālin

mfn. (yān-) cherishing or encouraging science, acquiring learning

vidyānupālin

mfn. faithfully preserving (traditional) learning

vidyānusevana

(yān-) n. the cultivation of science

vidyānusevin

(yān-) mfn. cultivating learning, engaged in study.

vihnu

A1. -hnute- Scholiast or Commentator on

vihvalatanu

mfn. one whose body is exhausted by (compound)

vijānu

n. a particular mode of fighting

vikalpānupapatti

f. untenableness owing to a dilemma

vikrayānuśaya

m. rescission of sale

vimānuṣa

mfn. without or except men

vīṇānubandha

(vīṇān-) m. the tie of a lute (or lower part of one of its ends where the wires are fixed)

vinatāsūnu

m. "son of veda-", Name of aruṇa-, garuḍa- etc. (

)

vinihnu

P. -hnauti-, to deny, disown

(wrong reading hnoti-).

vinihnuta

mfn. denied, disowned, hidden, concealed

vinirbānu

m. a particular mode of fighting with a sword

vinu

A1. -navate-, to go or spread in different directions

vinud

P. A1. -nudati-, te-, to drive away or asunder, scare away, dispel, remove

; to strike (cords), play (on a musical instrument)

(varia lectio vi-tud-), Causal -nodayati-, to drive asunder or away, dispel

; to spend (time)

; to divert, amuse, entertain

; to amuse one's self with, delight in (instrumental case)

vinud

f. a stroke, thrust, blow

vinunna

mfn. driven asunder etc.

vinunna

mfn. stricken, hurt, wounded

vinutti

f. dispelling, removal

vinutti

f. Name of an ekāha-

viprānumadita

mfn. rejoiced at by seer or poets

vīrabhānu

m. Name of a king and an author

viralajānuka

m. "having knees wide apart", a bandy-legged man

vīreśvarasūnu

m. Name of an author

viṣanud

m. "poison-expeller", Bignonia Indica

viṣayanihnuti

f. negation with regard to an object (not as to one's self)

viśikhānupraveśana

n. entrance into a sick-room (= entrance into medical practice; viśikhānupraveśanīya śanīya- mfn.treating of it)

viśikhānupraveśanīya

mfn. viśikhānupraveśana

viṣṇvanuṣṭhita

(v/iṣṇv--

) (v/iṣṇv--

) mfn. attended by viṣṇu-.

viṣṇvanusthita

(v/iṣṇv--

) mfn. attended by viṣṇu-.

vistīrṇajānu

f. a bandy-legged girl (unfit for marriage)

viśvabhānu

(viśv/a--) mfn. all-illumining

viśvadhenu

See vaiśva-dhenava- and vaiśvadhainava-.

viśvamanus

(vitv/a--) mfn. equals -kṛṣṭi-

viśvamānuṣa

mfn. (viśv/a--) (prob.) known to all men

(see viśv/a-manus-)

viśvamānuṣa

m. every mortal

viśvatanu

mfn. whose body is the universe

viśveśvarasūnu

m. Name of several authors or learned men

vitanu

mf(vī-)n. (v/i--) extremely thin or slender

vitanu

mf(vī-)n. bodiless

vitanu

mf(vī-)n. having no essence or reality

vitanu

m. the god of love (see anaṅga-)

viṭṭhalācāryasūnu

m. Name of a Commentator

viṭṭhalasūnu

m. Name of an author

vivādānugata

mfn. subject to dispute or litigation

vivarānuga

mfn. seeking after (another's) weak points

vṛddhamanu

m. the older manu- or an older recension of manu-'s law-book

(see bṛhan-manu-).

vṛddhānuśāsana

n. direction or ordinance of the aged, an old man's advice

vṛṣabhānu

m. (also written -bhāṇu-or -bhāna-) Name of a vaiśya- (the son of sūra-bhāna- and father of rādhā-)

vṛṣabhānu

m. (see vārṣabhānavī-)

vṛṣabhānujā

f. patronymic of rādha- (also Name of a drama by mathurā-dāsa-)

vṛṣabhānunandinī

f. patronymic of rādhā-,

vṛṣasānu

m. a man

vṛṣasānu

m. death

vṛttānupūrva

mfn. round and symmetrical (as legs;others "taperingly round")

vṛttānusāra

m. conforming to prescribed practice

vṛttānusāra

m. conformity to metre

vṛttānusārāt

ind. according to the metre or measure of a verse, for the sake of the metre

vṛttānusārin

mfn. conforming to established rule or practice, doing what is enjoined or proper

vṛttānuvartin

mfn. conforming to rule, obedient, virtuous

vṛttyanuprāsa

m. a kind of alliteration, frequent repetition of the same consonant

vyājabhānujit

m. Name of a man

vyanudhā

(only 3. plural perfect tense A1. -dhire-), to unfold, display

vyanunad

Caus. -nādayati-, to cause to resound, fill with noise or cries

vyanunāda

m. reverberation, loud and extending sound or noise

vyanusṛ

P. -sarati-, to roam or wander through (accusative)

; to pervade

vyapanud

P. -nudati-, to drive away, remove

vyapānud

(apā-m. Calcutta edition for apa-) P. -nudati-, to drive away, remove

vyapapanutti

f. driving away, removal

m. Name of work

m. Name of work

n. Name of work

vyāptyanugamavādārtha

m. Name of work

vyūḍhajānu

mfn. having the knees separated,

vyūḷhajānu

mfn. having the knees separated,

yajamānahautrānukramaṇī

f. Name of work

yajamānamantrānukramaṇī

f. Name of work

yajñānukāśin

mfn. looking at or inspecting sacrifice

yajurvedasaṃhitānukramaṇikā

f. Name of work

yāmalānusāripraśna

m. Name of work

yamānucara

m. a servant of yama-

yāmānuga

mfn. following yama-, being in attendance on yama-

yātānuyāta

n. (prob.) the going and following gaRa śāka-pārthivādi-.

yathālikhitānubhāvin

(thāl-) mfn. perceiving that anything is (only) painted

yathānubhūtam

(thān-) ind. according to experience

yathānupūrvam

(thān-

) ind., according to a regular series, successively, respectively.

yathānupūrvya

(thān-,

) in the beginning of a compound , (

) ind. according to a regular series, successively, respectively.

yathānupūrvyā

(

) ind. according to a regular series, successively, respectively.

yathānurūpam

(thān-) ind. according to form or rule, in exact conformity

yathāśāstrānusārin

mfn. observing the śāstra-s, following the precepts of the sacred book

yathāvittānusāram

ind. according to one's circumstances or means

yathāvittānusāreṇa

ind. according to one's circumstances or means

yatyanuṣṭhāna

n. Name of work

yatyanuṣṭhānapaddhati

f. Name of work

yogānugatā

f. Name of a kiṃ-nara- maid

yogānuśāsana

n. "Yoga-instruction", the doctrine of the Yoga by patañjali-

yogānuśāsana

n. Name of two works.

yogānuśāsanasūtra

n. Name of work

yogānuśāsanasutravṛtti

f. Name of work

yogyānupalabdhirahasya

n. Name of work

yogyānupalabdhivāda

m. Name of work

Apte Search

Results for nu777 results


nu	नु (नू) त p. p. Praised, extolled &c.

nu	नु I. 2 P. (नौति, प्रणौति; नुत; caus. नावयति; desid. नुनूषति) 1 To praise, extol, commend; सरस्वती तन्मिथुनं नुनाव Ku.7.9; Bk.14.112; see नू. -2 To roar, cry. -3 To sound, shout. -II. 1. Ā. (नवते) To go. -Caus. To cause to be drawn into the nose; Charaka.

nu	नु ind. 1 A particle having an interrogative force and implying some 'doubt', or 'uncertainty'; स्वप्नो नु माया नु मतिभ्रमो नु Ś.6.1; अस्तशैलगहनं नु विवस्वानाविवेश जलधिं नु महीं नु Ki.9.7;5.1; 8 53,9.15,54;13.4; Ku.1.46; क्षालितं नु शमितं नु वधूनां द्रावितं नु हृदयं मधुवारैः Śi.1.14; Ś.2.1. -2 It is very often compounded with the interrogative pronoun and its derivatives in the sense of 'possibly', 'indeed'; किं न्वेतत्स्यात्किमन्यदितो$ थवा Māl.1.17; एतावन्नू 3 इत्येतावद्धीति Bṛi. Up.2.1.14; कथं नु गुणवद्विन्देयं कलत्रम् Dk.; see किंनु also. -3 Ved. Now, even now. -4 Now therefore, now then, therefore. -5 Like, as. -6 Quickly. -7 From this time forward. also (-नू) Ved. Alone; नू मर्तो दयते सनिष्यन् Rv.7.1.1.

nuḍ	नुड् 6 P. (नुडति) To hurt, kill.

nud	नुद् 6 U. (नुदति-ते, नुत्त or नुन्न, प्रणुदति) 1 To push, push or drive on, impel, propel; मन्दं मन्दं नुदति पवनश्चानु- कूलो यथा त्वाम् Me.9; U.5.1. -2 To prompt, incite, urge on; रथचरणसमाह्वस्तावदौत्सुक्यनुन्ना Śi.11.26; Ku.6.65. -3 To remove, drive away, cast away, dispel; अदस्त्वया नुन्नमनुत्तमं तमः Śi.1.27; केयूरबन्धोच्छ्वसितैर्नुनोद R.6.68; 8.4;16.85; Ki.3.33;5.28. -4 To throw, cast, send. -5 Ved. To raise, lift up. -Caus. 1 To remove, drive away. -2 To prompt, incite, push on or urge forward. -With उप to drive away, remove; Śi.4.61. -प्र˚ to dispel, drive off, remove; नयनप्रसरप्रणुन्नमिव वारिरुहम् Śi.9.71.

nuda	नुद a. (At the end of comp.) Pushing, impelling, driving away.

nuḥ	नुः f. Praise. -m. 1 A weapon. -2 Time.

nutiḥ	नुतिः f. 1 Praise, eulogium, panegyric; परगुणनुतिभिः (v. l.) स्वान् गुणान् ख्यापयन्तः Bh.2.69. -2 Worship, reverence.

nutta	नुत्त (न्न) p. p. 1 Pushed, driven onward, propelled &c. -2 Driven away, dispelled; प्रणुन्नं सर्वतो दिग्भ्यः सिंहनुन्ना मृगा इव Rām.7.27.34. -3 Despatched, sent, ordered.

nuttiḥ	नुत्तिः f. Driving away, removing.

atanu	अतनु a. More वीतप्रभावतनुरप्यतनुप्रभावः Ki.16.64.

atidhenu	अतिधेनु a. Distinguished for his cows (P.I.4.3. comm.).

adhenu	अधेनु a. [न. त.] (A cow) not yielding milk. अधेनुं दस्रा स्तर्थं विषक्ताम् Rv.1.117.2; not nourishing अधेन्वा चरति मायया Rv.1.71.5.

ananubhāvuka	अननुभावुक a. Unable to comprehend; ˚ता non-comprehension, unintelligibility.

ananubhāṣaṇam	अननुभाषणम् 1 Not repeating a statement or proposition. -2 Tacit assent.

anānukṛtya	अनानुकृत्य a. Ved. Inimitable, unparalleled; अनानु- कृत्यमपुनश्चकार Rv.1.68.1;112.5.

anānuda	अनानुद a. Ved. [अनु ददाति; दा-क न. त., पृ. दीर्घः] Unsurpassed in giving (अनुल्यदातृ). अनानुदो वृषभो Rv.2.23.11.

anānupūrvyam	अनानुपूर्व्यम् 1 Separation of the different members of compounds by the intervention of others. -2 Not coming in regular order.

anānubhūtiḥ	अनानुभूतिः f. Ved. Neglect, absence of experience or observation, inattention. -(pl.) Neglectful, irreligious people; अनानुभूतीरः वधून्वानः पूर्बीरिन्द्रः शरदस्तर्तरीति Rv.6.47.17.

anāmayitnu	अनामयित्नु a. 1 Not injuring or paining; हस्ताभ्याम- नामयित्नुभ्याम् Rv.1.137.7. -2 Salubrious, curative.

anu	अनु ind. (Either used with nouns to form adverbial compounds, or as a prefix to verbs and verbal derivatives, or as a separable preposition with acc. and regarded as a कर्मप्रवचनीय). 1 After, behind, along after (पश्चात्); सर्वे नारदमनु उपविशन्ति V.5; प्रमदामनु संस्थितः शुचा नृपतिः सन् R.8.72; तं गच्छन्त्यनु ये विपत्तिषु सदा ते तत्प्रतिष्ठाशया Mu.1. 14; असौ कुमारस्तमजोनुजातः R.6.78; रत्या न साशङ्कमनुप्रयातः Ku.3.23; क्रमेण सुप्तामनु संविवेश सुप्तोत्थितां प्रातरनूदतिष्ठत् R.2. 24; अनुविष्णु = विष्णोः पश्चात् P.II.4.18. Sk.; तदनु कथयेर्मा- धवीयामवास्थाम् Māl.9.26 afterwards. -2 Along, alongside, by the side of, lengthwise यस्यचायामः P.II.1.16 जलानि सा तीरनिखातयूपा वहत्ययोध्यामनु राजधानीम् R.13.61; सो$श्वमेधश- तेनेष्ट्वा यमुनामनु वीर्यवान् । त्रिशताश्वान् सरस्वत्यां गङ्गामनु चतुःशतान् Mb.; अनुगङ्गं वाराणसी = गङ्गामन्वायतम् (गङ्गादैर्घ्यसदृशदैर्घ्योपलक्षिता) situated alongside the Gaṅgā P.II.1.16 Sk.; आविर्भू- तप्रथममुकुलाः कन्दलीश्चानुकच्छम् Me.21; गिरिरिव अनुतटपुष्पितकर्णि- कारयष्टिः V.3.3 along the sides or slopes. -3 After, in consequence of, being indicated by; जपमनु प्रावर्षत् P.II 3.8 Sk. (हेतुभूतजपोपलक्षितं वर्षणम्); so वृक्षमनु विद्योतते विद्युत्. -4 With, along with (सहार्थे); connected with; नगीम- न्वसिता सेना P.I.4.85 Sk. (नद्या सह सम्बद्धा) उमास्तनोद्भेद- मनु प्रवृद्धः Ku.7.24. along with, contemporaneously; Śi. 8.56; दिवसो$नुमित्रमगमद्विलयम् 9.17. -5 Inferior or subordinate to, (मित्रलाभमनु लाभसम्पदः Ki.13.52 inferior, lower in value or importance; अनु हरिं सुराः = हरेर्हीनाः हीने); P.I.4.86 Sk. -6 In a particular relation or state (इत्थं- भूताख्याने प्रकारविशेषनिरूपणे); भक्तो विष्णुमनु Sk. (विष्णोरित्थं- भूतः, भक्तिविशेषयुक्तः) an ardent devotee of Viṣṇu; यस्त्वां द्वेष्टि स मां द्वेष्टि यस्त्वामनु स मामनु Rām. favourably inclined or devoted to. -7 Having a part or share, participation; or one that claims a share of (भागे); भागो$स्यास्ति इति भागस्वामी; लक्ष्मीर्हरिमनु (हरेर्भागः) Sk., हरिस्वामिकभागवतीत्यर्थः. -8 Repetition, in a distributive sense, mostly in comp. (वीप्सार्थे, विषयतायाम्); अनुदिवसम् day by day, every day; अनुक्षणम् every moment; ˚वेलम् every time, frequently; वृक्षम् वृक्षमनु सिञ्चति Sk. waters tree after tree, i. e. every tree (यावद्वृक्षव्यापकः सेकः). -9 Towards, in the direction of, near, to, at (अनुर्यत्समया P.II.1.15); अनुवनमशनिर्गतः Sk.; ˚नदि Śi.7.24 near the river; प्रजिघाय कान्तमनु मुग्धतरः 9.55 to (प्रति); on or in, with the force of the locative; यदेतदस्यानुतटं विभाति 4.39,7.1; तस्माद्रच्छेरनुकनखलं शैलराजाव- तीर्णाम् (जह्नोः कन्याम्) Me.52. -1 In orderly succession, according to; अनुक्रमम् in regular order; अनुज्येष्ठम् = ज्येष्ठ- स्यानुपूर्व्येण in order of seniority; ˚पूर्वम्; अनुरूपम् = रूपस्य योग्यम् Sk. -11 Corresponding with, like, in imitation of; सर्वं मामनु ते प्रियाविरहजां त्वं तु व्यथां मानुभूः V.4.47; so अनुगर्ज् to roar after or in imitation of. -12 Following, conformable to (अनुगत); तथैव सो$भूदन्वर्थो राजा प्रकृतिरञ्ज- नात् R.4.12. (अनुगतो$र्थो यस्य). -13 With regard to, towards, in respect of; अर्घ्यदानमनु चोदितो वचः Śi.14,53; साधुर्देवदत्तो मातरमनु; -14 On account of, by reason of (with abl.); समस्तो वत लोको$यं भजते कारणादनु । त्वं तु निष्कारणादेव प्रीयसे वरवर्णिनि ॥ Rām. As a separable adverb अनु is used only in the Vedas and means after, afterwards, later on, now, at this time, again, once more, then, and further. (The senses of अनु as given by G. M. are:-- अनु वेदाध्ययनानुष्ठानसामीप्यपश्चाद्भावानुबन्धनसाम्याभीमुखहीनविसर्गं- लक्षणेषु; e. g. वेदे अनुवाकः; अनुष्ठाने अनुतिष्ठति; सामीप्ये अनुमेघं वर्षति; पश्चाद्भावे तदनु; अनुबन्धने अनुशेते; साम्ये अनुकरोति; आभिमुख्ये मातरमनुधावति वत्सः; हीने अनुहरिं सुराः; विसर्गे अनुजानीते; लक्षणे अनुवनमशनिर्गतः.) The senses of अनु may be thus expressed in verse :-- आयामे$परभावे च (पश्चादर्थे) वीप्सायां सन्निधौ तथा । इत्थंभूते लक्षणे च भागसादृश्ययोरपि ॥ योग्य- तायां तथा हीने तृतीयार्थे ह्यनुक्रमे । अर्थेष्वेतेषु बहुशो ह्यनुशब्दः प्रयुज्यते ॥.

anuḥ	अनुः Ved. 1 A man. -2 N. of a son of Yayāti. -3 An ancient tribe in India; अनुत्वाहिघ्ने अध देव देवा Rv.6.18.14.

anuka	अनुक a. [अनु-कन् P.V.2.74, अनुकामयते इति अनुकः कमिता Sk.] 1 Greedy; desirous. -2 Libidinous, lustful (as a lover). -3 Sloping.

anukaccham	अनुकच्छम् Along or near the marshy ground; आविर्भूतप्रथममुकुलाः कन्दलीश्चानुकच्छम् (Me.21).

anukath	अनुकथ् 1 P. To relate after (some one else), mention subsequently.

anukathanam	अनुकथनम् Subsequent mention; आदेशः कथनम्, अन्वा- देशो$नुकथनम् Kāśi. on P.II.4.32. -2 Relation, narration; discourse, conversation.

anukanīyas	अनुकनीयस् a. The next youngest. P.VI.2.189.

anukamp	अनुकम्प् 1 A. To take pity or compassion on, sympathize with, pity (with acc.); किमुज्जिहानजीवितां वराकीं नानुकम्पसे Māl.1; कथं ब्राह्मणी मामनुकम्पते Mk.3; कम्पसे नानुकम्पसे 4.8; with loc. also; सौहृदेन तथा प्रेम्णा सदा मध्यनु- कम्पसे Mb. -Caus. To pity &c.; शफरीं प्रथमा वृष्टिरिवान्व- कम्पयत् Ku.4.39.

anukampaka	अनुकम्पक a. Pitying, taking compassion on, sympathizing with.

anukampana	अनुकम्पन a. One who pities, kindhearted, compassionate. -नम् Compassion, pity, tenderness, sympathy.

anukampā	अनुकम्पा [कम्प्-अङ्] Compassion, commiseration, pity; with gen.; तेषामेवानुकम्पार्थम् Bg.1.11; or with loc.; भक्त्या गुरौ मय्यनुकम्पया च R.2.63; or in comp.; भूतानुकम्पा तव चेत् R.2.48; अनुकम्पायां कन् P.V.3.76.

anukampita	अनुकम्पित p. p. Pitied; ˚आत्मन् having a compassionate spirit.

anukampin	अनुकम्पिन् a. Pitying (in comp.); sympathizing with.

anukampya	अनुकम्प्य pot. p. Pitiable, worthy of sympathy; किं तन्न येनासि ममानुकम्प्या R.14.74; दुहितरमनुकम्प्यामद्रिरादाय दोर्भ्याम् Ku.3.76. -म्प्यः 1 A courier, express messenger. -2 An ascetic.

anukalpaḥ	अनुकल्पः An alternative, a second alternative, a make-shift, अभावे हि श्रुतस्य अनुकम्पः प्रतिनिधिः । ŚB. on MS.6.3.35.

anukāṅkṣā	अनुकाङ्क्षा Desire, wish.

anukāma	अनुकाम a. [कामस्य सदृशः अनुरूपो वा] 1 Agreeable to, according to one's desire. -2 [अनुकामयते कम्-अच्] Desirous, lustful. -मम ind. At will, according to desire or wish, as desired, at pleasure. -मः [अनुरूपः कामः] Proper or worthy desire; desire; ˚कृत् fulfilling one's desires.

anukāmīna	अनुकामीन a. [कामस्य सदृशम् अनुकामम्; ख प्रत्ययः; अनुकामं गामी यथेष्टं गन्ता इत्यर्थः P.V.2.11 Sk.] Going at will or pleasure; one who acts as he pleases; अनुकामीनतां त्यज Bk.5.15.

anukāla	अनुकाल a. [कालस्य योग्यः] Opportune, timely, adapted or suited to the time. -लम् ind. Opportunely, on a proper occasion.

anukīrtanam	अनुकीर्तनम् Act of proclaiming or publishing. असदा- चरिते मार्गे कथं स्यादनुकीर्तनम् Mb.3.233.1.

anukūla	अनुकूल a. [अनुगतः कूलं तटं स्नेहादिबन्धनं वा] 1 Favourable, agreeable (lit. following the bank of slope, according to the current, with the grain;), as wind, fate &c.; मन्दं मन्दं नुदति पवनश्चानुकूलो यथा त्वाम् Me.9; शान्त ˚पवनश्च Ś.4.11; ˚परिणामा संवृत्ता Ś.7; बाणास्त एव मदनस्य ममानुकूलाः V.3.2. -2 Friendly, kind, well or kindly disposed. -3 Conformable to; pleasing, agreeable or favourable to, conducting to, capable of; oft. in comp.; स्पर्शानुकूला इव सूर्यकान्ताः Ś.2.7; अननुकूलो$भिमानस्य K.45 not inclined to pride; दर्शनानुकूलाहमस्य न वेति 197; कुशलविरचितानुकूलवेशः R.5.76 befitting, suitable. -लः 1 A faithful or kind husband, (एकरतिः S. D. or एकनिरतः एकस्यामेव नायिकायाम् आसक्तः), a variety of नायक. -2 'Favourable to all', epithet of Viṣṇu. -ला 1 N. of a tree (दन्ती) Croton Polyandrum. -2 N. of a metre. -लम् 1 Favour, kindness; नारीणामनुकूलमाचरति चेत् K. P.9. -2 (Rhet.) A figure in which unfavourableness turns into kindness; अनुकूलं प्रतिकूल्यमानुकूल्यानुबन्धि चेत् S. D.; कुपितासि यदा तन्वि निधाय करजक्षतम् । बधान भुजपाशाभ्यां कण्ठमस्य दृढं तदा ॥.

anukūlatā	अनुकूलता त्वम् 1 Favour, conformity, kindness, good will; पवनस्यानुकूलत्वात् R.1.42 the wind being favourable. -2 Prosperity.

anukūlayati	अनुकूलयति Den. P. To conciliate, propitiate, act in a friendly way towards; (तम्) अनुकूलयतीन्द्रो$पि कल्पद्रुम- विभूषणैः Ku.2.39; अस्यानुकूलय मतिं मतिमन्ननेन Ki.13.71; Śi.7.11.

anukūlita	अनुकूलित a. One who is honoured or well received; मन्त्रिणो नैगमाश्चैव यथार्हमनुकूलिताः Rām.7.74.6.

anukṛ	अनुकृ 8 U. 1 To do after or afterwards; follow; especially to imitate, do after or in imitation of, resemble, equal, copy (with gen.); ततो$नुकुर्याद्विशदस्य तस्याः... स्मितस्य Ku.1.44; श्यामतया हरेरिवानुकुर्वतीम् K.1; अनुकरोति भगवतो नारायणस्य 6.282; ननु कलभेन यूथपतेरनुकृतम् M.5; (also with acc.); सर्वाभिरन्याभिः कलाभिरनुचकार तं वैशम्पायनः K.76; शैलाधिपस्यानुचकार लक्ष्मीम् Bk.2.8; बहुतरं भवन्तमनु- करोति V.5; Ms.2.199. -2 To requite, recompense. -3 To try on, adjust, adapt; बन्धं ततो$नुकुर्वित Suśr.

anukara	अनुकर a. Imitating. -रः An assistant.

anukaraṇam	अनुकरणम् कृतिः f. 1 Imitation; त्वदीयसुचरितैकदेशस्यानु- करणं किलैतत् Mu.7. -2 Copy, resemblance, similarity; शब्दानुकरणम् onamatopoeia; अव्यक्तानुकरणस्यात इतौ P.VI. 1.98; V.4.57; I.4.62; धूमोद्गारानुकृतिनिपुणाः Me.71. -3 Compliance; ओमित्येतदनुकृति ह स्म वै Taitt. Up.8.

anukartṛ	अनुकर्तृ m. 1 An imitator. -2 Actor, performer.

anukarman	अनुकर्मन् n. Imitation. -2 [पश्चात्कृतं कर्म] A subsequent rite. -m. N. of one of the Viśvedevas.

anukāraḥ	अनुकारः [कृ-घञ्] Imitation, resemblance; सुलभानु- कारः खलु जगति वेधसो निर्माणसंनिवेशः Māl.9.

anukārin	अनुकारिन् a. Imitating, resembling (with gen. or in comp.); प्रियायाः किञ्चिदनुकारिणीषु लतासु दृष्टिं विलोभयामि Ś.6; अनुकारिणि पूर्वेषां युक्तरूपमिदं त्वयि Ś.2.17;1.21; R.1. 43. कपिलानुकारिणा 3.5. अनुकार्य anukārya कारणीय kāraṇīya कर्तव्य kartavya अनुकार्य कारणीय कर्तव्य pot. p. Fit to be imitated. -र्यम्, -अनुक्रिया A subsequent rite or ceremony.

anukrīḥ	अनुक्रीः [अनु-कृ उणा˚ बा. ई. किच्च Tv.] A kind of sacrificial rite called साद्यस्क्र.

anukīrṇa	अनुकीर्ण a. Filled, Pervaded; अनुकीर्णं महारण्यं ब्राह्मणैः समपद्यत Mb.3.26.1. Crowded, crammed.

anukṛta	अनुकृत a. Imitated, made like. -तम् n. 1 Return. -2 Defence; जघ्नतुस्तौ तदान्योन्यं कृतानुकृतकारिणौ Rām.6. 17.27.

anukṛpāyate	अनुकृपायते Den. A. To sympathize or condole with. अनुकृप् To mourn for, long; अनु पूर्वाः कृपते वावशाना Rv. 1.113.1.

anukṛṣ	अनुकृष् 1 P. To drag after oneself, to attract (in gram.); see अनुकर्ष below. -Caus. To subject.

anukarṣaḥ	अनुकर्षः र्षणम् 1 Dragging after, drawing along; attraction in general. -2 Summoning or invoking (by means of spells). -3 Grammatical attraction, application or attraction of a word in a preceding rule to a subsequent rule, word &c.; नायमनुकर्षणार्थश्चकारः Mbh. on P.II.2.4; see also Sk. on P.VI.1.127. -4 [अनुकृष्यते स्वसम्बद्धेन चक्रेण] The axle-tree or bottom of a carriage. -5 Delayed performance of a duty.

anukarṣan	अनुकर्षन् m. The bottom of a carriage.

anukṛṣṭa	अनुकृष्ट a. Drawn after, attracted. -2 Implied; included.

anuklṛp	अनुक्लृप् 1 A. To follow duly. -Caus. To cause others to follow duly.

anukalpaḥ	अनुकल्पः [अनुगतः मुख्यं कल्पम्] 1 A secondary direction or precept, a substitute or alternative to be used in times of necessity when the primary one (प्रथमकल्प) is not possible; as the direction to use गोधूम or तण्डुल in the absence of यव; प्रभुः प्रथमकल्पस्य यो$नुकल्पेन वर्तते Ms. 11.3,3.147. -2 A work connected with Kalpa (one of the six auxiliaries of the Vedas).

anukta	अनुक्त a. 1 Unuttered, unsaid (in gram.) = अनभिहित q. v. under अभिधा. -2 Unheard of, extraordinary. -3 Not told; असावनुक्तो$पि सहाय एव Ku.3.21.

anuktha	अनुक्थ a. Without hymns or songs of praise; किं मामनिन्द्राः कृणवन्ननुक्थाः Rv.5.2.3.

anukrakaca	अनुक्रकच a. [अनुगतः क्रकचम्] Serrated, dentated like a saw.

anukrand	अनुक्रन्द् 1 P. To cry after, reply to the sound; यं क्षोणीरनुचक्रदे Rv.8.3.1. वीरुन्नीडकपोतकूजितमनुक्रन्दन्त्यमी कुक्कुटाः Māl.9.7.

anukrandanam	अनुक्रन्दनम् A cry in reply.

anukram	अनुक्रम् 1 U., 4 P. 1 To go after, follow (fig. also); महर्षिभिरनुक्रान्तं धर्मपन्थानमास्थितः Rām; to betake oneself to; तीर्थयात्रामनुक्रामन् Mb.; व्यवसायमनुक्रान्ता कान्ते त्वमति- शोभनम् Rām. -2 To count up, enumerate, state or go through in order; यच्चानुक्रान्तं यच्चानुक्रंस्यते Mbh. on P.I. 1.72; give a table of contents, used frequently in the Nirukta.

anukrama	अनुक्रम a. [अनुगतः क्रमम्] In due order. -मः 1 Succession, order, sequence, arrangement, method, due order; प्रचक्रमे वक्तुमनुक्रमज्ञा R.6.7; श्वश्रूजनं सर्वमनुक्रमेण 14. 6; गृहीतानुक्रमाद्दाप्यो Y.2.41. -2 A table of contents, index, such as that of the Vedic Saṁhitās. -3 Routine order, daily practice; मानेन रक्ष्यते धान्यमश्वान् रक्षत्यनुक्रमः Mb.5.34.4. (अनुक्रमः व्यायामशिक्षादिः इति भाष्यकारः).

anukramaṇam	अनुक्रमणम् 1 Proceeding in order. -2 Following. -णी, -णिका [स्वार्थे कन्] A table of contents, an index showing the successive contents of a work. उभे सन्ध्ये जपन्किञ्चित् सद्यो मुच्येत किल्बिषात् । अनुक्रमण्या यावत्स्यादह्ना रात्र्या च सञ्चितम् ॥ Mb.1.1.263.

anukruś	अनुक्रुश् 1 P. To shout at or after. -Caus. To join in lamenting, condole with, show sympathy. तावदिमान् बालवृक्षान् उदकप्रदानेन अनुक्रोशयिष्यामि । Pratimā.5.

anukrośaḥ	अनुक्रोशः 1 Pity, compassion, tenderness (with loc.); भगवन्कामदेव न ते मय्यनुक्रोशः Ś.3 ; Me.117; किमपि सानुक्रोशः कृतः made to relent Ś.4; न ते मां प्रति अनुक्रोशः Ś.3. -2 One who has gone over a krośa (2 miles) (अनुगतः क्रोशम्).

anukṣaṇam	अनुक्षणम् ind. Every instant, constantly, frequently.

anukṣattṛ	अनुक्षत्तृ m. (-त्ता) The attendant of a door-keeper or charioteer.

anukṣapam	अनुक्षपम् ind. Night aftar night; Ki.

anukṣetram	अनुक्षेत्रम् Stipend given to certain templeworshippers in Orissa in commutation of the proceeds of an endowment.

anukhyā	अनुख्या 2 P. Ved. To descry, see from a distance; अनु पूर्वाणि चख्यथुर्यगानि Rv.7.7.4.

anukhyātiḥ	अनुख्यातिः f. 1 Descrying. -2 Reporting, revealing.

anukhyātṛ	अनुख्यातृ m. (-ता) A discoverer; reporter.

anugam	अनुगम् 1 P. 1 To go after, follow, attend, accompany; अनिभिज्ञो गुणानां यो न भृत्यैरनुगम्यते Pt.1.73; ओदकान्तात्स्निग्धो जनो$नुगन्तव्यः Ś.4; केकासवैरनुगम्यमानो भूषणनिनादः K.84; मार्गं मनुष्येश्वरधर्मपत्नी श्रुतेरिवार्थं स्मृतिरन्वगच्छत् R.2.2; छायेव तां भूपति- रन्वगच्छत् 6, Ms.12.115; -2 To follow, practise, observe, obey, act up to; प्रतिशब्दक इव राजवचनमनुगच्छति जनो भयात् K.14; पूर्वैरयमभिप्रेतो गतो मार्गो$नुगम्यते Rām.; विपत्तौ च महाँल्लोके धीरतामनुगच्छति H.3.37. -3 To seek, wander through; काननं वापि शैलं वा यं रामो$नुगमिष्यति Rām.; कृत्स्नां पृथ्वीमनुगच्छत ibid. go in quest of. -4 To come, arrive, approach, present oneself (as time); काले त्वनुगते Bhāg. -5 To answer or respond to; correspond with, be suitable to; imitate, resemble; धनुःश्रियं गोत्रभिदो$नुगच्छति Ki.4.326; आस्फालितं यत्प्रमदाकराग्रैर्मृदङ्गधीरध्वनिमन्वगच्छत् R. 16.13; न चापि कादम्बरीं लक्ष्मीरनुगन्तुमलम् K.23. -6 To go or die out, be extinguished; यद्येष उख्यो$ग्निरनुगच्छेत् Śat. Br. -7 To enter into. -Caus. [गमयति] To cause to follow, follow; उद्ग्रीवैरनुगमितस्य पुष्करस्य M.1.21 followed or accompanied in sound.

anuga	अनुग a. [अनुगच्छतीति, गम्-ड] (In comp.) Following, going after; corresponding or tallying with, adequate to; सदा पुष्ठानुगः पुरे Pt.I.59; गीतानुगं वारि मृदङ्गवाद्यम् R.16. 64; Me.47; कामक्रोधवशानुगम् Ms.2.214; गोत्ररिक्थानुगः पिण्डः 9.142 governed or regulated by; 8.239. -गः A follower, (obedient) servant, companion; तद्भूतनाथानुग R.2.58,9.82; बल˚ followed by an army, being the head of an army.

anugata	अनुगत p. p. 1 (Used passively) (a) Followed (lit. & fig.), attended; अनुगतमलिवृन्दैर्गण्डभित्तीर्विहाय R.12. 12; M.3.9; मद्यानुगतभोजनं मलावहम् Ms.11.7. (b) Full of, filled with; दारिद्य्रेणाभिभूतेन त्वत्स्नेहानुगतेन च Mk.4.5; वर्ष- धरकलमूकानुगतेन परिजनेन K.159 consisting or made up of; चिन्तानुगतसर्वात्मन् Mb. (c) Covered, as by a dress hanging behind; शिवमिवानुगतं गजचर्मणा Ki.5.2 (पश्चाद्व्याप्तम्). (d) Extinguished &c. (e) Acquired, obtained. (f) Overtaken; कालेनानुगतो ह्यसि Rām.7.68.6. -2 (Used actively) (a). Following, obeying; observing; स्वमत- मनुगतः Mu.5.19; विभवानुगता भार्या Mk.3.28; दिग्विजय- प्रसङ्गेनानुगतो भूमिमिमाम् K.191 come to; Ms.9.267; K.166; Mu.6.5; H.2.55; R.15.9. (b) Corresponding or tallying with, adapted or answering to, in harmony with; सूत्रेणानुगतं भवति Ś.B.; पादन्यासो लय- मनुगतः M.2.8 in accompaniment to the musical time. मृदङ्ग ˚तः सङ्गीतमधुरः Ratn.1; ˚वीणैः Śi.11.1. (c) Adequate or suitable to, fit for; प्रस्तावानुगतं पृष्टः Pt.5. (d) Imitating; परितुष्टो$स्मि यत्पितरमनुगतो वत्सः M.5. I am glad that the boy takes after his father. -तम् Moderate time in music. -Comp. -अर्थ a. having a corresponding or easily discoverable sense.

anugatiḥ	अनुगतिः f. 1 Following; बलस्य चतुरङ्गस्य नायकानुगतिर्नयः Rām.; गतानुगतिको लोकः Pt.1.342. following, imitating; see under गत. -2 Consent, approval; अकाम˚ forced consent.

anugamaḥ	अनुगमः मनम् 1 Following; आत्मानुगमनेन गां प्रसादयि- तुमहसि R.1.88; बृहतेर्धातोरर्थानुगमात् S. B. -2 Comprehending, grasping (as a sense); रसाद्यनुगतः S. D. -3 Following in death, post-cremation, self-immolation of a widow on her husband's funeral pile. -4 Imitating; approaching. -5 Conformity, accordance; श्रुत्यनुगमाच्च S. B.

anugāmin	अनुगामिन् a. Following. -m. A follower = अनुग.

anugāmuka	अनुगामुक a. Habitually or constantly following.

anugarj	अनुगर्ज् 1 P. To roar after or in imitation of.

anugarjita	अनुगर्जित p. p. Roared. -तम् A roaring echo, अनुगर्जितसन्दिग्धाः करणैर्मुरजस्वनाः Ku.6.4.

anugava	अनुगव a. [गोः सदृशः आयामः, अच्] Suiting (the length of) the oxen.

anugavīnaḥ	अनुगवीनः [अनुगु गोः पश्चात्पर्याप्तं यथा गच्छति सो$नुगवीनः गोपालः; अनुगु ख P.V.2.15 Sk.] A cowherd.

anugādin	अनुगादिन् a. [गद्-णिनि] Repeating, following in speaking, echoing. (P.V.4.13).

anugiram	अनुगिरम् ind. By the mountainside अयं सुजातो$नुगिरं तमालः R.13.49.

anugītā	अनुगीता f. An after-song. N. of a part of the fourteenth book of the Mb (Chs.16-92).

anugīti	अनुगीति See under अनुगै.

anuguṇa	अनुगुण a. [अनुकूलो गुणो यस्य] Having similar qualities, of the same nature; कान्तारतापसाविक्षू वंशकानुगुणौ स्मृतौ Susr.; conformable to, favourable or agreeable to, suitable, according to; मनोरथस्यानुगुणं सर्वदा यस्य चेष्टितम् Mv.7.7 obedient to the will 7.38; गुणसम्पदानुगुणतां गमितः Ki.6.33;1.13; congenial, suitable, fit; ˚अन्न- लाभात् Dk.64,94; अननुगुणदाराणाम् Dk.13 not having wives worthy of themselves; (वीणा) उत्कण्ठितस्य हृदयानुगुणा वयस्या Mk.3.3 agreeable or pleasing to the heart, exactly after the heart (Tv. here takes ˚णा mean तन्त्रीयुक्तवीणा itself); अत्र द्वावप्युपध्मानीयावेव न शान्तानुगुणौ R. G.; रसानुगुणतामेति S. D.; ˚णं सर्वास्ववस्थासु यत् U.1.39. -णः A natural peculiarity. -णम् adv. 1 Favourably, conformably to one's desires; चिरेणानुगुणं प्रोक्ता प्रतिपत्तिपराङ्मुखी Bk.8.95. -2 Agreeably or conformably to (in comp.); तदादेशानुगुणं भवदागमनमभूत् Dk. 11. -3 Naturally.

anuguṇatvam	अनुगुणत्वम् Favourableness.

anuguṇayati	अनुगुणयति Den. P. To make favourable, conciliate; bring about, secure; सम्पदो$नुगुणयन् सुखैषिणाम् Ki.13.44.

anugupta	अनुगुप्त a. Covered, sheltered.

anugai	अनुगै 1 P. 1 To sing after (a person), sing to (a tune); follow in singing; अनुगायति काचिदुदञ्चितपञ्चमरागम् Gīt.1; अनुजगुरथ दिव्यं दुन्दुभिध्वानमाशाः Ki.3.6 sent back, echoed. -2 To sing; to celebrate in song.

anugītam	अनुगीतम् Singing in response to; झङ्कारस्यानुगीतैरनुरणन- मिवारभ्यते भृङ्गसार्थैः Ratn.1.19.

anugītiḥ	अनुगीतिः f. N. of a metre of two lines, the first having 27 and the second 32, mātrās, a species of the Aryā metre.

anugṛham	अनुगृहम् The roof of a house; कर्णकीलायसम्बन्धो$नुगृहं सेतुः (cf. Kaut. A. ch.65.)

anugrah	अनुग्रह् 9 P. (Ved. -गृभ्णाति). 1 To favour, oblige, treat with kindness; शिलातलैकदेशमनुगृह्णातु वयस्यः Ś.3 our friend will be so good as to, or kindly, take a seat on the stone; अयं विष्टरो$नुगृह्यताम् V.5 be pleased to sit down &c.; महेन्द्रेण पुनरनुगृहीता V.3 favoured (by modifying the curse); with instr. or abl. of that which is an obligation; अनुगृहीतो$हमनया मघवतः सम्भावनया S.6; कतर- त्कुलमनुगृहीतं भगवत्या जन्मना K.135, अनुगृहीतो$स्मि अहमुपदेशा- द्भवतः V.4. I am much obliged to you &c. (अनुगृहीत is oft. used by itself in the sense of 'much obliged', 'many thanks', 'I thank you', 'I esteem it as a favour'.) -2 To foster, cherish, protect, maintain (as fire); अग्निर्नित्यानुगृहीतः स्यात् Āśval. -2 To receive, welcome. -4 To hold up, support, uphold. त्रिभिस्तीक्ष्णैर्महावेगैर- न्वगृह्णाच्छिरः शरैः Mb.6.12.45. -5 To follow in robbing, seizing or depriving. -6 To keep to, conform or correspond to, follow, take after; आकृतिमनुगृह्णन्ति गुणाः Vb.2; क्षात्रधर्मश्चानुगृहीतो भवति U.5. -Caus. To cause to favour, or to favour; आर्यस्य दर्शनेनात्मानमनुग्राहयितुम् Mu.4. अनुग्रहः, -हणम् 1 A favour, kindness, obligation; showing favour, obliging, rewarding (opp. निग्रह); निग्रहानुग्रहकर्ता Pt.1; पादार्पणानुग्रहपूतपृष्ठम् R.2.35; अनुग्रह इवेयमभ्यर्थना Ś.1; अनुग्रहं संस्मरणप्रवृत्तम् Ku.3.3. -2 Assistance, help (shown to the poor in feeding them &c. दरिद्रादिपोषणम्). -3 Facilitating by spells. -4 Acceptance. -5 Rear-guard. -Comp. -कातर a. anxious to please or for favour. -सर्गः creation of feelings or mental conditions.

anugrāhya	अनुग्राह्य pot. p. Fit to be favoured or obliged; ततः कथनेनात्मानमनुग्राह्यमिच्छामि K.134; न वयमनुग्राह्याः प्रायो देवतानाम् 61.

anugrāhaka	अनुग्राहक a. 1 Favouring, furthering, promoting. -2 Gracious, kind.

anugrāsakaḥ	अनुग्रासकः A mouthful; the equivalent of a mouthful.

anughaṭanam	अनुघटनम् Linking together with; क्षिप्ता कथानुघटनाय मयापि वाणी K.24.

anughaṭṭ	अनुघट्ट् To stroke, to rub lengthwise.

anucar	अनुचर् 1 P. 1 To follow, pursue, go after; to serve, attend or wait upon; पित्रोः पादाननुचरन् K.368 serving. -2 To traverse, seek after, go through, wander. -3 To conduct oneself, behave.

anucaraḥ	अनुचरः 1 A companion, follower, attendant, servant; तेनानुचरेण धेनोः R.2.4; आत्मानुचरस्य भावं जिज्ञासमाना 26,52; Me.3; विबुधानुचराः Ms.12.47. In comp. attended or followed by; वानर˚, राक्षस˚ &c. -2 Following a spy (चरमनुगतः). -रा, -री 1 A female attendant. -2 A logical or due strophe.

anucarita	अनुचरित p. p. Followed &c. attended, विद्याधरानु- चरितं किन्नरीभिस्तथैव च Mb.3.158.39. -तम् Walk; walk in life; conduct.

anucārakaḥ	अनुचारकः A follower, servant &c. ... सहचरस्तु स्याद- नुचारे सहाशने । Nm. -रिका A female servant.

anucarciḥ	अनुचर्चिः f. Ved. Repeating (in a chorus).

anucita	अनुचित a. 1 Wrong, improper. -2 Unusual; unfit. -अर्थः An unusual meaning.

anucint	अनुचिन्त् 1 P. To consider, think of, call to mind; धातुर्विभुत्वमनुचिन्त्य वपुश्च तस्याः Ś.2.1; परमं पुरुषं दिव्यं याति पार्थानुचिन्तयन् Bg.8.8; धर्मार्थौ चानुचिन्तयेत् Ms.4.92. अनुचिन्ता anucintā अनुचिन्तनम् anucintanam अनुचिन्ता अनुचिन्तनम् 1 Calling to mind, thinking of, meditating upon. -2 Recalling, recollecting. -3 Constant thinking, anxiety.

anucchādaḥ	अनुच्छादः The part of a man's under-garment which is allowed to hang down in front from the waist to the feet (Mar. निऱ्या).

anucchittiḥ	अनुच्छित्तिः f., अनुच्छेदः Non-extirpation; non-destuction; indestructibility. अविनाशी वा अरे अयमात्मा अनु- च्छित्तिधर्मा । Bṛ. Up. (?)

anucchiṣṭa	अनुच्छिष्ट a. Not rejected; pure, holy; fresh, unused; ˚ यौवना Dk.112.

anujan	अनुजन् 4 A. 1 To be born after, arise or be produced after, to follow in being born, arising &c.; पुत्रिकायां कृतायां तु यदि पुत्रो$नुजायते Ms.9.134; अथवा जायमानस्य यच्छी- लमनुजायते Mb. -2 To take after (one's parents); to be born similar to.

anuja	अनुज जात p. p. Born after, later, younger; राममनुजातः P.III.4.72; असौ कुमारस्तमजो$नुजातः R.6.78; पुमांसमनुरुध्य जाता पुमनुजा Sk.; so स्त्र्यनुजा. -जः, -जातः 1 A younger brother; दन्तजाते$नुजाते च कृतचूडे च संस्थिते । अशुद्धा बान्धवाः सर्वे सूतके च तथोच्यते ॥ Some interpret the word अनुजात there to mean 'a child which has not, cut teeth.' Ms.5.58. -2 A cadet; born again, after born, younger, later. -3 Taking after. अनुजातो हि मां सर्वैर्गुणैः श्रेष्ठो ममात्मजः Rām.2.2.11. -4 Born again, invested with the sacred thread. -5 Equal, resembling; एकस्त्वमनुजातो$सि पितरं बलवत्तरम् Rām.6.76.72. -जा, -जाता 1 younger sister. -2 N. of a plant (त्रायमाणालता). -जम् N. of a palnt (प्रपौण्डरीक; Mar. पुण्डरीक), -Comp. -अवर a. lower than the younger, youngest.

anujanaḥ	अनुजनः Attendants, followers. Mb.4.

anujanman	अनुजन्मन् m. [अनु जन्म यस्य] A younger brother; जननाथ तवानुजन्मनाम् Ki.2.17; Śi.13.2.14.

anujīv	अनुजीव् 1 P. 1 To depend upon for subsistence, hang on, live by or upon (something); ये च त्वामनुजीवन्ति नाहं तेषां न ते मम Rām.; स तु तस्याः पाणिग्राहकमनुजीविष्यति Dk. 122 hang or depend on, live (submissively) under, live as a subordinate to. -2 To see without envy; यां तां श्रियमसूयामः पुरा दृष्ट्वा युधिष्ठिरे । अद्य तामनुजीवामः Mb. -3 To live for any one. -4 To follow or imitate in living; प्रेमदत्तवदनानिलः पिबन्नन्वजीवदमरालकेश्वरौ R.19.15 v. l. (अत्यजीवत्). -5 To survive.

anujīvin	अनुजीविन् a. Dependent, living on or upon. -m. A dependent, servant, follower; अवञ्चनीयाः प्रभवो$नुजीविभिः Ki.1.4,1; भर्तुश्चिन्तानुवर्तित्वं सुवृत्तं चानुजीविनाम् Pt.1.69. ˚वृत्तम् conduct of a courtier; Kau.A.5.

anujīvya	अनुजीव्य a. 1 To be served (as a master). -2 To be followed in living; आचार्यो गुरवो वृद्धा वृथा वां पर्युपासिताः । सारं यद्राजशास्त्राणामनुजीव्यं न गृह्यते ॥ Rām.6.29.9.

anujñā	अनुज्ञा 9 U. 1 To permit, allow (a person or thing); assent or consent to, approve; authorise, sanction; तदनुजानीहि मां गमनाय U. 3. so let me go; सेयं याति शकुन्तला पतिगृहं सर्वैरनुज्ञायताम् Ś.4.9 permitted to go; ततो$नुजज्ञे गमनं सुतस्य Bk.1.23; M.1.19; तन्मया प्रीतिमता$नुज्ञातम् Ś.5 approved, agreed to. -2 To betroth, affiance; मां जातमात्रां धनमित्रनाम्ने$न्वजानाद्भार्यां मे पिता Dk.5. -3 to excuse, forgive; अनुप्रवेशे यद्वीर कृतवास्त्वं ममाप्रियम् । सर्वं तदनुजानामि Mb. -4 To repent, be sorry for. -5 To request, entreat, beg; त्वां साहमनुजानामि न गन्तव्यमितो वनम् Rām. -6 To treat or behave kindly, favour; ते मां वीर्येण यशसा ... अस्त्रैश्चाप्यन्वजानत Mb. -7 To dismiss, bid farewell (usually in caus.). -Caus. (-ज्ञापयति) 1 To ask or beg for, request. -2 To ask permission, ask for leave; take leave of, bid adieu to; सो$पि तत् श्रुत्वा ... वानरमनुज्ञाप्य स्वाश्रयं गतः Pt.4; तं चक्रधरमनुज्ञाप्य स्वगृहं गतः 5; अतिथिं चाननुज्ञाप्य Ms.4.122;9.82; स मातरमनुज्ञाप्य तपस्येव मनो दधे । जग्मतुश्च यथाकाममनुज्ञाप्य परस्परम् Mb.

anujñā	अनुज्ञा ज्ञानम् [ज्ञा-अङ्-ल्युट् वा] 1 Permission, consent, sanction; गुरोरनुज्ञामधिगम्य मातः (v. l. ऋषेरनुज्ञाम्) R.2. 66. -2 Permission or leave to depart. -3 Excusing, forgiving, allowance made for faults. -4 An order, command. -Comp. -एषणा, -प्रार्थना requesting permission, taking leave.

anujñāta	अनुज्ञात p. p. 1 Permitted, allowed, ब्रह्म यस्त्वननुज्ञात- मधीयानादवाप्नुयात् । स ब्रह्मस्तेयसंयुक्तो नरकं प्रितपद्यते ॥ Ms.2.116. -2 assented to, granted, honoured, favoured. -3 authorised. -4 dismissed. -5 Taught; शिष्याणामखिलं कृत्स्नमनुज्ञातं ससंग्रहम् Mb.12.318.24.

anujñāpakaḥ	अनुज्ञापकः One who commands or orders. अनुज्ञापनम् anujñāpanam ज्ञप्तिः jñaptiḥ अनुज्ञापनम् ज्ञप्तिः f. Authorising. -2 Issuing an order or command.

anujyeṣṭha	अनुज्येष्ठ a. [अनुगतो ज्येष्ठम्] Next to the eldest. -ष्ठम् adv. According to seniority.

anutap	अनुतप् 1 P. 1 To heat; vex, annoy (fig.). -2 (4 A. or pass.) To repent, grieve, be sorry for, be stung with remorse; विविधैरनुतप्यन्ते दयितानुनयैर्मनस्विन्यः V.3.5 (v. l. for निर्मृतैर्व्यपत्रपन्ते &c.); तेनानिमित्तेन तथा न पार्थस्त- योर्यथा रिक्ततयानुतेपे Ki.17.4. -Caus. To pain, afflict, distress विरहः किमिवानुतापयेद्वद बाह्यैर्विषयैर्विपश्चितम् R.8.89.

anutapta	अनुतप्त p. p. 1 Heated. -2 Filled with regret, repentant.

anutāpaḥ	अनुतापः 1 Repentance, remorse, contrition, subsequent regret or sorrow; जातानुतापेव सा V.4.67 stung with remorse; ख्यापनेनानुतापेन (पापकृन्मुच्यते पापात्) Ms. 11.228. -2 Heat.

anutāpana	अनुतापन a. Causing distress or regret or sorrow.

anutāpin	अनुतापिन् a. Repentant, sorry.

anutara	अनुतर See under अनुतृ

anutarṣaḥ	अनुतर्षः [तृष्-घञ्] 1 Thirst, desire to drink; सोपचार- मुपशान्तविचारं सानुतर्षमनुतर्षपदेन Śi.1.2 (thirst and liquor). -2 Wish, desire. -3 Drinking spirituous liquors. -4 A drinking vessel (used in drinking spirituous liquors). -5 Liquor itself, Śi.1.2.

anutarṣaṇam	अनुतर्षणम् = अनुतर्ष 3 and 4.

anutila	अनुतिल a. Following तिल (as a field). -लम् ind. Grain after grain, i. e. by grains or very minutely.

anutunna	अनुतुन्न a. Ved. Depressed or repressed (in sound), unruffled.

anutūlayati	अनुतूलयति Den. P. To rub (as the point or end of grass) with cotton; P.III.1.25.

anutūlanam	अनुतूलनम् Rubbing in this manner.

anutṝ	अनुतॄ 1 P. 1 To go across or to the end. -2 To stretch lengthwise.

anutaram	अनुतरम् [अनुतीर्यते अनेन; तॄ-करणे अप्] Fare, freight.

anutka	अनुत्क a. Not over-anxious, not repentant or regretful; self-complacent अपरः कोकिलो$नुत्को यं प्रतिश्रुत्य कूजति । Bu. ch.4.51.

anutkaṭa	अनुत्कट a. Short, small; Hch.2.

anutta	अनुत्त a. Ved. [उन्द्-क्त न. त. P.VIII.2.61] 1 Not moistened or wet; तुभ्यमिद्रिवो$नुत्तम् Rv.1.8.7. -2 Not set, driven forth or urged (अप्रेरित); invincible(?).

anuttama	अनुत्तम a. [न उत्तमो यस्मात्] 1 Than which there is nothing better, having no superior or better, unsurpassed, the very best or highest, incomparably or preeminently the best, सर्वद्रव्येषु विद्यैव द्रव्यमाहुरनुत्तमम् H. Pr.4; कान् गतिमनुत्तमाम् Ms.2.242; Y.1.87; अद्रस्त्वया नुन्नमनुत्तमं तमः Śi.1.27 all-pervading; Bg.7.18; Ms.2.9;5.158; 8.81. -2 Not the best. -3 (in gram.) Not used in the उत्तम or first person. -मः N. of Śiva or Viṣṇu. -Comp. -अम्भस्, -अम्भसिकम् a term in Sāṅkhya Philosophy, said to mean 'indifference to and abstinence from sensual enjoyment, as fatiguing or involving injury to external objects.'

anuttara	अनुत्तर a. [नास्ति उत्तरो यस्मात्] 1 Principal, chief. -2 Best, excellent; अनुत्तराणि विलसितानि Dk.162 unsurpassed. शरीरसौख्यार्थमनुत्तरस्य निपेततुर्मूर्धनि तस्य सौम्ये । Bu. ch.1.35. -3 [नास्ति उत्तरं यस्य] Without a reply, silent, unable to answer; भवत्यवज्ञा च भवत्यनुत्तरात् Naiṣadha. -4 Fixed, firm (न उत्तरति चलति). अर्थ्यं तथ्यं हितं वाक्यं लघुयुक्तमनुत्तरम् Mb.2.2.5. -5 Low, inferior, base, mean. -6 Southern. -रम् [न. त.] No reply, a reply which, being evasive, is considered to be no reply. -राः (pl.) A class of gods among Jainas (˚उपपातिक). -उपपातिकदशाः f. Title of the ninth aṅga of the Jainas treating of those gods. -रा The south. ...अनुत्तरः । नोदीच्यां नोपरि श्रेष्ठे...। Nm. -Comp. -योगतन्त्रम् Title of the last of the four Bauddhatantras.

anuttaraṅga	अनुत्तरङ्ग a. Steady, not ruffled (by waves); अपा- मिवाधारमनुत्तरङ्गम् Ku.3.48.

anuttālaḥ	अनुत्तालः A melodious note; Hch.4.

anutthānam	अनुत्थानम् Absence of exertion. अनुत्थाने ध्रुवो नाशः Kau. A.

anutpattiḥ	अनुत्पत्तिः f. Failure, non-production. -त्तिक a. Not yet produced. -Comp. -धर्मक्षान्तिः preparation for a future state, acquiescence in the state and moral condition which is yet to come. -समः, -मा a method of arguing against a thing by attempting to prove that nothing exists from which it could spring.

anutpanna	अनुत्पन्न a. Not produced or born, unborn, unproduced &c.

anutpādaḥ	अनुत्पादः Not coming into existence, not taking effect. -Comp. -क्षान्ति see अनुत्पत्तिधर्मक्षान्ति.

anutsāha	अनुत्साह a. Destitute of energy or determination. -हः Want of determination, energy &c.; listlessness, languor, indifference.

anutsuka	अनुत्सुक a. Moderate, not overeager, retiring, calm.

anutsūtra	अनुत्सूत्र a. Not deviating from the Sūtra (of Pāṇini or of morality); not anomalous or irregular; ˚पदन्यासा सद्वृत्तिः सन्निबन्धना Śi.2.112.

anutsekaḥ	अनुत्सेकः Absence of haughtiness or pride; ˚को लक्ष्म्याम् Bh.2.64; modesty; ˚कः खलु विक्रमालङ्कारः V.1; cf. "Modesty is the handmaid of heroism".

anutsekin	अनुत्सेकिन् a. Not puffed up, not proud or arrogant; भाग्येषु ˚नी भव Ś.4.18.

anuda	अनुद a. [न नुदति or अनुददाति तुल्यं ददाति, दा-क] Ved. Not urging or driving onward; or, emulating others in giving (तुल्यरूपदातृ); see अनानुद.

anudaka	अनुदक a. 1 Waterless (as a desert). याः प्रवतो निवत उद्वत उदन्वतीरनुदकाश्च याः Rv.7.5.4. -2 Having very little water (as a puddle). -3 Devoid of the libations of water (a sort of श्राद्ध).

anudagra	अनुदग्र a. 1 Not lofty, low. -2 Soft, tender; weak, not sharp.

anudara	अनुदर a. 1 Having a slender waist; thin, lank; ˚राजकन्या Sk. (अल्पार्थे नञ्, see अ).

anudā	अनुदा 3 U. To give back, restore; to yield, grant, remit.

anudeyī	अनुदेयी 1 Restoration. -2 A female companion.

anudātta	अनुदात्त a. Grave (accent); not elevated or raised (not pronounced with the Udātta accent); उच्चैरुदात्तः नीचैरनुदात्तः; accentless, having the neutral, general tone; उदात्तश्चानुदात्तश्च स्वरितश्च त्रयः स्वराः uttered with the grave accent (as a vowel); प्रयत्नप्रेरितो वायुर्यदोर्ध्वभागे प्रति- हतो$चं निष्पादयति स उदात्तः; एवमधोनिष्पन्नो$च् अनुदात्तः; ताल्वा- दिषु सभागेषु स्थानेषु नीचभागे निष्पन्नो$च् अनुदात्तः; ˚त्तं पदमेकवर्जम् Sk. (The term अनुदात्त is used by Pāṇini for the grave accent which immediately precedes the Udātta, and also for the general accentless tone neither high nor low, termed एकश्रुति, the one monotonous intonation belonging to the generality of syllables in a word). -त्तः The grave accent. -Comp. -आदिः a nominal base of which the first syllable is अनुदात्त. -इत् a verbal root having for its अनुबन्ध the grave accent (denoting that it takes the Ātm. terminations only). -उदयम् a syllable followed (immediately) by the grave accent. -तर a. more than अनुदात्त; still lower or graver accent, i. e. that which immediately precedes a syllable having the उदात्त or स्वरित accent and is thus more depressed than the ordinary अनुदात्त accent.

anudāra	अनुदार a. 1 Not liberal, niggardly; not high or noble. -2 Having none more liberal, very liberal, or great.

anudāra	अनुदार a. (अनुगतो दारान्) 1 Adhering to or followed by a wife; यस्मिन्प्रसीदसि पुनः स भवत्युदारो$नुदारश्च K. P.4. (used in sense 1 also). -2 Having a suitable or worthy wife (अनुरूपाः दाराः यस्य)

anudita	अनुदित a. 1 Unsaid, not uttered. -2 Not risen or appeared forth.

anudinam	अनुदिनम् दिवसम् ind. Daily, day after day; पारावतः खलु शिलाकणमात्रभोजी कामी भवेदनुदिनं वद को$त्र हेतुः Udb.; अनुदिवसं पिरहीयसे$ङ्गैः Ś.3.

anudiś	अनुदिश् 6 P. To point out, assign. -अनुदिशम् ind. In every quarter.

anudeśaḥ	अनुदेशः 1 Pointing back; rule or direction which refers or points back to a previous rule; यथासङ्ख्यम- नुदेशः समानाम् P.I.3.1; subsequent mention of things (words, suffixes &c.) in the order of things previously mentioned; respective enumeration or statement, first for first, second for second; as in समूलाकृतजीवेषु हन्कृञ्ग्रहः P.III.4.36. -2 Direction, order, injunction.

anudeśin	अनुदेशिन् a. Pointing or referring back; being the object of an अनुदेश.

anudṛś	अनुदृश् 1 P. To survey, behold; to keep in view or mind, see in prospect; पूर्वेषां पन्थामनुदृश्य धीराः Rv.1. 13.7. न च श्रेयो$नुपश्यामि हत्वा स्वजनमाहवे Bg.1.31; न संसारोत्पन्नं चरितमनुपश्यामि कुशलम् Bh.3.3. -Caus. To show, tell, inform as follows; सेनापतिः पुत्रमग्निमित्रं परिष्वज्य अनुदर्शयति M.5 writes or informs as follows.

anudarśanam	अनुदर्शनम् Inspection, survey; उत्थितश्चाप्रमत्तश्च बलानाम- नुदर्शने Rām.; consideration, regard; जन्ममृत्युजराव्याधिदुःख- दोषानुदर्शनम् Bg.13.8 perception.

anudṛṣṭi	अनुदृष्टि a. Having a favourable look. -ष्टिः f. A favourable look.

anudraṣṭṛ	अनुद्रष्टृ a. Benefactor; अनसूयुरनुद्रष्टा सत्कृतस्ते पुरोहितः Rām.2.1.11.

anudairghya	अनुदैर्घ्य a. [दैर्घ्यमनुगतः] Longitudinal, lengthwise.

anuddhata	अनुद्धत a. Not raised or puffed up; ˚ताः सत्पुरुषाः समृद्धिभिः Ś.5.12; humble; modest; unsurpassed.

anuddharaṇam	अनुद्धरणम् 1 Not removing or taking away. -2 Not offering, establishing or proving.

anuddhāta	अनुद्धात a. Even, without ups and downs स्थेनानुद्धात- स्तिमितगतिना तीर्णजलधिः Ś.7.33.

anuddhāraḥ	अनुद्धारः 1 Non-partition; not taking a share (विंशो- द्धारशून्यो विभागः). -2 Non-removal.

anuddhṛta	अनुद्धृत a. Undivided, unremoved, uninjured, unharmed, undestroyed, unoffered or established &c. -Comp. -अभ्यस्तमयः taking place of sunset, while the आहवनीय fire continues to be unremoved from the गार्हपत्य.

anudbhaṭa	अनुद्भट a. 1 Not bold; soft, mild. -2 Not exalted or lofty.

anudya	अनुद्य a. unutterable; P.III.1.11.Sk. अनुद्यत anudyata अनुद्यम anudyama अनुद्यत अनुद्यम a. Not diligent, idle, inactive.

anudyūtam	अनुद्यूतम् Repeated playing or gambling; N. of a part of the Sabhāparvan (Chap. 7-79).

anudyoga	अनुद्योग a. Lazy, not industrious. -गः Idleness, inactivity.

anudru	अनुद्रु 1 P. 1 To run after, follow, accompany. अश्वेति विद्रुतमनुद्रवताश्वमन्यम् Śi.5.59. -2 To chase, pursue.

anudruta	अनुद्रुत p. p. 1 Followed, pursued; धनुर्धरं राजसुतैरनु- द्रुतम् R.3.38;12.67;16.25; Śi.1.52; (sometimes used actively). -2 Sent or brought back (as sound). -तम् A measure of time in music = half druta, or one-fourth of a Mātrā (or of the time taken to utter a short vowel); अर्धमात्रं द्रुतं ज्ञेयं द्रुतार्धं चाप्यनुद्रुतम्.

anudvāhaḥ	अनुद्वाहः Non-marriage, celibacy.

anudvigna	अनुद्विग्न a. Easy in mind, secure.

anudvega	अनुद्वेग a. Free from anxiety or apprehension. -गः Security or freedom from fear. अदैन्यमनुदीर्णत्वमनुद्वेगो व्यवस्थितिः Mb.12.274.18.

anudhāv	अनुधाव् 1 P. 1 To run after; follow; ऋषीणां पुनराद्यानां वाचमर्यो$नुधावति U.1.1 the sense follows the words (the words being not uttered with a view to a particular sense); स्वरुचिं निश्चयतो$नुधावति Śi.16.44 follows his own will. -2 To run up to, approach. -3 To cleanse, wash.

anudhāvanam	अनुधावनम् 1 Going or running after, following, pursuing; तुरग ˚कण्डितसन्धेः Ś.2. -2 Close pursuit of an object (for the knowledge of truth); research, investigation. -3 Seeking a mistress, though unattainable. -4 Cleansing, purification.

anudhūpita	अनुधूपित a. Puffed up, proud, ज्योगभूवन्ननुधूपितासो हत्वी तेषामा भरा नो वसूनि Rv.2.3.1.

anudhyai	अनुध्यै 1 P. 1 To think of, muse, consider attentively. -2 To wish well of, to bless, favour; प्रजानिषेकं मयि वर्तमानं सूनोरनुध्यायत चेतसेति R.14.6 bless; अनुदध्युर- नुध्येयं सांनिध्यैः प्रतिमागतैः 17.36 favoured.

anudhyā	अनुध्या [ध्यै-अङ्] 1 Thinking or wishing well of, favouring, attachment. यदनुध्यासिना युक्ताः कर्मग्रन्थिनिबन्धनम् Bhāg.1.2.15. -2 Sorrow; प्रेतो यन्तु व्याधः प्रानुध्याः Av. 7.114.2.

anudhyāna	अनुध्यान p. p. Mused, thought of &c. -तम्, -नम् [ध्यै-ल्युट्] 1 Thought; अनुध्यानानन्तरमेव K.262; meditation, religious contemplation. -2 Thinking of, remembrance; या नः प्रीतिर्विरूपाक्ष त्वदनुध्यानसम्भवा Ku.6.21. -3 Wishing well of, affectionate solicitude for; अनुध्या- नैरुपेतव्यं वत्सयोर्भद्रमस्तु वः (v. l. अनुध्यातै) U.7.11; सा त्वमम्ब स्नुषायामरुन्धतीव सीतायां शिवानुध्यानपरां भव U.1.

anudhyāyaḥ	अनुध्यायः [ध्यै कर्तरि घञ्] One who wishes well of.

anudhyeya	अनुध्येय a. To be favoured or wished well of; अनु- दध्युरनुध्येयम् R.17.36.

anunad	अनुनद् 1 P. To sound towards or at (with acc.). -Caus. To cause to sound, make resonant, fill with echo; प्रथिवीं चान्तरिक्षं च सागरांश्चानुनादयन्; साधु साध्विति नादेन पृथिवीमन्वनादयन्; विहङ्गैरनुनादितम् Mb. made musical or resonant.

anunādaḥ	अनुनादः [अनुरूपो नादः] Sound, noise; गुरुतरकलनूपुरानु- नादम् Śi.7.18; reverberation, echo.

anunādin	अनुनादिन् a. Echoing, sounding, resonant. तस्या- स्फोटितशब्देन महता चानुनादिना । पेतुर्विहङ्गा गगनादुच्चैश्चेदमघोषयन् ॥ Rām.5.42.32.

anunand	अनुनन्द् 1 P. To enjoy.

anunaya	अनुनय नायिका See under अनुनी.

anunāsika	अनुनासिक a. [अनुगतो नासिकाम्] 1 Nasal, pronounced through the nose; मुखसहितनासिकया उच्चार्यमाणो वर्णो$- नुनासिकसंज्ञः स्यात् Sk.; मुखनासिकावचनो$नुनासिकः P.I.1.8; अमो$नुनासिका न ह्रौ Śikṣā; अनुनासिक being a name for the 5 nasal consonants, the vowels or the consonants य्, व्, ल् (under certain circumstances); i. e. the letters included in the प्रत्याहार अम् except ह् and र्. -2 The sign used to mark the nasalization in the case of य्, व् or ल्. -कम् The nasal twang. -Comp. -आदिः a conjunct consonant beginning with a nasal.

anunirdeśaḥ	अनुनिर्देशः Description or relation following the previous order or sequence; भूयसामुपदिष्टानां क्रियाणामथ कर्म- णाम् । क्रमशो यो$नुनिर्देशो यथासङ्ख्यं तदुच्यते S. D.

anunirvāpaḥ	अनुनिर्वापः Subsequent libation (with clarified butter).

anunirvāpyā	अनुनिर्वाप्या A ceremony connected with this libation.

anuniśītham	अनुनिशीथम् ind. At midnight; Ki.

anunī	अनुनी 1 P. 1 To conciliate, win over, induce, persuade, prevail upon; request, supplicate, entreat, propitiate, pacify, appease (anger &c.); स चानुनीतः प्रणतेन पश्चात् R.5.54; विग्रहाच्च शयने पारङ्मुखीर्नानुनेतुमवलाः स तत्वरे 19.38,43; Bk.5.46;6.137; त्वत्सङ्गमेन मम तत्तदिवानु- नीतम् V.3.2 pacified, made favourable or agreeable; Ki.13.67; M.5; K.168,178; Dk.3,4,7. -2 To cherish love; विद्विषोप्यनुनय Bh.2.77; cf. Shakespeare "Cherish those hearts that hate thee". -3 To bring near to (with dat. of peason). -4 To train, discipline. -5 To honour.

anunaya	अनुनय a. [नी-अच्] Kind, conciliatory, pacifying (as words). तुल्यदुःखो$ब्रवीद्भ्राता लक्ष्मणो$नुनयं वचः Rām.4.27.33. -यः 1 Conciliation, propitiation, pacification (of anger), friendly persuasion; कथं नु शक्यो$नुनयो महर्षेर्विश्राणना- च्चान्यपयस्विनीनाम् R.2.54; कथं वा तेषामनुनयः कृतः H.4; प्रकृति- वक्रः स कस्यानुनयं प्रितगृह्णाति Ś.4. -2 Courtesy, civility, courteous or polite behaviour, modesty, modest or respectful deportment, conciliatory act (such as salutation); showing respect (to a guest, deity &c.); विविधैरनुतप्यन्ते दयितानुनयैर्मनस्विन्यः V.3.5; दयितजनः˚ 2. 22; वाक्यैः स्निग्धैरनुनयो भवेदर्थस्य साधनम् S. D.458. -3 An humble supplication or entreaty, a request in general; भद्र प्रियं नः कींतु त्वदभिप्रायापरिज्ञानान्तरितो$यमस्मदनुनयः Mu.2; R.6.2; निषेधवाक्यालङ्कारजिज्ञासानुनये खलु Ak; ˚आम- न्त्रणम् conciliatory address. -4 Discipline, training, regulation of conduct. -यम् adv. Fitly, suitably.

anunayin	अनुनयिन् a. Courteous, polite, humble, supplicating.

anunītiḥ	अनुनीतिः = अनुनय q. v.; सानुनीतिश्च सीतायै नाक्रुध्यत् Bk. 8.75 adopting a conciliatory tone; भजते कुपितो$प्युदारधीर- नुनीतिं नतिमात्रकेण सः Śi.16.55.

anunāyaka	अनुनायक a. Submissive, humble, supplicating.

anunāyika	अनुनायिक a. Conciliating; प्रियतमेषु बधूरनुनायिका Śi.6. 7. -का A female character, subordinate to the Nāyikā or leading character, such as a friend, nurse, maid-servant &c.; सखी प्रव्रजिता दासी प्रेष्या धात्रेयिका तथा । अन्याश्च शिल्पकारिण्यो विज्ञेया ह्यनुनायिकाः ॥ अनुनेय (-नीय) a. Favourable; अनुनेयानि जल्पन्तम् Mb.7.85.25 To be conciliated; Mk.

anunnata	अनुन्नत a. Not raised or elevated, not lifted up. -Comp. -आनत a. level (neither raised nor lowered). -गात्र a. having limbs not stout or prominent. अनुन्माद anunmāda अनुन्मत्त anunmatta अनुन्माद अनुन्मत्त a. Not mad or frantic, sober, calm, sane.

anupa	अनुप = अनूप, q. v.

anupakārin	अनुपकारिन् a. 1 Not obliging, ungrateful, not making a return for benefits received. -2 Worthless, useless.

anupakṣita	अनुपक्षित p. p. Not injured or destroyed (अनुपक्षीण). द्युमदग्ने सूवीर्यं वर्षिष्ठमनुपक्षितम् Rv.3.13.7; Av.6.78.2.

anupagīta	अनुपगीत a. Not praised. -तम् ind. So that no other person accompanies in singing.

anupaghātaḥ	अनुपघातः Absence of damage or detriment; ˚अर्जित obtained without any detriment (to the paternal estate).

anupajīvanīya	अनुपजीवनीय a. Not yielding or granting livelihood, having no livelihood.

anupaṭh	अनुपठ् 1 P. To say after, repeat.

anupaṭhita	अनुपठित p. p. Read through, repeated in imitation of the teacher's instruction.

anupaṭhitin	अनुपठितिन् a. Who has read through, proficient.

anupat	अनुपत् 1 P. 1 To fly to or towards. -2 To fly or run after, follow (fig. also); pursue, chase; मुहुरनुपतति स्यन्दने दत्तदृष्टिः Ś.1.7; कथमनुपतत एव मे प्रयत्नप्रेक्षणीयः संवृत्तः Ś.1; न यत्र प्रत्याशामनुपतति नो वा रहयति (चेतः) Māl.9.8. does not run after (cherish), hope or leave it; यस्यैवं भवन्तः कुटुम्बवृत्तिमनुपतिताः Mv.1; अनुपतति रजनीं पूर्वसन्ध्या Śi.11.4. -2 To fall upon, attack; प्राग्वीराननुपत्य Māl 8.9. -Caus. 1 To fly to. -2 To throw another down along with oneself.

anupatanam	अनुपतनम् पातः 1 Falling upon, alighting upon in succession. -2 Following, going after, pursuit; उपवनपवनानुपातदक्षैः Śi.7.27. -3 Going or proceeding in order or as a consequence. -4 [अनुरूपः त्रैराशिकेन पातः] Proportion. -5 Rule of three. -6 A degree of latitude, opposite to one given. -तम् ind. (regarded as ending in ṇamul from पत्) Following in succession, going after; लतानुपातं कुसुमान्यगृह्णात् Bk.2.11 (लतां लताममुपात्य going to creeper after creeper, or after bending the creepers.)

anupātin	अनुपातिन् a. Following as a result. -m. A follower; मदनुपातिनामेष पन्थाः Dk.168.

anupatha	अनुपथ a. [पन्थानमनुगतः] Following the road. -थः 1 A road, favourable road; अन्तस्पथा अनुपथाः Rv.5.52. 1 अनुकूलमार्गाः -2 an attendant; क एते$नुपथा ये ते एकादश महाभटाः Bhāg.4.25.27. -थम् adv. Along the road.

anupad	अनुपद् 4 A. (P. in epic poetry) 1 To go after, follow, attend. -2 To be fond of, be attached to (as a wife); उतथ्यस्य यवीयास्तु ममतामन्वपद्यत Mb. -3 To enter, go to or into. -4 To fall down, come down (to the earth); वसुधामन्वपद्येतां वातनुन्नाविव द्रुमौ Mb. -5 To enter upon, betake oneself to; जितमित्येव तानक्षान्पुनरेवान्वपद्यत, ध्यानमेवान्वपद्यत Rām.; पुत्रौ दृष्ट्वा सुसंभ्रान्ता नान्वपद्यत किंचन Mb. did not do anything else. -6 To find, discover, see, notice; दीर्घं दध्यौ. ... निमित्तं सो$न्वपद्यत Bhāg. -7 To lose (with abl.) महत्त्वान्नान्वपद्येताम् Mb. -8 to handle. -9 To fall to the share of (Ved.)

anupad	अनुपद् a. [पद्-क्विप्] Ved. Coming to pass. -f. Food (got every day) (अनुदिनलभ्यमन्नम्).

anupada	अनुपद a. [पदान्यनुगतः] 1 Following the feet closely. -2 Following every word; ˚सूत्रम् a commentary (of a Brāhmana) explaining the text word for word. -दः N. of a man or tribe. -दम् A chorus, burden of a song or words sung again at regular intervals. -ind. [पदानां पश्चात्] 1 Along the feet, near the feet; अनुपदं बद्धा अनुपदीना Sk. -2 Step by step, at every step; स्खलिताभिरप्यनुपदं प्रमदाः प्रणयातिभूमिमगमन्गतिभिः Śi.9.78. -3 Word for word. -4 On the heels of, close behind or after, immediately after (of time or space); अनुपदमन्वेष्टा अनुपदी Sk.; गच्छतां पुरो भवन्तौ । अहमप्यनुपदमागत एव Ś.3 I shall be close behind you, just follow you; ˚दमुच्चलित एव K.263,264; oft. with gen. or in comp. in this sense; लक्ष्मीवाननुपदमस्य संप्रतस्थे Ki.12. 54; (तौ) आशिषामनुपदं समस्पृशत् पाणिना R.11.31; अमोघाः प्रतिगृह्णन्तावर्ध्यानुपदमाशिषः 1.44.14.81; दर्शनानुपदमेव Śi. 14.48.

anupadika	अनुपदिक a. [अनुपदमस्त्यस्य गन्तृत्वेन, ठन्] Following, gone after.

anupadin	अनुपदिन् a. [अनुपद्-इनि P.V.2.9] Following, seeking after or for a searcher, inquirer; अनुपदमन्वेष्टा गवामनुपदी Sk.; क्षणदाकरे$नुपदिभिः प्रयये Śi.9.7; मृगस्यानुपदी रामो जगाम गजविक्रमः Bk.5.5.

anupadīnā	अनुपदीना [आयामार्थे अनु, पदस्यायामतुल्यायामः, तेन वद्धा ख] A shoe (boot, buskin, or slippers) of the length of the foot (अनुपदं बद्धा अनुपदीना उपानत् P.V.2.9. Sk.).

anupadavī	अनुपदवी A way, road.

anupadhaḥ	अनुपधः 'Having no उपधा or penultimate', a letter or syllable not preceded by another.

anupadhi	अनुपधि a. [न. ब.] Guileless, without fraud; रहस्यं साधूनामनुपधि विशुद्धं विजयते U.2.2.

anupanyāsaḥ	अनुपन्यासः 1 Not mentioning; non-statement. -2 Uncertainty, doubt, failure of proof.

anupapattiḥ	अनुपपत्तिः f. 1 Failure, failing to be; लक्षणा शक्य- संबन्धस्तात्पर्यानुपपत्तितः Bhāṣā. P.82 (तात्पर्य˚ being the failure of the meaning aimed at, or of any connected meaning). -2 Inapplicability, not being applicable. -3 Inconclusive reasoning; absence of reasonable grounds (युत्तयभाव); -4 Penury, adversity.

anupapanna	अनुपपन्न a. Improper, impossible, inapplicable, impracticable, inconclusive, irrelevant. पीनो देवदत्तो दिवा न भुङ्क्ते इत्यत्र दिवा$भोजनः पीनत्वं रात्रिभोजनं विनानुपपन्नम् see अर्थापत्ति also.

anupapādakāḥ	अनुपपादकाः 'Having no material parent'. N. of a class of Buddhas, called Dhyānibuddhas.

anupama	अनुपम a. [न. ब.] Incomparable, matchless, peerless, best, most excellent. -मतिः N. of a contemporary of Śākya muni. -मा The female elephant of the south-west (mate of कुमुद).

anupameya	अनुपमेय मित a. Matchless, incomparable.

anupamardanam	अनुपमर्दनम् Non-refutation of a charge.

anupayukta	अनुपयुक्त a. 1 Not used (as food). -2 Unsuited, unfit, improper, useless, unserviceable; सत्क्रियाविशेषादनु- पयुक्तमिवात्मानं समर्थये Ś.7.

anupayoga	अनुपयोग a. Useless. -गः Uselessness, not being used (as food).

anuparata	अनुपरत a. 1 Not dead. -2 Not stopped, uninterrupted.

anupalabdha	अनुपलब्ध a. Unobserved, unperceived.

anupalabdhi	अनुपलब्धि f. Non-recognition, non-perception (प्रत्यक्षाद्यभाव); नास्ति घटो$नुपलब्धेः (the knowledge of घटाभाव is possible because the प्रतियोगी or counter-entity is not found with the non-entity or अभाव, that is, there being no उपलब्धि or knowledge of the घट); one of the instruments of knowledge according to the Mīmāṁsakas, but not according to the Naiyāyikas. -Comp. -समः a fallacy, trying to establish a fact (say, the eternity of sound) from the impossibility of seeing the non-perception of it.

anupalambhaḥ	अनुपलम्भः Want of apprehension; non-perception.

anupavītin	अनुपवीतिन् m. One who does not wear the sacred thread (belonging to his caste).

anupaśayaḥ	अनुपशयः Any thing or circumstance that aggravates a malady.

anupaśya	अनुपश्य a. 1 Following with his looks, keeping in view. -2 One who sees; Pātañjala Yogadarśana 2.21. P.III.1.137.

anupasaṃhārin	अनुपसंहारिन् m. A kind of हेत्वाभास or fallacy in Nyāya, a subdivision of the अनैकान्तिकहेत्वाभास; वस्तुमात्र- पक्षको$नुपसंहारी that is, that which includes every known thing in the पक्ष and thus prevents the corroboration of a general rule of causation by illustrations, positive or negative; as सर्वं नित्यं प्रमेयत्वात्; अत्र सर्वस्यैव पक्षत्वात् प्रमेयत्वं हेतुरनुपसंहारी अन्वये व्यतिरेके वा दृष्टान्ताभावात्.

anupasargaḥ	अनुपसर्गः 1 A word (particle &c.) that is not, or has not the force of, an Upasarga. -2 That which has no Upasarga. -3 That which needs no additions (as) a divine being).

anupasarjana	अनुपसर्जन a. An independent word, i. e. a word which is not relegated to a subordinate position (by entering into a compound formation) P.IV.1.14.

anupasecana	अनुपसेचन a. Having no उपसेचन i. e. some condiment, sauce, curds &c. to moisten food with.

anupaskṛta	अनुपस्कृत a. 1 Unpolished (as silver). -2 Genuine, blameless. -3 Not cooked or dressed (as food). -4 Not requiring any evident object. -5 Without any doubt in mind; तस्मात्स्वधर्ममास्थाय सुव्रताः सत्यवादिनः । लोकस्य गुरवो भूत्वा ते भवन्त्यनुपस्कृताः ॥ Mb.12.11.25. -6 Selfless, without greed or motive; देहत्यागो$नुपस्कृतः Ms.1.62.

anupaskāra	अनुपस्कार a. Not elliptical (अध्याहारदोषरहित) Ki.11.38.

anupasthānam	अनुपस्थानम् Absence, not being at hand.

anupasthāpanam	अनुपस्थापनम् Not placing, offering or producing, not having ready or at hand.

anupasthāpita	अनुपस्थापित a. Not ready or at hand, not offered or produced.

anupasthāyin	अनुपस्थायिन् a. Not present, absent, distant.

anupasthita	अनुपस्थित a. Not present, absent, not at hand or near; not current. -तम् A word that is not उपस्थित q. v.

anupasthitiḥ	अनुपस्थितिः f. 1 Absence; मम ˚तिं क्षमन्तां भवन्तः your honour will be pleased to excuse my absence. -2 Inability to remember.

anupahata	अनुपहत a. 1 Not injured, unimpaired, unvitiated. -2 Not used, unbleached, new (as cloth); ˚तं दुकूलयुगलम् K.11.229. See अनाहत.

anupā	अनुपा 2 P. 1 To drink after (a person or thing), drink along with; (मधु पीत्वा) ... अनुपास्यसि बाष्पदूषितं जलाञ्जलिम् R.8.68; कल्माषान्भक्षयन्मधु चानुपिवेत् Suśr.; (चूर्णं) लीढ्वानुपीत्वा च पयो$ग्निशक्त्या कामं निकामं पुरुषो निषेवेत् । Bṛ. S.76.6. -2 To follow in drinking. -3 (2 P.) = अनुपाल् q. v.

anupānam	अनुपानम् 1 A drink taken with or after medicine अनु भेषजेन सह पश्चाद्वा यत् किञ्चिन्मधुक्षीरादि पीयते तत्); a fluid vehicle in medicine. -2 A drink close at hand. हन्तानुपानमित्युच्छिचष्टं वै मे पीतँस्यादिति होवाच Ch. Up.1.1.3.

anupānīya	अनुपानीय a. Serving as a liquid vehicle of medicine. -यम् An after-drink, what is fit to be drunk after.

anupā	अनुपा 2 P. -पाल् 1 P. 1 To guard, watch over, protect, defend; बालदायादिकं रिक्थं तावद्राजानुपालयेत् Ms.8. 27 keep in custody. -2 To conform to, obey, observe; दशरथवचनमनुपालयन् K.21; सत्ये$नुपालयेत्सत्यम् H.4.23; so प्रतिज्ञाम्, धर्मम्, मार्गम् &c.; keep, preserve; अनुपालयतां प्रभुशक्तिम् Ki.2.1 watching.

anupālanam	अनुपालनम् Preserving, keeping up, obeying.

anupākṛta	अनुपाकृत a. Not rendered fit for or consecrated for sacrificial purposes. -Comp. -मांसम् flesh of an animal not prepared for sacrifice.

anupākhya	अनुपाख्य a. What is not directly perceived, hence something which is only inferable (= अनुमेय Kāśikā); P.VI.3.8.

anupāta	अनुपात तिन् see under अनुपत्.

anupātam	अनुपातम् ind. In regular succession.

anupātakam	अनुपातकम् [पातकं ब्रह्महत्यादि तत्सदृशम्] A heinous crime such as theft, murder, adultery &c. 35 such sins are enumerated in Viṣṇusmṛiti; Manu mentions 3 kinds; See 11.54-58.

anupātyayaḥ	अनुपात्ययः 1 Not to violate a turn or succession. -2 To do something by turn. -3 Turn, succession. क्रमप्राप्तस्यानतिपातो$नुपात्ययः, परिपाटी । Kāśi. on P.III.3.38.

anupānatka	अनुपानत्क a. Shoeless; Kāty, Śr.

anupālaḥ	अनुपालः A keeper (of horses &c.). कुशलैस्तरुणैर्दक्षै- रनुपालैः । शालिहोत्र of भोज.

anupāluḥ	अनुपालुः (वनस्पतिवि.) Erum Indicum. (Mar. रान आळू).

anupārśva	अनुपार्श्व a. Lateral, along or by the side. -(pl.) N. of a people.

anupāvṛtta	अनुपावृत्त a. Ved. Western. -(pl.) N. of a people; Mb.

anupuruṣaḥ	अनुपुरुषः [अनुगतः अन्यं पुरुषम्] A follower.

anupuṣpaḥ	अनुपुष्पः [अनुगतः पुष्पं तद्विकारम्] A kind of reed (शरवृक्ष).

anupūrva	अनुपूर्व a. [अनुगतः पूर्वं परिपाटीं क्रमं वा] 1 Regular, having a suitable measure, regularly shaped, symmetrical; वृत्तानुपूर्वे च न चातिदीर्घे Ku.1.35; ततोनुपूर्वायत- वृत्तबाहुः Ki.17.5 (गोपुच्छाकार Malli.); जङ्घे अनुपूर्ववृ Dk.131; ˚ताम्राङ्गुली बाहुलते ibid.; ˚केश who has regular hair; ˚गात्र having regularly shaped limbs; so ˚दंष्ट्र, ˚नाभि, ˚पाणि. -2 Orderly, successive, in due order or succession; coming in order, following. -3 The lowest (निकृष्टप्रमाण); अनुपूर्वा इतरे Kāty. -Comp. -ज a. descended in a regular line. -वत्सा a cow that calves regularly. अनुपूर्वशः anupūrvaśḥ पूर्वेण pūrvēṇa अनुपूर्वशः पूर्वेण adv. In regular order, one by one, successively, from above, downwards; from the beginning or first; वर्णानामनुपूर्वशः Ms.8.142;3.39,7.35.

anupūrvya	अनुपूर्व्य a. Regular, orderly, successive. -र्वी = आनु- पूर्वी q. v.

anupṛṣṭhya	अनुपृष्ठ्य a. [अनुपृष्ठं बध्यते, अनुपृष्ठ-यत्] (A rope, cord &c.) Fastened along the back, tied lengthwise.

anupeta	अनुपेत a. 1 Not endowed with. -2 Not invested with the sacred thread (अनुपनीत). यं प्रव्रजन्तमनुपेतमपेत- कृत्यम् Bhāg.1.2.2.

anupta	अनुप्त a. Not sown (as seed); शस्य fallow, meadow, (ground &c.).

anuptrima	अनुप्त्रिम a. [अ वप् क्त्रि मप्] Grown without being sown.

anuprakīrṇa	अनुप्रकीर्ण a. Fully covered; सोत्कण्ठैरमरगणैरनुप्रकीर्णान् Ki.7.2.

anuprajñānam	अनुप्रज्ञानम् Tracing, tracking.

anupradānam	अनुप्रदानम् 1 A gift, donation. -2 A sort of external effort of the vocal organs giving rise to particular letters (बाह्यप्रयत्न); एते श्वासानुप्रदाना अघोषाश्च विवृण्वते Sk.

anuprapātam	अनुप्रपातम् दम् ind. Going in succession; गेह ˚तम्, -दम् आस्ते गेहं गेहं अनुप्रपातं-दम् P.III.4.56 Sk.

anuprabhavaḥ	अनुप्रभवः Cycle of births and deaths.

anuprayuj	अनुप्रयुज् 7 A. To employ, apply, employ in addition.

anuprayogaḥ	अनुप्रयोगः Additional use, repetition; P.I.3.63; III.4.4-5. यथाविध्यनुप्रयोगः पूर्वस्मिन्.

anupravacanam	अनुप्रवचनम् Repetition or reproduction of what has been said by the teacher; ˚आदि a class of words given in P.V.1.111.

anupravaṇa	अनुप्रवण a. Agreeable, pleasant; प्रायश्चित्तकथा ह्येषा भक्ष्याभक्ष्यविवर्जिता । कौतूहलानुप्रवणा हर्ष जनयतीव मे ॥ Mb. 12.37.3.

anupravādaḥ	अनुप्रवादः Rumour. Mb.4.

anupraviś	अनुप्रविश् 6 P. 1 To enter into, join; पथिकसार्थं विदिशा- गामिनमनुप्रविष्टः M.5; (fig. also); विश्रम्य लौकिकाः संस्त्यायमनुप्रविशन्ति Mv. I enter into familiar talk or conversation. -2 To accommodate or adapt oneself to; यस्य यस्य हि यो भावस्तस्य तस्य हि तं नरः । अनुप्रविश्य मेधावी क्षिप्रमात्मवशं नयेत् Pt.1.68; सखे वामदेव त्वमपि गाधिनन्दनमनु- प्रविष्टो$सि A. R.1 you too share in his opinion, or think with him. -3 To follow in entering; sleep with. -4 To attack.

anupraveśa	अनुप्रवेश 1 Entrance into; पुपोष वृद्धिं हरिदश्वदीधितेरनु- प्रवेशादिव बालचन्द्रमाः R.3.22;1.51. -2 Adapting oneself to the will of; बलवताभिभूतस्य विदेशगमनं तदनुप्रवेशो वा नीतिः Pt.1; भजते विदेशमधिकेन जितस्तदनुप्रवेशमथवा कुशलः Śi.9.48. -3 Imitation.

anupraśnaḥ	अनुप्रश्नः A subsequent question (having reference to what the teacher has previously said).

anuprasaktiḥ	अनुप्रसक्तिः f. 1 Very close attachment. -2 Very close logical connection (of words).

anuprasad	अनुप्रसद् Caus. To propitiate, conciliate; रोहिणी- मृगलाञ्छनं साक्षीकृत्य आर्यपुत्रमनुप्रसादयामि V.3.

anuprasādanam	अनुप्रसादनम् Propitiation, conciliation; प्रिय ˚नं नाम व्रतम् V.3.

anuprastha	अनुप्रस्थ a. Latitudinal, following the breadth or latitude.

anuprahita	अनुप्रहित a. Fixed; प्रियैषिणानुप्रहिताः शिवेन Ki.17.33.

anuprāṇ	अनुप्राण् 2 P. To breathe after. -Caus. To animate, support, feed, help; mostly used in the statement of Ala&nkāras in a sentence; उत्प्रेक्षानुप्राणिता स्वभावोक्तिः &c.

anuprāṇanam	अनुप्राणनम् Breathing after, animation.

anuprāp	अनुप्राप् 5 P. 1 To get, obtain. -2 To reach, go to, overtake; गङ्गानदीमनुप्राप्ताः Mb. -3 To imitate; लीलाखेल- मनुप्रापुर्महोक्षास्तस्य विक्रमम् R.4.22. -4 To arrive, come (intrans); कथमिमां भूमिमनुप्राप्तः K.132; Ve.6. -5 To get back.

anuprāpta	अनुप्राप्त p. p. Reached, got, obtained.

anuprāptiḥ	अनुप्राप्तिः f. Getting to, reaching, arriving &c.

anuprāsaḥ	अनुप्रासः [अनुगतः रसाद्यनुगुणं प्रकृष्टमासं वर्णन्यासं समवर्ण- रचनां समवर्णोच्चारणं वा] Alliteration, repetition of similar letters, syllables or sounds; वर्णसाम्यमनुप्रासः K. P.9; (स्वरवैसादृश्ये$पि व्यञ्जनसदृशत्वं वर्णसाम्यं ससाद्यानुगतः प्रकृष्टो न्यासः; अनुप्रासः शब्दसाम्यं वैषम्ये$पि स्वरस्य यत् S. D.633.) अनुप्रास is of 5 kinds; (a) छेक˚ or single alliteration; बकुलगन्धा- नन्धीकुर्वन्, कावेरीवारिपावनः पवनः, मूर्ध्नामुद्वृत्तकृत्ताविरलगरल &c. K. P.7. (b) वृत्ति˚ or harmonious. उदा°ree उन्मीलन्मधुगन्ध- लुब्धमधुपव्याधूतचूताङ्कुरक्रीडत्कोकिलकाकलीकलकलैरुद्गीर्णकर्णज्वराः । नीयन्ते पथिकैः कथंकथमपि ध्यानावधानक्षणप्राप्तप्राणसमासमागमरसोल्ला- सैरमी वासराः ॥ (c) श्रुति˚ or melodious. उदा˚ दृशा दग्धं मनसिजं जीवयन्ति दृशैव याः । विरूपाक्षस्य जयिनीस्ताः स्तुमो वामलोचनाः ॥ (d) अन्त्य˚ or final; as मन्दं हसन्तः पुलकं वहन्तः. (e) लाट˚; स्मेरराजीवनयने नयने किं निमीलिते । पश्य निर्जीतकन्दर्पे कन्दर्पवशगं प्रियम् ॥ For definitions and examples see S. D. 633-38 and K. P.9th Ullāsa.

anuplu	अनुप्लु 1 A. To run after, follow; इदमन्यतो वानरद्वयं आर्यस्य पार्ष्णिग्राहमिव संश्रयादनुप्लवते A. R.5.

anuplavaḥ	अनुप्लवः A follower, servant; सानुप्लवः प्रभुरपि क्षणदाचराणाम् R.18.75; सानुप्लवाः क्वापि यातास्त्रिमूर्धखरदूषणाः । Mv.7.19.

anubandh	अनुबन्ध् 9 P. 1 To bind or fasten to, attach, tie, connect; सीमन्तं निजमनुबध्नती कराभ्याम् Śi.8.69 forming, arranging; उभयोरपि राजेन्द्र संबन्धेनानुबेध्यतां (इक्ष्वाकुकुलम्) Rām.; सखीजनानुबद्धां कथाम् Dk.114 connected with. -2 (a) To have in the train (fig. also); न शिष्याननुबध्नीत Bhāg. (b) To bring about, cause, lead to, result in, produce as a consequence; नामुबध्नाति कुशलम् Mb.; हे वृषल ते तथा विक्षेपो$स्तु यथा हिंसामनुबध्नाति -3 To press, importune, urge, request; पुनः पुनश्चानुबध्यमाना K.69, 133,27,233. -4 (a) To attend or follow closely, follow at the heels of, follow; को नु खल्वयमनुबध्यमानस्तप- स्विनीभ्यामबालसत्त्वो बालः Ś.7; मधुकरकुलैरनुबध्यमानम् K.139; दिष्टया तावदयमनङ्गे मामिव तमप्यनुबध्नाति K.158,194,319,347; Ki.6.8; Mv.7.18; Śi.5.26. (b) To chase, pursue; तच्चानुबध्यमानम् K.12; अनुबध्नता तुरगमुखमिथुनम् 132. (c) To adhere or stick to, cling to; धन्या चित्रलेखा यामनुबध्नाति देवीप्रसादः K.221. (d) To continue, take up; तदेवानुबध्यतां तपः 322; तान्येव चिरपरिचितान्यक्षराणि मामनुबध्नन्ति U.3 v.l. for अनुरु- न्धन्ति; वैशम्पायनागमनालापमेवानुबध्य K.262. (e) To follow, succeed, come close upon; सत्यो$यं जनप्रवादो यद्विपद्विपदं संपत्सं- पदमनुबध्नातीति K.73; see अनुबन्धि below. -5 To foster, cherish, entertain, harbour; तेषु किं भवतः स्नेहमनुबध्नाति मानसम् Mārk. P. -6 To bear, endure; अन्येद्युश्चानुबध्नत्या राज्ञ्या राजा स यत्नतः Ks.49.47. -7 Not to burst or break loose, hold or keep together; भङ्गे$पि हि मृणालानामनुबध्नन्ति तन्तवः H.1.91. -pass. To be related to or connected with.

anubaddha	अनुबद्ध p. p. 1 Bound, attached, tied to. -2 Following the train, coming as a consequence; अनुबद्धार्थान- र्थसंशयान् विचार्य Dk.41. -3 Connected with, related to, relating or belonging to. -4 Constantly sticking to, being in; continued, continuous; नित्यानुबद्धकुलवैरः Ve.1; ˚मुग्धकाकलीहसितम् U.3; ˚विजृम्भकम् K.66; ˚बिन्दुभिरश्रुभिः 135 constantly flowing. -5 Fixed upon, directed towards; कलहंस ˚वक्त्रायाः Dk.33.

anubandhaḥ	अनुबन्धः 1 Binding or fastening on, connection, attachment, tie (lit. & fig.); यस्यां मनश्चक्षुषोरनुबन्धस्तस्या- मृद्धिः Māl.2; एतस्येदृशेन दर्शनेन कीदृशो मे हृदयानुबन्धः इति न जानासि U.3 state of feeling; K.257. -2 Uninterrupted succession, unbroken sequence, continuous flow, continuity; series, chain; बाष्पं कुसु स्थिरतया विरतानुबन्धम् Ś.4. 15; मरण˚ K.236 following up death, desire for dying; अनुबन्धाद्विरमेद्वा K.28; यदा नात्याक्षीदेवानुबन्धम् 39 (persistence in) following me, 317; वैर˚, मत्सर˚, Dk.63,161; मुच्यतां देवि शोकानुबन्धः K.63 continuous sorrow; दुर्लभजन- प्रार्थना˚ Ratn.1; विरम विरम वह्ने मुञ्च धूमानुबन्धम् 4.16; सानु- बन्धाः कथं न स्युः संपदो मे निरापदः R.1.64 continuous, uninterrupted; परिवृद्धरीगमनुबन्धसेवया R.9.69 continuous enjoyment; अयं सो$र्थो$नर्थानुबन्धः संवृत्तः V.5 giving rise to a chain of evils. -3 Descendants, posterity; सानुबन्धा हता ह्यसि Rām. relation, भूमेः सुतां भूमिभृतो$नुबन्धात् Viś. Guṇā.475. -4 Consequence, result (good or bad); आत्मदोषानुबन्धेन K.319 in consequence of; यदग्रे चानुबन्धे च सुखम् Bg.18.39,25; अनुबन्धमजानन्तः कर्मणामविचक्षणाः Rām. 3.51.26; नार्थानां प्रकृतिं वेत्सि नानुबन्धमवेक्षसे Mb.4.49.1. -5 Intention; design, motive, cause; अनुबन्धानपेक्षेत सानु- बन्धेषु कर्मसु Mb.5.34.8. अनुबन्धं परिज्ञाय देशकालौ च तत्त्वतः । सारापराधौ चालोक्य दण्ड दण्डयेषु पातयेत् Ms.8.126; पाप˚ of evil designs. -6 An adjunct of a thing, a secondary member (मुख्यानुयायि, अप्रधानम्); (उल्का) दृश्यते सानुबन्धा च Rām.5.1.63. a secondary symptom, symptomatic affection, attendant on the principal disease (वातपित्तादि- दोषाणामप्राधान्यम्); मूर्छानुबन्धा विषमज्वराः Suśr. -7 Connecting link or adjunct of a subject or topic; theme, matter of discussion; introductory reasons; (विषयप्रयोजनाधिकारि- संबन्धः अनुबन्धः) (an indispensable element of the Vedānta). -8 (Gram.) An indicatory syllable or letter intended to denote some peculiarity in the inflection, accent &c. of the word to which it is attached; as the लृ in गम्लृ, ण् in इण्; रिपुराप पराभवाय मध्यं प्रकृति- प्रत्यययोरिवानुबन्धः Ki.13.19. -9 Offence, fault. -1 An obstacle, impediment; also the clog or encumbrance of a family; domestic ties or attachment. -11 A child or pupil who follows the example set by his parent or teacher (मुख्यानुयायी शिशुः). -12 Beginning, commencement. -13 Repeated application or devotion (पौनःपुन्येन अभिनिवेशः). -14 Course, pursuit. -15 A small bit or part, a trifle. -16 The junction of a fraction (with an integer), as भागानुबन्धपूर्णाङ्कः. -17 Base, stem (प्रकृति). cf. अनुबन्धः प्रकृत्यादौ दोषोत्पादे विनश्वरे । मुख्यानुयायिनि शिशौ प्रकृतस्यानुवर्तने । अनुबन्धे$पि हिक्कायां भ्रष्टायामपि कथ्यते । Nm. -धी [अनुबध्यते अतिश्वासेन व्याप्रियते अनया] 1 Thirst. -2 Hickup. अनुबन्धी तु हिक्कायां तृष्णायामपि योषिति-Medinī.

anubandhaka	अनुबन्धक a. Connected, related.

anubandhanam	अनुबन्धनम् Connection, succession, series &c.

anubandhikā	अनुबन्धिका f. Pain in the joint; अनुबद्धमनुबन्धिकाभिः Hch.5.

anubandhin	अनुबन्धिन् a. (oft. at the end of comp.) 1 (a) Connected with, attached or related to; अहो सरसरमणी- यानुबन्धिनी स्त्रीजनकथा Māl.1 having for its contents or subject-matter &c.; परिचर्यानुबन्धी Dk.11 continuing. (b) Mixed or blended with; नीलकण्ठकलकेकानुबन्धिना मन्द्र- हुङ्कृतेन मामनुमन्यते Māl.9. -2 Followed by, accompanied with; having in its train, resulting in having as a consequence; तदियमापत्समन्ततो$नर्थानुबन्धिनी Dk.6; अय- मर्थो$र्थानुबन्धी 67; शास्त्रं शास्त्रान्तरानुबन्धि 156; दुःखं दुःखानुबन्धि V.4 one misfortune closely follows another, or misfortunes never come single; K.349; महोदयैस्तस्य हितानु- बन्धिभिः Ki.1.2; कर्मानुबन्धीनि मनुष्यलोके Bg.15.2; गुणा गुणानुबन्धित्वात्तस्य सप्रसवा इव R.1.22 being associated with. -5 Lasting, thriving, prosperous, growing apace, continuous; uninterrupted; अपि त्वदावर्जितवारिसंभृतं प्रवाल- मासामनुबन्धि वीरुधाम् Ku.5.34; ऊर्ध्वं गतं यस्य न चानुबन्धि R.6.77 continuous uninterrupted or all pervading; K.246,33.

anubandhya	अनुबन्ध्य a. Principal, chief, primary (which may receive an adjunct, as a root, a disease &c.). -2 [वधार्थं बन्धः अनुबन्धः कर्मणि ण्यत्] To be killed (as a bull), one of the three principal sacrificial animals at the ज्योतिष्टोम sacrifice; गारनुबन्ध्यः K. P.2.

anubalam	अनुबलम् [अनु पश्चात्स्थितं बलम्] A rearguard, an auxiliary army following another.

anubudh	अनुबुध् 4 A. To awake, to recollect; learn, obtain information of, know, be aware of; न सत्यमनुबुध्यते K. 14 does not perceive or recognise. -Caus. 1 To remind, put in mind of; अये सम्यगनुबोधितो$स्मि Ś.1 well reminded. -2 To advise, inform; इति शिष्येण किलान्वबोधयत् R.8.75.

anubodhaḥ	अनुबोधः 1 An after-thought, recollection. -2 Reviving the scent of faded perfumes, replacing them when removed by bathing.

anubodhanam	अनुबोधनम् Recollection, reminding.

anubrāhmaṇam	अनुब्राह्मणम् 1 A work resembling a Brāhmaṇa (ब्राह्मणसदृशो ग्रन्थः P.IV.2.62 Sk.). -2 ind. According to the Brāhmaṇa.

anubrāhmaṇin	अनुब्राह्मणिन् क a. [तदधीते वेद वा ति इनिप्रत्ययः] One who learns or knows an अनुब्राह्मण.

anubhava	अनुभव भाव &c. See under अनुभू.

anubhājita	अनुभाजित a. Worshipped नानुबध्येत तद्वाक्यैर्विभ्रमैश्चानु- भाजितः Bhāg.1.47.41.

anubhāṣaṇam	अनुभाषणम् 1 Repetition of an assertion to refute it. -2 Repeating what has been said. -3 Conversation, dialogue (अनु सह भाषणम्).

anubhāṣitṛ	अनुभाषितृ a. Speaking in reply; श्लाघ्यो भवान्स्वजन इत्यनुभाषितारम् (क्षितीशम्) R.16.86.

anubhāsaḥ	अनुभासः A kind of crow.

anubhuj	अनुभुज् 7 A. To enjoy, experience (good or bad things), suffer (as the due consequences of one's deeds); मेघमुक्तविशदां स चन्द्रिकाम् अन्वभुङ्क्त R.19.39; सा मण्डनान्मण्डनमन्वभुङ्क्त Ku.7.5.

anubhogaḥ	अनुभोगः 1 Enjoyment. -2 A grant of a land in perpetuity for service done.

anubhū	अनुभू 1 P. 1 To enjoy; taste, experience, feel, have experience or knowledge of, notice, perceive (by the senses &c.); to suffer, bear, undergo (as misery &c.); अन्वभवं च मधुकर इव नवमालिकामार्द्रसुमनसम् Dk. 121; असक्तः सुखमन्वभूत् R.1.21; भुवनालोकनप्रीतिः स्वर्गिभि- र्नानुभूयते Ku.2.45; R.7.28; आत्मकृतानां हि दोषाणामनु- भवितव्यं फलमात्मनैव K.121; अनुभवति हि मूर्ध्ना पादपस्तीव्रमुष्णम् Ś.5.7; Ku.4.41; संवत्सरमात्रं प्रेष्यभावमनुभूय M.5 undergoing the state of a servant; षष्ठमनुभवन् वर्षम् K.77 being in the sixth year, six years old. -2 To learn, hear, understand; वेदान्नानुभवसि Ch. Up. -3 To try, test, put to the test; न त्वं तेनान्वभाविष्ठा नान्वभावि त्वयाप्यसौ । अनुभूता मया चासौ तेन चान्वभविष्यहम् ॥ Bk.5.35. -4 To comprise, include, grasp; द्वे वामलके अनुभवति Ch. Up. -5 To come up with, arrive at, get, obtain (mostly Ved. in these senses). -6 To turn or incline to; यत् त्वा भवतो रोदसी अनु Rv.1.147.1. -7 To act favourably; य एवैतमनुभवति यो वै तमनुभार्यान् बुभूर्षति Bṛi. Up.1.3.18.] -Caus. 1 To cause to enjoy, feel, or experience; अनुभावयितुं मन्ये यत्नः संप्रति मां विधेः Mu.6.15; स्नानभोजना- दिकमनुभावितो$स्मि Dk.125; आमोदो न हि कस्तूर्याः शपथेनानुभाव्यते Bv.1.12. -2 To reflect on, meditate, think of; मनसा तमेव वृत्तान्तमन्वभावयत् K.176,279. -3 To infer, know; तस्मात्परोक्षवृत्तीनां फलैः कर्मानुभाव्यते H.4.11.

anubhavaḥ	अनुभवः 1 Direct perception or cognition, knowledge derived from personal observation or experiment, notion, apprehension, the impression on the mind not derived from memory, one of the kinds of knowledge; सर्वव्यवहारहेतुर्ज्ञानं बुद्धिः । सा द्विविधा स्सृतिरनुभवश्च । संस्कारमात्र- जन्यं ज्ञानं स्मृतिः । तद्भिन्नं ज्ञानमनुभवः which again is यथार्थ right & अयथार्थ wrong. See T. S.34. (The Naiyāyikas recognize प्रत्यक्ष, अनुमान, उपमान and शाब्द as the four sources of knowledge; the Vedāntins and Mīmāṁsakas add two more अर्थापत्ति and अनुपलब्धि; the Vaiśeṣikas and Bauddhas admit the first two only, the Sāṅkhyas exclude उपमान, while the Chārvākas admit प्रत्यक्ष only. Other sections of philosophical schools add three more to the six sources of knowledge recognised by the Mīmāṁsakas; -संभव 'equivalence'; ऐतिह्य 'fallible testimony', and चेष्टा 'gesture'.) -2 Experience; अनुभवं वचसा सखि लुम्पसि N.4.15. -3 Understanding. -4 Result, consequence. -Comp. -सिद्ध a. established by experience.

anubhāvaḥ	अनुभावः 1 Dignity, consequence or dignity of person, majestic lustre, splendour, might, power, authority. (परिमेयपुरःसरौ) अनुभावविशेषात्तु सेनापरिवृताविव R.1.37; संभावनीयानुभावा अस्याकृतिः Ś.7; अनुभावसौभाग्यमात्रपरिशेष- धूसरश्री U.1,3;6.2;41,4.22, K.18,24; V.1; तवानुभावो$यमवेदि यन्मया Ki.1.6; Dk.29,113; दिव्यौषध्या जयति महिमा को$प्यचिन्त्यानुभावः । Mv.6.53; अहो महानुभावः पार्थिवो दुष्यन्तः Ś.3 of great might or power; जाने वो रक्षसाक्रान्तावनुभावपराक्रमौ R.1.38,2.75 greatness (dignity) &c., valour; न निहन्ति धैर्यमनुभावगुणः Ki.6.28; महानुभावप्रकृतिः कापि तत एवागतवती Māl.1 very noble or dignified. -2 (In Rhet.) An external manifestation or indication of a feeling (भाव) by appropriate symptoms, such as by look, gesture &c., called by some ensuant (भावबोधक-न); भावं मनोगतं साक्षात् स्वगतं व्यञ्जयत्नि ये । ते$नुभावा इति ख्याताः; यथा भ्रूभङ्गः कोपस्य व्यञ्जकः; उद्बुद्धं कारणं स्वैः स्वैर्बहिर्भावं प्रकाशयन् । लोके यः कार्यरूपः सो$- नुभावः काव्यनाट्ययोः ॥ S. D.162,163. &c.; धिगेव रमणीयतां त्वदनुभावभावादृते Māl.9.35. -3 Firm opinion or resolution, determination, belief; अनुभावांश्च जानासि ब्राह्मणानां न संशयः Mb.3.24.8. अनुभाववता गुरुस्थिरत्वात् Ki.13.15. cf. अनुभावः प्रभावे च सतां च मतिनिश्चये Ak. also Nm.

anubhāvaka	अनुभावक a. Causing to understand, making one apprehend, indicative; ˚ता understanding, knowledge; यत्पदेन विना यस्याननुभावकता भवेत् Bhāṣā. P.84.

anubhāvanam	अनुभावनम् Indication of feelings by signs, gestures &c.

anubhāvin	अनुभाविन् a. 1 Experienced; एकभक्त्यानुभाविते Bhāg. 3.24.43. -2 greatly empowered; मह्यमाख्याह्यनुभाविताः Bhāg.11.16.5. -3 protected; वयं च सर्वे भवतानुभाविता; Bhāg.1.63.37.

anubhāvin	अनुभाविन् a. 1 Perceiving, knowing, showing signs of feeling. -2 An eye-witness; अनुभावी तु यः कश्चित्कुर्या- त्साक्ष्यं विवादिनाम् Ms.8.69. -3 Being or coming after.

anubhū	अनुभू a. [भू-क्विप्] Perceiving, understanding. -भूः f. Experience, direct knowledge or perception; अयमात्मा सर्वानुभूः Bṛi. Up.2.5.19.

anubhūtiḥ	अनुभूतिः f. 1 Perception, apprehension, experience. -2 (In Nyāya) Knowledge derived from four sources: namely direct perception, inference, comparison, and verbal knowledge; see Bhāṣā. P.51,52. -3 Dignity, consequence. -Comp. -प्रकाशः N. of the metrical gloss or paraphrase of the principal Upaniṣads by Mādhavāchārya. -स्वरूपाचार्यः N. of the author of the grammar Sārasvata-prakriyā.

anubhṛ	अनुभृ 1. 3. P. 1 To praise conformably; to throw or commit into. -2 To insert, enter; आ अनुभृतमनर्वा Rv.1.61.5.

anubhartṛ	अनुभर्तृ m. 1 Praising conformably, imitating. -2 Supporting, strengthening. -3 Penetrating, एषा स्या वो मरुतो$नुभत्रीं प्रति ष्टोभति वाघतो न वाणी Rv.1.88.6.

anubhrātṛ	अनुभ्रातृ m. A younger brother (अनुगतो भ्रातरम्).

anumad	अनुमद् 1 P. Ved. To rejoice over, gladden.

anumatta	अनुमत्त p. p. Intoxicated with joy.

anumādya	अनुमाद्य pot. p. To be praised in succession, to be granted with praise.

anuman	अनुमन् 4 A. 1 To agree or consent to, comply with, approve, sanction, grant; to permit, allow; किं महार्ह- शयनोपेते न वासमनुमन्यसे Rām.5.24.2. तत्र नाहमनुमन्तुमुत्सहे मोघवृत्ति कलभस्य चेष्टितम् R.11.39; राजन्यान् स्वपुरनिवृत्तये$नुमेने R.4.87; कैलासनाथोद्वहनाय पुष्पकमन्वमंस्त 14.2; शुश्रूषमाणां गिरिशोनुमेने Ku.1.59,5.68; कृताभिमर्षामनुमन्यमानः सुताम् Ś 5.2; इमां स्वसारं च यवीयसीं मे कुमुद्वतीं नार्हसि नानुमन्तुम् R. 16.85 be pleased not to reject or refuse; अविनयमनुमन्तुं नोत्सहे दुर्जनानाम् Bh.3.22. -2 To follow, have recourse to; धर्मार्थावभिसन्त्यज्य संरभं योनुमन्यते Mb. -Caus. 1 To ask for leave or permission; ask the consent of; अनुमान्यतां महाराजः V.2 ask for leave to go; take counsel with; भूयो$पि सखीजनमनुमानयिष्यामि Ś.3. -2 To ask for, request or beg; अन्नमादाय तृप्ताः स्थ शेषं चैवानुमान्य च (विकिरत्) Y.1. 241. -3 To honour. -4 To put to account.

anumata	अनुमत p. p. 1 Approved, assented to, agreed to, permitted, allowed, granted &c. द्वारे नियुक्तपुरुषानुमतप्रवेशः M.1.12. भ्रूक्षेपमात्रानुमतप्रवेशाम् Ku.3.6. कृतमनुमतं दृष्टं वा यैरिदं गुरुपातकम् Ve.3.24; ˚गमना Ś4.1 allowed to depart; अनुमतो गृहाय R.5.1; उभय˚ तः साक्षी Y.2.72 admitted by both parties &c. -2 Liked, beloved, pleasant, loved, agreeable, desired by, dear to; वृष्टिं च कर्षकजनानुमतां करोति Bṛi. S.5.72. -3 Being of one opinion, agreeing or concurring with. -तः A lover; घनमतो नमतोनुमतान् प्रियाः Śi.6.65. -तम् Consent, approval, permission; प्रथमं कस्यानुमते चोरितमेतत्त्वया हृदयम् V.3.17.

anumatiḥ	अनुमतिः f. 1 Permission, consent, approval, assent. -2 The 15th day of the moon's age on which she rises one digit less than full, when the gods and manes receive oblations with favour; personified as a goddess or worshipped in the Rājasūya sacrifice (कलाहीन- चन्द्रवती शुक्लचतुर्दशीयुतपूर्णिमातिथिः); अनुमत्यै हविरष्टाकपालं पुरोडाशं निर्वपति Śat. Br.; Ms.3.86-87. -Comp. -प्रत्रम् a deed expressing assent.

anumananam	अनुमननम् 1 Assent; sufferance. -2 Independence.

anumantṛ	अनुमन्तृ a. Consenting to, permitting, allowing, suffering (opp. to active agent); उपद्रष्टा$नुमन्ता च भर्ता भोक्ता महेश्वरः Bg.13.22; Ms.5.51 adviser.

anumantr	अनुमन्त्र् 1 A. To consecrate or accompany with sacred hymns or magical formulas; to dismiss with sacred and auspicious words, dismiss with a blessing; विसृष्टश्च वामदेवानुमन्त्रितो$श्वः U.2. (v. l. for अभिमन्त्रित); रथमारोप्य कृष्णेन यत्र कर्णो$नुमन्त्रितः Mb.

anumantraḥ	अनुमन्त्रः A favourable speech; रहोनुमन्त्रैरपकृष्टचेतनः Bhāg.4.27.3.

anumantraṇam	अनुमन्त्रणम् Consecration by hymns and prayers.

anumantrita	अनुमन्त्रित a. Consecrated.

anumaraṇam	अनुमरणम् See under अनुमृ.

anumaruḥ	अनुमरुः A country next to a desert.

anumā	अनुमा 3 A., 2 P. 1 To infer, (as from some signs, premises &c.); अलिङ्गं प्रकृतिं त्वाहुलिंङ्गैरनुमिमीमहे Mb.; conclude, guess, conjecture; धूमादग्निमनुमाय T. S.41; पर्याकुलत्वान्मरुतां वेगभङ्गे$नुमीयते Ku.2.25; अन्वमीयत शुद्धेति शान्तेन वपुषैव सा R.15.77,17.11; तेजोविशेषानुमितां दधानः 2.7,68;5.12; इह मदस्नपितैरनुमीयते सुरगणस्य गतं हरिचन्दनैः Ki.5.47. -2 To reconcile, equal. -Caus. (-मापयति) To lead one to infer or guess, bespeak, indicate; आकृतिरेवानुमापयत्यमानुषताम् K.132,22.

anumā	अनुमा [मा-अङ्] Inference, conclusion from given premises; see अनुमिति.

anumātṛ	अनुमातृ a. One who infers; न हि करिणि दृष्टे चीत्कारेण तमनुमिमते$नुमातारः.

anumātrā	अनुमात्रा Determination, resolution; तत्रेयमनुमात्रा मे भीमसेन विवक्षिता । नैकान्तसिद्धिर्वक्तव्या शत्रुभिः सह संयुगे ॥ Mb.5.77.13.

anumānam	अनुमानम् 1 Inferring as the instrument of an अनुमिति, conclusion; from given premises; an inference, conclusion, one of the four means of obtaining knowledge according to the Nyāya system; (अनुमितिकरणमनुमानं तच्च धूमो वह्निव्याप्य इति व्याप्तिज्ञानम्. It is of two kinds स्वार्था- नुमानम् & परार्थानुमानम्); प्रत्यक्षं चानुमानं च शास्त्रं च विविधागमम् । त्रयं सुविदितं कार्यं धर्मशुद्धिमभीप्सता ॥ Ms.12.15. -2 A guess, conjecture, sign to know; इङ्गितैरनुमानैश्च मया ज्ञैया भविष्यति Rām. -3 Analogy, similarity; आत्मनो हृदयानुमानेन प्रेक्षसे Ś.5 you judge (of others) by the analogy of your own heart; स्वानुमानात्कादम्बरीमुत्प्रेक्ष्य K.35. -4 (In Rhet.) A figure which consists in a notion, expressed in a peculiarly striking manner, of a thing established by proof; S. D.711; यत्र पतत्यबलानां दृष्टिर्निशिताः पतन्ति तत्र शराः । तच्चापरोपितशरो धावत्यासां पुरः स्मरो मन्ये ॥ अनुमानं तदुक्तं यत्साध्यसाधनयोर्वचः K. P.1. -Comp. -उक्ति f. reasoning; logical inference.

anumāpaka	अनुमापक a. (-पिका f.) Causing an inference as an effect, being the ground of an inference.

anumitiḥ	अनुमितिः f. Inference form given premises; the knowledge obtained by means of अनुमान; लिङ्गपरामर्शजन्यं ज्ञानमनुमितिः the knowledge that arises from deduction or syllogistic reasoning.

anumitsā	अनुमित्सा Desire of inferring.

anumeya	अनुमेय pot. p. Inferable, to be inferred; फलानुमेयाः प्रारम्भाः R.1.2.

anumārgam	अनुमार्गम् adv. Along the way, according to a (particular) way, on or in the way; अनुमार्गगतया K. 1 come by this way.

anumāṣam	अनुमाषम् adv. Like a kidney bean or in a kidney bean.

anumāsaḥ	अनुमासः [अनुगतो मासः] The following month. -सम् ind. Every month, month after month.

anumud	अनुमुद् 1 A. (P. in epic poetry) 1 To rejoice with, join in rejoicing or sympathizing with; मुदितामनुमोदते Bhāg. -2 To express approval; तदेव राममातृभिरनुमोदितम् U.2; approve, second, applaud; निषेद्धुमासीदनुमोदितुं वा R.14.43; to allow with pleasure, permit; अनुमोदित- माचार्यैः K.77; अननुमोदिता मात्रा । 16. -Caus. To gladden, delight, favour, permit.

anumodaḥ	अनुमोदः 1 The feeling of pleasure arising from sympathy, subsequent pleasure. -2 = अनुमोदनम् see below.

anumodanam	अनुमोदनम् 1 Approval, assent, seconding, acceptance, compliance. -2 Causing pleasure.

anumṛ	अनुमृ 6 A. To follow in death; रुदता कुत एव सा पुनर्भवता नानुमृतापि लभ्यते R.8.85 followed in death by you; गतिविभ्रमसादनीरवा न शुचा नानुमृतेव लक्ष्यते 58 (used actively).

anumaraṇam	अनुमरणम् Following in death; तन्मरणे चानुमरणं करिष्या- मीति मे निश्चयः H.3; post-cremation of a widow (अनुमरणं हि भर्तर्देशान्तरादिमरणे देहाद्यलाभ एव); देशान्तरमृते पत्यौ साध्वी तत्पादुकाद्वयम् । निधायोरसि संशुद्धा प्रविशेज्जातवेदसम् ॥ This is allowed to Kṣatriya, Vaiṣya and other women, but not to Brāhmaṇa women; पृथक् चितां समारुह्य न विप्रा गन्तुमर्हति. Bāṇa severely condemns this practice; see K.173-4.

anuyavam	अनुयवम् adv. In the grains of barley.

anuyā	अनुया 2 P. 1 To follow, go after (fig. also); अनुयाहि साधुपदवीम् Bh.2.77; अनुयास्यन्मुनितनयाम् Ś.1.28; त्वामनुयामि यद्यपि Ku.4.21. -2 To imitate, equal; न किलानु- ययुस्तस्य राजानो रक्षितुर्यशः R.1.27;9.6; अनुयातलीलः 16.71; गुणैर्नृपाः शार्ङ्गिणमन्वयासिषुः Śi.12.3 followed and imitated. -3 To attend, accompany; इयं मुसलमनुयाति कलेन हुङ्कृतेन Mu.1.4; अनुयातारुन्धतीको वसिष्ठः U.3.48.

anuyā	अनुया a. Following; अनुया सात्र्या रात्रीं जिन्व Vāj.15.6. -याः Ved. Food.

anuyātṛ	अनुयातृ m. A follower, companion.

anuyātram	अनुयात्रम् त्रा Retinue, train; attendance upon; following; त्यक्तभोगस्य मे राजन् वने वन्येन जावतः । किं कार्यमनु- यात्रेण Rā. सखिभिश्चित्रकथैः कृतानुयात्रः । Bu. Ch.5.2. -त्रम् adv. In or after a procession.

anuyātrikaḥ	अनुयात्रिकः [अनुयात्रा अनुगमनमस्त्यस्य ठन्] A follower, attendant; यावदनुयात्रिकान्समेत्य निवेशयेयम् Ś1,2.

anuyānam	अनुयानम् Following.

anuyāyin	अनुयायिन् a. [P.III.2.78] 1 Following; attending, consequent. तत् त्रिकालहितं वाक्यं धर्म्यमर्थानुयायि च Rām. 5.51.21. वसिष्ठधेनोरनुयायिनं तमावर्तमानं वनिता वनान्तात् R.2.19. -2 Like, similar. -3 Following a principal person as a teacher (मुख्यस्य अनुगन्ता शिशुः) m. A follower (lit. & fig.); रामानुजानुयायिनः followers of the doctrines of R.; a dependent or attendant; न्यषेधि शेषो$प्यनुयायिवर्गः R.2.4.

anuyājaḥ	अनुयाजः [यज्-घञ्, कुत्वाभावः P.VII.3.62] A part of a sacrificial ceremony (यज्ञाङ्गम्); secondary or supplementary sacrificial rite; usually written अनूयाज q. v. -Comp. -प्रसवः permission to perform an Anuyāja. -प्रैषाः the formulae belonging to the Anuyāja.

anuyuj	अनुयुज् 7 A. 1 To ask, question; किं वस्तु विद्वन्गुरवे प्रदेयं त्वया कियद्वेति तमन्वयुङ्क्त R.5.18; अन्वयुङ्क्त गुरुमीश्वरः क्षितेः 11.62; स्वजनस्य वार्तमयमन्वयुङ्क्त च Śi.13.68. -2 To examine (as an accused), put on trial; प्राङ्विवाको$नुयुञ्जीत विधिनानेन सान्त्वयन् Ms.8.79,259. -3 To impart or give, as instruction. -4 To order, enjoin. -5 To select as husband. -6 To request, beg; धार्तराष्ट्रं सहामात्यं स्वयं समनुयुङ्क्ष्महे Mb.5.72.3.

anuyukta	अनुयुक्त p. p. 1 Asked, questioned, examined, ordered &c. -2 Censured, reproached. -3 Learning from a hired teacher (भृतकाध्येता), See अनुयोक्तृ.

anuyuktin	अनुयुक्तिन् q. [अस्त्यर्थे इनि] One who has ordered, examined; cf. गृहीतिन्, अधीतिन्.

anuyugam	अनुयुगम् ind. According to the Yuga; फलन्त्यनुयुगं लोके प्रभावश्च शरीरिणाम् Ms.1.84.

anuyuñjaka	अनुयुञ्जक a. Jealous यथैषां वक्तुमिच्छन्ति नैर्गुण्यमनुयुञ्जकाः Mb.12.299.23.

anuyoktṛ	अनुयोक्तृ a. An examiner, interrogator; inquirer; a teacher, especially hired or mercenary (भृतकाध्यापक). अनुयोक्ता च यो विप्रो अनुयुक्तश्च भारत Mb.13.23.17.

anuyogaḥ	अनुयोगः 1 A question, inquiry, examination; या$स्मि सा$स्म्यनुयोगो मे न कर्तव्यः कथञ्चन Mb.13.93.82. अनियन्त्रणानुयोगस्तपस्विजनः Ś.1; निगृह्यानुयोगे P.VIII.2.94; वार्ता˚मधुराक्षरया च वाचा R.13.71. -2 Censure, reproof, punishment; नानुयोगा ब्राह्मणानां भवन्ति Mb.3.192.56. -3 Solicitation. -4 Exertion, effort; अनुयोगं विना तैलं तिलानां नोपजायते Pt.2.14. -5 Religious meditation; spiritual union. -6 Comment. -Comp. -कृत् 1 an interrogator. -2 a teacher, spiritual preceptor (अनुयोगं कृन्तति पश्नविषयसंशयं छिनत्ति).

anuyogin	अनुयोगिन् pot. p. 1 What combines or unites; connected with, situated in or on. -2 Examining, questioning.

anuyojya	अनुयोज्य pot. p. Fit to be questioned, asked; asked with a reproof. ममेदमिति यो ब्रूयात्सो$नुयोज्यो यथाविधि Ms.8.31. -ज्यः A servant; obedient and humble servant; उभाभ्यामपि वासवानुयोज्यो दुष्यन्तः प्रणमति Ś.7.

anuyojanam	अनुयोजनम् A question, inquiry.

anurañj	अनुरञ्ज् 4 U. 1 To be red; भृशमन्वरज्यदतुषारकरः Śi.9.7. (became red or attached). -2 To be delighted, find pleasure; तव प्रकीर्त्या जगत्प्रहृष्यत्यनुरज्यते च Bg.11.36. -3 To be attached or devoted to, be fond of, love, like (with acc. or loc.); समस्थमनुरज्यन्ति विषमस्थं त्यजन्ति च Rām.; अशुद्धप्रकृतौ राज्ञि जनता नानुरज्यते Pt.1.31; भ्रातुर्मृतस्य भार्यायां यो$नुरज्येत कामतः Ms.3.173. -Caus. 1 To make red, redden, dye, colour; सरसकिसलयानुरञ्जितैर्वा Śi.7.64, 8.17,12.68; Dk.168; Ki.4.27,12.23. -2 To attach oneself to, please, gratify, conciliate, keep contented or satisfied; अनुरक्तः प्रजाभिश्च प्रजाश्चाप्यन्वरञ्जयत् Rām.; कष्टं जनः कुलधनैरनुरञ्जनीयः U.1.14; शिष्यगुणानुरञ्जितमनसम् Pt.1 pleased, gratified.

anurakta	अनुरक्त p. p. 1 Reddened, dyed, coloured; सन्ध्यानुरक्ते जलदे दीप्ता विद्युदिवोज्ज्वला Rām.6.111.88. कुण्डलमणिप्रभानुरक्त- गण्डस्थलः K.17. -2 Pleased, contented; loved, beloved; loyal, loyally devoted; अनुरक्तः शुचिर्दक्षः Ms.7.64; गुणानुरक्तामनुरक्तसाधनः Ki.1.31 having all means favourable to him. -3 Glowing; तापानुरक्तमधुना कमलं ध्रुवमीहते जेतुम् । Nāg.3.1. ˚प्रजः-लोकः beloved by people; attached or devoted to, fond of (with loc. or acc.); अपि वृषलमनुरक्ताः प्रकृतयः -अथ किम्-चन्द्रगुप्ते दृढमनुरक्ताः प्रकृतयः Mu.1; कथं वसन्तसेना आर्यचारुदत्तमनुरक्ता Mk.1; एषा भवन्त- मनुरक्ता Ś.6.19; अलभ्यमनुरक्तवान् कथय किंनु नारीजनम् Mu.6.

anuraktiḥ	अनुरक्तिः f. Love, attachment, devotion, affection. Pt.2.

anurañjaka	अनुरञ्जक a. Gratifying, pleasing.

anurañjanam	अनुरञ्जनम् Conciliating, satisfying, gratifying, pleasing, keeping contented; युक्तः प्रजानामनुरञ्जने स्याः U.1.11.

anurañjita	अनुरञ्जित p. p. Pleased, conciliated, kept contented &c.

anurāga	अनुराग a. Become red, reddened. -गः 1 Redness. -2 Devotion, attachment, contentment, loyalty (opp. अपरागः); love, affection, passion (with loc. or in comp.); आविर्भूतानुरागाः Mu.4.21; कण्टकितेन प्रथयति मय्यनुरागं कपोलेन Ś.3.14; R.3.1; बहलानुरागकुरुविन्ददलप्रतिबद्धमध्यमिव दिग्बलयम् Śi.9.8. ˚इङ्गितम् a gesture or external sign expressive of love; प्रसादस्तु शब्दः स्यादनुरागजः Ak. अनुरागिन् anurāgin अनुरागवत् anurāgavat अनुरागिन् अनुरागवत् a. 1 Attached, enamoured, impassioned, inspired with love; स वृद्धस्तस्यामतीवानुरागवान् H.1; सा केनापि वणिक्पुत्रेण सहानुरागवती बभूव ibid. -2 Causing or inspiring love. -णी Personification of a musical note.

anuraṇanam	अनुरणनम् 1 Sounding conformably to; a continuous tinkling echo produced by the sounds of bells, anklets &c. -2 The power of words called व्यञ्जन q. v.; the meaning suggested by what is actually stated; क्रमलक्ष्य- त्वादेवानुरणनरूपो यो व्यङ्ग्यः S. D.4.

anuratiḥ	अनुरतिः f. Love, attachment.

anuratham	अनुरथम् ind. Behind the carriage; P.II.1.6.

anurathyā	अनुरथ्या [रथ्यामन्वायतं स्थिता] A foot-path, a by-road, the margin of a street, (a path along the margin of a road); प्रकाशीकरणार्थं च निशागमनशङ्कया । दीपवृक्षांस्तथा चक्रुरनु रथ्यासु सर्वशः Rām.2.6.18; Mb.3.15.2.

anurasita	अनुरसित a. Sounding, echoing; उद्ग्रीवैरनुरसितस्य पुष्करस्य M.1.21 accompanied in sound.

anurasaḥ	अनुरसः रसितम् Echo, reverberation; ˚गुरु magnified by echo; अनुरसितगुरूणि स्त्यानमम्बूकृतानि U.2.21; (this same verse occurs in). Māl.9.6; Mv.5.41.

anurasaḥ	अनुरसः [अनुगतो रसम्] 1 A secondary feeling (in Rhet.). -2 A secondary flavour; लवण˚ saltish taste; मधुरानुरसं रूक्षं लवणानुरसं लघु । नार्यास्तु मधुरं स्तन्यं कषायानुरसं हिमम् Suśr.

anurahasa	अनुरहस a. [अनुगतम् रहः] Secret, solitary, private. -सम् adv. In secret, apart, privately; अनुरहसमनायि नायकेन Śi.7.5.

anurātra	अनुरात्र a. Following the night. -त्रम् adv. In the night; every night, night after night.

anurāddha	अनुराद्ध a. Accomplished, obtained.

anurādha	अनुराध a. 1 Causing welfare; also written as अनूराध; इन्द्रं वयमनूराधं हवामहे Av. -2 Born under the asterism अनुराधा P.IV.3.34. -धः N. of a Buddhist. -धा [अनुगता राधां विशाखाम् ।] N. of the 17th of the 27 lunar mansions or asterisms (so called because it follows राधा or विशाखा). It consists of four stars. -Comp. -ग्रामः, -पुरम् the ancient capital of Laṅkā or Ceylon; founded by अनुराध. Also called अनुरोधपुर, described by Rājaśekhara as full of curiosities. It is a large town in the north of Ceylon "with 16 square granite pillars which supported the floor of an enormous monastery called 'The Great Brazen Palace' said to have been built in 161 B. C."

anurud	अनुरुद् 2 P. To weep along with, condole with, sympathize; गुरुशोकामनुरोदितीव माम् Ku.4.15; अनुरोदितीव करुणेन पत्रिणाम् Śi.4.47.

anurodanam	अनुरोदनम् Condolence, sympathy.

anurudh	अनुरुध् 7 U. 1 To obstruct, block up; शिलाभिर्ये मार्गमनुरुन्धन्ति Mb.; to surround, hem in; रुद्रानुचरैर्मखो महान् ... अन्वरुध्यत Bhāg. -2 To bind, fasten. -3 To stick or adhere to, follow closely, observe, practise; अनुरुध्या- दघं त्र्यहम् Ms.5.63 should observe impurity (be in mourning); पुमांसमनुरुध्य जाता पुमनुजा P.III.2.1 Sk. born immediately after a male. -4 To love, be fond of, or devoted to, attach oneself to. समस्थमनुरुध्यन्ते विषमस्थं त्यजन्ति च Rām.; सद्वृत्तिमनुरुध्यन्तां भवन्तः Mv.2 follow or adopt; स्वधर्ममनुरुन्धन्ते नातिक्रमम् Ki.11.78; नानुरोत्स्ये जगल्लक्ष्मीम् Bk.16.23 love, like. -5 To conform to, obey, follow, adapt oneself to, act up to; नियतिं लोक इवानुरुध्यते Ki.2.12: हन्त तिर्यञ्चो$पि परिचयमनुरुध्यन्ते U.3 remember or cherish (act up to it); मद्वचनमनुरुध्यते वा भवान् K.181,298; वात्सल्यमनुरुध्यन्ते महात्मनः Mv.6 feel the force of compassion; तेनापि रावणे मैत्रीमनुरुध्य व्यपेक्ष्यते Mv.5.34 following up; यदि गुरुष्वनुरुध्यसे Mv.3 regard with respect, obey; अनुरुध्यस्व भगवतो वसिष्ठस्यादेशम् U.4; चन्द्रकेतोर्वचनम् U.5. -6 To coax, gratify, flatter, soothe; इत्यादिभिः प्रियशतरैनुरुध्य मुग्धाम् U.3.26; अभिनवसेवकजने$पि एकमनुरुध्यते K.27 please by carefully attending to &c., show regard for; 248. -7 To urge, press, entreat, request; आगमनाय अनुरुध्यमानः K.277; तया चाहमनुरुध्य- मानस्तां बकुलमालां दत्तवान् Māl.1; सा च भीमधन्वना बलवदनुरुद्धा Dk.122 courted, wooed. -8 To assent or agree to, approve; like, comply with; प्रकृतयो न मे व्यसनमनुरुध्यन्ते Dk.16; यदि भगवाननुरुध्यते Mv.4 agree with me.

anuruddha	अनुरुद्ध a. 1 Checked. -2 Opposed. -3Pacified, soothed.

anurudh	अनुरुध् a. [रुध-क्विप्] 1 One who obeys, conforms to &c. -2 Obeyed, observed, wanted (अपेक्षित), written as अनूरुध्; आक्षित् पूर्वास्वपरा अनूरुत् Rv.3.55.5.

anurodhaḥ	अनुरोधः धनम् 1 Compliance, gratification, fulfilling one's wishes &c. -2 Conformity, accordance, obedience, regard, consideration; धर्मानुरोधात् K.16,18,192; अत्र नानुरोधं तर्कये Mv.7 pleasure or gratification; आधारानु- रोधात् Mu.1.2 out of regard for; कविश्रमानुरोधाद्वा Ve. 1 in consideration of; दत्तोत्सेकः प्रलपति मया याज्ञवल्क्यानुरोधात् Mv.3.28,5. तदनुरोधात्-धेन accordingly, in accordance with it; वदेद्विपश्चिन्महतोनुरोधात् Pt.1.1 after great consideration; humouring; प्राप्तार्थग्रहणं द्रव्यपरीवर्तोनुरोधनम् H. 2.11; reference (of a rule.) -3 Pressing, urging, coaxing; entreaty, solicitation, request; क इवात्रानुरोधः K. 29; तदनुरोधात् 135; विनानुरोधात्स्वहितेच्छयैव Ś.2.81. -4 Bearing of a rule.

anurodhin	अनुरोधिन् धक a. Compliant, complying with, obeying or conforming to, having regard to, caring for; पतिव्रतानां समयानुरोधिनी Rām.

anuruh	अनुरुह् P. To ascend, mount; पञ्च पदानि रुपो अन्वरोहम् Rv.1.13.3.

anurūpa	अनुरूप a. [रूपस्य सदृशः योग्यो वा] 1 Like, resembling, corresponding to; शब्दानुरूपेण पराक्रमेण भवितव्यम् Pt.1; worthy of; आत्मानुरूपं वरम् Ś.1; रूपानुरूप K.192,23. -2 Suitable or fit, adapted to, according to, with gen. or in comp.; नैतदनुरूपं भवतः K.146,158; भव पितुरनुरूपस्त्वं गुणैर्लोककान्तैः V.5.21; काममननुरूपमस्या वपुषो वल्कलम् Ś.1; स्वप्रमाणानुरूपैः सेचनघटैः ibid.; सत्त्वानुरूपा सर्वस्य श्रद्धा भवति भारत Bg.17.3; R.1.33; Me.13 -पम् 1 Resemblance, likeness, conformity. -2 Suitability, fitness; अपि जनकसुताया- स्तच्च तच्चानुरूपम् U.6.26. -पः The antistrophe, having the same metre as the स्तोत्रिय or strophe; the second of the three verses (तृ) recited together, the other two being स्तोत्रिय and पर्यास, एकस्तोत्रियेष्वहस्सु यो$न्यो$नन्तरः सो$नुरूपः Āśval. अनुरूपतः anurūpatḥ पेण pēṇa पशः paśḥ अनुरूपतः पेण पशः adv. Conformably or agreeably to.

anulagna	अनुलग्न a. Attached to, intent on, seeking or pursuing after; येन आर्यायाः सुस्निग्धा दृष्टिरनुलग्ना Mk.4 intently fixed.

anulāpaḥ	अनुलापः Repetition, tautology.

anulālita	अनुलालित a. Entertained कुशिकसुतवचोनुलालिताभ्यां सुखमिव सा विवाभौ विभावरी Rām.1.23.24.

anulāsaḥ	अनुलासः स्यः [लस्-नर्तने-घञ्] A peacock; hence metaphorically 'a corner' as in वास्तुच्छिद्रानुलासः Kau. A.2.4.

anulip	अनुलिप् 6 P. To anoint, besmear (with perfumes &c. after bathing); smear, daub, cover over; वपुरन्वलिप्त न वधूः Śi.9.51,9.15; प्रभानुलिप्तश्रीवत्सम् R.1.1 covered with; तच्छायानुलिप्तभूतलाम् K.131; हरिभिरचिरभासा तेजसा चानुलिप्तैः Ś.7.7; so स्नातानुलिप्तः; तिमिरानुलिप्त enveloped in darkness; स्नापितो$नुलेपितश्च Dk.71 besmeared with perfumes &c.

anulepaḥ	अनुलेपः लेपनम् 1 Unction, anointing, smearing. -2 Ointment, unguent such as sandal juice, oil &c.; any emollient or oily application; ˚आर्द्रमृदङ्गध्वनि K.28 rubbed with paste; सुरभिकुसुमधूपानुलेपनानि K.324.

anulepaka	अनुलेपक लेपिन् a. One who anoints (the body) with unguents &c.

anulīna	अनुलीन a. Hidden, clinging to, attached; स्कन्धं सुगन्धिमनुलीनवता नगस्य Śi.5.46; जनादनुलीनः Dk.14 concealed from the people.

anuloma	अनुलोम a. [अनुगतः लोम P.V.4.75.] 1 'With the hair', regular, in natural order, successive (opp. प्रतिलोम); hence favourable, agreeable; ˚सुखो वायु- रनुसारयतीव माम् Rām.; त्रिरेनामनुलोमामनुमार्ष्टि Śat. Br.; °reeकृष्टं क्षेत्रं प्रतिलोमं कर्षति Sk. ploughed in the regular direction. -2 Mixed as a tribe. -मा A woman of the lower caste than that of the man's whom she marries; सकामास्वनु- लोमासु न दोषस्त्वन्यथा दमः Y.2.288. -मम् adv. In regular or natural order; प्रतिलोममालिम्पेन्नानुलोमम् Suśr. -माः (pl.) Mixed castes. -Comp. -अय a. having fortune favourable. -अर्थ a. speaking in favour of; जडानप्यनु- लोमार्थान् प्रवाचः कृतिनां गिरः Śi.2.25. -कल्पः the thirty-fourth of the Atharvaveda Pariśiṣṭas. -ग a. straight going; प्रदक्षिणा ग्रहाश्चापि भविष्यन्त्यनुलोमगाः Mb.3.19.92. -ज, -जन्मन् a. born in due gradation, offspring of a mother inferior in caste to the father; said of the mixed tribes; संकीर्णयोनयो ये तु प्रतिलोमानुलोमजाः Ms.1.25; Y.1.95. -परिणीत a. married in regular gradation.

anulomanam	अनुलोमनम् 1 Regular gradation, sending or putting in the right direction. -2 (In medicine) Carrying off by the regular channels, such as purging; alleviation.

anulomayati	अनुलोमयति Den. P. 1 To stroke or rub with the hair or with the grain, go with the grain; तत्र प्रतिलोम- मनुलोमयेत् Suśr. -2 To evacuate, purge, carry off by the regular channels.

anulvaṇa	अनुल्वण a. 1 Not excessive, neither more nor less (अनतिरिक्त, अन्यूनाधिक); smoothed, free from disturbing circumstances (?). -2 Not clear or manifest.

anuvaṃśaḥ	अनुवंशः [वंशमनुगतो वृत्तान्तः] 1 A genealogical table; तत्रानुवंशो रुद्रस्य तं निबोध युधिष्ठिर Mb.3.114.1. यत्रानुवंशं भगवान् जामदग्न्यस्तथा जगौ Mb. -2 Modern race or species; new family. -शम् ind. अत्रानुवंशं पठतः शृणु मे कुरुनन्दन Mb.3.129.8.

anuvaṃśya	अनुवंश्य a. [अनुवंशे भवः यत्] Relating to a genealogical table.

anuvakra	अनुवक्र a. [अनुक्रमेण वक्रः Very crooked; somewhat crooked or oblique; ˚ग moving somewhat obliquely or retrogressively (said of planets).

anuvac	अनुवच् 2 P. 1 To say or speak after or for one; येषां द्विजानां सावित्री नानूच्येत यथाविधि Ms.11.191. -2 To repeat, recite, reiterate; शतमनूच्यमायुष्कामस्य Ait. Br.; learn, study; परोवरं यज्ञो$नूच्यते Śat. Br.; वेदमनूच्या- चार्योन्तेवासिनमनुशास्ति Tait. Up.1.1. अरण्ये$नूच्यमान- त्वादारण्यकम् Sāy., see अनूचान below. -3 To concede the point, assent to, yield. -4 To name, call. -Caus. To cause to recite; to read to oneself (before reading aloud); oft. used in dramas; उभे नाम मुद्राक्षराण्यनुवाच्य परस्परमवलोकयतः Ś.1; अनुवाचय तावत् यद्यविरुद्धं श्रोष्यामि V.2; Mu.1; अनुवाचितलेखममात्यमवलोक्य M.1.

anuvaktṛ	अनुवक्तृ m. Repeating, reciting (गुरुमुखोच्चारितानुरूपपाठक); replying &c.

anuvacanam	अनुवचनम् 1 Repetition, recitation; teaching, instruction, lecture, वेदानुवचनं यज्ञो ब्रह्मचर्यं तपो दमः । श्रद्धोपवासः स्वातन्त्र्यमात्मनो ज्ञानहेतवः ॥ Y.3.19. तमेतं वेदानुवचनेन ब्राह्मणा विविदिषन्ति Bṛi. Up.4.4.22. -2 A chapter, section, lesson, division. -3 Repetition of Mantras or texts in conformity with प्रैष or injunction said by other priests.

anuvākaḥ	अनुवाकः [अनूच्यते इति, वच् घञ् कुत्वम् P.II.4.29 Vārt.] 1 Repeating, reciting reading. अनुवाकहताबुद्धिः Mb.5.132.6. -2 A subdivision of the Vedas, section, chapter; जेतुं जैत्रानथ खलु जपन्सूक्तसामानुवाकान् Mv.3.23. -3 Chapter or section referring to a compilation from the Ṛigveda or Yajurveda (ऋग्यजुःसमूह). -4 A statement in the ब्राह्मणs illustrating the mantrās; यं वाकेष्वनुवाकेषु निषत्सूपनिषत्सु च Mb.12.47.26. -Comp. -अनुक्रमणी N. of a table of contents, referring to the Ṛigveda, attributed to Śaunaka. -सङ्ख्या the fourth of the eighteen Pariśiṣṭas of the Yajurveda.

anuvākyā	अनुवाक्या [वच्-ण्यत्-कुत्वम्] A verse recited by the Hotṛi priest, in which the god is invoked to accept the offering prepared for him, or a sort of priest; वाक्यलक्षणविदो$नुवाक्यया Śi.14.2 (प्रशास्तृपाठ्या तदभावे हातृपाठ्या देवताह्वानी ऋक् Malli.).

anuvāc	अनुवाच् f. [वच्-णिच्-क्विप्] Repetition, recitation &c. See अनुवचनम्. -m. A lecture.

anuvācanam	अनुवाचनम् 1 Recitation of passages of the Ṛigveda by the Hotṛi priest in obedience to the injunction (प्रैष) of the अध्वर्यु priest. -2 Causing to recite, teaching, instructing. -3 Reading to oneself; see above.

anuvatsaraḥ	अनुवत्सरः [अनुकूलो वत्सरो दानादिविशेषाय] 1 A year. -2 The 4th year in the 5 years' cycle; or the 5th of 5 cycles of 12 years in the Bṛihaspati cycle. वायुमेव तदनु- वत्सरमाप्नोति T. Br.1.4.1.

anuvad	अनुवद् 1 P. 1 To imitate in speaking, mock (with acc.); गिरं नः...अनुवदति शुकस्ते मञ्जुवाक् पञ्जरस्थः R.5.74 repeat; उक्तमनुवदति Sk.; (P. & A.) to resound, echo; अनुवदति वीणा P.I.3.49 Sk. अनुवदते कठः कलापस्य ibid.; सभा- भित्तिप्रतिध्वानैर्भयादन्ववदन्निब Śi.2.67 echoed and approved also; घोषस्यान्ववदिष्टेव लङ्का पूतक्रतोः पुरः Bk.8.29. -2 To repeat or say again by way of explanation, illustration or corroboration; see Kull. on Ms.1.74;2.6. -3 To repeat, tell, say (generally); निजमनोरथमनुबदन्त्या Dk.21. -4 To abuse, rail at. -Caus. To cause to resound or echo.

anuvādaḥ	अनुवादः 1 Repetition (in general); गुण˚ K.26. -2 Repetition by way of explanation, illustration or corroboration; अनुवादे चरणानाम् P.II.4.3. (सिद्धस्योपन्यासे Sk.) -3 Explanatory repetition or reference to what is already mentioned, such as paraphrase or free translation; particularly, any portion of the Brāhmaṇas which comments on, illustrates, or explains a Vidhi or direction previously laid down and which does not itself lay down any directions; a supplementary repetition, opp. to विधि 'authoritative or direct injunction'; विधिविहितस्य अनुवचनमनुवादः । नानुवादपुनरुक्तयोः विशेषः शब्दाभ्या- सोपपत्तेः Nyāya sūtra; cf. also विध्यनुवादयोर्विधिर्ज्यायान्, अपू- र्वार्थप्रकल्पत्वादिति ŚB. on MS.1.6.3. It is of 3 kinds:- भूतार्थ˚ (सदेव सौम्येदमग्र आसीत्); स्तुत्यर्थ˚ (वायुर्वै क्षेपिष्ठा देवता) and गुण˚ (अग्निहोत्रं जुहोति इत्युक्ते दध्ना जुहोति इति गुणविधानात्); see अर्थवाद also. -4 Corroboration, confirmation. -5 Slander, abuse, reviling. -6 Advertisement, notice; report, rumour. -7 Commencement of speech (वाचारम्भणमात्रम्).

anuvādaka	अनुवादक वादिन् a. 1 Explanatory, corroborative, repeating with comment, explanation or illustration; आरम्भश्च साहसानुवादी Dk.95 bespeaks. -2 Conformable to, in harmony with, like; युक्तगीतानुवादिना Rām.; तदनु- वादिगुणः कुसुमोद्गमः R.9.33. -न् m. N. of any one of the three notes of the gamut.

anuvādya	अनुवाद्य pot. p. 1 To be explained or illustrated. -2 (In gram.) To be made the subject of an assertion (in a sentence), opposed to विधेय which affirms or denies something about the subject. In a sentence the अनुवाद्य or subject which is supposed to be already known is repeated to mark its connection with the विधेय or predicate and should be placed first; अनुवाद्यमनुक्त्वैव न विधेयमुदीरयेत्; in वृद्धिरादैच्, P.I.1.1 आदैच् should have been placed first, though the construction is defended by Patañjali. अनुवर्तन anuvartana वर्तिन् vartin अनुवर्तन वर्तिन् &c. see अनुवृत्.

anuvartman	अनुवर्त्मन् m. A follower.

anuvaśa	अनुवश a. [वशमनुगतः] Subject to the will of another, obedient. -शः Subjection, obedience (to the will of another). भरतानुवशात्सो$पि शत्रुघ्नस्तत्समं गतः Rām.2.8.29.

anuvas	अनुवस् To clothe, cover; सोमस्त्वा राजा अमृतेनानु बस्ताम् Rv.6.75.18.

anuvas	अनुवस् 1 P. To dwell near to or along with (with acc.).

anuvāsin	अनुवासिन् a. One who dwells near; resident.

anuvasita	अनुवसित a. [वस्-क्त] 1 Dressed, clothed, wrapped up. -2 Fastened, or bound to, attached to.

anuvahaḥ	अनुवहः One of the 7 tongues of fire.

anuvātaḥ	अनुवातः [अनुगतो वातः] The windward direction; the wind which blows from the pupil to the preceptor &c.; प्रतिवाते$नुवाते च नासीत गुरुणा सह Ms.2.23.

anuvāram	अनुवारम् ind. Time after time, repeatedly, frequently.

anuvās	अनुवास् 1 P. 1 To scent, perfume. -2 To use the oily enema (see the next word); treat by using such enema; अवश्यं स्थापनीयाश्च नानुवास्याः कथञ्चन Suśr.

anuvāsaḥ	अनुवासः सनम् 1 Perfuming or scenting (in general) with incense &c. -2 Perfuming clothes by dipping the ends. -3 (˚नः also) A syringe, clyster-pipe (Mar. पिचकारी); an oily enema or the operation itself; असाध्यता विकाराणां स्यादेषामनुवासनात् Suśr.; द्विधा बस्तिः परिज्ञेयो निरूहश्चानुवासनम् । कषायाद्यैर्निरूहः स्यात् स्नेहाद्यैरनुबासनम् ॥ (अनुवसति अनुवासरं वा दीयते अनुवसन्नपि न दुष्यति अनुदिवसं वा दीयते इति अनुवासनः)

anuvāsita	अनुवासित a. 1 Fumigated, perfumed. -2 Administered as an enama; treated by this operation.

anuvid	अनुविद् 6 U. 1 To find, discover, see, obtain. -2 To deem, consider. -3 To marry.

anuvitta	अनुवित्त a. Found, obtained; यस्यानुवित्तः प्रतिबुद्ध आत्मा$स्मि सन्देह्ये गहने प्रविष्टः Bri. Up.4.4.13. अयं पन्था अनुवित्तः पुराणः Ait. Br.

anuvittiḥ	अनुवित्तिः f. Finding, obtaining.

anuvidha	अनुविध a. One who imitates, a devotee दृतय इव श्वसन्त्यसुभृतां यदि ते$नुविधा Bhāg.1.87.17.

anuviddha	अनुविद्ध See under अनुव्यध्.

anuvidhā	अनुविधा 3 U. 1 To lay down a rule, regulate. -2 To obey, act up to, follow, conform to; See अनुविधा- यिन्; पदमनुविधेयं च महताम् Bh.2.28 the foot-steps of the great have to be trodden in. -3 To resemble, imitate. -pass. To be trained to follow rules; obey.

anuvidhānam	अनुविधानम् 1 Obedience. -2 Acting in conformity to (orders &c.).

anuvidhāyin	अनुविधायिन् a. 1 Obedient, submissive, complaint, conforming to orders; सा स्त्री या$नुविधायिनी H.2.13; भवितव्यानुविधायीनीन्द्रियाणि V.3. -2 Resembling; निजवधूश्व- सितानुविधायिनि Śi.6.23.15.96.

anuvihita	अनुविहित a. Obedient; तस्यानुविहितो$नाथा Bhāg.1.9.17.

anuvinaś	अनुविनश् 4 P. To disappear, vanish or perish after or along with another. विज्ञानघन एव एतेभ्यो भूतेभ्यः समुत्थाय, तान्येवानुविनश्यति Bri. Ā.2.4.12.

anuvināśaḥ	अनुविनाशः Perishing after.

anuviś	अनुविश् 6 P. To enter or go after, follow.

anuveśaḥ	अनुवेशः शनम् 1 Following, entering after. -2 Marriage of a younger brother before the elder is married; (ज्येष्ठातिक्रमेण कनिष्ठस्य विवाहः); यवीयसो$नुवेशो हि ज्येष्ठस्य विधिलोपकः Mb.

anuveśya	अनुवेश्य a. [अनुक्रमेण वेशमर्हति, यत्] A next-door neighbour.

anuviśvaḥ	अनुविश्वः (pl.) N. of a people in the north-east. Bṛi. S.

anuviṣayaḥ	अनुविषयः Taste; अपश्यन्तो$नुविषयं भुत्र्जते विघसाशिनः Mb.12.287.4.

anuviṣṭambhaḥ	अनुविष्टम्भः Being obstructed in consequence of.

anuvṛt	अनुवृत् 1 A. (sometimes P. also) 1 (Transitively used) (a) To go or roll after, follow, pursue; (fig.) to follow, conform to, act according to, obey, adapt oneself to, be guided by; humour; अहं तावत्स्वामिनश्चि- त्तवृत्तिमनुवर्तिष्ये S.2; ते$पि परिचयमनुवर्तन्ते K.289; किमत्र चित्रं यदि विशाखे शशाङ्कलेखामनुवर्तेते Ś.3 approve of her choice; लौकिकानां हि साधूनामर्थं वागनुवर्तते U.1.1 words conform to the sense; न कुलक्रममनुवर्तते K.14 follow; मधु द्विरेफः कुसुमैकपात्रे पपौ प्रियां स्वामनुवर्तमानः Ku.3.36 followed his mate in drinking, drank after her; (जननीम्) अत्यन्तशुद्ध- हृदयामनुवर्तमानाम् Bh.2.11; मम वर्त्मानुवर्तन्ते मनुष्याः पार्थ सर्वशः Bg.3.23; Dk.8,96,126; कृतज्ञतामनुवर्तमानेन Mu. 3 following the path of gratitude; प्रभुचित्तमेव हि जनो$- नुवर्तते Śi.15.41; Māl.3.2. (b) To imitate, resemble; equal; ते$न्ववर्तन् पितॄन्सर्वे यशसा च बलेन च Mb. (c) To gratify, humour, please; Dk.65. (d) To serve, worship; पञ्चवर्षसहस्राणि सूर्यं चैवान्ववर्तत Rām.7.1.8. -2 (Intransitively used) (a) To follow, come after; संग्राह्य इत्यनुवर्तते H.3. (b) To continue, endure. (c) To act towards, behave. (d) (In gram.) To be repeated or supplied from a preceding rule, Sūtra or assertion (said of a word or rule which continues to exercise influence on what follows); e. g. in भक्तिः P.IV.3.95; सो$स्य (occurring in Sūtra 89 before) इत्यनुवर्तते Sk. -Caus. 1 To cause to revolve, turn round; एवं प्रवर्तितं चक्रं नानुवर्त- यतीह यः Bg.3.16. -2 To act up to, follow, obey; तथापि लोकयात्रानुवर्तनीया Mv.7; पुत्रैः पितरो लोकद्वयेप्यनुवर्तनीयाः Ve. 3; K.367. -3 To favour, oblige; comply with one's request; विधिनापि भवतेव वयमनुवर्तिताः K.73; यथाचित्तमनु- वर्तनीयः Māl.7. -4 To put in, carry out. -5 To repeat or supply from a preceding Sūtra; केचित्तु विजायते इति नानुवर्तयन्ति P.V.2.13. Sk. -6 To use, employ. -7 To lead one to, attach to. -8 To speak in favour of, speak for; to approve. -9 to imitate, do after one; सतां चरि- तान्यनुवर्तितानि नेन्द्रियाणि K.298.

anuvartanam	अनुवर्तनम् 1 Following (fig. also); attending, compliance, obedience, conformity; प्रकृतस्यानुवर्तने Ak.; इदमाश्चर्यमथवा लोकस्थित्यनुवर्तनम् Mv.7.4; दाक्षिण्य˚ Dk.161. -2 Gratifying, obliging. -3 Approval of, concurrence in. -4 Continuance; result, consequence. -5 Supplying from a preceding Sūtra.

anuvartin	अनुवर्तिन् a. 1 Following, obeying, conforming to, with acc. or in comp.; कश्च लक्ष्मणमुक्तानां रामकोपानुवर्तिनाम् । शराणामग्रतः स्थातुं शक्तो देवासुरेष्वपि ॥ Rām.5.51.19. राक्षसा- श्चापि गृह्यन्ते नित्यं छन्दानुवर्तिभिः Pt.1.69; नराधिपा नीचजनानु- वर्तिनः 1.383. -2 Guided by, following the advice of; obedient, faithful, compliant; अनुवर्तिनि कलत्रे Pt.1.11, भृत्यानामनुवर्तिनाम् 298. -3 Like, resembling, worthy.

anuvartman	अनुवर्त्मन् a. [अनुगतो वर्त्म] Following, attending.

anuvṛtta	अनुवृत्त p. p. 1 Obeying, following &c. स मेरुमनुवृत्तः स पुनर्गच्छति पाण्डव Mb.3.163.31. -2 Uninterrupted, continuously kept up, continued; अनुवृत्तस्त्वया भगीरथगृहे प्रसादः U.7. -3 Rounded off; taperingly round (क्रमशः वर्तुला- कार); सुपत्रमनुवृत्ताङ्गं सुपर्वाणं सुसंस्थितम् Rām.6.9.65. दीर्घानुवृत्तपीनबाहुना K.179. -4 Supplied from a preceding rule &c. -5 Confirming to the character (शीलानुगत). -त्तम् Obedience, conformity, compliance; मूर्खं छन्दो$- नुवृत्तेन (गृह्णीयात्) Chāṇ.33.

anuvṛttiḥ	अनुवृत्तिः f. 1 Assenting to, approval; तवानुवृत्तिं न च कर्तुमुत्सहे Ku.5.65. -2 Obedience, conformity, following, continuance in (opp. व्यावृत्ति); taking up; continuity; ज्येष्ठानुवृत्तिजटिलम् R.13.78 by following the example of; अनुवृत्त्या प्रमार्ष्टुमागतः Dk.1 service; cf. also वाचानुवृत्तिः खलु अतिथिसत्कारः Pratimā 5. ततान वह्निः पवनानुवृत्त्या Ki.16.52 in consequence of. -3 Acting according or suitably to, compliance, acquiescence; gratifying, pleasing; कान्ता˚ - चातुर्यमपि शिक्षितं वत्सेन U.3; Māl.9; Śi.9.58; K.265; M.2.9; राज्यं हि नाम राजधर्म˚ परस्य नृपतेर्महदप्रीतिस्थानम् Mu.3 who conforms to or is true to the duties of kings; (previous) compliant or obedient spirit, previous course of conduct; U.7.5. -4 Rememberance आसेदुषां गोत्रभिदो$- नुवृत्त्या Ki.18.18. -5 (Gram.) Being supplied or repeated in a following rule; continued influence of a preceding on a following rule. -6 Imitating, resembling &c. -7 Repetition; वर्णानामनुवृत्तिरनुप्रासः.

anuvṛddhi	अनुवृद्धि a. Ved. Increasing in regular ratio.

anuvelam	अनुवेलम् ind. Ever and anon, constantly; इति स्म पृच्छत्यनुवेलमादृतः R.3.5; Śi.3.79.

anuvellita	अनुवेल्लित a. [वेल्ल्-क्तम्] Bent in conformity with; bent under. -तम् Securing with bandages, bandaging, a sort of bandage (वृणलेपनबन्धभेदः) one of the 14 kinds mentioned by Suśruta.

anuvya	अनुव्य a. [अनुव्ययति अनुगच्छति व्ये-क] Following (अनुगत); ˚व्यमिवासुः Kāty. (न्यग्भूमिं प्राप्ता इव).

anuvyañjanam	अनुव्यञ्जनम् A secondary token.

anuvyadh	अनुव्यध् 4 P. 1 To hit or pierce again; विद्धमनुविध्यतः Ms.9.43. -2 To wound, pierce; कामशरानुविद्धः &c. -3 To fill or mix with, blend with, see अनुविद्ध below. -4 To impel, urge.

anuviddha	अनुविद्ध p. p. 1 Pierced, bored; कीटानुविद्धरत्नादि- साधारण्येन काव्यता S. D. -2 Overspread, intertwined; surrounded, full of; pervaded by, replete or filled with, abounding in, mixed or blended with, intermixed; सरसिजमनुविद्धं शैवलेनापि रम्यम् Ś.1.2; क्वचित्प्रभालेपिभिरिन्द्र- नीलैर्मुक्तामयी यष्टिरिवानुविद्धा R.13.54 interwoven with emeralds; 16.48,6.18; अलके बालकुन्दानुविद्धम् Me.67; सौरभ्य˚ Mk.1; कोपानुविद्धां चिन्तां नाटयन् Mu.3.; Ku.3.35; पाण्डुतानुविद्धेव देहच्छविः Dk.112;137; Māl.1. -3 Connected with, relating to; adhering to; देशवार्तानुविद्धा संकथा Dk.117,124; उद्गूर्णलोष्टलगुडैः परितो$नुविद्धम् Śi.5.25 chased, closely followed or pursued. -4 Set, inlaid; variegated; रत्नानुविद्धार्णवमेखलाया दिशः सपत्नी भव दक्षिणस्याः R.6.63,14; Śi.4.49.

anuvedhaḥ	अनुवेधः व्याधः 1 Hurting, piercing, perforating; न हि कीटानुवेधादयो रत्नस्य रत्नत्वं व्याहन्तुमीशाः S. D.1. -2 Contact, union; मुखामोदं मदिरया कृतानुव्याधमुद्वमन् Śi.2.2. -3 Blending, mixture; fusion. -4 Obstructing.

anuvyavasāyaḥ	अनुव्यवसायः (In Nyāya) Consciousness of the perception; (in Vedānta Phil.) perception of a sentiment or judgment.

anuvyākhyānam	अनुव्याख्यानम् [अनुरूपं व्याख्यानम्] That which comments on and explains Mantras, Sūtras &c. (मन्त्रविवरणम्); especially, that portion of a Brāhmaṇa which explains difficult Sūtras, texts &c. occurring in another place. (मन्त्रादीनामनुरूपार्थप्रकाशकं व्याख्यानम्). अनुव्याहरणम् anuvyāharaṇam व्याहारः vyāhārḥ अनुव्याहरणम् व्याहारः 1 Repetition, repeated utterance; mentioning, along with something else. -2 A curse, imprecation.

anuvyāhārin	अनुव्याहारिन् a. Cursing; execrating.

anuvraj	अनुव्रज् 1 P. 1 To follow, go after; तां व्रजन्तीमनुवव्राज K.132,21; attend especially a departing guest (as far as the bank of water, lake, &c.) as a mark of respect; अतिथिं श्रोत्रियं तृप्तमासीमान्तमनुव्रजेत् Y.1.113; तं मातरो देवमनुव्रजन्त्यः Ku.7.38; यमिच्छेत्पुनरायान्तं नैनं दूरमनु- व्रजेत् Rām.2.4.5. -2 To visit in order, seek. -3 To go to or near; betake oneself to; मृगा मृगैः सङ्गमनुव्रजन्ति Pt. 1.282. deer herd or associate with deer. -4 To obey, to do homage to. अनुव्रजनम् anuvrajanam व्रज्या vrajyā अनुव्रजनम् व्रज्या Following, going after, especially a departing guest; आसनावसथौ शय्यामनुव्रज्यामुपासनाम् Ms.3.17.

anuvrājya	अनुव्राज्य pot. p. To be followed as by the relatives of a dead person to the cemetery.

anuvrata	अनुव्रत a. [अनुकूलं व्रत कर्म यस्य] 1 Devoted or faithful to, राजानो राजपुत्राश्च धृतराष्ट्रमनुव्रताः Mb.3.35.3. attached to (with acc. or gen.); अभ्यगच्छददीनात्मा दमयन्तीमनुव्रतः Mb. 3.54.27. प्रियतमा का अनुव्रता Bh.2.13; वैश्याः क्षत्रमनुव्रताः Rām. -2 Duly performing the vows or duties prescribed (opp. अपव्रत) Bhāg.8.15.35. -तः A class of Jaina ascetics. -ता A devoted virtuous wife (पतिव्रता); रक्ते भटे रणमुखे रुधिरेण तस्मिन् रक्ता भवत्यमरयोषिदनुव्रतेन; विश्व- गुणादर्शचम्पू 379.

anuśatika	अनुशतिक a. Accompanied with, or bought for, a hundred; तथाविधोनुशतिकः शतानीकस्य साधकः । जानाति युद्धसंभारं कार्ययोग्यं च सैनिकम् Śukra.2.43. ˚आदिः a class of words or गण mentioned in P.VII.3.2, where both members undergo Vṛiddhi. अनुशतिकादीनां च.

anuśaya	अनुशय शयिन् &c. See under अनुशी

anuśaraḥ	अनुशरः [अनु-शृणाति. शॄ-अच्] A sort of evil-spirit, Rāksasa.

anuśastram	अनुशस्त्रम् [अनुगतं शस्त्रं शस्त्रार्थे प्रयुक्तम्] Anything used (for the time being) instead of a regular instrument, such as a finger-nail; a secondary weapon or instrument.

anuśālā	अनुशाला An ante-chamber, a special kind of hall; अनुशाला च मध्ये च चैकभागेन भद्रकम् Māna.26.19.

anuśās	अनुशास् 2 P. 1 (a) To advise, persuade, prevail upon, address; इति ध्रुवेच्छामनुशासती सुतां शशाक मेना न नियन्तुमुद्यमात् Ku.5.5; पूर्वानुशिष्टां निजगाद भोज्याम् R.6.59. (b) To direct, tell, order, enjoin, to teach, instruct (how to act); दशरथप्रभवानुशिष्टः R.13.75; वत्से त्वमधुना$नुशासनी- यासि Ś.4; राजपत्नीनियोगस्थमनुशाधि पुरीजनम् Bk.2.17; को नु खलु मामेवमनुशास्ति V.4 tells, directs; मघवा वनगमनाय कृतबुद्धिं भवन्तमनुशास्ति V.5 tells, directs; माणवकं धर्ममनुशा- स्ति Sk.; Ms.6.86. -2 To rule, govern. -3 To chastise, punish, correct; इयमेव तावत्प्रथममनुशासनीया Ve.2; अरिकुल- मनुशासनीयम् 3; स्वकर्म ख्यापयन्ब्रूयान्मां भवाननुशास्त्विति Ms.11. 99,9.233. -4 To praise, extol. -5 To accomplish, perform, execute. अनुशासक, -शासिन्, _x001F_6-शास्तृ or शासितृ a. One who directs, instructs, governs or punishes; कवि पुराणमनु- शासितारम् Bg.8.9 ruler; एष चोरानुशासी राजेति भया- दुत्पतितः

anuśāsanam	अनुशासनम् Advice, persuasion, direction, order. command; instruction, laying down rules or precepts; a law, rule, precept; treatment (of a subject), (with the object in comp. or with gen., the agent, if expressed, being put in the instr. or gen.); एतद्वै भद्रमनुशासनस्य Rv.1.32.7. एतदनुशासनम् Tait. Up.7.9.7. भवत्यधिक्षेप इवानुशासनम् Ki.1.28 words of advice; तन्मनोरनुशासनम् Ms.8.139;6.5;2.159; यौवन˚ K.146; नामलिङ्ग˚ laying down rules on the gender of nouns, explanation of gender &c.; शब्दानुशासनम् Sk.; शब्दानामनुशासनमाचार्यस्य आचार्येण वा P.II.3.66 Sk. -Comp. -पर a. obedient. -पर्वन् N. of the 13th book of the Mahābhārata (so called because it lays down precepts of advice).

anuśāstiḥ	अनुशास्तिः f. Advice.

anuśiṣṭa	अनुशिष्ट a. 1 educated; स प्रैति क्षेत्रविदानुशिष्टः Rv.1. 32.7. Bhāg.5.9.4; तस्मात् पुत्रमनुशिष्टं लोक्यमाहुः Bṛ. Up. 1.5.17. -2 questioned इति तेनानुशिष्टस्तु वाचं मन्दमुदीरयत् Rām.6.3.4. -3 Directed; एष धर्मानुशिष्टो वो यतीनां नियतात्मनाम् Ms.7.86,9.233.

anuśiṣṭiḥ	अनुशिष्टिः f. Instruction, teaching; order, command.

anuśikṣin	अनुशिक्षिन् a. Practising, learning.

anuśiśuḥ	अनुशिशुः f. [अनुगता शिशुना] An animal followed by its young one.

anuśī	अनुशी 2 A. 1 To lie or sleep with, sleep along with; lie upon, close or along; lay oneself down; to adhere to or follow closely, cling or stick to; शयानं चानुशेते हि तिष्ठन्तमनुतिष्ठति । अनुधावति धावन्तं कर्म पूर्वकृतं नरम् ॥ Subhāṣita. -2 To repent, grieve for; दत्तमिष्टमपि नान्वशेत सः Śi.14.45; पुरानुशेते तव चञ्चलं मनः Ki.8.8.

anuśayaḥ	अनुशयः [शी-अच्] 1 Repentance, remorse; regret, sorrow; नन्वनुशयस्थानमेतत् Māl.8; कुतस्ते$नुशयः M.3 why should you be sorry; बाष्पं प्रमृज्य विगतानुशयो भवेयम् Ś.7.25; इतो गतस्यानुशयो मा भूदिति V.4; ततः सपत्नापनयस्मरणानुशयस्फुरा Śi.2.14. -2 Intense enmity or anger; शिशुपालो$नुशयं परं गतः Śi.16.2; यस्मिन्नमुक्तानुशया सदैव जागर्ति भुजङ्गी Māl. 6.1. -3 Hatred. -4 Close connection, as with a consequence; close attachment (to any object). अयं त्वन्यो गुणः श्रेष्ठश्च्युतानां स्वर्गतो मुने । शुभानुशययोगेन मनुष्येषूपजायते ॥ Mh.3.261.33. -5 (In Vedānta Phil.) The result or consequence of bad deeds which very closely clings to them and makes the soul enter other bodies after enjoying temporary freedom from recurring births; (स्वर्गार्थकर्मणो भुक्तफलस्य अवशेषः कश्चिदनुशयो नाम भाण्डानुसारि- स्नेहवत्, यथा हि स्नेहभाण्ड विरिच्यमानं सर्वात्मना न विरिच्यते भाण्डा- नुसार्येव कश्चित् स्नेहशेषो$वतिष्ठते तथानुशयो$पि Tv.). -6 Regret in the case of purchases, technically called rescission; क्रीत्वा विक्रीय वा किञ्चिद्यस्येहानुशयो भवेत् Ms. 8.222; see क्रीतानुशय. cf. ......अनुशयो द्वेषे पश्चात्तापानुबन्धयोः and...... अनुशयो दीर्घद्वेषानुतापयोः Nm. -यी A disease of the feet, a sort of boil or abscess on the upper part.

anuśayāna	अनुशयान a. Regretting &c. -ना A variety of heroine (परकीयनायिकाभेदः); one who is sad and dejected, being apprehensive of the loss of her lover (इष्ठहानि- जनितानुतापवती).

anuśayin	अनुशयिन् a. 1 Devotedly attached to, faithful. -2 Repentant, penitent, regretful, sorry. -3 Hating intensely. -4 Connected as with a consequence. -5 Enjoying the fruits of deeds; epithet of the soul.

anuśāyin	अनुशायिन् a. Lying or extending along. m. Life; यश्चानुशायिनां स्वर्गः पाखण़्डस्य च संभवः Bhāg.2.8.22. See अनुशयिन्.

anuśītam	अनुशीतम् ind. In cold.

anuśīlanam	अनुशीलनम् Intent of assiduous application, constant pursuit or exercise, constant or repeated practice or study; विज्ञातसाराण्यनुशीलनेन Ki.16.28.

anuśīlita	अनुशीलित a. Assiduously practised, repeatedly done, carefully attended to or studied.

anuśuc	अनुशुच् 1 P. To bewail, mourn over, regret; गतासूनगतासूंश्च नानुशोचन्ति पण्डिताः Bg.2.11. कथं तमेव चौरहतकमनुशोचसि Mk.3; नष्टं मृतमतिक्रान्तं नानुशोचन्ति पण्डिताः Pt. 1.333; शैशवं ते स्मृत्वात्मानमनुशोचामि K.333; विराजमानौ शोके$पि तनयाननुशोचतम् Ve.5.4 condole with, weep with. -Caus. To mourn over, deplore, grieve for, regret; तृणमिव वने शून्ये त्यक्ता न वाप्यनुशोचिता U.3.32 nor was she (her loss) regretted.

anuśucikā	अनुशुचिका A ceremony enjoined by the Vedas (?).

anuśokaḥ	अनुशोकः शोचनम् Sorrow, repentance; regret; अनुशु(शो)चितम् in the same sense.

anuśocaka	अनुशोचक शोचिन् a. 1 Regretful, penitent. -2 Causing regret.

anuśru	अनुश्रु 5 P. 1 To hear (=श्रु) नानुशुश्रुम जात्वेतत् Ms. 9.1; तद्यथानुश्रूयते Pt.1 heard, related. -2 To hear repeatedly as from a sacred authority, hand down as by Vedic tradition.

anuśravaḥ	अनुश्रवः Vedic or sacred tradition.

anuśravika	अनुश्रविक a. Known from the Śāstras; (Pātañjala Yogadarśana 1.15)

anuślokam	अनुश्लोकम् [अनुश्लोक्यते गीयते, श्लोक्, कर्मणि अच्] A Kind of Sāma (महाव्रतगेयः सामभेदः)

anuṣañj	अनुषञ्ज् (˚सञ्ज्) 1 P. To adhere or cling to, follow closely. -pass. (-षज्यते) 1 To stick, cling, adhere to, be attached to (fig. also); धर्मपूते च मनसि नभसीव न जातु रजो$नुषज्यते Dk.43; sometimes occurring as अनुषज्जते (from सस्ज् also); यदा हि नेन्द्रियार्थेषु न कर्मस्वनुषज्जते Bg. 6.4;18.1, -2 To be supplied from a preceding rule or statement. -Caus. 1 To fasten or attach (something) to. -2 To supply (as an elliptical expression); इति पदमत्रानुषञ्जनीयम्.

anuṣak	अनुषक् ट् adv. In continuous or close order, one after another.

anuṣakta	अनुषक्त p. p. 1 Connected with, closely related or attached to; नित्य˚क्तः प्रकृतिकोपः Mv.2 constant, everarising. -2 Clinging or adhering to (actively used); मृत्युर्जरा च व्याधिश्च दुःखं चानेककारणम् । अनुषक्तं सदा देहे Mb.; हृदि नित्यानुषक्तेन सीताशोकेन तप्यते U.4.2 constantly preying on the heart; ˚मन्दाकिनीपवित्रमेखलम् Mv.4.

anuṣaṅgaḥ	अनुषङ्गः 1 Close adherence or attendance; connection, conjunction, association; तस्य वैरानुषङ्गस्य गन्ता$स्म्यन्तं सुदुर्गमम् Mb.5.162.35. सानुषङ्गाणि कल्याणानि U.7. good things closely follow one another (come close upon one another). -2 Coalition, commixture. -3 Connection of word with word. -4 A word or words repeated from the context to supply an ellipsis. cf. अनुषङ्गश्च फलवचनमभविष्यत् ŚB. on MS.6.1.5. -5 Necessary consequence, inevitable result. -6 Connection of a subsequent with a previous act. -7 Incidental mention or relation (प्रसङ्ग). -8 Yearning, eager longing. -9 Compassion, pity, tenderness. -1 (In Nyāya) Connecting together the उपनय or application and निगमन or conclusion by the use of the pronoun इदं (उपनयवाक्य- स्थस्य अयमिति पदस्य निगमनवाक्ये आकर्षणम्). -11 The nasals connected with certain roots ending in consonants; P. VII.1.59. Sk. -12 An ellipsis. A mode of interpreting an incomplete sentence by supplying the required word or words from the immediate context. This mode is admissible only if there is no break (व्यवाय). This corresponds to the principle known as अनुवृत्ति (in grammar) on which a word or expression from a preceding सूत्र is read in the succeeding सूत्र or सूत्रs. नानुषङ्गः प्राप्नुयात् । कुतः । व्यवायात् । ŚB. on. MS.4.4.7.

anuṣaṅgika	अनुषङ्गिक a. Following as a necessary result, consequent; concomitant, adhering to, connected with.

anuṣaṅgin	अनुषङ्गिन् a. 1 Connected with, adhering or sticking to; अनीकजे रजसि मुखानुषङ्गिणि Śi.17.57. -2 Following as a necessary consequence; यस्यानुषङ्गिण इमे भोगादयो भवन्ति Bh.3.76. -3 Related or applicable to, common, prevailing (अनुक्षणं प्रसक्त); सप्तकस्यास्य वर्गस्य सर्वत्रैवानुषङ्गिणः Ms.7.52; विभुतानुषङ्गि भयमेति जनः Ki.6.35 connected with, natural to, greatness. -4 Addicted to, devoted or attached to, fond of.

anuṣañjanam	अनुषञ्जनम् Concord, grammatical connection or agreement.

anuṣatya	अनुषत्य a. Being conformable to truth; हविष्मन्तो अनुषत्यं स्वर्विदम् Rv.3.26.1.

anuṣekaḥ	अनुषेकः सेचनम् Rewatering, sprinkling over again.

anuṣṭutiḥ	अनुष्टुतिः f. Praise (in due order).

anuṣṭubh	अनुष्टुभ् 1 P. (˚स्तुभ्) To praise after, follow in praising.

anuṣṭubh	अनुष्टुभ् f. [अनु निरन्तरम् स्तुभ्यते$नया अनुष्टुप् वाक्] 1 Following in praise; speech. -2 Sarasvatī. -3 N. of a class of metres consisting of four Pādas of 8 syllables each, the whole stanza consisting of 32 syllables (so called because it follows with its praise i. e. अनुष्टोभति the Gāyatrī, which has 3 Pādas), अनुष्टोभनादनुष्टुप्. In later metrical systems it stands as a general name for all metres which have 8 syllables in each foot (the highest possible number being computed to be 256); पञ्चमं लघु सर्वत्र सप्तमं द्विचतुर्थयोः । गुरु षष्ठं च पादानां शेषेष्वनियमो मतः ॥ which rule is sometimes violated. अनुष्टुभा सोम उक्थै- र्महस्वान् Rv.1.13.4.

anuṣṭhā	अनुष्ठा 1 U. (˚स्था) 1 To do, perform or carry out, execute, attend to (order, duty &c.); bring about, effect, accomplish (business); अनुतिष्ठसि धर्मेण ये चान्ये विदितास्त्वया Mb.3.267.11. विवाहदीक्षाविधिमन्वतिष्ठत् Ku.7. 1,1.17; किमनुतिष्ठति भगवान् मारीचः Ś.7; आज्ञापयतु आर्यः को नियोगो$नुष्ठीयतामिति Ś.1; ये मे मतमिदं नित्यमनुतिष्ठन्ति मानवाः Bg.3.31 follow; गुरोर्वचनमनुतिष्ठ V.5 do as your papa orders; अनुतिष्ठस्वात्मनो नियोगम् M.1 look or attend to your own duty, do your business. -2 To follow, practise, observe (धर्म, व्रत &c.); commit (a sin). -3 To rule, govern, superintend; appoint. -4 To stand by or near (with loc.); तिष्ठन्तीष्वनुतिष्ठेत्तु व्रजन्तीष्वप्यनुव्रजेत् Ms.11.112; sit on; occupy; अनुष्ठास्यति रामस्य सीता प्रकृतमासनम् Rām.; -5 To follow, go after (lit.); स्वकान्तामनुतिष्ठति Rām.; नारा- जके पतिं भार्या यथावदनुतिष्ठति Subhāṣ.; follow, obey. -6 To imitate, tread in. पदं चेहानुतिष्ठन्ति पूर्वेषां पूर्वजैः कृतम् Bhāg. -7 (Intrans.) (a) To place or put oneself on, be in a position, present oneself. (b) To remain, continue. (c) To be engaged in religious ceremonies (muttering prayers &c.); अनुतिष्ठतां ब्राह्मणानाम् M.5.

anuṣṭha	अनुष्ठ a. [स्था-क-षत्वम्] Standing after or in succession.

anuṣṭhā	अनुष्ठा a. Standing after, in succession; अभीमिन्द्रो नद्यो वव्रिणा हिता विश्वा अनुष्ठाः प्रवणेषु जिघ्नते Rv.1.54.1. अनुष्ठातृ anuṣṭhātṛ ष्ठायिन् ṣṭhāyin अनुष्ठातृ ष्ठायिन् a. Doing, performing, executing &c.; one who undertakes or begins.

anuṣṭhānam	अनुष्ठानम् 1 Doing, performance, practice, execution, accomplishment &c.; obeying, acting in conformity to; उपरुध्यते तपो$नुष्ठानम् Ś.4. practice of religious austerities; को$पि वधोपायश्चिन्त्यो यस्यानुष्ठानेन Pt.1; नानुष्ठानैर्विहीनाः स्युः कुलजा विधवा इव Pt.2.95; धर्मे स्वयमनुष्ठानं कस्यचित्तु महात्मनः H.1.99; शास्त्रानुष्ठानं वा Kau. A.1.6. -2 Commencing, undertaking, engaging in; यदि समुद्रेण सह वैरानुष्ठानं कार्यम् Pt.1. -3 Commencement or course of conduct, procedure, course of action; कथं न्याय्यमनुष्ठानं मादृशः प्रति- षेधतु U.5.21. -4 Practice of religious rites or ceremonies, any religious rite or ceremony; किंत्वनुष्ठाननित्यत्वं स्वातन्त्र्यमपकर्षति U.1.8; Mv.4.33. -नी Performance, doing &c. -Comp. -शरीरम् 'the body of action'; (according to the Sāṅkhya doctrine) the intermediate body between the सूक्ष्म or subtle and the स्थूल or gross body.

anuṣṭhāpaka	अनुष्ठापक a. Causing to perform.

anuṣṭhāpanam	अनुष्ठापनम् Causing to do an act.

anuṣṭhāyin	अनुष्ठायिन् a. Doing, performing.

anuṣṭhita	अनुष्ठित p. p. Done, performed, accomplished &c.; practised, followed, &c.; वीराश्च नियतोत्साहा राजशास्त्रमनुष्ठिताः Rām.1.7.12. विक्रियायै न कल्पन्ते संबन्धाः सदनुष्ठिताः Ku.6.29 brought about; तथानुष्ठिते that being done, thereupon; begun, undertaken; न युक्तं हि त्यक्तुं कार्यमनुष्ठितम् Rām. (used actively) following, practising; Ms.1.127.

anuṣṭhiḥ	अनुष्ठिः ष्ठुः f. [स्था-कु] Proper order, succession (used only in instr.); ˚ष्ठु, अनुष्ठया, अनुष्ठुया in proper order, duly, immediately, properly; immediate, direct. अनुष्ठेय anuṣṭhēya ष्ठातव्य ṣṭhātavya अनुष्ठेय ष्ठातव्य pot. p. To be effected, performed; followed, done conformably to; विदर्भगतमनुष्ठेयम् M.5 what to do with. कस्मिंश्चिदाप्तजनानुष्ठेये कर्मणि त्वां व्यापारयितु- मिच्छामि Mu.1.

anuṣṇa	अनुष्ण a. 1 Not hot, cold, chilly; अनुष्णैरानन्दाश्रुबिन्दुभिः R.12.62. -2 Apathetic; lazy, sluggish (अलस). -ष्णः Cold touch or sensation. -ष्णा N. of a stream. -ष्णम् A water-lily, blue lotus (उत्पल). -Comp. -अशीत a. Neither hot nor cold. -गुः (-गो ray) having cold rays, the moon, also camphor. -वल्लिका N. of a plant नीलदूर्वा.

anuṣvadha	अनुष्वध a. [स्वधामनु, स्वधया सहितः] Accompanied by food. -धम् adv. 1 Through or after food. -2 According to food; after every sacrifice. -3 Voluntarily, according to one's will.

anuṣyandaḥ	अनुष्यन्दः A hind wheel. Śat. Br.

anusaṃvaraṇam	अनुसंवरणम् Concealing in order or succession.

anusaṃcar	अनुसंचर् 1 P. 1 To walk alongside, follow, join. -2 To pursue, seek after. -3 To visit, go towards or to. -4 To penetrate, cross, traverse. -5 To become assimilated.

anusaṃcaraṇam	अनुसंचरणम् Following, pursuing. -adv. At every occasion of coming.

anusaṃtan	अनुसंतन् 8 U. 1 To extend everywhere; to diffuse, spread about, overspread. अधश्च मूलान्यनुसंततानि कर्मानु- बन्धीनि मनुष्यलोके Bg.15.2. -2 To continue, join in.

anusaṃtatiḥ	अनुसंततिः f. Continued succession, continuity; अनुसंततिपातिनः पटुताम् Śi.

anusaṃdhā	अनुसंधा 3 U. 1 To search into or after, look after, inquire into, investigate, explore, examine, ascertain; प्रसवयोग्यं स्थानमनुसंधीयताम् H.3; यस्तर्केणानुसंधत्ते स धर्मं वेद नेतरः Ms.12.16. -2 To calm, compose, quiet; आत्मानमनुसंधेहि शोकचर्चां च परिहर H.4. -3 To think of, aim at, refer or allude to, consider, deliberate; यथाकर्तव्यमनुसंधीयताम् H. 3; नैतदनुसंधाय मयोक्तम् Mv.6 after deliberation, or because I aimed at it; अलमनेनातीतोपालम्भेन प्रस्तुतमनुसंधी- यताम् H.3 let us consider what is before us, (turn to the matter in hand); अत्र...इति पुरावृत्तकथानु$संधेया Malli. on Ku.1.21 should be sought or referred to. -4 To plan, arrange; prepare, set in order; सारसत्वं दुर्गमनुसंधेहि, दुर्गशोधनमनुसंधातव्यम् H.3. -5 To follow, go after, attend, accompany; चरेण अनुसंधीयमानः Mu.6; कस्ते निर्बन्धः पदे पदे मामनुसंधातुम् Mk.1; एतौ तौ मामनुसंधत्तः Mk.2 are after me. -6 To take up, follow, continue; तच्छेपमात्मवचसा$प्य- नुसंदधानः K. 24 following, making up the unfinished portion &c.

anusaṃdhānam	अनुसंधानम् 1 Inquiry, investigation; close inspection or scrutiny, examination; Mv.7. -2 Aiming at. H. -3 Planning, arranging, getting ready &c.; दुर्गानुसंधाने को नियुज्यताम् H.3 equipping with the necessary materials. -4 A plan, scheme. -5 Suitable connection. -6 (In the Vaiś. Phil.) The 4th step in a syllogism, the उपनय or application. अनुसंधानिन् anusandhānin संधायिन् sandhāyin अनुसंधानिन् संधायिन् a. Investigating, looking after; skilful in concerting plans.

anusaṃhita	अनुसंहित p. p. Inquired into, investigated; connected with, in accordance or union with, conformable to; अहिंसा सर्वधर्मानुसंहिता Mb.; अर्थधर्मानुसंहितं वाक्यम् Rām. -तम् adv. In the Saṁhitā text; according to this text.

anusamāpanam	अनुसमापनम् Regular completion.

anusami	अनुसमि 2 P. (˚इ) 1 To go to or visit successively or in order. -2 To join in following or being guided by. -3 To join, become assimilated.

anusamayaḥ	अनुसमयः 1 Regular or proper connection, as of words. -2 Doing several details with reference to several things or persons. This can be done in more ways than one and hence we have three varieties of अनुसमय (a) पदार्थानुसमय i. e. doing one thing with reference to all, then doing the second in the same way and so on. (b) काण्डानुसमय i. e. doing the whole mass of details with reference to one thing first, then doing the same with the second and so on. This is also known as एकजातीयानुसमय. (c) समुदायानुसमय i. e. doing a group of details forming a composite whole (समुदाय) with reference to one, then doing it with reference to the second and so on. It may be noted that when several details are to be performed with reference to one thing or person, the details are in close proximity with the प्रधान and hence the problem of अङ्गप्रधानप्रत्यासत्ति does not arise in such cases. But when several things are to be performed with respect to several things or persons, this अङ्गप्रधानप्रत्यासत्ति can be achieved by following the पदार्थानुसमय, which, therefore, is to be preferred to the other two words. (This is known as the पदार्थानुसमयन्याय.) But when पदार्थानुसमय is found not practicable, the second mode i. e. the काण़्डानुसमय or एकजातीयानुसमय should be adopted, provided that among the details to be performed, there are none which together form a composite whole. (This is known as काण्डानुसमयन्याय.) If, however, there are among the details to be performed some details which form one or more composite wholes, they should be performed together with the first thing or person, then with the second, and so on. Thus in such cases the समुदायानुसमय should be adopted. (This is known as समुदायानुसमयन्याय.)

anusaṃbaddha	अनुसंबद्ध a. Connected with.

anusaṃsṛtiḥ	अनुसंसृतिः The cycle of births and deaths.

anusaṃsthā	अनुसंस्था 1 P. to follow.

anusaṃsthā	अनुसंस्था A widow burning herself on the pyre of her dead husband.

anusargaḥ	अनुसर्गः A separate creation.

anusavanam	अनुसवनम् (also अनुसवम्) ind. 1 After a sacrifice. -2 At every sacrifice, after ablutions. -3 Every moment. cf. Bhāg.1.15.28.

anusāma	अनुसाम a. [साम अनुगतः] Conciliated, friendly, favourable.

anusāmantaḥ	अनुसामन्तः An officer (?) in charge of a town; सामन्तादिसमा ये तु भृत्या अधिकृता भुवि । ते$नुसामन्तसंज्ञाः स्यू राज- भागहराः क्रमात् Śukra.188.

anusāyam	अनुसायम् ind. Every evening.

anusāryakam	अनुसार्यकम् A fragrant substance, sandal, aloe &c.

anusūcaka	अनुसूचक a. Indicative of, pointing out to.

anusūcanam	अनुसूचनम् Indication, pointing out.

anusṛ	अनुसृ 1 P. 1 To follow (in all senses); go after, attend, pursue; to practise, observe; betake oneself to; पूर्वोद्दिष्टामनुसर पुरीम् Me.3 go to; उदीचिं दिशं अनुसरेस्तिर्यगाया- मशोभी 59. -2 To go over or through. -Caus. 1 To lead forward; वायुरनुसारयतीव माम् Rām. -2 To cause to pursue, follow.

anusaraḥ	अनुसरः A follower, companion, attendant.

anusaraṇam	अनुसरणम् 1 following, pursuing, going after, seeking after; अनुसारभयाद्भीताः प्राङ्मुखाः प्राद्रवन्पुनः Mb.1.1.4. क्रन्दनानुसरणं क्रियताम् H.3; कनकसूत्र˚ प्रवृत्तै राजपुरुषैः Pt.1. -2 Conformity to, accordance with, consequence of (in instr. or abl.) इन्दोस्त्वदनुसरणक्लिष्टकान्तेः Me.86. Custom, usage, habit.

anusāraḥ	अनुसारः 1 Going after, following (fig. also); pursuit; व्याधानुसारचकिता हरिणीव यासि Mk.1.17; शब्दानु- सारेण अवलोक्य Ś.7 looking in the direction of the sound; कपटानुसारकुशलः Mk.9.5 following up or tracing fraud. -2 Conformity to, accordance with, suitability, conformity to usage; किरणानुसारगलितेन K.137, 194, 24; धर्मशास्त्रानुसारेण Y.2.1. -3 Custom, usage, established practice; अनुसारादधिका (वृद्धिः) Ms.8.152. -4 Received or established authority, especially of codes of law. -5 Nature, natural condition of anything. -6 Currency, prevalence. -7 Consequence, result. अनुसारतः anusāratḥ अनुसारेण anusārēṇa अनुसारतः अनुसारेण (in comp.) In accordance with, conformably to.

anusāraka	अनुसारक सारिन् a. Following, pursuing, going after, attendant on; तामभ्यगच्छद्रुदितानुसारी R.14.7; मृगानुसारिणं पिनाकिनम् Ś.1.6; परिमलः पवनानुसारी Dk.91; कृपणानुसारि च धनम् Pt.1.278 going after, falling to the lot of. -2 According or conformable to, following; यथाशास्त्र˚ Ms.7.31. -3 Seeking, looking out for, investigating, scrutinizing; नित्यं छिद्रानुसार्यरेः Ms.7.12.

anusāraṇā	अनुसारणा Going after, pursuit; तस्मात्पलायमानानां कुर्यान्नात्यनुसारणाम् Mb.

anusṛta	अनुसृत a. 1 Followed, conformed to. -2 flowing, rolling; उष्णार्दितां सानुसृतास्रकण्ठीम् Rām.5.5.25. -3 Taking shelter with (शरणागत); -मुकुन्दमालास्तोत्र 15.

anusṛtiḥ	अनुसृतिः f. 1 Going after, following; conforming to, accordance with. -2 [अनुसरति कुलान्तरम्] An unchaste woman, harlot (कुलटा).

anusṛp	अनुसृप् 1 P. To glide along or after, follow.

anusarpaḥ	अनुसर्पः A serpent-like being; reptile in general.

anusṛṣṭa	अनुसृष्ट a. Created in succession.

anusṛṣṭiḥ	अनुसृष्टिः f. 1 Creating in order or succession. -2 A ready-witted woman.

anusevin	अनुसेविन् a. Practising, observing, habitually addicted to.

anusainyam	अनुसैन्यम् [सैन्यमनुगतम्] The rear of an army, rear-guard.

anuskandam	अनुस्कन्दम् ind. Having entered or gone into in succession; गेहं गेहमनुस्कन्दम् Sk.P.III.4.56.

anustaraṇam	अनुस्तरणम् Strewing or spreading round. -णी [करणे ल्युट्] 1 A cover, (आच्छादनम् such as leather); अनुस्तरण्या वपामुत्खिद्य शिरोमुखं प्रच्छादयेत् Āśval. -2 A cow; (सेयं गौः स्तृतं दीक्षितमनुस्तृतत्वाद्धिंसितत्वाच्चानुस्तरणीत्युच्यते Sāy.); especially the cow sacrificed at the funeral ceremony, which enables the departed spirit to safely cross the river of Hell called वैतरिणी (अनुतीर्यते वैतरिणी नदी अनया तॄ-करणे ल्युट् पृषो-सुट् Tv.).

anustotram	अनुस्तोत्रम् Praising after; N. of a work relating to the Sāmaveda.

anusneham	अनुस्नेहम् ind. After adding oil.

anuspaṣṭa	अनुस्पष्ट a. Plain, obvious.

anuspṛś	अनुस्पृश् To touch, xtend to; अनु स्पृश धृषता शोशुचानः Rv.4.4.2.

anusphura	अनुस्फुर a. Ved. Whizzing (as an arrow). -स्फुर् To whiz towards; अनु यद् गावः स्फुरानृजिप्यम् Rv.6.67.11.

anusamāhāraḥ	अनुसमाहारः Continuing, following.

anusmṛ	अनुस्मृ 1 P. To remember, think of, call to mind, recollect (with acc. or gen.); वरप्रार्थनामनुस्मृत्य Ś.1; यदैव अनुस्मृतं देवेन Ś.7. तस्मात्सर्वेषु कालेषु मामनुस्मर युध्य च Bg.8.7; व्यपगतमदरागस्यानुसस्मार लक्ष्मीम् Ki.4.38. -Caus. To remind (painfully), cause to remember with regret; मुहुरनुस्मरयन्तमनुक्षपं त्रिपुरदाहमुमापतिसेविनः Ki.5.14.

anusmaraṇam	अनुस्मरणम् 1 Recollection, remembering. -2 Repeated recollection.

anusmṛtiḥ	अनुस्मृतिः f. 1 Cherished recollection; thinking of; अनुस्मृतेर्बादरिः ŚB. 1.2.3. -2 Thinking of one thing to the exclusion of others.

anusyūta	अनुस्यूत a. [सिव्-क्त-ऊठ्] 1 Woven together regularly and uninterruptedly. -2 Sewn on, fastened to. -3 Closely attached or linked to.

anusvānaḥ	अनुस्वानः 1 Sounding conformably to. -2 An after-sound; echo; see अनुरणन and K. P.4(36).

anusvāraḥ	अनुस्वारः [स्वृ-अप् स्वराः; स्वरवर्णा एव स्वाराः, अनुगतः स्वारान् Tv.] The nasal sound which is marked by a dot above the line (ं) and which always belongs to a preceding vowel; अनुनासिकात्परो$नुस्वारः P.VIII.3.4. -व्यवायः Separation between two sounds caused by an अनुस्वार.

anuhavaḥ	अनुहवः Inviting, stirring up.

anuhuṅkṛ	अनुहुङ्कृ 8 U. To roar in imitation of, reply to; अनुहुङ्कुरुते घनध्वनिं न हि गोमायुरुतानि केसरी Śi.16.25.

anuhuṅkāraḥ	अनुहुङ्कारः Roaring in imitation.

anuhṛ	अनुहृ 1 P. 1 To imitate, resemble; देहबन्धेन स्वरेण च रामभद्रमनुहरति U.4; व्रीडितस्य ललितं युवतीनां क्षीवता बहु- गुणैरनुजह्रे Ki.9.67, sometimes with gen. of person; मातुरनुहरति Sk.; see below. -2 To take after (one's parents), to always imitate their nature (A. in this sense) (गतताच्छील्ये); पैतृकमश्वा अनुहरन्ते मातृकं गावः P.I.3.21 Vārt.; (गतं प्रकारः, पितुर्मातुश्चागतं प्रकारं सततं परि- शीलयन्ति Sk.)

anuharaṇam	अनुहरणम् हारः Imitation, resemblance, similarity.

anuhārya	अनुहार्य pot. p. To be imitated. -र्यः Monthly obsequies on the Darśa or new moon day (cf. अन्वाहार्य).

anuhoḍaḥ	अनुहोडः A cart (?)

apanud	अपनुद् 6 P. To remove, take or drive away, destroy; नारीणामपनुनुदुर्न देहखेदान् Bk.1.13; न हि प्रपश्यामि ममापनुद्यात् यच्छोकम् Bg.2.8 expiate, atone for (as sin).

apanuttiḥ	अपनुत्तिः f. -नोदः, -नोदनम् Removing, taking away, removal, destroying, driving away; सुखायान्यापनुत्तये Bhāg.7.13.25. expiation, atonement (as of a sin); पापानामपनुत्तये Ms.11.29,139,92; Y.3.35; गुरुतल्प˚ Ms.11.16; ब्रह्महत्यापनोदाय 11.75; कृच्छ्रो$यं सर्वपापापनोदनः 11.215,252,26.

apahnu	अपह्नु 2 A. 1 To conceal, hide, disguise; अदेश्यं यश्च दिशति निर्दिश्यापह्नुते च यः Ms.8.53; कामदेवव्यपदेशेन सखीपुरतो$- पह्नुतः Ratn.2 was passed off as Cupid upon her friend. -2 To deny, disown; गुणांश्चापह्नुषे$स्माकम् Bk.5.44; अपह्नुवानस्य जनाय यन्निजाम् (अधीरताम्) N.1.49. -3 To exculpate, excuse.

apahnutiḥ	अपह्नुतिः f. 1 Concealment of knowledge, denial. -2 (In Rhet.) A figure of speech, in which the real character of the thing in question is denied and that of another (alien or imaginary) object is ascribed to, or superimposed upon, it; प्रकृतं यन्निषिध्यान्यत्साध्यते सा त्वपह्नुतिः K. P.1; (उपमेयमसत्यं कृत्वा उपमानं सत्यतया यत्स्था- प्यते सा$पह्नुतिः) e. g. नेदं नभोमण्डलमम्बुराशिर्नौताश्च तारा नवफेनभङ्गाः । नायं शशी कुण्डलितः फणीन्द्रो नासौ कलङ्कः शयितो मुरारिः ॥ see also K. P.1 and S. D.683-84.

apratimānuṣa	अप्रतिमानुष a. Extra-ordinary; Mb.

abhinunna	अभिनुन्न a. Agitated, full of woe; दण्डकाष्ठाभिनुन्नाङ्गी चचाल भृशमाकुला Mb.14.58.29.

abhimānuka	अभिमानुक a. Ved. [मन् बाहु˚ उकच्] Striving to hurt or injure.

abhyanujñā	अभ्यनुज्ञा 9 U. 1 To permit, assent or agree to, approve; अतो$भ्यनुजानातु भवती K.29; M.3; -2 To permit one to go, grant leave to, dismiss. -Caus. To ask for leave, to depart, take leave. अभ्यनुज्ञा abhyanujñā ज्ञानम् jñānam अभ्यनुज्ञा ज्ञानम् 1 Consent, approval, permission. कृताभ्यनुज्ञा गुरुणा गरीयसा Ku.5.7, R.2.69. -2 Order, command. -3 Granting leave of absence, dismissing. -4 Admission of an argument.

abhyanujñāta	अभ्यनुज्ञात a. 1 Assented, approved; हृदयेनाभ्यनुज्ञातो यो धर्मस्तं निबोधत Ms.2.1. -2 Favoured by; Rām.3.

amanuṣya	अमनुष्य a. 1 Not human, not manly. -2 Not frequented by man. -ष्यः 1 Not a man; नामनुष्ये भवत्यग्निः Rām.2.93.22. -2 A demon, fiend (= रक्षःपिशाचादि Sk. on P.II.4.23). -ता Unmanliness.

amānuṣa	अमानुष a. (-षी f.) 1 Not human, not belonging to man, supernatural, unearthly, superhuman; आकृतिरेवा- नुमापयत्यमानुषताम् K.132, ˚आकृतिः K.131,132,258; ˚शक्तित्वम् 13; ˚गीतध्वनिम् 126 an unearthly melody. -2 Inhuman, monster-like; ill-disposed towards man. -3 Tenantless, desolate; ˚षं वनम् 135. -षः, -षी One not a man, an irrational animal; Ms.9.284, स्त्रीणामशिक्षित- पटुत्वममानुषीषु संदृश्यते Ś.5.22.

amānuṣya	अमानुष्य a. Not human, superhuman &c. -˚ष्यम् Inhuman state; अमानुष्यं समापन्नान् दासकर्मण्यवस्थितान् Mb. 5.16.113.

ānukalpika	आनुकल्पिक a. [अनुकल्पं वेत्ति अधीते वा उक्था˚ ठक्] 1 One who knows or studies the anukalpa q. v. -2 To be obtained by अनुकल्प.

ānukūlika	आनुकूलिक a. (-की f.) [अनुकूल ठक्] Favourable, conformable.

ānukūlyam	आनुकूल्यम् [अनुकूलस्य भावः कर्म वा ष्यञ्] 1 Favourableness, conformity, suitableness; यत्रानुकूल्यं दम्पत्योस्त्रि- वर्गस्तत्र वर्धते Y.1.74. -2 Kindness, favour.

ānugatyam	आनुगत्यम् [अनुगत-ष्यञ्] Acquaintance, familiarity.

ānugatika	आनुगतिक a. (-की f.) Relating to a follower, following.

ānuguṇyam	आनुगुण्यम् [अनुगुणस्य भावः कर्म वा ष्यञ्] Favourableness, suitableness, congruity.

ānugrāmika	आनुग्रामिक a. (-की f.) [अनुग्रामं भवः ठञ्] Rural, rustic.

ānujīvara	आनुजीवर a. Ved. Posthumous.

ānujīvyam	आनुजीव्यम् The decorum due to a servant; पशुप- कुलनिवासाद् आनुजीव्यानभिज्ञः Dūtavākya 1.39.

ānunāsikyam	आनुनासिक्यम् [अनुनासिकस्य भावः ष्यञ्] Nasality; आनुनासिक्यं तेषामधिको गुणः Mbh. on P.I.1.9.

ānupathya	आनुपथ्य a. Along the way.

ānupadika	आनुपदिक a. (-की f.) [अनुपदं धावति ठक् P.IV.4.37; IV.2.59. वेद अधीते वा] Following, pursuing, tracking, studying. आनुपूर्वम् ānupūrvam र्व्यम् rvyam र्वी rvī आनुपूर्वम् र्व्यम् र्वी [अनुपूर्वस्य भावः ष्यञ् ततो वा ङीषि यलोपः] 1 Order, succession, series; देव्या चाख्यातं सर्वमेवानु- पूर्व्याद्वाचा संपूर्णं वायुपुत्रः शशंस Rām.5.65.28 वसीरन्नानुपूर्व्येण शाणक्षौमाविकानि च Ms.2.41. -2 (In law) The regular order of the castes; षडानुपूर्व्या विप्रस्य क्षत्रस्य चतुरो$वरान् Ms.3.23. -3 (In logic) Conclusion regularly or syllogistically drawn. -वत् Having a (definite) order; आनुपूर्व्यवतामेकदेशग्रहणेषु आगमवदन्त्यलोपः स्यात् । Ms.1.5.1. आनुपूर्वे ānupūrvē र्व्ये rvyē ण ṇ अनुपूर्व्या anupūrvyā आनुपूर्वे र्व्ये ण अनुपूर्व्या ind. One after another, in due order; आनुपूर्व्येणोत्थितराजलोकः K.95.

ānumānika	आनुमानिक a. (-की f.) [अनुमानादागतः ठक्] 1 Relating to a conclusion. -2 Derived from an inference, subject to inference, inferential. -3 Inferred. -कम् The Pradhāna of the Sāñkhyas; आनुमानिकमप्येकेषामिति चेन्न Br. Sūt.1.4.1; ˚त्वम् the state of being inferable.

ānuyātram	आनुयात्रम् Retinue, attendants; Mb.3.

ānuyātrikaḥ	आनुयात्रिकः A follower, attendant; Māl.6; U.4.

ānuraktiḥ	आनुरक्तिः f. Passion, affection.

ānurūpyam	आनुरूप्यम् Suitableness, conformity.

ānulepika	आनुलेपिक a. [अनुलेपिकायाः स्त्रिया धर्म्यम्] Forming the duty of an अनुलेपिका.

ānulomika	आनुलोमिक a. (-की f.) [अनुलोमं वर्तते अनुलोम ठक्] 1 Regular, orderly, in due course. -2 Favourable, suitable.

ānulomya	आनुलोम्य a. 'In the direction of the hair', produced in natural or direct order. -म्यम् [अनुलोमस्य भावः कर्म वा ब्राह्म ˚ष्यञ् P.] 1 Natural or direct order, proper arrangement; आनुलोम्येन संभूता जात्या ज्ञेयास्त एव ते Ms.1. 5,13. -2 Regular series or succession. -3 Favourableness, fit disposition. -4 Bringing to one's right place.

ānuvaṃśya	आनुवंश्य a. Belonging to a race, conformable to geneology.

ānuvidhitsā	आनुविधित्सा Ingratitude.

ānuveśyaḥ	आनुवेश्यः [अनुवेशं वसति] A neighbour who lives next to the next-door neighbour; प्रातिवेश्यानुवेश्यौ च कल्याणे विंशतिद्विजे Ms.8.392; (on which Kull. says; निरन्तरगृहवासी प्रातिवेश्यः, तदनन्तरगृहवास्यानुवेश्यः). The word is also found to be witten as अनुवेश्य.

ānuśāsanika	आनुशासनिक a. (-की f.) [अनुशासनाय हितं ठक्] Relating to or treating of instruction.

ānuśūka	आनुशूक a. (-की f.) Being with or within the awns (as rice).

ānuśrava	आनुश्रव a. See next word; आनुश्रवं श्रुतिभिरङ्घ्रिजमङ्ग- सङ्गैः Bhāg.11.6.19. आनुश्र ānuśra (श्रा śrā) विक vika आनुश्र (श्रा) विक a. (-की f.) [गुरुपाठादनुश्रूयते; अनुश्रवो वेदस्तत्र विहितः ठक्] According to hearing, resting on Veda or tradition; देवानां गुणलिङ्गानामानुश्रविककर्मणाम् Bhāg.3.25.32. -कः Means of obtaining Heaven, absolution &c. Sk.

ānuṣak	आनुषक् ind. Ved. In continuous order, uninterruptedly, one after the other. वि हव्यमग्निरानुषग्भगो न वार- मृण्वति Rv.5.16.2.

ānuṣaṅgika	आनुषङ्गिक a. (-की f.) [अनुषङ्गात् आगतः ठक् स्त्रियां ङीप्] 1 Connected with, concomitant. -2 Implied, inherent. -3 Necessarily following, inevitable, necessary. -4 Of secondary importance, secondary; असुभिः स्नु यशश्चि- चीषतः ...ननु लक्ष्मीः फलमानुषङ्गिकम् Ki.2.19; अन्यतरस्यानुषङ्गिक- त्वे$न्वाचयः Sk.; see अन्वाचय. -5 Attached to, fond of, frequenting; तत्र˚ Pt.1. -6 Like, analogous. -7 Relative, proportionate. -8 (In gram.) Elliptical, including words not included in the sentence. -9 Incidental; यस्यैव प्रधानकर्मफलं तस्यैवानुषङ्गिकमपि भवितुमर्हति ŚB. on MS. 6.2.1. -1 Lasting, enduring; Rāj. T.

ānuṣaj	आनुष़ज् ind. In order, successively.

ānuṣūka	आनुषूक a. (In the manner of the aftershoot of rice) Promoting, urging, driving forward; तस्मा एतमैन्द्रमानुषू- कम् Yāj. Ts.2.3.4.2.

ānuṣṭhubha	आनुष्ठुभ a. (-भी f.) [अनुष्टुप् छन्दो$स्य उत्सा˚ अञ्] 1 Consisting of Anuṣṭubhs. -2 Relating to Anuṣṭubh, formed like the metre; आनुष्टुभस्य हविषो हविर्यत् Rv.1. 181.1. -भम् The Anuṣṭup metre.

ānusūya	आनुसूय a. (-यी f.) [अनुसूयया अत्रिपत्न्या दत्तं अण्] Coming from or given by Anusūyā; स्फुरत्प्रभामण्डलमानुसूर्यं सा बिभ्रती शाश्वतमङ्गरागम् R.14.14.

ārujatnu	आरुजत्नु a. Ved. Breaking; वीळु चिदारुजत्नुभिर्गुहा चिदिन्द्र वह्निभिः Rv.1.6.5.

upajānu	उपजानु a. Near the Knee; उपजानुभवं गडु Mbh. on IV.3.39.

upanunna	उपनुन्न a. Driven, wafted; द्रुतमरुदुपनुन्नैरुन्नमद्भिः सहेलम् Śi.4.68.

upasnuta	उपस्नुत a. Streaming forth; स्वयं प्रदुग्धे$स्य गुणैरुपस्नुता Ki.1.18.

upahatnu	उपहत्नु a. Ved. Attacking, hiting, hurting; मगं न भीममुपहत्नुमुग्रम् Rv.2.33.11.

aupajānuka	औपजानुक a. (-की f.) [P.IV.3.4; IV.1.15. उपजानु-ठक्] Being near the knees.

kavatnu	कवत्नु n A bad deed. -a. Avaricious, stingy; न देवासः कवत्नवे Rv.7.32.9.

kṛtnu	कृत्नु a. [कृ-क्त्नु; Uṇ.3.3] 1 Working well, able to work, powerful. -2 Clever, skilful. -त्नुः A mechanic, an artist.

kṛśānuḥ	कृशानुः [कृश् आनुक्; Uṇ.4.2] Fire; गुरोः कृशानुप्रति- माद्बिभेषि R.2.49;7.24;1.74; Ku.1.51; Bh.2.17. -Comp. -यन्त्रम् (= अग्नियन्त्रम्) a cannon; अथ सपदि कृशा- नुयन्त्रगोलैः ......Śiva. B.28.85. -रेतस् m. an epithet of Śiva.

gadayitnu	गदयित्नु a. 1 Loquacious, garrulous, talkative. -2 Libidinous, lustful. -त्नुः N. of Kāma, the god of love.

gātānugatika	गातानुगतिक a. (-की f.) Caused by blindly following or imitating custom or example.

gṛdhnu	गृध्नु a. [गृध्-क्नु] 1 Greedy, covetous; अगृध्नुराददे सो$र्थम् R.1.21; प्राप्तो वेलामहीध्रं मलयमहमहिग्रासगृध्नुः क्षणेन Nāg.4.25. -2 Eager, desirous; ये चान्ये गुणगृध्नवः Bhāg. 3.14.2.

glāsnu	ग्लास्नु a. [ग्लै-स्नु] Languid, wearied; वसन् माल्यवति ग्लास्नू रामो जिष्णुरधृष्णुवत् Bk.7.4.

ghoṣayitnu	घोषयित्नु 1 A crier, bard, herald. -2 A Brāhmaṇa. -3 A cuckoo. -4 A captive.

jaganuḥ	जगनुः (न्नुः) 1 Fire. -2 An insect. -3 An animal.

jaghnu	जघ्नु a. [हन्-कु द्वित्वं च] Striking, Killing.

janus	जनुस् n. 1 Birth; धिग्वारिधीनां जनुः Bv.1.16. -2 Creation, production. -3 Life, existence; जनुः सर्वश्लाध्यं जयति ललितोत्तंस भवतः Bv.2.55. -4 Nativity. -5 Birthplace. -6 A creature, being. -7 Genus, kind. -Comp. -भवनम् 1 lying in chamber. -2 (= सूतिकागृहम्); शाहेन्द्र- विलास 2.2.

januṣāndhaḥ	जनुषान्धः Blind from birth, born blind.

jahnuḥ	जह्नुः N. of an ancient king, son of Suhotra, who adopted the river Gaṅgā as his daughter. [The river Ganges, when brought down from heaven by the austerities of Bhagīratha, was forced to flow over earth to follow him to the lower regions. In its course it inundated the sacrificial ground of king Jahnu, who being angry drank up its waters. But the gods and sages, and particularly Bhagīratha, appeased his anger, and he consented to discharge those waters from his ears. The river is therefore regarded as his daughter, and is styled जाह्नवी, जह्नुतनया, -कन्या, -सुता, -नन्दिनी &c.; cf. R.8.95. जह्नोः कन्यां सगरतनयस्वर्गसोपान- पङ्क्तिम् Me.52. -सप्तमी The seventh day of the bright half of Vaiśākha.]

jānu	जानु n. [जन्-ञुण्] The knee; जानुम्यामवनिं गत्वा kneeling (or falling on one's knees) on the ground. -Comp. -दध्न a. reaching to, as high as the knees, knee-deep. -प्रकृतिकम् A variety of wrestling. -फलकम्, -मण्डलम् the knee-pan. -विजानु n a peculiar position in fighting (contracting and extending the knees). -सन्धिः the knee-joint.

jigatnu	जिगत्नु a Going quickly, fleet; विश्वस्य यामन्नाचिता जिगत्नु Rv.7.65.1. -m. Breath, life.

jighatnuḥ	जिघत्नुः Ved. An enemy; यो नः सनुत्य उत वा जिघत्नुः Rv.2.3.9.

tanayitnu	तनयित्नु a. Ved. Roaring, thundering.

tanu	तनु a. (-नु, -न्वी f.) [तन्-उन्] 1 Thin, lean, emaciated; वीतप्रभावतनुरप्यतनुप्रभावः Ki.16.64. -2 Delicate, slender, slim (as a limb, as a mark of beauty); तनुवृत्तमध्यः R.6.32; cf. तन्वङ्गी -3 Fine, delicate (as cloth); स्तनेषु तन्वंशुकमुन्नतस्तना Ṛs.1.7. -4 Small, little, tiny, scanty, few, limited; तनुवाग्विभवो$पि सन् R.1.9;3.2; तनुत्यागो बहुग्रहः H.2.89. 'giving little' &c. -5 Trifling, unimportant, little; Amaru.28. -6 Shallow (as a river) -f. 1 The body, the person. -2 Outward form, manifestation; प्रत्यक्षाभिः प्रपन्नस्तनुभिरवतु वस्ताभिरष्टाभिरीशः Ś.1.1; M.1.1. -3 Nature, the form or character of anythig; तीक्ष्णां तनुं यः प्रथमं जहाति सो$नन्त्यमाप्नोत्यभयं प्रजाभ्यः Mb.12.245. 26. -4 Skin. [cf. L. tenuis, Eng. thin.] -Comp. -अङ्ग a. having slender limbs, delicate. (-ङ्गी) a delicate woman. -ऊनः the wind. -कूपः a pore of the skin. -गृहम्, -स्थानम् The first lunar mansion. -छद् (-द) a. protecting, clothing. -छदः an armour; ततस्तु द्रुपदानीकं शरैश्छिन्नतनुच्छदम् Mb.7.168.26; तरुपलाशसवर्णतनुच्छदः R.9.51;12.86. -ज a. born from the body; वाञ्छैव सूचयति पूर्वतरं भविष्यं पुंसां यदन्यतनुजं त्वशुभं शुभं वा Pt.2.8. (-जः) 1 a son; Bhāg.5.9.6. -2 the hair on the body; स्निग्धहर्यक्षतनुजश्मश्रुप्रवरमूर्द्धजम् Rām.1.16.12. -जा a daughter. -त्यज् a. risking one's life. -2 giving up one's person, dying; योगेनान्ते तनुत्यजाम् R.1.8. -3 rash, desperate, fool-hardy. -त्याग a. spending little, sparing, niggardly. -त्रम्, -त्राणम्, an armour; रक्षन् विप्रांस्तनुत्रवान् Bk; Bhāg.8.1.37. -दानम् 1 offering the body (for sexual intercourse). -2 a. scanty gift. -धी a. littleminded. -प्रकाश a. of dim lustre; तनुप्रकाशेन विचेयतारका; R.3.2. -बीजः the jujube. -भवः a son. (-वा) a daughter. -भस्त्रा the nose. -भृत् m. any being furnished with a body, a living being; particularly a human being; कल्पं स्थितं तनुभृतां तनुभिस्ततः किम् Bh.3.73. -मध्य a. having a slender waist. (-ध्यम्) the waist. (-ध्या) a metre. -रसः perspiration. -रुह् n., -रुहम् 1 the hair of the body. -2 a feather; तनुरुहाणि पुरो विजितध्वनेः Śi.6.45; Mv.6.33. -लता a. slender body; एणीदृशस्तनुलता तनुते मुदं नः P. R.2.19. -वातः a kind of hell; Jain. -वारम् an armour; तनुवारभसो भास्वानधीरो$विनतोरसा Ki.15.23. -व्रणः a pimple. -संचारिणी a young woman, a girl ten years old. -सरः perspiration. -ह्रदः the anus.

tanuka	तनुक a. Thin, small.

tanutā	तनुता Thinness, littleness, waning; बहुले$पि गते निशा- करस्तनुतां दुःखमनङ्ग मोक्ष्यति Ku.4.13.

tanula	तनुल a. Spread, expanded.

tanus	तनुस् n. The body.

danuḥ	दनुः f. N. of one of the daughters of Dakṣa given in marriage to Kaśyapa and mother of the Dānavas. -m. N. of a monster, son of Śrī, cursed by Indra and killed by Rāma and Lakṣmaṇa. He had a headless trunk, and hence called दनुकबन्ध. -Comp. -जः -पुत्रः, -संभवः, -सूनुः a demon; Bhāg.6.9.4. -अरिः, -द्विष् m. a god.

dayitnu	दयित्नु a. Kind, compassionate.

dānu	दानु a. [दा-नु] 1 Valiant. -2 Conquering, destroying. -नुः 1 A donor. -2 Prosperity. -3 Satisfaction. -4 Air, wind. -5 A demon. -n. 1 A gift. -2 A fluid, drop.

dhanus	धनुस् a. [धन् शब्दे-असि] Armed with a bow. n. 1 A bow; धनुर्वंशविशुद्धो$पि निर्गुणः किं करिष्यति Subhāṣ. धनुष्यमोघं समधत्त बाणम् Ku.3.66; so इन्द्रधनुः &c. (At the end of Bahu. comp. धनुस् is changed to धन्वन्; अधिज्यधन्वा विचचार दावम् R.2.8.). -2 A measure of length equal to four hastas; धनुःशतं परीणाहो ग्रामे क्षेत्रान्तरं भवेत् Y.2.167; Ms. 8.237. -3 An arc of a circle. -4 The sign Sagittarius of the zodiac. -5 A desert; cf. धन्वन् -m. N. of Śiva. -Comp. -आकार a. (धनुराकार) bow-shaped, curved, bent. -आसनम् (धनुरासनम्) a particular mode of sitting. -कर (धनुष्कर) a. having or armed with a bow. (-रः) a bow-maker. -काण्डम् (धनु- ष्काण्डम्) a bow and arrow. -खण्डम् (धनुष्खण्डम्) part of a bow. Me.15. -गुणः (धनुर्गुणः) a bowstring. -ग्रहः (धनुर्ग्रहः), ग्राहः an archer. धनुर्ग्रहवरो यस्यं बाणखड्गास्त्रभृत्स्वयम् Rām.2.44.2. -ग्रहम् a measure, a cubit of 27 aṅgulas; Māna.2.52. -ज्या (धनुर्ज्या) a bow-string; अनवरतधनुर्ज्यास्फालनक्रूरपूर्वम् Ś2.4. -दुर्गम् (धनुर्दुर्गम्) a place protected by a desert; Ms.7.7. -द्रुमः (धनुर्द्रुमः) a bamboo. -धरः, -भृत् m. (धनुर्धरः &c.) 1 an archer; धनुर्भृतो$प्यस्य दयार्द्रभावम् R.2.11; धनुर्धरः केसरिणं ददर्श 29;3.31,38,39;9.11;12.97; 16.77. -2 an epithet of Viṣṇu. -3 the sign Sagittarius of the zodiac. -धारिन् (धनुर्धारिन्) m. an archer. -पाणि a. (धनुष्पाणि) armed with a bow, with a bow in hand; अहमेव धनुष्पाणिर्योद्धा समरमूर्धनि Rām. -मार्गः (धनुर्मार्गः) a line curved like a bow, a curve. -मासः (धनुर्मासः) The period during which the sun is in Sagittarius. -मुष्टिः (धनुर्मुष्टिः) a measure, a cubit of 26 aṅgulas; Māna 2.51. -लता 1 bow. -2 Soma creeper. -वातः (धनुर्वातः) a kind of disease. -विद्या (धनुर्विद्या) the science of archery. -वृक्षः (धनुर्वक्षः) 1 a bamboo. -2 the अश्वत्थ tree. -वेदः (धनुर्वेदः) the science of archery, one of the four Upavedas q. v. चतुष्पादं धनुर्वेदं वेद पञ्चविधं द्विज । रथनागाश्वपत्तीनां योधांश्चाश्रित्य कीर्तितम् ॥ यन्त्रमुक्तं पाणिमुक्तं मुक्तसन्धारितं तथा । अमुक्तं बाहुयुद्धं च पञ्चधा तत् प्रकीर्तितम् ॥ Agni P. -वेदिन् m. an epithet of Śiva. -स्तम्भः Tetanus.

dhanuṣmat	धनुष्मत् m. An archer.

dhānuṣyaḥ	धानुष्यः Bamboo.

dhenuḥ	धेनुः f. [धयति सुतान्, धीयते वत्सैर्वा, धे-नु इच्च Tv.] 1 A cow, milch-cow; धेनुं धीराः सूनृतां वाचमाहुः U.5.31. -2 The female of a species (affixed to the names of other animals in this sense); as खड्गधेनुः, वडवधेनुः &c. -3 The earth. (Sometimes at the end of comp. धेनु forms a diminutive; as असिधेनुः, खड्गधेनुः). -4 Any offering or present to Brāhmaṇa instead of or in the shape of a cow such as गुडधेनु, घृतधेनु, तिलधेनु, जलधेनु, क्षीरधेनु, मधुधेनु, शर्कराधेनु, दधिधेनु, रसधेनु, स्वरूपधेनु; Matsya P. -5 A mare; यथा धेनुः किशोरेण MS.7.4.7. (तद्यथा कृष्णकिशोरा धेनुरिति । यद्यपि धेनुशब्दो गोधेन्वां दृष्टप्रवृत्तिस्तथाप्यभि- धानसामान्यादश्वधेन्वामपि भागीति किशोरेण लिङ्गेन अश्वधेन्वां विज्ञायते । ŚB.). -Comp. -दक्षिण a. (a sacrifice) whereat a cow is given as a fee. -दुग्धम् 1 cow's milk. -2 a kind of gourd (Mar. चिबुड). -मक्षिका a gadfly.

dhenukaḥ	धेनुकः 1 N. of a demon killed by Balarāma. दारुणो धेनुको नाम दैत्यो गर्दभरूपवान् Hariv. -2 A mode of sexual enjoyment; see धैनुक -Comp. -सूदनः an epithet of Balarāma.

dhenukā	धेनुका 1 A female elephant. -2 A milch-cow. -3 A gift, an offering. -4 A female animal in general. -5 A dagger; L.D.B. -6 Pārvatī; स्त्रियां स्याद्धेनुका वाजियोषित्यपि पशौ गीव । भवान्यां च कृपाण्यां च प्रसूताकरि- योषितोः ॥ Nm.

dhenuṣṭarī	धेनुष्टरी A milch-cow ceasing to give milk.

dhenuṣyā	धेनुष्या A cow who or whose milk has been pledged.

dhainukam	धैनुकम् 1 A herd of cows. -2 A particular mode of sexual enjoyment (रतिबन्ध).

nadanuḥ	नदनुः 1 A lion. -2 Sounding, roaring; यदाकृणोषि नदनुं समूहसि Rv.8.21.14. -3 The sound of praise. -4 War, battle. -5 A cloud.

nanu	ननु ind. (Originally a combination of न and नु, now used as a separate word) A particle implying:-- 1 Inquiry or interrogation; ननु समाप्तकृत्यो गौतमः M.4. -2 Surely, certainly, indeed, is it not indeed (with an interrogative force); यदा$मेधाविनी शिष्योपदेशं मलिनयति तदाचार्यस्य दोषो ननु M.1. -3 Of course, indeed, certainly (अवधारणम्); उपपन्नं ननु शिवं सप्तस्वङ्गेषु R.1.6; त्रिलोकनाथेन सदा मखद्विषस्त्वया नियम्या ननु दिव्यचक्षुषा 3.45. -4 It is used as a vocative particle meaning 'O', 'Oh',; ननु मानव Dk.; ननु मूर्खाः पठितमेव युष्माभिस्तत्काण्डे U.4. -5 It is used in propitiatory expressions in the sense of 'pray', 'be pleased'; ननु मां प्रापय पत्युरन्तिकम् Ku.4.32. -6 It is sometimes used as a corrective word like the English 'why' or 'I say'; ननु पदे परिवृत्य भण Mk.5; ननु भणामि चिन्तित उपाय इति V.2.; ननु भवानग्रतो मे वर्तते Ś.2; ननु विचिनोतु भवान् V.2. -7 In argumentative discussions ननु is frequently used to head an objection or advance a contrary proposition (generally followed by उच्यते); नन्वचेतनान्येव वृश्चिकादिशरीराणि अचेतनानां च गोमयादीनां कार्याणीति उच्यते Ś.B.

nabhanu	नभनु a. Ved. Hurting. -नु f. A river.

nihnu	निह्नु 2 Ā. 1 To hide, conceal; देव्या निह्नोतुमिच्छोरिति सुरसरितम् Mu.1.1; Bk.1.36. -2 To deny or dissimulate before any one, to hide from (with dat.); अशप्त निहुवानो$सो सीतायै स्मरमोहितः Bk.8.74.

nihnuta	निह्नुत p. p. 1 Denied, disowned. -2 Concealed, dissembled.

nihnuti	निह्नुति f. 1 Denial, concealment of knowledge; धन्यो हन्यत एव निह्नुतिपरः प्रेयान् रुदत्या हसन् Amaru.9. -2 Dissimulation, reserve. -3 Secrecy, concealment in general.

paryanuyogaḥ	पर्यनुयोगः 1 An inquiry with the object of contradicting or refuting a statement (दूषणार्थं जिज्ञासा Halāy.); पर्यनुयोगो नाम स भवति यः स्वपक्षं साधयति विपक्षस्य च प्रतीपमा- चरति ŚB. on MS.3.1.12; एतेनास्यापि पर्यनुयोगस्यानवकाशः Dāy. B. -2 Asking, inquiring. -3 Censure, reproach.

pāradhenuḥ	पारधेनुः नुकः N. of a low mixed caste; an Āyogava.

poṣayitnuḥ	पोषयित्नुः The cuckoo.

prajanukaḥ	प्रजनुकः The body.

pratanu	प्रतनु a. (-नु or -न्वी) 1 Very thin or minute, delicate; वेणीभूतप्रतनुसलिला Me.29. -2 Very small, limited, narrow; प्रतनुतपसाम् K.43; U.1.2; Me.41. -3 Slender, emaciated; ततः सदर्पं प्रतनुं तपस्यया Ki.14.35. -4 Insignificant, trifling.

pratinud	प्रतिनुद् 6 U. To ward off, repel, repulse.

prasnu	प्रस्नु 2 P. To distil, pour forth. (-Ā.) To yield milk; P.III.1.89 com.

prasnuta	प्रस्नुत p. p. Dropping, oozing, pouring forth. -Comp. -स्तनी one whose breasts distil milk (through excess of maternal love); U.3.

prasnuṣā	प्रस्नुषा The wife of a grandson; स्नुषाश्च प्रस्नुषाश्चैव धृत- राष्ट्रस्य सङ्गताः Mb.5.141.5.

bhānuḥ	भानुः [भा-नु Uṇ.3.32] 1 Light, lustre, brightness. -2 A ray of light; मण़्डिताखिलदिक्प्रान्ताश्चण्डांशोः पान्तु भानवः Bv.1.129; Śi.2.53; Ms.8.132. -3 The sun; भानुः सकृद्युक्ततुरङ्ग एव Ś.5.4; भीमभानौ निदाघे Bv.1.3. -4 Beauty. -5 A day. -6 A king, prince, sovereign. -7 An epithet of Śiva or Viṣṇu; अमृतांशूद्भवो भानुः V. Sah. -f. A handsome woman. -Comp. -केश(स)रः the sun. -जः the planet Saturn. -दिनम्, -वारः Sunday. -फला Musa Sapientum (Mar. केळ). -भूः daughter of the sun, the Yamunā river; अह्नि भानुभुवि दाशदारिकाम् N.18.25.

bhānumat	भानुमत् a. 1 Luminous, bright, splendid. -2 Beautiful, handsome. -m. 1 The sun; तुल्ये$पराधे स्वर्भानुर्भानुमन्तं चिरेण यत् Śi.2.49; Ku.3.65; R.6.36; Ṛs.5.2. -ती N. of the wife of Duryodhana.

madayitnu	मदयित्नु a. [मद्-णिच् इत्नुच्] 1 Intoxicating maddening. -2 Gladdening. -त्नुः 1 The god of love. -2 A cloud. -3 A distiller of spirituous liquors. -4 A drunken man. -5 Spirituous liquor (n. also in this sense).

manu	मनु a. Thinking, wise, intelligent, sage; सलोकपाला मुनयो मनूनामाद्यं मनुं प्राञ्जलयः प्रणेमुः Bhāg.4.6.39.

manuḥ	मनुः [मन्-उ Uṇ.1.1] 1 N. of a celebrated personage regarded as the representative man and father of the human race (sometimes regarded as one of the divine beings). -2 Particularly, the fourteen successive progenitors or sovereigns of the earth mentioned in Ms.1.63. (The first Manu called स्वायंभुवमनु is supposed to be a sort of secondary creator, who produced the ten Prajapatis or Maharṣis and to whom the code of laws known as Manusmriti is ascribed. The seventh Manu called वैवस्वतमनु, being supposed to be born from the sun, is regarded as the progenitor of the present race of living beings and was saved from a great flood by Viṣṇu in the form of a fish; cf. मत्स्यावतार; he is also regarded as the founder of the solar race of kings who ruled at Ayodhyā; see U.6.18; R.1.11; विवस्वान् मनवे प्राह मनुरिक्ष्वाकवे$ब्रवीत् Bg.4.1. The names of the fourteen Manus in order are:-1 स्वायंभुव, 2 स्वारोचिष, 3 औत्तमि, 4 तामस, 5 रैवत, 6 चाक्षुष, 7 वैवस्वत, 8 सावर्णि, 9 दक्षसावर्णि, 1 ब्रह्मसावर्णि, 11 धर्मसावर्णि, 12 रुद्रसावर्णि, 13 रौच्य-दैवसावर्णि and 14 इंद्रसावर्णि). -3 A symbolical expression for the number 'fourteen'. -4 A man, mankind (opp. evil spirits); मनवे शासदव्रतान् Ṛv.1.13.8. -5 Thought, thinking or mental faculty (Ved.). -6 A prayer, sacred text or spell (मन्त्र); मनुं साधयतो राज्यं नाकपृष्ठमनाशके Mb.13.7.18. -7 (pl.) Mental powers; देहो$सवो$क्षा मनवो भूतमात्रा नात्मानमन्यं च विदुः परं यत् Bhāg.6.4.25. -नुः f. The wife of Manu. -Comp. -अन्तरम् the period or age of a Manu; (this period, according to Ms.1.79, comprises 4,32, human years or 1/14th day of Brahmā, the fourteen Manvantaras making up one whole day; each of these fourteen periods is supposed to be presided over by its own Manu; six such periods have already passed away; we are at present living in the seventh, and seven more are yet to come); मन्वन्तरं तु दिव्यानां युगानामेकसप्ततिः Ak. -जः a man, mankind. ˚अधिपः, ˚अधिपतिः, ˚ईश्वरः, ˚पतिः, ˚राजः a king, sovereign. ˚लोकः the world of men; i. e. the earth. -जा a woman. -जातः a man. -ज्येष्ठः a sword. -प्रणीत a. taught or expounded by Manu. -भूः a man, mankind. -राज् m. an epithet of Kubera. -श्रेष्ठः an epithet of Viṣṇu. -संहिता, -स्मृतिः the code of laws ascribed to the first Manu, the institutes of Manu.

manuṣī	मनुषी A female, a woman.

manuṣya	मनुष्य a. [मनोरपत्यं यत् सुक् च] Friendly or useful to man. -ष्यः 1 A man, human being, mortal. -2 A mate. -3 Ved. A class of manes. -Comp. -इन्द्रः, -ईश्वरः a king, sovereign; मार्गं मनुष्येश्वरधर्मपत्नी श्रुतेरिवार्थं स्मृतिरन्वगच्छत् R.2.2. -कारः human exertion or effort; cf. पुरुषकार. -गन्धर्व m. (pl.) the human गन्धर्वs (as distinguished from देवगन्धर्वs). -जन्मन् a. begotten by a man. -जातम्, -जातिः f. mankind, human race. -देवः 1 a king; निशम्य देवानुचरस्य वाचं मनुष्यदेवः पुनरप्युवाच R.2.52. -2 a god among men, a Brāhmaṇa. -धर्मः 1 the duty of man. -2 the character of man, human character. -धर्मन् m. an epithet of Kubera. -पोतः a little boy. -मात्र a. only a man. -मारणम् homicide; मनुष्यमारणे क्षिप्रं चौरवत् किल्बिषं भवेत् Ms.8.296. -यज्ञः hospitality, hospitable reception of guests, one of the five daily acts of a house-holder; see नृयज्ञ. -यानम् a litter, palanquin -लोकः the world of mortals, the earth. -विश्, -विशा f., -विशम् human race, mankind. -शृङ्गम् impossibility. -शोणितम् human blood; (पपौ) कुतूहलेनेव मनुष्यशोणितम् R.3.54. -सभा 1 an assembly of men. -2 a crowd, multitude. -3 a place of meeting, assembly.

manuṣyatā	मनुष्यता त्वम् 1 Manhood. -2 Humanity; दुर्लभं त्रयमेवैतद् देवानुग्रहहेतुकम् । मनुष्यत्वं मुमुक्षत्वं महापुरुषसंश्रयः ॥ Vivekachūdāmaṇi.

mānuṣa	मानुष a. (-षी f.) [मनोरयम् अण् सुक् च] 1 Human; मानुषी तनुः, मानुषी वाक् &c.; R.1.6;16.22; मानुषे लोके Bg. 4.12; अवजानन्ति मां मूढा मानुषीं तनुमाश्रितम् 9.11; Ms.4.124. -2 Humane, kind. -षः 1 A man, human being. -2 An epithet of the three signs of the zodiac, Gemini, Virgo, and Libra. -षी 1 A woman. -2 A branch of medicine, administering drugs and herbs. -षम् 1 Humanity. -2 Human effort or action; मानुषं च स्वाध्यायप्रवचने च T. Up.1.9.1. -3 Manhood; श्रीरेषा द्रौपदीरूपा त्वदर्थे मानुषं गता Mb.18.4.12. -Comp. -उपेत a. joined with human effort. -राक्षसः a fiend in human form. -लौकिक a. belonging to the world of men. -सम्भव a. coming from or produced by man.

mānuṣaka	मानुषक a. (-की f.) Human, mortal.

mānuṣatā	मानुषता त्वम् 1 Humanity. -2 State or condition of man, human nature; मानुषतासुलभो लघिमा K. -3 Manhood. मानुष्यम् mānuṣyam मानुष्यकम् mānuṣyakam मानुष्यम् मानुष्यकम् 1 Human nature, humanity; असारमिव मानुष्यम् Mb.12.288.45; किं पुनर्मानुष्यं विडम्ब्यते V.2; यावन्मानुष्यके शक्यमुपपादयितुं तावत्सर्वमुपपाद्यताम् K.62. -2 A mortal frame, human body; प्राप्यापि मानुष्यकमनेक- साधारणीभव Dk. -3 Mankind, the race of human beings. -4 A collection of men; अश्वीयैरौक्षकैर्मानुष्यकै रथ्याभिरौष्ट्रकैः । धनश्चचाल वैपुल्यं वसुधाया विलोपयन् ॥ Dharmābhyudaya-mahākāvyam. -5 = मनुष्यलोक; मानुष्ये चिन्तयामास जन्मभूमि- मथात्मनः Rām.1.16.31.

moṣayitnuḥ	मोषयित्नुः 1 A Brāhmaṇa. -2 The cuckoo.

mlāsnu	म्लास्नु a. 1 Becoming faded or withered. -2 Growing thin or emaciated. -3 Growing languid or weary.

rajasānuḥ	रजसानुः 1 A cloud. -2 Soul, heart.

vagnu	वग्नु a. Talkative. -ग्नुः [वच्-नुः गश्च Uṇ.3.33] 1 A speaker. -2 A sound. -3 A cry (of an animal &c.).

vagvanuḥ	वग्वनुः Ved. A sound, noise.

vacaknu	वचक्नु a. [वच् अक्नुच् Uṇ.3.83] Talkative, eloquent, -m. A Brāhmana.

vadanuḥ	वदनुः [वद्-चनुङ् Uṇ.3.51] An orator.

vanuḥ	वनुः Ved. 1 A malicious person (हिंसक). -2 An assailant, enemy; त्वम् इन्द्र वनून् अहन् Rv.4.3.5. -3 An adherent, a friend; वनुं वा ये सुश्रुणं सुश्रुतो धुः 1.74.1.

vanus	वनुस् a. Ved. 1 Eager, anxious for. -2 Devoted or attached to. -3 A worshipper, one who honours. -m. 1 A plotter, an enemy (हिंसक). -2 Possessing, enjoying, using.

vitanu	वितनु a. 1 Delicate. -2 Beautiful. -3 Slender. -4 Bodiless. -नुः The god of love.

vinihnuta	विनिह्नुत p. p. 1 Denied, disowned. -2 Hidden, concealed.

vinud	विनुद् 6 P. 1 To strike, pierce; चोदयामास तानश्वान् विनुन्नान् भीष्मसायकैः Mb.6.16.45. -2 To play on a musical instrument (वीणाम्, आतोद्यम् &c.). -3 To remove, drive away, dispel. -Caus. 1 To remove, drive away, dispel, cast off; तापं विनोदय दृष्टिभिः Gīt.1; Śi.4.66; Ś.3.21; Māl.9.41. -2 To pass, spend (as time). -3 To divert, amuse, entertain; क्व नु खल्वात्मानं विनोदयामि Ś.3; लतासु दृष्टिं विनोदयामि Ś.6; R.14.77. -4 To amuse oneself with; लक्ष्मीर्विनोदयति येन दिगन्तलम्बी सो$पि त्वदाननरुचिं विजहाति चन्द्रः R.5.67.

vṛdhasānuḥ	वृधसानुः 1 A man. -2 A leaf. -3 An act or action.

vyanunādaḥ	व्यनुनादः Reverberation, loud echo.

śantanuḥ	शन्तनुः N. of a king of the lunar race. He married Gaṅgā and Satyavatī by the former wife he had a son named Bhīṣma, and by the latter Chītrāṅgada and Vichitravīrya. Bhīṣma remained a celibate all his life, and his younger brothers died childless; cf. भीष्म.

śāntanuḥ	शान्तनुः = शन्तनुः q. v.; शान्तनोः संतति तन्वन् पुण्यकीर्तिर्महा- यशाः Mb.1.6.6.

śoṣayitnuḥ	शोषयित्नुः [शुष्-इत्नुच् Uṇ.3.29] The sun.

śnu	श्नु A technical term used by Pāṇini for नु, the sign of the 5th class of roots.

ṣahasānuḥ	षहसानुः 1 A peacock. -2 A sacrifice. a. Full of forgiveness; L. D. B.

samanujñā	समनुज्ञा 9 U. 1 To consent, give full consent. -2 To approve, permit, allow. -3 To dismiss, give leave, allow to go. -4 To forgive, pardon. -5 To favour. समनुज्ञा samanujñā समनुज्ञानम् samanujñānam समनुज्ञा समनुज्ञानम् 1 Assent, consent. -2 Entire approval, full concurrence.

samanuvartin	समनुवर्तिन् a. Obedient, devoted.

samanuvrata	समनुव्रत a. Entirely devoted.

sānu	सानु m., n. 1 A peak, summit, ridge; सानूनि गन्धः सुरभीकरोति Ku.1.9; Me.2. Ki.5.36. -2 A level ground on the top of a mountain, table-land. -3 A shoot, sprout. -4 A forest, wood; आसीद् विशालो- त्तमसानुलक्ष्म्या पयोदपङ्क्त्येव परीतपार्श्वम् Bu. Ch.1.2. -5 A road. -6 Any surface, point, end. -7 A precipice. -8 A gale of wind. -9 A learned man. -1 The sun.

sānuka	सानुक a. Elevated, arrogant.

sānumat	सानुमत् m. A mountain; द्रुमसानुमतां किमन्तरं यदि वायौ द्वितये$पि ते चलाः R.8.9. -ती N. of an Apsaras; Ś.6.

sānukampaḥ	सानुकम्पः a. Feeling pity, sympathising, kind.

sānukūlyam	सानुकूल्यम् Favour, assistance.

sānukrośa	सानुक्रोश a. Tender, compassionate.

sānuga	सानुग a. With followers; सानुगेभ्यो बलिं हरेत् Ms.3.87.

sānutarṣam	सानुतर्षम् ind. Through thirst.

sānunaya	सानुनय a. Courteous, civil.

sānunāsika	सानुनासिक 1 Nasalized. -2 Singing through the nose.

sānubandha	सानुबन्ध a. 1 Uninterrupted, continuous; सानुबन्धाः कथं न स्युः संपदो मे निरापदः R.1.64. -2 Having consequences. -3 Together with belongings.

sānurāga	सानुराग a. Attached, enamoured, in love.

sūnuḥ	सूनुः [सू नुक्] 1 A son; पितुरहमेवैको सूनुरभवम् K.; सूनुः सूनृतवाक् स्रष्टुः R.1.93. -2 A cihild, an offspring. -3 A grandson (daughter's son). -4 A younger brother; अनुस्मृताखण्डलसूनुविक्रमः Ki.1.24. -5 The sun; सूनुः पुत्रे$नुजे रवौ इति विश्वः. -6 The Arka plant.

stanayitnuḥ	स्तनयित्नुः [स्तन्-इत्नु] 1 Thundering, thunder, the muttering of clouds; मौर्वीघोषस्तनयित्नुः पृषत्कपृषतो महान् Mb.6.14.27; Bhāg.1.14.15. -2 A cloud; स्तनयित्नो- र्मयूरीव चकितोत्कण्ठितं स्थिता U.3.7;5.8. -3 Lightning. -4 Sickness. -5 Death. -6 A kind of grass.

sthāsnu	स्थास्नु a. [स्था-स्नु] 1 Disposed to stand, firm, immoveable. -2 Permanent, eternal, lasting, durable; भवान्त्यस्यैवमङ्गानि स्थास्नूनि बलवन्ति च Śi.2.93; Ki.2.19. -स्नुः A tree; अणुप्रायास्वोषधीषु शमीप्रायेषु स्थास्नुषु Bhāg. 12.2.15.

snu	स्नु 2 P. (स्नौति, स्नुत) 1 To drip, trickle, fall in drops, distil, drop, ooze or run out, leak out, -2 To flow, stream.

snuta	स्नुत a. Oozed, dropped, flowed &c.; त्रिष्टुम्मांसात् स्नुतो$नुष्टुब्जगत्यस्थ्नः प्रजापतेः Bhāg.3.12.45.

snu	स्नु m., n. 1 Table-land. -2 Top, surface (in general). (This word has no forms for the first five inflections and is optionally substituted for सानु after acc. dual).

snu	स्नु f. A sinew, tendon, muscle.

snudhnikā	स्नुध्निका Natron, mineral alkali.

snuṣā	स्नुषा A daughter-in-law; समुपास्यत पुत्रभोग्यया स्नुषयेवा- विकृतेन्द्रियः श्रिया R.8.14;15.72.

snus	स्नुस् 4 P. (स्नुस्यति) 1 To disappear, become invisible. -2 To take, accept.

snuh	स्नुह् 4 P. (स्नुह्यति, स्नुग्ध or स्नूढ) To vomit.

snuha	स्नुह स्नुहा हिः f., -ही The milk-hedge plant. [Raghunandana, the author of Kṛityatattva (Jīvānanda's ed. of Smṛititattva vol. II, 1895) quotes a verse from the Devīpurāṇa in connection with the worship of the goddess Manasā to get rid of the fear of snake-bite (cf. Dr. Kane's History of Dharma-śāstra, vol. V. p. 125). He explains स्नुही as सिजुवृक्षः. The botanic name of the tree is Euphorbia Nerifolia (Mar. निवडुंग). It is a plant from the stem of which a stickly substance oozes out.]

hatnuḥ	हत्नुः [हन् क्त्नुः Uṇ.3.3] 1 A weapon. -2 A disease or sickness. -3 A killer.

hanu	हनु नू m., f. [हन्-उन्-स्त्रीत्वे वा उञ्] The chin, jaw. -नु f. 1 That which injures life. -2 A weapon. -3 A disease, sickness. -4 Death. -5 A kind of drug. -6 A wanton woman, prostitute. -Comp. -ग्रहः locked jaw. -भेदः 1 the gaping of the jaws. -2 N. of a particular form of eclipse. -मूलम् the root of the jaw. -मोक्षः relaxation of the jaws. -स्तम्भः = हनुग्रहः. -स्वनः sound made with the jaws.

hanukā	हनुका A jaw.

hanu	हनु (नू) मत् m. N. of a powerful monkey-chief. [He was the son of Añjanā by the god Wind or Marut and hence called Māruti. He is represented as a monkey of extraordinary strength and prowess which he mainifested on several critical occasions on behalf of Rāma whom he regarded as the idol of his heart. When Sītā was carried off by Rāvaṇa, he crossed the sea and brought news about her to his lord. He played a very important part in the great war at Laṅkā.] -Comp. -कवचम् N. of various hymns addressed to हनुमत्. -जयन्ती the day of the full moon of Chaitra.

harṣayitnu	हर्षयित्नु a. [हृर्ष्-णिच् इत्नु] Gladdening, pleasing, delighting. -n. Gold. -m. A son.

hnu	ह्नु 2 Ā. (ह्नुते-ह्नुत) 1 To take away, rob, abstract, deprive (one) of; अध्यगीष्टार्थशास्त्राणि यमस्याह्नोष्ट विक्रमम् Bk. 15.88. -2 To conceal, hide, withhold; Māl.1. -3 To hide from any one (with dat.); गोपी कृष्णाय ह्नुते Sk.; P.I.4.34.

hnutiḥ	ह्नुतिः f. 1 Abstraction, concealment. -2 Denial.

Macdonell Vedic Search

Results for nu24 results


nu	nú, adv. now, i. 154, 1; ii. 33, 7; iv. 51, 9; x. 34, 142; 168, 1; = inter. pcl. pray? vii. 86, 2 [Gk. νύ, OI.nu, OG. nu].

nud	nud push, VI. nudá; pf. 3. pl. Ā. nu-nudre, i. 85, 10. 11. prá- push away: pf. vii. 86, 1.

anu	ánu, prp. with acc., along, x. 14, 1. 8; among, x. 14, 12.

anukāmam	anu-kāmám, (acc.) adv. according to desire, viii. 48, 8.

anudeyī	anu-déyī, f. equipment (?), x. 135, 5. 6 [f. gdv. of anu-dā to be handed over].

anupaspaśāna	anu-paspaśāná, pf. pt. Ā. having spied out, x. 14, 1 [spaś spy].

anumadyamāna	anu-madyá-māna, pr. pt. ps. being greeted with gladness, vii. 63, 3.

anuvenant	anu-vénant, pr. pt. seeking the friendship of (acc.), x. 135, 2.

anuvrata	ánu-vrata, a. devoted, x. 34, 2 [acting according to the will (vratá) of another].

upahatnu	upa-hatnú, a. slaying, ii. 33, 11 [ha-tnu from han slay].

citrabhānu	citrá-bhānu, a. (Bv.) of brilliant splendour, i. 35, 4; 85, 11.

janus	jan-ús, n. generation, vii. 86, 1 [jan generate].

jānu	já̄n-u, n. knee, x. 15, 6 [Gk. γόν-υ, Lat. genu, Go. kniu, Eng. knee].

jīradānu	jīrá-dānu, a. (Bv.) having quickening gifts, v. 83, 1.

dānu	Dá̄nu, m. son of Dānu, a demon, ii. 12, 11.

dhenu	dhe-nú, f. cow, i. 160, 3; ii. 35, 7 [yielding milk: dhe = dhā suck].

manu	Mán-u, m. an ancient sage, ii. 33, 13.

mānuṣa	má̄nuṣa, a. human; m. man, vii. 63, 1 [mánus man].

vagnu	Vag-nú, m. sound, vii. 103, 2 [vac speak].

vanus	van-ús, m. enemy, iv. 50, 11 [eager, rival: van win].

sānu	sá̄n-u, n. m. back, ii. 35, 12.

sudānu	su-dá̄nu, a. bountiful, i. 85, 10; vii. 61, 3.

sūnu	sū-nú, m. son, i. 1, 9; 85, 1; viii. 48, 4 [Av. hunu, OG. sunu, Lith. sūnù, Eng. son].

stanayitnu	stanayi-tnú, m. thunder, v. 83, 6.

Macdonell Search

Results for nu248 results


nu nú, nū	indecl. now, still; even, already; then, therefore (concluding or exhorting); never (V.); indeed, just, certainly; with inter. pray: in double questions the second nu is sts. replaced by svid oryadi vâ; nu nu, either--or; n&usharp; kid, henceforth, for ever; forthwith; nevermore.

nuti	f. praise.

nutti	f. expulsion, removal.

agṛdhnu	a. liberal.

aṅgānukūla	a. pleasant to the body.

atanubala	a. strong.

atanu	a. not small, great; m. Kâma; sexual love.

atimānuṣa	a. superhuman.

adhijānu	ad. upon the knee.

adhenu	f. cow giving no milk; a. barren.

anatitrasnu	a. not very timo rous.

ananusaraṇa	n. lack of attend ance on.

ananusaṃdhāna	n. absence of investigation.

ananuṣṭhāna	n. neglect; idle ness.

ananuvrata	a. not devoted, dis obedient.

ananuvṛtti	f. disobedience to wards (g.).

ananurūpa	a. unsuitable.

ananumeya	fp. not to be inferred.

ananubhūta	pp. not experienced.

ananubhāvaka	a. unintelligi ble; -tâ, f. -ness.

ananudhyāyin	a. missing nothing.

ananutiṣṭhat	pr. pt. not carrying out, not performing.

ananujñāta	pp. unpermitted.

ananukūla	a. unfavourable.

ananukampanīya	fp. not to be pitied.

anabhyanujñāta	pp. unper mitted by (in.).

anabhyanujñā	f. no permission.

anabhimānuka	a. entertain ing no designs against (ac.).

anaśnuvāna	pr. pt. not reach ing.

anāpnuvat	pr. pt. not attaining to.

anukīrtana	n. proclaiming, men tioning; blazing abroad; -kîrtya, fp. to be proclaimed.

anukāṅkṣin	a. striving after, eager; -kâmá, m. desire, longing; a. conform ing to one's wish: -m, ad.; -kâra, -ka, a. imitating; resembling; -kârin, a. id.; corre sponding, conforming to, following; -kârya, fp. to be represented; n. subsequent business; -kâlam, ad. at the regular time.

anukampaka	a. sympathising with (--°ree;); -na, n. compassion; -nîya, fp. deserving compassion.

anukanakhalam	ad. above Kanakhala.

anukathana	n. report.

anukaccham	ad. on every bank.

anu	ad. afterwards, then; again; prp. w. ac.: along; towards; over; after; accord ing to; for (not against); with regard to; w. ac., ab., g. after (of time); w. ab. on account of.

anutta	pp. invincible.

anutta	pp. √ dâ.

anutkīrṇa	pp. not hollowed out; -ut-khâta, (pp.) n. not uneven ground.

anuga	a. following; flying after; corresponding to (--°ree;); m. follower: pl. reti nue; -gati, f. following: -ka, a. following; imitating; conforming to; -gantavya, fp. to be followed or accompanied; -gama, m., -na, n. following; -gara, m. invitation ad dressed to the reciter; -gargita, n. echo; -gâmin, a. following, obedient to (ac.); m. servant; -giram, ad. on the mountain.

anukhyāti	f. beholding.

anukrama	m. regular order: in. & ab. in order; table of contents: -na, n. enumeration, -nî, f., -ni-kâ, f. table of con tents; Vedic index; -krosa, m. compassion, sympathy with (prati; g., lc., --°ree;): -vat, a. sympathetic, -½âtmatâ, f. compassionateness; -kshanam, ad. every moment, continually; -kshapam, ad. every night.

anukta	pp. unuttered, undiscussed; unsummoned: -tva, n. abst. n.; -klîva-vaka na, a. not having uttered vain words.

anuklṛpti	f. peculiarity.

anukṛti	f. imitation; -kritya, fp. to be imitated; -krishta-tva, n. the being supplied from a preceding rule (gr.).

anukūlokta	n. pleasing speech.

anukūlaya	den. P. flatter (ac.).

anukūla	a. toward the bank; facing; suitable; agreeable; favourable; well disposed: -m, ad. on the bank; -kârin, a. showing kindness; -ga, m. tree growing on the bank; -tâ, f., tva, n. favour; proneness; -na, n. currying favour; -parinâma, a. ter minating favourably.

anujñā	f. consent; leave to depart; -na, n. id.

anuja	a. born after, younger; m. younger brother; f. &asharp;, younger sister; -gan man, m. younger brother; -gâta, pp. √ gan: -ka, a. taking after, like (ac.); -gighrikshâ, f. desire to gratify;-gîvika, m. follower; -gî vin, a., m. dependent, inferior; -gîvi-sât-kri, subject; -gîvya, fp. to be lived according to.

anucca	a. low (birth); -uk-kalat, pr. pt. not departing from (ab.); -uk-kita, pp. not plucked; -uk-khinna, pp. uninterrupted, unimpeded; -uk-khishta, (pp.) n. no mere remnant; a. containing no remains of food, clean; -uk-khvasat, pr. pt. not breathing.

anucintana	n. reflexion; -â, f. id.

anucita	pp. unaccustomed; un usual; unfit, unseemly, improper; -½artha, a. having an unusual or unsuitable meaning.

anucita	pp. studded all along with (in.).

anucara	a. (î; --°ree; â) following; m. attendant: pl. retinue.

anugraha	m. favour: -krit, a. giving satisfaction; -na, n. showing favour; -½artham, ad. in favour of; î-kri, make a token of favour; -grâhaka, a. favouring, furthering; m. sup porter; -grâhya, fp.deserving favour; fa voured by (g.); -ghatana, n. continuation.

anugīta	(pp.) n. imitative song; -gîti, f. a metre; -guna, a. of similar quali ties with, corresponding, suitable to (--°ree;): -m, ad. according to merit, -tva, n. abst. n.; -gri hîta, pp. favoured, obliged; -godam, ad. on the river Godâ.

anudhāvana	n. running after; cleansing; -dhyâna, n. meditation; -dhyâ yin, a. reflecting; indulging in longing; -dhye ya, fp. to be reflected on.

anudyama	m. absence of exertion; -udyoga, m. id.; inactivity; -udyogin, a. not exerting oneself, lazy; -ud-vigna, pp. not agitated, not frightened: -m, ad.; -udvega, m. absence of excitement, calmness: -kara, a. not agitating, not frightening; -udvegaka, a. causing no excitement, giving no offence to (g.); -ud-vegayat, pr. pt. not agitating.

anudita	pp. undiscussed; not to be uttered.

anudita	pp. not risen (sun).

anudāsīna	pp. not indifferent to (prati).

anudāra	a. ruled by his wife.

anudāra	a. ignoble.

anudātta	a. not elevated, vulgar; lowered, grave (accent); pronounced with the low tone; m. grave accent; -tara, m. lowered grave accent preceding acute or circumflex; -tva, n. tonelessness.

anudarśa	m. representation, ad monition: -na, n. consideration; -darsin, a. perceiving; considering.

anudaka	a. waterless; -udaya, m. non-appearance: -bhâg, a. not rising (moon).

anuttama	a. (without a highest), highest, most excellent; mightiest; -uttara, a. not answering; unanswerable; n. unsatis factory answer in court: -tva, n. abst. n.; -uttara&ndot;ga, a. not billowy; -utthâna, n. lack of energy; -utpatti, f. non-production; -utpâda, m. id.; non-appearance; -utsâha, m. absence of energy; -utsâhin, a. weak willed; -utsuka-tâ, f. unassumingness, mo desty; -utsûtra-pada-nyâsa, a.without a step against the rules of policy; without a word against grammatical rules; -utseka, m. lack of presumption, modesty; -utsekin, a. unassuming, modest, humble.

anupālin	a. guarding, protecting (--°ree;).

anupālabhya	fp. not to be blamed; to be observed.

anupālaka	a. guarding, preserving.

anupārata	pp. not desisting from (ab.).

anupāta	m. going after, following; -ka, n. minor crime equal to a mortal crime; -pâtin, a. following.

anupākṛta	pp. unconsecrated.

anupapatti	f. not coming to pass, impossibility; a. inadmissible, impossible; -upa-panna, pp. unsuitable; unproved, in admissible; -upa-bhugyamâna, pr. pt. ps. not being enjoyed (riches); -upa-bhogya, fp. not to be enjoyed; -upama, a. incomparable; -upa-yat, pr. pt. not cohabiting with; -upa-yukta, pp. unserviceable, useless; unfit; -upa-yugyamâna, pr. pt. ps. good for nothing; -upayogin, a. unserviceable:(i)-tva, n. abst. n.; -uparodha, m. not prejudicing, not injur ing: -tas, ad. without inconvenience; -upa-lakshita, pp. unnoticed; -upalabdhi, f. non perception; imperceptibility; -upalambha, m. id.; -upasamhârin, a. non-exclusive (fallacious middle term); -upasarga, a. not combined with a preposition; -upa-skrita, pp. unprepared; simple; unfurnished with (in.); disinterested; blameless; -upa-hata, pp. healthy; undisputed: -½âtmaka, a.not dejected, cheerful; -upa-hita, pp. unconditioned, unappropriated.

anukampā	f. compassion, sym pathy with (g., lc., --°ree;); -in, a. sympathising w. (g., --°ree;); -ya, fp. to be felt for.

anupadeṣṭavya	fp. not to be reported; -nyasta, pp. unexplained.

anupadin	a. pursuing, search ing.

anupadam	ad. immediately after (g., --°ree;); repeatedly; at every step.

anupatिtrakā	f. letter.

anupacarya	fp. who need not be waited on; unpretending; unselfish.

anupaghnat	pr. pt. not injuring.

anupakramya an-upa-kramya, ˚krāmya	fp. not to be cured.

anupakārin	a. not doing or unable to do a friendly service.

anunmadita	cs. pp. unfrenzied, restored to one's senses.

anunmatta	pp. not mad, sane.

anuneya	fp. to be conciliated.

anunīti	f. friendliness.

anuniśam	ad. every night.

anunāda	m. echo; sound; -nâdin, a. echoing; -nâyaka, a. (ikâ) reconciling; -nâyana, a. reconciling; -nâyikâ, f. secondary heroine; -nâsika, a. nasal; m. nasalised vowel: -bhâva, m. nasality.

anunaya	a. friendly; m. concilia tion; friendliness; courtesy; flattery.

anumata	pp. approved; permitted; n. consent: lc. with the consent of (g.); (ánu) mati, f. approbation, assent; -mantri, m. one who assents; -mantrana, n. recitation of a verse to (g., --°ree;); -marana, n. following in death (esp. of widows).

anubhava	m. perception, feeling; spirit; -bhâva, m. enjoyment; power, dignity; -bhâvin, a. perceiving; m. eye-witness; -bhâshitri, a. addressing; -bhûta, pp. ex perienced, felt, enjoyed; -bhûti, f.perception, apprehension.

anubandha	m. attachment; continuity; series; posterity; consequence; motive; mute letter (gr.); indispensable element: -na, n. uninterrupted series; -bandhin, a. connected with (--°ree;); extensive; lasting long: (i)-tva, n. abst. n.; -bala, n. rear (of an army); -bodha, m. noticing, perceiving; reviving an evaporated smell; -bodhya, fp. to be recognised; to be made acquainted with.

anuprahāram	ad. with a blow.

anuprapattavya	fp. to be fol lowed; -pra-vakanîya, fp. requisite for learning the Veda; -pravesa, a. entering, penetrating into (feelings, &c.); accommodation to (--°ree;); -prasna, m. enquiry after (g.); -pra sakti, f. connexion; -prâsa, m. alliteration.

anupeta	pp. who has not yet gone to his teacher; -pûrva, a. id.

anupekṣaṇa	a. not neglecting; not hvg. the consent of (in.); -tva, n. abst. n.

anupūrva	a. following the one preceding; regular: °ree;--, -m, ad. in regular order; -sas, ad. in successive order; according to the order of (g.).

anupūrva	a. compounded w. anu.

anurūpa	a. suitable; conformable to; fit for (g.): -m, -tas, in. ad. in propor tion to (--°ree;); -rûpaka, a. suitable, conformable, corresponding; -rodha, m. compliance, grati fication; regard, consideration; -ródhana, n. compliance; partiality; -rodhin, a. consi dering (--°ree;): (i)-tâ, f. complaisance.

anurakta	pp. devoted, attached, fond; -rakti, f. attachment, fondness; -rañg aka, a. gratifying; -rañgana, n. gaining the affection of; -rathyâ, f. footpath, pavement; -râga, m. colouring; redness; affection; at tachment; fondness for (--°ree;); contentment: -vat, a. red; fond; enamoured of (saha): -î, f. N.: -sri&ndot;gâravatyau, du. f. Anurâgavatî and Sri&ndot;gâravatî; -râgi-tâ, f. attachment; -râ gin, a. attached to; worldly; enamoured; lovely; -râtram, ad. by night.

anuyāja	m. after-sacrifice: -vat, a. accompanied with an --; -yâtavya, fp. to be followed; -yâtri, m. companion; -yâtra, n., â, f. retinue; escort; -yâtrika, m. pl. re tinue; -yâna, n. following; -yâyi-tâ,f. fol lowing, -tva, n. id.; -yâyin, a. following; m. follower; -yugam, ad. according to the (4) ages; -yoga, m. question, enquiry; -yogya, fp. at the disposal of (--°ree;); to be asked.

anumā	f. conclusion; -m&asharp;dya, fp. to be hailed; -mâna, n. inference; argument; -mânana, n. persuasion; -mârga, m. following; seeking: in. after (g.); -mârdava, n. pity; -mâlinî-tîram, ad. on the bank of the M.; -miti, f. conclusion, inference; -mrit, a. following in death; -meya, fp. to be inferred.

anuśakti	f. a subordinate Sakti.

anuvyādha	n. filling; -vyâhara- na, n. repeated recitation; -vyâhâra, m. cursing; -vragya, fp. to be accompanied; -vragyâ, f. attendance on a person departing; (ánu)-vrata, a. devoted to (ac., g.).

anudghāta	m. no jolt, no shock; -ud-dhata, pp. not haughty, humble; -ud dhrita, pp. not taken out beforehand.

anuveśa	m. entering.

anuvelam	ad. continually; occa sionally.

anuvāka	m. repetition; lesson, section (of a Vedic text); -vâkya, fp. to be re cited; f. â, verse to be recited by the Hotri or Maitrâvaruna priest.

anuvaṃśa	m. genealogical table; a. equal by birth: -m, by birth; -vamsya, a. relating to one's genealogy; -vákana, n. repetition; study; lesson; -vanam, ad. in the forest; in every forest; -vana½antam, ad. in the forest; -vandin, a. praising; -vapram, ad. on the bank; -vartana, n. continuation; compliance, tractableness; -vartanîya, fp. to be followed; -varti-tva, n. compliance; -vartin, a. following, yielding, obedient; -vartman, a. following, serving; -vartya, fp. to be followed; -vasa, m. obedience; a. obedient; -vashat-kâra, m. repetition of the concluding sacrificial invocation.

anulbaṇa	a. not too much or too little, moderate; -ul-la&ndot;gh-anîya, fp. not to be infringed; -ita, pp. not transgressed.

anulepa	m. anointing; ointment: -na, n. id.; -lepin, a. anointed with (--°ree;); -loma, a. following the hair, with the grain: °ree;--, in. in the natural direction, downwards; in. in a friendly way: f. â,spell (sc. vidyâ); girl of lower caste than the man she marries: -ga, a. born of such a union; -lomana, a. put ting in due order; n. purging.

anusaṃtati	ad. in uninterrupted succession; -samtâna, m. offspring, son; -sam dhâtavya, fp. to be heeded, to be attended to; -samdhâna, n. careful attention, application; scrutiny; -samdheya,fp. to be attended to.

anudeśa	m. subsequent enumera tion corresponding to a previous one; injunc tion; -deham, ad. behind; from behind.

anuṣvadham	ad. willingly.

anuṣṇa	a. not hot, cool, cold: -tâ, f., -tva, n. abst. n.; -sîta, a. neither hot nor cold.

anuṣṭhyā	ad. immediately; at once.

anuṣṭhātavya	fp. to be done, to be executed; -shthâtri, m. performer; -shthâna, n. practice, performance; -shthâ pana, n. causing to perform; -shthâyin, a. practising, performing; -shthita,pp. done, performed; -shtheya, fp. to be accomplished.

anuṣṭubh	a. shouting after; f. song of praise; a metre (4 X 8 syllables).

anuṣṭuti	f. praise.

anuṣaṅga	m. attachment to (lc.); longing; immediate consequence; -sha&ndot;gin, a. attached; prevailing; necessarily following from (g.); -shañganîya, fp. to be supplied from the context.

anuśaya	m. repentance; revocation (of a bargain): -vat, a. penitent; -½âkshepa, m. implication of remorse: a rhet. figure; -s&asharp;sana, n. instruction; precept, doctrine; order; -sâsanîya, fp. to be instructed; to be punished; -sâsitri, m. guide, teacher; -sâ sin, a. chastising; -sâsti, f. instruction; -si kshin, a. acquiring, practising; -sishta, pp. √ sâs; -susrûshâ, f. (des. n.) obedience; -sok ana, n. lamentation;-sokin, a. lamenting for (--°ree;); -sobhin, a. splendid.

anustaraṇī	f. cow killed at fu- neral sacrifices, with whose pieces the corpse is covered limb for limb; -smarana, n. recol lection; -syûta-tva, n. passing through (--°ree;) as a thread; -svâra, m.nasal sound of a vowel (gr.).

anusara	a. (î) following; conform ing to: -na, n. following, pursuing; -sânu, ad. on the ridge of the hills; -sâra, m. follow ing, pursuing; conformity; (legal) precedent: -tas, in. according to (--°ree;); -sârin, a. following, attendant on; seeking out; aiming at; conform ing to; adhering to; -sevâ, f. service, attend ance; -sevin, a. addicted to, practising (--°ree;).

antarjānu	a. holding the hands between the knees; ad. between the knees; -gyotis, a. having its light turned inwards; n. internal light.

anukara	a. imitating; m. assistant.

anukampokti	f. expression of sympathy.

abhyanujñā	f. assent; permis sion; leave (to depart); -gñâna, n. id.; -gñâ pana, n. causing to assent to (g.).

amanuṣyaniṣevit	pp. uninhabited by men.

amānuṣa	m. no man; î, f. female animal; a. (î) superhuman, divine; in human; (â) destitute of men; -loka, m. celes tial world.

aruṇānuja	m. Garuda; -½arkis, m. rising sun.

anukaraṇa	n. imitation.

aśaknuvat	pr. pt. unable to (inf.); -ya, fp. impossible: -½artha, a. id.; ineffectual.

aśāntatanu	a. whose body is not satisfied.

asthāsnu	a. impatient.

ājānulambin	a. reaching to the knees.

ānukūlika	a. courteous: -tâ, f. courteousness towards (g.), -ya, n. favour; agreeableness; friendly terms; -gunya, n. homogeneousness; -pûrv-a, n., -î, f., -ya, n. regular succession: in., ab.successively; -yâ trika, m. servant; -lomya, n. direct or natural order; -vesya, m. neighbour next but one; -shák, ad. in order; -sha&ndot;gika, a. (î) adherent, connected with, following; enduring; neces sarily following from (g.); adventitious; -shtu bha, a. consisting of or like anushtubh.

āśliṣṭasānu	a. peak-embrac ing.

indānuja	m. Indra's younger brother (Vishnu or Krishna).

upadhenu	ad. near the cows.

uparijānu	ad. above the knee; -tana, a. upper; -tala, n. surface; -yâna, n. going to heaven.

ekānudiṣṭa	(pp.) n. funeral rite in honour of a single ancestor.

kṛtnu	a. active, skilful.

kṛśānu	a. shooting well; m. bow man; N. of a celestial bowman, guardian of Soma; ep. of Agni; fire.

khaḍgidhenukā	f. female rhinoceros.

gṛdhnu	a. quick, hasty; greedy, eager (for, lc., --°ree;); (u)-tâ, f. greed; eagerness for (--°ree;).

chandānugāmin	a. complaisant, obedient; -½anuvritta, n. complaisance.

chidrānusārin	a. seeking out the weaknesses of (g.).

janus	m. n. birth, origin; creation; kind: in. by nature.

jānukā	f. bringing forth (ac.).

jānuka	n. knee (gnly. --°ree; a.); m. N.

jānu	(m.) n. knee.

jānucalana	n. being tossed on any one's knees; -prakalana, n. id.; -dagh ná, a. (î) reaching to the knee: -½ambhas, a. having water --.

jīradānu	a. dropping swiftly, flowing abundantly.

tadanukṛti	ad. accordingly; -anusarana-krama, m. continual following of him; -anta, a. ending with that; -apatya tâ, f. condition of having offspring through him (the son) or by her (the Sûdrâ woman); apatya-maya, a. devoted to his (her) children; -apeksha, a. having regard to that; -artha, m. the meaning of that or those; a. having that for its object, meant for that; having the same meaning: -m, ad. for that purpose, on that account, therefore; -arthin, a. desiring that; -arthîya, a. undertaken for that end, having that as its object; -ardhika, a. half as much; -arha, a. commensurate with that; -avastha, a. being in that condition or plight; being in the same condition=safe.

tadanu	ad. thereupon, then.

tanudāna	n. giving up the body; scanty gift; -bhâva, m. slenderness, scanti ness; -bhrit, m. embodied being, esp. human being; -mat, a. possessing a body; -madhya, n. waist; a. slender-waisted; -madhyama, a. slender-waisted; -ruha, n. feather; -sam gama, m. personal union.

tanutra	n. armour, cuirass; -trâna, n. id.; -tr-in, a. armoured.

tanucchada	m. feather; armour, cuirass; -ga, m. son: â, f. daughter; -tâ, f. smallness; meagreness, slenderness; condition of having a body; -tyag, a. abandoning the body, dying; risking life, brave;-tyâga, m. sacrificing or risking one's life.

tanu	a. (ûbrev;, v-î) thin; small; slender; scanty, moderate (in amount); delicate, weak; u, û, f. body, person, form; one's self (=refl. prn.: also pl.); manifestation: rarâtyâm tanur manyoh=frown of anger; iyam tanur mama, I here; svakâ tanuh, one's own person.

trasnu	a. timid.

danukabandha	m. N. of a demon; -ga, m. a Dânava.

dānu	f. n. drop; dew.

dānu	m. f. kind of demon.

durmanuṣya	m. bad man, villain; -mántu, a. hard to comprehend; -mantra, m. bad advice; -mantrita, pp. ill-advised; n. bad advice; -mantrin, m. bad minister; a. having a bad minister; -mára, a.dying hard; n. it is hard for (in.) to die: -tva, n. dying hard; -marana, n. id.; -maryâda, a. knowing no bounds: -tâ, f. abst. n.; -már sha, a. not to be forgotten; intolerable; re fractory, hostile; -marshana, a. hard to manage, intractable; -mâtsarya, n. bad jealousy; -mitrá, a. unfriendly; m. N.; -mukha, a. (î) ugly-faced, hideous; foul-mouthed, scurrilous; m. N.; -muhûrta, n. fatal hour; -medha, -medhás, a. of small wit, stupid, foolish; -medhâvin, a. id.; -maitra, a. hostile.

drāvayitnu	a. melting.

dhanadānuja	m. son of Kubera, ep. of Râvana.

dhanus	n. desert.

dhanus	n. bow; a measure of length (=4 hastas).

dhanuṣkāṇḍa	n. sg. bow and arrow; -k&asharp;ra, -krít, m. bow-maker; -koti (or î), notched end of a bow; -khanda, n. piece of a bow; -pâni, a. bow in hand, armed with a bow; -mat, a. (-î) armed with a bow; m. bowman: -tâ, f. archery.

dhanurgraha	m. bowman, archer; -grâha, -grâhin, m. id.; -gyâ, f. bowstring; -durga, a. inaccessible because of a desert; n. fortress protected by a desert; -dhara, a. bearing a bow; m. archer; -dhârin, -bhrit, a. m. id.; -yantra, n. bow; -yashti, f. id.; -yogyâ, f. practice in archery; -latâ, f. bow; -vidyâ, f. archery; -veda, m. id.

dhanu	f. sandbank; shore; island (also of clouds).

dhanu	m. bow.

dhānuṣka	a. armed with a bow; m. bowman.

dhūmānubandha	m. continu ous cloud of smoke.

dhenumat	a. yielding milk; con taining the word &open;dhenu.&close;

dhenukā	f. milch cow.

dhenu	a. yielding milk; f. milch cow, cow; fig. earth: pl. milk.

nanu	ad. not (emphatic); inter. pcl. not? (=nonne), surely? with inter. prn. or impv. pray; nanu ka, surely (at the begin ning of a sentence); nanu½astu--tathâ½api, well, even granting--yet; nanu mâ bhut tathâ½api, well, even granting that--is not the case -yet (nanu here to be taken with the apodosis); nanu is frequently used by com mentators to state a supposed objection, which is disposed of with a followingukyate, to this the reply is as follows.

nabhanu	m., &usharp;, f. spring.

nityānugṛhīta	pp. constantly tended (fire); -½udaka, -½udakin, a. always supplied with water; -½udita, pp. spontaneously arisen (knowledge).

padānuga	a. following on the heels of (g.); pleasant to (--°ree;); m. attendant; -½anusâsana, n. science of words; -½anta, m. end of a quarter-verse; end of a word, final; -½antara, n. another word; interval of a step: e sthitvâ, stopping after a step; -½anveshin, a. following a track.

panu	f. admiration, praise.

paritatnu	a. embracing.

pārśvānucara	m. attendant; -½âyâta, pp. come near, approached; -½âsan na, pp. standing beside, present; -½âsîna, pr. pt. sitting beside; -½asthi, n. rib; -½upapâr- sva, m. du. flank and shoulder-blade; -½upapîd am, abs. holding one's sides (with laughter).

puro&100;nuvākyā	f. intro ductory or invocatory verse (to be recited before the havis).

pṛṣṭhānuga	a. going behind, following; -½anugâmin, a. id.; -½avagunth ana-pata, m. horse-cloth; -½ashthîla, n. (?) tortoise's back.

pratyabhyanujñā	f. permission, consent; -½abhyâsam, ad. at every repetition; -½abhyutthâna, n. rising to receive (a guest).

bhānuja	m. son of the sun, planet Saturn; -tanayâ, f. daughter of the sun, pat. of the Yamunâ; -tâ, f. condition of the sun; -datta, m. N.; -dina, n. Sunday.

bhānu	m. lustre, brightness, light; ray; sun; N.: pl. the sons of Bhânu, the Âdityas.

bhānumat	a. luminous, bright, radiant; m. sun; N.: -î, f. N.; -maya, a. consisting of rays; -mitra, m. N.; -ratha, m. N.; -varman, m. N.; -vâra, m. Sunday.

manuṣya	a. (V.) human; suitable for men; friendly to mankind; m. human being; man (opp. woman); husband: pl. (V.) human progenitors (a class of Manes, who receive the Pinda offering).

manuṣa	m. man (RV.).

manuvṛta	pp. chosen by men; -vyâghra, m. tiger among=most illustrious of men; -sreshtha, spv. best among men, ep. of Vishnu.

manurhita	pp. kind or beneficial to men (RV.).

manuyuga	n. period of a Manu (=311,040,000 years).

manujendra	m. chief of men, king: -putrî, f. princess; -½îsvara, m. lord of men, king.

manuja	m. (sprung from Manu), man: -nâtha, m., -pati, m. lord of men, king, -loka, m. world of men, earth, -½âtma- gâ, f. daughter of men, -½adhipa, m. king of men, -½adhipati, m. id.

manu	a. wise (V.); m. man, coll. man kind (V.); thought (pl. mental powers); prayer, spell; N. of a divine being, progenitor of mankind; the most common among the many patronymic terms applied to him are Vaivasvata, Svâyambhuva, and Hairanyagarbha. In post-Vedic chronology seven Manus are assumed, each of whom presides over a cosmic period (manu½antara), acting in it as creator and preserver of beings; still later seven more Manus are added.

manusaṃhitā	f. code of Manu.

manus	m. (V.) human being; man kind; man (opp. woman).

manuṣvat	ad. (V.) as man or men, as among or for men; like Manu.

manuṣyendra	m. best of men; -½îsvara, m. lord of men, king.

manuṣyakāra	m. human effort; -gandha, m. human odour; -ganman, a. begotten by a man; -gâta, (pp.) n. human race; -gâti, f. id.; -tâ, f. human condition; manhood; -tvá, n. human condition, human ity: -m yâ, become men; -devá, m. god among men=Brâhman (V.) or king; -dhar man, m. ep. of Kubera; -pota, m. little boy; -prakriti, a. of human origin; -yagñá, m. offering to men (one of the five Mahâyagñas) =charity, hospitality; -rathá, m. human carriage; -râgá, -râgan, m. human king; -rûpá, n. human form; -loká, m. world of men; -vis, f., -visá, n., -visâ, f. human folk; -sâkshya, n. presence of men as witnesses: lc. before men as witnesses.

mānuṣyaka	a. human; n. hu man condition or nature, humanity: lc. as far as lies in man's power.

mānuṣya	n. human condition or nature, humanity; a. human.

mānuṣī	f. woman.

mānuṣaka	a. human; -tâ, f. human condition: -m gam, become a man; -tva, n. id.; -daivika, a. relating to men and to gods; manhood; -râkshasa, m. human devil: î, f. she-devil in human form; -lauk ika, a. belonging to the world of men, human; -½âda, m. man-eater: -tva, n. cannibalism.

mānuṣa	a. (î) human; humane, kind; m. human being, man; ep. of the three signs of the zodiac, Gemini, Virgo, and Libra: pl. races of men (of which five are assumed); n. manner of men (V.); human condition, humanity; human action or effort.

mānutantavya	m. pat. fr. Manu tantu.

yamānuga	a. attending on Yama; -½anukara, m. Yama's servant; -½antaka, m. Yama, god of death.

rājānujīvin	m. servant of a king; -½anna, n. food given by a king or Kshatriya; -½anya-tva, n. change of sove reign; -½apasada, m. fallen king; -½abhisheka, m. royal inauguration.

rājamānuṣa	m. king's man, royal official; -mârga, m. royal road, high way; procedure of kings, war; -mukhá, n. king's countenance; -muni, m. royal sage.

vagnu	m. [√ vak] call, cry, roar, sound (V.).

vanuṣya	den. P. assail (RV.).

vanu	m. assailant (RV.).

vanus	a. (RV.) eager, zealous; lov ing; eager to attack, assailing; m. assailant.

varatanu	a. (û) having a beautiful form; f. beautiful woman; -tantu, m. N. of an ancient teacher; -tâ, f. condition of being a blessing.

vaśānuga	a. following one's will; subject to the will of, obedient to (g., --°ree;).

vārttānujīvin	a. living by trade or business; -mâtra½avabodhana, n. knowledge based only on hearsay; -½âram bha, m. commercial undertaking, business; -vyatikara, m. bad news; -hara, m. mes senger; -hartri, -hâra, m. id.; -hârinî, f. female messenger.

dravitnu	a. swift.

vṛttyanuprāsa	m. alliteration; -½artham, ad. for the sake of a subsistence; -½uparodha, m. prejudice to maintenance; -½upâya, m. means of subsistence.

vṛddhānuśāsana	n. adage of sages; -½arka, m. declining sun; evening hour.

vairānubandhin	a. entail ing enmity: (-i)-tâ, f. entailment of enmity.

śaṃtanu	a. wholesome for the body; m. N. (RV., Br., C.): -tanûga, m. son of Samtanu, pat. of Bhîshma.

śramanud	a. dispelling fatigue; -mohita, pp. paralysed with fatigue; -vâri, n. perspiration: -bindu, -lesa, m. drop of per spiration; -vinayana, a. dispelling fatigue; -sîkara, m. perspiration; -½âdhâyin, a. caus ing trouble (conj.); -½ambu, n. perspiration.

śrutyanuprāsa	m. kind of alli teration (with consonants produced by the same organ of speech).

sanutar	ad. (V.) aside, away, far from (ab.): w. yu or dhâ, keep off, drive away.

samanujñāta	pp. permitted to depart; -anuvrata, a. entirely obedient or devoted, to (ac.).

samaśnuva	a. (î) attaining [fr. pr. base of √ 1. as].

samanuṣya	a. together with men; frequented: -râganya, a. together with those of royal race among men.

sānuka	a. eager for prey (RV.1).

sānu	m. n. [perh. goal: √ san] sum mit, ridge, back, surface (V.); mountain ridge, table-land, plateau (C.).

sānumat	a. having a ridge or plateau (mountain); m. mountain: -î, f. N. of an Apsaras; -½anurâga, a. attached, af fectionate; enamoured, of (lc.); -½anusaya, a. repenting; irritable; having a remnant of the consequences of action which brings the soul from the other world to the earth; -½anû kâsa, a. together with the after-shine; -½anû pa, a. having well-watered soil; -½antaka, a. together with Yama.

sānukampa	a. compassionate, to wards (lc.): -m, ad. compassionately; -½anu kûla, a. propitious, favourable; -½ânukûl ya, n. assistance; -½anukrosa, a. tender, compassionate, merciful: -m,ad. compas sionately, -tâ, f. compassion; -½anuga, a. together with his retinue; -½anutarsham, ad. by means of thirst; -½anutâpa, a. re penting; -½anunaya, a. courteous, friendly: -m, ad. kindly; -½anunâsika, a.nasalised; -½anubandha, a. continuous, uninterrupted; entailing consequences; with one's belong ings: -ka, a. provided with an indicatory letter or syllable.

sutanu	a. 1. very slender; 2. having a beautiful form: f. fair woman; -tantu, a. (&ubrevcirc;) having fair offspring; m. N. of a Dânava; -tantri, a. beautifully accompanied on the lute (song); -tápas, a.warming (V.); per forming severe penances (C.).

sūnu	m. 1. [√ 1. su] Soma-presser (RV.); 2. [√ 2. sû] son (V., C.); coll. offspring (RV., rare); younger brother (C., rare): -tâ, f. sonship.

sautrāmadhanus	n. rainbow.

stanayitnu	m. [fr. cs. of √ stan] thunder (sg. pl.; V., C.); thunder-cloud (C.).

sthāsnu	a. [√ sthâ] immovable; durable, lasting, permanent.

snuh	f. (nm. k) a plant (wolf's milk): -â, -î, f. id.

snuṣā	f. daughter-in-law: -ga, a. having sexual intercourse with a daughter-in-law; -tva, n. condition of a daughter-in-law.

snu	n. [=sânu] surface, height (V.).

svānubhāva	m. enjoyment of or fondness for property; -½anurûpa, a. resembling oneself; suited to one's fashion; -½anta, m. own end; own death; own territory; n. (province of the ego), heart(as the seat of the emotions; ord. mg.): -ga, m. (heart-born), love, -vat, a. having a heart.

hanu	f. [crusher: √ han] jaw: -mat, a. having strong jaws; m. N. of a monkey chief, son of the god of wind, ally of Râma on his expedition to La&ndot;kâ for the recovery of Sîtâ; N. of various men;û-mat, m. Hanumat, the monkey chief.

hṛdayānuga	a. gratifying the heart (friend, speech); -½âvargaka, a. win ning the heart of (g.); â-vídh, a. piercing the heart (RV.); -½îsa, m. lord of the heart, lover, husband.

Bloomfield Vedic
Concordance

Results for nu248 results0 resultsResults for nu539 results


nu	pāhi duhitar divaḥ AVP.6.20.5d. See ni pāhi.

nu	vāṃ jihvā ghṛtam ācaraṇyat MS.4.11.2d: 166.1. See under anu vāṃ etc.

nudāma	enam apa rudhmo asmat AVś.12.3.43c.

nudañ	chatrūn pradahan me sapatnān Vait.14.1c.

nudan	sapatnān adharāṃś ca kṛṇvan AVś.19.33.2c; AVP.11.13.2c. See under ṛṇak etc.

nudann	arātiṃ paripanthinaṃ mṛgam AVś.3.15.1c.

nudasva	kāma pra ṇudasva kāma AVś.9.2.4a. P: nudasva kāma Vait.4.5; Kauś.48.5.

nudasva	yāḥ parispṛdhaḥ RV.9.53.1c; SV.2.1064c.

nudasva	rakṣaḥ prataraṃ dhehy enām AVś.11.1.21b.

nudasvādevayuṃ	janam RV.9.63.24c; SV.1.492c.

nudethāṃ	kaṇvā nir ito arātim AVP.1.86.2c.

nuttā	dhāvata brahmaṇā AVś.8.8.19b.

nuttāḥ	putthajño mayā AVP.8.16.1d--3d.

nutthā	acyutaṃ sadasas pari svāt RV.6.17.5d.

nuvantaṃ	pāpayāmuyā RV.1.29.5b; AVś.20.74.5b.

ajyamānāyānubrūhi	# Apś.7.10.1.

atinutto	nāvyā etu srotyāḥ # AVś.8.7.15d.

adhenuṃ	dasrā staryaṃ viṣaktām # RV.1.117.20a.

adhyakṣāyānukṣattāram	# TB.3.4.1.9. See ādhy-, and cf. aupadraṣṭryāyānukṣattāram.

anānukṛtyam	apunaś cakāra # RV.10.68.10c; AVś.20.16.10c.

anānukṛtyā	raṇyā cakartha # RV.10.112.5b.

anānujām	anujāṃ mām akarta # TS.4.3.11.3a; KS.39.10a; PG.3.3.5a.

anānudaḥ	pariṣūtā ṛjiśvanā # RV.1.53.8d; AVś.20.21.8d.

anānudaṃ	vṛṣabha radhracodanam # RV.10.38.5b; JB.1.228b.

anānudo	vṛṣabho jagmir āhavam # RV.2.23.11a.

anānudo	vṛṣabho dodhato vadhaḥ # RV.2.21.4a.

anānubhūtīr	avadhūnvānaḥ # RV.6.47.17c.

anāmayitnubhyāṃ	tvā (AVś. hastābhyām; AVP. śaṃbhubhyām) # RV.10.137.7c; AVś.4.13.7c; AVP.5.18.8c.

anu	kāṇḍam atho phalam # TA.6.9.1d.

anukāmaṃ	tarpayethām # RV.1.17.3a.

anukāmā	śatakrato # RV.8.92.13b.

anukāśena	bāhyam # MS.3.15.2: 178.5. See anūkāśena, and antareṇānukāśam.

anukūlam	ivodakam # AVś.5.14.13b; AVP.2.71.5b.

anu	kṛṣṇe vasudhitī (RV.3.31.17a, vasudhitī jihāte) # RV.3.31.17a; 4.48.3a.

anu	krāmema dhītibhiḥ # RV.5.53.11c.

anu	krośanti kṣitayo bhareṣu # RV.4.38.5b; N.4.24b.

anukśātre	namaḥ # KS.26.12. See anukhyātre.

anu	kṣatraṃ tu yad balam (VārG. -traṃ ca yad yaśam !) # MG.1.13.7c; VārG.15.4c.

anu	kṣatram anu saho yajatra # RV.6.25.8c; TS.1.6.12.1c; 7.13.1c; MS.4.12.2c: 182.6; KS.8.16c; TB.2.8.5.7c.

anu	kṣatraṃ maṃhanā manyata dyauḥ # RV.4.17.1b; MS.4.11.4b: 171.3; KS.6.10b.

anu	kṣatrāya mamire sahāṃsi # RV.7.21.7b.

anukṣaranti	kākudam # RV.8.69.12c; AVś.20.92.9c; MS.4.7.8c: 104.12; N.5.27c.

anukhyātre	namaḥ # GB.2.2.19; Vait.18.15; Apś.20.1.17. See anukśātre, and cf. agnir upadraṣṭā etc.

anu	gā iva tasthima # RV.9.112.3d; N.6.6d.

anu	gātrā vi dhāvatu # RV.8.17.5b; AVś.20.4.2b.

anu	gāvo 'nu bhagaḥ kanīnām # RV.1.163.8b; VS.29.19b; TS.4.6.7.3b; KSA.6.3b.

anugrāsaś	(PB. anugrābhaś) ca vṛtrahan # RV.8.1.14b; AVś.20.116.2b; PB.9.10.1b.

anu	ghen mandī maghonaḥ # RV.8.2.33c.

anucite	tvā # Apś.17.13.3.

anu	cainam abhutsata # AVś.12.4.1b.

anu	chya śyāmena tvacam etāṃ viśastaḥ # AVś.9.5.4a. P: anu chya śyāmena Kauś.64.10.

anu	janān yatate pañca dhīraḥ # RV.9.92.3d.

anu	jāyantāṃ bahavaḥ sujātam # AVś.2.13.5d; AVP.15.6.9d; HG.1.7.17d; ApMB.2.6.15d.

anujighraṃ	pramṛśantam # AVś.8.6.6a.

anujñānānumantraṇaiḥ	# GB.2.2.5b.

anujyeṣṭhaṃ	varca āyur vikalpya # AVP.2.23.1b.

anu	tad urvī rodasī jihātām # RV.7.34.24a.

anu	tan no jāspatir maṃsīṣṭa # RV.7.38.6a.

anutanvanti	kīkasāḥ # AVś.9.8.14b.

anutiṣṭhan	prokta ātmani taṃ ni dhatte # AVP.8.15.4c.

anu	te dāyi maha indriyāya # RV.6.25.8a; TS.1.6.12.1a; 7.13.1a; MS.4.12.2a: 182.5; KS.8.16a; TB.2.8.5.7a; Aś.2.18.19; 9.5.16. P: anu te dāyi TS.2.5.12.5.

anu	te dyaur bṛhatī vīryaṃ mama # RV.1.57.5c; AVś.20.15.5c.

anu	te manyatām agniḥ # AVP.5.11.1a.

anu	te śuṣmaṃ turayantam īyatuḥ # RV.8.99.6a; AVś.20.105.2a; SV.2.988a; VS.33.67a.

anuttaṃ	vajrin vīryam # RV.1.80.7b; SV.1.412b.

anuttamanyum	ajaram # RV.8.6.35c.

anuttamanyur	yo aheva revān # RV.8.96.19b.

anuttam	asmai kṣatraṃ viśvāyu # RV.7.34.11b.

anuttam	ā te maghavan nakir nu (MS. ṇu) # RV.1.165.9a; VS.33.79a; MS.4.11.3a: 169.7; KS.9.18a. P: anuttam ā te śś.11.2.5.

anuttaś	carṣaṇīdhṛtiḥ # SV.1.248d; 2.761d. See next but one.

anutta	svād āsthānāt # śB.11.5.5.8c.

anuttā	carṣaṇīdhṛtā # RV.8.90.5d. See prec. but one.

anu	tritasya yudhyataḥ # RV.8.7.24a.

anu	triśokaḥ śatam āvahan nṝn # RV.10.29.2c; AVś.20.76.2c.

anu	tvāgniḥ prāviśat # AVś.10.10.7a.

anu	tvā divyā vṛṣṭiḥ sacatām # VS.13.30; MS.2.7.16: 100.4; KS.39.3; śB.7.5.1.8; Apś.16.25.2.

anu	tvā devavītaye # VS.5.9; śB.3.5.1.32.

anu	tvā devāḥ śavasā madanti # RV.10.73.8c.

anu	tvā patnīr hṛṣitaṃ vayaś ca # RV.1.103.7c.

anu	tvā mahī pājasī acakre # RV.1.121.11a.

anu	tvā mātā pitaro madantu # VS.6.20d; TS.1.3.10.1d; 6.3.11.3d; MS.1.2.17d: 27.10; KS.3.7d; śB.3.8.3.37d.

anu	tvā mātā manyatām anu pitā # VS.4.20a; 6.9a; TS.1.2.4.2a; 6.1.7.7; MS.1.2.4: 13.5; 1.2.15: 24.12; 3.7.6: 82.8; 3.9.6: 124.12; KS.2.5a; 3.5a; 16.21a; 24.3; 26.8; śB.3.2.4.20a; 7.4.5; SMB.2.2.9a. Ps: anu tvā mātā manyatām Mś.1.8.3.8; 2.1.3.36; GG.3.10.20; anu tvā KhG.3.4.3. Cf. anv enaṃ mātā.

anu	tvā mitrāvaruṇāv ihāvatam (AVP. -varuṇehāvatām) # AVP.4.3.6a; KS.37.9a; TB.2.7.8.2a. P: anu tvā mitrāvaruṇau TB.2.7.16.2.

anu	tvā ratho anu maryo arvan # RV.1.163.8a; VS.29.19a; TS.4.6.7.3a; KSA.6.3a.

anu	tvā rabhe # AVś.6.48.1--3; TS.3.2.1.1 (ter); 7.5.19.1 (bis),2; KSA.5.15 (ter); GB.1.5.12--14; PB.1.3.8; 5.12,15; śB.12.3.4.3--5; śś.2.12.9; 6.8.10; Apś.12.17.15; 20.13.4; Mś.2.3.6.8; 2.4.4.17; 2.5.1.22. Cf. anu tvendrā, anu mā rabhasva, anu va, tam anvā, tām anvā, tāv anvā, te vām ā rabhe, and na mā rabhadhvam.

anu	tvā rājann arvato na hinvan # RV.5.36.2c.

anu	tvā rodasī ubhe # RV.8.6.38a; 8.76.11a; AVś.20.42.2a; SV.2.339a; JB.3.89.

anu	tvāvatu savitā savena # KS.37.9d; TB.2.7.16.2d. See pūṣā tvāvatu etc.

anu	tvā vayam emasi # AVś.10.4.6b.

anu	tvā viśve devā avantu (AVP.KS. viśve avantu devāḥ) # AVP.4.3.5c; KS.37.9c; TB.2.7.8.2c. Cf. anu māṃ mitrā-.

anu	tvā sapte pradiśaḥ sacantām # VS.29.2c; TS.5.1.11.1c; MS.3.16.2c: 184.1; KSA.6.2c.

anu	tvā somo anv agnir āvīt # AVP.4.3.5b. See anu somo anv agnir.

anu	tvā skambho dadatāṃ piteva cakramāṇam # AVP.15.12.10c.

anu	tvā hariṇo vṛṣā (Apś. mṛgaḥ) # AVś.3.7.2a; AVP.3.2.2a; Apś.13.7.16a.

anu	tvāhighne adha deva devāḥ # RV.6.18.14a; MS.4.12.3a: 183.4; KS.8.16a; Aś.9.5.16.

anu	tvendrā rabhāmahe # AVś.5.8.9e; AVP.7.18.9e. Cf. under anu tvā rabhe.

anu	tvendro madatv (AVP. tvendro 'vatv) anu bṛhaspatiḥ # AVP.4.3.5a; KS.37.9a; TB.2.7.8.1a. P: anu tvendro madatu TB.2.7.16.2. See anu mām indro.

anu	daha sahamūrān kravyādaḥ (SV. kayādaḥ) # RV.10.87.19c; SV.1.80c. See sahamūrān anu.

anudeyī	yathābhavat # RV.10.135.5d.

anu	devān rathiro yāsi sādhan # RV.3.1.17d.

anu	devā mamire vīryaṃ te # RV.1.163.8d; VS.29.19d; TS.4.6.7.3d; KSA.6.3d.

anu	(TA. anu vāṃ) dyāvāpṛthivī amaṃsātām (TA.4.9.3, once, and 5.8.2, maṃsātām) # VS.38.13; śB.14.2.2.26; TA.4.9.3 (bis); 5.8.2,3; śś.8.15.13; Lś.5.7.5. See anu māṃ etc.

anu	dyāvāpṛthivī ā tatantha (AVś. viveśa; TS.4.1.2.3d, and TB. tatāna) # RV.8.48.13b; AVś.7.82.4d; 18.1.27d; VS.11.17d; 19.54b; TS.2.6.12.2b; 4.1.2.3d; MS.1.8.9d: 128.12; 4.10.6b: 156.10; KS.16.2d; 21.14b; śB.6.3.3.6; TB.1.2.1.23d; KA.1.198.5d.

anu	dyāvāpṛthivī oṣadhībhiḥ # AVP.4.3.6b; KS.37.9b.

anu	dyāvāpṛthivī tat ta (MS. tā) ojaḥ # RV.6.18.15a; MS.4.12.3a: 183.6; KS.8.16a.

anu	dyāvāpṛthivī devaputre # TB.3.7.7.1; Apś.10.3.2.

anu	dyāvāpṛthivī pūrvahūtau # ā.5.1.1.11d. Cf. śaṃ no dyāvāpṛthivī etc.

anu	dyāvāpṛthivī rodasī ubhe # RV.2.1.15d.

anu	dyāvāpṛthivī viśvaśaṃbhū # TB.2.7.8.2b.

anu	dyāvāpṛthivī supraṇītiḥ (śś. supraṇīte) # Aś.4.7.4d; śś.5.10.10d.

anu	dyukṣo varuṇa indrasakhā # RV.7.34.24b.

anu	drapsāsa indavaḥ # RV.9.6.4a.

anudraṣṭre	namaḥ # KS.26.12; Apś.20.1.17.

anu	druhyuṃ ni vṛṇag vajrabāhuḥ # RV.7.18.12b.

anudre	cid yo dhṛṣatā varaṃ sate # RV.10.115.6c.

anu	dvā jahitā nayaḥ # RV.4.30.19a.

anu	dvipadānu catuṣpadā vayam # VS.26.19c. See anu prajayānv.

anu	dhāmāny akramīt # RV.9.114.1b.

anu	nikṣanti pṛṣṭīḥ # AVś.9.8.15b.

anu	nu sthāty avṛkābhir ūtibhiḥ # RV.2.31.3c.

anu	no 'dyānumatiḥ # VS.34.9a; TS.3.3.11.3a; 4.4.12.5; 7.15.5; TB.3.1.3.3; 12.1.1; 3.4; TA.4.11.2; 5.9.1; Aś.4.12.2a; Apś.15.13.5. Cf. BṛhD.4.88. See anv adya, and anv iyaṃ.

anunonuvataś	carān # RV.8.92.33b.

anu	no neṣathā sugam # RV.8.47.11d.

anu	no mārṣṭu (VSṭS.śBṭA. anu mārṣṭu) tanvo (TS. tanuvo) yad viriṣṭam (VSṭS.KS.śBṭA.KA.śś. viliṣṭam) # AVś.6.53.3d; VS.2.24d; 8.14d; TS.1.4.44.2d; MS.1.3.38d: 44.9; 4.14.17d: 247.5; KS.4.12d; śB.1.9.3.6d; 4.4.3.14d; 4.8d; TA.2.4.1d; KA.1.198.4d; śś.4.11.6d.

anu	no mitrāvaruṇā ihāvatām # KA.1.198.13a. See utā no mitrāvaruṇā, and upa no mitrāvaruṇāv.

anu	nau śūra maṃsate (TS. maṃsatai) # RV.8.62.11d; TS.7.4.15.1d; KSA.4.4d.

anunmadito	agado yathāsat # AVP.5.17.6d. Cf. yadānunmadito.

anupad	asi # VS.15.8. Cf. anuroho.

anupadasyam	annādyam āpnavāni # śś.4.8.6.

anupade	tvā # VS.15.8. Cf. anurohāya.

anu	paścāt kavayo yanti rebhāḥ # RV.1.163.12d; VS.29.23d; TS.4.6.7.5d; KSA.6.3d.

anupūrvaṃ	yatamānā yati ṣṭha (AVś. yati stha; TA. yatiṣṭa) # RV.10.18.6b; AVś.12.2.24b; TA.6.10.1b.

anupūrvaṃ	vṛṣaṇā codayantā # RV.1.117.3d.

anupūrvaṃ	kalpayatām ihaiva # Kauś.124.2d,3d.

anupūrvavatsāṃ	dhenum # AVś.9.5.29a.

anu	pūrvāḥ kṛpate vāvaśānā # RV.1.113.10c.

anu	pūrvāṇi cakhyathur yugāni # RV.7.70.4d.

anu	pūrvāṇy okyā # RV.8.25.17a.

anupauhvad	(ApMB. anu po 'hvad) anupahvayet (ApMB. anuhvayaḥ) # HG.1.14.4a; ApMB.2.22.9a (ApG.8.23.7).

anu	prajayānv indriyeṇa # TB.3.7.10.2c; Apś.9.14.1c. See anu dvipadānu.

anu	pratnasyaukasaḥ # RV.1.30.9a; 8.69.18a; AVś.20.26.3a; 20.92.15a; SV.2.94a.

anu	pratnāsa āyavaḥ # RV.9.23.2a; SV.1.502a.

anu	pra yanti vṛṣṭayaḥ # RV.5.53.10c.

anu	prayāṇam uṣaso vi rājati # RV.5.81.2d; AVś.7.73.6d; VS.12.3d; TS.4.1.10.4d; MS.2.7.8d: 84.15; 3.2.1: 15.3; KS.16.8d; śB.6.7.2.4; N.12.13d.

anu	pra yeje jana ojo asya # RV.6.36.2a.

anupravacanīyam	# see bhavān anupravacanīyam.

anu	pravata āśata # RV.9.22.6b.

anuprahara	# śB.1.8.3.19; 9.2.17; 2.5.2.43; 6.1.46; Kś.3.6.14; 7.15; Apś.3.7.4; Mś.1.3.4.20.

anu	prāviśathā vaśe # AVś.10.10.22b.

anuprāsyemāni	pṛthumadhyamāni # AVP.15.12.11c.

anu	preyatur āñjana # AVś.19.44.10b; AVP.15.3.10b.

anubadhnāti	śāmbaraḥ # TA.1.10.3b.

anubandhyo	'smy ahaṃ vibhuḥ # TA.1.11.4c.

anu	brahma suvīryam # MG.1.13.7b; VārG.15.4b.

anubruvāṇo	adhy eti na svapan # RV.5.44.13d.

anubrūhi	# AB.2.2.1; śB.1.5.2.8; 4.6.7.19; 9.4.3.15 (bis); 5.1.40 (bis); Kś.3.3.13; Apś.7.10.1.

anu	bhrātā (SMB. bhrātānu) sagarbhyaḥ # VS.4.20b; 6.9b; TS.1.2.4.2b; MS.1.2.4: 13.6; 1.2.15: 24.12; 4.13.4b: 203.9; KS.2.5b; 3.5b; 16.21b; AB.2.6.12b; śB.3.2.4.20b; 7.4.5; TB.3.6.6.1b; Aś.3.3.1b; SMB.2.2.9b.

anu	ma idaṃ vrataṃ vratapatir manyatām anu dīkṣāṃ dīkṣāpatir añjasā # MS.1.2.7: 16.14. See anu me dīkṣāṃ, and upa mā dīkṣāyāṃ.

anumataṃ	pṛthivyemaṃ pacāmi # AVP.5.40.2a.

anumataye	svāhā # śB.14.9.4.18; BṛhU.6.4.18; AG.4.3.26; śG.2.14.4; Kauś.45.16. P: anumataye PG.2.10.9; BDh.3.9.4. Cf. SaṃnyāsaU.1. See anumatyai etc., and asūyantyai.

anumatāṃ	pathibhiḥ pārayantīm # Aś.4.13.2d.

anumatiṃ	prati bhūṣanty āyavaḥ # TS.3.3.11.4b.

anumatiḥ	sarasvatī # AVP.1.50.3a.

anumatiḥ	sarvam idaṃ babhūva # AVś.7.20.6a. Referred to as ānumatī (sc. ṛk) Kauś.23.4; 42.11; 45.10; 82.38.

anumate	anumataṃ sudānu # AVś.7.20.4b; KS.13.16b.

anumate	anu hi maṃsase naḥ # AVś.7.20.6d.

anumate	'nu manyasva (JG.1.4 with ūha, -nv amaṃsthāḥ) # GG.1.3.2 (cf. 11); KhG.1.2.18; HG.1.2.9; ApG.1.2.3; JG.1.3,4.

anumate	'nu manyasva na idam # KS.35.12a. See next.

anumate	'nv idaṃ manyasva # AVś.6.131.2a. See prec.

anumate	mṛḍayā naḥ svasti # RV.10.59.6d.

anumatyā	aṣṭākapālaḥ # VS.29.60.

anumatyai	caruḥ (MS. carum) # TS.7.5.14.1; 5.22.1; MS.3.15.10: 180.13; KSA.5.10,19.

anumatyai	caruṃ vaiśvānaraṃ dvādaśakapālam # MS.3.15.11: 181.5.

anumatyai	svāhā # TB.3.12.2.2--8; 4.2--6. See under anumataye etc.

anu	manyatāṃ trivṛtā vadhena # AVP.2.59.9d. See next.

anu	manyatāṃ trivṛd ābadhe me # AVś.5.28.11d. See prec.

anu	manyatām aditiḥ # AVP.5.40.2c.

anu	manyatām anumanyamānaḥ (TS. -mānā) # AVś.7.20.3a; TS.3.3.11.4a.

anu	manyantāṃ savanāya somam # TS.3.1.8.2d; Mś.2.3.3.7d.

anumanyantām	ahṛṇīyamāṇāḥ # AVś.1.35.4d; 8.2.21d.

anu	manyantāṃ marutaḥ pṛśnimātaraḥ # AVP.5.37.8b.

anu	manyasva suyajā yajāma (Mś. suyajā yaje hi) # TS.3.1.4.1c; 3.9.1c; Mś.1.8.3.1c.

anu	mā tanuhy asmin yajñe 'syāṃ sādhukṛtyāyām asminn anne 'smiṃl loke # VSK.2.6.9; Kś.3.8.25. See anu mā saṃtanuhi.

anu	mātaraṃ pṛthivīṃ vi vāvṛte # RV.8.103.2c; SV.1.51c; 2.867c.

anumādyaḥ	pavamāno manīṣibhiḥ # RV.9.107.11c; SV.2.1040c.

anumānaś	catuṣṭayam # TA.1.2.1b.

anumānāvaha	devān devāyate yajamānāya # MS.1.2.15: 25.1; 3.9.6: 124.14.

anu	māṃ dyāvāpṛthivī anu me maṃsātām # MS.4.9.9: 129.4. See anu dyāvāpṛthivī amaṃsātām.

anu	mām indro anu māṃ bṛhaspatiḥ # ā.5.1.1.11a. See anu tvendro.

anu	mām aitu yad yaśaḥ (VārG. yaśam !) # MG.1.13.7d; VārG.15.4d.

anu	māṃ mitrāvaruṇāv ihāvatām # ā.5.1.1.11c. Cf. anu tvā viśve.

anu	māyantu devatāḥ # MG.1.13.7a; VārG.15.4a. P: anu māyantu MG.1.13.9.

anu	mā rabhasva (KS.Apś. rabhadhvam) # KS.35.2,6,9; śś.2.12.10; Apś.14.17.1; 28.5. Cf. under anu tvā rabhe.

anu	mārṣṭu etc. # see anu no mārṣṭu.

anu	mā śrīr juṣatām anu yaśaḥ # śG.6.5.2.

anu	mā saṃtanuhi prajayā paśubhī rāyaspoṣeṇa suprajāstvena suvīryeṇa # śś.2.12.10. See anu mā tanuhy.

anu	mā sarvo yajño 'yam etu # TB.3.7.10.2a; Apś.14.31.8a.

anu	mṛkṣīṣṭa tanvaṃ duruktaiḥ # RV.1.147.4d.

anu	me dīkṣāṃ dīkṣāpatir manyatām (KS. dīkṣāpatayo manyadhvam) anu (śB.3.6.3.21, -patir amaṃstānu) tapas tapaspatiḥ (KS. -patayaḥ) # VS.5.6; TS.1.2.10.2; KS.2.2; GB.2.2.3; śB.3.4.3.9; 6.3.21; Vait.13.18. Ps: anu me dīkṣāṃ dīkṣāpatir manyatām TS.6.2.2.4; anu me dīkṣām Apś.11.1.3. See under anu ma idaṃ.

anu	me dyaur manyatām anv antarikṣam # AVP.5.40.2b.

anu	yaṃ viśve madanty (AVś.5.2.1d, anu yad enaṃ madanti viśva) ūmāḥ # RV.10.120.1d; AVś.5.2.1d; 20.107.4d; AVP.6.1.1d; SV.2.833d; VS.33.80d; JB.2.144; ā.5.1.6.5d; Apś.21.22.3d; Mś.7.2.6.6d; N.14.24d.

anu	yat pūrvā aruhat sanājuvaḥ # RV.1.141.5c.

anu	yad īṃ maruto mandasānam # RV.5.29.2a.

anu	yad enaṃ etc. # see anu yaṃ viśve etc.

anu	yad gāva sphurān ṛjipyam # RV.6.67.11c.

anu	yad vāṃ śravasyā sudānū # RV.1.184.4c.

anuyā	rātryā rātrīṃ jinva # VS.15.6. See anuvāya, anuvāsi, anvāsi, and ahnāṃsi.

anu	yoddhāram ichatām # AVP.2.25.2b.

anu	yoniṃ devakṛtaṃ carantīḥ # RV.3.33.4b.

anurādhebhyaḥ	svāhā # TB.3.1.5.1.

anu	rādhyāsma dvipadā catuṣpadā # AVś.19.15.2b; AVP.3.35.2b.

anurūpāya	svāhā # TS.7.3.18.1; KSA.3.8.

anurodhanam	ud bhare # AVś.6.102.3d.

anurohaṃ	jinva # Vait.26.11. See anūroheṇā-.

anurohāya	tvā # PB.1.10.10; Vait.26.11. See anūroheṇā-, and cf. anupade tvā.

anuroho	'si # TS.4.4.1.3; GB.2.2.14; PB.1.10.10; Vait.26.11. See anūroho, and cf. anupad asi.

anulipsadhvam	# Kś.25.12.23.

anulimpasva	# PG.2.14.17.

anulbaṇaṃ	vayata (KS. vayasi) joguvām apaḥ # RV.10.53.6c; TS.3.4.2.2c; 3.6; KS.13.11c,12; AB.3.38.6; Apś.19.17.13.

anulbaṇena	cakṣasā # RV.8.25.9b.

anu	va ārabhe # KS.35.2,6,9; 38.12; Apś.14.17.1; 16.1.3; 28.5. Cf. under anu tvā rabhe.

anuvañcate	svāhā # TS.7.4.22.1; KSA.5.1.

anuvatsarīṇāṃ	svastim āśāste # TB.1.4.10.3; Apś.8.21.1. See next.

anuvatsarīyodvatsarīye	svastim āśāse # Mś.1.7.8.6. See prec.

anuvatsare	sīda # KS.39.6.

anuvatsaro	'si # KS.40.6.

anuvarṣate	svāhā # TS.7.5.11.2; KSA.5.2.

anu	vaś cety agriyaṃ madāya # RV.4.37.4d.

anu	vāṃ jihvā ghṛtam ā caraṇyat # KS.4.16d. See upa vāṃ etc., nu vāṃ, prati te jihvā, and prati vāṃ jihvā.

anu	vāṃ dyāvāpṛthivī amaṃsātām (maṃsātām) # see anu dyāvāetc.

anu	vām ekaḥ pavir ā vavarta (TB. vavartti) # RV.5.62.2d; MS.4.14.10d: 231.13; TB.2.8.6.6d.

anuvāya	rātryai rātrīṃ jinva # MS.2.8.8: 112.8. See under anuyā.

anuvāsi	rātriyai (KS. rātryai) tvā rātriṃ (KS. rātrīṃ) jinva # TS.4.4.1.1; KS.17.7; 37.17. Ps: anuvāsi TS.3.5.2.3; anuvā TS.5.3.6.1. See under anuyā.

anuvittyai	svāhā # TB.3.12.2.8.

anuvidvān	vitāvati # AVś.12.2.38d,52d.

anu	vipram atakṣata # RV.1.86.3b.

anu	viprā amādiṣuḥ # RV.9.8.4c; SV.2.531c.

anu	viprāso amadann avasyavaḥ # RV.9.86.24b.

anu	vi yantu gahvare # AVP.8.18.3b.

anu	viśve adaduḥ somapeyam # RV.5.29.5b.

anu	viśve maruto ye sahāsaḥ # RV.7.34.24c.

anu	vīrair anu puṣyāsma (TB.Apś. rādhyāma) gobhiḥ # VS.26.19a; TB.3.7.10.2a; Apś.9.14.1a.

anuvṛtaṃ	jinva # Vait.26.8. See anūvṛtā-.

anuvṛte	(KS. anū-) tvā # KS.17.7; 37.17; PB.1.10.9; Vait.26.8. See anūvṛtā-.

anuvṛd	(KS. anū-) asi # KS.17.7; 37.17; GB.2.2.14; PB.1.10.9; Vait.26.8.

anuveda	para enāvareṇa # RV.1.164.18b. See avaḥ pareṇa para etc.

anuvrataḥ	pituḥ putraḥ # AVś.3.30.2a; AVP.5.19.2a.

anu	vrataṃ rakṣamāṇāv ajuryam # RV.5.69.1d.

anu	vrataṃ varuṇo yanti mitraḥ # RV.4.13.2c.

anu	vrataṃ vratapā dīdhyānāḥ # RV.3.4.7d; 7.8d.

anu	vrataṃ savitur daivyasya # RV.2.38.6d.

anu	vrataṃ savitur moky āgāt # RV.2.38.3d.

anu	vrataṃ carasi viśvavāre # RV.3.61.1d.

anu	vratāni vartate haviṣmān # RV.1.183.3b.

anu	vratāny aditer ṛdhantaḥ # RV.7.87.7c.

anuvratām	apa jāyām arodham # RV.10.34.2d.

anu	vratāya nimiteva tasthuḥ # RV.3.30.4d.

anuvratāya	randhayann apavratān # RV.1.51.9a.

anuvratā	rohiṇī rohitasya # AVś.13.1.22a. Cf. TB.3.1.1.2.

anu	vrātāsas tava sakhyam īyuḥ # RV.1.163.8c; VS.29.19c; TS.4.6.7.3c; KSA.6.3c.

anuśaṃsiṣo	diśaḥ # ā.4.1b; Mahānāmnyaḥ 7b.

anu	śuśrāva kaś cana # AVś.11.4.25d.

anu	śūra carāmasi # RV.8.61.5d; AVś.20.118.1d; SV.1.253d; 2.929d; JB.3.217d.

anu	śyenī sacate vartanīr aha # RV.1.140.9d.

anu	śriyā tanvam ukṣamāṇaḥ # RV.6.66.4d.

anu	śrutām amatiṃ vardhad urvīm # RV.5.62.5a.

anu	śvāntasya kasya cit pareyuḥ # RV.10.61.21b.

anu	ṣiñca nas tat kuru # AVP.15.15.9a.

anuṣṭuk	etc. # see anuṣṭup.

anuṣṭup	chanda indriyam # VS.21.14c; MS.3.11.11c: 158.3; KS.38.10c; TB.2.6.18.2c. Cf. anuṣṭubhaṃ etc.

anuṣṭup	chandaḥ # VS.14.10,18; 15.5; TS.3.1.6.2; 4.3.1.1; 5.1; 7.1; 12.2; MS.2.7.20: 105.13; 2.8.2: 108.1; 2.8.3: 108.13; 2.8.7: 112.2; 2.13.14: 163.11; KS.17.2,3,6; 39.4,7; śB.8.2.4.15; 3.3.6; 5.2.5; Apś.16.28.1.

anuṣṭupchandaso	'gnihuta indraharivatpītasya # Mś.2.5.3.11. Cf. Apś.14.3.6.

anuṣṭupchandaso	'gnihuta indrābhiśarvarapītasya # Mś.2.5.3.15. Cf. indrāya tvāpiśarvarāya.

anuṣṭup	te 'bhigaraḥ # VS.8.47; VSK.8.22.1; śB.11.5.9.7. P: anuṣṭup te Kś.12.5.17.

anuṣṭup	tvā chandasām avatu (KS. chandasāvatu) # TS.1.8.13.1; MS.2.6.10: 69.17; KS.15.7. See next.

anuṣṭup	tvāvatu # VS.10.13; śB.5.4.1.6. See prec.

anuṣṭup	(TS. anuṣṭuk) paṅktyā saha # VS.23.33b; TS.5.2.11.1b; MS.3.12.21b: 167.3; KSA.10.5b.

anuṣṭup	(TB. anuṣṭuk) paṅktyai (Mś. paṅktaye) # TB.3.7.6.2; Apś.3.18.4; Mś.5.2.15.2. See next, and anuṣṭub bṛhatyai.

anuṣṭup	prajāpataye # VSK.2.3.2; Kś.2.1.19. See under prec.

anuṣṭup	śāradī # VS.13.57; TS.4.3.2.2; MS.2.7.19: 104.10; KS.16.19; śB.8.1.2.5.

anuṣṭub	bṛhatyai # Vait.1.18. See under anuṣṭup paṅktyai.

anuṣṭub	(KS.GB.Vait. anuṣṭum) mitrasya (GB.Vait. mitrasya patnī) # MS.1.9.2: 132.5; KS.9.10; GB.2.2.9; Vait.15.3.

anuṣṭubha	aiḍam (VSK. ailam) # VS.13.57; VSK.14.7.8; MS.2.7.19: 104.10; KS.16.19; śB.8.1.2.5. See anuṣṭubhaḥ svāram.

anuṣṭubhaṃ	chanda indriyam # VS.28.26e; TB.2.6.17.2e. Cf. anuṣṭup chanda.

anuṣṭubhaṃ	chandaḥ prapadye (KA. praviśāmi; Aś. anuṣṭubhaṃ prapadye) # MS.4.9.2: 122.13; KA.1.67; 2.67; Aś.1.4.9.

anuṣṭubham	anu carcūryamāṇam # RV.10.124.9c; ā.2.3.5.5.

anuṣṭubham	asthnā praviśāmi # KS.38.14; Apś.16.19.1.

anuṣṭubhaṃ	prapadye # see anuṣṭubhaṃ chandaḥ.

anuṣṭubhaḥ	svāram # TS.4.3.2.2. See anuṣṭubha aiḍam.

anuṣṭubhā	chandasendriyam # VS.28.37d; TB.2.6.20.2c.

anuṣṭubhā	saṃbhṛtaṃ vīryaṃ (KS. duṣṭaraṃ) sahaḥ # AVP.15.1.8b; TS.4.4.12.3b; MS.3.16.4b: 188.12; KS.22.14b; Aś.4.12.2b.

anuṣṭubhā	soma ukthair mahasvān # RV.10.130.4c.

anuṣṭubhe	namaḥ # KSA.11.4.

anuṣṭum	# see anuṣṭub.

anu	ṣṭuvanti pūrvathā # RV.8.3.8d; 15.6b; AVś.20.61.3b; 99.2d; SV.2.232b,924d; VS.33.97d.

anuṣṭhātar	(10.16.11, anuṣṭhātāro; 10.16.2--5, anuṣṭhātry) anu tiṣṭha # AVP.10.15.1--10; 10.16.1--11.

anuṣṭhitaṃ	nu naryo apauhat # RV.10.61.5b.

anuṣṭhuyā	kṛṇuhy ahrayāṇa # RV.4.4.14d; TS.1.2.14.6d; MS.4.11.5d: 174.6; KS.6.11d; 16.1; N.5.15.

anuṣṭhu	viduṣe vaśā # AVś.12.4.45b.

anu	ṣyāma rodasī devaputre # RV.1.185.4b.

anuṣvadham	ā vaha mādayasva # RV.2.3.11c; 3.6.9d; AVś.20.13.4d; VS.17.88c; TA.10.10.2c; MahānU.9.11c.

anuṣvadhaṃ	pavate soma indra te # RV.9.72.5b.

anuṣvāpam	adevayuḥ # RV.8.97.3b.

anu	sakhā sayūthyaḥ # VS.4.20c; 6.9c; TS.1.2.4.2c; KS.2.5c; 3.5c; 16.21c; MS.1.2.4: 13.6; 1.2.15: 24.12; 4.13.4c: 203.9; AB.2.6.12c; śB.3.2.4.20c; 7.4.5; TB.3.6.6.1c; Aś.3.3.1c; SMB.2.2.9c.

anu	sapta rājāno ya utābhiṣiktāḥ # TB.2.7.8.2d. See sapta rājāno ya.

anu	suvānāsa indavaḥ # RV.8.6.38c.

anu	sūtuṃ savitave # AVś.6.17.1d--4d.

anu	sūrya uṣaso anu raśmīn # AVś.7.82.4c; 18.1.27c. See anu sūryasya.

anu	sūryam ud ayatām # AVś.1.22.1a; AVP.1.28.1a. P: anu sūryam Kauś.26.14. Cf. udyann adya mitra-.

anu	sūryasya purutrā ca raśmīn # VS.11.17c; TS.4.1.2.2c; MS.1.8.9c: 128.12; KS.16.2c; 19.3; śB.6.3.3.6; TB.1.2.1.23c; KA.1.198.5c. See anu sūrya.

anusṛptāṃ	gahaneṣu # AVP.8.16.5a.

anu	somo anv agnir (ā. anu vāg devy) āvīt # KS.37.9b; TB.2.7.8.2b; ā.5.1.1.11b. See anu tvā somo.

anu	somo vaśe tvā # AVś.10.10.7b.

anu	stomaṃ mudīmahi (PB. mademahi) # RV.8.1.14d; AVś.20.116.2d; PB.9.10.1d.

anuspaṣṭo	bhavaty eṣo asya # RV.10.160.4a; AVś.20.96.4a.

anu	spṛśa dhṛṣatā śośucānaḥ # RV.4.4.2b; VS.13.10b; TS.1.2.14.1b; MS.2.7.15b: 97.9; KS.16.15b.

anusphuraṃ	śaram arcanty ṛbhum # AVś.1.2.3b. See anasphuraṃ etc.

anu	svajāṃ mahiṣaś cakṣata vrām # RV.1.121.2c.

anu	svadhāṃ vavakṣitha # RV.8.88.5d. See ati viśvaṃ.

anu	svadhāṃ gabhastyoḥ # RV.1.88.6d.

anu	svadhā cikitāṃ (KS. -kite) somo agniḥ # AVś.6.53.1c; AVP.4.3.7c; KS.37.9c; TB.2.7.8.2c; 16.2c.

anu	svadhām akṣarann āpo asya # RV.1.33.11a; MS.4.14.12a: 235.7; TB.2.8.3.4a.

anu	svadhām āyudhair yachamānāḥ # RV.7.56.13d; MS.4.14.18d: 247.11; TB.2.8.5.6d.

anu	svadhāmitā dasmam īyate # RV.5.34.1b.

anu	svadhām ṛbhavo jagmur etām # RV.4.33.6b.

anu	svadhā yam upyate # RV.1.176.2c.

anu	svadhāvarī sahaḥ # RV.7.31.7b.

anu	svadhāvne kṣitayo namanta # RV.5.32.10d.

anu	svadhā svadhā # Aś.2.19.18.

anu	svaṃ dhāma jaritur vavakṣa # RV.3.7.6d.

anu	svaṃ bhānuṃ śrathayante arṇavaiḥ # RV.5.59.1d.

anuhavaṃ	parihavam # AVś.19.8.4a; ApMB.1.13.5a (ApG.3.9.2); Nakṣ.26.4a.

anuhāya	tapasā manyunā ca (AVP. cota, but the word uta properly belongs to the next pāda) # AVś.5.18.9c; AVP.9.18.2c.

anu	hi tvā sutaṃ soma madāmasi # RV.9.110.2a; SV.1.432a; 2.716a; AB.8.11.2a. P: anu hi tvā sutaṃ soma Svidh.1.6.9.

anuhūtaḥ	punar ehi # AVś.5.30.7a; AVP.9.13.7a.

anuhūtaṃ	parihūtam # ApMB.1.13.6a (ApG.3.9.2).

apanuttaḥ	śaṇḍaḥ # Apś.12.22.2. Cf. apamṛṣṭaḥ etc.

apanuttā	# see apanuttau.

apanutto	markaḥ # Apś.12.22.2. Cf. apamṛṣṭo etc.

apanuttau	(KS. -ttā) śaṇḍāmarkau (MS.4.6.3, ṣaṇḍā-) saha tena yaṃ dviṣmaḥ # MS.1.3.12: 34.7; 4.6.3: 81.7; KS.4.4; 27.8. P: apanuttau śaṇḍāmarkau Mś.2.4.1.7. See next.

apanuttau	śaṇḍāmarkau sahāmunā # TS.6.4.10.2; TB.1.1.1.5; Apś.12.22.2. See prec.

apānudo	janam amitrayantam (AVś. amitrāyantam) # RV.10.180.3c; AVś.7.84.2c; AVP.1.77.1c; TS.1.6.12.4c; KS.8.16c.

apāśnuṣṇiśnum	(?) apā rakṣaḥ # TA.1.21.2a. See next.

abhiśāstānumantā	# TB.3.10.1.3; 9.7; 10.3; Apś.19.12.8.

amanuta	guhyaṃ cāru pṛśneḥ # RV.4.5.10b.

amānuṣaṃ	yan mānuṣo nijūrvāt # RV.2.11.10b.

amānuṣaṃ	vigāhathāḥ # AVś.20.128.12b; śś.12.15.1.5b.

amānuṣīṣu	mānuṣo niṣeve # RV.10.95.8b.

ayohanur	yajato mandrajihvaḥ # RV.6.71.4c.

arutahanur	adbhutaṃ na rajaḥ # RV.10.105.7c.

arvantānu	śepā # RV.10.105.2b.

ājyenānuṣicyate	# AVP.9.28.2b.

āñjasvānulimpasva	# PG.2.14.17. Cf. under asāv abhyaṅkṣvāsāv.

ādhyakṣyāyānukṣattāram	# VS.30.11. See under adhy-.

ānujāvaram	anu rakṣanta ugrāḥ # AVP.4.27.1c.

ānumatī	vā bhavati # Kauś.73.12c.

ānuṣṭubhaṃ	chanda (MS. chandā) ā roha # VS.12.5; TS.4.2.1.2; MS.2.7.8: 85.6; KS.16.8; śB.6.7.2.16.

ānuṣṭubhaṃ	(sc. chando 'nuprajāyasva) # Lś.3.5.5; Kauś.69.23.

ānuṣṭubhasya	chandaso 'gneḥ pakṣeṇāgneḥ pakṣam upadadhāmi # MS.2.8.11: 115.16. See ānuṣṭubhena chandasā chandasāgneḥ, and ānuṣṭubhena chandasā mitrāvaruṇābhyāṃ.

ānuṣṭubhasya	haviṣo havir yat # RV.10.181.1b; ArS.2.5b.

ānuṣṭubhena	chandasāṅgirasvat (KSṃS. chandasā) # VS.11.11; śB.6.3.1.41; MS.2.7.1: 74.18; KS.16.1. See ānuṣṭubhena tvā chandasādade.

ānuṣṭubhena	chandasā chandasāgneḥ pārśvenāgneḥ pārśvam upadadhāmi # KS.22.5. See under ānuṣṭubhasya chandaso.

ānuṣṭubhena	chandasā diśo 'nu vi krame # TS.1.6.5.2. See dikṣu viṣṇur, and diśo viṣṇur.

ānuṣṭubhena	chandasā mitrāvaruṇābhyāṃ devatayāgneḥ pakṣeṇāgneḥ pakṣam upa dadhāmi # TS.5.5.8.3. See ānuṣṭubhasya chandaso 'gneḥ, and mitrāvaruṇābhyāṃ devābhyāṃ.

ānuṣṭubhena	chandasaikaviṃśena stomena vairājena sāmnā vaṣaṭkāreṇa vajreṇa sarvajān bhrātṛvyān adharān pādayāmi # Apś.13.18.9. Cf. gāyatreṇa (traiṣṭubhena, jāgatena) chandasā trivṛtā (pañcadaśena, saptadaśena) etc.

ānuṣṭubhena	tvā chandasādade 'ṅgirasvat # TS.4.1.1.4. See ānuṣṭubhena chandasāṅgi-.

ānuṣṭubhena	tvā chandasā sādayāmi # VS.13.53; MS.2.7.18: 103.13; śB.7.5.2.61.

ānuṣṭubho	'si # KA.3.233.

āpnuhi	śreyāṃsam ati samaṃ krāma # AVś.2.11.1--5; AVP.1.57.6.

ārdradānuś	ca mā mātariśvā ca mā hāsiṣṭām # AVś.16.3.4.

inu	dveṣāṃsi sadhryak # RV.9.29.4c.

indrānuvinda	(Aś. -viddhi) nas tāni # TB.2.5.3.1c; Aś.2.10.16c.

indrāyādhirājāyānubrūhi	# Mś.5.1.10.24. Cf. MS.2.2.8: 22.1.

indrāyānubrūhi	# Apś.3.16.17; 19.19.15; Mś.1.3.2.19; 5.1.7.6.

ucchrīyamāṇāyānu	brūhi # śB.3.7.1.13; Apś.7.10.6. P: ucchrīyamāṇāya śś.5.15.3.

uttabhnuvan	pṛthivīṃ dyām uto pari # TA.6.8.1b (bis). Cf. ut te stabhnāmi.

unnīyamānāyānubrūhi	# Apś.12.26.4; Mś.2.4.1.51. P: unnīyamānāya śś.7.7.1; Kś.9.12.12.

ekaśnuṣṭīn	saṃvananena saṃhṛdaḥ # AVP.5.19.8b. Cf. next.

aupadraṣṭryāyānukṣattāram	# VS.30.13; VSK.34.13. See prec., and cf. under adhyakṣāyā-.

kareṇānukareṇa	ca # AVś.12.2.2b.

kāyānu	brūhi # Apś.8.7.1.

kṛśānum	astṝn tiṣyaṃ sadhastha ā # RV.10.64.8c.

kṛśānur	astā manasā bhuraṇyan # RV.4.27.3d.

kravyādānuvartayan	# AVś.11.10.18a.

krośānukrośe	kurutāt # Apś.14.20.1.

ghanenānughanena	ca # MS.4.14.17b: 247.2; TA.2.4.1b.

ghṛtasnuvā	rohitā dhuri dhiṣva # RV.3.6.6b.

citrabhānuṃ	(TB.Apś. citrabhānū) rodasī antar urvī (JB. ūrvī, one ms. urvī) # RV.7.12.1c; SV.2.654c; MS.2.13.5c: 154.2; KS.39.13c; JB.3.243; TB.3.11.6.3c; Apś.16.35.5c.

citrabhānur	uṣasāṃ bhāty agre # RV.7.9.3c.

citrabhānur	ghṛtāsutiḥ # TB.2.4.8.6b.

citrabhānuḥ	subhānuḥ # Kauś.135.9d.

cinuhi	vi mṛdho jahi # RV.6.53.4b.

januṣaḥ	pari vṛtrahā # RV.8.66.9d; AVś.20.97.3d.

jātāyānu	brūhi # TS.6.3.5.3; śB.3.4.1.23; Apś.7.13.5. P: jātāya Kś.5.2.3. Cf. agnaye jātāya.

jānunoḥ	sandhī ka u tac ciketa # AVś.10.2.2d.

jānubhyām	ūrdhvaṃ śithiraṃ kabandham # AVś.10.2.3b.

jīradānuḥ	siṣāsati # RV.8.62.3b.

tanuvaṃ	etc. # see tanvaṃ etc.

tapasāsyānuvartaye	(Mś. -vartaya, mss. -vartaye) # TB.1.5.5.2c,3c,5c,7c; Apś.8.4.2c; Mś.1.7.2.23c.

tasyānu	dharma pra yajā cikitvaḥ # RV.3.17.5c.

darśāyānubrūhi	# śB.11.2.4.8.

dānuṃ	śayānaṃ sa janāsa indraḥ # RV.2.12.11d; AVś.20.34.11d; AVP.12.15.1d.

dānur	asmā uparā pinvate divaḥ # RV.1.54.7d.

dānuḥ	śaye sahavatsā na dhenuḥ # RV.1.32.9d; AVP.12.12.9d.

duḥśaṃsānuśaṃsābhyām	# MS.4.14.17a: 247.2; TA.2.4.1a.

dvyanucaro	madhuparko bhoḥ # Kauś.90.23.

dhanur	iva (AVP. ivā) tānayā pasaḥ # AVś.4.4.6d; 6.101.2d; AVP.4.5.8d.

dhanur	enam ātatyedhvā vidhya # JB.1.129.

dhanur	jyām achinat svayam # TA.1.5.2d.

dhanur	bibharṣi haritaṃ hiraṇyayam # AVś.11.2.12a.

dhanur	vottatam iti cakramitha # AVP.5.36.8d.

dhanur	hastād ādadāno (TA. -nā) mṛtasya # RV.10.18.9a; AVś.18.2.60a; TA.6.1.3a; AG.4.2.20. P: dhanur hastāt Kauś.80.49. Cf. BṛhD.7.15. Cf. daṇḍaṃ.

dhanuḥ	śatror apakāmaṃ kṛṇoti (AVPṃS. kṛṇotu) # RV.6.75.2c; AVP.15.10.2c; VS.29.39c; TS.4.6.6.1c; MS.3.16.3c: 185.13; KSA.6.1c; N.9.17c.

dhanuṣ	ṭanvanti etc. # see dhanus etc.

dhanuṣ	ṭe arasārasam # AVś.4.6.6d; AVP.5.8.5d.

dhanus	tanvanti (SV. dhanuṣ ṭa-) pauṃsyam # RV.9.99.1b; SV.1.551b.

dhanuspṛtaṃ	(Padap. dhanaspṛtaṃ) śūśuvāṃsaṃ sudakṣam # MS.4.14.8b: 227.15. See dhanaspṛtaṃ etc.

dhanuḥ	snāvneva nahyata # AVś.7.50.9d; AVP.1.49.2d.

dhinuhi	devān # VS.1.20; TS.1.1.6.1; MS.1.1.7: 4.5; 4.1.7: 9.9; KS.1.6; 31.5; śB.1.2.1.18; TB.3.2.6.3; Mś.1.2.2.28.

dhinuhi	māṃ yajñanyam # VSK.1.7.3; KS.1.6.

dhinuhi	yajñapatim # VSK.1.7.3; KS.1.6.

dhinuhi	yajñam # VSK.1.7.3; KS.1.6.

dhūnutha	dyāṃ parvatān dāśuṣe vasu # RV.5.57.3a; TB.2.4.4.3a.

dhenuḥ	kartvā yuvaśā kartvā dvā # RV.1.161.3c.

dhenuḥ	pratnasya kāmyaṃ duhānā # RV.3.58.1a; AB.5.18.8; Aś.8.10.1. P: dhenuḥ pratnasya Aś.4.15.2; śś.6.6.6. Cf. BṛhD.4.122.

dhenuṃ	rātrim upāyatīḥ # AVP.1.104.2b. See rātriṃ dhenum, and rātrīṃ dhenum.

dhenuṃ	sudughām anapasphurantīm # TB.3.7.7.13b; Apś.11.4.14b.

dhenu	gāya # Kś.26.5.2. Cf. Lś.1.6.26.

dhenuṃ	gāṃ na vayo dadhat # VS.28.31f; TB.2.6.17.6f. Cf. dhenur gaur.

dhenuṃ	ca pṛśniṃ vṛṣabhaṃ suretasam # RV.1.160.3c.

dhenuṃ	carantīṃ prayutām agopām # RV.3.57.1b.

dhenuṃ	ca viśvadohasam # RV.6.48.13b.

dhenuṃ	tatakṣur ṛbhavo ye aśvā # RV.4.34.9b.

dhenuṃ	devā adattana # RV.1.139.7e.

dhenuṃ-dhenum	(iti brūyāt) # Mś.9.5.6.6.

dhenuṃ	na iṣaṃ pinvatam asakrām # RV.6.63.8b; N.6.29.

dhenuṃ	na tvā sūyavase dudukṣan # RV.7.18.4a.

dhenubhyas	tvam arundhati # AVś.6.59.1b.

dhenum	ajadhvam upa navyasā vacaḥ # RV.6.48.11b.

dhenur	anaḍvān vayo-vaya āyad eva # AVś.12.3.49c.

dhenur	abhavad yame # AVś.3.10.1b; AVP.1.104.1b; KS.39.10b; SMB.2.8.1b. See sā dhenur etc.

dhenur	iva payo asmāsu dhukṣva # RV.4.57.2b; TS.1.1.14.3b; KS.4.15b; 30.4b; Mś.7.2.6.7b; ApMB.2.18.48b; N.10.16b.

dhenur	iva bhūya āpyāyamānā # TB.3.7.5.13b; Apś.2.20.5b; Mś.1.3.2.21b.

dhenur	gaur na vayo dadhuḥ # VS.21.19d; MS.3.11.11d: 158.13; KS.38.10d; TB.2.6.18.4d. Cf. dhenuṃ gāṃ.

dhenur	na vatsaṃ yavasasya pipyuṣī # RV.2.16.8b.

dhenur	na vatsaṃ payasābhi vajriṇam # RV.9.86.2c.

dhenur	na śiśve svasareṣu pinvate # RV.2.34.8c.

dhenur	(var. lect. dhenuṃ) bhavyā (iti brūyāt) # Mś.9.5.6.6.

dhenur	vayaḥ # VS.14.10; TS.4.3.5.1; MS.2.8.2: 108.3; KS.17.2; śB.8.2.4.10.

dhenur	vāg asmān upa suṣṭutaitu # RV.8.100.11d; TB.2.4.6.10d; PG.1.19.2d; N.11.29d.

dhenur	vātra ya sthāsyati # AVP.5.1.5c.

dhenuś	ca ṛṣabhaś ca # śś.8.19.1.

dhenuś	cānaḍvāṃś ca # MS.2.11.6: 143.17; Mś.6.2.5.26. See anaḍvāṃś.

dhenuṣ	ṭa indra sūnṛtā # RV.8.14.3a; AVś.20.27.3a; SV.2.1186a.

dhenuḥ	sarasvatī bhiṣak # VS.21.33d; MS.3.11.2d: 141.14; TB.2.6.11.4d.

nanu	gāvo maṅkīrasya # Apś.21.20.3a. See na vai gāvo.

nanu	tiryaṅ ni padyate # AVś.11.4.25b.

nanu	brahmeti śuśruma # JB.3.239a.

nānudhyāyād	bahūñ chabdān # śB.14.7.2.23e; BṛhU.4.4.23e.

niṣatsnuṃ	yaḥ sarīsṛpam # RV.10.162.3b; AVś.20.96.13b; MG.2.18.2b. Cf. utthāsyantaṃ.

puronuvākyā	(MS. -vākyās tvā) yājyābhiḥ # VS.20.12; MS.3.11.8: 151.11; śB.12.8.3.30.

pūrṇamāsāyānubrūhi	# śB.11.2.4.8.

pṛdākusānur	yajato gaveṣaṇaḥ # RV.8.17.15a.

praṇīyamānāyānu	brūhi # Apś.7.6.4.

prahriyamāṇāyānu	brūhi # TS.6.3.5.4. P: prahriyamāṇāya śB.3.4.1.23; Kś.5.2.4; Apś.7.13.5.

prātaranuvākam	upakuryāḥ # Lś.1.8.6.

prānudhyāḥ	pro aśastayaḥ # AVś.7.114.2b.

balāyānucaram	# VS.30.13; TB.3.4.1.7.

brahmanuttam	apāyati # AVś.10.1.13d.

bhānuneyaṃ	sarasvatī # RVKh.7.34.3b.

bhānumat	teja uccarat # TB.3.1.3.2b.

bhānur	arta tmanā divaḥ # RV.5.52.6c.

bhānur	āśleṣā ayanaṃ maghā me # AVś.19.7.2d.

bhānuḥ	śukreṇa śociṣā cakānaḥ # RV.10.123.8c; SV.2.1198c.

bhānuḥ	śukreṇa śociṣā vy adyaut # RV.9.85.12c. Cf. tigmenāgnir.

bhūyiṣṭhānu	virohatu # TA.6.9.1d.

mathyamānāyānubrūhi	# Apś.7.13.1.

manasaivānudraṣṭavyam	# śB.14.7.2.22c; BṛhU.4.4.22c.

manasvinobhānucarato	nu saṃ divam # TB.2.8.9.2d.

manujātaṃ	ghṛtapruṣam # RV.1.45.1d; SV.1.96d.

manunā	kṛtā svadhayā vitaṣṭā # TS.1.1.2.1b; MS.1.1.2b: 1.6; 4.1.2: 2.17; KS.1.2b; 31.1; TB.3.2.2.2b.

manunā	dṛṣṭāṃ ghṛtapadīm # TB.3.7.5.6a; Apś.3.1.7a.

manuprītāso	janimā vivasvataḥ # RV.10.63.1b.

manurājāya	markaṭaḥ # MS.3.14.11: 174.8. See under puruṣarājāya.

manur	bhava janayā daivyaṃ janam # RV.10.53.6d; TS.3.4.2.2d; 3.7; KS.13.11d,12; AB.3.38.6.

manur	yajñanīḥ # TS.3.3.2.1.

manur	vaivasvato rājā (Aś.śś. manur vaivasvataḥ) tasya manuṣyā viśas ta ima āsate ṛco (śś. ṛcovedo) vedaḥ so 'yam # śB.13.4.3.3; Aś.10.7.1; śś.16.2.1--3.

manurhitaṃ	sadam id rāya īmahe # RV.3.2.15d.

manuvat	(sc. ā ca vakṣat) # Kś.3.2.13; Apś.2.16.12.

manuṣyakṛtasyainaso	'vayajanam asi (TāṃahānU.Aś.BDh. asi svāhā) # VS.8.13; TS.3.2.5.7; PB.1.6.10; Tā.10.59; MahānU.18.1; Aś.6.12.3; śś.8.9.1; Apś.13.17.9; Mś.2.5.4.8; BDh.4.3.6. P: manuṣyakṛtasya Vait.23.12.

manuṣyarājāya	markaṭaḥ # VS.24.30. See under puruṣarājāya.

manuṣyalokāya	prakaritāram # VS.30.12; TB.3.4.1.8.

manuṣyāḥ	paśavaś ca ye # TA.8.3.1b; TU.2.3.1b.

manuṣyāṇāṃ	vā tvā śapatho rarādha # AVP.5.37.4b.

manuṣyāṇāṃ	hṛdaḥ priyam # AVP.2.78.3b.

manuṣyāṇāṃ	payo hitam # TB.3.7.4.16d; Apś.1.13.4d.

manuṣyān	antarikṣam agan yajñas tato mā draviṇam aṣṭu # VS.8.60; śB.4.5.7.8. See under antarikṣaṃ tṛtīyaṃ, and cf. next.

manuṣyān	janam agan yajñaḥ # MS.1.4.4: 51.14. Cf. prec.

manuṣyās	te goptāraḥ # TS.4.4.5.1; MS.2.8.14: 117.8.

manuṣyebhyo	vi bravītu # AVP.6.9.3a.

manuṣyebhyo	hantā # Tā.10.67.2; MahānU.19.2.

manuṣvac	chaṃbhū ā gatam # RV.1.46.13c.

manuṣvat	tvā ni dhīmahi # RV.5.21.1a; KS.2.9a; 7.13a; 39.13a; TB.3.11.6.3a; Apś.7.7.1a; 16.35.5a; Mś.1.7.3.43a.

manuṣvat	sam idhīmahi # RV.5.21.1b; KS.2.9b; 7.13b; 39.13b; TB.3.11.6.3b; Apś.7.7.1b; 16.35.5b; Mś.1.7.3.43b.

manuṣvad	agna āhuta # RV.8.43.13b.

manuṣvad	agna iha yakṣi devān # RV.7.11.3c.

manuṣvad	agniṃ manunā samiddham # RV.7.2.3c.

manuṣvad	agne aṅgirasvad aṅgiraḥ # RV.1.31.17a.

manuṣvad	aṅgirastama # RV.8.43.27b.

manuṣvad	iddhāgnayaḥ # RV.8.27.7d.

manuṣvad	indra savanaṃ juṣāṇaḥ # RV.4.32.5a.

manuṣvad	deva dhīmahi pracetasam # RV.1.44.11c. See vanuṣvad.

manuṣvad	daivyam aṣṭamam # RV.2.5.2c.

manuṣvad	yajñaṃ sudhitā havīṃṣi # RV.10.70.8c.

manuṣvad	yajñaṃ pra tiremam adya # RV.3.17.2d.

manuṣvad	vṛktabarhiṣe rarāṇā # RV.10.61.15c.

manuṣvad	vṛktabarhiṣo yajadhyai # RV.6.68.1b.

manus	tokmeva rohatu # RV.10.62.8b.

manuḥ	svāyaṃbhuvo 'bravīt # N.3.4d.

maśakasyānu	saṃvidam # AVP.1.59.4d.

mānuṣaḥ	# śś.1.6.1; Apś.2.16.14; Mś.1.3.1.26. See asau mānuṣaḥ.

mānuṣaṃ	mānuṣād gupto astu # AVP.5.40.6b.

mānuṣas	tantur asi # śś.2.12.10.

mānuṣād	daivyam (Mś. daivam) upaimi # TB.1.2.1.15; Apś.5.8.1. P: mānuṣād daivam Mś.1.5.2.4.

mānuṣān	mā bhayāt pāhi # śś.2.14.2.

mānuṣān	mā bhayād ajugupas tasmān mā pāhy eva # śś.2.15.5.

mānuṣāsa	upajīvanty anyām # JB.1.277b.

mānuṣāso	vicetaso ya eṣām # RV.7.7.4b.

mānuṣībhyas	tvam aṅgiraḥ # VS.11.45b; TS.4.1.4.3b; 5.1.5.6; MS.2.7.4b: 79.3; KS.16.4b; 19.5; śB.6.4.4.4.

mānuṣau	(sc. adhvaryū) # Mś.2.3.6.17.

mānuṣyā	adhi saṃpadaḥ # AVP.3.13.5d.

modāyānukrośakam	# TB.3.4.1.15.

mrokānumroka	# AVś.2.24.3; AVP.2.42.4a. ūha of śerabhaka, q.v.

yatrānukāmaṃ	caraṇam # RV.9.113.9a.

yathānunmadito	'sasi (AVP. -madito bhuvaḥ) # AVś.6.111.2d,4d; AVP.5.17.7d.

yadānunmadito	'sati # AVś.6.111.1d,3d. Cf. anunmadito.

yasyānuvittaḥ	pratibuddha ātmā # śB.14.7.2.17a; BṛhU.4.4.17a.

yūpāyājyamānāyānubrūhi	# śB.3.7.1.10; Apś.7.10.1; Mś.1.8.2.12. P: yūpāyājyamānāya śś.5.15.2.

yūpāyocchrīyamāṇāyānubrūhi	(Mś. -chriya-) # Apś.7.10.6; Mś.1.8.2.16.

Dictionary of Sanskrit Search

"nu" has 447 results

atadanubandhaka	not having the same mute significatory letter, but having one or two additional ones, confer, compare तदनुबन्धकग्रहणे नातदनुबन्धकस्य ग्रहणम् (Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 84.)

ananubanghaka	without any mute significatory letter attached; अननुबन्धकपरिभाषा is the short name given to the maxim-'अननुबन्धकग्रहणे न सानुबन्धकस्य ग्रह णम्' See M.Bh. on I.3.1: V.2.9. There is a reading in the Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. निरनुबन्धकग्रहणे for अननुबन्धकग्रहणे, in which case the परिभाषा is called निरनुबन्धकपरिभाषा. See Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 81.

anānupūrvyasaṃhitā	that saṁhitā text which has an order of words in it, which is different from what obtains in the Pada-pāṭha, and which appears appropriate according to the sense intended in the passage. There are three places of such combinations of words which are not according to the succcession of words in the Pada-pāṭha, quoted in the R.Pr. शुनश्चिच्छेपं निदितं सहस्रात् Rk. Saṁ. V.2.7, नरा वा शंसं पूषणमगोह्यम् Rk. Saṁ. X. 64.3; नरा च शंसं दैव्यम् Rk. Saṁh. IX. 86. 42. confer, compare एता अनानुपूर्व्यसंहिताः । न ह्येतेषां त्रयाणां पदानुपूर्व्येण संहितास्ति Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) II.78.

anukaraṇa(1)	imitation; a word uttered in imitation of another; an imitative name: confer, compare अनुकरणे चानितिपरम् P.I.4.62; अनुकरणं हि शिष्टशिष्टाप्रतिषिद्धेषु यथा लौकिकवैदिकेषु, Śiva sūtra 2 Vārt 1; confer, compare also प्रकृतिवद् अनुकरणं भवति an imitative name is like its original Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 36; also M.Bh. on VIII. 2.46; (2) imitative word, onomatopoetic word; confer, compare एवं ह्याहुः कुक्कुटाः कुक्कुड् इति । नैवं त आहुः । अनुकरणमेतत्तेषाम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.3.48. confer, compare also दुन्दुभि: इति शब्दानुकरणम् Nirukta of Yāska.IX. 12.

anukarṣaṇa	dragging (from the preceding rule) to the following rule taking the previous rule or a part of it as understood in the following rule or rules in order; the same as अनुवृत्ति; confer, compare अनुकर्षणार्थश्चकारः Kāś. on II. 4.18, III.2.26, VII. 1.48: cf also the Paribhāṣā; चानुकृष्टं नोत्तरत्र -that which is attracted from a preceding rule by the particle च is not valid in the rule that follows; Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 78.

anukṛṣṭa	attracted from a previous rule as is frequently done in Pāṇini's rules. See the word अनुकर्षण a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

anukta	not actually stated or expressed in a rule; confer, compare चकारोऽनुक्तसमुच्चयार्थ: Kāś. on II.4.18, III.2.26, VII. 1.48; also confer, compare Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. on P.II.2.9

anukrama	right or regular order in a Vedic recital, called क्रम. e. g. वायव: स्थ.

anukramaṇa	enumeration (in the right order as.opposed to व्युत्क्रम ); e. g. अथ किमर्थमुत्तरत्र एवमादि अनुक्रमणं क्रियते Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.1.58; also on IV. 2.70; verbal forms of the root क्रम् with अनु occur in this sense very frequently; exempli gratia, for example यदित ऊर्ध्वं अनुक्रमिष्यामः; so also the past passive participle. अनुक्रान्तं occurs frequently in the same sense. अनुतन्त्र literally that which follows Tantra id est, that is Śāstra which means the original rules of a Śāstra; technical term for Vartika used by Bhartṛhari;confer, compare सूत्राणां सानुतन्त्राणां भाष्याणां च प्रणेतृभिः Vāk. Pad. I.23, where the word अनुतन्त्र is explained as Vārtika by the commentator.

anuttama	other than उत्तम or the first person; confer, compare विभाषितं सोपसर्गमनुत्तमम् P. VII.1.53 and Kāśika thereon.

anutpati	non-production of an element of a word such as an affix or an augment or the like; confer, compare वावचने चानुत्पत्त्यर्थम् P.III.1.2 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 7, तत्रोत्पत्तिर्वा प्रसङ्गो यथा तद्धिते P. III.1.94 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2, also कृष्यादिषु चानुत्पत्तिः (णिचः) P.III.1.26, Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 3.

anudātta	non-udatta, absence of the acute accent;one of the Bāhyaprayatnas or external efforts to produce sound. This sense possibly refers to a stage or a time when only one accent, the acute or उदात्त was recognized just as in English and other languages at present, This udatta was given to only one vowel in a single word (simple or compound) and all the other vowels were uttered accentless.id est, that is अनुदात्त. Possibly with this idea.in view, the standard rule 'अनुदात्तं पदमेकवर्जम्'* was laid down by Panini. P.VI.1.158. As, however, the syllable, just preceding the accented ( उदात्त ) syllable, was uttered with a very low tone, it was called अनुदात्ततर, while if the syllables succeeding the accented syllable showed a gradual fall in case they happened to be consecutive and more than two, the syllable succeeding the उदात्त was given a mid-way tone, called स्वरितः confer, compare उदात्तादनुदात्तस्य स्वरितः. Thus, in the utterance of Vedic hymns the practice of three tones उदात्त, अनुदात्त and स्वरित came in vogue and accordingly they are found defined in all the Prātiśākhya and grammar works;confer, compare उच्चैरुदात्तः,नीचैरनुदात्तः समाहारः स्वरितः P.I.2.29-31, T.Pr.I.38-40, V.Pr.I.108-110, Anudātta is defined by the author of the Kāśikāvṛtti as यस्मिन्नुच्चार्यमाणे गात्राणामन्ववसर्गो नाम शिथिलीभवनं भवति, स्वरस्य मृदुता, कण्ठविवरस्य उरुता च स: अनुदात्तः confer, compare अन्ववसर्गो मार्दवमुरुता स्वस्येति नीचैःकराणि शब्दस्य Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.2.29,30. Cfeminine. also उदात्तश्चानुदात्तश्च स्वरितश्च त्रयः स्वराः । अायामविश्रम्भोक्षपैस्त उच्यन्तेSक्षराश्रयाः ॥ Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III.1. The term anudātta is translated by the word 'grave' as opposed to acute' (udātta,) and 'circumflex' (svarita); (2) a term applied to such roots as have their vowel अनुदात्त or grave, the chief characteristic of such roots being the non-admission of the augment इ before an ārdhadhātuka affix placed after them. ( See अनिट्, ).

anudāttatara	quite a low tone, completely grave; generally applied to the tone of that grave or anudātta vowel which is immediately followed by an acute ( उदात्त ) vowel. When the three Vedic accents were sub-divided into seven tones viz. उदात्त, उदात्ततर्, अनुदात्त, अनुदात्ततर, स्वरित, स्वरितस्थोदात्त and एकश्रुति corresponding to the seven musical notes, the अनुदात्ततर was the name given to the lowest of them all. अनुदात्ततर was termed सन्नतर also; confer, compare उदात्तस्वरितपरस्य सन्नतरः P.I.2.40; confer, compare also M, Bh. on I.2.33.

anudāttā	a term meaning 'having a grave accent,' used by ancient grammarians.Cfeminine. किमियमेकश्रुतिरुदात्ता उत अनुदात्ता Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).on I. 2.33.

anudāttet	literally one whose mute significatory letter is uttered with a grave accent: a term applied to a root characterized by an indicatory mute vowel accented grave, the chief feature of such a root being that it takes only the Ātmanepada affixes c. g. आस्ते, वस्ते, et cetera, and others; confer, compare अनुदात्तङित आत्मनेपदम् P. I.3.12; such a root, in forming a derivative word in the sense of habit, takes the affix युच् e. g. वर्त्तनः, वर्धन: et cetera, and others provided the root begins with a consonant; confer, compare अनुदात्तेतश्र हलादेः P. III.2.149.

anudāttopadeśa(a root)	pronounced originally i. c. pronounced in the Dhātupāṭha with a grave accent; see the word अनुदात्त a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.: confer, compare अनुदात्तोपदेशवनतितनोत्यादीनामनुनासिकलोपो झलि ङ्किति P. VI.4.37. See also the word अनिट् a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

anudeśa(1)	reference, mention, statement referring to a preceding element. confer, compare यथासंख्यमनुदेशः समानाम् P.I. 3.10; confer, compare आसिद्धवचनात् सिद्धमिति चेद् उत्सर्गलक्षणानामनुदेशः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I.1.57, Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 3. (2) declaration, prescription : the same as अतिदेश. confer, compare स्थान्यादेशपृथक्त्वादेशे स्थानिवद् अनुदेशो गुरुवद् गुरुपुत्र इति यथा P. I.1.56 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 1; (3) a grammatical operation confer, compare यथासंख्यमनुदेशः समानाम् ! समसंबन्धी विधिर्यथासंख्यं स्यात् Sid. Kau. on P.I. 8.10. See the word अनुद्देश in this sense confer, compare संख्यातानामनूद्देशो यथासंख्यम् V, Pr.I.143.

anunāda	a fore-sound : a preceding additional sound which is looked upon as a fault: e. g. ह्वयामि whom pronounced as अह्वयामि. This sound is uttered before an initial sonant consonant. It is also uttered before initial aspirates or visarga. confer, compare घोषवतामनुनादः पुरस्ताद् आदिस्थानां, क्रियते धारणं वा । सोष्मोष्माणामनुनादोप्यनादः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV.18,19.

anunāsika(a letter)	uttered through the nose and mouth both, as different from anusvāra which is uttered only through the nose. confer, compare मुखनासिकावचनोनुनासिकःP.I.1.8, and Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). thereon. The anunāsika or nasal letters are the fifth letters of the five classes ( id est, that is ङ्, ञ्, ण्, न्, म् ) as also vowels अ, इ, उ and semivowels when so pronounced, as ordinarily they are uttered through the mouth only; ( exempli gratia, for example अँ, आँ, et cetera, and others or य्यँ, व्वँ, ल्लँ et cetera, and others in सय्यँन्ता, सव्वँत्सरः, सँल्लीनः et cetera, and others) The अनुनासिक or nasalized vowels are named रङ्गवर्ण and they are said to be consisting of three mātras. confer, compare अष्टौ आद्यानवसानेsप्रगृह्यान् आचार्या आहुरनुनासिकान् स्वरान् । तात्रिमात्रे शाकला दर्शयन्ति Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I.63.64; confer, compare also अप्रग्रहाः समानाक्षराणि अनुनासिकानि एकेषाम् T. Pr XV.6. Trivikrama, a commentator on the Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.Sūtras, explains अनुनासिक as अनु पश्चात् नासिकास्थानं उच्चारणं एषां इत्यनुनासिकाः । पूर्वं मुखस्थानमुच्चारणं पश्चान्नासिकास्थानमुच्चारणमित्यर्थः । अनुग्रहणात्केवलनासिकास्थानोच्चारणस्य अनुस्वारस्य नेयं संज्ञा । and remarks further पूर्वाचार्यप्रसिद्धसंज्ञेयमन्वर्था । Com. by Tr. on Kat. I 1.13. Vowels which are uttered nasalized by Pāṇini in his works viz. सूत्रपाठ, धातुपाठ, गणपाठ et cetera, and others are silent ones i. e. they are not actually found in use. They are put by him only for the sake of a complete utterance, their nasalized nature being made out only by means of traditional convention. e. g. एध, स्पर्ध et cetera, and others confer, compare उपदेशेSजनुनासिक इत् P.I.3.2; confer, compare also प्रतिज्ञानुनासिक्याः पाणिनीयाः Kāś on I.3.2.

anunyāsa	a commentary on न्यास (काशिकाविवरणपञ्जिका by जिनेन्द्रबुद्धि). The work is believed to have been written by इन्दुमित्र. It is not available at present except in the form of references to it which are numerous especially in Siradeva's Paribhāṣāvṛtti.

anupapatti	discord, absence of validity, incorrect interpretation; confer, compareप्रथमानुपपत्तिस्तु M.Bh on I.4.9.

anupapadyamānā	impossibility of being explained; confer, compare तत्र सिद्धायां अनुपपद्यमानायां इतरथा उपपादयिषेत्, Nir II.2.

anupapanna	impossible to be explained, not consistent , confer, compare अथाप्यनुपपन्नार्था भवन्ति । ओषधे त्रायस्वैनम् । Nirukta of Yāska.I.15.

anuparipādya(संहिता)	the Pada text of the Vedic Saṁhitā.

anupasarjana	not subordinated in wordrelation, principal member; confer, compare अनुपसर्जनात् P. IV.I.14 and M.Bh. thereon; cf also Par. Śek Pari. 26.

anupradāna	an effort outside the mouth in the production of sound at the different vocal organs such as कण्ठ, तालु et cetera, and others which is looked upon as an external effort or bāhyaprayatna. अनुप्रदान is one of the three main factors in the production of sound which are ( 1 ) स्थान, ( 2 ) करण or आभ्यन्तरप्रयत्न and ( 3 ) अनुप्रदान or बाह्यप्रयत्न; confer, compare स्थाकरणप्रयत्नेभ्यो वर्णा जायन्ते Cān. The commentator on Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.describes अनुप्रदान as the मूलकारण or उपादानकारण, the main cause in the production of articulate sound confer, compare अनुप्रदीयते अनेन वर्णः इति अनुप्रदानम्: cf also अनुप्रदीयते इत्यनुप्रदानं प्रयत्न इत्यर्थः; Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIII. I. Generally two main varieties of बाह्यप्रयत्न are termed अनुप्रदान which are mentioned as (i) श्वासानुप्रदान (emission of breath) and नादानुप्रदान (resonance), the other varieties of it such as विवार, संवार, घोष, अघोष, अल्पप्राण, मह्मप्राण, उदात्त, अनुदात्त and स्वरित being called merely as बाह्यप्रयत्न.

anuprayoga	subsequent utterance; literally post-position as in the case of the roots कृ, भू and अम् in the periphrastic perfect forms; confer, compare आम्प्रत्ययवत् कृञोऽ नुप्रयोगस्य, P.I.3.63; यथाविध्यनुप्रयोगः पूर्वस्मिन् III.4.4.

anubandha	a letter or letters added to a word before or after it, only to signify some specific purpose such as (a) the addition of an afix (e. g. क्त्रि, अथुच् अङ् et cetera, and others) or (b) the substitution of गुण, वृद्धि or संप्रसारण vowel or (c) sometimes their prevention. These anubandha letters are termed इत् (literally going or disappearing) by Pāṇini (confer, compare उपदेशेजनुनासिक इत् et cetera, and others I.3.2 to 9), and they do not form an essential part of the word to which they are attached, the word in usage being always found without the इत् letter. For technical purposes in grammar, however, such as आदित्व or अन्तत्व of affixes which are characterized by इत् letters, they are looked upon as essential factors, confer, compare अनेकान्ता अनुबन्धाः, एकान्ता:, etc, Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 4 to 8. Although पाणिनि has invariably used the term इत् for अनुबन्ध letters in his Sūtras, Patañjali and other reputed writers on Pāṇini's grammar right on upto Nāgeśa of the 18th century have used the term अनुबन्ध of ancient grammarians in their writings in the place of इत्. The term अनुबन्ध was chosen for mute significatory letters by ancient grammarians probably on account of the analogy of the अनुबन्ध्य पशु, tied down at sacrifices to the post and subsequently slaughteredition

anubhūtisvarūpācārya	a writer of the twelfth century who wrote a work on grammar called सरस्वती-प्रक्रिया or सारस्वतप्रक्रिया, He has also written धातुपाठ and आख्यातप्रक्रिया. The grammar is a short one and is studied in some parts of India.

anum	not allowing the addition of the augment नुम् (id est, that is letter न् ) after the last vowel; The term is used, in connection with the present participle. affix, by Pāṇini in his rule शतुरनुमो नद्यजादी VI.1.173.

anumāna	inference,suggestion, confer, compare अशक्या क्रिया पिण्डीभूता निदर्शयितुम् । सासामनुमानगम्या Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.3.1.

anuloma	in the natural order (opp. to प्रतिलोम ), confer, compare तेऽन्वक्षरसंधयोनुलोमाः in R.Pr.II.8. अनुलोमसंधि is a term applied to Saṁdhis with a vowel first and a consonant afterwards.

anulomasaṃdhi	combination according to the alphabetical order; a kind of euphonic alteration ( संधि ) where the vowel comes first. e.gहव्यवाट् + अग्निः where ट् is changed to द्; एषः देवः= एष देवः confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) II. 8. (Sce अनुलोम ).

anuvartana	continuation or recurrence of a word from the preceding to the succeeding rule; the same as anuvṛtti; confer, compare अनुवर्तन्ते नाम विधयः । न चानुवर्तनादेव भवन्ति। किं तर्हि । यत्नाद्भवन्तीति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.3.

anuvartya	to be observed, to be obeyed; confer, compare न लक्षणेन पदकाराः अनुवर्त्याः । पदकारिर्नाम लक्षणमनुवर्त्यम् M.Bh. on III.1.109.

anuvāda	repetition of a rule already laid down or of a statement already made confer, compare प्रमाणान्तरावगतस्य अर्थस्य शब्देन संकीर्तनमात्रमनुवाद: Kāś. on II.4.3.

anuvidhi	operation in conformity with what is found. The expression छन्दसि दृष्टानुविधिः is often found in the Mahābhāṣya: confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.5, I.1.6, I.1.21, III.1.9, III.1.13, VI.1.6, VI.1.77, VI.1.79, VI. 4.128,VI.4.141, VIII.2.108.

anuvṛtti	repetition or recurrence of a word from the previous to the subsequent rule or rules, which is necessary for the sake of the intended interpretation. The word is of common use in books on Pāṇini's grammar. This recurrence is generally continuous like the stream of a river ( गङ्गास्रोतोवत् ); sometimes however, when it is not required in an intermediate rule, although it proceeds further, it is named मण्डूकप्लुत्यानुवृत्ति. In rare cases it is taken backwards in a sūtra work from a subsequent rule to a previous rule when it is called अपकर्ष.

anuśāsana	traditional instruction; treatment of a topic; exempli gratia, for example अथ शब्दानुशासनम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I. 1.1 where the word is explained as अनुशिष्यन्ते संस्क्रियन्ते व्युत्पाद्यन्ते अनेन इति अनुशासनम्.

anuṣaṅga(1)	literally attaching, affixing: augment, अनुषज्यते असौ अनुषङ्गः; (2) a term for the nasal letter attached to the following consonant which is the last, used by ancient grammarians; confer, compare अव्यात्पूर्वे मस्जेरनुषङ्गसंयेगादिलोपार्थम् confer, compare P.I.1.47 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).2 and M.Bh. thereon; confer, compare थफान्तानां चानुषङ्गिणाम् Kat. IV. 1.13. The term अनुषङ्ग is defined in the kātantra grammar as व्यञ्जनान्नः अनुषङ्ग. The term is applied to the nasal consonant न् preceding the last letter of a noun base or a root base; penultimate nasal of a root or noun base: Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.II.1.12.

anusaṃhāra	independent mention, a second time, of a thing already mentioned,for another purpose; confer, compare 'अलोन्त्यस्य' इति स्थाने विज्ञातस्यानुसंहारः P.I.1.53 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 1.

anusaṃhitaṃ	according to the Saṁhitā text of the Vedas: confer, compareएतानि नोहं गच्छन्ति अध्रिगो अनुसंहितम् Bhartṛihari's Mahābhāṣyadīpikā p. 9; confer, compare also Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XI.31, also XV.33, where the word is explained as संहिताक्रमेण by Uvaṭa.

anusvāra	see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. under अं

ānuk	the augment आन्, added to the words इन्द्र, वरुण, भव and others before the feminine. affix ई; exempli gratia, for example इन्द्राणी, वरुणानी confer, compare इन्द्रवरुणभवशर्वरुद्र...आनुक् P. IV.1.49.

ānunāsikya	nasalization; utterance through the nose, an additional property possessed by vowels and the fifth letters of the 5 classes (ङ्, ञ्, ण् ,न्, म्) confer, compare आनुनासिक्यं तेषामधिको गुणः M.Bh. on I.1.9.

ānupūrvī	serial order, successive order of grammatical operations or the rules prescribing them as they occur; confer, compare अानुपूर्व्या सिद्धमेतत् M.Bh. on V.3.5; confer, compare also ययैव चानुपूर्व्या अर्थानां प्रादुर्भावस्तयैव शब्दानामपि । तद्वत् कार्यैरपि भवितव्यम् M.Bh. on. P.I.1.57.

ānupūrvya	successive order, as prescribed by tradition or by the writer; confer, compare ऋतुनक्षत्राणामानुपूर्व्येण समानाक्षराणां पूर्वनिपातः । शिशिरवसन्तौ उदगयनस्थौ । कृत्तिकारोहिण्यः । M.Bh. II.2.34 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).3;also वर्णानामानुपूर्व्येण ब्राह्मणक्षत्रियविट्शूद्राः M.Bh. on II.2.34 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 6: confer, compare पदानुपूर्व्येण प्रश्लिष्टान् संधीन् कुर्यात् । इन्द्र अा इहि । आदौ इन्द्र आ इत्येतयोः; न तु अा इहि इत्येतयाः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) II.2; confer, compare also आनुपूर्व्यात् सिद्धम् Sīra. Pari. 6.

ānupūrvyasaṃhitā	the saṁhitā-pāṭha or recital of the running Vedic text in accordance with the constituent words;exempli gratia, for example शुनः शेपं चित् निदितम् or नरा शंसं वा पूषणम्, as opposed to the अनानुपूर्व्यसंहिता which is actually found in the traditional recital exempli gratia, for example शुनश्चिच्छेपं निदितम् Ṛk saṁh. V 2.7 or नरा वा शंसं पूषणम् Ṛk saṁh. X.64.3. See R. Prāt. II 43.

ānumānika	obtained or made out by inference such as Paribhāṣā rules as opposed to Śrauta rules such as the Sūtras of Pāṇini; confer, compare आनुमानिकं स्थानित्वमवयवयो; Kāś. on VI.1.85; also confer, compare आनुमानिकस्थान्यादेशभावकल्पनेपि श्रौतस्थान्यादेशभावस्य न त्यागः Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. on Pari. 11; confer, compare also किं च पूर्वत्रेत्यस्य प्रत्यक्षत्वेन अानुमानिक्या अस्या बाध एवोचितः Pari. Śek. on Pari. 50.

itnu	kṛt affix mentioned by Pāṇini in VI.4.55 as causing the substitution of अय् for णि before it; e. g गदयित्नुः, स्तनयित्नुः M.Bh. on VI.4.55.

inuṇ	kṛt affix इन्. by P. III.3.44 followed invariably by the taddhita affix. affix अण् by P.V.4,15, e.g, सांराविणम् , सांकूटिनम्.

isnuc	alternative affix mentioned in the Mahābhāṣya in the place of इष्णुच्; cf Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).on III. 2.57. See इष्णुच् .

ekadeśānumati	consent to a part of the whole, admission of one part as correct.

{{c\|-( anusvāra ) ṃanusvāra	or nasal (l) looked upon as a phonetic element, independent, no doubt, but incapable of being pronounced without a vowel Preceding it. Hence, it is shown in writing with अ although its form in writing is only a dot a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. the line cf अं इत्यनुस्वारः । अकार इह उच्चारणर्थ इति बिन्दुमात्रो वर्णोनुस्वारसंज्ञो भवति Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.Vyāk I.1.19; (2) anusvāra,showing or signifying Vikāra id est, that is अागम and used as a technical term for the second विभक्ति or the accusative case. See the word अं a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. on page 1.

kāmadhenu	abridgment of काव्यकामधेनु of Bopadeva; the word is also used as a short form for काव्यकामधेनु.

kāmadhenusudhārasa	a commentary on the Kāvyakāmadhenu by Ananta, son of Cintāmaṇi who lived in the sixteenth century A. D.

kāvyakāmadhenu	name of the commentary by Bopadeva on his own work कविकल्पद्रुम. See कविकल्पद्रुम.

knu	kṛt affix नु added to the roots त्रस्, गृध्, धृष् and क्षिप् in the sense of habituated et cetera, and others as given in the rule आक्वेरतच्छीलतद्धर्मतत्साधुकारिषु P.III.2.134; e.g, त्रस्नुः, गृध्नु: et cetera, and others confer, compare P. III. 2.140.

gsnu	krt affix स्नु applied to the roots ग्लै, जि and स्था in the sense of an agent: confer, compare ग्लाजिस्थश्व क्स्नुः P.III.1.139.

ghinuṇ	krt affix इन् causing the substitution of Vrddhi for the preceding vowel, as also to the penultimate vowel अ, applied to the eight roots शम्,तम्, दम् et cetera, and others, as also to संपृच्, अनुरुध् et cetera, and others and कस्, लष् लप्, et cetera, and others. e. g. शमी,तमी, दमी, संपर्की, संज्वारी, प्रलापी et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. III.2.141-145.

ḍhinuk	taddhita affix. affix एयिन् applied to the word छगलिन् in the sense of 'students following the text of ' e. g. छागलेयिनः in the sense छगलिना प्रोक्तमधीयते ते; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV.3.109.

dṛṣṭānuvidhi	taking place of an operation, or application of a rule of grammar in accordance with the words seen in use. See दृष्ट.

nādānupradāna	having voice ( नाद ) as their main cause; a term used in connection with vowels and sonant consonants which are caused by नादः confer, compare नादः अनुप्रदानं स्वरघोषवत्सु । अनुप्रदीयते अनेन वर्णः इति अनुप्रदानं मूलकारणम्, commentary on Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.II. 8.

nāmaliṅgānuśāsana	a treatise in which words with their genders are given. The term is usually used in connection with the great dictionary by अमरसिंह which is called नामालिङ्गानुशासन or अमरकोष.

niranunāsika	pure, unnasalized, as opposed to सानुनासिक nasalizedition confer, compare सन्ति हि यणः सानुनासिका निरनुनासिकाश्च । M.Bh. on I. 1. Ahnika 1.

niranubandhaka	possessed of no mute indicatory letter; not possessed of any mute indicatory letter; confer, compare क्वपुनरयं (आकारः) सानुबन्धकः क्व निरनुबन्धकः । M.Bh. on I. 1.14.

niranubandhakaparibhāṣā	a short term used for the maxim निरनुबन्धकग्रहणे न सानुबन्धकस्य ग्रहणम् Par. Sek. Pari. 81.

nuk	augment न् (l) affixed to the words अन्तर्वत् and पतिवत् before the feminine affix ङीप् e. g. अन्तर्वत्नी, पतिवत्नी, confer, compare P. IV. 1.32; (2) affixed to the root ली before the causal affix णिच् , e. g. विलीनयति, confer, compare P. VII. 3.39; (3) affixed to the reduplicative syllable of roots ending in a nasal consonant and having the penultimate अ as also of the roots जप्, जभ् , दह् , दश्, भञ्ज्, पश्, चर्, and फल् in the intensive; e. g. जङ्गम्यते, तन्तन्यते, यंयमीति, जङ्गमीति, जञ्जप्यते, दन्दह्यते, दन्दशीति. चञ्चूर्यते, पम्फु लीति confer, compare P. VII 4.85, 86, 87.

nuṭ	augment न् prefixed (l) to the genitive case plural ending in अाम् after a crude base ending in a short vowel, or in ई or ऊ of feminine bases termed nadi, or in अा of the feminine affix ( टाप् डाप् or चाप्); e g. वृक्षाणाम्, अग्नीनाम् , कर्तॄणाम् , कुमारीणाम् , मालानाम् et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. VII.1.54; (2) to the affix अाम् after numerals termed षट् and the numeral चतुर् as also after the words श्री, ग्रामणी and गो in Vedic Literature, e. g. षण्णाम् , पञ्चानाम् , चतुर्णाम्, श्रीणाम्, ग्रामणीनाम्, गोनाम्; confer, compare P. VII.1.55,56, 57; (3) to the part of a root possessed of two consonants, as also of the root अश् of the fifth conjugation after the reduplicative syllable ending in अा, which is substituted for अ; exempli gratia, for example अानञ्ज, व्यानशे; confer, compare P.VII.4. 71,72; (4) to the affix मतुप् after a base ending in अन् as also to the affixes तरप् and तमप् after a base ending in न् in Vedic Literature, exempli gratia, for example मूर्धन्वती, अक्षण्वन्तः, सुपथिन्तरः et cetera, and others;confer, compare P. VIII. 2.16, 17: (5) to the initial vowel of the second member of a compound having अ of नञ् as the first member; e. g. अनघः, confer, compare P.VI. 3.74; (6) to any vowel after न् which is preceded by a short vowel and which is at the end of a word exempli gratia, for example कुर्वन्नास्ते, confer, compare P. VIII. 3.32.

num	augment न् inserted after the last vowel (1) of a root given in the Dhātupātha as ending with mute इ; exempli gratia, for example निन्दति, क्रन्दति, चिन्तयति, जिन्वति et cetera, and others; confer, compare P VII.1.58; (2) of roots मुच् and others before the conjugational sign अ ( श ); e. g. मुञ्चति, लुम्पति; confer, compare P. VII.1.59; (3) of the roots मस्ज्, नश्, रध्, जभ् and लभ् under certain specified conditions, exempli gratia, for exampleमङ्क्त्वा, नंष्टा, रन्धयति, जम्भयति, लम्भयति, आलम्भ्यः et cetera, and others confer, compare P.VII. 1.60-69; (4) of declinable bases marked with the mute indicatory letter उ, ऋ or ऌ as also of the declinable wording अञ्च् from the root अञ्च् and युज्, exempli gratia, for exampleभवान्, श्रेयान् , प्राङ्, युङ्, confer, compare Kās. on P. VII.1. 70, 71; (5) of the declinable base in the neuter gender, ending with a vowel or with any consonant excepting a semivowel or a nasal, before a case-ending termed Sarvanāmasthāna; exempli gratia, for example यशांसि, वनानि, जतूनि et cetera, and others, confer, compare Kās. on VII.1.72; (6) of the declinable base in the neuter gender, ending with इ, उ,ऋ or ऌ before a case-ending beginning with a vowel; exempli gratia, for example मधुने, शुचिने et cetera, and others, confer, compare Kās, on P. VII.1.73; (7) of the affix शतृ ( अत् of the present tense. participle.) under certain conditions याती यान्ती; पचन्ती, सीव्यन्ती, confer, compare I .VII.78-8 : (8) of the word अनडुह् before the nominative case. and vocative case. singular. affix सु;exempli gratia, for example अनड्वान् , हे अनड्वन्, confer, compare P. VII.1. 82; (9) of the words दृक्, स्ववस् and स्वतवस् before the nominative case. and vocative case.singular.affix सु in Vedic Literature, e. g. यादृङ्, स्ववान् , स्वतवान् , confer, compare P.VII.1.83.

numāgama	augment न् inserted after the last vowel of a root or a noun-base in specified cases. See नुम्. नृचक्ष-ं name of the second Yama letter.

bhāṣānuśāsana	a work on attributed to यश:कवि.

mannudeva	See मन्तुदेव.

radānuk	krt affix रदानु applied to the root जीव्: exempli gratia, for example जीरदानुः;confer, compare जीवे रदानुक् । जीरदानु: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Siva Sutra , Vart. 5.

ranu[RENOU,LOUIS]	a sound Sanskrit scholar of France of the present time who has written some treatises and many articles on Sanskrit grammar out of which his works on the Terminology of Sanskrit Grammar, Kasika and Durghatavrtti reguire a special mention.

liṅgānuśāsana	literally science of genders; a short comprehensive old treatise on the gender of words attributed to Pāņini as its author. Other works with the same designation are attributed to वामन, दुर्गोत्तम and others.

liṅgānuśāsanaṭīkā	name of a commentary on Pāņini's लिङ्गानुशासन; some commentaries of this kind are the लिङ्गार्थचन्द्रिका by सुजनपण्डित,लिङ्गार्थचन्द्रिकाप्रकाश by चकोर, लिङ्गानुशासनटीका by दुर्गोत्तम and लिङ्गानुशासनटीका by तारानाथ.

śabdānuśāsana	literally science of grammar dealing with the formation of words, their accents, and use in a sentence. The word is used in connection with standard works on grammar which are complete and self-sufficient in all the a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.mentioned features. Patanjali has begun his Mahabhasya with the words अथ शब्दानुशासनम् referring possibly to the vast number of Varttikas on the Sutras of Panini, and hence the term शब्दानुशासन according to him means a treatise on the science of grammar made up of the rules of Panini with the explanatory and critical varttikas written by Katyayana and other Varttikakaras.The word शब्दानुशासन later on, became synonymons with Vyakarana and it was given as a title to their treatises by later grammarians, or was applied to the authoritative treatise which introduced a system of grammar, similar to that of Panini. Hemacandra's famous treatise, named सिद्धहैमचन्द्र by the author,came to be known as हैमशब्दानुशासन. Similarly the works on grammar written by पाल्यकीर्तिशाकटायन and देवनन्दिन् were called शाकटायनशब्दानुशासन and जैनेन्द्र' शब्दानुशासन respectively.

śākaṭāyanaśabdānuśāsana	name of the treatise on grammar written by पाल्यकीर्ति-शाकटायन.

śnu	a vikarana or a conjugational sign to be placed after the roots headed by सु (id est, that is roots of the fifth conjugation) as also after the root श्रु when श्रु is to be changed into शृ, and the roots अक्ष् and तक्ष्; exempli gratia, for example सुनोति, सुनुते; confer, compare स्वादिभ्यः श्नुः P.III. l.73. It is also added optionally with श्ना to the roots स्तम्भ्, स्तुम्भ् et cetera, and others See श्ना.

śrvasānupradāna	caused by the emission of breath; the term is used in contrast with नादानुप्रदान in connection with hard consonants, surds, visarga,the Jihvamuliya and the Upadhmaniya letters: see श्वास a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

saṃkhyātānudeśa	application respectively of terms stated in the उद्देश्य and विधेय portions in their numerical order when the stated terms; are equal in number: cf यथासंख्यमनुदेशः समानाम् P. 1.3.10: confer, compare also पञ्चागमास्त्रय अागमिनः वैषम्यात् संख्यातानुदेशो न प्राप्नोति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika 2.

sarvānudātta	the grave accent for the entire word. See सर्वनिधात. सर्वान्त्य final of all those that are denoted or enumerated; confer, compare यदेव सर्वान्त्यमर्थादेशनं तस्यैव विषये स्यात् । M.Bh. on P. IV.2.67.

sānunāsika	nasalized; uttered partly through the nose: confer, compare सन्ति हि यणः सानुनासिका निरनुनासिकाश्च Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VI. 1. 67.

sānubandha	or सानुबन्धक an affix or a root or the like, to which a mute letter has been attached; confer, compare निरनुबन्धकग्रहणे न सानुबन्धकस्य ग्रहणम् Par.Sek, Pari.81.

hanu	inside of the chin, mentioned as a स्थान or place which is touched by the tongue when a peculiar sound described as something like किट्-किट् is produced; cf क्रिट्किडाकरो हन्वां तिष्ठति R.T.10.

haimāliṅgānuśāsana	a treatise on genders written by हेमचन्द्र, See हेमचन्द्र a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

haimaliṅgānuśāsanavivaraṇa	a commentary, written in the seventeenth century by Kalyanasagara on the हैमलिङ्गानुशासन.

haimaliṅānuśāsanavyākhyā	a commentary named उद्धार also, written by Jayananda on the हैमलिङ्गानुशासन.

haimaśābdānuśāsana	a treatise on grammar written by Hemacandra. See हेमचन्द्र a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

haimaśabdānuśāsanalaghunyāsa	a short commentary on Hemacandra's Sabdanusasana written by Devendrassuri. हैमशब्दनुशासनवृत्ति a short gloss called अवचूरि also, written by a Jain grammarian नन्दसुन्दर on the हैमशब्दानुशासन.

aṃ(ं)	nasal utterance called अनुस्वार and written as a dot a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. the vowel preceding it. confer, compare स्वरमनु संलीनं शब्द्यते इति; it is pronounced after a vowel as immersed in it. The anusvāra is considered (l) as only a nasalization of the preceding vowel being in a way completely amalgamated with it. confer, compare Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.V. 11,31; XV. 1; XXII. 14 ; (2) as a nasal addition to the preceding vowel, many times prescribed in grammar as nuṭ (नुट् ) or num (नुम् ) which is changed into anusvāra in which case it is looked upon as a sort of a vowel, while, it is looked upon as a consonant when it is changed into a cognate of the following consonant (परसवर्ण) or retained as n (न्). confer, compare P. VIII.4.58; (3) as a kind cf consonant of the type of nasalized half g(ग्) as described in some treatises of the Yajurveda Prātiśākhya: cf also Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.)1.22 V.Pr.14.148-9. The vowel element of the anusvāra became more prevalent later on in Pali, Prkrit, Apabhraṁśa and in the spoken modern languages while the consonantal element became more predominant in classical Sanskrit.

akṛtsna-akṛtsnā	an epithet applied to the pronunciation of Veda words improperly which does not serve any useful purpose. confer, compare अकृत्स्ना अप्रयोजना इत्यर्थ: Uvaṭa on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV. 68.

akṣarasamāmnāya	alphabet: traditional enumeration of phonetically independent letters generally beginning with the vowel a (अ). Although the number of letters and the order in which they are stated differ in different treatises, still, qualitatively they are much the same. The Śivasūtras, on which Pāṇini's grammar is based, enumerate 9 vowels, 4 semi-vowels, twenty five class-consonants and 4 \| sibilants. The nine vowels are five simple vowels or monothongs (समानाक्षर) as they are called in ancient treatises, and the four diphthongs, (सन्ध्यक्षर ). The four semi-vowels y, v, r, l, ( य् व् र् ल् ) or antasthāvarṇa, the twenty five class-consonants or mutes called sparśa, and the four ūṣman letters ś, ṣ, s and h ( श् ष् स् ह् ) are the same in all the Prātiśākhya and grammar works although in the Prātiśākhya works the semi-vowels are mentioned after the class consonants.The difference in numbers, as noticed, for example in the maximum number which reaches 65 in the VājasaneyiPrātiśākhya, is due to the separate mention of the long and protracted vowels as also to the inclusion of the Ayogavāha letters, and their number. The Ayogavāha letters are anusvāra, visarjanīya,jihvāmulīya, upadhmānīya, nāsikya, four yamas and svarabhaktī. The Ṛk Prātiśākhya does not mention l (लृ), but adding long ā (अा) i (ई) ，ū (ऊ) and ṛ (ऋ) to the short vowels, mentions 12 vowels, and mentioning 3 Ayogavāhas (< क्, = प् and अं) lays down 48 letters. The Ṛk Tantra Prātiśākhya adds the vowel l (लृ) (short as also long) and mentions 14 vowels, 4 semivowels, 25 mutes, 4 sibilants and by adding 10 ayogavāhas viz. 4 yamas, nāsikya, visarjanīya, jihvāmulīya, upadhmānīya and two kinds of anusvāra, and thus brings the total number to 57. The Ṛk Tantra makes a separate enumeration by putting diphthongs first, long vowles afterwards and short vowels still afterwards, and puts semi-vowels first before mutes, for purposes of framing brief terms or pratyāhāras. This enumeration is called varṇopadeśa in contrast with the other one which is called varṇoddeśa. The Taittirīya prātiśākhya adds protracted vowels and lays down 60 letters : The Ṣikṣā of Pāṇini lays down 63 or 64 letters, while the Vājasaneyi-prātiśākhya gives 65 letters. confer, compare Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII. 1-25. The alphabet of the modern Indian Languages is based on the Varṇasamāmnāya given in the Vājasaneyi-prātiśākhya. The Prātiśākhyas call this enumeration by the name Varṇa-samāmnāya. The Ṛk tantra uses the terms Akṣara samāmnāya and Brahmarāśi which are picked up later on by Patañjali.confer, compare सोयमक्षरसमाम्नायो वाक्समाम्नायः पुष्पितः फलितश्चन्द्रतारकवत् प्रतिमण्डितो वेदितव्यो ब्रह्मराशिः । सर्ववेदपुण्यफलावाप्तिश्चास्य ज्ञाने भवति । मातापितरौ चास्य स्वर्गे लोके महीयेते । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika.2-end.

akṣarāṅga	forming a part of a syllable just as the anusvāra ( nasal utterance ) or svarabhakti (vowelpart) which forms a part of the preceding syllable. confer, compare अनुस्वारो व्यञ्जनं चाक्षराङ्गम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I.22, also स्वरभक्तिः पूर्वभागक्षराङ्गम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I.32.

aglopa	elision of the vowel a, i,u , r or l ( अ, इ, उ, ऋ or लृ ) which prevents Sanvadbhāva confer, compare सन्वल्लघुनि चङ्परेSनग्लोपे P. VII.4.93, as also नाग्लोपिशास्वृदिताम् VII.4.2 where the elision prevents the shortening of the penultimate vowel if it is long.

ajitasena	author of the Cintāmaṇiprakāśika a gloss on Cintāmaṇi, the well known commentary by Yakṣavarman on the Sabdānuśāsana of Śākatāyana. Ajitasena was the grand pupil of Abhayadeva; he lived in the 12th century A.D.

ativyakta	quite distinct; used with respect to pronunciation नातिव्यक्तं न चाव्यक्तमेवं वर्णानुदीरयेत् confer, compare Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XVII.8.

ātisparśa	excess of contact, which to a certain extent spoils the pronunciation and leads to.a fault. अतिस्पर्श is the same as दुःस्पर्श, the letter ळ being called दुःस्पृष्ट on account of excess of contact. This excess of contact ( अतिस्पर्श) in the case of the utterance of the letter र् results into a fault as it practically borders on stammering; confer, compare अतिस्पर्शो बर्बरता च रेफे, Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV. 26.

aghikārasūtra	a superintending aphorism, which gives no meaning of itself where it is mentioned, but gives its meaning in the number of aphorisms that follow: e. gthe rules प्रत्यय:, परश्च and अाद्युदात्तश्च P. III.1.1, 2, 3 or सह सुपा. P.II.1.4.

aniṭ(1)	not admitting the augment इट् to be prefixed to it; the term is strictly to be applied to ārdhadhātuka affixes placed after such roots as have their vowel characterized by a grave accent ( अनुदात्तस्वर ); the term अनिट् being explained as अनिडादि qualifying the अार्धधातुक affix; (2) in a secondary way, it has become customary to call such roots अनिट् as do not allow the augment इट् to be prefixed to an ārdhadhātuka affix placed after them. Such roots are termed अनुदात्त verily because they are possessed of an anudātta vowel. e. g. कृ, भृ, जि, गम् , हन् et cetera, and others as against भु, धू, तॄ, श्वि, वृ, वद्, फल्, चल्, et cetera, and others which have their vowel characterized by an acute (उदात्त ) accent. For a complete list of such roots see the well-known stanzas given in the Siddhāntakaumudī incidentally on अात्मनेपदेष्वनतः P. VII.1.5. ऊदॄदन्तैर्यौतिरुक्ष्णुशीङ्स्नु....निहताः स्मृताः ॥ १ ॥ शक्लृपच्मुचिरिचवच्विच् .........धातवो द्व्यधिकं शतम् ॥ as also some lists by ancient grammarians given in the Mahābhāṣya on एकाच उपदेशेनुदात्तात्. P. VII. 2.10 or in the Kāśikā on the same rule P. VII.2.10.

aniṭkārikā(1)	name given to Stanzas giving a complete list of such roots as do not allow the augment इ ( इट् ) to be prefixed to an ārdhadhātuka affix placed after them. For such Kārikās see Sid. Kaum. on VII.1.5 as also Kāśikā on VII. 2.10; ( 2 ) a short treatise enumerating in 11 verses the roots which do not admit the augment इट् before the ārdhadhatuka affixes. The work is anonymous, and not printed so far, possibly composed by a Jain writer. The work possibly belongs to the Kātantra system and has got short glosses called व्याख्यान, अवचूरि, विवरण, टीका, टिप्पणी and the like which are all anonymous.

anitya(1)	not nitya or obligatory optional; said of a rule or paribhāṣā whose application is voluntary). Regarding the case and con= jugational affixes it can be said that those affixes can, in a way: be looked upon as nitya or obligatory, as they have to be affixed to a crude nominal base or a root; there being a dictum that no crude base without an affix can be used as also, no affix alone without a base can be usedition On the other hand, the taddhita and kṛt affixes as also compounds are voluntary as, instead of them an independent word or a phrase can be used to convey the sense. For a list of such nitya affixes see Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on V. 4.7; (2) the word अनित्य is also used in the sense of not-nitya, the word नित्य being taken to mean कृताकृतप्रसङ्गि occurring before as well as after another rule has been applied, the latter being looked upon as अनित्य which does not do so. This 'nityatva' has got a number of exceptions and limitations which are mentioned in Paribhāṣās 43-49 in the Paribhāṣenduśekhara.

anīyar	kṛt affix, termed कृत्य also forming the pot. passive voice. participle. of a root; confer, compare तव्यत्तव्यानीयरः P.III.1.96. exempli gratia, for example see the forms करणीयं, हरणीयं, the mute र् showing the acute accent on the penultimate vowel,

antaraṅga	a highly technical term in Pāṇini's grammar applied in a variety of ways to rules which thereby can supersede other rules. The term is not used by Pāṇini himselfeminine. The Vārtikakāra has used the term thrice ( Sec I. 4. 2 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 8, VI.1.106 Vart.10 and VIII.2.6 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). I) evidently in the sense of immediate', 'urgent', 'of earlier occurrence' or the like. The word is usually explained as a Bahuvrīhi compound meaning 'अन्त: अङ्गानि निमित्तानि यस्य' (a rule or operation which has got the causes of its application within those of another rule or operation which consequently is termed बहिरङ्ग). अन्तरङ्ग, in short, is a rule whose causes of operation occur earlier in the wording of the form, or in the process of formation. As an अन्तरङ्ग rule occurs to the mind earlier, as seen a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page., it is looked upon as stronger than any other rule, barring of course अपवाद rules or exceptions, if the other rule presents itself simultaneously. The Vārtikakāra, hence, in giving preference to अन्तरङ्ग rules, uses generally the wording अन्तरङ्गबलीयस्त्वात् which is paraphrased by अन्तरङ्गं बहिरङ्गाद् बलीयः which is looked upon as a paribhāṣā. Grammarians, succeeding the Vārtikakāra, not only looked upon the बहिरङ्ग operation as weaker than अन्तरङ्ग, but they looked upon it as invalid or invisible before the अन्तरङ्ग operation had taken placcusative case. They laid down the Paribhāṣā असिद्धं बहिरङ्गमन्तरङ्गे which has been thoroughly discussed by Nāgeśa in his Paribhāṣendusekhara. The अन्तरङ्गत्व is taken in a variety of ways by Grammarians : (l) having causes of application within or before those of another e. g. स्येनः from the root सिव् (सि + उ+ न) where the यण् substitute for इ is अन्तरङ्ग being caused by उ as compared to guṇa for उ which is caused by न, (2) having causes of application occurring before those of another in the wording of the form, (3) having a smaller number of causes, (4) occurring earlier in the order of several operations which take place in arriving at the complete form of a word, (5) not having संज्ञा (technical term) as a cause of its application, ( 6 ) not depending upon two words or padas, (7) depending upon a cause or causes of a general nature (सामान्यापेक्ष) as opposed to one which depends on causes of a specific nature ( विशेषापेक्ष).

anvaya(1)	construing, construction: arrangement of words according to their mutual relationship based upon the sense conveyed by them, शब्दानां परस्परमर्थानुगमनम् । (2) continuance, continuation;confer, compare घृतघटतैलवट इति ; निषिक्ते घृते तैले वा अन्वयाद्विशेषणं भवति अयं घृतघटः, अयं तैलघट इति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.II. 1.1.

apit	not marked with the mute letter प्, A Sārvadhātuka affix not marked with mute प् is looked upon as marked with ड् and hence it prevents the guṇa or vṛddhi substitution for the preceding vowel or for the penultimate vowel if it be अ. e. g. कुरुतः तनुतः, कुर्वन्ति where no guṇa takes place for the vowel उ confer, compare सार्वधातुकमपित्. P.I.2.4.

appayadīkṣita	अप्पदीक्षित A famous versatile writer of the sixteenth century A. D. (1530-1600 ), son of रङ्गराजाध्वरीन्द्र a Dravid Brāhmaṇa. He wrote more than 60 smaller or greater treatises mainly on Vedānta, Mimāṁsā, Dharma and Alaṁkāra śāstras; many of his works are yet in manuscript form. The Kaumudi-prakāśa and Tiṅantaśeṣasaṁgraha are the two prominent grammatical works written by him. Paṇdit Jagannātha spoke very despisingly of him.

abhayacandra	a Jain grammarian ， who wrote प्रक्रियासंग्रह, based on the Śabdānuśāsana Vyākaraṇa of the Jain Śākatāyana.His possible date is the twelfth century A. D.

abhivyādāna	absorption of a vowel when two long vowels of the same kind come together exempli gratia, for example ता आपः = तापः, अवसा आ = अवसा, the resultant vowel being pronounced specially long consisting of some more mātrā, which is evidently, a fault of pronunciation. confer, compare आदानं आरम्भः; विपुलं विशालं वा आदानं व्यादानम् । अभिव्याप्तं अभिभूतं व्यादानं अभिव्यादानम् Uvvata on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV. 27.

abhyaṃkara(BHASKARASHASTRI Abhyankar 1785-1870 A. D. )	an eminent scholar of Sanskrit Grammar who prepared a number of Sanskrit scholars in Grammar at Sātārā. He has also written a gloss on the Paribhāṣenduśekhara and another one on the Laghu-Śabdenduśekhara. (VASUDEVA SHASTRI Abhyakar 863-1942 A. D.) a stalwart Sanskrit Pandit, who, besides writing several learned commentaries on books in several Sanskrit Shastras, has written a commentary named 'Tattvādarśa' on the Paribhāṣenduśekhara and another named 'Guḍhārthaprakāśa' on the Laghuśabdenduśekhara. (KASHINATH VASUDEVA Abhyankar, 1890-) a student of Sanskrit Grammar who has written महाभाष्यप्रस्तावना-खण्ड, and जैनेन्द्रपरिभाषावृत्ति and compiled the परिभाषासंग्रह and the present Dictionary of Sanskrit Grammar.

abhyāhata	omission of any sound; a fault of utterance. अम् (1)a technical brief term in Panini's grammar including vowels, semivowels, the letter ह् and nasals; (2) a significant term for the accusative case showing change or substitution or modification: confer, compare अं विकारस्य Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I.28 explained as अमिति शब्दे विकारस्याख्या भवति । अमिति द्वितीय विभक्तेरुपलक्षणम् । (3) augment अ applied to the penultimate vowel of सृज् & दृश् (P. VI.1.58, 59 and VII.1.99) (4) substitute tor Ist person. singular. affix मिप्, by P.III.4.101 (5) Acc. singular. case affix अम् .

amara	called अमरसिंह an ancient grammarian mentioned in the कविकल्पद्रुम by बोपदेव. He is believed to have written some works on grammar such as षट्कारकलक्षण his famous existing work, however, being the Amarakoṣa or Nāmaliṅgānuśāsana.

amoghavarṣa	A Jain grammarian of the ninth century who wrote the gloss known as अमोघावृत्ति on the Śabdānuśāsana of Śākaṭāyana; the वृत्ति is quoted by माधव in his धातुवृत्ति.

ambūkṛta	utterance (of words) accompanied by water drops coming out of the mouth; a fault of utterance or pronunciation; मुखात् विप्रुषो निर्गमनम् . It is explained differently in the Rk. Prātiśākhya; confer, compare ओष्ठाभ्यां नद्धं अम्बूकृतम्म्वृ (Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV.2.) held tight between the lips which of course, is a fault of pronunciation; confer, compareग्रस्तं निरस्तमविलम्बितं निर्हतं अम्बूकृतं ध्मात मथो विकम्पितम्. MBh. I. 1. पस्पशाह्निक.

aliṅgavacana	not possessed of a definite gender and number; a term generally used in connection with अव्ययs or indeclinables.

alpāctara	having a smaller number of vowels in it; such a word is generally placed first in a Dvandva compound; cf अल्पाच्तरम्, P.II.2.34. अल्पाच्तरे पूर्वं भवति प्लक्षन्यग्रोधौ अपाच्तर is the same as अल्पाच्क used in the प्रक्रियाकौमुदी or अल्पस्वरतर in Kātantra (Kāt, II.5.12).

alpāpekṣa	am operation requiring a smaller number of causes, which merely on that account cannot be looked upon as अन्तरङ्ग. The antaraṅga operation has its causes occurring earlier than those of another operation which is termed बहिरङ्ग confer, compare बहिरङगान्तरङश्ङ्गशब्दाभ्यां बह्वपेक्षत्वाल्पापेक्षत्वयोः शब्दमर्यादयाsलाभाच्च । तथा सति असिद्धं बह्वपेक्षमल्पापेक्ष इत्येव वदेत् ॥ Par.Śek. Pari. 50.

avaśiṣṭaliṅga(v.1. अविशिष्टलिङ्ग)	a term occurring in the liṅgānuśāsana meaning 'possessed of such genders as have not been mentioned already either singly or by combination' id est, that is possessed of all genders.Under अवशिष्टलिङ्ग are mentioned indeclinables, numerals ending in ष् or न् , adjectives, words ending with kṛtya affixes id est, that is potential passive participles, pronouns, words ending with the affix अन in the sense of an instrument or a location and the words कति and युष्मद् (See पाणिनीय-लिङ्गानुशासन Sūtras 182-188).

avyakta(1)	indistinct; inarticulate; confer, compare अव्यक्तानुकरणस्यात इतौ P. VI.1.98 also P.V.4.57; अव्यक्तं अपरिस्फुटवर्णम् Kāś. on P. VI.1.98; (2) a fault of pronunciation confer, compare नातिव्यक्तं न चाव्यक्तमेवं वर्णानुदीरयेत् ।

avyāpya	an intransitive root; a technical term in the Cāndra Vyākaraṇa (C. Vy. I.4.70 ) as also in Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana; confer, compare अव्याप्यस्य मुचेर्मोग् वा । मुचेरकर्मकस्य सकारादौ सनि परे मोक् इत्ययमादेशो वा स्यात् । न चास्य द्विः । मोक्षति मुमुक्षति चैत्र: । मोक्षते मुमुक्षते वा वत्सः स्वयमेव Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana. IV.1.19.

asaṃkhya	not possessing any notion of number; the word is used in connection with avyayas or indeclinables; यथैव हि अलिङ्गमव्ययमेवमसंख्यमपि Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.4.82.

asiddha	invalid; of suspended validity for the time being: not functioning for the time being. The term is frequently used in Pāṇini's system of grammar in connection with rules or operations which are prevented, or held in suspense, in connection with their application in the process of the formation of a word. The term (असिद्ध) is also used in connection with rules that have applied or operations that have taken place, which are, in certain cases, made invalid or invisible as far as their effect is concerned and other rules are applied or other operations are allowed to take place, which ordinarily have been prevented by those rules which are made invalid had they not been invalidatedition Pāṇini has laid down this invalidity on three different occasions (1) invalidity by the rule पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् VIII.2.1. which makes a rule or operation in the second, third and fourth quarters of the eighth chapter of the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. invalid when any preceding rule is to be applied, (2) invalidity by the rule असिद्धवदत्राभात् which enjoins mutual invalidity in the case of operations prescribed in the Ābhīya section beginning with the rule असिद्धवत्राभात् (VI. 4.22.) and going on upto the end of the Pāda (VI.4.175), (3) invalidity of the single substitute for two letters, that has already taken place, when ष् is to be substituted for स्, or the letter त् is to be prefixed, confer, compare षत्वतुकोरसिद्धः (VI. 1.86). Although Pāṇini laid down the general rule that a subsequent rule or operation, in case of conflict, supersedes the preceding rule, in many cases it became necessary for him to set, that rule aside, which he did by means of the stratagem of invalidity given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. Subsequent grammarians found out a number of additional cases where it became necessary to supersede the subseguent rule which they did by laying down a dictum of invalidity similar to that of Pāṇini. The author of the Vārttikas, hence, laid down the doctrine that rules which are nitya or antaraṅga or apavāda, are stronger than, and hence supersede, the anitya, bahiraṅga and utsarga rules respectively. Later gram marians have laid down in general, the invalidity of the bahiraṅga rule when the antaraṅga rule occurs along with it or subsequent to it. For details see Vol. 7 of Vvyākaraṇa Mahābhāṣya(D. E. Society's edition) pages 217-220. See also Pari. Śek. Pari. 50.

ākṛti	literally form; individual thing; confer, compare एकस्या अाकृतेश्चरितः प्रयोगो द्वितीयस्यास्तृतीयस्याश्च न भवति M.Bh on III.1.40 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).6. The word is derived as आक्रियते सा आकृतिः and explained as संस्थानम्; confer, compare आक्रियते व्यज्यते अनया इति आकृतिः संस्थानमुच्यते Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. on IV.1.63; (2) general form which, in a way, is equivalent to the generic notion or genus; confer, compare आकृत्युपदेशात्सिद्धम् । अवर्णाकृतिरुपदिष्टा सर्वमवर्णकुलं ग्रहीष्यति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).I.1 Āhnika of the Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya. 1; (3) notion of genus; cf also यत्तर्हि तद् भिन्नेष्वभिन्नं छिनेष्वच्छिन्नं सामान्यभूतं स शब्दः । नेत्याह । अाकृतिर्नाम सा. Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I.1.Āhnika of the Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya.1; (4) a metre consisting of 88 letters; confer, compare R. Prāt. XVI.56,57.

akhyātaprakriyā	a work dealing with verbs, written by Anubhūtisvarūpācārya on the Sārasvata Vyākaraṇa.

aāgantuka	literally adventitious, an additional wording generally at the end of roots to show distinctly their form exempli gratia, for example वदि, एधि, सर्ति et cetera, and others; confer, compare इन्धिभवतिभ्यां च P I.2.6: confer, compare also भावलक्षणे स्थेण्कृञ्वदिचरिहृतभिजनिभ्यस्तोमुन्, P.III.4.16, सृपिवृदो. कसुन् P. III.4.17 and a number of other sūtras where इ or तिं is added to the root confer, compare इक्श्तिपौ धातुनिर्देशे, वर्णात्कारः, रादिफः P.III.3.108 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2.3. 4, where such appendages to be added to the roots or letters are given. The word अागन्तु is an old word used in the Nirukta, but the term आगन्तुक appears to be used for the first time for such forms by Haradatta; confer, compare ह्वरोरिति ह्वृ कौटिल्ये, आगन्तुकेकारे गुणेन निर्देशः Padamañjarī, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Haradatta. on VII.2.31. In the traditional oral explanations the second part of a reduplicated word is termed अागन्तुक which is placed second i. e. after the original by virtue of the convention आगन्तूनामन्ते निवेशः, although in fact, it is said to possess the sense of the root in contrast with the first which is called abhyāsa.A nice distinction can, however be drawn between the four kinds of adventitious wordings found in grammar viz.आगन्तु, इत्, अभ्यास and आगम which can be briefly stated as follows; The former two do not form a regular part of the word and are not found in the actual use of the word; besides, they do not possess any sense, while the latter two are found in actual use and they are possessed of sense. Again the agantu word is simply used for facility of understanding exactly and correctly the previous word which is really wanted; the इत् wording, besides serving this purpose, is of use in causing some grammatical operations. अभ्यास, is the first part of the wording which is wholly repeated and it possesses no sense by itself, while, āgama which is added to the word either at the beginning or at the end or inserted in the middle, forms a part of the word and possesses the sense of the word.

ādeśa(1)	substitute as opposed to sthānin, the original. In Pāṇini's grammar there is a very general maxim, possessed of a number of exceptions, no doubt, that 'the substitute behaves like the original' (स्थानिवदादेशः अनल्विधौ P.I.1.56.); the application of this maxim is called स्थानिवद्भाव; for purposes of this स्थानिवद्भाव the elision (लोप) of a phonetic element is looked upon as a sort of substitute;confer, compare उपधालेपस्य स्थानिवत्त्वात् Kāś. on P.I.1.58. Grammarians many times look upon a complete word or a word-base as a substitute for another one, although only a letter or a syllable in the word is changed into another, as also when a letter or syllable is added to or dropped in a word; confer, compare पचतु, पचन्तु ... इमेप्यादेशाः । कथम् । अादिश्यते यः स आदेशः । इमे चाप्यादिश्यन्ते । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.56; cf also सर्वे सर्वपदादेशा दाक्षीपुत्रस्य पाणिनेः M.Bh. on P. I.1.20; confer, compare also अनागमकानां सागमका आदेशाः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.20: (2) indication, assignment; confer, compare योयं स्वरादेशः अन्तोदात्तं, वधेराद्युदात्तत्वं, स्वः स्वरितमिति अादेशः R.Pr.I.30-32; confer, compare also अादेशः उपदेशः commentary on Tai.-Prāt. II.20: confer, compare also अनादेशे अविकारः V.Pr.IV.131, where Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.remarks यत्र उदात्तादीनां स्वराणां सन्धौ आदेशो न क्रियते तत्र अविकारः प्रत्येतव्यः । confer, compare also एकारो विभक्त्यादेशः छन्दसि A.Pr. II.1.2, where ए is prescribed as a substitute for a caseaffix and त्ये and अस्मे are cited as examples where the acute acent is also prescribed for the substitute ए.

ārdhadhātukādhikāra	the topic or section in Pāṇini's grammar where operations, caused by the presence of an ārdhadhātuka affix ahead, are enumerated, beginning with the rule आर्धधातुके VI.4.46 and ending with न ल्यपि VI.4.69, Such operations are summed up in the stanza अतो लोपो चलोपश्च णिलोपश्च प्रयोजनम् । आल्लोप इत्वमेत्वं च चिण्वद्भावश्च सीयुटि; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). as also Kāś, on VI.4.46.

aāvacana	incomplete pronunciation, confer, compare ईषद् वचनम् M.Bh. on I.1.8.

āśvalāyanaprātiśākhya	an authoritative Prātiśākhya work attributed to Śaunaka the teacher of Āśvalāyana, belonging prominently to the Sakala and the Bāṣkala Śakhās of the Ṛgveda. it is widely known by the name Ṛk-Prātiśākhya. It is a metrical composition divided into . 18 chapters called Paṭalas, giving special directions for the proper pronunciation, recitation and preservation of the Ṛksaṁhita by laying down general rules on accents and euphonic combinations and mentioning phonetic and metrical peculiarities. It has got a masterly commentary written by Uvvaṭa.

it(1)	a letter or a group of letters attached to a word which is not seen in actual use in the spoken language: cf अप्रयोगी इत्, Śāk. I.1.5, Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana.1.1.37. The इत् letters are applied to a word before it, or after it, and they have got each of them a purpose in grammar viz. causing or preventing certain grammatical operations in the formation of the complete word. Pāṇini has not given any definition of the word इत् , but he has mentioned when and where the vowels and consonants attached to words are to be understood as इत्; (confer, compare उपदेशेजनुनासिक इत् , हलन्त्यम् । et cetera, and others P. I.3.2 to 8) and stated that these letters are to be dropped in actual use, confer, compareP.I.3.9. It appears that grammarians before Pāṇini had also employed such इत् letters, as is clear from some passages in the Mahābhāṣya as also from their use in other systems of grammar as also in the Uṇādi list of affixes, for purposes similar to those found served in Pāṇini 's grammar. Almost all vowels and consonants are used as इत् for different purposes and the इत् letters are applied to roots in the Dhātupāṭha, nouns in the Gaṇapāṭha, as also to affixes, augments and substitutes prescribed in grammar. Only at a few places they are attached to give facility of pronunciation. Sometimes the इत् letters, especially vowels, which are said to be इत्, when uttered as nasalized by Pāṇini, are recognised only by convention; confer, compare प्रतिज्ञानुनासिक्याः पाणिनीयाः(S.K.on P.I.3.2).The word इत्, which literally means going away or disappearing, can be explained as a mute indicatory letter. In Pāṇini's grammar, the mute vowel अ applied to roots indicates the placing of the Ātmanepada affixes after them, if it be uttered as anudātta and of affixes of both the padas if uttered svarita; confer, compare P.I.3. 12, 72. The mute vowel आ signifies the prevention of इडागम before the past part, affixes; confer, compare P. VII. 2. 16. Similarly, the mute vowel इ signfies the augment न् after the last vowel of the root; confer, compareP.VII.1.58; ई signifies the prevention of the augment इ before the past participle.affixes cfP.VII.2.14;उ signifies the inclusion of cognate letters; confer, compareP.I.1.69, and the optional addition of the augment इ before त्वा; confer, compare P.VII.2. 56; ऊ signifies the optional application of the augment इट्;confer, compareP.VII. 2.44; क signifies the prevention of ह्रस्व to the vowel of a root before the causal affix, confer, compareVII.4.2: लृ signifies the vikarana अङ् in the Aorist cf P.III.1.55; ए signifies the prevention of vrddhi in the Aorist,confer, compare P.VII.2.55; ओ signifies the substitution of न् for त् of the past participle. confer, compare P VIII.2.45; क् signifies the Prevention of गुण and वृद्धि, confer, compareP, I. 1.5; ख् signifies the addition of the augment मुम्(म्)and the shortening of the preceding vowel: confer, compareP.VI.3 65-66: ग् signifies the prevention of गुण and वृद्धि, confer, compare P.I.1.5 घ् signifies कुत्व, confer, compare P.VII.3.62; ङ्, applied to affixes, signifies the prevention of गुण and वृद्धि, confer, compare P.I.1.5; it causes संप्रसारणादेश in the case of certain roots, confer, compare P. VI.1.16 and signifies आत्मनेपद if applied to roots; confer, compare P.I. 3.12, and their substitution for the last letter if applied to substitutes. confer, compare P I.1.53. च् signifies the acute accent of the last vowel;confer, compareP.VI.1. 159; ञ् signifies उभयपद i.e the placing of the affixes of both the podas after the root to which it has been affixed;confer, compareP.I.3.72, ट् in the case of an augment signifies its application to the word at the beginning: confer, compareP I.1.64, while applied to a nominal base or an affix shows the addition of the feminine. affix ई (ङीप्) confer, compareP.IV.1. 15;ड् signifies the elision of the last syllable; confer, compare P.VI.4.142: ण् signifies वृद्धि, confer, compareP.VII.2.115;त् signifies स्वरित accent, confer, compare VI.1.181, as also that variety of the vowel ( ह्रस्व, दीर्ध or प्लुत) to which it has been applied confer, compare P.I.1.70; न् signifies आद्युदात्त, confer, compare P.VI.1.193:प् signifies अनुदात्त accent confer, compare अनुदात्तौ सुप्पितौ P. III.1.4. as also उदात्त for the vowel before the affix marked with प् confer, compare P.VI.1.192: म् signifies in the case of an augment its addition after the final vowel.confer, compareP.I.1.47,while in the case of a root, the shortening of its vowel before the causal affix णि,confer, compare P.VI.4.92: र् signifies the acute accent for the penultimate vowel confer, compare P.VI.1.217，ल् signifies the acute accent for the vowel preceding the affix marked with ल्; confer, compareP.VI. 193; श् implies in the case of an affix its सार्वधातुकत्व confer, compare P. II1.4.113, while in the case of substitutes, their substitution for the whole स्थानिन् cf P.I.1.55; प् signifies the addition of the feminine. affix ई ( ङीप् ) confer, compareP.IV-1.41 ;स् in the case of affixes signifies पदसंज्ञा to the base before them, cf P.I.4.16. Sometimes even without the actual addition of the mute letter, affixes are directed to be looked upon as possessed of that mute letter for the sake of a grammatical operation exempli gratia, for example सार्वधातुकमपित् P.I.2.4; असंयेागाल्लिट कित् P.I.2.5: गोतो णित् P.VII.1.90 et cetera, and others (2) thc short vowel इ as a substitute: confer, compare शास इदङ्हलोः P.VI.4.34.

indumitra	author of अनुन्यास, a commentary on Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa., the well-known commentary on the Kāśikavṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi. Many quotations from the Anunyāsa are found in the Paribhāṣāvṛtti of Sīradeva. The word इन्दु is often used for इन्दुमित्र; confer, compare एतस्मिन् वाक्ये इन्दुमैत्रेययोः शाश्वतिको विरोध: Sīra. Pari. 36.

uṅ	a technical term for उपधा, the penultimate letter in the Jainendra Vyākaraṇa; confer, compare इदुदुङः Jain. V. 4.28.

uccāraṇa	pronunciation, enunciation (in the Śāstra). The phrase उच्चारणसामर्थ्यात् is often found used in the Mahābhāṣya and elsewhere in connection with the words of Pāṇini, everyone of which is believed to , have a purpose or use in the Śāstra, which purpose, if not clearly manifest, is assigned to it on the strength (सामर्थ्य) of its utterance; confer, compare उच्चारणसामर्थ्यादत्र ( हिन्येाः ) उत्वं न भविष्यति M.Bh. on III.4.89 V.2; confer, compare also M.Bh. on IV.4.59, VI.4.163, VII.1.12,50, VII.2.84, In a few cases, a letter is found used by Pāṇini which cannot be assigned any purpose but which has been put there for facility of the use of other letters. Such letters are said to be उच्चारणार्थ; confer, compare जग्धि: । इकार उच्चारणार्थ:। नानुबन्धः । Kāś. on II.4.36.च्लि लुडि. । इकार उच्चारणार्थ:; चकारः स्वरार्थः । Kāś, on III.1. 43. The expressions मुखसुखार्थः and श्रवणार्थः in the Mahābhāṣya mean the same as उच्चारणार्थः.

ujjvaladatta	the famous commentator on the Uṅādi sūtras. His work .is called Uṅādisūtravṛtti, which is a scholarly commentary on the Uṅādisūtrapāṭha, consisting of five Pādas. Ujjvaldatta is belived to have lived in the l5th century A.D. He quotes Vṛttinyāsa, Anunyāsa, Bhāgavṛtti et cetera, and others He is also known by the name Jājali.

uṇādi	affixes headed by the affix उण्, which are similar to kṛt affixes of Pāṇini, giving derivation mostly of such words as are not derived by rules of Pāṇini. No particular sense such as agent, object et cetera, and others is mentioned in connection with these affixes, but, as Pāṇini has stated in 'ताभ्यामन्यत्रोणादयः P.III. 4.75, the various Uṇādi affixes are applied to the various roots as prescribed in any Kāraka sense, except the संप्रदान and the अपादान; in other words, any one of the senses, agent, object, instrument and abode, is assigned to the Uṇādi affix as suits the meaning of the word. Although some scholars believe that the Uṇādi affixes are given by a grammarian later than Pāṇini as there are words like ताम्बूल, दीनार and others included in the list of Uṇādi words and that there are many interpolated Sūtras, still the Uṇādi collection must be looked upon as an old one which is definitely mentioned by Pāṇini in two different rules; confer, compare Pāṇini उणादयो बहुलम् P. III.3.1 and ताभ्यामन्यत्रोणादयः III.4.76. Patañjali has given a very interesting discussion about these Uṇādi affixes and stated on the strength of the Vārttika, तत्रोणादिप्रतिषेधः, that these affixes and the words given in the Uṇādi collection should not be considered as genuinely deriveditionThe derivation is not a very systematic and logically correct one and therefore for practical purposes, the words derived by the application of the affixes उण् and others should be looked upon as underived; confer, compare उणादयोSव्युत्पन्नानि प्रातिपदिकानि. Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on. P.I.1.16, III.4.77, IV.1.1, VI.1.62, VII.1.2, VII.2.8 et cetera, and others There is a counterstatement also seen in the Mahābhāṣya उणादयो व्युत्पन्नानि, representing the other view prevailing at the time; confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.I.133; but not much importance seems to be attached to it. The different systems of grammar have different collections of such words which are also known by the term Uṇādi. Out of the collections belonging to Pāṇini's system, three collections are available at present, the collection into five pādas given in the printed edition of the Siddhānta Kaumudi, the collection into ten Pādas given in the printed edition of the Prakriya-Kaumudi and the collection in the Sarasvatīkaṇthābharaṇa of Bhoja forming Pādas 1, 2 and 3 of the second Adhyāya of the work.

uṇādisūtradaśapādī	the text of the Uṇādi Sūtras divided into ten chapters believed to have been written by शाकटायन. It is printed at the end of the Prakriyā Kaumud and separately also, and is also available in manuscripts with a few differences. Patañjali in his Bhāṣya on P.III.3.1, seems to have mentioned Sakaṭāyana as the author of the Uṇādi Sūtras although it cannot be stated definitely whether there was at that time, a version of the Sūtras in five chapters or in ten chapters or one, completely different from these, as scholars believe that there are many interpolations and changes in the versions of Uṇādi Sūtras available at present. A critical study of the various versions is extremely desirable.

utpala	author of a commentary on Pāṇini's Liṅgānuśāsana. It is doubtful whether he was the same as उत्पल-भट्ट or ‌भट्टोत्पल, the famous astrologer of the tenth century.

udupadhatva	possession of short उ as the penultimate letter, e. g. इदुदुपधस्य चाप्रत्ययस्य P.VII.3.41.

uddhāra(1)	elision, a term used in the sense of 'lopa' in the ancient grammar works; (2) name of a commentary on the Haima-liṅgānuśāsana.

upakādi	a class of words headed by the word उपक after which the taddhita affix, added in the sense of गोत्र ( grand-children et cetera, and others ) is optionally elided, provided the word is to be used in the plural number; confer, compare उपकलमकाः भ्रष्टककपिष्ठलाः also उपकाः, औपकायनाः; लमकाः, लामकायना ; भ्रष्टकाः भ्राष्टकयः । Kāś. on P. II.4.69.

upagīta	a fault in the pronunciation of letters, noticed sometimes in the utterance of a letter adjoining such a letter as is coloured with a musical tone on account of the proximity of the adjacent letter which is uttered in a musical note and which therefore is called 'प्रगीत'; confer, compare प्रगीतः सामवदुच्चारितः । उपगीतः समीपवर्णान्तरगीत्यानुरक्तः Kaiyaṭa's Kaiyaṭa's Mahābhāṣyapradīpa.on M.Bh. I. Āhnika 1.

upadeśa	instruction; original enunciation; first or original precepts or teaching; confer, compare उपदेश आद्योच्चारणम् S. K. on T the rule उपदेशेजनुनासिक इत् P.I.3.2. confer, compare वर्णानामुपदेशः कर्तव्यः; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Āhnika of the Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya. I. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 15. For difference between उपदेश and उद्देश see उद्देश; confer, compare also उपदिश्यतेनेनेत्युपदेशः । शास्त्रवाक्यानि, सूत्रपाठः खिलपाठश्च Kāśikā on P. I.3.2; confer, compare also Vyāḍi. Pari. 5; (2) employment (of a word) for others confer, compare उपेदश: परार्थः प्रयोगः । स्वयमेव तु बुद्धया यदा प्ररमृशति तदा नास्त्युपदेशः Kāś. on अदोनुपदेशे P.I.4.70.

upadhā	penultimate letter, as defined in the rule अलोन्त्यात्पूर्वं उपघा P. I. 1.65, exempli gratia, for example see ह्रस्वोपध, दीर्घोपध, लघूपध, अकारोपध et cetera, and others; literally उपधीयते निधीयते सा that which is placed near the last letter.

upadhālopin	a word or a noun which has got the penultimate letter omitted; confer, compare अन उपधालेपिनोन्यतरस्याम् P. IV. 1. 28.

upadhmānīya	a letter or a phonetic element substituted for a visarga followed by the first or the second letter of the labial class. Visarga is simply letting the breath out of the mouth. Where the visarga is followed by the first or the second letter of the labial class, its pronunciation is coloured by labial utterance. This coloured utterance cannot be made independently; hence this utterance called 'उपध्मानीय' ( similar to a sound blown from the mouth ) is not put in, as an independent letter, in the वर्णसमाम्नाय attributed to महेश्वर. Patañjali, however, has referred to such dependent utterances by the term अयोगवाहवर्ण. See अयेागवाह; confer, compare xक इति जिह्वामूलीयः । जिह्वामूलेन जन्यत्वात् । xप इत्युपध्मानीयः । उपध्मानेन जन्यत्वात्. अयेगवाह is also called अर्धविसर्ग. See अर्धविसर्ग.

upasthāna	occurrence: prescnce by virtue of anuvṛtti i. e. recurrence or continuation of a word in the rules that follow; confer, compare शब्देन चाप्यधिकृतेन कोन्यो व्यापारः शक्योवगन्तुमन्यदतो योगे योग उपस्थानात् M.Bh. on 1.3.11 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 1.

upānta	literally near the last; penultimate. The word is generally found used in the Cāndra Vyākaraṇa.

ubhayagati	both the alternatives; both the senses; double signification; confer, compare उभयगतिरिह भवति P.I.1.23,Vārt 4,Pari. Śek, Par. 9 where the word ubhaya refers to both the senses-the ordinary one ( अकृत्रिम } and the technical one ( कृत्रिम)--exempli gratia, for example the meanings ( i ) numeral, and ( ii ) words बहु, गण et cetera, and others of the word संख्या.

ūt(1)	long vowel ऊ which cannot be combined by rules of saṁdhi with the following vowel when it comes at the end of the forms of the dual number e. g. साधू अत्र et cetera, and others; confer, compare ईदूदेद्विवचनं प्रगृह्यम् P.I.1.11, as ， also ईदूतौ च सप्तम्यर्थे I.1.19; (2) long vowel ऊ substituted for the short उ of the root गोह् before an affix beginning with a vowel e. g. निगूहति; confer, compare ऊदुपधाया गोहः P. VI.4.89.

ūṣman	aspiration letters, spirants called breathings also: the name is given to letters or sounds produced with unintonated breath through an open posision of the mouth; confer, compare विवृतमूष्मणाम् M. Bh, on P.I.1.10 Vārt, 3. The word refers to the letters श्, ष्, सु, ह्, visarga, jihvāmūlīya, upadhmāniya and anusvāra; confer, compare ऊष्मा वायुस्तत्प्रधाना वर्णा ऊष्माणः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I.12; confer, compare also Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I.10.

eka(1)	Singular number, ekavacana: confer, compare नो नौ मे मदर्थं त्रिह्येकेषु. V. Pr.II.3: the term is found used in this sense of singular number in the Jainendra, Śākaṭāyana and Haima grammars ( 2 ) single ( vowel ) substitute (एकादेश) for two (vowels); cf एकः पूर्वपरयोः P.VI. 1.84; अथैकमुभे T.Pr. X.1; ( 3 ) many, a certain number : (used in plural in this sense), confer, compare इह चेत्येके मन्यते， Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I. 4.21 .

ekapada	made up of one word; consisting of one word; confer, compare अथवा सन्त्येकपदान्यप्यवधारणानि । यथा अब्भक्षो वायुभक्षः । अप एव भक्षयति वायुमव भक्षयति । M.Bh. first Āhnika; (2) a continuous word paraphrased as अखण्डपद and समानपद by commentators; confer, compare तेनानन्तरा षष्ठयेकपदवत् V.Pr.II. 18: (3) every individual word: confer, compare बहुक्रमे क्रमेत तस्यैकपदानि नि:सृजन् R.Pr.XI.18.

ekavacana	singular number; affix of the singular numberin Pāṇini's grammar applied to noun-bases ( प्रातिपदिक) and roots when the sense of the singular number is to be conveyed; the singular sense can be of the form of an individual or collection or genus. The word एकवचन in the technical sense of singular number is found used in the Prātiśākhyas and Nirukta also.

ekaśruti	that which has got the same accent or tone; utterance in the same tone; monotone. The word is applied to the utterance of the vocative noun or phrase calling a man from a distance, as also to that of the vowels or syllables following a Svarita vowel in the Saṁhitā id est, that is the continuous utterance of Vedic sentences; confer, compare एकश्रुति दूरात्संबुद्वौ and the foll. P.I.2.33-40 and the Mahābhāṣya thereon. In his discussion on I.2.33 Patañjali has given three alternative views about the accent of Ekaśruti syllables : (a) they possess an accent between the उदात्त (acute) and अनुदात्त (grave), (b) they are in the same accent as is possessed by the preceding vowel, (c) Ekaśruti is looked upon as the seventh of the seven accents; confer, compare सैषा ज्ञापकाभ्यामुदात्तानुदात्तयोर्मध्यमेकश्रुतिरन्तरालं ह्रियते। ... सप्त स्वरा भवन्ति \| उदात्तः, उदात्ततर:, अनुदात्तः, अनुदात्ततर:, स्वरितः स्वरिते य उदात्तः सोन्येन विशिष्टः, एकश्रुतिः सप्तमः । M.Bh. on P.I.2.33.

eṇīkṛta	A fault in pronunciation when the voice is indistinct, and the word pronounced is not distinctly heard; confer, compare एणीकृतः अविशिष्टः । किमयमोकारः अथौकार इति यत्र संदेहः Kaiyaṭa's Mahābhāṣyapradīpa.on M.Bh.I.1.1,explained as अवशिष्ट: संश्लिष्टः संदिग्ध इति यावत् by Nāgeśa in his Uddyota.

opperṭ[Gustav Oppert 1836-1908 ]	a German scholar of Sanskrit who edited the Śabdānuśāsana of Śākaṭāyana.

auddeśika	enumerated; actually stated; उद्देशतः प्रोक्तम् औद्देशिकम् confer, compare न तु औद्देशिकमिव Nir.I.4.

auś	substitute औ for the nominative case. and acc. case endings applied to the numeral अष्टन्; confer, compare अष्टाभ्य औश् P.VII. 1.21.

ḥ	or विसर्गः literally letting out breath from the mouth; sound or utterance caused by breath escaping from the mouth; breathing. The Visarjanīya, just like the anusvāra, is incapable of being independently utteredition Hence, it is written for convenience as अः although its form for writing purposes is only two dots after the vowel preceding it; confer, compare अः इति विसर्जनीयः । अकार इह उच्चारणार्थः इति कुमारीस्तनयुगाकृतिर्वर्णो विसर्जनीयसंज्ञो भवति । Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.Vyāk. I.1.16. See अः a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. on page 2.

m̐ nāsikya	a nasal letter or utterance included among the अयोगवाह letters analogous to anusvāra and yama letters. It is mentioned in the Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya as हुँ इति नासिक्यः on which Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.makes the remark अयमृक्शाखायां प्रसिद्धः. The Ṛk-Prātiśākhya mentions नासिक्य, यम and अनुस्वार as नासिक्य or nasal letters, while Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.defines नासिक्य as a letter produced only by the nose; confer, compare केवलनासिकया उच्चार्यमाणे वर्णॊ नासिक्यः Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 20. The Taittirīya Prātiśākhya calls the letter ह् as nāsikya when it is followed by the consonant न् or ण् or म् and gives अह्नाम् , अपराह्णे and ब्रह्म as instances. The Pāṇinīya Śikṣā does not mention नासिक्य as a letter. The Mahābhāṣya mentions नासिक्य as one of the six ayogavāha letters; confer, compare के पुनरयोगवाहाः । विसर्जनीयजिह्वामूलीयोपध्मानीयानुस्वारानुनासिक्ययमाः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Śivasūtra 5 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 5, where some manuscripts read नासिक्य for अानुनासिक्य while in some other manuscripts there is neither the word आनुनासिक्य nor नासिक्य. It is likely that the anunāsika-colouring given to the vowel preceding the consonant सू substituted for the consonants म, न् and others by P. VIII. 3.2. to 12, was looked upon as a separate phonetic unit and called नासिक्य as for instance in सँस्कर्ता, मा हिँसीः, सँशिशाधि et cetera, and others

yama	a letter called यम which is uttered partly through the nose. A class consonant excepting the fifth, when followed by the fifth viz. ङ्, ञ्, ण्, न or म् , gets doubled in the Vedic recital, when the second of the doubled consonant which is coloured by the following nasal consonant is called यम. This यम letter is not independent. It necessarily depends upon the following nasal consonant and hence it is called अयोगवाह. The nasalization is shown in script as xx followed by the consonant; e. g. पलिक्क्नी, अगूग्रे, et cetera, and others The pronunciation of this yama or twin letter is seen in the Vedic recital only; confer, compare पलिक्कनी ... कखगघेभ्य; परे तत्सदृशा एव यमाः S. K. on P. VIII. 2.1. confer, compare कु खु गु घु इति यमाः विंशतिसंख्याका भवन्ति Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII.24.

k(1)	taddhita affix.affix क applied to the words of the ऋश्य group in the four senses called चातुरर्थिक e. g. ऋश्यकः, अनडुत्कः, वेणुकः et cetera, and others, confer, compare P.IV.2.80; (2) taddhita affix. affix क applied to nouns in the sense of diminution, censure, pity et cetera, and others e. g. अश्वक्रः, उष्ट्रकः, पुत्रकः, confer, compare P.V. 3.70-87: (3) taddhita affix. affix क in the very sense of the word itself ( स्वार्थे ) exempli gratia, for example अविकः, यावकः, कालकः; confer, compare P.V.4.2833; (4) Uṇādi affix क exempli gratia, for example कर्क, वृक, राका, एक, भेक, काक, पाक, शल्क et cetera, and others by Uṇādi sūtras III. 40-48 before which the angment इट् is prohibited by P. VII.2.9; (5) kṛt affix क ( अ ) where क् is dropped by P. I. 3.8, applied, in the sense of agent, to certain roots mentioned in P.III.1.135, 136, 144, III. 2.3 to 7, III.2.77 and III.3.83 exempli gratia, for example बुध:, प्रस्थः, गृहम्, कम्बलदः, द्विपः, मूलविभुजः, सामगः, सुरापः et cetera, and others; (6) substitute क for the word किम् before a case affix, confer, compare P.VII.2.103; (7) the Samāsānta affix कप् (क) at the end of Bahuvrīhi compounds as prescribed by P.V.4.151-160.

kaṇṭakoddhāra	name of a commentary on Nāgeśa's Paribhāṣenduśekhara by Mannudeva, known also as Mantudeva or Manyudeva, who was a pupil of Pāyaguṇḍe in the latter half of the 18th century.

karṣaṇa	extension; protraction, defined as kālaviprakarṣa by commentators; a peculiarity in the recital as noticed in the pronunciation of ट् when followed by च् , or ड् when followed by ज् exempli gratia, for example षट्चै; षड्जात. confer, compare Nār. Śik. I.7.19.

kala	a fault of pronunciation consequent upon directing the tongue to a place in the mouth which is not the proper one, for the utterance of a vowel; a vowel so pronounced; confer, compare संवृतः कलो ध्मात: ... रोमश इति confer, comparealso निवृत्तकलादिकामवर्णस्य प्रत्यापत्तिं वक्ष्यामि M.Bh. Āhnika 1.

kalyāṇasāgara	author of the Haimaliṅgānuśāsana-vivaraṇa, a commentary on the Liṅgānuśāsana chapter of\| 14

kavikalpadrumaṭīkā	a commentary on the Kavikalpadruma, written by the author ( बोपदेव ) himselfeminine. It is known by the name Kāvyakāmadhenu; (2) a commentary on Kavikalpadruma by Rāmatarkavāgīśa.

kātantra	name of an important small treatise on grammar which appears like a systematic abridgment of the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini. It ignores many unimportant rules of Pāṇini, adjusts many, and altogether omits the Vedic portion and the accent chapter of Pāṇini. It lays down the Sūtras in an order different from that of Pāṇini dividing the work into four adhyāyas dealing with technical terms, saṁdhi rules,declension, syntax compounds noun-affixes ( taddhita affixes ) conjugation, voice and verbal derivatives in an order. The total number of rules is 1412 supplemented by many subordinate rules or Vārttikas. The treatise is believed to have been written by Śarvavarman, called Sarvavarman or Śarva or Sarva, who is said to have lived in the reign of the Sātavāhana kings. The belief that Pāṇini refers to a work of Kalāpin in his rules IV. 3.108 and IV.3.48 and that Patañjali's words कालापम् and माहवार्तिकम् support it, has not much strength. The work was very popular especially among those who wanted to study spoken Sanskrit with ease and attained for several year a very prominent place among text-books on grammar especially in Bihar, Bengal and Gujarat. It has got a large number of glosses and commentary works, many of which are in a manuscript form at present. Its last chapter (Caturtha-Adhyāya) is ascribed to Vararuci. As the arrangement of topics is entirely different from Pāṇini's order, inspite of considerable resemblance of Sūtras and their wording, it is probable that the work was based on Pāṇini but composed on the models of ancient grammarians viz. Indra, Śākaṭāyana and others whose works,although not available now, were available to the author. The grammar Kātantra is also called Kālāpa-vyākaraṇasūtra.. A comparison of the Kātantra Sūtras and the Kālāpa-vyākaraṇasūtra. Sūtras shows that the one is a different version of the other. The Kātantra Grammar is also called Kaumāra as it is said that the original 1nstructions for the grammar were received by the author from Kumāra or Kārttikeya. For details see Vol. VII Patañjala Mahābhāṣya published by the D.E. Society, Poona, page 375.

kātantraparibhāṣāpāṭha	name given to a text consisting of Paribhāṣāsūtras, believed to have been written by the Sūtrakāra himself as a supplementary portion to the main grammar. Many such lists of Paribhāṣāsūtras are available, mostly in manuscript form, containing more than a hundred Sūtras divided into two main groups-the Paribhāṣā sūtras and the Balābalasūtras. See परिभाषासंग्रह edition by B. O. R. I. Poona.

kātantraparibhāṣāvṛtti(1)	name of a gloss on the Paribhāṣāpaṭha written by Bhāvamiśra, probably a Maithila Pandit whose date is not known. He has explained 62 Paribhāṣās deriving many of them from the Kātantra Sūtras. The work seems to be based on the Paribhāṣā works by Vyāḍiparibhāṣāsūcana.and others on the system of Pāṇini, suitable changes having been made by the writer with a view to present the work as belonging to the Kātantra school; (2) name of a gloss on the Paribhāṣāpaṭha of the Kātantra school explaining 65 Paribhāṣās. No name of the author is found in the Poona manuscript. The India Office Library copy has given Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. as the author's name; but it is doubted whether Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. was the author of it. See परिभाषासंग्रह edition by B. O. R. I. Poona.

kātantrapariśiṣṭa	ascribed to Śrīpatidatta, whose date is not known; from a number of glosses written on this work, it appears that the work was once very popular among students of the Kātantra School.

kātantravṛtti	name of the earliest commentary on the Kātantra Sūtras ascribed to Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti.. The commentary was once very popular as is shown by a number of explanatory commentaries written upon it, one of which is believed to have been written by Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. himselfeminine. See Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti..

kit(1)	marked with the mute letter क् which is applied by Pāṇini to affixes, for preventing guṇa and vṛddhi substitutes to the preceding इक् vowel (इ, उ, ऋ or लृ); confer, compareक्ङिति च, Pāṇ. I.1.5; (2) considered or looked upon as marked with mute indicatory क् for preventing guna; confer, compare असंयोगाल्लिट् कित् and the following P.I.2.5 et cetera, and others The affixes of the first type are for instance क्त, क्त्वा, क्तिन् and others. The affixes of the second type are given mainly in the second pada of the first Adhyāya by Pāṇini. Besides the prevention of guṇa and wrddhi, affixes marked with कु or affixes called कित्, cause Saṁprasāraṇa (see P. VI.1.15,16), elision of the penultimate न् (P.VI.4.24), elision of the penultimate vowel (P. VI.4.98,100), lengthening of the vowel (VI.4.15), substitution of ऊ (VI.4.19,21), elision of the final nasal (VI. 4.37), substitution of अI (VI.4.42). The taddhita affixes which are marked with mute क् cause the Vṛddhi substitute for the first vowel in the word to which they are addedition

kṛtvasuc	taddhita affix. affix कृत्वम् applied to numerals to convey the sense of repetition, e. g. पंञ्चकृत्वः दशकृत्वः confer, compare संख्यायाः क्रियाभ्यावृत्तिगणने कृत्वसुच् P. V. 4.17.

kyap	kṛt afix य applied to the roots व्रज् and यज् in the sense of 'verbal activity' and to the roots अजू with सम्, षद् with नि et cetera, and others to form proper nouns e. g. व्रज्या, इज्या, समज्या, निषद्या et cetera, and others, confer, compare P. III. 3.98 and 99; (2) kṛtya affix य in the sense of 'should be done' applied to the roots वद्, भू and हन् (when preceded by certain words put as upapada), as also to roots with penultimate ऋ and the roots मृज्, इ, स्तु and others; e. g. ब्रह्मोद्यम् , ब्रह्मभूयम् , इत्यम् , स्तुत्यम् et cetera, and others confer, compare Kāś. on P. III. 1. 106,121.

kriyāviśeṣaṇa	determinant or modifier of a verbal activity; confer, compare क्रियाविशेषणं चेति वक्तव्यम् । सुष्टु पचति दुष्टु पचति M.Bh. on II.1.1; nouns used as Kriyāviśeṣaṇa are put in the neuter gender, and in the nominative case. or the acc. case in the singular. number; confer, compare क्रियाविशेषणानां कर्मत्वं नपुंसकलिङ्गता च Pari.Bhāśkara Pari.56.

kṣapaṇaka	a Jain grammarian quoted in the well-known stanza धन्वन्तरिः क्षपणकोमरसिंहशङ्कु which enumerates the seven gems of the court of Vikramāditya, on the strength of which some scholars believe that he was a famous grammarian of the first century B.C.

khilapāṭha	a supplementary recital or enunciation which is taken along with the original enunciation or upadeśa generally in the form of the sūtras. The word is used in the Kāśikā in the sense of one of the texts forming a part of the original text which is called upadeśa; confer, compare Kāśikā उपदिश्यते अनेनेत्युपदेश: शास्त्रवाक्यानि सूत्रपाठ: खिलपाठश्च (on P.I.3.2); confer, compare also खिलपाठो धातुपाठः प्रातिपदिकपाठो वाक्यपाठश्च Padamañjarī, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Haradatta. on Kāśikā I.3.2.

gaṇapāṭha	the mention individually of the several words forming a class or gaṇa, named after the first word said to have been written by Pāṇini himself as a supplementary work to his great grammar called Aṣṭaka or Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī., the Sikṣā,the Dhātupātha and the Lingānuśāsana being the other ones. Other grammarians such as शाकटायन, अापिशलि and others have their own gaṇapāthās. The gaṇapāthā is traditionally ascribed to Pāṇini; the issue is questioned, however, by modern scholars. The text of the gaṇapāṭha is metrically arranged by some scholars. The most scholarly and authoritative treatise on gaṇapāṭha is the Gaṇaratnamahodadhī of Vardhamāna.

gaṇaratnamahodadhi	a grammar work, consisting of a metrical enumeration of the words in the Gaṇapāṭha of Pāṇini, written by Vardhamāna, a Jain grammarian of the 12th century, who is believed to have been one of the six gems at the court of Lakṣmaṇasena of Bengal. Vardhamāna has written a commentary also, on his Gaṇaratnamahodadhi. Besides Vardhamāna's commentary, there are other commentaries written by गोवर्धन and गङ्गाधर.

gaṇasūtravicāra	a commentary on the Gaṇapāṭha of Pāṇini written by Mannudeva who flourished in the nineteenth century.

gadādharacakravartin	the reputed Naiyāyika who wrote numerous works on the Navyanyaya; he has written a few works like व्युत्पत्तिवाद, उपसर्गविचार, कारकनिर्णय, सर्वनामविचार, प्रत्ययविचार on Vyākaraṇa themes although the treatment, as also the style, is logical.

gavāśvaprabhṛti	the dvandva compound words गवाश्व, गवाविक गवैडक, अजाविक, कुब्जमाणवक, पुत्रपौत्र मांसशोणित and others which are to be declined in the neuter gender and singular number; confer, compare P. II. 4.11.

guṇabhāvin	a vowel, liable to take the guna substitute e. g. इ, उ, ऋ, लृ and the penultimate अ; confer, compare यत्र क्ङित्यनन्तरो गुणभाव्यस्ति तत्रैव स्यात् । चितम् । स्तुतम् । इह तु न स्याद्भिन्नः भिन्नवानिति । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 1.5.

gopavanādi	a class of eight words headed by the word गोपवन, the taddhita affix in the sense of गोत्र ( i. e. a descendant excepting a son or a daughter) such as the affix यञ् or अञू after which, is not elided in the plural number; c. g. गौपवना:, शौग्रवा: et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. II. 4.67.

gaurādi	a class of words to which the affix ई ( ङीष्) is added to form the feminine base; exempli gratia, for example गौरी, मत्सी, हयी, हरिणी; the class contains a large number of words exceeding 150; for details see Kasika on P.IV.1. 41; (2) a small class of eleven words, headed by the word गौर which do not have the acute accent on the last syllable in a tatpurusa compound when they are placed after the preposition उप; confer, compare P. VI.2.194.

grasta	a fault of pronunciation due to the utterance of a letter hindered or held back at the throat; confer, compare जिह्वामूलनिग्रहे ग्रस्तमेतत् R.Pr.XIV.3; confer, compare also ग्रस्तं निरस्तमवलम्बितम् । ग्रस्तः जिह्वामूले गृहीतः । अव्यक्त इत्यपरे । Pradipa on Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika 1.

gha(l)	consonant घ्, अ being added at the end for facility of pronunciation; confer, compareTai. Pr.I.21; (2) technical term for the taddhita affix. affixes तरप् and तमप्, confer, compare P.I.1.22, causing the shortening of ई at the end of bases before it, under certain conditions, confer, compare P. VI. 3.43-45, and liable to be changed into तराम् and तमाम् after किम्, verbs ending in ए, and indeclinables; confer, compare P.V.4.11; (3) taddhita affix. affix घ ( इय) in the sense of 'a descendant' applied to क्षत्र, and in the sense of 'having that as a deity' applied to अपोनप्तृ अपांनप्तृ and also to महेन्द्र and to the words राष्ट्र et cetera, and others, exempli gratia, for example क्षत्रियः, अपोनाप्त्रिय:, अपांनप्त्रियः, महेन्द्रियम्,राष्ट्रियः et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. IV.1.138, IV.2.27, 29, 93; (4) taddhita affix. affix घ, applied to अग्र, समुद्र and अभ्र in the sense of 'present there', to सहस्र in the sense of 'possession', to, नक्षत्र without any change of sense, and to यज्ञ and ऋत्विज् in the sense of 'deserving'; confer, compare P.IV.4.117,118,135, 136,141, V.1.71 ; (5) krt affix अ when the word to which it has been applied becomes a proper noun id est, that isa noun in a specific sense or a technical term; confer, compare III.3. 118, 119,125.

ghoṣa	an external effort in the pronunciation of a sonant or a soft consonant which causes depth of the tone: confer, compare अन्ये तु घोषाः स्युः संवृताः et cetera, and others, Sid. Kau. on VIII. 2. 1 .

ṅa(1)	fifth consonant of the guttural class of consonants which is a nasal ( अनुनासिक ) consonant; the vowel अ being added at the end for facility of pronunciation; confer, compare Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I.21; (2) a conventional term used for all the nasal consonants in the Jainendra Vyakarana.

ṅīp	feminine. affix ई which is anudatta (grave) added (a) to words ending in the vowel ऋ or the consonant न् (confer, compareP.IV.1.5), (b) to words ending with affixes marked with mute उ,ऋ or लृ; confer, compareP.IV.1.6 (c) to words ending with affixes marked with mute ट् as also ending with the affixes ढ, अण्, अञ्, द्वयसच् दघ्नच्,मात्रच्, तयप्, ठक्, ठञ्, कञ् and क्वरप् (confer, compareP.IV.1.15) and to certain other words under certain conditions; confer, compare P. IV. 1.16-24.

cātuḥsvārya	the view that there are four accents-the udatta, the anudatta, the svarita and the pracaya held by the Khandikya and the Aukhiya Schools.

ciccandrikā	name of a commentary on the Paribhasendusekhara written by Vishnu Shastri Bhat, in reply to the treatise named दूषकरदोद्भेदः See विष्णुशास्त्रिन्. For details see pp. 39, 40 of Vyakarana Mahabhasya Vol. VII. published by the D.E. Society, Poona.

ja	the consonant ज् with अ added to it for facility of pronunciation; confer, compare Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I..21. See ज्.

jāti	genus; class;universal;the notion of generality which is present in the several individual objects of the same kindeclinable The biggest or widest notion of the universal or genus is सत्ता which, according to the grammarians, exists in every object or substance, and hence, it is the denotation or denoted sense of every substantive or Pratipadika, although on many an occasion vyakti or an individual object is required for daily affairs and is actually referred to in ordinary talks. In the Mahabhasya a learned discussion is held regarding whether जाति is the denotation or व्यक्ति is the denotation. The word जाति is defined in the Mahabhasya as follows:आकृतिग्रहणा जातिर्लिङ्गानां च न सर्वभाक् । सकृदाख्यातनिर्गाह्या गोत्रं च चरणैः सह ॥ अपर आह । ग्रादुभीवविनाशाभ्यां सत्त्वस्य युगपद्गुणैः । असर्वलिङ्गां बह्वर्थो तां जातिं कवयो विदुः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on IV. 1.63. For details see Bhartphari's Vakyapadiya.

jātipakṣa	the view that जाति, or genus only, is the denotation of every word. The view was first advocated by Vajapyayana which was later on held by many, the Mimamsakas being the chief supporters of the view. See Mahabhasya on P. I. 2.64. See Par. Sek. Pari. 40.

jātisvara	the acute accent for the last vowel of a word ending with क्त of the past passive participle. denoting a genus; confer, compare P. VI. 2.170.

jainendravyākaraṇa	name of a grammar work written by Pujyapada Devanandin, also called Siddhanandin, in the fifth century A.D. The grammar is based on the Astadhyay of Panini,the section on Vedic accent and the rules of Panini explaining Vedic forms being,of course, neglectedition The grammar is called Jainendra Vyakarana or Jainendra Sabdanusasana. The work is available in two versions, one consisting of 3000 sutras and the other of 3700 sutras. it has got many commentaries, of which the Mahavrtti written by Abhayanandin is the principal one. For details see Jainendra Vyakarana, introduction published by the Bharatiya Jnanapitha Varadasi.

jñāpaka	literallyindirect or implicit revealer; a word very commonly used in the sense of an indicatory statement. The Sutras, especially those of Pinini, are very laconic and it is believed that not a single word in the Sutras is devoid of purpose. If it is claimed that a particular word is without any purpose, the object of it being achieved in some other way, the commentators always try to assign some purpose or the other for the use of the word in the Sutra. Such a word or words or sometimes even the whole Sutra is called ज्ञापक or indicator of a particular thing. The Paribhasas or rules of interpretation are mostly derived by indication(ज्ञापकसिद्ध) from a word or words in a Sutra which apparently appear to be व्यर्थ or without purpose, and which are shown as सार्थक after the particular indication ( ज्ञापन ) is drawn from them. The ज्ञापक is shown to be constituted of four parts, वैयर्थ्य, ज्ञापन, स्वस्मिञ्चारितार्थ्य and अन्यत्रफल. For the instances of Jñāpakas, see Paribhāșenduśekhara. Purușottamadeva in his Jñāpakasamuccaya has drawn numerous conclusions of the type of ज्ञापन from the wording of Pāņini Sūtras. The word ज्ञापक and ज्ञापन are used many times as synonyms although ज्ञापन sometimes refers to the conclusions drawn from a wording which is ज्ञापक or indicator. For instances of ज्ञापक, confer, compareM.Bh. on Māheśvara Sūtras 1, 3, 5, P. Ι.1. 3, 11, 18, 23, 51 et cetera, and others The word ऊठ् in the rule वाह ऊठ् is a well known ज्ञापक of the अन्तरङ्गपरिभाषा. The earliest use of the word ज्ञापक in the sense given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page., is found in the Paribhāșāsūcana of Vyādi. The Paribhāșā works on other systems of grammar such as the Kātantra; the Jainendra and others have drawn similar Jñāpakas from the wording of the Sūtras in their systemanuscript. Sometimes a Jñāpaka is not regularly constituted of the four parts given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.;it is a mere indicator and is called बोधक instead of ज्ञापक्र.

ṭā	case ending of the third case (तृतीया) singular. number; confer, compare P. IV.1.2,

ṭha(l)	taddhita affix. affix ठ; see ठ् a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. for the substitution of इक and क for ठ. ठ stands as a common term for ठक् , ठन् , ठञ्, and ठच् as also for ष्ठल्,ष्ठन् , and प्ठच्;(2) the consonant ठ, the vowel अ being added for facitity of pronunciation, confer, compare Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I.21.

ḍ(1)	third letter of the lingual class of consonants possessed of the properties नादानुप्रदान, घोष, संवृतकण्ठत्व, and अल्पप्राण; (2) mute letter applied to affixes by Panini to show the elision of the टि part (confer, compare P. 1. 1.64.) of the preceding word viz. the penultimate vowel and the consonant or consonants following it; cf, टेः ; ( लोप: डिति प्रत्यये परे ) VI.4.143. The syllable ति of विंशति is also elided before an affix markwith the mute letter ड्.

ḍaca	samasanta (अ) added to a Bahu vrihi compound meaning a numeral exempli gratia, for example उपदशाः उपविंशाः confer, compare P.V.474.

ḍaṭ	taddhita affix. अ, affix in the sense of पूरण applied to a numeral to form an ordinal numeral; e. g. एकादशः, त्रयोदशः, confer, compare P.V.2.48

ḍati	taddhita affix. affix अति affixed to the word किम् to show number or measurement; exempli gratia, for example कति ब्राह्मणाः, confer, compare P.V.2.41. The words ending with the affix डति are termed संख्या and षट् for purposes of declension et cetera, and others; confer, compare P.I.1.23,25

ḍā	verb-ending आ, causing elision of the penultimate vowel as also of the following consonant, substituted for the 3rd person. sing, affix तिप् of the first future; exempli gratia, for example क्रर्ता ; confer, compare P.II.4.85; (2) case ending आ substituted in Vedic Literature for any case affix as noticed in Vedic usages; exempli gratia, for example नाभा पृथिव्याम्: confer, compare P. VII.1.39

ḍāc	taddhita affix. affix आ applied to dissyllabic words, used as imitation of sounds, or used as onomatopoetic, when connected with the root कृ or भू or अम्. The word to which डाच् is applied becomes generally doubled; c. g पटपटाकरोति, पटपटाभवति पटपटास्यात्; confer, compare P.V.4.57. The affix डाच् is also applied to द्वितीय, तृतीय, to compound words formed of a numeral and the word गुण, as also to the words सपत्र, निष्पत्र, सुख, प्रिच etc when these words are connected with the root कृ;exempli gratia, for example द्वितीयाकरोति,तृतीया करोति, द्विगुणाकरोति, सपत्राकरोति, सुखाकरोति et cetera, and others; confer, compareP.V.4. 58 to 67.

ḍini	taddhita affix. affix applied to अवान्तरदीक्षा, तिलव्रत et cetera, and others in the sense of चरति (observing); exempli gratia, for example तिलव्रती, confer, compare P. V. 1. 94 Vart 3; (2) applied in the sense of 'having as measurement'applied to numeral words ending in शत् or शिन् and the word विंशति; exempli gratia, for example त्रिंशिनो मासाः, विंशिनोङ्गिरसः; confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. V. 2.37.

ḍupac	tad affix उप added to the word कुतू in the sense of diminutive: exempli gratia, for example कुतुपः a small oil-pot ( कुतू );confer, compare V.3. 89.

ṇamul	krt affix अम्, causing vrddhi to the final vowel or to the penultimate अ, (!) added to any root in the sense of the infinitive in Vedic Literature when the connected root is शक्: exempli gratia, for example अग्निं वै देवा विभाजं नाशक्नुवन; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III. 4.14; (2) added to any root to show frequency of a past action, when the root form ending with णमुल् is repeated to convey the sense of frequency : exempli gratia, for example भोजं भोजं व्रजति, पायंपायं व्रजति, confer, compare Kas on P. III. 4.22; (3) added to a root showing past action and preceded by the word अग्रे, प्रथम or पूर्व, optionally along with the krt affix क्त्वा; exempli gratia, for example अग्रेभोजं or अग्रे भुक्त्वा व्रजति; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.III.4.24;(4) added in general to a root specified in P.III.4.25 to 64, showing a subordinate action and having the same subject as the root showing the main action, provided the root to which णमुल् is added is preceded by an antecedent or connected word, such as स्वादुम् or अन्यथा or एवम् or any other given in Panini's rules; confer, compare P. III.4.26 to III.4.64; exempli gratia, for example स्वादुंकारं भुङ्क्ते, अन्यथाकारं भुङ्क्ते, एवंकारं भुङ्क्ते, ब्राह्मणवेदं भोजयति, यावज्जीवमधीते, समूलकाषं कषति, समूलघातं हन्ति, तैलपेषं पिनष्टि, अजकनाशं नष्टः et cetera, and others; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.III.4.26-64. When णमुल् is added to the roots कष्, पिष्, हन् and others mentioned in P. III. 4. 34 to 45, the same root is repeated to show the principal action. The word ending in णमुल् has the acute accent (उदात) on the first vowel (confer, compare P.VI.I. 94) or on the vowel preceding the affix; confer, compare P. VI.1.193.

ṇit(1)	an affix with the mute con.sonant ण् added to it to signify the substitution of vrddhi for the preceding vowel or for the penultimate अ or for the first vowel of the word if the affix applied is a taddhita affix; confer, compare P. VII.2.115117: e. g. अण्, ण, उण्, णि et cetera, and others: (2) an affix not actually marked with the mute letter ण् but looked upon as such for the purpose of vrddhi; e. g. the Sarvanamasthana affixes after the words गो and सखि, confer, compare P. VII.1.90, 92.

tatpuruṣa	name of an important kind of compound words similar to the compound word तत्पुरुष id est, that is ( तस्य पुरुषः ), and hence chosen as the name of such compounds by ancient grammarians before Panini. Panini has not defined the term with a view to including such compounds as would be covered by the definition. He has mentioned the term तत्पुरुष in II.1.22 as Adhikara and on its strength directed that all compounds mentioned or prescribed thereafter upto Sutra II.2.22 be called तत्पुरुष. No definite number of the sub-divisions of तत्पुरुष is given;but from the nature of compounds included in the तत्पुरुष-अधिकार, the sub-divisions विभक्तितत्पुरुष confer, compare P.II.1.24 to 48, समानाधिकरणतत्पुरुष confer, compare P. II.1.49 to 72 (called by the name कर्मधारय; acc.to P.I. 2. 42), संख्यातत्पुरुष (called द्विगु by P.II.1.52), अवयत्रतत्पुरुष or एकदेशितत्पुरुषं confer, compare P.II.2.1-3, ब्यधिकरणतत्पुरुष confer, compare P. II 2.5, नञ्तत्पुरुष confer, compare P.II.2.6, उपपदतत्पुरुष confer, compare P. II.2.19, प्रादितत्पुरुष confer, compare P.II.2 18 and णमुल्तत्पुरुष confer, compareP.II.2.20 are found mentioned in the commentary literature on standard classical works. Besides these, a peculiar tatpurusa compound mentioned by'Panini in II.1.72, is popularly called मयूरव्यंसकादिसमास. Panini has defined only two out of these varieties viz. द्विगु as संख्यापूर्वो द्विगुः P.II. 1.23, and कर्मधारय as तत्पुरुषः समानाधिकरणः कर्मधारयः P. I.2.42. The Mahabhasyakara has described तत्पुरुष as उत्तरपदार्थप्रधानस्तत्पुरुषः: confer, compare M.Bh. on II.1.6, II.1.20, II.1.49, et cetera, and others, and as a consequence it follows that the gender of the tatpurusa compound word is that of the last member of the compound; confer, compare परवल्लिङ द्वन्द्वतत्पुरुषयोः P. II.4. 26; cf also तत्पुरुषश्चापि कः परवल्लिङं प्रयोजयति । यः पूर्वपदार्थप्रधानः एकदेशिसमासः अर्धपिप्पलीति । यो ह्युत्तरपदार्थप्रधानो दैवकृतं तस्य परवल्लिङ्गम्, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.4.26. Sometimes, the compound gets a gender different from that of the last word; confer, compare P.II.4.19-31, The tatpurusa compound is optional as generally all compounds are, depending as they do upon the desire of the speaker. Some tatpurusa compounds such as the प्रादितत्पुरुष or उपपदतत्पुरुष are called नित्य and hence their constitutent words, with the case affixes applied to them, are not noticed separately; confer, compare P.II.2.18,19, In some cases अ as a compound-ending ( समासान्त ) is added: exempli gratia, for example राजघुरा, नान्दीपुरम् ; confer, compare P. V.4.74; in some cases अच् ( अ ) is added: confer, compare P.V-4 75 o 87: while in some other cases टच् ( अ ) is added, the mute letter ट् signifying the addition of ङीप् ( ई) in the feminine gender; confer, compareP.V.4. 91-1 12. For details See p.p. 270-273 Mahabhasya Vol.VII published by the D. E. Society, Poona.

tadantavidhi	a peculiar feature in the interpretation of the rules of Panini, laid down by the author of the Sutras himself by virtue of which an adjectival word, qualifying its principal word, does not denote itself, but something ending with it also; confer, compare येन विधिस्तदन्तस्य P.I.1.72.This feature is principally noticed in the case of general words or adhikaras which are put in a particular rule, but which Occur in a large number of subsequent rules; for instance, the word प्रातिपदिकात्, put in P.IV.1.1, is valid in every rule upto the end of chapter V and the words अतः, उतः, यञः et cetera, and others mean अदन्ताद् , उदन्तात् , यञन्तात् et cetera, and others Similarly the words धातोः (P.III.1.91) and अङ्गस्य (P.VI. 4.1 ) occurring in a number of subsequent rules have the adjectival words to them, which are mentioned in subsequent rules, denoting not only those words,but words ending with them. In a large number of cases this feature of तदन्तविधि is not desirable, as it, goes against arriving at the desired forms, and exceptions deduced from Panini's rules are laid down by the Varttikakara and later grammarians; confer, compare Par. Sek. Pari. 16,23, 31 : also Mahabhasya on P.I.1.72.

taddhita	a term of the ancient prePaninian grammarians used by Panini just like सर्वनामन् or अव्यय without giving any specific definition of it. The term occurs in the Nirukta of Yaska and the Vajasaneyi-Pratisakhya ; confer, compare अथ तद्वितसमासेषु एकपर्वसु चानेकपर्वसु पूर्वे पूर्वमपरमपरं प्रविभज्य निर्ब्रूयात् । द्ण्डय्ः पुरुषः । दण्डमर्हतीति वा, दण्डेन संपद्यते इति वा Nirukta of Yāska.II.2; also confer, compare तिङ्कृत्तद्धितचतुथ्यसमासाः इाब्दमयम् Vaj Prati.I. 27. It is to be noted that the word तद्वित is used by the ancient grammarians in the sense of a word derived from a substantive ( प्रातिपादक ) by the application of suffixes like अ, यत् et cetera, and others, and not in the sense of words derived from roots by affixes like अन, ति et cetera, and others which were termed नामकरण, as possibly contrasted with the word ताद्धित used by Yaska in II. 5. Panini has used the word तद्धित not for words, but for the suffixes which are added to form such words at all places (e. g. in I. 1.38, IV.1.17, 76, VI.1.61 et cetera, and others). in fact, he has begun the enumeration of taddhita affixes with the rule तद्धिता: (P.IV.1. 76) by putting the term तद्धित for affixes such as ति, ष्यङ्, अण् et cetera, and others which are mentioned thereafter. In his rule कृत्तद्धितसमासाश्च and in the Varttika समासकृत्तद्धिताव्यय(I.4.1Vart. 41) which are similar to V.Pr.1. 27 quoted a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. the word तद्धित appears to be actually used for words derived from nouns by secondary affixes, along with the word कृत् which also means words derived from roots, although commentators have explained there the terms कृत् and तद्धित for कृदन्त and तद्धितान्त. The term तद्वित is evidently echoed in the Sutra तस्मै हितम् which, although it is not the first Sutra there were possibly long lists of secondary nouns with the senses of secondary suffixes, and तद्धित was perhaps,the first sense given there. The number of taddhita suffixes mentioned by Panini is quite a large one; there are in fact 1110 rules given in the taddhita section covering almost two Adhyayas viz. from P. IV. 1.76 to the end of the fifth Adhyaya. The main sub-divisions of taddhita affixes mentioned by commentators are, Apatyadyarthaka (IV. 1.92 to 178), Raktadyarthaka (IV.2.1 to 91), Saisika {IV.2. 92 to IV.3.133), Pragdivyatiya (IV. 3 134 to 168), Pragvahatiya (IV.4.1 to IV.4.74), Pragghitiya (IV.4.75 to IV.4.109), Arhiya (V.1.1 to 71),Thanadhikarastha (V. 1.72 to V. 1.1.114), Bhavakarmarthaka (V. 1.115 to V.1.136), Pancamika (V. 2.1 to V. 2.93), Matvarthiya (V. 2.94 to V. 2. 140), Vibhaktisamjaaka (V. 3.1 to V. 3.26) and Svarthika (V. 3.27 to V. 4.160). The samasanta affixes (V.4.68 to V.4.160) can be included in the Svarthika affixes.

tadrāja	the taddhita affixes अञ्,अण्,ञ्यङ, ण्य, as also इञ्, छ्, ञ्युट्, ण्य, टेण्यण् and यञ् given in the rules of Panini IV. 1.168-174 and V.3. 112-119. They are called तद्राज as they are applied to such words as mean both the country and the warrior race or clan ( क्षत्त्रिय ): confer, compare तद्राजमाचक्षाणः तद्राजः S. K. on P. IV.l.168. The peculiar feature of these tadraja affixes is that they are omitted when the word to which they have been applied is used in the plural number; e. g. ऐक्ष्वाकः, ऐक्ष्वाकौ, इक्ष्वाकवः; similarly इक्ष्वाकूणाम्; confer, compare P.II.4.62.

tantrapradīpa	name of the learned commentary_written by मैत्रेयरक्षित, a famous Buddhist grammarian of the 12th century A. D. on the काशिकाविवरणपञ्जिका ( न्यास ) of Jinendrabuddhi। The work is available at Present only in a manuscript form, and that too in fragments. Many later scholars have copiously quoted from this work. The name of the work viz. तन्त्रप्रदीप is rarely mentioned; but the name of the author is mentioned as रक्षित, मैत्रेय or even मैत्रेयरक्षित. Ther are two commentaries on the तन्त्रप्रदीप named उद्द्योतनप्रभा and आलोक,

taya	taddhita affix. affix तयप् applied to a numeral ( संख्या ) in the sense of अवयविन् or 'possessed of parts'; e. g. पञ्च अवयवा अस्य पञ्चतयम् , दशतयम् , चतुष्टयी; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V. 2.42. अय is substituted for तय optionally after the numerals द्वि and त्रि and necessarily after उभ; confer, compare P. V. 2.43-44.

tal	tad, affix त (l) added in the sense of collection (समूह) to the words ग्राम, जन, बन्धु and सहाय and गज also, exempli gratia, for example ग्रामता, जनता et cetera, and others; (2) added in the sense of 'the nature of a thing' ( भाव ) along with the affix त्व optionally, as also optionally along with the affixes इमन्, ष्यञ् et cetera, and others given in P. V. 1.122 to 136; e. g. अश्वत्वम्, अश्वता; अपतित्वम्, अपतिता; पृथुत्वम्, पृथुता, प्रथिमा; शुक्लता, शुक्लत्वम्, शौक्ल्यम्, शुक्लिमा; et cetera, and others, cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.V.1.119 to 136. Words ending with the affix तल् are always declined in the feminine gender with the feminine. affix अा ( टाप् ) added to then; confer, compare तलन्तः (शब्दः स्त्रियाम् ), Linganusasana 17.

tāthābhāvya	name given to the grave (अनुदात्त) vowel which is अवग्रह id est, that is which occurs at the end of the first member of a compound and which is placed between two acute vowels id est, that is is preceded by and followed by an acute vowel; exempli gratia, for example तनूSनप्त्रे, तनूSनपत्: confer, compare उदाद्यन्तो न्यवग्रहस्ताथाभाव्यः । V.Pr.I.120. The tathabhavya vowel is recited as a kampa ( कम्प ) ; confer, compare तथा चोक्तमौज्जिहायनकैर्माध्यन्दिनमतानुसारिभिः'अवग्रहो यदा नीच उच्चयॊर्मध्यतः क्वचित् । ताथाभाव्यो भवेत्कम्पस्तनूनप्त्रे निदर्शनम्'. Some Vedic scholars hold the view that the ताथाभाव्य vowel is not a grave ( अनुदात्त ) vowel, but it is a kind of स्वरित or circumflex vowel. Strictly according to Panini "an anudatta following upon an udatta becomes Svarita": confer, compare P.VIII.4.66, V.Pr. IV. 1.138: cf also R.Pr.III. 16.

tārakādi	a class of words headed by the word तारका and containing prominently the words पुष्प, कण्टक, मुकुल, कुसुम, पल्लव, बुभुक्षा, ज्वर and many others numbering more than ninety, to which the taddhita affix इत (इतच्) is added in the sense of 'containing'. As this class, called तारकादि, is looked upon as आकृतिगण, nouns with इत added at their end, are supposed to be included in it; confer, compare P. V. 2.36.

tikakitavādi	a class of compound words headed by the dvandva compound तिककितव in which the taddhita affixes added to the constituent members of the compound are dropped when the dvandva compound is to be used in the plural number; तैकायनयश्च कैतवायनयश्च तिककितवाः; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. II. 4.68.

tīkṣṇa	utterance with a sharp tone characterizing the pronunciation of the Abhinihita kind of circumflex vowel as opposed to the utterance which is called मृदु when the circumflex, called पादवृत्त, is pronounced; confer, compare सर्वतीक्ष्णोऽभिनिहितः प्रश्लिष्टस्तदनन्तरम्, ततो मृदुतरौ स्वारौ जात्यक्षैप्रावुभौ स्मृतौ । ततो मृदुतरः स्वारस्तैरोव्यञ्जन उच्यते । पादवृत्तो मृदुतमस्त्वेतत्स्वारबलाबलम् Uvvata on Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 125.

tīvratara	extreme sharpness of the nasalization at the time of pronouncing the anusvara and the fifth letters recommended by Saityayana.e. g. अग्नीररप्सुषदः, वञ्चते परिवञ्चते. confer, compare Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XVII. 1.

tri(1)	krt affix क्त्रि, always having the taddhita affix. affix मप् ( म ) added to it, applied to the roots marked with the mute syllable डु prefixed to them in the Dhatupatha; e. g. कृत्रिमम्, पक्त्रिमम्; (2) a term signifying the plural number; confer, compare ना नौ मे मदर्थे त्रिद्व्येकेषु V.Pr.II.3.

thaṭ	taddhita affix. affix थ added to numerals ending in न् in Vedic Literature; e. g. पञ्चथ, सप्तथः, पर्णमयानि पञ्चथानि भवन्ति: confer, compare P. V. 2.50.

daggha	a fault of pronunciation where the letters are uttered indistinct ( अस्पष्ट ).

dadhipayaādi	a class of compound words headed by the word दधिपयस् which are not compounded as समाहारद्वन्द्व which ends in the neuter gender and singular number; exempli gratia, for example दधिपयसी, शिववैश्रवणौ, श्रद्धातपसी et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.II. 4.14.

darpaṇā	name of a commentary on the Sabdakaustubha, written by Mannudeva or Mantudeva of the nineteenth century.

durgasiṃha	the famous commentator of the Katantra sutras, whose Vrtti on the sutras is the most popular one. It is called , कातन्त्रसूत्रवृत्ति or कातन्तवृत्ति or दौर्गसिंहीवृत्ति , also. A work on Paribhasas named परिभाषावृति, in which Paribhasas are explained and established as based on the Katantra Vyakarana sutras, is attributed to Durgasimha. It is doubtful whether this commentator Durgasimha is the same as Durgacarya, the famous commentator of Yaska's Nirukta. There is a legend that Durgasimha was the brother of Vikramaditya, the founder of the Vikrama Era. Besides the gloss on the Katantra sutras, some grammar works such as a gloss on the unadi sutras, a gloss ( वृत्ति ) on Kalapa-Vyakarana Sutras, a commentary on Karakas named षट्कारकरत्न, Namalinganusasana and Paribhasavrtti are ascribed to Durgasimha. Some scholars believe that the term अमरसिंह was only a title given to Durgasimha for his profound scholarship, and it was Durgasimha who was the author of the well-known work Amarakosa.

durghaṭavṛtti	name of a grammar work explaining words which are difficult to derive according to rules of Panini. The work is written in the style of a running commentary on select sutras of Panini, devoted mainly to explain difficult formations. The author of it, Saranadeva, was an eastern grammarian who, as is evident from the number of quotations in his work, was a great scholar of the 12th or the 13th century.

dūṣakaradodbheda	name of a commentary, on the Paribhasendusekhara of Nagesa, believed to have been written by Gopalacārya Karhadkar, a grammarian of the 19th century and attributed to Bhimacarya. This commentary, which was written to criticize the commentary written by Visnusastri Bhat, was again criticized in reply by Visnusastri Bhat in his Ciccandrika ( चिच्चन्द्रिका ). See विष्णुशास्त्री भट.

devatādvandva	a compound word called द्वन्द्व whose members are names of deities; the peculiarities of this Dvandva compound are (a) that generally there are changes at the end of the first member, by virtue of which it appears similar to a word ending in the dual number, and (b) that both the words retain their original accents.exempli gratia, for example इन्द्रासोमौ, सौमापूषणा, अग्नीषोमाभ्यां, मित्रावरुणाभ्याम् ; for changes, confer, compare P. VI.3.25-31; for accent, confer, compare देवताद्वन्द्वानि चानामन्त्रितानि (द्विरुदात्तानिं) । इन्द्राबृहस्पतिभ्याम्, इन्द्राबृहस्पती इति त्रीणि Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.II.48, 49; confer, compare also देवताद्वन्द्वे च P. VI, 2.141.

doṣa(1)	a fault of pronunciation; cf एताः स्वरदोषभावनाः अतोन्ये व्यञ्जनदोषाः M.Bh. on I. 1.1 Vart.18 (2) defect shown in connection with an expression or explanation.

dravya	substance, as opposed to गुण property and क्रिया action which exist on dravya. The word सत्त्व is used by Yaska, Panini and other grammarians in a very general sense as something in completed formation or existence as opposed to 'bhava' or kriya or verbal activity, and the word द्रव्य is used by old grammarians as Synonymous with सत्त्व; confer, compare चादयोSसत्वे। चादयो निपातसंज्ञा भवन्ति न चेत्सत्वे वर्तन्ते, confer, compare Kas on P. I. 4.57; confer, compare S.K. also on P. I.4.57. (2)The word द्रव्य is also found used in the sense of an individual object, as opposed to the genus or generic notion ( अाकृति ); confer, compare द्रव्याभिधानं व्याडिः, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2. 64. Vart. 45.(3)The word द्रव्य is found used in the sense of Sadhana or means in Tait. Prati. confer, compare तत्र शब्दद्रव्याण्युदाहरिष्यामः । शब्दरूपाणि साधनानि वर्णयिष्यामः Tai, Pr. XXII. 8.

dvi	a term used for the dual number in the Pratisakhya works; confer, compare नो नौ मे मदर्थे त्रिद्व्येकेषु Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.II. 3 where Uvvata has explained the words त्रि, द्वि and एक as बहुवचन, द्विवचन and एक्वचन respectively.

dvigu	name of a compound with a numeral as the first member. The compound is looked upon as a subdivision of the Tatpurusa comPoundThe dvigu compound, having collection as its general sense, is declined in the neuter gender and singular number; when it ends in अ the feminine. affix ङी is added generally, e. g. पञ्चपात्रम्, त्रिभुवनम्, पञ्चमूली. The Dvigu comPound also takes place when a karmadharaya compound, having a word denoting a direction or a numeral as its first member, (a) has a taddhita affix. affix added to it exempli gratia, for example पञ्चकपाळः (पुरोडाशः), or (b) has got a word placed after it in a compound e. g. पशञ्चगवधनः or (c) has a collective sense exempli gratia, for example पञ्चपूली; confer, compare तद्वितार्थोत्तरपदसमाहारे च ( P. II.1.51 ) also, cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. and S. K. om P.II.1.51,52.

dvitva	doubling, reduplication prescribed for (I) a root in the perfect tense excepting the cases where the affix अाम् is added to the root before the personal ending: exempli gratia, for example बभूव, चकार, ऊर्णुनाव et cetera, and others cf P. VI. 1.1,2; (2) a root before the vikarana affixes सन्, यङ्, श्लु and चङ् e. g. बुभूषति, चेक्रीयते, चर्करीति, जुहोति, अचीकरत् et cetera, and others confer, compare P. VI. 1.9l l ; (3) a word ending in अम् . ( णमुल् ) in the sense of repetition, e. g. स्मारं स्मारं वक्ष्ये, भोजं भोजं व्रजति confer, compare आभीक्ष्ण्ये द्वे भवतः P. VIII. 1.12 Vart. 7; (4) any word (a) in the sense of constant or frequent action, (b) in the sense of repetition, (c) showing reproach, or scorn, or quality in the sense of its incomplete possess-, ion, or (d) in the vocative case at the beginning of a sentence in some specified senses; reduplication is also prescribed for the prepositions परि, प्र, सम्, उप, उद्, उपरि, अधि, अघस् in some specified senses confer, compare P. VIII. 1.1 to 15. A letter excepting हृ and र्, is also repeated, if so desired, when (a) it occurs after the letter ह् or र् ， which is preceded by a vowel e g. अर्क्कः अर्द्धम् et cetera, and others cf VIII. 4.46; or when (b) it is preceded by a vowel and followed by a consonant e. g. दद्ध्यत्र, म्द्धवत्र confer, compare P. VIII. 4.47. For details see Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on VIII. 4.46-52. The word द्वित्व is sometimes used in the sense of the dual number; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. I.2.51. The words द्वित्व, द्विर्वचन and द्विरुक्त are generally used as synonymanuscript. Panini generally uses the word द्वे. For द्वित्व in Vedic Literature confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VI. 1.4; Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XIV. 1-8 V, Pr. IV. 101-118.

dvivacana	a case affix of the dual number; dual number; a word in the dual number; cf Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 1,11, I. 4.21 et cetera, and others: confer, compare द्वयोरर्थयोर्वचनं द्विवचनम् Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V. 3.57.

dvivacas	a word in the dual number ; confer, compare षष्ठादयश्च द्विवचोन्तभाजः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 28 where the word द्विवचस् is explained as द्विवचनाभिधायिनः by Uvvata.

dvisandhi	a kind of विवृत्ति or interval of time in the pronunciation of two consecutive vowels, which as a result of two euphonic changes has a vowel preceded by a vowel and followed also by a vowel: e. g. अभूदुभा उ अंशवे, Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) II. 44.

dvisvara	possessed of two vowels,dissyllabic; confer, compare न पदे द्विस्वरे नित्यम् Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XVI. 17. द्विस्स्पृष्ट a term used for an upadhmaniya letter or a phonetic element resulting from a visarga followed by the letter प्， or फ़्. See उपध्मांनीय.The word is also used sometimes for the pronunciation ळ् of ड्, and ळ्ह् of ढ्. See दुःस्पृष्ट.

dhā	taddhita affix.affix (l) applied to a numeral in the sense of a kind ( प्रकार ) or a division of time, exempli gratia, for exampleएकधा, द्विधा, त्रिधा et cetera, and others: confer, compare P.V.3.42, 43; (2) applied to बहु to show divisions of a short time;exempli gratia, for example बहुधा दिवसस्य भुङ्क्क्ते and बहुधा मासस्य भुङ्क्ते;confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.V.4.20.

dhātu	a root; the basic word of a verbal form,defined by the Bhasyakara as क्रियावचनो धातुः or even as भाववचने धातु:, a word denoting a verbal activity. Panini has not defined the term as such, but he has given a long list of roots under ten groups, named dasagani, which includes about 2200 roots which can be called primary roots as contrasted with secondary roots. The secondary roots can be divided into two main groups ( l ) roots derived from roots ( धातुजधातवः ) and (2) roots derived from nouns ( नामधातवः ). The roots derived from roots can further be classified into three main subdivisions : (a) causative roots or णिजन्त, (b) desiderative roots or सन्नन्त, (c) intensive roots or यङन्त and यङ्लुगन्त: while roots derived from nouns or denominative roots can further be divided into क्यजन्त, काम्यजन्त, क्यङन्त, क्यषन्त, णिङन्त, क्विबन्त and the miscellaneous ones ( प्रकीर्ण ) as derived from nouns like कण्डू( कण्ड्वादि ) by the application of the affix यक् or from nouns like सत्य,वेद, पाश, मुण्ड,मिश्र, et cetera, and others by the application of the affix णिच्. Besides these, there are a few roots formed by the application of the affix अाय and ईय (ईयङ्). All these roots can further be classified into Parasmaipadin or Parasmaibhasa, Atmanepadin or Atmanebhasa and Ubhayapadin. Roots possessed of a mute grave ( अनुदात्त ) vowel or of the mute consonant ङ् added to the root in the Dhatupatha or ending in the affixes यड्, क्यङ् et cetera, and others as also roots in the passive voice are termed Atmanepadin: while roots ending with the affix णिच् as also roots possessed of a mute circumflex vowel or a mute consonant ञ़़् applied to them are termed Ubhayapadin. All the rest are termed Parasmaipadin. There are some other mute letters or syllables applied by Panini to the roots in his Dhatupatha for specific purposes; exempli gratia, for example ए at the end to signify prohibition of vrddhi to the penultimate अ in the aorist, exempli gratia, for example अकखीत् confer, compare P. VII.2.5; इर् to signify the optional substitution of अ or अङ् for the affix च्लि of the aorist, exempli gratia, for example अभिदत्, अभैत्सीत् ; confer, compare P.III. 1.57; उ to signify the optional application of the augment इ ( इट् ) before क्त्वा exempli gratia, for example शमित्वा, शान्त्वा; confer, compare P.VII. 2. 56; ऊ to signify the optional application of the augment इ ( इट् ) exempli gratia, for example गोप्ता, गेीपिता, confer, compare P.VII.2.44; अा to signify the prohibition of the augment इट् in the case of the past passive voice. participle. exempli gratia, for example क्ष्विण्णः, स्विन्नः, confer, compare P. VII.2.16; इ to signify the addition of a nasal after the last vowel e. g. निन्दति from निदि, confer, compare P. VII.1.58: ऋ to signify the prohibition of ह्रस्व to the penultimate long vowel before णिच्, e. g. अशशासत्, confer, compare P.VII. 4.2;लृ to signify the substitution of अङ् for च्लि in the aorist, exempli gratia, for example अगमत् confer, compare P. III.1.55: ओ to signify the substitution of न् for त् of the past passive voice.participle. exempli gratia, for example लग्नः, अापीनः, सूनः, दून: et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. VIII. 2.45. Besides these,the mute syllables ञि, टु and डु are prefixed for specific purposes; confer, compare P. III.2.187, III.3.89 and III. 3.88. The term धातु is a sufficiently old one which is taken by Panini from ancient grammarians and which is found used in the Nirukta and the Pratisakhya works, signifying the 'elemental (radical)base' for nouns which are all derivable from roots according to the writers of the Nirukta works and the grammarian Siktaayana; confer, compare नाम च धातुजमाह निरुक्ते व्याकरणे शकटस्य च तोकम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III.3.1. Some scholars have divided roots into six categories; confer, compare तत्र धातवः षोढा (a) परिपठिताः भूवादयः, (b) अपरिपठता अान्दोलयत्यादयः, (c) परिपठितापरिपठिताः ( सूत्रपठिताः ) स्कुस्कम्भस्तम्भेत्यादयः, (d) प्रत्ययधातवः सनाद्यन्ताः, (e) नामघातवः कण्ड्वादयः, (f) प्रत्ययनामधातवः होडगल्भक्ली. बप्रभृतयः; cf Sringara Prak. I. For details see M.Bh. on P.I.3.I as also pp 255, 256 Vol. VII Vyakarana-Mahabhasya published by the D.E. Society, Poona.

dhātūpadeśa	enumeration or recital of roots in the Dhatupatha;confer, compare प्रकृत्युपपदोपाधयश्वोपदिष्टः। क्व । धातूपदेशे प्रातिपदिकोपदेशे च । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III. 1 1.

dhātvarthe	literally meaning of a root, the verbal activity, named क्रिया or भावः . confer, compare धात्वर्थः क्रिया; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.2. 84, III.2.115. The verbal activity is described generally to be made up of a series of continuous subordinate activities carried on by the different karakas or agents and instruments of verbal activity helping the process of the main activity. When the process of the verbal activity is complete, the completed activity is looked upon as a substantive or dravya and a word denoting it, such as पाक,or याग does not get conjugational affixes, but it is regularly declined like a noun.Just as स्वार्थ, द्रब्य, लिङ्ग, संख्या, and कारक are given as प्रातिपदिकार्थ, in the same manner क्रिया, काल, पुरुष, वचन or संख्या, and कारक are given as धात्वर्थ, as they are shown by a verbal form, although strictly speaking verbal activity (क्रियorभाव) alone is the sense of a root, as stated in the Mahbhasya. For details see Vaiyak.Bh.Sara, where it is said that fruit ( फल) and effort ( ब्यापार ) are expressed by a root, confer, compare फलव्यापारयोर्धातुः. The five senses given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. are in fact conveyed not by a root, but by a verb or अाख्यात or तिडन्त.

dhmāta	name of a fault in the pronunciation of a vowel when on account of fullness of breath it appears as uttered long (दीर्घ ), although really it is short; confer, compare श्वासभूयिष्ठतया ह्रस्वोपि दीर्घ इव लक्ष्यते, Kaiyata on I. 1. Ahnika 1. Vart. 18.

dhve	Personal-ending of the second. person. Pl. Atmanepada in the present and perfect tenses. न् fifth consonant of the dental class of consonants which is possessed of the properties घोष, नादानुप्रदान, अल्पप्राणत्व, संवृतकण्ठत्व and अानुनासिक्य. In Panini's grammar the nasal consonant न् (a)is added as an augment prescribed\ \नुट् or नुम् which originally is seen as न्, but afterwards changed into अनुस्वार or परसवर्ण as required, as for example in पयांसि, यशांसि, निन्दति, वन्दति et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. VII. 1.58-73, VII. 1.7983; VIII. 3.24; (b) is changed into ण् when it directly follows upon ऋ, ॠ, र् or ष् or even intervened by a vowel, a semivowel except ल् , a guttural consonant, a labial consonant or an anusvara; confer, compare P. VIII. 4.1.1-31. (c) is substituted for the final म् of a root, e. g. प्रशान्, प्रतान् confer, compare P. VIII. 2.64, 65.

naddha	a fault of pronunciation when a letter, although distinctly pronounced inside the mouth, does not become audible, being held up ( बद्ध ) by the lips or the like. The fault is similar to अम्बूकृत: confer, compare ओष्ठाभ्यामम्बूकृतमाह नद्धम् R.Pr.XIV.2.

naṣṭarūpā	name given to an anustup verse which has nine, ten and eleven syllables respectively for the first, second and third feet; exempli gratia, for example विपृच्छामि पाक्यान् देवान् Ṛgveda, Ṛk. Saṁh=Ṛgveda-saṁhita.I.120.4; confer, compare R.Pr. XVI. 29. The verse has got 32 syllables, but it has only three feet instead of four.

nāgeśa	the most reputed modern scholar of Panini's grammar, who was well-versed in other Sastras also, who lived in Benares in the latter half of the seventeenth and the first half of the eighteenth century. He wrote many masterly commentaries known by the words शेखर and उद्द्योत on the authoritative old works in the different Sastras, the total list of his small and big works together well nigh exceeding a hundredition He was a bright pupil of Hari Diksita, the grandson of Bhattoji Diksita. He was a renowned teacher also, and many of the famous scholars of grammar in Benares and outside at present are his spiritual descendants. He was a Maharastriya Brahmana of Tasgaon in Satara District, who received his education in Benares. For some years he stayed under the patronage of Rama, the king of Sringibera at his time. He was very clever in leading debates in the various Sastras and won the title of Sabhapati. Out of his numerous works, the Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.on Kaiyata's Mahabhasyapradipa, the Laghusabdendusekhara on the Siddhanta Kaumudi and the Paribhasendusekhara are quite wellknown and studied by every one who wishes to get proficiency in Panini's grammar. For details see pp. 21-24 and 401-403, Vol. VII of the Patanjala Mahabhasya edition D. E. Society, Poona.

nāsikāsthāna	a place in the nose where a nasal letter such as ङ्, ञ्, ण्, न् or म् and anusvara get a tinge of nasalization while passing through it. The yama letters e.g the nasal क्, ख् ,ग् , घ् get nasalization in the utterance of the words पलिक्किनः, चख्ख्नतुः, अग्ग्निः, घ्घ्नन्ति; confer, compare यमो नाम वर्णः प्रातिशाख्ये प्रसिद्धः S.K. on P. VIII. 2. 1. confer, compare also यमानुस्वारनासिक्यानां नासिके Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 74, Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 12.

niḥsaṃkhya	not possessed of any numbersense ; the term is used in connection with indeclinables; confer, compare अव्ययेभ्यस्तु निःसंख्येभ्यः सामान्यविहिताः स्वादयो वेिद्यन्त एव Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.I. 4.21.

nighaṇṭu	a name given to a collection of words which are mainly Vedic. In ancient times such collections were possibly very general and numerous and the works or treatises on derivation such as the Nirukta of Yaska were based upon them; confer, compare निघण्टवः कस्मात् । निगमा इमे भवन्ति । छन्दोभ्यः समाहृत्य समाहृत्य समाम्नातास्ते निगन्तव एव सन्तो निगमनान्निघण्टव उच्यन्ते इत्यौपमन्यवः । अपि वा आहननादेव स्युः \| समाहता भवन्ति । यद्वा समाहृता भवन्ति (Nir.I.1) where the word is derived from गम्,or हन् or हृ. The word निघण्टु is taken as synonymous with निगम by Durgacarya.

nipāta	a particle which possesses no gender and number, and the case termination after which is dropped or elidedition Nipata is given as one of the four categories of words viz नामन्, आख्यात, उपसर्ग and निपात by all the ancient writers of Pratisakhya, Vyakarana and Nirukta works;confer, compare Nirukta of Yāska.I. 4, M.Bh. on I. 1. Ahnika l, Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. 8 et cetera, and others The word is derived from the root पत् with नि by Yaska who has mentioned three subdivisions of Niptas उपमार्थे, कर्मोपसंग्रहार्थे and पदपूरणे; confer, compare अथ निपाताः । उच्चावचेष्वर्थेषु निपतन्ति । अप्युपमार्थे । अपि कर्मोपसंग्रह्यार्थे । अपि पदपूरणाः । Nirukta of Yāska.I. 4. The Nipatas are looked upon as possessed of no sense; confer, compare निपातः पादपूरणः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. 8, Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII. 50, ( commentary by Uvvata ). Panini has not given any definition of the word निपात, but he has enumerated them as forming a class with च at their head in the rule चादयोऽसत्वे where the word असत्वे conveys an impression that they possess no sense, the sense being of two kinds सत्त्व and भाव, and the Nipatas not possesssing any one of the two. The impression is made rather firm by the statement of the Varttikakra'निपातस्यानर्थकस्य प्रातिपदिकत्वम्' P. I. 2. 45 Vart. 12. Thus, the question whether the Nipatas possess any sense by themselves or not, becomes a difficult one to be answeredition Although the Rkpratisakhya in XII.8 lays down that the Nipatas are expletive, still in the next verse it says that some of them do possess sense; confer, compare निपातानामर्थवशान्निपातनादनर्थकानामितरे च सार्थकाः on which Uvvata remarks केचन निपाताः सार्थकाः, केचन निरर्थकाः । The remark of Uvvata appears to be a sound one as based on actual observation, and the conflicting views have to be reconciledition This is done by Bhartrhari who lays down that Nipatas never directly convey the sense but they indicate the sense. Regarding the sense indicated by the Nipatas, it is said that the sense is never Sattva or Dravya or substance as remarked by Panini; it is a certain kind of relation and that too, is not directly expressed by them but it is indicatedition Bhoja in his Srngaraprakasa gives a very comprehensive definition of Nipata as:-जात्यादिप्रवृत्तिनिमित्तानुपग्राहित्वेनासत्त्वभूतार्थाभिधायिनः अलिङ्गसंख्याशक्तय उच्चावचेष्वर्थेषु निपतन्तीत्यव्ययविशेषा एव चादयो निपाताः । He gives six varieties of them, viz. विध्यर्थ, अर्थवादार्थ, अनुवादार्थ, निषेधार्थ, विधिनिषेधार्थ and अविधिनिषेधार्थ, and mentions more than a thousand of them. For details see Bhartrhari's Vakyapadiya II. 189-206.

niyata(1)	regulated in size or number; definitely fixed; the word नियत is used in grammar in connection with the nimitta or nimittin in a grammatical operation prescribed by a rule, which, or a part of which, is shown to be superfluous unless there is laid down a regulation; confer, compare शेषग्रहणं कर्तव्यम् । शेषनियमार्थम् \| प्रकृत्यर्थौ नियतौ प्रत्यया अनियतास्ते शेषेपि प्राप्नुवन्ति M.Bh. on I.3.12 Vart. 6; (2) The grave accent; cf उदात्तपूर्वं नियतं... स्वर्यते RPr.III.9.

niyama(1)	restriction; regulation; binding; the term is very frequently used by grammarians in connection with a restriction laid down with reference to the application of a grammatical rule generally on the strength of that rule, or a part of it, liable to become superfluous if the restriction has not been laid down; confer, compare M.Bh. on I. 1. 3, Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on I. 3.63, VI. 4.11; confer, compare also the frequently quoted dictum अनियमे नियमकारिणी परिभाषा; (2) limitation as contrasted with विकल्प or कामचार; confer, compare अनेकप्राप्तावेकस्य नियमो भवति शेषेष्वनियम; पटुमृदुशुक्लाः पटुशुक्लमृदव इति; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II. 2. 34 Vart. 2; (3) a regulating rule; a restrictive rule, corresponding to the Parisamkhya statement of the Mimamsakas, e. g. the rule अनुदात्तङित आत्मनेपदम् P. I.3.12; the grammarians generally take a rule as a positive injunction avoiding a restrictive sense as far as possible; confer, compare the dictum विधिनियमसंभवे विधिरेव ज्यायान्. Par. Sek. Pari. 100; the commentators have given various kinds of restrictions,. such as प्रयोगनियम,अभिधेयनियम,अर्थनियम, प्रत्ययनियम, प्रकृतिनियम, संज्ञानियम et cetera, and otherset cetera, and others; (4) grave accent or anudatta; confer, compare उदात्तपूर्वं नियतम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III. 9; see नियत (2).

nirasta	a fault of pronunciation when a vowel is harshly pronounced and hence is not properly audible; confer, compare निरस्तं निष्ठुरम् Pradipa on M.Bh. I. 1. Ahn. 1. The fault occurs when the place and the means of utterance are pressed and drawn in;confer, compare निरस्तं स्थानकरणापकर्षे Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV. 2.

nirūḍhopadha	a word, the penultimate vowel in which is picked up and taken back, as for instance the penultimate अ of हन् in the word अंहस् confer, compare अंहतिश्च अंहश्च अंहुश्च हन्तेर्निरूढोपधाद्विपरीतात् Nirukta of Yāska.IV. 25.

nirdiśyamānaparibhāṣā	a short form for the maxim निर्दिश्यमानस्यादेशा भवन्ति which means 'substitutes take the place of that or its part which has been actually stated or enunciated in the rule (of grammar)' Par. Sek. Pari. 12. For details see Par. Sek. Pari. 12.

nirdiṣṭa	exhibited, enunciated; confer, compare तस्मिन्निति निर्दिष्टे पूर्वस्य P.I.1.66; V.Pr.I. 134.

nirhata	a fault of pronunciation by which a letter is uttered harsh or rude; confer, compare निर्हतो रूक्षः Kaiyata on Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).I.1. Ahnika 1 .

nirhrāsa(1)	abridgment, diminution; confer, compareसर्ववचनं प्रकृतिनिह्लासार्थम् । निर्ह्लासः अपचयः अल्पत्वमित्यर्थः । Kaiyata on M.Bh. on IV.3.100; (2) being turned into a short (vowel); confer, compare स्पर्शान्तस्थाप्रत्ययौ निर्ह्रसेते R.Pr.IV.39.

nivṛtti(1)	cessation of recurrence of a word or words from a rule to a subsequent rule or rules; non-application of a rule consequent upon the cessation of recurrence or anuvrtti cf; न ज्ञायते केनाभिप्रायेण प्रसजति केन निवृत्तिं करोति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. 1.1.44 Vart.8. confer, compare also एकयोगनिर्दिष्टानां सह वा प्रवृत्तिः सह वा निवृत्तिः Kat. Par. Vr. Pari. 9; (2) cessation or removal; confer, compare न च संज्ञाया निवृत्तिरुच्यते । स्वभावतः संज्ञा संज्ञिन; प्रत्याय्य निवर्तन्ते । तेन अनुबन्धानामपि निवृत्तिर्भविष्यति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 1.1. Vart. 7; confer, compare also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 1. 3 et cetera, and others; confer, compare also the usual word उदात्तनिवृत्तिस्वरः.

nyāyasaṃgraha	a work enumerating the Paribhāsas in Hemacandra's grammar, numbering 140 nyāyas out of which 57 nyāyas are said to have been given by Hemacandra himself at the end of his comment बृहद्वृत्ति on his Śabdānuśāsana. The work is written by हेमहंसगणि who has added a commentary to it called Nyayārthamaňjūșa by him, which is also known by the name न्यायरत्नमञ्जूषा which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

nyāsa(1)	literally position, placing;a word used in the sense of actual expression or wording especially in the sūtras; confer, compare the usual expression क्रियते एतन्न्यास एव in the Mahābhāșya, confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 1.11, 1.1.47 et cetera, and others; (2) a name given by the writers or readers to works of the type of learned and scholarly commentaries on vŗitti-type-works on standard sūtras in a Śāstra; e. g. the name Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. is given to the learned commentaries on the Vŗtti on Hemacandra's Śabdānuśasana as also on the Paribhāşāvŗtti by Hemahamsagani. Similarly the commentary by Devanandin on Jainendra grammar and that by Prabhācandra on the Amoghāvŗtti on Śākatāyana grammar are named Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa.. In the same way, the learned commentary on the Kāśikāvŗtti by Jinendrabuddhi, named Kāśikāvivaranapaňjikā by the author, is very widely known by the name Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa.. This commentary Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. was written in the eighth century by the Buddhist grammarian Jinendrabuddhi, who belonged to the eastern school of Pānini's Grammar. This Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. has a learned commentary written on it by Maitreya Rakșita in the twelfth century named Tantrapradipa which is very largely quoted by subsequent grammarians, but which unfortunately is available only in a fragmentary state at present. Haradatta, a well-known southern scholar of grammar has drawn considerably from Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. in his Padamañjarī, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Haradatta., which also is well-known as a scholarly work.

pa,pakāra	the consonant प्, the vowel अ and the affix कार being added for facility of understanding and pronunciation; cf T.Pr. I. 17, 21 ; प is also used as a short term for consonants of the fifth class (पवर्ग); confer, compare Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.1.27; Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 64 and Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 13.

pakṣa	alternative view or explanation presented by, or on behalf of, a party ; one of the two or more way of presenting a matter. The usual terms for the two views are पूर्वपक्ष and उत्तरपक्ष, when the views are in conflict. The views, if not in conflict, and if stated as alternative views, can be many in number, e. g. there are seven alternative views or Pakșas re : the interpretation of the rule इको गुणवृद्धी; confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 1.3; confer, compare also सर्वेषु पक्षेषु उपसंख्यानं कर्तव्यम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2.64.

pacādi	a class of roots headed by the root पच् to which the kŗt. affix अ ( अच् ) is added in the sense of 'an agent'; e. g. श्वपचः, चोरः, देवः et cetera, and others The class पचादि is described as अाकृतिगण and it is usual with commentators to make a remark पचाद्यच् when a kŗt affix अ is seen after a root without causing the vŗddhi substitute to the preceding vowel or to the penultimate vowel अ. confer, compare अज्विधिः सर्वधातुभ्यः पठ्यन्ते च पचादय: । अण्बाधनार्थमेव स्यात् सिध्यन्ति श्वपचादघ: Kāś. on P. III. 1.134.

pada	a word; a unit forming a part of a sentence; a unit made up of a letter or of letters, possessed of sense; confer, compare अक्षरसमुदायः पदम् । अक्षरं वा । V.Pr. VIII. 46, 47. The word originally was applied to the individual words which constituted the Vedic Samhitā; confer, compare पदप्रकृतिः संहिता Nir.I.17. Accordingly, it is defined in the Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya as ' अर्थः पदम् ' (Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.III. 2) as contrasted with ' वर्णानामेकप्राणयोगः संहिता ' (V.Pr.I.158). The definition ' अर्थः पदम् ' is attributed to the ancient grammarian 'Indra', who is believed to have been the first Grammarian of India. Pāņini has defined the term पद as ' सुप्तिङन्तं पदम् ' P.I.4.14. His definition is applicable to complete noun-forms and verb-forms and also to prefixes and indeclinables where a case-affix is placed and elided according to him; confer, compare अव्ययादाप्सुपः P. II. 4. 82. The noun-bases before case affixes and taddhita affix. affixes, mentioned in rules upto the end of the fifth adhyāya, which begin with a consonant excepting य् are also termed पद by Pāņini to include parts of words before the case affixes भ्याम् , भिस्, सु et cetera, and others as also before the taddhita affix. affixes मत्, वत् et cetera, and others which are given as separate padas many times in the pada-pātha of the Vedas; confer, compare स्वादिष्वसर्वनामस्थाने P. I. 4. 17. See for details the word पदपाठ. There are given four kinds of padas or words viz. नाम, अाख्यात, उपसर्ग and निपात in the Nirukta and Prātiśākhya works; confer, compare also पदमर्थे प्रयुज्यते, विभक्त्यन्तं च पदम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2. 64 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 19, वर्णसमुदायः पदम् M.Bh. on I.1.21 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 5, पूर्वपरयोरर्थोपलब्धौ पदम् Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.I.1.20, पदशब्देनार्थ उच्यते Kaiyata on P.I.2.42 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2; confer, compare also पद्यते गम्यते अर्थः अनेनेति पदमित्यन्वर्थसंज्ञा Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. on P.III. 1.92. The verb endings or affixs ति, तस् and others are also called पद. The word पद in this sense is never used alone, but with the word परस्मै or अात्मने preceding it. The term परस्मैपद stands for the nine affixes तिप्, तस्, ...मस्,while the term आत्मनेपद stands for the nine affixes त, आताम् ... महिङ्. confer, compare ल: परमैपदम्, तङानावात्मनेपदम्. It is possible to say that in the terms परस्मैपद and अात्मनेपद also, the term पद could be taken to mean a word, and it is very likely that the words परस्मैपद and अात्मनेपद were originally used in the sense of 'words referring to something meant for another' and 'referring to something meant for self' respectively. Such words, of course, referred to verbal forms, roughly corresponding to the verbs in the active voice and verbs in the passive voice. There are some modern scholars of grammar, especially linguists, who like to translate परस्मैपद as 'active voice' and आत्मनेपद as ' passive voice'. Pāņini appears, however, to have adapted the sense of the terms परस्मैपद and आत्मनेपद and taken them to mean mere affixes just as he has done in the case of the terms कृत् and तद्धित. Presumably in ancient times, words current in use were grouped into four classes by the authors of the Nirukta works, viz. (a) कृत् (words derived from roots)such as कर्ता, कारकः, भवनम् et cetera, and others, (b) तद्धित (words derived from nouns ) such as गार्ग्यः , काषायम् , et cetera, and others, (c) Parasmaipada words viz. verbs such as भवति, पचति, and (d) Ātmanepada words id est, that is verbs like एधते, वर्धते, et cetera, and othersVerbs करोति and कुरुते or हरति and हरते were looked upon as both परस्मैपद words and आत्मनेपद words. The question of simple words, as they are called by the followers of Pāņini, such as नर, तद् , गो, अश्व, and a number of similar underived words, did not occur to the authors of the Nirukta as they believed that every noun was derivable, and hence could be included in the kŗt words.

paramāṇu	a time-unit equal to one-half of the unit called अणु, which forms one-half of the unit called मात्रा which is required for the purpose of the utterance of a consonant; confer, compare परमाणु अर्धाणुमात्रा V. Pr.I.61. परमाणु, in short, is the duration of very infinitesimal time equal to the pause between two individual continuous sounds. The interval between the utterances of two consecutive consonants is given to be equivalent to one Paramanu; confer, compare वर्णान्तरं परमाणु R.T.34.

parigaṇana	literally enumeration. The word is used in grammar treatises in the sense of a definite or complete enumeration' with a view to exclude those that are not included in the enumeration : cf परिगणनं कर्तव्यम् \| यङ्यक्यवलोपे प्रतिषेधः M.Bh. on I.1.4 Vaart. 1.

paripanna	a kind of Samdhi or coalescence characterized by the change of the consonant म् into an anusvara, as by मोनुस्वारः P. VIII. 3.23, before a sibilant or before रेफ; confer, compare रेफोष्मणोरुदययोर्मकारः अनुस्वारं तत् परिपन्नमाहुः R.Pr.IV.5; confer, compare also सम्राट्शब्द: परिसंपन्नापवाद: R.Pr.IV.7.

paribhāṣā	an authoritative statement or dictum, helping (1) the correct interpretation of the rules (sūtras) of grammar, or (2) the removal of conflict between two rules which occur simultaneously in the process of the formation of words, (पदसिद्धि), or (3) the formation of correct words. Various definitions of the word परिभाषा are given by commentators, the prominent ones beingपरितो व्यापृतां भाषां परिभाषां प्रचक्षते(न्यास);or, परितो भाष्यते या सा परिभाषा प्रकीर्तिता. The word is also defined as विधौ नियामकरिणी परिभाषा ( दुर्गसिंहवृत्ति ). परिभाषा can also be briefiy defined as the convention of a standard author. Purusottamadeva applies the word परिभाषा to the maxims of standard writers, confer, compare परिभाषा हिं न पाणिनीयानि वचनानि; Puru. Pari. 119; while Haribhaskara at the end of his treatise परिभाषाभास्कर, states that Vyaadi was the first writer on Paribhaasas. The rules तस्मिन्निति निर्दिष्टे पूर्वस्य, तस्मादित्युत्तरस्य and others are in fact Paribhaasa rules laid down by Panini. For the difference between परिभाषा and अधिकार, see Mahabhasya on II.1.1. Many times the writers of Sutras lay down certain conventions for the proper interpretation of their rules, to which additions are made in course of time according to necessities that arise, by commentators. In the different systems of grammar there are different collections of Paribhasas. In Panini's system, apart from commentaries thereon, there are independent collections of Paribhasas by Vyadi, Bhojadeva, Purusottamadeva, Siradeva, Nilakantha, Haribhaskara, Nagesa and a few others. There are independent collections of Paribhasas in the Katantra, Candra, Sakatayana,Jainendra and Hemacandra systems of grammar. It is a noticeable fact that many Paribhasas are common, with their wordings quite similar or sometimes identical in the different systemanuscript. Generally the collections of Paribhasas have got scholiums or commentaries by recognised grammarians, which in their turn have sometimes other glosses or commentaries upon them. The Paribhaasendusekhara of Nagesa is an authoritative work of an outstanding merit in the system of Paninis Grammar, which is commented upon by more than twenty five scholars during the last two or three centuries. The total number of Paribhasas in the diferent systems of grammar may wellnigh exceed 500. See परिभाषासंग्रह.

paribhāṣāprakāśā	an independent treatise explaining the various Paribhasas in the system of Panini's grammar, written by Visnusesa of the famous SeSa family.

paribhāṣāsegraha'	a work containing a collection of independent works on Paribhasas in the several systems of Sanskrit Grammar, compiled by M. M. K. V. Abhyankar. The collectlon consists of the following works (i) परिभाषासूचन containing 93 Paribhasas with a commentary by Vyadi, an ancient grammarian who lived before Patanjali; ( ii ) ब्याडीयपरिभाषापाठ, a bare text of 140 Paribhaasaas belonging to the school of Vyadi (iii) शाकटायनपरिभाषासूत्र a text of 98 Paribhasa aphorisms, attributed to the ancient grammarian Saka-tayana, or belonging to that school; [iv) चान्द्रपरिभाषासूत्र a text of 86 Paribhasa aphorisms given at the end of his grammar work by Candragomin; (v) कातन्त्रपरिभाषासूत्रवृत्ति a gloss on 65 Paribhas aphorisms of the Katantra school by Durgasimha; (vi) कातन्त्रपारभाषासूत्रवृत्ति a short gloss on 62 Paribhasa aphorisms of the Katantra school by Bhavamisra; (vii) कातन्त्रपरिभाषासूत्र a text of 96 Paribhasa rules belonging to the Katantra school without any author's name associated with it; (viii) कालापपरिभाषासूत्र a text of 118 Paribhasa rules belonging to the Kalapa school without any author's name associated with it; (ix) जैनेन्द्रपरिभाषावृत्ति a gloss written by M. M. K. V. Abhyankar ( the compiler of the collection), on 108 Paribhasas or maxims noticeable in the Mahavrtti of Abhayanandin on the Jainendra Vyakarana of Pujyapada Devanandin; (x) भोजदेवकृतपरि-भाषासूत्र a text of 118 Paribhasa rules given by Bhoja in the second pada of the first adhyaaya of his grammar work named Sarasvatikanthabharana; (xi) न्यायसंग्रह a bare text of 140 paribhasas(which are called by the name nyaya) given by Hema-hamsagani in his paribhasa.work named न्यायसंग्रह; (xii) लधुपरिभाषावृत्ति a gloss on 120 Paribhasas of the Panini school written by Puruso-ttamadeva; (xiii) वृहत्परिभाषावृत्ति con-taining 130 Paribhasas with a commentary by Siradeva and a very short,gloss on the commentary by Srimanasarman ( xiv ) परिभाषावृत्ति a short gloss on 140 Paribhasas of the Panini school written by Nilakantha; (xv) परिभाषाभास्कर a collection of 132 Paribhasas with a commentary by Haribhaskara Agnihotri; (xvi) bare text of Paribhasa given and explained by Nagesabhatta in his Paribhasendusekhara. The total number of Paribhasas mentioned and treated in the whole collection exceeds five hundredition

paribhāṣenduśekhara	the reputed authoritative work on the Paribhasas in the system of Paanini's grammar written by Nagesabhatta in the beginning of the 18th century A.D. at Benares. The work is studied very widely and has got more than 25 commentaries written by pupils in the spiritual line of Nagesa. Well-known among these commentaries are those written by Vaidyanatha Payagunde ( called गदा ), by BhairavamiSra ( called मिश्री), by Raghavendraacaarya Gajendragadakara ( called त्रिपथगा ), by Govindacarya Astaputre of Poona in the beginning of the nineteenth century (called भावार्थदीपिका), by BhaskaraSastri Abhyankar of Satara (called भास्करी ), and by M. M. Vaasudevasaastri Abhyankar of Poona (called तत्त्वादर्श ). Besides these, there are commentaries written by Taatya Sastri Patawardhana,Ganapati Sastri Mokaate, Jayadeva Misra, VisnuSastri Bhat, Vishwanatha Dandibhatta, Harinaatha Dwiwedi Gopaalacarya Karhaadkar, Harishastri Bhagawata, Govinda Shastri Bharadwaja, Naarayana Shastri Galagali, Venumaadhava Shukla, Brahmaananda Saraswati, ManisiSeSaSarma,Manyudeva, Samkarabhatta, Indirapati, Bhimacarya Galagali, Madhavacarya Waikaar, Cidrupasraya, Bhimabhatta, LakSminrsimha and a few others. Some of these works are named by their authors as Tikaas, others as Vyaakhyaas and still others as Tippanis or Vivrtis.

parimāṇa	a word used by Panini in तदस्य परिमाणम् V.1.19 and explained by Patanjali as सर्वतो मानम् .Samkhya ( number ) is also said to be a parimana. Parimana is of two kindsनियत or definite as in the case of Khaari, drona etc; and अनियत, as in the case of Gana, Samgha, PUga, Sartha, Sena et cetera, and others The term परिमाण, in connection with the utterance of letters, is used in the sense of मात्राकाल or one mora.

parisaṃkhyāna	literally enumeration; enunciation;mention ; the word is found generally used by Katyayana and other Varttikakaras at the end of their Varttikas. The words वक्तव्यम्, वाच्यम् , and the like, are similarly usedition

pāṇini	the illustrious ancient grammarian of India who is wellknown by his magnum opus, the Astaka or Astaadhyaayi which has maintained its position as a unique work on Sanskrit grammar unparalleled upto the present day by any other work on grammar, not only of the Sanskrit language, but ofany other language, classical as well as spoken. His mighty intelligence grasped, studied and digested not only the niceties of accentuation and formation of Vedic words, scattered in the vast Vedic Literature of his time, but those of classical words in the classical literature and the spoken Sanskrit language of his time in all its different aspects and shades, noticeable in the various provinces and districts of the vast country. The result of his careful study of the Vedic Literature and close observation ofeminine.the classical Sanskrit, which was a spoken language in his days, was the production of the wonderful and monumental work, the Astaadhyaayi,which gives an authoritative description of the Sanskrit language, to have a complete exposition of which,several life times have to be spent,in spite of several commentaries upon it, written from time to time by several distinguished scholars. The work is a linguist's and not a language teacher's. Some Western scholars have described it as a wonderful specimen of human intelligence,or as a notable manifestation of human intelligence. Very little is known unfortunately about his native place,parentage or personal history. The account given about these in the Kathaasaritsaagara and other books is only legendary and hence, it has very little historical value. The internal evidence, supplied by his work shows that he lived in the sixth or the seventh century B. C., if not earlier, in the north western province of India of those days. Jinendrabuddhi, the author of the Kaasikavivaranapanjikaa or Nyasa, has stated that the word शलातुर् mentioned by him in his sUtra ( IV. 3.94 ) refers to his native place and the word शालातुरीय derived by him from the word शलातुर by that sUtra was, in fact his own name, based upon the name of the town which formed his native placcusative case. Paanini has shown in his work his close knowledge of, and familiarity with, the names of towns, villages, districts, rivers and mountains in and near Vaahika, the north-western Punjab of the present day, and it is very likely that he was educated at the ancient University of Taksasilaa. Apart from the authors of the Pratisaakhya works, which in a way could be styled as grammar works, there were scholars of grammar as such, who preceded him and out of whom he has mentioned ten viz., Apisali, Saakataayana, Gaargya, Saakalya, Kaasyapa, Bharadwaja, Gaalava, Caakravarmana Senaka and Sphotaayana. The grammarian Indra has not been mentioned by Paanini, although tradition says that he was the first grammarian of the Sanskrit language. It is very likely that Paanini had no grammar work of Indra before him, but at the same time it can be said that the works of some grammarians , mentioned by Panini such as Saakaatyana, Apisali, Gaargya and others had been based on the work of Indra. The mention of several ganas as also the exhaustive enumeration of all the two thousand and two hundred roots in the Dhaatupaatha can very well testify to the existence of systematic grammatical works before Paarnini of which he has made a thorough study and a careful use in the composition of his Ganapaatha and Dhaatupatha. His exhaustive grammar of a rich language like Sanskrit has not only remained superb in spite of several other grammars of the language written subsequently, but its careful study is felt as a supreme necessity by scholars of philology and linguistics of the present day for doing any real work in the vast field of linguistic research. For details see pp.151154 Vol. VII of Paatanjala Mahaabhsya, D. E. Society's Edition.

pāṇinisūtra	called also by the name अष्टक or पाणिनीय-अष्टक; name given to the SUtras of Paanini comprising eight adhyaayaas or books. The total number of SUtras as commented upon by the writers of the Kasika and the Siddhaantakaumudi is 3983. As nine sUtras out of these are described as Vaarttikas and two as Ganasutras by Patanjali, it is evident that there were 3972 SUtras in the Astaka of Paanini according to Patanjali. A verse current among Vaiyakarana schools states the number to be 3996; confer, compare त्रीणि सूत्रसहस्राणि तथा नव शतानि च । षण्णवतिश्च सूत्राणां पाणिनिः कृतवान् स्वयम् । The traditional recital by Veda Scholars who look upon the Astadhyayi as a Vedaanga, consists of 3983 Sutras which are accepted and commented upon by all later grammarians and commentators. The SUtras of Paanini, which mainly aim at the correct formation of words, discuss declension, conjugation, euphonic changes, verbal derivatives, noun derivatives and accents. For details see Vol.VII, Vyaakarana Mahaabhaasya, D. E. Society's edition pp. 152-162.

pāṇinisūtravārtika	name given to the collection of explanatory pithy notes of the type of SUtras written. mainly by Kaatyaayana. The Varttikas are generally written in the style of the SUtras, but sometimes they are written in Verse also. The total number of Varttikas is well-nigh a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. 5000, including Varttikas in Verse.There are three kinds of Varttikas; confer, compareउक्तानुक्तदुरुक्तानां चिन्ता यत्र प्रवर्तते । तं ग्रन्थं वार्तिकं प्राहुर्वार्तिकज्ञा मनीषिणः । Naagesa appears to have divided Varttikas into two classes as shown by his definition 'सूत्रेऽ नुक्तदुरुक्तचिन्ताकरत्वं वार्तिकत्वम् '. If this definition be followed, many of the Vaarttikas given in the Maahibhaasya as explaining and commenting upon the Sutras will not strictly be termed as Vaarttikaas, and their total number which is given as exceeding 5000, will be reduced to about 1400 or so. There are some manuscript copies which give this reduced number, and it may be said that only these Vārttikas were written by Kātyāyana while the others were added by learned grammarians after Kātyāyana. In the Mahābhāșya there are seen more than 5000 statements of the type of Vārttikas out of which Dr. Kielhorn has marked about 4200 as Vārttikas. At some places the Mahābhāșyakāra has quoted the names of the authors of some Vārttikas or their schools, in words such as क्रोष्ट्रीयाः पठन्ति, भारद्वाजीयाः पठन्ति, सौनागाः पठन्ति. et cetera, and others Many of the Vārttikas given in the Mahābhāșya are not seen in the Kāśikāvŗtti, while some more are seen in the Kāśikā-vŗtti, which, evidently are composed by scholars who flourished after Patańjali, as they have not been noticed by the Mahābhāșyakāra. It is very difficult to show separately the statements of the Bhāșyakāra popularly named 'ișțis' from the Vārttikas of Kātyāyana and others. For details see Vol. VII Mahābhāșya, D.E. Society's edition pp. 193-224.

pāṇinisūtravṛtti	a gloss on the grammer rules of Pāņini. Many glosses were written from time to time on the Sûtras of Pāņini, out of which the most important and the oldest one is the one named Kāśikāvŗtti, written by the joint authors Jayāditya and Vāmana in the 7th century A.D. It is believed that the Kāśikāvŗtti was based upon some old Vŗttis said to have been written by कुणि, निर्लूर, चुल्लि, श्वोभूति, वररुचि and others.Besides Kāśikā,the famous Vŗtti, and those of कुणि,निर्लूर and others which are only reported, there are other Vŗttis which are comparatively modern. Some of them have been printed, while others have remained only in manuscript form. Some of these are : the Bhāșāvŗtti by Purusottamadeva, Vyākaranasudhānidhi by Viśveśvara, Gūdhārthadīpinī by Sadāsivamiśra, Sūtravŗtti by Annambhatta, Vaiyākaraņasarvasva by Dharaņīdhara, Śabdabhūșaņa by Nārāyaņa Paņdita, Pāņinisūtravŗtti by Rāmacandrabhațța Tāre and Vyākaranadīpikā by Orambhațța. There are extracts available from a Sūtravŗtti called Bhāgavŗtti which is ascribed to Bhartŗhari, but, which is evidently written by a later writer (विमलमति according to some scholars) as there are found verses from Bhāravi and Māgha quoted in it as noticed by Sīradeva's Paribhāṣāvṛttiin his vŗtti on Pari.76. Glosses based upon Pāņini Sūtras, but having a topical arrangements are also available, the famous ones among these being the Praķriyākaumudī by Rāmacandra Śeșa and the Siddhāntakaumudī by Bhațțojī Dĩkșita. The मध्यमकौमुदी and the लघुकौमुदी can also be noted here although they are the abridgments of the Siddhānta Kaumudī. There are Vŗttis in other languages also, written in modern times, out of which those written by Bōhtlingk, Basu and Renou are well-known.

pīḍana	compression; a fault in the pronunciation of vowels and consonants caused by the compression or contraction of the place of utterance: confer, compare विहारसंहारयोर्व्यासपीडने स्थानकरणयोर्विस्तारे व्यासो नाम दोष:, संहारे संकोचने पीडनं नाम । Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV. 2; confer, compare also व्यञ्जनानामतिप्रयत्नेनोच्चारणं पीडनं Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV. 5.

pūraṇa	an ordinal numeral; literally the word means completion of a particular number ( संख्या ); confer, compare येन संख्या संख्यानं पूर्यते संपद्यते स तस्याः पूरणः । एकादंशानां पूरणः एकादशः । Kas, on P.V. 2.48. The word is used also in the sense of an affix by the application of which the particular number ( संख्या ) referring to an object, is shown as complete; confer, compare यस्मिन्नुपसंजाते अन्या संख्या संपद्यते स प्रत्ययार्थः Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V.2.48. These Purana pratyayas are given in P. V. 2. 48-58, confer, compare पूरणं नामार्थः । तमाह Xतीयशव्दः । अतः पूरणम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.II.2.3. The word also means 'an ordinal number'; confer, compare पूरणगुणसुहितार्थसदव्ययतव्यसमानाधिकरणेन P.II.2.11.

pūraṇapratyaya	a taddhita affix. affix showing the completion of the particular number ( संख्या ) shown by the word to which the affix is applied; confer, compare . अर्धपूर्वपदश्च पूरणप्रत्ययान्तः संख्याशब्दो भवतीति वक्तव्यम् । अर्धपञ्चमः । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).on P.I.1.23 Vart. 7. These affixes are mentioned by Panini in V.2. 48 to 58.

pūrvavipratiṣedha	conflict of two rules where the preceding rule supersedes the latter rule, as the arrival at the correct form requires it. Generally the dictum is that a subsequent rule should supersede the preceding one; cf विप्रतिषेधे परं कार्यम् P. I. 4. 2; but sometimes the previous rule has to supersede the subsequent one in spite of the dictum विप्रतिषेधे परम्. The author of the Mahabhasya has brought these cases of the पूर्वविप्रतिषेध, which are, in fact, numerous, under the rule विप्रतिषेधे परं कार्यम् by taking the word पर in the sense of इष्ट 'what is desired '?; confer, compare इष्टवाची परशब्दः । विप्रतिषेधे परं यदिष्टं तद्भवतीति l Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 1.3; I.2, 5: I. 4.2: II.1.69, IV.1.85et cetera, and others confer, comparealso पूर्वविप्रतिषेधो नाम अयं र्विप्रतिषेधे परमित्यत्र परशब्दस्य इष्टवाचित्वाल्लब्धः सूत्रार्थः परिभाषारुपेण पाठ्यते Puru. Pari 108; for details see page 217 Vol. VII Mahabhasya D. E. Society's edition.

pṛthagyogakaraṇa	framing a separate rule for a thing instead of mentioning it along with other things in the same context, which implies some purpose in the mind of the author such as anuvrtti in subsequent rules, option, and so on; confer, compare पृथग्योगकरणमस्य विधेरनित्यत्वज्ञापनार्थम् Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. I.3.7; confer, compare also Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on I.3.33, I. 3. 84, I.4.58, III.1.56, IV.1.16, VII. 4.33, VIII.1.52, VIII.1.74.

prakarṣaṇa	keeping wide the two parts of the chin which causes a fault in pronunciation called विक्लिष्ट :cf प्रकर्षणे तदु विक्लिष्टमाहुः । ह्न्वोः प्रकर्षणे सर्वतश्चलने विक्लिष्टमसंयुक्तं नाम दोषो भवति ; Uvvata on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV.-3.

prakṛta(1)	in context, in question; the word is frequently used in connection with words in the preceding rules which are drawn on to the following rules by anuvrtti or continuation; confer, compare प्रकृतं गुणवृद्धिग्रहणमनुवर्तते, M.Bh. on I.1.3 Vart. 2: (2) found or available in a large quantity; confer, compare तत्प्रकृतवचने मयट् । प्राचुर्येण प्रस्तुतं प्रकृतम् । Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V. 4.21.

prakriyākaumudī	a well-known work on Sanskrit Grammar by रामचन्द्रशेष of the 15th century, in which the subject matter of the eight chapters of Panini's grammar is arranged into several different sections forming the different topics of grammar. It is similar to, and possibly. the predecessor of, the Siddhanta Kaumudi which has a similar arrangement. The work was very popular before the Siddhinta Kaumudi was written. it has got many commentaries numbering about a dozen viz. प्रक्रियाप्रसाद, प्रक्रियाप्रकाश, प्रक्रियाप्रदीप, अमृतस्तुति, प्रक्रियाव्याकृति,निर्मलदर्पण,तत्वचन्द्र, प्रक्रियारञ्जन, प्रक्रियाविवरण and others of which the Prasada of Vitthalesa and the Prakasa of Srikrsna are the wellknown ones.

prakriyāsaṃgraha	a work on grammar by Abhayacandra in which the Sutras of Sakatayana's Sabdanusasana are arranged in the form of different sections dealing with the different topics of grammar.

pratipadapāṭha(1)	recital ofeach and every word; (2) enumeration of every word; confer, compare किं शब्दानां प्रतिपत्तौ प्रतिपदपाठः कर्तव्यः, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Ahn. 1.

pravāda	a grammatical explanation; detailed explanation by citing the gender, number, krt affix, taddhita affix.affix and the like: confer, compare लिङ्गसंख्यातद्धितकृतरूपभेदाः प्रवादाः । पाण्यादिशब्दानां प्रवादेषु प्रथमो (original) नकारो णत्वमाप्नोति स च प्राकृतः । Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XIII. 9. The word is explained as a change in the form of a word, as for instance, by the substitution of स् for विसर्ग where विसर्ग is, in fact, expected; confer, compare कबन्धं पृथु इत्येतेषां पदानां प्रवादा रूपभेदा उदये परत्रावस्थिताः दिव इत्येतस्य उपचारं जनयन्ति । यथा दिवस्कबन्धम् , दिवस्पृथुः Uvvata on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) IV. 22; confer, compare also प्रवादाः षडितः परे, Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) IX. 18. In the Nirukta, the word is used in the sense of 'distinct mention'; confer, compare एवमन्यासामपि देवतानामादित्यप्रवादाः स्तुतयो भवन्ति ( deities are mentioned under the name of Aditya) Nir II.13; cf also वैश्वानरीयाः प्रवादाः Nir, VII. 23.

prāgdeśa	districts of the east especially districts to the east of Ayodhya and Pataliputra, such as Magadha, Vanga and others; nothing can definitely be said as to which districts were called Eastern by Panini and his followers Katyayana and Patanjali. A Varttika given in the Kasika but not traceable in the Mahabhasya defines Pragdesa as districts situated to the east of शरावती (probably the modern river Ravi or a river near that river ): confer, compare प्रागुदञ्चौ विभजते हंसः क्षीरोदके यथा । विदुषां शब्दसिद्ध्यर्थे सा नः पातु शरावती ॥ Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on एङ् प्राचां देशे P. I. 1.75. There is a reading सरस्वती in some manuscript copies and सरस्वती is a wellknown river in the Punjab near Kuruksetra, which disappears in the sandy desert to the south: a reading इरावती is also found and इरावती may stand for the river Ravi. शरावती in Burma is simply out of consideration. For details see Vyakarana Mahabhasya Vol. VII. pp. 202-204 and 141-142 D. E. Society's Edition.

prātipadikārtha	denoted sense of a Pratipadika or a noun-base. Standard grammarians state that the denotation of a pratipadika is five-fold viz. स्वार्थ, द्रव्य, लिङ्ग, संख्या and कारक. The word स्वार्थ refers to the causal factor of denotation or प्रवृत्तिनिमित्त which is of four kinds जाति, गुण, क्रिया and संज्ञा as noticed respectively in the words गौः, शुक्लः, चलः and डित्ः. The word द्रव्य refers to the individual object which sometimes is directly denoted as in अश्वमानय, while on some occasions it is indirectly denoted through the genus or the general notion as in ब्राह्मणः पूज्य:, लिङ्ग the gender, संख्या the number and कारक the case-relation are the denotations of the case-terminations, but sometimes as they are conveyed in the absence of a case-affix as in the words पञ्च, दश, and others, they are stated as the denoted senses of the Pratipadika, while the case-affixes are said to indicate them; confer, compare वाचिका द्योतिका वा स्युः शब्दादीनां विभक्तयः Vakyapadiya.

prātiśākhya	a work on Vedic grammar of a specific nature, which is concerned mainly with the changes, euphonic and others, in the Pada text of the Samhita as compared with the running text, the Samhita itselfeminine. The Pratisakhya works are neither concerned with the sense of words, nor with their division into bases and affixes, nor with their etymology. They contain, more or less,Vedic passages arranged from the point of view of Samdhi. In the Rk Pratisakhya, available to-day, topics of metre, recital, phonetics and the like are introduced, but it appears that originally the Rk Pratisakhya, just like the Atharva Pratisakhya, was concerned with euphonic changes, the other subjects being introduced later on. The word प्रातिशाख्य shows that there were such treatises for everyone of the several Sakhas or branches of each Veda many of which later on disappeared as the number of the followers of those branches dwindledition Out of the remaining ones also, many were combined with others of the same Veda. At present, only five or six Pratisakhyas are available which are the surviving representatives of the ancient ones - the Rk Pratisakhya by Saunaka, the Taittiriya Pratisakhya, the Vajasaneyi PratiSakhya by Katyayana, the Atharva Pratisakhya and the Rk Tantra by Sakatayana, which is practically a Pratisakhya of the Sama Veda. The word पार्षद or पारिषद was also used for the Pratisakhyas as they were the outcome of the discussions of learned scholars in Vedic assemblies; cf परिषदि भवं पार्षदम्. Although the Pratisakhya works in nature, are preliminary to works on grammar, it appears that the existing Pratisakhyas, which are the revised and enlarged editions of the old ones, are written after Panini's grammar, each one of the present Prtisakhyas representing, of course, several ancient Pratisakhyas, which were written before Panini. Uvvata, a learned scholar of the twelfth century has written a brief commentary on the Rk Pratisakhya and another one on the Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya. The Taittiriya PratiSakhya has got two commentaries -one by Somayarya, called Tribhasyaratna and the other called Vaidikabharana written by Gopalayajvan. There is a commentary by Ananta bhatta on the Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya. These commentaries are called Bhasyas also.

pluta	protracted, name given to vowels in the protracted grade. The vowels in this grade which are termed protracted vowels are possessed of three matras and in writing they are marked with the figure 3 placed after them. In pronunciation they take a longer time than the long or दीर्घ vowels; confer, compare ऊकालोज्झ्रस्वदीर्घप्लुतः P. I.2.27. The word is derived from प्लु (प्रु also) I Atmane to go, and explained as प्लवते इति, The word प्लवते is often found for प्लुतो भवति in the Pratisakhya works; cf also मात्रा ह्रस्वरतावदवग्रहान्तरं, द्वे दीर्धस्तिस्रः प्लुत उच्यते स्वरः । अधः स्विदासी३दुपरि स्विदासी३द् अर्थे प्लुतिर्भीरिव विन्दती३त्रिः ll Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I.16.

pha(l)	the letter or sound फ्,the vowel अ being added for facility of pronunciation ;(2) the affix फ for which अायन is always substituted as given by Panini in P.VII.1.2.

barbaratā	a fault in pronunciation of the type of roughness or barbarousness in the utterance of the letter र् : confer, compare बर्बरता असौकुमार्ये रेफे Uvvata on R.Pr.XIV. 8.

bahuprakruti(l)	consisting of a large number of verbal parts in derivation; बह्वयः प्रकृतयो यत्र; (2) a compound in which the constituent words are all in the plural number, confer, compare सर्वे द्वन्द्वो विभाषैकवद्भवति । बहुप्रकृतिरिति वक्तव्यम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.II.4.12 Vart.l ; (3) a compound word ( पद ) made up of many constituent words; confer, compare बहूनि पदानि यत्र तद् बहुप्रकृति पदम् Vaj. Prat. V. 7.

bahuvacana	the plural number; the affixes of the plural number applied to noun-bases as also to roots; confer, compare बहुषु बहुवचनम् P. I. 4.21.

bādhakatva	the same as बाध ; sublation; setting aside; this sublation is described to be of two types(1) complete sublation when the rule set aside, is for ever set aside and cannot, by the maxim called तक्रकौण्डिन्यन्याय, be applied again; confer, compare दधि ब्राह्मणेभ्यो दीयतां तक्रं कौण्डिन्यायेति सत्यपि संभवे दधिदानस्य तक्रदानं निवर्तकं भवति । confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 1.47; VI. 1.2. VI. 2.1. et cetera, and others; ( 2 ) temporary sublation when the rule set aside, can be applied, if possible after the special rule has been applied; confer, compare सर्वथा अनवकाशत्वादेव बाधकत्वे स्वस्य (अनवकाशशास्त्रस्य) पूर्वप्रवृत्तिरित्येव बाधः । तत्र बाधके प्रवृत्ते यद्युत्सर्गप्राप्तिर्भवति तदा भवत्येव यथा तत्रैव याडादयः Par.Sek.on Pari.57, The sublation or बाधकत्व is not only in the case of सामान्यविशेषभाव and अनवकाशत्व as given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page., but a rule or operation which is पर (cited later), or नित्य, or अन्तरङ्ग sets aside the rule or operation which is पूर्व,or अनित्य,or बहिरङ्ग respectively. This बाध्यबाधकभाव occupies a very important position in respect of the application of grammar rules for arriving at the correct forms (इष्टरूपसिद्धि) and grammarians have laid down a number of Paribhasas in the field of बाध्यबाधकभाव.

bindu	anusvara, letter pronounced only through the nose; a dot to indicate the nasal phonetic element shown in writing a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. or sometimes after that letter or vowel, after which it is uttered; confer, compare अं इत्यनुस्वारः । अकार इह उच्चारणार्थः इति बिन्दुमात्रो वर्णोनुस्वारसंज्ञो भवति ।। Kat. I.1.19.

bṛhacchabdaratna	a learned commentary on the commentary मनोरमा of भट्टोजीदीक्षित; the commentary was written by हरिदीक्षित the grandson of Bhattoji. The work is called बृहच्छब्दरत्न in contrast with the लघुशब्दरत्न of the same author (हरिदीक्षित) which is generally studied at the Pathasalas all over the country. The work बृहच्छब्दरत्न is only in a Manuscript form at present. Some scholars believe that it was written by Nagesabhatta, who ascribed it to his preceptor Hari Diksita, but the belief is not correct as proved by a reference in the Laghusabdaratna, where the author himself remarks that he himself has written the बृहच्छब्दरत्न, and internal evidences show that लबुशब्दरत्न is sometimes a word-forword summary of the बृहच्छब्दरत्न. confer, compareविस्तरस्तु अस्मत्कृते बृहच्छब्दरत्ने मदन्तेवासिवृतलधुशब्देन्दुशेखरे च द्रष्टव्यः Laghusabdaratna. For details see Bhandarkar Ins. Journal Vol. 32 pp.258-60.

bṛhadṛrpaṇā	name of a commentary on Kondabhatta's Vaiyakaranabhusanasara by Mannudeva, who was called also Mantudeva, who lived in the latter half of the eighteenth century.

bopadeva	a great Sanskrit scholar and grammarian belonging to Devagiri in the greater Maharastra who was supported by Hemadri of Devagiri. He resided at सार्थग्राम on the river Varada in the first half of the thirteenth century. He wrote a short treatise on Sanskrit Grammar, which has a number of peculiar abbreviations for the usual well-known grammatical termanuscript. His grammar had a wide spread in Bengal and it is today a very common text on Grammar Bengal. On this account some scholars believe that he lived in Bengal. He was the son of Kesava and pupil of Dhanesa. He is also the author, of the well-known work कविकल्पद्रुम on which he has written a commentary named कामधेनु or काव्यकामधेनु.

brahmakāṇḍa	name given to the first section or Kanda of Bhartrhari's Vakyapadiya. It deals with Sphota, and in a way it contains in a nutshell the philosophy of Sanskrit Grammar.

bha(1)	the letter or sound भ् with the vowel अ added for facility of utterance; (2) a technical term in the Grammar of Panini given to a noun base before such case and taddhita affixes as begin with any vowel or with the consonant य्. The utility of this designation of भ to the base is (l) to prevent the substitutes which are enjoined for the final vowel or consonant of a pada (a word ending with a case-affix or a base before case and taddhita affix. affixes beginning with any consonant excepting य् ) just as the substitution of Visarga, anusvara, the first or third consonant, and others given in P. VIII. 4.37 and the following. For the various changes and operations for a base termed भ see P. VI. 4.129 to 175.

bhakṣita	lit, eaten up: a fault in pronunciation when a letter is so hurriedly pronounced that it appears to have been droppedition

bhartṛhari	a very distinguished Grammarian who lived in the seventh century A. D. He was a senior contemporary of the authors of the Kasika, who have mentioned his famous work viz. The Vakyapadiya in the Kasika. confer, compare शब्दार्थसंबन्धोयं प्रकरणम् \| वाक्यपदीयम् Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV.3.88. His Vyakarana work "the Vakyapadiya" has occupied a very prominent position in Grammatical Literature. The work is divided into three sections known by the name 'Kanda' and it has discussed so thoroughly the problem of the relation of word to its sense that subsequent grammarians have looked upon his view as an authority. The work is well-known for expounding also the Philosophy of Grammar. His another work " the Mahabhasya-Dipika " is a scholarly commentary on Patanjali's Mahabhasya. The Commentary is not published as yet, and its solitary manuscript is very carelessly written. Nothing is known about the birth-place or nationality of Bhartrhari. It is also doubtful whether he was the same person as king Bhartrhari who wrote the 'Satakatraya'.

bhāvavikāra	kinds of verbal activity which are described to be six in number viz. production, existence, transformation, growth, decay and destruction. These six modes of existence first mentioned by Vāŗșyayani and quoted by Yāska are explained philosophically by Bhartŗhari as a mere appearance of the Śabdabrahman or Sattā when one of its own powers, the time factor ( कालशक्ति ) is superimposed upon it, and as a result of that superimposition, it (id est, that is the Śabdabrahman) appears as a process; confer, compare षड् भावाविकारा भवन्ति इति वार्ष्यायणि: \| जायते अस्ति विपरिणमते वर्धते अपक्षीयते विनश्यति इति । Nir.I.2; confer, compare also Vākyapadiya III.30.

bhāskaraśāstrī	surnamed Abhyankar (1785-1870) a great grammarian in the line of the pupils of Nāgeśa who was educated at Poona and lived at Sātārā. He taught many pupils, a large number of whom helped the spread of Vyākaraṇa studies even in distant places of the country, such as Vārāṇasi and others. For details see Vyākaraṇa The Volume of the introduction in Marathi to the Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya, written by K. V. Abhyankar and published by the O. E. Society, Poona. pp. 27-29, D. E. Society's Edition.

bhairavamiśra	one of the reputed grammarians of the latter half of the eighteenth century and the first half of the nineteenth century who wrote commentaries on several prominent works on grammar. He was the son of भवदेव and his native place was Prayāga. He has written the commentary called Candrakalā on the Laghuśabdenduśekhara, Parikṣā on the Vaiyākaraṇabhũṣanasāra, Gadā called also Bhairavī or Bhairavīgadā on the Paribhāṣenduśekhara and commentaries (popularly named Bhairavī) on the Śabdaratna and Lingānuśāsana. He is reported to have visited Poona, the capital of the Peśawas and received magnificent gifts for exceptional proficiency in Nyāya and Vyākaraṇa. For details see pp. 24 and 25 Vol. VII . Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya D. E. Society's Edition.

makāra	the consonant म् with the vowel अ and the affix कार added for facility of use and pronunciation; confer, compare T.Pr.I.17 and 21.

maṭ	taddhita affix. affix म applied to a numeral, not preceded by another numeral in the sense of completion; e. g. पञ्चम:, सप्तम:; confer, compare नान्तादसंख्यादेर्मट् Pān. V.2.49.

maṇḍūkagati	literallythe gait of a frog; jump; the continuation of a word from a preceding Sūtra to the following Sūtra or Sūtras in the manner of a frog by omitting one or more Sūtras in the middle; the word मण्डूकप्लुति is also used in the same sense especially by later grammarians; confer, compare अथवा मण्डूकगतयोधिकाराः \| यथा मण्डूका उत्प्लुत्योत्प्लुत्य गच्छन्ति तद्वदधिकाराः \|\| Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.1.3 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).2, II. 3.32, II. 4.34, VI.1.16, VI.3.49,VII. 2.117.

madhyamapadalopa	literally the dropping of the middle word or member ( of a compound generally) as for instance in शाकपार्थिक for शाकप्रियपार्थिव; the word मध्यमपदलोप is also used in the sense of a compound. The compounds which have the middle word dropped are enumerated by the Vārttikakāra under the Vārttika शाकपार्थिवादीनां मध्यमपदलेापश्च Bh. Vṛ. II.1.60 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).; cf also Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.II.6.30.

maya	taddhita affix. affix मयट् (1) in the sense of proceeding therefrom (तत आगत: P. IV.3.92) added to words showing cause or meaning human being; exempli gratia, for example सममयम्, देवदत्तमयम्: (2) in the sense of product (विकार) or part (अवयव) added optionally with अण् to any word, exempli gratia, for example अश्ममयम् , आश्मनम् मूर्वामयम् मौर्वम्, and necessarily to words beginning with आ, ऐ and औ, words of the class headed by the word शर and the words गो, पिष्ट, व्रीहि, तिल and some others: confer, compare P. IV. 3. 143-150; (3) in the sense of proportion, added to a numeral; e. g. द्विमयमुदश्विद्यवानाम्; confer, compare P. V. 2.47; (4) in the sense of "made up of' added to the thing of which there is a large quantity; exempli gratia, for example अन्नमयम्, अपूपमयम् cf; तत्प्रकृतवचने मयट् P.V.4.21,22.

mahābhāṣya	literally the great commentary. The word is uniformly used by commentators and classical Sanskrit writers for the reputed commentary on Pāṇini's Sūtras and the Vārttikas thereon by Patañjali in the 2nd century B. C. The commentary is very scholarly yet very simple in style, and exhaustive although omitting a number of Pāṇini's rules. It is the first and oldest existing commentary on the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini, and, in spite of some other commentaries and glosses and other compendia, written later on to explain the Sutras of Panini, it has remained supremely authoritative and furnishes the last and final word in all places of doubt: confer, compare the remarks इति भाष्ये स्थितम्, इत्युक्तं भाष्ये, इत्युक्तमाकरे et cetera, and others scattered here and there in several Vyaakarana treatises forming in fact, the patent words used by commentators when they finish any chain of arguments. Besides commenting on the Sutras of Paanini, Patanjali, the author, has raised many other grammatical issues and after discussing them fully and thoroughly, given his conclusions which have become the final dicta in those matters. The work, in short, has become an encyclopedic one and hence aptly called खनि or अकर. The work is spread over such a wide field of grammatical studies that not a single grammatical issue appears to have been left out. The author appears to have made a close study of the method and explanations of the SUtras of Paanini given at various academies all over the country and incorporated the gist of those studies given in the form of Varttikas at the various places, in his great work He has thoroughly scrutinized and commented upon the Vaarttikas many of which he has approved, some of which he has rejected, and a few of which he has supplementedition Besides the Vaarttikas which are referred to a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page., he has quoted stanzas which verily sum up the arguments in explanation of the difficult sUtras, composed by his predecessors. There is a good reason to believe that there were small glosses or commentaries on the SUtras of Paanini, written by learned teachers at the various academies, and the Vaarttikas formed in a way, a short pithy summary of those glosses or Vrttis. . The explanation of the word वृत्तौ साधु वार्तिकम् given by Kaiyata may be quoted in support of this point. Kaiyata has at one place even stated that the argument of the Bhaasyakaara is in consonance with that of Kuni, his predecessor. The work is divided into eighty five sections which are given the name of lesson or आह्लिक by the author, probably because they form the subject matter of one day's study each, if the student has already made a thorough study of the subject and is very sharp in intelligence. confer, compare अह्ला निर्वृत्तम् आह्लिकम्, (the explanation given by the commentatiors).Many commentary works were written on this magnum opus of Patanjali during the long period of twenty centuries upto this time under the names टीका, टिप्पणी, दीपिका, प्रकाशिका, व्याख्या, रत्नावली, स्पूर्ति, वृत्ति, प्रदीप, व्याख्यानं and the like, but only one of them the 'Pradipa' of कैयटीपाध्याय, is found complete. The learned commentary by Bhartrhari, written a few centuries before the Pradipa, is available only in a fragment and that too, in a manuscript form copied down from the original one from time to time by the scribes very carelessly. Two other commentaries which are comparatively modern, written by Naarayanasesa and Nilakantha are available but they are also incomplete and in a manuscript form. Possibly Kaiyatabhatta's Pradipa threw into the background the commentaries of his predecessors and no grammarian after Kaiyata dared write a commentary superior to Kaiyata's Pradipa or, if he began, he had to abandon his work in the middle. The commentary of Kaiyata is such a scholarly one and so written to the point that later commentators have almost identified the original Bhasya with the commentary Pradipa and many a time expressed the two words Bhasya and Kaiyata in the same breath as भाष्यकैयटयोः ( एतदुक्तम् or स्पष्टमेतत् ).

mahābhāṣyadīpikā	a very learned old commentary on the Mahabhasya of Patanjali written by the reputed grammarian Bhartrhari or Hari in the seventh century A. D. The commentary has got only one manuscript preserved in Germany available at present, of which photostat copies or ordinary copies are found here and there. The first page of the manuscript is missing and it is incomplete also, the commentary not going beyond the first seven Aahnikas. For details see page 383 Vol. VII Vyaakarana Mahabhasya D. E. Society's edition.

mahābhāṣyapradīpaṭīka	name given to each of the various commentaries on the Pradipa of Kaiyata written by grammarians, out of which the commentaries of चिन्तामणि,रामचन्द्रसरस्वती, नारायण, नित्यानन्दपर्वतीय and one or two more are available in a manuscript form and those too quite incomplete.

mahābhāṣyavyākhyā	name given to each of the explanatory glosses on the Mahabhasya written by grammarians prominent of whom were Purusottamadeva, Narayana Sesa, Visnu, Nilakantha and others whose fragmentary works exist in a manuscript form. महामिश्र name of a grammarian who wrote a commentary on Jinendrabuddhi's Nyasa. The commentary is known by the name Vyakaranaprakasa. महाविभाषा a rule laying down an option for several rules in a topic by being present in every rule: confer, compare महाविभाषया वाक्यमपि. विभाषा (P.II.1.11) and समर्थानां प्रथमाद्वा (P. IV.1.82) are some of the rules of this kindeclinable

mahāsaṃjñā	a long term, as contrasted with the very short terms टि, घु, भ, इत् and others introduced by Panini in his grammar for the sake of brevity. These long terms such as सर्वनाम, अब्यय,परस्मैपद, अात्मनेपद, and many others were widely in use at the time of Panini and hence he could not but pick them up in his grammar in spite of his strenuous attempts at brevity. The commentators, however, find out a motive for his doing this viz. that appropriate words only could be understood by those terms and not others; confer, compareमहासंज्ञाकरणेन तदनुगुणानामेव अत्र संनिवेशात् । S.K. on सर्वादीने सर्वनामानि P. I.1.27.

mādhava	the well-known epoch-making scholar of the 14th century who has written a number of treatises in various Saastras. His धातुवृम्त्ति is a well-known work in grammar

mārdava	softness of the voice characterizing the pronunciation of a grave vowel: cf मार्दवं स्वरस्य मृदुता स्निग्धता ; also confer, compare अन्ववसर्गो मार्दवमुरुता खस्येतिं नीचैःकरााणे शब्दस्य M.Bh. on P.I.2.29, 30; confer, compare also, Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XXII.10।

mit(1)	characterized by the mute letter म्; augments So characterized such as नुम् , अम् and the like, are inserted after the last vowel of a word to which they are to be added; confer, compare मिदचोन्त्यात् परः P. I. 1.47; (2) a technical term applied to the fifty-five roots which are headed by the root घट् and which belong to the first corjugation, to the roots ज्वळ et cetera, and others, as also to the roots जन्, जू, क्नूस्, रञ्ज् and roots ending in अम्. These roots are not really characterized by the mute letter म्, but they are given the designation मित्. The use of the designation मित् is (a) the shortening of the penultimate vowel which : has been lengthened by Vrddhi , before the causal sign णि and (b) ; the optional lengthening of the ; penultimate vowel before the affix ) चिण् and णमुल्, For a complete list ] of 'mit' roots see Dhaatupaatha.

mukhanāsikāvacana	definition of अनुनासक, a letter which is pronounced through both-the mouth and the nose-as contrasted with नासिक्य a letter which is uttered only through the nose; exempli gratia, for example ड्, ञ् , ण्, न् , म् and the nasalized vowels and nasalized य् , व् and ल्; confer, compare मुखनासिक्रावचनेीSनुनासिकः Paan. I. 1.8: confer, compare also अनुस्वारोत्तम अनुनासिकाः (Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.II.30), where the fifth letters and the anusvaara are called anunaasika. According to Bhattoji, however, anusvaara cannot be anunaasika as it is pronounced through the nose alone, and not through both-the mouth and the nose. As the anusvaara is pronounced something like a nasalized ग् according to the Taittiriyas it is called a consonant in the Taittiriya Praatisaakhya: confer, compare ' अनुस्वारोप्युत्तमवह्यञ्जनमेव अस्मच्छाखायाम् ! अर्धगकाररूपत्वात् / Com. on Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.II. 30.

meghavijaya	a Jain grammarian of the seventeenth century who has written a grammar work, similar to the Siddhanta Kaumudi, on the Sabdanusasana of Hemacandra. The grammar work is called हैमकौमुदी, or चन्द्रप्रभा also.

metreyarakṣita	a recognised scholar of Paninis' grammar who belonged to the Eastern part of India and fourished in the beginning of the twelfth century. As it appears from the name Maitreya Raksita he appears to have been a Buddhist grammarian. Subsequent writers in their works refer to him by the name Raksita alone, as also by the name Maitreya, but very rarely by the name Maitreya Raksita.He wrote many works on grammar of which the 'tantrapradipa'a learned commentary on Jinendrabuddhi's Nyasa on Kasika was a reputed one, which, although available in a fragmentary manuscript form today, has been profusely quoted by prominent grammarians after him.

y(1)	the consonant य् with अ added to it merely for the sake of facility in pronunciation; यकार is also used in the same sense: e. g. लिटि वयो यः: P.VI.1.38 confer, compare T.Pr.I: 17,21;(2) krt affix (यत्) prescribed as कृत्य or potential passive participle; exempli gratia, for exampleचेयम्, गेयम्, शाप्यम् , शक्यम् , गद्यम् , अजर्यम् पण्यम् et cetera, and others: confer, compare अचो यत्...अजर्यं संगतम् P.III. 1.97-105; (3) krt. affix क्यप् which is also an affix called krtya; e. gब्रह्मोद्यम् , भाव्यम्, घात्यम् , स्तुत्यम् , कल्प्यम् , खेयम् , भृत्यः:, भिद्यः, पुष्य:, कृत्यम्,also कार्यम् ; confer, compare P. III. 1.106-128:(4) krt affix ण्यत् ( which is also कृत्य ), e. g कार्यम् , हार्यम् , वाक्यम् , लाव्यम्, कुण्डपाय्यम्. et cetera, and others: cf P. III. 1.124-132: (5) taddhita affix. affix य affixed (a) in the sense of collection to पाश, वात et cetera, and others, as also to खल, गो and रथ, e. g. पाद्या, रथ्या et cetera, and others confer, compare P. IV. 2. 49, 50ः (b) in the चातुरर्थिक senses to बल, कुल, तुल et cetera, and others e. g. वल्यः,.कुल्यम् efeminine. P V.2. 80, (c) as a Saisika taddhita affix. affix to ग्राम्यहः' along with the affix खञ्ज e. g. ग्राम्यः, ग्रामीणः: cf P: IV. 2.94 (d) in the sense of 'good therein' ( तत्र साधुः ) and other stated senses affixed to सभा, सोदर पूर्व, and सोम: e. g. सभ्य:, पूर्व्यः; .et cetera, and others. confer, compare P. IV. 4.105, 109, 133, 137, 138: (e) in the sense of 'deserving it' to दण्ड and other words, e. g. दण्ड्य, अर्ध्र्य, मध्य, मेध्य, et cetera, and others: cf P. V. 1.66: ( f ) in the sense of quality or action to सखि e. g. सख्यम् ; cf P. V. 1.126: (6) taddhita affix. affix यत् applied to (a) राजन् श्वशुर, कुल, मनु in the sense of offspring, (b) शूल्, उखा, वायु, ऋतु and others, under certain conditions; confer, compare P. IV. 2.17, 31, 32, 101, (c) to अर्ध, परार्ध, words in the class headed by दि्श, छन्दस and others in specific senses; cf P. IV. 3-46, 54 et cetera, and others and (d) in specific senses to specific words mentioned here and there in a number of sUtras from IV.4, 75 to V.4.25; (e) to शाखा, मुख, जघन and others in the sense of इव (similar to) exempli gratia, for example शाख्यः, मुख्य:, et cetera, and others: confer, compare P. V. 3. 103; (7) case-ending य substituted for ङे of the dative sing; e. g. रामाय confer, compare P. VII. 3.102: (8) verb-affix यक् applied to the nouns कण्डू and others to make them ( denominative ) roots; e. g. कण्डूय,सन्तूय et cetera, and others confer, compare कण्ड्वादिभ्यो यक् P. III. 1.27 (9) \| Vikarana य ( यक् ) applied to any root before the Saarvadhaatuka personal endings to form the base for the passive voice as also the base for the 'Karmakartari' voice e g क्रियते, भूयते, confer, compare सार्वधातुके यक् P. III. 1.67 (10) Unaadi affix य ( यक् ) applied to the root हृन् to form the Vedic word अघ्न्य: cf अघ्न्यादयश्च: ( 11 ) augment य ( यक् ) added to the affix क्त्वा in Vedic Literature: e. g. दत्त्वायः confer, compare क्त्वो यक् P. VII.1.47; (12) verb affix यङ् added to a root to form its Intensive base ( which sometimes is dropped ) and the root is doubledition e. g. चेक्रीयते,चर्करीति;. confer, compare P. III. 1.22,24; (13) short term ( प्रत्याहृार ) supposed to be beginning with य in the affix यइ in the sUtra धातेरेकाचो ... यङ् III. 1.22, and ending with ङ् in the sUtra लिड्याशिष्यङ्क III. 1.86, with a view to include the various verb affixes and conjugational signs.

yakṣavarmana	author of the commentary called चिन्तामणि on the SabdaanuSaasana of Sakataayana.

yajādi	roots headed by the root यज् which take the samhprasaarana substitute for their semivowel before terminations marked with the mute letter क्: c.g. इज्यते, इष्टिः confer, compare वचिस्वपियज्ञादीनां क्रिति P.VI.1.15. These roots are nine in number, यज् , वप् , वंद् , वस् and others which are of the first conjugation given by Paaini in his Dhaatupatha at the end of the roots of the first conjugation.

yatprakaraṇa	literally the topic or the section of यत्; the section where the taddhita affix. affix यत् is prescribedition This taddhita affix. affix यत् is prescribed in the fifth adhyaaya of Paanini in a number of rules in different and different senses ; confer, compare यत्प्रक्ररणे रथाच्च P.V. 1.6 Vaart.1 ; यत्प्रकरणे व्रह्मवर्चसान्त्व P.V.1.39 Vaart. 1.

yathāsaṃkhyam	in respective order, the first for the first, the second for the second, and so on; when the number of subjects and predicates is the same, they should connect in the same order: confer, compareयथासंख्यमनुदेशः समानाम् P. I .3 .10.

yadyoga	a connection with the word (pronoun) यत् by its use in the same sentence and context, which prevents the anudatta ( grave ) accent for the verb in the sentence; confer, compareनिपातैर्यद्यदिहृन्तकुविन्नेच्चेच्चण्कच्चिद्यत्रयुक्तम् P. VIII. 1.30; cf also the usual expression यद्योगादानघात: found in commentary wor

yadvṛtta	lit a word formed from यत्; a word which contains the pronoun यत् in it which prevents sarvaanudatta for a verb which follows; confer, compare यदस्मिन्वर्तते यद्वृत्तम् M.. Bh. on P. VIII.1.66; cf also. यद्वृत्तोपपदाच्च Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VI. 14, where Uvvata explains यद्वत्तasयदो वृत्तं यद्वृत्तं सर्वविभक्त्यन्तं सर्वप्रत्ययान्तं च गृह्यन्ते । V.'Pr. VI. 14 commentary

yam(1)	one of pair a twin letter available in pronunciation before a nasal letter and similar to it, when the nasal consonant is preceded by any one of the four consonants of the five classes; a transitional sound intervening between a non-nasal and the following nasal as a counterpart of the n6n-nasal: confer, compare वर्गेष्वाद्यानां चेतुर्णो पञ्चमे पर मध्ये यमो नाम पूर्वसदृशो वर्णः प्रातिशाख्ये प्रसिद्धः S.K. on P.व्व्III. l.1; (2) name given to the seven musical notes, found in the singing of Saaman; confer, compare मन्द्रमध्यमत्राख्येषु त्रिषु वाचः स्थानेषु प्रत्येकं सत स्थरभेदा भवन्ति कुष्टप्रथमद्वितीयतृतीयचतुर्थमन्द्रातित्वार्यः यमाः ' Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XXIII. 13,14.

yay	short term (प्रत्याहार) for sonants beginning with य् ( in हयवरट्) and ending before the ; mute letter य् ( in कपय् ) id est, that is all consonants except! श्, ष्, स्, and ह्; confer, compare अनुस्वारस्य ययि परसवर्णः P.VIII 4. 58 by which an anusvara is changed into a cognate letter of the following which is a letter included in यय्.

yavādi	a class of words headed by the word यव, the taddhita affix मत् after which does not get the consonant मृ changed into व् although the affix मत् be added to a word ending in म् or अ, or having म् or अ as the penultimate letter; e. g. यवमान् , ऊर्मिमान् , भूमिमान् et cetera, and others: confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.VIII.2.9. This यवादिगण is looked upon as आकृतिगण

yaśa:kavi	a grammarian, the author of a treatise named Bhasanusasana. यश:सागर a Jain grammarian, the author of a work named Samasasobha.

yaśovarmadeva	the same as यक्षवर्मन् the author of ' चिन्तृामणि ' a commentary on the Sabdnussana of Sakatyana.

yas	taddhita affix. affix य with mute स् to indicate the application of the term पद् to the preceding base as a consequence of which the final म् of the words कम् and शम्, after which यस् is prescribed, gets changed into anusvara e. g. कंयु:, दंयु:: cf P.W.2.138.

yaskādi	words headed by the word यस्क, the affixes in the sense of ’a descendant' placed after which are elided and the words are to be used in the plural number in the masculine gender; e. g. यस्का:; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. II.4.63.

yāska	a reputed ancient Niruktakara or etymologist, of the 6th century B.C. or even a few centuries before that, whose work, the Nirukta, is looked upon as the oldest authoritative treatise regarding derivation of Vedic words. Yaska was preceded by a number of etymologists whom he has mentioned in his work and whose works he has utilisedition Yaska's Nirukta threw into the back-ground the older treatises on etymology, all of which disappeared gradually in the course of time.

yuktavadbhāva	literally behaviour like the original base. The term is used in the sense of possession of, or getting, the same gender and number as was possessed by the base to which the taddhita affix. affix was added and subsequently dropped by a rule of Panini in which the word लुप् is put in the sense of dropping: e. g. कुरयः देश: or अङ्गाः देश: in the sense of कुरूणां or अङ्गानां निवासो जनपदः confer, compare जनपदे लुप् P. IV.3.81 and लुपि युक्तवद् व्यक्तिवचने P.I.2.51;confer, compare also M.Bh. on P. I. 2.51 and 52.

yugma(1)	lit, pair; the word is used for the second and fourth consonants ख्, घ्, छ्, झ् et cetera, and others of the five classes which, in a way are combinations of two consonants; confer, compare युग्माः सोष्माण: Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 16; cf also युग्मौ सोष्माणौ where the word सोष्मन् is explained as उष्म। वायुस्तेन सह वर्तन्त इति सोष्माण: \| खघ छझ टढ थध फभ: confer, comparealso युग्मयोद्वितीयचतुर्थयोः; (2) even, as opposed to odd, referring to the vowels ओ and औ which are even in the enumeration ए ओ ऐ अौ. The consonants called युग्म viz. ख, घ and others which are defined as युग्म are also the even consonants in their classes.

yaudheyādi	a class of nine words headed by the word यौधेय, a taddhita affix applied to which is not to be elided even though the word be used in the plural number

r(1)	the consonant र, generally cited as रेफ; the vowel अ is added to र् for facility of utterance: confer, compare T. Pr.' I.21 ; (2) short term ( प्रत्याहृार ) for र् and ल्; confer, compare उरण् रपरः, P. I. 1.51: (3) krt affix र applied to the roots नम्रः, कम्प्रः et cetera, and others in the sense of agent who is habituated to, or expert in the action expressed by the root; e. g, नम्रः, कम्प्र:; confer, compare नमिकम्पिस्म्यजसकमहिंसदीपो रः P. III. 2. 167; (4) taddhita affix. affix र as a Caturarthika affix applied to the words headed by अश्मन्: e. g. अश्मरः; confer, compare वुञ्छण् P. IV. 2. 80; (5) tad affix र in the sense of possession affixed to the words ऊष, सुषि, मुष्क, मधु, and तमस् with अ of तमस् changed to इ: e. g. ऊषरम्, सुषिरम्, मधुर:, तमिस्रा: confer, compare Kas on. P.V. 2.107 and 114: (6) taddhita affix. affix र in the sense of diminution affixed to the words कुटी, शमी and शुण्डा: exempli gratia, for example कुटीर:, शमीर, शुण्डार:: confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V. 3. 88: (7) taddhita affix. affix रक् which see below; (8) krt affix रक् which see below; (9) a term for द्विगुसमास in the Jainendra Vyakarana.

ram	augment र inserted after the vowel अ of the root भ्रस्ज्, when the letterर् which is already present in भ्ररुज् (before अ) and the penultimate स् are dropped; the result is that the word भर्ज्, in short, becomes substituted in the place of भ्रस्ज्: confer, compare भ्रस्जो रोपधयो रमन्यतरस्याम्P.VI. 4.47, and भ्रस्जो रोपधयोर्लोप अागमो रम् विधीयते as Bharadvajiya Varttika thereon

rāmacandra(1)	रामन्वन्द्राचार्य (son of कृष्णाचार्य) the well-known author of the Prakriyakaumudi. He belonged to the Sesa family and the latter half of the fifteenth century is assigned as his date. He is believed to have been a resident of Andhra. His work, the Prakriyakaumudi, was a popular grammar treatise for some time before Bhattoji's SiddhantaKaumudi got its hold, and it had a number of commentaries written upon it especially by his descendants and members of his family which became well-known as the Sesa family of grammarians. The Prakriyakaumudi is named कृष्णर्किकरप्राक्रिया also. (2) There was a grammarian named Ramacandra who wrote a small treatise on grammar named विदग्धबोध. (3) There was another grammarian of the same name who was a pupil of Nagesabhatta of the eighteenth century and who wrote a small commentary called वृतिसंग्रह on Panini's Astadhyayi. (4) There was also another Ramacandra who was a scholar of Vedic grammar and who wrote the commentary named ज्योत्स्ना on the Vjasaneyi-Pratisakhya.

rik	an augment added optionally with रुक् and रीक् to the reduplicative syllable of the frequentative root from a primitive root which ends in ऋ or has a penultimate ऋ; e. g. चरिकर्ति, नरिनर्ति भरिभ्रत् et cetera, and others; confer, compare रुग्रिकौ च लुकि, P.VII. 4.9l and ऋतश्च VII.4.92.

rit(1)	characterized by the mute consonant र् signifying the acute accent for the penultimate vowel;confer, compare उपोत्तमं रिति P. VI. I. 217; ( 2 ) the same as रिफित or रेफि, a visarga which is changeable into र् when euphonically combined; confer, compare विसर्जनीयो रिफितः V.Pr.I.160; confer, compare also भाव्युपधं च रिद्विसर्जनीयान्तानि रेफेण ; V.Pr. VII.9. The terms रिफित, रेफि and रित् are given in the Padapatha to a पद or word which ends in a Visarga which has originated from र् in the Samhitapatha; e. g. the Visarga in कः, प्रात: et cetera, and others; confer, compare R.Pr.I.30 to 32.

rīk	augment री added optionally with रुक् and रिक् to the reduplicative syllable ( अभ्यास ) of the frequentative base of roots having ऋ as their penultimate vowel; exempli gratia, for example वरीवृश्च्यते वरीवृश्चीति, नरीनर्ति, चरीकर्ति; cf रीगृदुपधस्य च P.VII. 4.90.

romaśa	one of the faults in pronunciation; confer, compare प्रगीत उपगीतः क्ष्क्ण्णो रोमश इति M. Bh I. 1. Ah. 1.

laghuprakriyā	name of a grammar treatise based on the Sabdānuśāsana of Hemacandra written by Vinayavijaya where the sūtras of Hemacandra are arranged in different topics as in the Siddhāntakaumudī of Bhoțțojī.

laghubhūṣaṇadarpaṇa or laghudarpaṇā	name of a commentary by Mannudeva on Koņdabhațța's Vaiyākaraņabhūşaņasāra.

lāvasthā	the original condition of ल् or the personal endings before the affixes तिप्, तस् and others are substituted for them in accordance with the time or mood, as also the person and the number in view;confer, compare लावस्थायामेव स्यादयः, सार्वधातुके श्यनादयः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.III. 1. 33.

luṭ	general name for affixes of the first future which are added to roots when the future time is not the present day, but the next and the succeeding ones; confer, compare अनद्यतने लुट् P. III. 3.15. The affixes ति, त: et cetera, and others replace the affix लुट् in accordance with the number and person in view; confer, compare तिप्तस्झिसिप् .... P. III. 4 78.

lup	disappearance ( लुप्यते इति लुप् ); a term used by Pāņini with reference to the disappearance of an affix or its part under specified conditions by the express mention of the word लुप्. Although after the disappearance of an affix no operation for the base before, can take place as conditioned by the affix, i. e. although there is no प्रत्ययलक्षण, still, when the disappearanee is mentioned as लुप्, the base gets the gender and number of that original form of it which existed before the affix, which has disappeared, was applied; confer, compare कुरव: दश:, चञ्चेव पुरुष: चञ्चा; confer, compare लुपि युक्तवद् व्यक्तिवचने. P. I. 2.51 and Kāśikā thereon.

leṭ	a general term for the affixes of the Vedic subjunctive, the usual personal-endings ति, तस् et cetera, and others being substituted for लेट् as in the case of other tenses and moods. The augments अट् and आट् are sometimes prefixed to the लेट् affix and the sign ( विकरण ) स् ( सिप् ) is sometimes added to the roots. The forms of लेट् are to be arrived at as they are found actually used in Vedic language, even by placing personal-endings of a person or number different from what is actually requiredition

leśa	such a slow or indistinct utterance or pronunciation of the letter य् or व् preceded by अ, as shows that it is almost droppedition This indistinct or slurred utterance of य् or व, which is described as advocated by the Prātiśākhyakāra Vātsapra, corresponds to the utterance of य् or व् with a very low tone as mentioned by Pāņini in the rule व्योर्लघुप्रयत्नतरः शाकटायनस्य; exempli gratia, for example अाप उन्दन्तु; या जाता ओषधयः et cetera, and others; confer, compare लेशो वात्सप्रस्य एतयोः T.Pr. 10.23; confer, compare also लेशेन प्रयत्नशैथिल्येन ब्यञ्जनानां वचनमुच्चारणं क्रियते Uvvața on R.Pr. XIV.5.

v(1)	the semivowel व्: see व्; (2) personal-ending substituted for वस् in the perfect ( लिट् ) first person (उत्तमपुरुष), and in the present tense in the case of the root विद्; confer, compare परस्मैपदानां णलतुसुस्० and विदो लटो वा. P. III. 4.82,83; (3) krt affix क्विप् , क्विन् or वि of which only व् remains; confer, compare अनिगन्तोञ्चतौ वप्रत्यये P. VI. 2.52; confer, compare also विष्वग्देवयोश्र्च टेरद्यञ्चतौ वप्रत्यये VI.3.92.the affix is mentioned as वप्रत्यय by Panini, but, in fact, it is व् , अ being added for ease in pronunciation; (4) taddhita affix. affix in the sense of possession added along with the other affixes इन् , इक, and वत् to the word केश and to some other words such as मणि, हिरण्य, राजी, अर्णस् et cetera, and others as also to गाण्डी and अजग; confer, compare P. V. 2. 109, 110.

vacana(1)	literally statement; an authoritative statement made by the authors of the Sutras and the Varttikas as also of the Mahabhasya; confer, compare अस्ति ह्यन्यदेतस्य वचने प्रयोजनम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Siva Sutra 1 Vart. 1 The word is also used predicatively in the sense of वक्तव्यम् by the Varttikakara; confer, compare ऌति ऌ वावचनम् , ऋति ऋ वावचनम् ; (2) number, such as एकवचन, द्विवचन, बहुवचन et cetera, and others; confer, compare वचनमेकत्वद्वित्वबहुत्वानि Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana.on P.I.2.51 ; cf लुपि युक्तिवद् व्यक्तिवचने \| लुकि अभिधेयवल्लिङ्गवचनानि भवन्ति। लवणः सूपः। लवणा यवागू:। M.Bh.on P.I. 2.57; (3) expressive word; confer, compare गुणवचनब्राह्मणादिभ्यः कर्मणि च P. V.1.124 where the Kasika explains the word गुणवचन as गुणमुक्तवन्तो गुणवचनाः; confer, compare also the terms गुणवचन, जातिवचन, क्रियावचन et cetera, and others as classes of words; confer, compare also अभिज्ञावचने लृट् P.III.2.112; (4) that which is uttered; confer, compare मुखनासिकावचनोनुनासिक:। मुखसहिता नासिका मुखनासिका । तया य उच्चार्यते असौ वर्ण: Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. I.1.8.

varavarṇinī	name of a commentary on the Paribhsendusekhara written by Guruprasada Sastri, a reputed grammarian of the present cenutry.

varṇapāṭha	serial mention or enumeration of letters in the fourteen Siva Sutras. The word is also used in the sense of the alphabet given in the Pratisakhya and grammar works; confer, compare एवं तर्हि वर्णपाठ एव उपदेश: करिष्यते M.Bh. on P. I. 1.69.

varṇasamāmnāya	a collection of letters or alphabet given traditionally. Although the Sanskrit alphabet has got everywhere the same cardinal letters id est, that is vowels अ, इ et cetera, and others, consonants क्, ख् etc : semivowels य्, र्, ल्, व, sibilants श् ष् स् ह् and a few additional phonetic units such as अनुस्वार, विसर्ग and others, still their number and order differ in the different traditional enumerations. Panini has not mentioned them actually but the fourteen Siva Sutras, on which he has based his work, mention only 9 vowels and 34 consonants, the long vowels being looked upon as varieties of the short ones. The Siksa of Panini mentions 63 or 64 letters, adding the letter ळ ( दुःस्पृष्ट ); confer, compare त्रिषष्टि: चतुःषष्टिर्वा वर्णाः शम्भुमते मताः Panini Siksa. St.3. The Rk Pratisakhya adds four (Visarga, Jihvamuliya, Upadhmaniya and Anusvara ) to the forty three given in the Siva Sutras and mentions 47. The Taittiriya Pratisakhya mentions 52 letters viz. 16 vowels, 25class consonants, 4 semivowels,six sibilants (श्, ष् , स्, ह् , क्, प् , ) and anusvara. The Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya mentions 65 letters 3 varieties of अ, इ, उ, ऋ and लृ, two varieties of ए, ऐ, ओ, औ, 25 class-consonants, four semivowels, four sibilants, and जिह्वामूलीय, उपध्मानीय, अनुस्वार, विसर्जनीय, नासिक्य and four यम letters; confer, compare एते पञ्चषष्टिवर्णा ब्रह्मराशिरात्मवाचः Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII. 25. The Rk Tantra gives 57 letters viz. 14 vowels, 25 class consonants, 4 semivowels, 4 sibilants, Visarga,.Jihvamuliya, Upadhmaniya, Anunasika, 4_yamas and two Anusvaras. The Rk Tantra gives two different serial orders, the Uddesa (common) and the Upadesa (traditional). The common order or Uddesa gives the 14 vowels beginning with अ, then the 25 class consonants, then the four semivowels, the four sibilants and lastly the eight ayogavahas, viz. the visarjanya and others. The traditional order gives the diphthongs first, then long vowels ( अा, ऋ, लॄ, ई and ऊ ) then short vowels (ऋ, लृ, इ, उ, and lastly अ ), then semivowels, then the five fifth consonants, the five fourths, the five thirds, the five seconds, the five firsts, then the four sibilants and then the eight ayogavaha letters and two Ausvaras instead of one anuswara. Panini appears to have followed the traditional order with a few changes that are necessary for the technigue of his work.

vārttika	a statement which is as much authoritative as the original statement to which it is given as an addition for purposes of correction, completion or explanation. The word is defined by old writers in an often-guoted verseउक्तानुक्तदुरुक्तनां चिन्ता यत्र प्रवर्तते \| तं ग्रन्थं वार्तिकं प्राहुर्वार्तिकज्ञा मनीषिण:\|This definition fully applies to the varttikas on the Sutras of Panini. The word is explained by Kaiyata as वृत्तौ साधु वार्त्तिकम् which gives strength to the supposition that there were glosses on the Sutras of Panini of which the Varttikas formed a faithful pithy summary of the topics discussedition The word varttika is used in the Mahabhasya at two places only हन्तेः पूर्वविप्रविषेधो वार्तिकेनैव ज्ञापित: M.Bh. on P.III. 4.37 and अपर आह् यद्वार्त्तिक इति M.Bh. on P. II.2.24 Vart. 18. In अपर अहृ यद्वार्त्तिक इति the word is contrasted with the word वृत्तिसूत्र which means the original Sutra (of Panini ) which has been actuaIly quoted, viz. संख्ययाव्ययासन्नाo II.2. 25. Nagesa gives ' सूत्रे अनुक्तदुरुक्तचिन्ताकरत्वं वार्तिक्रत्वम् as the definition of a Varttika which refers only to two out of the three features of the Varttikas stated a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. If the word उक्त has been omitted with a purpose by Nagesa, the definition may well-nigh lead to support the view that the genuine Varttikapatha of Katyayana consisted of a smaller number of Varttikas which along with a large number of Varttikas of other writers are quoted in the Mahabhasya, without specific names of writers, For details see pages 193-223 Vol. VII Patanjala Mahabhasya, D.E, Society's Edition.

vārtikapāṭha	the text of the Varttikas as traditionally handed over in the oral recital or in manuscripts As observed a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.(see वार्त्तिक),although a large number of Varttikas quoted in the Mahabhasya are ascribed to Katyayana, the genuine Varttikapatha giving such Varttikas only, as were definitely composed by him, has not been preserved and Nagesa has actually gone to the length of making a statement like " वार्तिकपाठ: भ्रष्टः" ; confer, compare . Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.on P.I.l.I2 Varttika 6.

vāsudeva( शास्त्री)	surnamed Abhyankar, who lived from 1863 to l942 and did vigorous and active work of teaching pupils and writing essays, articles, commentary works and original works on various Shastras with the same scholarship, zeal and acumen for fifty years in Poona. He wrote गूढार्थप्रकाश a commentary on the LaghuSabdendusekhara and तत्त्वादर्श a commentary on the Paribhasendusekhara in 1889. His edition of the Patanjala Mahabhasya with full translation and notes in Marathi can be called his magnum opus. See अभ्यंकर.

vikampita	a fault in the pronunciation of vowels, the utterance being attended with a kind of tremor; confer, compare ग्रस्तं निरस्त...विकम्पितम् । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). at the end of Ahnika 1.

viṣamarāgatā	incorrect nasalization, mentioned as a fault of pronunciation: confer, compare संदष्टता विषमरागता च । Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV. 4.

vispaṣṭa	clear and correct; the term is used in connection with the pronunciation of Vedic words; confer, compare यथो एतत् \| अविस्पष्टार्था भवन्तीति Nirukta of Yāska.I. 16.

visvara	characterized by a faulty or incorrect accent, which is looked upon as a fault of pronunciation.

vihāra	expansion of the position ( स्थान ) and the means of utterance ( करण ) of a sound beyond the necessary extent, which produces a fault of pronunciation, called व्यास; confer, compare विहारसंहारयेाव्यासपीडने । स्थानकरणयोर्विहारे विस्तारे व्यासो नाम दोषो जायते Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV 2.

vuk(1)	augment वु added (a) to the word भ्रू after it, when the taddhita affix. affix ढक् ( एय ) in the sense of अपत्य is affixed to it; confer, compare भ्रुवो वुक् च P. IV.1.125; (b) to the root भू before an affix beginning with a vowel in the perfect and the aorist tenses; exempli gratia, for example बभूव, अभूवन् et cetera, and others: confer, compare P. VI.4.88: (c) to the root सू in the Perfect third person. singular.; exempli gratia, for example ससूव, P.VII.4.74; (2) taddhita affix. affix अक applied to the word कन्था as seen in use in the Bannu ( वर्णु ) district; e. g. कान्थकम् , confer, compare P.IV.2.103.

vuñ	(ID taddhita affix. affix अक causing vṛddhi to the vowel of the first syllable of that word to which it is added, as prescribed, (a) to the words denoting an offspring as also to the words उक्ष, उष्ट्र et cetera, and othersin the sense of 'a group'; e. g. अोपगवकम् , औष्ट्रकम् , कैदारकम् et cetera, and others: confer, compare P.IV.2.39, 40; (b) to the words राजन्य and others in the sense of 'inhabited country' ; e. g. राजन्यकः देवनायकः et cetera, and others, confer, compare P. IV.2.53, (c) to the words headed by अरीहण such as द्वुघण, खदिर्, मैत्रायण, काशकृत्स्न et cetera, and others in the quadruple senses; exempli gratia, for example अारीहणकम् , द्रौबणकम् , confer, compare P.IV.2.80, (d) to the word धन्व meaning a desert, to words with य् or र for their penultimate, to words ending in प्रस्थ, पुर and वह as also to words headed by धूम, नगर, अरण्य कुरु, युगन्धर et cetera, and others, under certain conditions in the miscellaneous senses; e. g. सांकाश्यकः,पाटलिपुत्रकः, माकन्दकः, आङ्गकः, वाङ्गकः, धौमकः, नागरकः, अारण्यकः et cetera, and others; confer, compare P.IV.2.121-130,134,135, 136; (e) to the words शरद् , आश्वयुजी, ग्रीष्म, वसन्त, संवत्सर,अाग्रहायणी and others in the specific senses given: confer, compare P. IV. 3.27, 45, 46, 49, 50; (f) to words denoting descendence or spiritual relation, words meaning families and warrior clans, words कुलाल and others, words meaning clans, and students learning a specific Vedic branch in specific senses prescribed : e. g. आचार्यक, मातामहक, ग्लौचुकायनक, कालालक, काठक, कालापक et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. IV. 3.77, 99, 118, 126; (g) to the words शाकल, उष्ट्र, उमा and ऊर्णा in the specially given senses; exempli gratia, for example शाकलः, संघः, औप्ट्रकः, औमम् और्णम्, confer, compareP.IV.3.188,157,158; (h) to words with य् as the penultimate, and a long vowel preceding the last one, to words in the dvandva compound, and to the words मनोज्ञ, कल्याण and others in the sense of 'nature' or 'profession';e.g रामणीयकम् गौपालपशुपालिका, गार्गिका, काठिका etc; confer, compare P. V.1.132,133,134: (2) kṛt affix अक added to the roots निन्द् हिंस् and others, and to the roots देव् and कृश् with a prefix before,in the sense of a habituated,professional or skilled agent; exempli gratia, for example. निन्दकः, परिक्षेपकः, असूयकः, परिदेवकः, आक्रोशकः et cetera, and others confer, compare P.III.2. 146, 147.

vun(1)	kṛt affix अक added to the roots प्रु, सृ, and लू in the sense of 'a skilled agent' and to any root in the sense of 'an agent who is blessed'; exempli gratia, for example प्रवकः, सरकः, लवकः, जीवकः ( meaning जीवतात् ) नन्दकः, ( meaning नन्दतात् ); confer, compare P. III. 1. 149, 150; (2) taddhita affix. affix अक added to(a) the words क्रम and others in the sense of 'a student of'; e.g, क्रमक:, पदकः शिक्षकः मीमांसकः; confer, compare P.IV.2.61; (b) the words पूर्वाह्न, अपराह्ण et cetera, and others as also the words पथिन् and अमावास्या in the sense of 'produced in': exempli gratia, for example पूर्वाह्नक,पन्थक, अमावास्यकः confer, compare P. IV.3. 28, 29, 30; (c) the words कलापि, अश्वत्य, यव and बुस in the sense of 'debt paid at the time of', the words वासुदेव and अर्जुन in the sense of 'devoted to',and the dvandva compounds when the words so formed mean either 'enmity' or 'nuptial ties';exempli gratia, for example कलापकम् (ऋणम्),यवकम् (ऋणम्) वासुदेवकः, अर्जुनकः, काकोलूकिका, कुत्सकुशिकिका; confer, compareP.IV.3.48, 98,125: (d) the words गोषद, इषेत्व et cetera, and others in the sense of 'containing' or 'possessing', and the word पथिन् in the sense of 'expert' exempli gratia, for example इषेत्वकः, पथक:; confer, compareP.V.2.62, 63; and (e) the words पाद and शत preceded by a numeral, in the sense of वीप्सा, as also in the senses of दण्ड (fine) and व्यवसर्ग when those words are preceded by a numeral; exempli gratia, for example द्विपदिकां ( ददाति ), द्विशतिकां ( ददाति ), द्विपदिकां दाडितः confer, compare Kāś. on P. V.4.l and 2.

vṛtti(1)	treatment, practice of pronunciation; (2) conversion of one phonetic element into another; confer, compare R.Pr.I.95;(3) position of the padas or words as they stand in the Saṁhhitā text, the word is often seen used in this way in the compound word पदवृत्ति; आन्पदा: पदवृत्तयः R.Pr. IV.17: (4) modes of recital of the Vedic text which are described to be three द्रुत, मध्य and विलम्बित based upon the time of the interval and the pronunciation which differs in each one; confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.4. 109, Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 4; also I.l.69 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).ll ; ( 5 ) nature confer, compare गुर्वक्षराणां गुरुवृत्ति सर्वम् R.Pr.XVIII.33; (6) interpretation of a word; (7) verbal or nominal form of a root; confer, compare अर्थनित्यः परीक्षेत केनचिद् वृत्तिसामान्येन Nirukta of Yāska.II.1; (8)mode or treatment followed by a scientific treatise; cf का पुनर्वृत्तिः । वृत्तिः शास्त्रप्रवृत्तिः \| M.Bh. in Āhnika l on वृत्तिसमवायार्थ उपदेश: Vārttika 10; (9) manner of interpretation with the literal sense of the constituents present or absent, described usually as two-fold जहत्स्वार्था and अजहत्स्वार्था, \| but with a third kind added by some grammarians viz. the जहदजहत्स्वार्था; (10) a compound word giving an aggregate sense different from the exact literal sense of the constituent words; there are mentioned five vṛittis of this kind; confer, compare परार्थाभिधानं वृत्तिः । कृत्तद्धितसमासैकदेशधातुरूपाः पञ्च वृत्तयः \| वृत्त्यर्थावबोधकं वाक्यं विग्रहः S. K. at the end of the Ekaśeṣaprakaraṇa; ( 11 ) interpretation of a collection of statements; the word was originally applied to glosses or comments on the ancient works like the Sūtra works, in which the interpretation of the text was given with examples and counterexamples where necessary: confer, compare वृत्तौ भाष्ये तथा नामधातुपारायणादिषु; introductory stanza in the Kāśikā.Later on, when many commentary works were written,the word वृत्ति was diferentiated from भाष्य, वार्तिक, टीका,चूर्णि, निर्युक्ति, टिप्पणी, पञ्जिका and others, and made applicable to commentary works concerned with the explanation of the rules with examples and counter-examples and such statements or arguments as were necessary for the explanation of the rules or the examples and counter examples. In the Vyākaraṇa-Śāstra the word occurs almost exclusively used for the learned Vṛtti on Pāṇini-sūtras by Vāmana and Jayāditya which was given the name Kāśikā Vṛtti; confer, compare तथा च वृत्तिकृत् often occurring in works on Pāṇini's grammar.

vṛttiparigaṇana	a definite enumeration of words used in a specific sense (as contrasted with वार्तिपरिगणन) which means a definite enumeration of the senses in which an operation, such as a compound-formation or so,takes place; confer, compare अथैतस्मिन्सति अनभिधाने यदि वृतिपरिगणनं क्रियते, वर्तिपरिगणनमपि कर्तव्यम् ; cf Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II. 2.24 Vart. 16.

veyākaraṇabhūṣaṇasāra	a slightly abridged form of the Vaiyakaranabhusana by the author Kondabhatta himself for students and beginners. It consists of the same number of fourteen chapters as the main treatise, which are given the name Nirnaya. See vaiyākaranabhusana.

vaiyākaraṇasiddhāntakaimudī	an extremely popular work on the subject of Sanskrit grammar written for the use of students, which, although difficult at a few places, enables the students by its careful study to get a command over the subject. and enable him to read other higher works on grammar. The work is based on the Astadhyayi of Panini without omitting a single Sutra. The arrangement of the Sutras is, entirely different, as the author, for the sake of facility in understanding, has divided the work into different topics and explained the Sutras required for the topic by bringing them together in the topic. The main topics or Prakaranas are twelve in number, viz. (1) संज्ञापरिभाषा, (2) पञ्चसंधि, (3) सुबन्त or षड्लिङ्ग, (4) स्त्रीप्रत्यय, (5) कारक, (6) समास, (7) तद्धित, (8) तिङन्त, (9) प्रक्रिया, (10) कृदन्त, (11) वैदिकी and (12) स्वर which are sometimes styled as व्याकरणद्वादशी. The work is generally known by the term सिद्धान्तकौमुदी, or even कौमुदी, and it has got a large number of scholarly and ordinary commentaries as also commentaries on commentaries, all numbering a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. twelve, and two abridgments the Madhyakaumudi and the Laghukaumudi. The work was written by the reputed scholar Bhattoji Diksita of Varanasi in the seventeenth century. See Bhattoji Diksita.

vaiyākaraṇasiddhāntakaumudīṭīkā	or सिद्धान्तकौमुदीव्याख्या a general name given to the large number of commentaries written by members of the line of pupils, and pupils of pupils of Bhattoji. The well-known among the commentaries are प्रौढमनोरमा by the author himself, तत्त्वबोधिनी by ज्ञानेन्द्रसरस्वती, सुबोधिनी by जयकृष्णभट्ट मौनी बालमनोरमा by वासुदेवदीक्षित, and crowning all, the लघुशब्देन्दुशेखर by नागेशभट्ट. The प्रौढमनोरमा has got a learned commentary written by हरिदीक्षित called लघुशब्दरत्न or शब्दरत्न, which also has on it commentaries named भावप्रक्राश by बाळंभट्ट and शब्दरत्नदीप by कल्याणमल्ल. The Laghusabdendusekhara has got commentaries reaching about ten in number.

vaivacana	a term used for the Pragrhya vowel, possibly the same as द्वैवचन , which means a specific feature of द्विवचन or the dual number. The term is used in some Siksa works.

vaiṣamya	diversity in number or properties; confer, compare एवमपि पञ्चागमास्त्रय अागमिनः वैषम्यात्संख्यातानुदेशो न भवति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika 1; confer, compare also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I. 2, 27, I. 3. 10 Vart. 4, I. 4.101.

vyakta	distinctly perceived i e. perceived with reference to the individual referred to, which enables the speaker to apply the specific affixes in the sense of gender and number; cf, प्रातिपदिकं चाप्युपदिष्टुं सामान्यभूतेर्थे वर्तते \| सामान्ये वर्तमानस्य व्यक्तिरुपजायते \| व्यक्तस्य सतो लिङ्गसंख्याभ्यामन्वितस्य बाह्यनार्थेन यॊगॊ भवति । M.Bh. on P.I.1.57.

vyatikara(1)	confusion of one numberaffix for another number-affix (वचन), as noticed in the statements. e. g. अक्षीणि मे दर्शनीयानि; पादा मे सुकुमारंतरा: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I. 4. 21; (2) any confusion, say confusion of one grammatical element for another; confer, compare हृि: परस्मैपदानां यथा स्यात्, स्व आत्मनेपदानां, व्यतिकरो मा भूत् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III.4.1 Vart, 2.

vyathana	alteration of a phonetic element; change of sound; mispronunciation; confer, compare तदापायव्यथनानि दोषा: R.Pr,XIV, 1.

byāḍi	name of an ancient grammarian with a sound scholarship in Vedic phonetics, accentuation,derivation of words and their interpretation. He is believed to have been a relative and contemporary of Panini and to have written a very scholarly vast volume on Sanskrit grammar named Samgraha which is believed to have consisted of a lac of verses; confer, compare* संग्रहो व्याडिकृतो लक्षसंख्ये ग्रन्थ: NageSa's Uddyota; confer, compare also इह पुरा पाणिनीये अस्मिन्व्याकरणे ब्याड्युपरचितं लक्षग्रन्थपरिमाणं निबन्धनमासीत् Vākyapadīya of Bhartṛhari. Tika. The work is not available at present. References to Vyadi or to his work are found in the Pratisakhya works, the Mahabhasya, the Varttikas, the Vakyapadiya and many subsequent treatises. A work on the Vyakarana Paribhasas, believed to have been written by Vyadi, is available by the name परिभाषासूचन which from its style and other peculiarities seems to have been written after the Varttikas, but before the Mahabhasya. Vyadi is well-known to have been the oldest exponent of the doctrine that words denote an individual object and not the genus. For details see pp. 136-8, Vol. 7 Vyakarana Mahabhasya DE. Society's Edition.

vyāsa(1)	showing separately; separate expression as contrasted with समास; (2) fault of pronunciation of the type of unnecessarily extending the place of origin as also the instrument of the production of sound; confer, compare स्थानकरणयोर्विस्तारे व्यासो सो नाम दोषो जायते Uvvata on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV. 2.

śabdapārāyaṇa	recital or enumeration of one word after another in a language: cf ब्रुहस्पतरिन्द्राय दिव्यं वर्षसहस्रं प्रतिपदोक्तानां शब्दानां शब्दपारायणं प्रोवाच नान्तं जगाम M.Bh. Ahnika 1.

śabdarūpāvali	a very brief treatise on declension giving the forms of the seven cases of a few choice-words. The work is studied as the first elementary work and is very common without the name of any specific author.There are different works named शब्दरूपावलि giving declensions of different words which are all anonymous, although from the dates of manuscripts mentioned, they appear to be more than five or six hundred years old.

śaraṇadeva	a prominent grammarian of the Eastern school of Panini's system of grammar who lived in the thirteenth century and wrote works on Panini's grammar. His work named दुर्घटवृत्ति which ex. plains according to Panini's rules, the Varttikas thereon, and the Jnapakas deduced from them,the various words difficult to be explained, is much appreciated by scholars of grammar. He has quoted from a large number of classical works, and referred to many works of the Eastern grammarians who followed the Kasika school.

śas(l)	case affix (अस् ) of the accusative plural;confer, compare स्वौजसमौट्शस्o P.IV. 1.2; (2) taddhita affix.affix applied to words meaning much or little as also to a numeral: exempli gratia, for example बहुशो ददाति, अल्पशो ददाति, द्विश:, त्रिश:, पादशः et cetera, and others, confer, compare P. V.4.42, 43.

śākaṭāyana(1)	name of an ancient reputed scholar of Grammar and Pratisakhyas who is quoted by Panini. He is despisingly referred to by Patanjali as a traitor grammarian sympathizing with the Nairuktas or etymologists in holding the view that all substantives are derivable and can be derived from roots; cf तत्र नामान्याख्यातजानीति शाकटायनो नैरुक्तसमयश्च Nir.I.12: cf also नाम च धातुजमाह निरुक्ते व्याकरणे शकटस्य च तोकम् M. Bh on P.III.3.1. Sakatayana is believed to have been the author of the Unadisutrapatha as also of the RkTantra Pratisakhya of the Samaveda ; (2) name of a Jain grammarian named पाल्यकीर्ति शाकटायन who lived in the ninth century during the reign of the Rastrakuta king Amoghavarsa and wrote the Sabdanusana which is much similar to the Sutrapatha of Panini and introduced a new System of Grammar. His work named the Sabdanusasana consists of four chapters which are arranged in the form of topics, which are named सिद्धि. The grammar work is called शब्दानुशासन.

śākaṭāyanataraṅgiṇī	a commentary on Sakatayana's Sabdanusana.

śaityāyana	an ancient Grammarian and Vedic scholar who is quoted in the Taittiriya Pratisakhya for recommending a sharp and distinct nasalisation of the anusvara and the fifth class-consonants; confer, compare तत्रितरमानुनासिक्यमनुस्वारोत्तमेषु इति शैत्यायन: Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XVII. 1.

ṣa(1)	consonant ष् , the vowel अ being added for facility of pronunciation; (2) compound-ending अ, substituted for the final of the word मूर्धन् at the end of a Bahuvrihi compound when the word मूर्धन् is preceded by द्वि or त्रि e. g. द्विमूर्धः, त्रिमूर्धः confer, compare द्वित्रिभ्यां ष मूर्ध्नः P. V. 4.115 (3) a technical term for तत्पुरुषसमास in the Jainendra Vyakarana.

ṣa(1)	consonant ष् , the vowel अ being added for facility of pronunciation; (2) compound-ending अ, substituted for the final of the word मूर्धन् at the end of a Bahuvrihi compound when the word मूर्धन् is preceded by द्वि or त्रि e. g. द्विमूर्धः, त्रिमूर्धः confer, compare द्वित्रिभ्यां ष मूर्ध्नः P. V. 4.115 (3) a technical term for तत्पुरुषसमास in the Jainendra Vyakarana.

ṣaṣ( षट् )	a technical term used in Panini's grammar for such numeral words ( संख्थाशब्द ) as end with ष् or न् e. g. षष्, पञ्चन्, सप्तन् et cetera, and others; confer, compare ष्णान्ता षट् P. I. 1.24.

ṣyaṅ	taddhita affix. affix य (taking Samprasarana change i e. ई before the words पुत्र and पति and बन्धु in the Bahuvrihi compound) added, instead of the affix अण् or इञ्, in the sense of offspring, (l) to words having a long ( गुरु ) vowel for their penultimate , only in the formation of feminine bases, exempli gratia, for example कारीषगन्ध्या कौमुद्गन्ध्या, वाराह्या; कारीषगन्धीपुत्रः, कारीषगन्धीपति:, कारीषगन्धबिन्धुः ( Bah. compound): cf P.IV.1.78; (2) to words expressive of family names like पुणिक, मुखर et cetera, and others as also to the words क्रौडि, लाडि, व्याडि आपिशलि et cetera, and others and optionally to the words दैवयज्ञि and others in the formation of feminine bases; e. g. पौणिक्या, मौखर्या, क्रौड्या, व्याड्या, अापिशल्या et cetera, and others: confer, compare P. IV.1.79, 80, 81.

saṃkhyā(1)	a numeral such as एक,द्वि et cetera, and others In Panini Astadhyayi, although the term is defined as applicable to the word बहु, गण and words ending with the taddhita affix. affixes वतु and डति, such as तावत् , कति and the like, still the term is applied to all numerals to which it is seen applied by the people: cf Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 1.23 also Pari. Sek. Pari. 9: (2) numerical order; confer, compare स्पर्शेष्वेव संख्या Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 49.

saṃkhyāna	enumeration; statement: confer, compare एकाजनेकाज्ग्रहणेषु चावृत्तिसंख्यानादनेकाच्त्वं भविष्यति, M.Bh. on Sivasutra l Vart. 10.

saṃkhyāpūrva	with a numeral word placed first or at the beginning; a term used for defining the Dvigu compound cf संख्यापूर्वो द्विगुः P. II. 1.52.

saṃkhyeya	lit, those that are to be counted; objects of enumeration; confer, compare बहुव्रीहौ संख्येये डजबहुगणात् P. V. 4.73; cf also अथवा संख्या नाम इयं परप्रधाना \| संख्येयमनया विशेप्यम्, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II. 2.24 Vart. 9.

saṃjñā	a technical term; a short wording to convey ample sense; a term to know the general nature cf things; convention; confer, compare वृद्धिशब्द; संज्ञा; अादेच: संज्ञिन: M.Bh. on P.1-1.1. There are two main divisions of संज्ञा-कृत्रिमसंज्ञा or an artificial term such as टि, घु, or भ which is merely conventional, and अकृत्रिमसंज्ञा which refers to the literal sense conveyed by the word such as अव्यय, सर्वनाम and the like. Some grammar works such as the Candra avoid purely conventional terms, These samjhas are necessary for every scientific treatise. In Panini's grammar, there are the first two chapters giving and explaining the technical terms whose number exceeds well-nigh a hundredition

saṃtāna	continuity; line; continuous recital.

saṃdaṣṭa	a fault of pronunciation when the constituent letters of a word are uttered with the teeth kept close together. Kaiyata has ex-plained the word as वर्धित.

saṃdhya	a diphthong: see below the word संधिः cf अत्थनामनी संध्यम् . संध्यक्षर diphthong, a vowel resulting from a combination of two vowels, but which is to be looked upon as one single vowel by reason of only a single effort being required for its pronunciation; the letters ए, ऐ, ओ and औ are termed as संध्यक्षर as contrasted with समानाक्षर, confer, compare अष्टौ समानाक्षराण्यादितस्ततश्चत्वारि संध्यक्षराण्युत्तराणि Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 10; confer, compare also Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.II. 13, Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 111 ; confer, compare also संध्यक्षराणामिदुतौ ह्रस्वादेशे Kat. Pari. 43

sakṛdākhyātanirgrāhyā	capable of being understood on being mentioned only once just as the notion of genus or generality which is so understood; the phrase सकृदाख्यातनिर्ग्राह्या is cited as a definition of जाति; confer, compare सकृदाख्यातनिर्ग्राह्या गोत्रं च चरणैः सह, M.Bh. on P.IV.1.63.

sakṛdākhyātanirgrāhyā	capable of being understood on being mentioned only once just as the notion of genus or generality which is so understood; the phrase सकृदाख्यातनिर्ग्राह्या is cited as a definition of जाति; confer, compare सकृदाख्यातनिर्ग्राह्या गोत्रं च चरणैः सह, M.Bh. on P.IV.1.63.

satsaptamī	the locative case prescribed by the rule यस्य च भावेन भावलक्षणम् P. II.3.37 as scen in गोषु दुह्यमानासु गतः; confer, compare लुकि इति नैषा परसप्तमी । का तर्हि । सत्सप्तमी । लुकि सति इति . M, Bh. on P.I.2.49 Vart. 2. On account of the frequent occurrence of the word सति in a large number of examples of this locative absolute, the term सतिसप्तमी is used by modern grammarians for the better word सत्सप्तमी in the Mahabhasya: confer, compare M.Bh. on P,VI.4.23 as also on P.VIII. 3.61...

sama	equal in number to something given; confer, compare यथासंख्यमनुदेशः समानाम् confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana.. on P. I. 3.10.

samarthādhikāra	the province or the jurisdiction of the rule समर्थानां प्रथमाद्वा (P. IV. 1. 82), all the three words in which continue further on, and become valid in every rule upto the end of the second pada of the fifth adhyaya; confer, compare समर्थानां प्रथमाद्वा । त्रयमप्यधिक्रियते समर्थानामिति च प्रथमादिति च वेति च । स्वार्थिकप्रत्ययावधिश्चायमधिकारः । प्राग्दिशो विभक्तिरिति यावत् । स्वार्थिकेषु ह्यस्य उपयोगो नास्ति । विकल्पोपि तत्रानवस्थितः । Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.IV.1.82.

samavāya(I)	combination as contrasted with व्यवाय disjunction or separation; (2) the enumeration of the letters of the alphabet in a particular order so as to facilitate their combination, technically termed प्रत्याहार; confer, compare वृतिसमवायार्थ उपदेशः । का पुनर्वृत्तिः l शास्त्रप्रवृत्तिः । अथ कः समवायः । वर्णानामानुपूर्व्येण संनिवेशः । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika l Vart. 15. confer, compare also समवायो वर्णगत: क्रमविशेषः । Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.on the Bhasya mentioned a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; (3) contact; cf रक्तै रागः समवाये स्वराणाम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV.24.

samāmnāya	traditional enumeration or list of words or letters; confer, compare अक्षरसमाम्नाय, वर्णसमाम्नाय, शब्दसमाम्नाय et cetera, and others; cf अथातो वर्णसमाम्नायं व्याख्यास्याम: Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII.1. अथ वर्णसमाम्नाय: Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I. l : cf also समाम्नायः समाम्नात: स व्याख्यातव्यः Nir.I.1. समाम्नायः पाठक्रम: \| Com. on Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I. 1.

samāsa	placing together of two or more words so as to express a composite sense ; compound composition confer, compare पृथगर्थानामेकार्थीभावः समासः। Although the word समास in its derivative sense is applicable to any wording which has a composite sense (वृत्ति), still it is by convention applied to the समासवृत्ति only by virtue of the Adhikarasutra प्राक् कडारात् समास: which enumerates in its province the compound words only. The Mahabhasyakara has mentioned only four principal kinds of these compounds and defined them; confer, compare पूर्वपदार्थ प्रधानोव्ययीभावः। उत्तरपदार्थप्रधानस्तत्पुरुषः। अन्यपदार्थप्रधानो बहुव्रीहिः । उभयपदार्थप्रधानो द्वन्द्वः । M.Bh. on P.II.1.6; confer, compare also M.Bh. on P.II.1.20, II.1.49,II.2.6, II.4.26, V.1.9. Later grammarians have given many subdivisions of these compounds as for example द्विगु, कर्मधारय and तत्पुरुष (with द्वितीयातत्पुरुष, तृतीयातत्पुरुष et cetera, and othersas also अवयवतत्पुरुष, उपपदतत्पुरुष and so on) समानाधिकरणबहुव्रीहि, व्यधिकरणबहुव्रीहि, संख्याबहुवीहि, समाहारद्वन्द्व, इतरेतरद्वन्द्व and so on. समासचक्र a short anonymous treatise on compounds which is very popular and useful for beginners. The work is attributed to वररुचि and called also as समासपटल. The work is studied and committed to memory by beginners of Sanskrit ] studies in the PathaSalas of the old type.

samāhāra	collection, collective notion which is one of the four senses of the indeclinable च. The collective notion by nature being single, the dvandva compound formed of words showing such a collection takes the neuter gender and singular number affixes confer, compareयदा तिरोहितावयवविवक्षा संहति: प्रधानं तदा समाहार: Siradeva Pari. 16: confer, compare also P. II.2.29 and II. 1. 51.

sarvanāman	pronoun: literally standing for any noun. There is no definition as such given, of the word pronoun, but the words, called pronouns, are enumerated in Panini's grammar one after another in the class or group headed by सर्व ( सर्व, विश्व, उभ, उभय, words ending in the affixes डतर and डतम, अन्य et cetera, and others)which appear to be pronouns primarily. Some words such as पूर्व, पर, अवर, दक्षिण, उत्तर, अपर, अधर, स्व, अन्तर etc are treated as pronouns under certain conditions. In any case, attention has to be paid to the literal sense of the term सर्वनामन् which is an ancient term and none of these words when standing as a proper noun, is to be treated as a pronoun: confer, compare सर्वादीनि सर्वनामानि P. I.1. 27, confer, compare also संज्ञोपसर्जनीभूतास्तु न सर्वादयः: M.Bh. on P. I. 1. 27 Vart. 2; ( 2 ) The word सर्वनामन् means also a common term, a general term; confer, compare एकश्रुतिः स्वरसर्वनाम, यथा नपुंसकं लिङ्गसर्वनाम Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VI. 4.174 Vart 4.

saliṅga	inclusive of the notion of gender; the word is used in connection with the sense of a Pratipadika or a crude base as inclusive of the notion of gender \| and number: confer, compare अर्थग्रहृणस्यैतत् प्रयेाजनं कृत्स्नः पदार्थो यथाभिधीयेत सद्रव्यः सलिङ्गः ससंख्यश्चेति \| Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II. 2 24 Vart. 8.

savacana	with the notion of number included in the sense of the base itself; see सलिङ्ग. सवर्ग belonging to the same class of letters; confer, compare उता सवर्गः \| उकारेण लक्षित आदिः सहृ वर्गेण ग्राह्यः \| चो कु: \| Candra I. I. 2.

sasaṃkhya	possessed of the same number एकवचन, द्विवचन or बहुवचन: confer, compare कृत्स्न: पदार्थाभिधीयेत सद्रव्यः सलिङ्गः ससंख्य: । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II. 2. 24 Vart. 8. सस्थान having got an identical place of utterance; the word is much used in the Pratisakhya works; confer, compare सस्थानेन घोषिणां घोर्षिणैव Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIII. 5.

sāṃkhya	a rule or a topic concerning number: confer, compare यदि तर्हि कृत्स्नः पदार्थोभिधीयते लैङ्गाः सांख्याश्च विधयो न सिध्यन्ति, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II. 2 24 Vart. 8,9.

sāṃgrahasūtrika	a student of संग्रहसूत्र; the word occurs in the Mahabhasya along with वार्तिकसूत्रिक, and it may therefore mean a student of the stupendous work named the Samgraha of व्याडि which is believed to have consisted of small numerous sutralike assertions, with an exhaustive gloss thereon. See संग्रह.

sāmānādhikaraṇya	standing in apposition; the word is used many times in its literal sense ' having the same substratum.' For instance, in घटं करोति देवदत्तः, the personal ending ति and देवदत्त are said to be समानाधिकरण. The Samanadhikarana words are put in the same case although, the gender and number sometimes differ. See the word समानाधिकरण.

sāmānyābhidhāna	denotation of the genus factor of a word, as contrasted with द्रव्याभिधान denotation of the individual object; confer, compare तद्यदा द्रव्याभिधानं तदा बहुवचने भविष्यति, यदा सामान्याभिधानं तदैकवचनं भविष्यति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2. 58 Vart. 7.

sāyaṇa,sāyaṇācārya	the celebrated Vedic scholar and grammarian of Vijayanagar who flourished in the 14th century and wrote, besides the monumental commentary works on the Vedas, a grammatical work on roots and their forms known by the name माधवीया धातुवृत्ति. As the colophon of the work shows, the Dhatuvrtti was written by Sayanacarya, but published under the name of Madhava, the brother of Sayanacarya: confer, compare इति महामन्त्रिणा मायणसुतेन माधवसहोदरेण सायणाचार्येण विरचितायां माधवीयायां धातुवृत्तौ...Madhaviya Dha tuvrtti at the end; cf also तेन मायणपुत्रेण सायणेन मनीषिणा । व्याख्येया माधवी चेयं धातुवृत्तिर्विरच्यते । Mad. Dhatuvrtti at the beginning.

sārasvata	name of a grammar work which was once very popular on account of its brevity, believed to have been written in the sutra form by an ancient grammarian named Narendra who is said to have composed 700 sutras under the inspiration of Sarasvati.The exposition of these Sutras by a reputed grammarian named Anubhutisvarupacarya who possibly flourished in the thirteenth century A. D., is known by the name सारस्वतप्रक्रिया which has remained as a text book on grammar to the present day in some parts of India. This प्रक्रिया is popularly known as सारस्वतव्याकरण. The technical terms in this grammar are the current popular ones.

sārasvataprakriyā	the popular name given to the gloss by Anubhutisvarupacarya on Narendra's grammar rules. See सारस्वत a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

siddhakāṇḍa	the chapter or portion of Panini's grammar which is valid to the rules inside that portion, as also to the rules enumerated after it. The word is used in connection with the first seven chapters and a quarter of the eighth chapter of Panini's Astadhyayi, as contrasted with the last three guarters called त्रिपादी, the rules in which are not valid to any rule in the preceding portion, called by the name सपासप्ताध्यायी or सपादी as also to any preceding rule in the Tripadi itSelf confer, compare पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् P, VIII.2.1. सिद्धनन्दिन् an ancient Jain sage who is believed to have written an original work on grammar.

siddhāntakaumudī	a critical and scholarly commentary on the Sutras of Panini, in which the several Sutras are arranged topicwise and fully explained with examples and counter examples. The work is exhaustive, yet not voluminous, difficult yet popular, and critical yet lucid. The work is next in importance to the Mahabhasya in the system of Panini, and its study prepares the way for understanding the Mahabhasya. It is prescribed for study in the courses of Vyakarana at every academy and Pathasala and is expected to be committed to memory by students who want to be thorough scholars of Vyakarana.By virtue of its methodical treatment it has thrown into the back-ground all kindred works and glosses or Vrttis on the Sutras of Panini. It is arranged into two halves, the first half dealing with seven topics ( 1 ) संज्ञापरिभाषा, ( 2 ) पञ्त्वसंधि, ( 3 ) षड्लिङ्ग, ( 4 ) स्त्रीप्रत्यय, ( 5 ) कारक, ( 6 ) समास, ( 7 ) तद्धित, and the latter half dealing with five topics, ( 1 ) दशगणी, ( 2 ) द्वादशप्राक्रिया ( 3 ) कृदन्त ( 4 ) वैदिकी and ( 5 ) स्वर. The author भट्टोजीदीक्षित has himself written a scholarly gloss on it called प्रौढमनेरमा on which, his grandson, Hari Diksita has written a learned commentary named लघुशब्दरत्न or simple शब्दरत्न. The Siddhāntakaumudi has got a large number of commentaries on it out of which, the commentaries प्रौढमनेरमा, बालमनोरमा, (by वासुदेवदीक्षित) तत्त्वबोधिनी and लघुशब्देन्दुशेखर are read by almost every true scholar of Vyakarana. Besides these four, there are a dozen or more commentaries some of which can be given below with their names and authors ( I ) सुबेाधिनी by जयकृष्णमौनि, ( 2 ) सुबोधिनी by रामकृष्णभट्ट ( 3 ) वृहृच्छब्देन्दुशेखर by नागेश, ( 4 ) बालमनेारमा by अनन्तपण्डित, ( 5 ) वैयाकरणसिद्धान्तरहृस्य by नीलकण्ठ, ( 6 ) रत्नार्णव, by कृष्णमिश्र ( 7 ) वैयाकरणसिद्धान्तरत्नाकर by रामकृष्ण, ( 8 ) सरला by तारानाथ,(9) सुमनोरमा by तिरुमल्ल,(10)सिद्वान्तकौमुदीव्याख्या by लक्ष्मीनृसिंह, (11 )सिद्धान्तकौमुदीव्याख्या by विश्वेश्वरतीर्थ, (12) रत्नाकर by शिवरामेन्द्रसरस्वती and (13) प्रकाश by तोलापदीक्षित. Although the real name of the work is वैयाकरणसिद्धान्ततकौमुदी, as given by the author, still popularly the work is well known by the name सिद्धान्तकौमुदी. The work has got two abridged forms, the Madhyakaumudi and the Laghukaumudi both written by Varadaraja, the pupil of Bhattoji Diksita.

sīradeva	a prominent grammarian of the Eastern part of India who lived in the twelfth century A. D. He was a very sound scholar of Panini's grammar who wrote a few glosses on prominent works in the system. His Paribhasavrtti is a masterly independent treatise among the recognised works on the Paribhasas in which he has quoted very profusely from the works of his predecessors, such as the Kasika, Nyasa, Anunyasa and others. The reputed scholar Maitreya Raksita is more often guoted than others.

sūtrapāṭha	the text of Panini's Sutras handed down by oral tradition from the preceptor to the pupil. Although it is said that the actual text of Panini was modified from time to time, still it can be said with certainty that it was fixed at the time of the Bhasyakara who has noted a few different readings only. The Sutra text approved by the Bhasyakara was followed by the authors of the Kasika excepting in a few cases. It is customary with learned Pandits and grammarians to say that the recital of the Sutras of Panini was originally a continuous one in the form of a Samhitatext and it was later on, that it was split up into the different Sutras, which explains according to them the variation in the number of Sutras which is due to the different ways of splitting the Sutrapatha.

sparśa	a contact consonant: a term used in connection with the consonants of the five classes, verily because the karana or the tip of the tongue touches the place of utterance in the mouth in their pronunciation; confer, compare कादयो भावसानाः स्पर्शाः S.K. Samjnaprakarana on P. VIII. 2.1; confer, compare also अाद्या: स्पर्शाः पञ्च ते पञ्चवर्गाः R.Pr. I.78: confer, compare also T.Pr.I.7.

sphoṭana(1)	manifestation of the sense of a word by the external sound or dhvani; the same as sphota; (2) separate or distinct pronunciation of a consonant in a way by breaking it from the cor.junct consonants; confer, compare स्फोटनं नाम पिण्डीभूतस्य संयोगस्य पृथगुश्चरणम् स दोषो वा न वा \| V. Pr.IV.165.

svara(l)	vowel, as contrasted with a consonant which never stands by itself independently. The word स्वर is defined generally :as स्वयं राजन्ते ते स्वराः ( Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on pan. The word स्वर is always used in the sense of a vowel in the Pratisakhya works; Panini however has got the word अच् (short term or Pratyahara formed of अ in 'अइउण्' and च् at the end of एऔच् Mahesvara sutra 4 ) always used for vowels, the term स्वर being relegated by him to denote accents which are also termed स्वर in the ancient Pratisakhyas and grammars. The number of vowels, although shown differently in diferent ancient works, is the same, viz. five simple vowels अ,इ,उ, ऋ, लृ, and four diphthongs ए, ऐ, ओ, and अौ. These nine, by the addition of the long varieties of the first four such as आ, ई, ऊ, and ऋ, are increased to thirteen and further to twentytwo by adding the pluta forms, there being no long variety for लृ and short on for the diphthongs. All these twentytwo varieties have further subdivisions, made on the criterion of each of them being further characterized by the properties उदात्त, अनुदIत्त and स्वरित and निरनुनासिक and सानुनासिक. (2) The word स्वर also means accent, a property possessed exclusively by vowels and not by consonants, as they are entirely dependent on vowels and can at the most be said to possess the same accent as the vowel with which they are uttered together. The accents are mentioned to be three; the acute ( उदात्त ), the grave अनुदात्त and the circumflex (स्वरित) defined respectively as उच्चैरुदात्तः, नीचैरनुदात्तः and समाहारः स्वरितः by Panini (P. I. 2.29, 30,3l). The point whether समाहार means a combination or coming together one after another of the two, or a commixture or blending of the two is critically discussed in the Mahabhasya. (vide Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2.31). There are however two kinds of svarita mentioned by Panini and found actually in use : (a) the independent स्वरित as possessed by the word स्वर् (from which possibly the word स्वरित was formed) and a few other words as also many times by the resultant vowel out of two vowels ( उदात्त and अनुदात्त ) combined, and (b) the enclitic or secondary svarita by which name, one or more grave vowels occurring after the udatta, in a chain, are called cf P. VIII. 2.4 VIII. 2.6 and VIII 4.66 and 67. The topic of accents is fully discussed by the authors of the Pratisakhyas as also by Panini. For details, see Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III. 1.19; T.Pr. 38-47 Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 108 to 132, II. I.65 Atharvaveda Prātiśākhya. Adhyaya l padas 1, 2, 3 and Rk. Tantra 51-66; see also Kaiyata on P. I. 2.29; (3) The word स्वर is used also in the sense of a musical tone. This meaning arose out of the second meaning ' accent ' which itself arose from the first viz. 'vowel', and it is fully discussed in works explanatory of the chanting of Samas. Patanjali has given Seven subdivisions of accents which may be at the origin of the seven musical notes. See सप्तस्वर a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

svaritakaraṇa	marking or characterizing by.a svarita accent, as is supposed to have been done by Panini when he wrote down his sutras of grammar as also the Dhatupatha, the Ganapatha and other subsidiary appendixes. Although the rules of the Astadhyayi are not recited at present with the proper accents possessed by the various vowels as given by the Sutrakara, still, by convention and traditional explanation, certain words are to be believed as possessed of certain accents. In the Dhatupatha, by oral tradition the accents of the several roots are known by the phrases अथ स्वरितेतः, अथाद्युदाताः, अथान्तेादात्ताः, अथानुदात्तेत: put therein at different places. In the sutras, a major purpose is served by the circumflex accent with which such words, as are to continue to the next or next few or next many rules, have been markedition As the oral tradition, according to which the Sutras are recited at present, has preserevd no accents, it is only the authoritative word, described as 'pratijna' of the ancient grammarians, which now is available for knowing the svarita. The same holds good in the case of nasalization ( अानुनासिक्य ) which is used as a factor for determining the indicatory nature of vowels as stated by the rule उपदेशेजनुनासिक इत्; confer, compare प्रतिज्ञानुनासिक्याः पाणिनीयाः S. K. on P. I.3.2.

svaritapratijñā	the conventional dictum that a particular rule or part of a rule, is marked with the accent स्वरित which enables the grammarians to decide that that rule or that part of a rule is to occur in each of the subsequent Sutras, the limit of continuation being ascertained from convention. It is possible that Panini in his original recital of the Astadhyayi recited the words in the rules with the necessary accents; probably he recited every word, which was not to proceed further, with one acute or with one circumflex vowel, while, the words which were to proceed to the next rule or rules, were marked with an actual circumflex accent ( स्वरित ), or with a neutralization of the acute and the grave accents (स्वरितत्व), that is, probably without accents or by एकश्रुति or by प्रचय; cf स्वरितेनाधिकार: P. I.3.II and the Mahabhasya thereon.

svārthika	prescribed (after a base) in the sense of itself; id est, that is in the sense of the base. The word is used in connection with a large number of taddhita affix. affixes which are prescribed without any special sense attached to them; vide P. V.3.36 to P. V. 4.67. The Samasanta affixes prescribed from P.V.4.68 onwards can also be called स्वार्थिक;confer, compareस्वार्थिकाश्च प्रकृतितो लिङ्गवचनान्यनुवर्तन्ते \| M.Bh. on P. V. 4. 14, 27. See the word स्वार्थ.

ha(1)	representation of the consonant हू with अ added for facility of pronunciation; (2) a technical term for the internal effort between विवृत and संवृत, which causes घोष in the consonants; confer, compare संवृतविवृतयोर्मध्ये मध्यमप्रक्रारे यः शब्दः क्रियते स हकारसंज्ञो भवति। संज्ञायाः प्रयेाजनं ' हकारो हचतुर्थेषु ' इति ( तै. प्रा.श ९)Tribhasyaratna on T.Pr. II.6; (3) name of an external effort causing घोष: confer, compare सांप्रतिके प्रकृतिस्थे कण्ठे सति हृकारो नाम बाह्यः प्रयत्नः क्रियते \| तेन च व्यञ्जनेषु घोषो जायते। Vaidikabharana on T.Pr. II.6; (4) name of a kind of external effort of the type of अनुप्रदान found in the utterance of the consonant ( ह् ) and the fourth class-consonants; confer, compare हकारौ हृचतुर्थेषु T.Pr.II.9.

hareidīkṣita	a reputed grammarian of the Siddhantakaumudi school of Panini who lived in the end of the seventeenth century. He was the grandson of Bhattoji Diksita and the preceptor of Nagesabhtta. His commentary named लधुशब्दरत्न, but popularly called शब्दरत्न on Bhattoji Diksita's Praudhamanorama, is widely studied by pupils along with the Praudhamanorama in the Vyakaranapathasalas. There is a work existing in a manuscript form but recentlv taken for printing, mamed 'Brhatsabdaratna ' which has been written by Haridiksita, although some scholars beiieve that it was written by Nagesa who ascribed it to his preceptor. For details see लधुशब्दरत्न.

hemacandra	a Jain sage and scholar of remarkable erudition in the religious works of the Jainas as also in several Shastras. He was a resident of Dhandhuka in Gujarat, who, like Sankarācārya took संन्यासदीक्षा at a very early age and wrote a very large number of original books and commentaries, the total number of which may well nigh exceed fifty, during his long life of eighty-four years ( 1088 to ll 2 ). He stayed at AnhilavalaPattana in the North Gujarat and was patronised with extreme reverence by King Kumarapala who in fact, became his devoted pupil. Besides the well-known works on the various Shastras like Kavyanusasana, Abhidhanacintamani, Desinamamla, Yogasastra, Dvyasrayakavya, Trisastisalakapurusacarita and others which are well-known, he wrote a big work on grammar called सिद्धहेमचन्द्र by him,but popularly known by the name हेमव्याकरण or हैमशब्दानुशासन The , work consists of eight books or Adhyayas, out of which the eighth book is devoted to prakrit Grammar, and can be styled as a Grammar of all the Prakrit dialects. The Sanskrit Grammar of seven chapters is based practically upon Panini's Astadhyayi, the rules or sutras referring to Vedic words or Vedic affixes or accents being entirely omittedThe wording of the Sutras is much similar to that of Panini; at some places it is even identical. The order of the treatment of the subjects in the सिद्धहैम. शब्दानुशासनमृत्र is not, however, similar to that obtaining in the Astadhyayi of Panini. It is somewhat topicwise as in the Katantra Vyakarana. The first Adhyaya and a quarter of the second are devoted to Samjna, Paribhasa and declension; the second pada of the second Adhyaya is devoted to karaka, while the third pada of it is devoted to cerebralization and the fourth to the Stripratyayas.The first two Padas of the third Adhyaya are devoted to Samasas or compound words, while the last two Padas of the third Adhyaya and the fourth Adhyaya are devoted to conjugation The fifth Adhyaya is devoted to verbal derivatives or krdanta, while the sixth and the seventh Adhyayas are devoted to formations of nouns from nouns, or taddhita words. On this Sabda nusasana, which is just like Panini's Astadhyayi, the eighth adhyaya of Hemacandra being devoted to the grammar of the Arsa language similar to Vedic grammar of Panini, Hemacandra has himself written two glosses which are named लधुवृति and वृहृदवृत्ति and the famous commentary known as the Brhannyasa. Besides these works viz the हैमशब्दानुशासन, the two Vrttis on it and the Brhannyasa, he has given an appendix viz the Lingnusasana. The Grammar of Hemacandra, in short, introduced a new system of grammar different from, yet similar to, that of Panini, which by his followers was made completely similar to the Paniniya system by writing works similar to the Siddhantakaumudi, the Dhatuvrtti, the Manorama and the Paribhasendusekhara. हेमहंसगणि a grammarian belonging to the school of Hemacandra, who lived in the fifteenth century and wrote a work on Paribhasas named न्यायसंग्रह, on which he himself wrote a commentary called न्यायार्थमञ्जूषा and another one called by the name न्यास.

haimakaumudī	an exhaustive commentary on the Sabdanusasana of Hemacandra written by a Jain grammarian Meghavijaya in the seventeenth century which is similar to the Siddhāntakaumudi of Bhattoji Diksita,

haimabṛhadavṛtti	a gloss written on the Haima Sabdanusasana sutrapatha by Hemacandra himselfeminine. See हेमचन्द्र a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

haimabṛhannyāsa	an extensive critical commentary written by Hemacandra on his own work, Haima Sabdanusasana. See हेमचन्द्र.

hemalaghuprakriyāvṛtti	a topicwise work based on Hemacandra's Sabdanu-sasana written by Vinayavijaya, a Jain scholar of grammar.

haimalaghuvṛtti	a short gloss on the Sabdanusasana, written by Hemacandra himselfeminine. See हेमचन्द्र a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..

Vedabase Search

Results for nu4478 results


nu	after all	SB 11.22.4

nu	after that	SB 10.10.32

nu	as a matter of fact	SB 2.7.7

nu	at all	SB 10.49.28

		SB 10.52.20

		SB 10.72.26

		SB 10.86.33

		SB 10.87.34

nu	but	CC Madhya 7.73

		SB 1.18.31

		SB 2.7.40

		SB 4.21.10

nu	certainly	CC Antya 19.35

		CC Madhya 16.186

		CC Madhya 18.125

		CC Madhya 2.65

		CC Madhya 2.74

		CC Madhya 24.21

		CC Madhya 6.109

		SB 10.27.5

		SB 11.10.20

		SB 2.2.17

		SB 3.16.25

		SB 4.19.34

		SB 4.20.30

nu	else	SB 3.2.7

nu	however	SB 4.1.28

nu	I wonder	SB 10.47.13

nu	indeed	SB 10.1.58

		SB 10.12.15

		SB 10.23.27

		SB 10.39.29

		SB 10.39.30

		SB 10.42.24

		SB 10.45.47

		SB 10.55.31

		SB 10.57.12-13

		SB 10.6.34

		SB 10.65.11-12

		SB 10.65.13

		SB 10.69.20-22

		SB 10.80.2

		SB 10.87.24

		SB 10.88.38-39

		SB 10.89.30-31

		SB 10.90.19

		SB 10.90.24

		SB 11.1.6-7

		SB 11.10.17

		SB 11.2.2

		SB 11.23.25

		SB 11.26.15

		SB 11.28.25

		SB 11.29.3

		SB 11.29.37

		SB 11.29.5

		SB 12.10.33

		SB 3.19.27

		SB 3.20.6

		SB 3.31.17

		SB 3.31.37

		SB 4.28.21

		SB 5.1.17

		SB 5.11.2

		SB 5.6.14

		SB 5.6.15

		SB 5.6.5

		SB 6.10.5

		SB 6.14.41

		SB 6.14.54

		SB 6.17.20

		SB 6.18.24

		SB 6.3.19

		SB 6.7.35

		SB 6.7.36

		SB 6.9.36

		SB 7.13.18

		SB 7.5.36

		SB 7.6.10

		SB 7.8.24

		SB 7.8.49

		SB 7.9.16

		SB 7.9.28

		SB 7.9.42

		SB 8.12.39

		SB 8.16.13

		SB 9.10.14

		SB 9.11.6

		SB 9.18.43

		SB 9.5.15

nu	indeed: te	to You

nu	is it not so	SB 10.72.24-25

nu	may be	CC Adi 6.68

		SB 1.18.8

		SB 3.15.49

nu	maybe	SB 10.47.21

nu	of course	BG 2.36

nu	oh, how wonderful it is	NoI 7

nu	or	SB 11.26.19-20

nu	or not	SB 3.8.18

nu	perhaps	SB 10.47.44

nu	rather	SB 10.39.5

nu	then	SB 10.76.30

		SB 3.33.4

		SB 3.33.6

		SB 4.17.31

		SB 4.25.38

		SB 5.1.39

		SB 5.4.6

nu	whether	CC Madhya 2.74

nu	whether	CC Madhya 2.74

nu	whether	CC Madhya 2.74

nu	whether	CC Madhya 2.74

nu	whether	CC Madhya 2.74

nu puṃsām	after the Supreme Person	SB 3.6.37

nu puṃsām	after the Supreme Person	SB 3.6.37

nudam	destruction	SB 11.17.41

numaḥ	I offer my respectful obeisances	CC Adi 12.3

numaḥ	I offer my respects	CC Adi 11.4

nunna	agitated	SB 10.21.12

nunnāḥ	impelled	SB 10.20.24

nunnāḥ	propelled	SB 10.25.9

nutā	vibrated	SB 10.82.29-30

nutaḥ	being praised	SB 3.23.39

nutaḥ	being worshiped	SB 4.20.32

nutaḥ	worshiped	SB 9.10.44

nutam	which are bowed down to	SB 11.5.33

nutibhiḥ	and prayers	SB 10.16.27

nuttaye	for the dispelling	SB 10.30.29

nuttaye	to dispel	SB 10.60.19

		SB 10.89.19

ā-manujāt	extending to the human beings	SB 10.87.26

ā-jānu-lambita-bhuja	arms that reach the knees	CC Adi 3.44

vastra-ābharaṇa-dhenubhiḥ	with clothing, ornaments and many cows	SB 8.16.53

manuṣya abhimānī	presents Himself as an ordinary human being	CC Antya 5.142

anusava-abhinavam	constantly new	SB 10.44.14

anusava-abhinavam	constantly new	CC Adi 4.156

anusava-abhinavam	constantly new	CC Madhya 21.112

srak-abhīṣṭa-dhenubhiḥ	by offering flower garlands and very desirable cows	SB 10.7.5

abhyanujñātaḥ	being permitted	SB 1.10.8

abhyanujñātaḥ	being permitted	SB 1.12.36

abhyanujñātaḥ	being permitted	SB 6.18.77

abhyanujñātaḥ	given permission to leave	SB 10.16.65-67

abhyanujñātaḥ	given leave	SB 10.37.24

abhyanujñātaḥ	given leave	SB 10.79.9

abhyanunādayan	resounding	BG 1.19

ācārya-anugrahāt	by the mercy of the spiritual master	SB 9.1.40

ācinute	performs	SB 4.29.78

diti-ja-danu-ja-ādayaḥ	the demoniac sons of Diti, and the Dānavas, another type of demon	SB 6.9.40

manuja-ādayaḥ	the human beings and so on	SB 6.14.3

manu-ādayaḥ	the Manus and others	SB 8.14.1

manu-ādayaḥ	the Manus and others	SB 8.14.3

sāmba-pradyumna-cāru-bhānu-gada-ādayaḥ	Sāmba, Pradyumna, Cāru, Bhānu, Gada and others	SB 10.64.1

adharā-hanuvat	resembling the lower lips	SB 10.12.20

adhenum	a cow that gives no milk	SB 11.11.18

anubhava-adhvani	to the path of perception	CC Madhya 23.95-98

sunanda-nanda-ādi-anugaiḥ	by associates like Sunanda and Nanda	SB 4.7.25

sunanda-ādi-anugaiḥ	by His followers, like Sunanda	SB 8.22.15

manu-ādibhiḥ	as Manus	SB 3.11.27

manuṣya-ādīn	and other living entities, headed by the human beings	SB 6.4.19

adri-sānu	upon the peaks of the hills	SB 10.21.10

anupatan agāt	going up	SB 3.11.5

aghṛṣṭa-jānubhiḥ	without the help of crawling on Their knees	SB 10.8.26

anuga-agraṇīḥ	one of the principal associates	SB 4.2.20

anu-aham	every day	SB 3.17.20

anu-aham	day after day	SB 4.15.18

anu-aham	every day	SB 10.13.26

anu-aham	every day	SB 10.20.37

anu-aham	each day	SB 10.22.6

anu-aham	every day	SB 10.87.40

anu-aham	daily	SB 11.17.50

anu-aham	every day	SB 11.27.35

anu-aham	daily	SB 11.27.51

anu-aham	every day	CC Madhya 24.217

anu-aham	daily	MM 21

āinu	arrived	CC Adi 5.199

āinu	we have come	CC Madhya 1.274

āinu	have come	CC Madhya 5.104

āinu	I have come	CC Madhya 10.132

āinu	have come	CC Madhya 10.134

āinu	I came	CC Madhya 16.276

āinu muñi	I came	CC Antya 4.151

mui āinu	have I come	CC Antya 14.37

āinu	have come	CC Antya 16.20

ājānu-lambita	reaching down to the knees	CC Madhya 17.108

tava ājñā-anupālanam	to obey Your order	SB 8.23.17

kūrma-ākāra-anubhāvera	of ecstatic emotion in the form of a tortoise	CC Antya 20.131

manuja-ākṛtim	appearing as a human being	SB 5.19.8

ākūti-sūnuḥ	of the son of Ākūti	SB 2.7.2

ālālita-tanuḥ	whose body is covered	CC Madhya 14.194

amanuta	he thought	SB 4.29.4

āmāra anubhava	perception of Me	CC Madhya 25.118

tvat-caraṇa-ambuja-anusevām	service to the lotus feet of Your Lordship	SB 6.9.39

āmi manuṣya	I am a human being	CC Madhya 12.50

anādi-saṃsāra-anubhavasya	of the perception of the beginningless process of transmigration	SB 5.14.1

ānanda-anubhavaḥ	full of transcendental bliss	SB 5.4.14

ānanda-anubhavaḥ	feeling transcendental bliss	SB 5.5.35

anubhava-ānanda	blissful perception	SB 5.9.9-10

anubhava-ānanda-svarūpaḥ	whose form is blissful and full of knowledge	SB 7.6.20-23

kevala-anubhava-ānanda-svarūpaḥ	Your form is sac-cid-ānanda-vigraha [Bs. 5.1], and whoever perceives You becomes transcendentally blissful	SB 10.3.13

sat-cit-ānanda-tanu	Kṛṣṇa's body is transcendental, full of knowledge, bliss and eternity	CC Madhya 8.136

ananubhūtaḥ	not perceived	SB 4.29.65

ananugrahāḥ	not merciful	SB 4.12.36

ananumatam	not being sanctioned by law	SB 5.9.17

andha-anuga	following a blind man	SB 11.26.3

anulipta-ańgaḥ	with sandalwood pulp smeared all over the body	SB 7.13.41

ańghri-yugmam anukṛṣya	dragging Their legs	SB 10.8.22

āninu	I brought	CC Madhya 15.256

anna-anurūpām	according to the food	CC Antya 1.92

anurāga-anta	up to the end of subecstatic love	CC Madhya 24.33

manu-antara	of the manvantara millennium	SB 5.1.28

manu-antara	lifetimes of Manu	SB 12.8.14

manu-antara	of reigns of the various Manus	SB 12.12.19

manu-antara-avatārāḥ	the particular incarnations of the Supreme Personality of Godhead in each manv-antara	SB 12.12.19

manu-antara	prescribed duties given by the Manus	CC Adi 2.91-92

manu-antara	period of a Manu	CC Adi 3.8

manu-antara	periods of Manu	CC Adi 3.8

manu-antara	period of Manu	CC Adi 3.9

manu-antara-avatāra	the incarnations who appear during the reign of each Manu	CC Madhya 20.246

manu-antara-avatāra	the incarnations who appear during the reign of each Manu	CC Madhya 20.319

manu-antara	changes of Manu	CC Madhya 20.320

manu-antara-avatāra	incarnations who appear during the reign of each Manu	CC Madhya 20.322

manu-antaraḥ	the change of Manus [in one day of Brahmā there are fourteen Manus]	SB 6.1.3

manu-antaram	up to the end of one Manu	SB 4.28.31

manu-antaram	the reign of each Manu	SB 12.7.15

manu-antarāṇi	changes of Manu	SB 8.13.7

yuga-manu-antare	in the ages and millenniums of Manu	CC Adi 5.113

manu-antareṣu	after the dissolution of each and every Manu	SB 3.11.25

manu-antareṣu	in each change of Manu	SB 3.11.27

antya-līlā-gaṇera kari anuvāda	I beg to repeat all the facts of this Antya-līlā	CC Antya 20.102

anu	follow	SB 1.2.25

anu	every day	SB 1.5.26

tam anu	after Him	SB 1.10.13

anu vekṣyati	looking with great attention will enter the fire	SB 1.13.58

anu	after someone, always	SB 2.1.11

anu	pertaining	SB 2.1.15

anu	Anu	SB 2.7.43-45

anu	after	SB 2.7.49

anu	after	SB 2.9.35

anu	subordinate	SB 3.6.28

anu	later	SB 3.7.21

anu	followers	SB 3.11.25

anu	after	SB 3.11.29

anu	such luxurious	SB 3.14.28

anu-aham	every day	SB 3.17.20

anu	afterward	SB 3.22.22

anu	in relationship with	SB 3.25.39-40

anu	according to	SB 3.31.20

anu	along with	SB 3.32.20

anu	following	SB 4.2.24

anu	after	SB 4.6.41

anu	in relationship with	SB 4.9.12

anu	then	SB 4.10.22

anu	then	SB 4.12.20

anu	thereupon	SB 4.12.36

anu	after	SB 4.12.43

anu-aham	day after day	SB 4.15.18

anu	behind	SB 4.17.16

anu	certainly	SB 4.21.44

anu	following	SB 4.22.36

anu	always	SB 4.22.53

anu	constantly	SB 4.23.8

anu	following	SB 4.23.26

anu-dinam	day after day	SB 4.23.39

anu	always	SB 4.24.23

anu	following her	SB 4.25.57-61

anu	following her	SB 4.25.57-61

anu	following her	SB 4.25.57-61

anu	following her	SB 4.25.57-61

anu	following her	SB 4.25.57-61

anu	following her	SB 4.25.57-61

anu	following her	SB 4.25.57-61

anu	following her	SB 4.25.57-61

anu	after	SB 4.28.24

lokān anu	throughout the universe	SB 4.30.11

anu	thereafter	SB 5.1.36

anu	following	SB 5.4.6

anu	following	SB 5.4.10

anu	following	SB 5.6.4

anu	thereafter	SB 5.8.27

anu	being affected by	SB 5.8.29

vaira-anu-bandhāyām	a relationship of enmity with others	SB 5.14.40

darśanāt anu	after seeing	SB 6.2.43

anu	thereafter	SB 6.8.8-10

anu	follow	SB 6.11.17

anu	after	SB 6.16.38

anu	after	SB 6.16.48

anu	after	SB 6.16.48

anu	following	SB 7.9.28

anu	following this principle	SB 7.13.43

anu	after	SB 7.14.18

anu	follow	SB 8.1.15

anu	similarly	SB 8.17.1

mām anu	as my follower or servant	SB 9.18.28

gańgāyām anu	from the mouth of the Ganges to the source	SB 9.20.23

anu	in regular order	SB 9.20.23

tat anu	thereafter	SB 10.3.14

kāla-guṇān anu	according to seasonal changes	SB 10.3.33

guṇa-karma-anu-rūpāṇi	according to His attributes and activities	SB 10.8.15

anu-aham	every day	SB 10.13.26

anu-kṣaṇam	constantly	SB 10.13.35

anu	relative	SB 10.14.52

anu-aham	every day	SB 10.20.37

anu-veṇu-juṣṭam	possessed of flutes	SB 10.21.7

anu	upon hearing	SB 10.21.10

anu	repeatedly	SB 10.21.16

anu-vanam	to each forest	SB 10.21.19

anu-aham	each day	SB 10.22.6

anu-yugam tanūḥ	transcendental bodies according to the different yugas	SB 10.26.16

anu	reciprocally	SB 10.32.16

tasya anu	after that	SB 10.37.15-20

anu	following	SB 10.39.27

anu	then	SB 10.42.11

anu-bandhanāḥ	entangled	SB 10.51.56

anu	following	SB 10.60.36

anu-kālam	all the time	SB 10.64.42

anu	after	SB 10.66.8

anu	following	SB 10.71.15

anu	along	SB 10.78.19-20

anu	along	SB 10.78.19-20

anu	following	SB 10.79.10

anu-bhavam	life after life	SB 10.83.12

anu-yajñam	with each kind of sacrifice	SB 10.84.51

anu-yugam	in one age after another	SB 10.85.20

anu	indeed	SB 10.86.42

yam anu	following whom (Brahmā)	SB 10.87.24

nidhanāt anu	after its annihilation	SB 10.87.37

tat-anu	following that	SB 10.87.38

anu-yugam	in every age	SB 10.87.40

anu-aham	every day	SB 10.87.40

anu-ghāsam	increasingly with each morsel	SB 11.2.42

anu-mṛtyu	always subject to death	SB 11.9.29

anu-vāyunā	by the wind that follows	SB 11.15.21

anu	after	SB 11.17.39

anu-aham	daily	SB 11.17.50

anu-deham	with each change of body	SB 11.17.53

tam anu	consequently	SB 11.22.6

anu	regularly	SB 11.22.38

tat anu	after that	SB 11.22.38

anu	later	SB 11.25.8

anu-aham	every day	SB 11.27.35

anu-aham	daily	SB 11.27.51

anu	consequently	SB 11.29.5

anu	following	SB 11.31.7

anu-gańgam	from Gańgādvārā (Hardwar)	SB 12.1.35

anu	subsequently	SB 12.4.15-19

anu-savanam	at the three sacred junctures of the day	SB 12.6.70

anu yuge yuge	in each age	SB 12.7.14

anu kandukam	after her ball	SB 12.8.26-27

tam anu	following it	SB 12.8.40

anu	following it	SB 12.9.11

anu	following	SB 12.9.34

anu-kīrtitaḥ	is glorified	SB 12.12.25-26

anu-padam	in each and every verse	SB 12.12.66

anu	after	CC Adi 1.55

anu-yugam	according to the age	CC Adi 3.36

anu-yugam	according to the age	CC Madhya 6.101

anu-dina	gradually, day after day	CC Madhya 8.194

anu-yugam	according to the millennium	CC Madhya 20.331

anu	after	CC Madhya 24.135

anu-patham	along the path	CC Madhya 24.177

anu-vanam	to each forest	CC Madhya 24.207

anu-aham	every day	CC Madhya 24.217

anu	after	CC Madhya 25.126

anu-aham	daily	MM 21

anu-dinam	every day	MM 40

anubaddha	firmly	SB 3.16.26

sneha-anubaddha	captivated by affection	SB 5.8.11

putra-sneha-anubaddha-manāḥ	who was obliged by affection for his son	SB 5.9.4

anubaddha	bound	SB 6.9.41

anubaddha	bound up	SB 11.7.61

anubaddhaḥ	are bound	SB 3.21.16

karma-anubaddhaḥ	bound by the results of his past deeds	SB 5.5.9

anubaddhaḥ	bound up	SB 10.40.3

anubaddhāḥ	continuously bound	SB 10.63.28

guṇa-karma-anubaddham	bound by the modes of nature and the reactions of material activities	SB 5.11.8

anubaddhena	being attached	SB 3.22.33

anubadhnīta	one should induce for material benefit	SB 7.13.8

na anubadhyeta	will not become bound	SB 10.47.41

anubadhyeta	should become bound	SB 11.17.54

sneha-anubandha	because of affection	SB 6.14.50-51

vaira-anubandha	bond of hatred	SB 7.1.47

vaira-anubandha-kṛt	determined to continue such enmity	SB 10.2.23

anubandha	of attachment	SB 10.51.54

anubandha	as they are combined together	CC Adi 13.6

sūtra-anubandha	chronological synopsis	CC Adi 16.4

anubandha	connection	CC Madhya 20.130

gṛha-anubandhaḥ	I who am bound by attachment to family life, or worldly life	SB 5.10.20

vaira-anubandhaḥ	one is encumbered by enmity	SB 5.13.13

vaira-anubandhaḥ	having relationships of enmity	SB 5.14.37

vaira-anubandhaḥ	whose intentions are inimical	SB 5.24.2

sa-anubandhaḥ	with friends and assistants	SB 8.15.31

vaira-anubandhaḥ	enmity	SB 8.19.13

anubandhaḥ	which is due to	SB 10.27.4

anubandhaḥ	the attachment	SB 10.47.5

sa-anubandhaḥ	with his relatives	SB 11.7.73

anubandham	of future bondage	BG 18.25

sa-anubandham	together with family members	SB 1.7.48

anubandham	the consequence	SB 5.11.16

vaira-anubandham	the inimical attitude	SB 10.39.8

anubandham	attachment	SB 10.84.1

anubandham	the bondage	SB 11.8.38

sarva-anubandhanaḥ	all kinds of material bondage	SB 6.2.39

anubandhanaḥ	whose bondage	SB 10.61.25

sneha-anubandhanam	tied by affectionate bondage	SB 1.6.6

karma-anubandhanam	which is simply the basis of bondage to material activity	SB 10.23.35

sa-anubandhasya	with that which is related	SB 3.30.3

anubandhe	at the end	BG 18.39

sa-anubandhe	due to becoming entangled	SB 3.5.44

sa-anubandhe	with bodily relationships	SB 3.27.9

sa-anubandhe	together with its relations	SB 11.5.15

sa-anubandhe	along with bodily relations	SB 11.7.16

vaira-anubandhena	by constant enmity	SB 7.1.26

vaira-anubandhena	by constant enmity	SB 7.1.27

vaira-anubandhena	by the bondage of considering the Lord an enemy	SB 7.10.38

vaira-anubandhena	by continuously treating as an enemy	SB 8.22.6-7

anubandhena	with the conception	CC Antya 3.85

anubandhi	related with	CC Antya 1.171

anubandhīni	bound	BG 15.2

anubhajan	continuously engaging in devotional service	SB 4.29.82

anubhajataḥ	for the devotees	SB 4.9.17

anubhajataḥ	to one who constantly worships Him	SB 10.47.59

anubhājitaḥ	constantly worshiped	SB 10.47.41

mat-anubhāṣitam	what was spoken by me	SB 7.7.1

anubhāṣya	having spoken	SB 3.21.33

mahā-anubhāva	of the Supreme Personality of Godhead Śrī Kṛṣṇa	SB 1.5.21

anubhāva	mercy	SB 1.15.17

kṛṣṇa-anubhāva	rapt in thought of Kṛṣṇa	SB 2.4.3-4

anubhava-ātmanaḥ	of the purely conscious	SB 2.9.1

ubhaya-anubhava-svarūpeṇa	by understanding the proper situation of the body and the soul	SB 5.5.30

anubhava-ānanda	blissful perception	SB 5.9.9-10

anubhava	experience	SB 5.19.4

bhagavat-anubhāva-upavarṇanam	which describes the process of God realization	SB 5.19.10

anubhava-ātmani	which is always thought of (beginning from the lotus feet and gradually progressing upward)	SB 6.2.41

mahā-anubhāva	the supremely opulent	SB 6.9.33

tri-loka-manohara-anubhāva	O You who are perceived as the most beautiful within the three worlds	SB 6.9.40

anubhava-ānanda-svarūpaḥ	whose form is blissful and full of knowledge	SB 7.6.20-23

kevala-anubhava-ānanda-svarūpaḥ	Your form is sac-cid-ānanda-vigraha [Bs. 5.1], and whoever perceives You becomes transcendentally blissful	SB 10.3.13

anubhāva	the power	SB 10.16.22

anubhāva-vit	knowing well the omnipotence	SB 10.17.16

anubhāva	of His position	SB 10.56.22

anubhāva	-the influence	SB 10.74.25

ātma-anubhava	by direct perception of the soul	SB 11.7.10

anubhava	experience of revelation	SB 11.9.17-18

mahā-anubhāva	O mighty Lord	SB 11.19.10

anubhava	the experience	SB 11.26.30

anubhāva	with the potency	SB 12.10.42

anubhava	perceive	CC Adi 2.26

anubhāva	realizations in Kṛṣṇa consciousness	CC Adi 3.85

anubhava	experience	CC Adi 4.135

kari anubhava	I can understand	CC Adi 4.241

anubhava	affectionate feelings	CC Adi 4.249

mahat-anubhava	the conception of great souls	CC Adi 6.54

vijñera anubhava	realization by experienced devotees	CC Adi 6.104

anubhava kaila	perceived	CC Madhya 4.78

anubhāva	subecstasy	CC Madhya 19.180

anubhava	perception	CC Madhya 20.164

anubhava haila	there was perception	CC Madhya 21.79

anubhāva	subordinate ecstasy	CC Madhya 23.48

anubhāva	subordinate ecstasy	CC Madhya 23.51

anubhava-adhvani	to the path of perception	CC Madhya 23.95-98

āmāra anubhava	perception of Me	CC Madhya 25.118

anubhava	experience	CC Antya 16.108-109

anubhāva	the ecstatic symptom	CC Antya 17.70

anubhava	consciousness	NBS 54

anubhāvaḥ	experience	SB 1.17.45

mahā-anubhāvāḥ	great minds	SB 1.19.8

anubhāvaḥ	perception	SB 2.9.22

mahā-anubhāvaḥ	expanded influence	SB 3.14.48

mahā-anubhāvaḥ	the great soul	SB 4.16.27

anubhāvaḥ	very great, powerful	SB 4.23.30

anubhāvaḥ	in such an attitude	SB 5.1.38

ānanda-anubhavaḥ	full of transcendental bliss	SB 5.4.14

anubhavaḥ	realization of God and the living entity	SB 5.5.24

mahā-anubhāvaḥ	the great personality	SB 5.5.28

ānanda-anubhavaḥ	feeling transcendental bliss	SB 5.5.35

mahā-anubhāvaḥ	a great soul	SB 5.10.1

para-anubhāvaḥ	who was very exalted in spiritual realization	SB 5.13.24

bhagavat-āśrita-āśrita-anubhāvaḥ	the consequence of taking shelter of a devotee who has similarly taken shelter of a spiritual master in the paramparā system (one is sure to get out of the great nescience of the bodily concept of life)	SB 5.13.25

anubhavaḥ	who experiences	SB 5.14.1

brahma-ātma-anubhavaḥ	perception of his own position as the Supreme Spirit	SB 5.15.7

anubhāvaḥ	greatness in discharging devotional service	SB 5.23.1

guṇa-anubhāvaḥ	possessing transcendental qualities and glories	SB 5.25.13

sukha-anubhavaḥ	perception of happiness	SB 6.9.33

anubhāvaḥ	being equipped	SB 6.13.16

anubhāvaḥ	glory	SB 7.5.47

sukha-anubhavaḥ	experiencing the state of spiritual bliss	SB 7.9.32

kṛṣṇa-anubhāvaḥ	the unlimited potency of Lord Kṛṣṇa (by which He can deliver a devotee)	SB 8.4.14

anubhāvaḥ	great activities	SB 8.5.6

mahā-anubhāvāḥ	the exalted brāhmaṇas	SB 8.15.4

mahā-anubhāvaḥ	Bali Mahārāja, who was a great and exalted soul	SB 8.23.1

gīta-anubhāvaḥ	whose glories are described	SB 9.8.27

anubhāvaḥ	a result	SB 10.16.36

anubhāvaḥ	the power	SB 10.27.3

anubhāvaḥ	whose prowess	SB 10.60.39

mahā-anubhāvaḥ	the possessor of great powers of perception	SB 10.77.28

anubhavaḥ	direct perception	SB 11.2.42

anubhavaḥ	perceiving	SB 11.13.35

anubhavaḥ	the experience	SB 11.22.54-55

anubhāvaḥ	the influence	SB 11.26.11

anubhavaḥ	realization	SB 12.4.34

anubhāvaḥ	the power	SB 12.10.30

anubhāvaḥ	His potency	SB 12.12.48

anubhāvaḥ	a result	CC Madhya 8.147

anubhāvaḥ	a result	CC Madhya 9.114

anubhāvāḥ	the signs	CC Madhya 23.18-19

anubhāvaḥ	a result	CC Madhya 24.54

anubhāvaiḥ	whose influence	SB 10.60.10

sva-anubhāvam	self-assimilated (experienced)	SB 1.2.3

anubhāvam	influence	SB 1.5.31

anubhāvam	glories	SB 1.9.19

śruta-anubhāvam	whose glories you have heard	SB 3.32.11

anubhāvam	His power	SB 5.4.1

anubhāvam	character	SB 6.18.17

anubhāvam	the activities	SB 7.10.47

mat-anubhāvam	My superexcellent power	SB 8.22.36

parama-anubhāvam	the inconceivable prowess	SB 9.4.62

para-anubhāvam	because of his pure devotion to the Supreme Lord	SB 9.5.24

anubhāvam	as a result of such influence	SB 9.10.27

anubhāvam	the influence	SB 10.25.24

anubhāvam	the power	SB 10.72.5

anubhāvam	the (display of) power	SB 10.74.1

anubhavam	whose consciousness	SB 10.84.32-33

anubhavam	(in which there is) experience	SB 10.87.16

mahā-anubhāvam	almighty	SB 10.89.54-56

anubhāvam	the influence	SB 12.8.31

mahā-anubhāvam	the wise person	NBS 46

mahā-anubhāvān	great souls	BG 2.5

anubhāvān	the glories	SB 5.25.8

anubhāvānām	of those thinking	SB 6.8.32-33

anubhāvānām	His influence	SB 10.23.51

anubhāvasya	whose influence	SB 5.1.23

anādi-saṃsāra-anubhavasya	of the perception of the beginningless process of transmigration	SB 5.14.1

mahā-anubhāvasya	who was an exalted devotee	SB 5.24.26

sakala-loka-anubhāvasya	who is auspicious for all planetary systems	SB 5.24.30

sva-anubhavāt	by perception of the Supreme Soul	SB 10.14.6

anubhāvataḥ	by the influence of	SB 4.21.47

anubhavataḥ	witnessing	SB 6.9.42

yat-smaraṇa-anubhāvataḥ	simply by meditating on whom	SB 8.21.2-3

anubhāvataḥ	on the strength	SB 12.12.42-43

mat-anubhavataḥ	from realization of My sweetness	CC Adi 1.6

mat-anubhavataḥ	from realization of My sweetness	CC Adi 4.230

anubhavati	the conditioned soul feels	SB 5.14.17

nitya-anubhavāya	to him whose eternal self-realization	SB 5.12.1

mahā-anubhāvāya	the most perfect realized soul, or the Supersoul	SB 6.16.25

mahā-anubhāvāya	the most powerful	SB 6.19.7

mahā-anubhāvāya	whose existence is inconceivable	SB 8.6.8

anubhāvayan	thoroughly meditating upon	SB 11.29.41-44

anubhāvayantaḥ	always thinking of	SB 5.22.17

anubhāvayati	gives realization	NBS 80

anubhāvayet	meditate upon	SB 2.2.13

anubhave	could perceive	CC Madhya 13.67

anubhave	realize	CC Madhya 23.94

sākṣāt-anubhave	directly experienced	CC Antya 16.79

yoga-anubhāvena	by yogic powers	SB 3.23.46

anubhāvena	by worshiping the Supreme Lord	SB 4.7.57

anubhavena	by understanding	SB 4.17.29

dhyāna-anubhāvena	by meditation	SB 5.1.23

anubhāvena	by the prowess	SB 5.1.27

anubhāvena	by consequence	SB 5.8.28

arcana-anubhāvena	because of worshiping	SB 8.4.11-12

tat-anubhāvena	because of performing such great sacrifices	SB 8.15.35

tat-prasańga-anubhāvena	because of associating with King Rantideva (when talking with him about bhakti-yoga)	SB 9.21.18

kṛṣṇa-anubhāvena	because of the mercy of Lord Kṛṣṇa	SB 9.22.34

anubhāvena	and by His influence	SB 10.8.19

anubhāvena	and by His influence	SB 10.26.22

anubhāvena	by the power	SB 10.47.30

mahā-anubhāvena	with the supremely compassionate Lord	SB 10.81.36

ātma-anubhāvena	which is the Lord's own potency	SB 11.9.17-18

anubhāvena	by the potency	SB 11.9.19

anubhāvena	by the potency	SB 11.15.21

ātma-anubhāvena	by your own experience of ecstasy	SB 12.10.16

mahā-anubhāvera	of a great personality	CC Madhya 7.72

anubhāvera bhitara	within the category of subordinate ecstasies	CC Madhya 23.51

anubhāvera udgama	the awakening of a trance and emotion	CC Antya 20.124

kūrma-ākāra-anubhāvera	of ecstatic emotion in the form of a tortoise	CC Antya 20.131

sukha anubhavi'	feeling happiness	CC Madhya 17.67

anubhavi'	realizing	CC Madhya 25.8

anubhavi'	understanding	CC Antya 14.9

anubhaviṣyati	it will see	SB 10.72.7

ātma-jaya-anubhāvita	perceivable by conquering the mind	SB 3.13.39

anubhāvita	being situated in the anubhāva stage of ecstasy	SB 3.14.48

anubhāvitaḥ	when they are properly in line	SB 10.5.28

anubhāvitāḥ	enlightened and authorized	SB 10.63.37

anubhāvitāḥ	manifested	SB 11.16.5

anubhāvitam	made it possible to be powerful	SB 1.15.13

anubhāvitam	effected	SB 10.19.14

anubhāvitavān	caused to perceive	CC Adi 1.50

anubhāvite	who is perceived	SB 3.24.43

duḥkha anubhaviyā	feeling unhappy	CC Antya 6.283

anubhūḥ	experiencing within	SB 11.28.44

anubhuńkṣva	you can enjoy	SB 7.10.11

anubhuńkte	passes through	SB 5.22.14

anubhuńkte	enjoys as is due him	SB 10.49.21

anubhuńkte	experiences	SB 10.54.48

anubhūta	cognizant	SB 2.1.39

nitya-anubhūta	due to being always conscious of His real identity	SB 5.6.19

yathā-anubhūtam	as he experienced	SB 1.13.12

anubhūtam	experienced	SB 4.29.64

anubhūtam	what was perceived	SB 5.1.16

anubhūtam	experienced	SB 10.89.13

anubhūtam	what was experienced	SB 12.10.38

anubhūtam	experienced	SB 12.10.40

ātma-anubhūtau	unto self-realization	SB 7.13.44

anubhūtaye	unto Him whose spiritual potency brings about realization of Him	SB 6.4.23

anubhūtaye	perception	SB 10.16.42-43

anubhūteḥ	of Your experience	SB 10.14.2

anubhūteḥ	whose experience	SB 10.72.6

sva-anubhūti-ātmani	in self-realization	SB 7.13.44

sukha-anubhūti	anyone thinking of Him immediately enjoys transcendental pleasure	SB 10.12.39

sukha-anubhūtiḥ	who is realized by transcendental bliss	SB 6.4.27-28

anubhūtiḥ	the source of practical experience	SB 7.10.49

anubhūtiḥ	for the realization	SB 7.15.76

anubhūtiḥ	awareness	SB 10.84.32-33

mahā-anubhūtiḥ	full of transcendental consciousness	SB 11.28.35

sakala-anubhūtiḥ	aware of everything	SB 11.28.35

anubhūtyā	by realizing	SB 3.21.21

anubhūtya	by internal potency	SB 3.24.33

sva-anubhūtyā	by self-realization	SB 3.33.24-25

anubhūtyā	by perception	SB 6.16.20

anubhūtyā	according to realization	SB 7.15.62

ātma-anubhūtyā	simply by understanding his constitutional position	SB 9.19.25

brahma-sukha-anubhūtyā	with Kṛṣṇa, the source of brahma-sukha (Kṛṣṇa is Parabrahman, and from Him originates His personal effulgence)	SB 10.12.7-11

anubhūtyā	transcendental experience	SB 11.22.31

anubhūtyā	experience	SB 11.28.30

anubhūtyā	who is realized	CC Madhya 8.75

anubhūtyā	who is realized	CC Antya 7.32

anubhūya	after experiencing	SB 3.32.9

anubhūya	experiencing	SB 4.28.27

anubhūya	experiencing	SB 6.5.41

anubhūya	after experiencing	SB 10.11.21

anubhūya	experiencing	SB 12.10.1

anubhūyante	are perceived	SB 7.7.25

anubhūyate	is experienced	SB 6.15.21-23

anubuddhyate	is understood	SB 3.32.31

anubudhyeyam	I may properly understand	SB 11.22.60

anucakāra	imitated	SB 7.4.40

anucakruḥ	they acted out	SB 10.30.14

anucakṣe	I can see	SB 11.7.17

rudra-anucara	by followers of Rudra, Lord Śiva	SB 4.10.5

anucara-mukhyāḥ	the chief among Your many servants	SB 7.8.52

anucara	followers	SB 8.21.13

anucara-saṃyuktā	accompanied by his companions	SB 9.1.33

tava anucara-kińkarau	because of being servants of Your most confidential devotee Nārada Muni	SB 10.10.37

sevaka-anucara	servants of the servants	CC Adi 6.83

caitanyera anucara	a follower of Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu	CC Adi 6.93

anucara	follower	CC Adi 10.24

anucara	follower	CC Adi 10.138

eka anucara	one follower	CC Madhya 16.161

anucarāḥ	constant companions	SB 1.14.32-33

vibudha-anucarāḥ	the associates of the denizens of heaven	SB 3.33.19

anucarāḥ	the followers	SB 4.4.4

anucaraḥ	along with His devotee	SB 4.21.44

anucarāḥ	followers	SB 4.27.15

tat-anucarāḥ	his followers or assistants	SB 5.9.13

anucarāḥ	followers	SB 5.24.8

yama-anucarāḥ	the servants of Yamarāja	SB 5.26.13

anucaraḥ	a servant	SB 7.7.10

anucarāḥ	the associates	SB 8.21.15

anucarāḥ	followers	SB 8.21.23

anucaraḥ	a servant	SB 10.34.25

deva-anucarāḥ	the followers of the demigods	SB 11.4.13

rudra-anucaraiḥ	by the followers of Lord Śiva	SB 4.5.13

anucaraiḥ	by followers	SB 4.30.6

daitya-indra-anucaraiḥ	by the followers of Hiraṇyakaśipu, the King of the Daityas	SB 7.2.16

anucaraiḥ	by their followers	SB 8.11.45

puruṣa-anucaraiḥ	by the associates of the Supreme Person	SB 8.21.18

sa-anucaraiḥ	with their followers	SB 10.2.25

anucaraiḥ	by His companions	SB 10.35.8-11

anucaraiḥ	together with His companions	SB 10.38.8

indra-anucaraiḥ	by the followers of Indra	SB 12.8.30

anucaram	constant companion	SB 3.1.25

sa-anucaram	with followers	SB 3.3.13

anucaram	His companions	SB 10.42.19

anucaram	the follower	SB 10.46.14

kṛṣṇa-anucaram	the servant of Lord Kṛṣṇa (Uddhava)	SB 10.47.1-2

anucaran	traveling	SB 3.4.9

anucaran	traveling around	SB 6.14.14

anucarān	the followers (soldiers and bodyguards)	SB 7.8.31

anucarān	the followers	SB 10.63.10-11

anucaran	wandering	SB 11.9.9

anucaran	serving	CC Madhya 1.206

anucaran	serving	CC Madhya 8.73

anucarāṇi	constant companions	SB 3.14.23

anucarasya	strictly following the instructions	SB 1.5.29

anucarasya	of a companion	SB 10.35.18-19

kṛṣṇa-anucarasya	and the servant of Kṛṣṇa (Uddhava)	SB 10.46.44

anucarat	traveled around	SB 6.5.22

anucaratīm	who follows Him	SB 4.31.22

anucarau	devotees	SB 3.15.35

anucarau	two great devotees or associates	SB 10.10.2-3

anucaret	can appreciate	SB 10.87.14

anucaret	confirm	CC Madhya 15.180

anucarīṇām	of attendant maidservants	SB 5.16.18

anucarita	constantly performed activities	SB 10.47.18

anucaritam	character and activities	SB 2.8.16

anucaritam	and the activities of the incarnation	SB 2.8.17

anucaritam	activities	SB 2.10.5

kila anucaritam	pastimes as a paramahaṃsa, above all regulative varṇāśrama principles	SB 5.6.9

anucaritam	the narration	SB 5.14.46

anucaritam	the narration	SB 5.24.27

anucaritam	characteristics (understood by reading or describing his activities)	SB 7.10.43-44

avatāra-anucaritam	activities performed in His different incarnations	SB 8.23.30

anucaritam	transcendental activities	SB 9.10.3

vaṃśa-anucaritam	the narrations of their activities	SB 12.7.9-10

vaṃśa-anucaritam	histories of the dynasties	SB 12.7.16

anucaritam	the life story	SB 12.12.14-15

vaṃśa-anucaritāni ca	and their dynasties and characteristics	SB 9.1.4

anucchvāsam	sighing	SB 3.31.9

para-anucintām	transcendental thoughts	SB 2.2.7

anucintayā	by constantly thinking about	SB 3.25.26

anucintayā	by thinking of	SB 7.1.28-29

anucintayā	by constant analysis	SB 11.20.23

vāsudeva-anucintayā	with meditation upon Lord Vāsudeva	SB 12.5.9

anucintayan	constantly thinking of	BG 8.8

anucintayan	thinking, feeling and willing	SB 10.1.41

anucintayan	regarding seriously	SB 10.67.19-21

anucintaye	I consider	SB 4.7.2

ānudapadyata	was born	SB 5.15.14-15

anudapāna	without water	SB 5.26.8

anudarśanam	observing	BG 13.8-12

anudarśanam	informing about the ways	SB 6.5.18

anudarśanam	witnessing	SB 11.15.6-7

anudarśanāt	by successive experience	SB 2.2.27

artha-anudarśinā	whose instructions were quite befitting	SB 8.15.32

dāsa-anudāsa-sańga	association with the servant of the servant	CC Madhya 2.83

dāsera anudāsa	most obedient servant of Your servants	CC Madhya 14.18

dāsa-anudāsaḥ	the servant of Your servant	SB 6.11.24

dāsa-anudāsaḥ	the servant of the servant	CC Madhya 13.80

anudāsyam	the service	SB 5.24.25

anudghāṭya	without opening	CC Antya 17.72

anudhāvanti	follow behind	SB 4.11.20

anudhāvantīm	chasing	SB 6.13.12-13

anudhāvataḥ	who was following	SB 8.12.32

anudhāvataḥ	following	SB 8.12.32

anudhāvataḥ	who were rushing toward him	SB 10.68.6

anudhāvatī	running after	SB 9.9.11

anudhyā	remembrance	SB 1.2.15

anudhyāna	by constant remembrance	SB 1.15.29

anudhyāna	always thinking of	SB 5.1.7

anudhyāna	by meditating	SB 5.7.12

anudhyāna	by fixed meditation	SB 10.39.15

anudhyāna	for your meditation	SB 10.47.34

mat-anudhyānam	always meditating on Me	SB 11.11.34-41

anudhyānāt	from always thinking	SB 8.16.12

anudhyānāya	for remembering repeatedly	SB 1.7.25

anudhyānena	by such attachment	SB 5.8.8

anudhyānena	by constant thought	SB 11.28.40

anudhyātaḥ	being always remembered	SB 4.11.12

anudhyātaḥ	being meditated upon	SB 8.24.44

anudhyātam	conceived	SB 11.25.31

anudhyāyan	constantly contemplating	SB 1.12.30

anudhyāyan	or by meditating upon	SB 9.5.27

anudhyāyan	pondering over	SB 10.56.40-42

anudhyāyan	constantly thinking of	SB 11.17.58

anudhyāyatī	meditating	SB 10.53.40-41

anudhyāyet	one should even think of	SB 9.19.20

anudhyāyet	should constantly observe	SB 11.20.22

anudhyāyinaḥ	constantly meditating upon	SB 4.9.52

anudhyeya	to be constantly meditated upon	SB 6.17.13

anudhyeyam	must be meditated upon	SB 4.24.53

anudinam	every day	SB 3.32.17

anudinam	daily	SB 4.17.23

anudinam	every day	SB 4.30.9

anudinam	daily	SB 5.1.29

anudinam	day after day	SB 5.2.22

anudinam	day after day	SB 5.4.1

anudinam	day after day	SB 5.7.7

anudinam	day after day	SB 5.12.13

anudinam	day to day	SB 5.26.10

anudinam	day after day	SB 6.14.31

anudinam	day after day	SB 6.14.36

anudinam	twenty-four hours, day after day	SB 9.18.47

anudinam	day after day	SB 12.2.1

anudinam	every day, or twenty-four hours daily	NoI 7

anudiśam	in terms of direction	SB 3.8.16

anudita-prāyam	almost not praised	SB 1.5.8

anuditāḥ	not mentioned	SB 5.26.37

anudṛśyaḥ	to be perceived	SB 10.64.26

anudṛśyate	is seen	SB 10.68.54

anudruta	chasing	SB 10.35.1

anudruta	melted	SB 10.41.28

anudrutaḥ	chased	SB 3.18.7

anudrutaḥ	was followed	SB 8.2.23-24

anudrutaḥ	swiftly followed	SB 10.33.22

anudrutaḥ	followed	CC Antya 18.25

anudvāsya	without removing from the oven	SB 10.29.5

anudvega-karam	not agitating	BG 17.15

anudveṣṭi	envious	SB 1.18.7

anudvigna-manāḥ	without being agitated in mind	BG 2.56

anudyamaḥ	lack of endeavor	SB 11.25.2-5

anuga-agraṇīḥ	one of the principal associates	SB 4.2.20

anuga	servants	SB 4.28.7

sa-anugā	with her friends	SB 9.18.28

sa-anugā	with her friends	SB 9.18.29

anuga	by His companions	SB 10.14.47

anuga	by His companions	SB 10.35.22-23

sa-anuga	with His servants	SB 10.71.43

andha-anuga	following a blind man	SB 11.26.3

rāga-anuga	of spontaneous attachment	CC Madhya 8.221

anugā	follower	CC Madhya 9.136

rāga-anugā	devotional service following in the wake of spontaneous love	CC Madhya 22.154

anugacchet	can follow	SB 5.6.15

sa-anugāḥ	with the younger brothers	SB 1.9.4

anugāḥ	the followers	SB 2.10.16

patha-anugaḥ	follower of the path	SB 3.3.19

saha-anugaḥ	along with his retinue	SB 3.22.26-27

anugaḥ	suitable	SB 3.31.44

sa-anugāḥ	along with their followers	SB 4.2.4

sa-anugaḥ	followed by his disciples	SB 4.2.33

anugāḥ	followers	SB 4.11.24

sa-anugaḥ	with his associates	SB 4.22.2

anugaḥ	officers	SB 4.22.3

sa-anugaḥ	going along with	SB 4.22.8

vibudha-anugāḥ	the Kinnaras	SB 5.5.21-22

vaśa-anugaḥ	being compelled	SB 6.9.3

deva-anugāḥ	the inhabitants of other planets following the principles of the demigods	SB 6.13.2

anugaḥ	most obedient servant	SB 6.17.34-35

anugāḥ	faithful servants	SB 7.8.55

brahma-kula-anugaḥ	following the directions of the brāhmaṇas	SB 7.11.15

sa-anugaḥ	with his associates	SB 8.4.11-12

anugāḥ	followers	SB 8.5.37

saha-anugāḥ	with their followers	SB 8.11.25

sa-anugāḥ	with their respective followers	SB 8.21.5

tat-anugāḥ	the companions of Sudyumna	SB 9.1.27

sa-anugaḥ	with other assistants	SB 9.11.25

karma-anugaḥ	following the reactions of his own fruitive activities	SB 10.1.39

sa-anugāḥ	with our followers	SB 10.11.27

sa-anugaḥ	together with His companions	SB 10.15.9

anugaḥ	his followers	SB 10.44.33

anugaḥ	his followers (brothers)	SB 10.46.17

sa-anugaḥ	together with his followers	SB 10.47.39

sa-anugaḥ	together with his brothers and other followers	SB 10.48.17

anugaḥ	obeying	SB 10.53.7

sa-anugaḥ	with his followers	SB 10.54.17

anugaḥ	his followers	SB 10.57.12-13

anugaḥ	His followers	SB 10.70.33

anugāḥ	their followers	SB 10.75.25-26

anugaḥ	occurring	SB 11.17.53

anugaḥ	the follower	SB 11.26.3

anugāḥ	followers	CC Madhya 22.6

svarūpa-anugaḥ	following in the footsteps of Svarūpa Dāmodara	CC Antya 6.263

anugaiḥ	by the black bees	SB 2.9.14

sunanda-nanda-ādi-anugaiḥ	by associates like Sunanda and Nanda	SB 4.7.25

saha anugaiḥ	along with their followers	SB 4.19.4

vibudha-anugaiḥ	followed by his associates	SB 4.24.24-25

sunanda-ādi-anugaiḥ	by His followers, like Sunanda	SB 8.22.15

pada-anugaiḥ	by infantry	SB 9.10.35-38

anugaiḥ	by His followers	SB 10.15.41

anugaiḥ	by His companions	SB 10.15.42

anugaiḥ	by his attendants	SB 10.75.34-35

anugaiḥ	who are simply following	SB 11.7.37

saha-anugam	accompanied by great souls	SB 4.24.24-25

sa-anugam	with your associates	SB 8.22.35

anugam	following	SB 10.31.7

anugamana	following in the footsteps	SB 1.16.16

anugamana	following strictly	CC Madhya 22.115

anugāmī	following	NoI 8

anugān	the followers	SB 3.2.29

anugān	his followers	SB 6.10.30

sarva-anugān	all followers of Rāvaṇa	SB 9.10.18

deva-anugānām	the inhabitants of the upper planets like the Gandharvas and Cāraṇas, who follow the demigods	SB 8.8.26

anugarjati	thunders in response	SB 10.35.12-13

dhanada-anugasya	of the follower of the rich Kuvera	SB 2.7.33

sa-anugasya	one of the associates	SB 3.5.21

sa-anugasya	together with His companions	SB 10.23.17

anugata	merged in	SB 3.11.28

anugata	dissolved	SB 3.24.33

anugatā	who followed her husband	SB 4.23.19

anugatā	strictly adherent	SB 4.28.49

anugata	followers	CC Adi 6.88

anugata hañā	following in the footsteps	CC Madhya 9.133

anugata	following	CC Madhya 22.149

anugata	following in the footsteps	CC Antya 7.135

śrīdhara-anugata	following in the footsteps of Śrīdhara Svāmī	CC Antya 7.136

anugataḥ	while following	SB 1.18.24-25

loka-anugataḥ	following the conditioned souls	SB 3.21.16

anugatāḥ	followers	SB 4.20.35-36

anugataḥ	followed as servants	SB 9.11.22

anugataḥ	following	SB 9.18.35

anugataḥ	following the she-goat	SB 9.19.9

rāga-anugataḥ	according to his attachment	SB 10.1.43

anugatāḥ	entered within it	SB 10.3.14

anugataḥ	in pursuit	SB 10.51.8

anugataḥ	joined	SB 11.6.16

anugatām	dying after the husband	SB 4.23.23

anugatam	neglected	SB 5.4.14

pākhaṇḍa-anugatam phalam	the result of accepting an atheistic path	SB 5.26.15

samīra-vega-anugatam	being forced by the movements of the wind	SB 10.1.43

loka-anugatān	the followers of worldly affairs	SB 3.21.17

anugatāni	covering	SB 8.13.36

anugatau	being merged in	SB 3.5.23

anugatau	according to	CC Madhya 25.133

anugate	passing away	SB 1.14.5

avaloka-anugateḥ	from moving only after glancing	SB 5.10.2

kāla-anugatena	in due course of time	SB 3.8.13

anugati	following	CC Madhya 8.204-205

anugati	following	CC Madhya 8.225

kare anugati	follows	CC Madhya 22.153

anugatiḥ	beginning	SB 2.8.13

cyuta-prasūna-anugatiḥ	she was followed by the flowers falling after her	SB 10.9.10

anugatya	approaching	SB 10.35.18-19

gopī-ānugatya	subservience to the gopīs	CC Madhya 8.230

anugau	to His two attendants	SB 3.16.29

anugau	Their companions	SB 10.41.50

duryodhana-vaśa-anugau	subservient to Duryodhana	SB 10.58.30

anugāyadbhiḥ	singing after Him	SB 6.4.35-39

anugāyadbhiḥ	vibrating songs sung by them	SB 10.10.2-3

anugāyantam	singing	SB 6.1.58-60

anugāyat	followed by the singing of	SB 9.6.45-46

anugāyatīḥ	continuously chanting	SB 10.35.26

sa-anugayoḥ	of the two, together with Their companions	SB 10.41.44

anugayoḥ	Their personal associates	SB 10.53.34

anugena	with his followers	SB 10.52.13

anughāsam	morsels	SB 3.16.8

anugīta	described	SB 1.10.24

avatāra-anugītam	the listing of the incarnations of the Supreme Lord	SB 12.12.7

anugīyamānaḥ	His glories being chanted	SB 10.18.1

anugīyamānām	being chanted	SB 5.19.2

anugīyate	are sung	SB 12.12.50

anugraḥ	not ferocious	CC Madhya 8.6

anugraha-iṣitam	to bestow benediction	SB 1.10.27

anugraha-arthāya	for the sake of obliging	SB 1.12.16

prajā-anugraha	doing good to the living being	SB 1.19.19

anugraha-dṛṣṭi	merciful glance	SB 2.7.28

anugraha-bhājanaḥ	object of favor	SB 3.4.14

anugraha	to show His grace	SB 3.17.31

anugraha	to bestow blessings	SB 3.28.17

kṛta-anugraha	manifested by His grace	SB 4.7.24

anugraha	to bestow mercy	SB 4.9.17

anugraha	mercy	SB 4.14.33

anugraha	by kindness	SB 4.20.20

mat-anugraha-arthaḥ	thinking that to achieve My mercy is the aim of life	SB 5.5.15

anugraha-artham	to show His causeless mercy	SB 6.4.33

bhūta-anugraha-kātarāḥ	very much anxious to bestow benedictions upon the fallen conditioned souls	SB 6.5.39

anugraha-artham	to show favor	SB 8.24.15

anugraha-arthāya	for the purpose of giving special mercy	SB 10.10.7

anugraha-īkṣitam	due to the merciful glance	SB 10.15.52

anugraha	of the favoring	SB 10.51.42

anugraha	compassion	SB 10.78.33

anugraha	of bestowing benedictions	SB 10.86.51

anugraha	merciful	CC Adi 7.55

anugraha	mercy	CC Madhya 6.116

anugraha	mercy	CC Madhya 6.122

anugraha	mercy	CC Antya 7.168

anugraha	of the blessing	CC Antya 8.32

anugraha-kātaram	eager to show mercy	CC Antya 10.1

tat-anugrahaḥ	His causeless mercy	SB 2.10.4

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 3.4.12

anugrahaḥ	causeless mercy	SB 3.9.34

anugrahaḥ	causeless mercy	SB 3.9.38

anugrahaḥ	merciful	SB 3.14.36

anugrahaḥ	a favor	SB 3.16.12

anugrahaḥ	favor	SB 3.16.16

anugrahaḥ	favor	SB 3.22.7

anugrahaḥ	giving assistance	SB 3.26.29

anugrahaḥ	the manifester	SB 3.27.16

anugrahaḥ	favor	SB 4.7.13

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 4.21.25

anugrahaḥ	causeless mercy	SB 4.22.42

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 4.24.58

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 4.26.22

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 5.5.24

parihīṇa-bhagavat-anugrahaḥ	being without the favor of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 5.24.26

anugrahaḥ	a favor	SB 6.17.20

anugrahaḥ	favor	SB 6.17.29

anugrahaḥ	whose benediction	SB 7.4.3

mahat-anugrahaḥ	compassion by the Supreme	SB 7.9.42

anugrahaḥ ca	and false ego or the demigods	SB 7.9.48

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 8.22.16

mat-anugrahaḥ	should be considered to have received My special mercy	SB 8.22.26

tvat-anugrahaḥ	Your causeless mercy	SB 8.23.2

anugrahaḥ	favor	SB 9.5.9

anugrahaḥ	compassion	SB 9.24.58

anugrahaḥ ca	and the maintainer	SB 10.2.28

sat-anugrahaḥ	who are always kind and merciful to the devotees	SB 10.2.31

anugrahaḥ kṛtaḥ	this was a great favor done by him to you	SB 10.10.40

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 10.16.34

anugrahaḥ	as mercy	SB 10.16.34

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 10.40.28

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 10.41.48

anugrahaḥ	benefit	SB 10.43.37

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 10.47.27

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 10.51.54

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 10.73.9

anugrahaḥ	the mercy (by which one's senses can act)	SB 10.85.10

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 11.3.48

anugrahaḥ	mercy	SB 12.6.3

anugrahaḥ	mercy	MM 25

anugraham	special benediction	SB 1.6.10

anugraham	kindness	SB 1.11.10

anugraham	doing good to	SB 1.19.23

anugraham	benediction	SB 2.2.12

anugraham	favor	SB 3.14.11

mahat-anugraham	the mercy of the Lord	SB 3.31.15

anugraham	mercy	SB 4.6.49

anugraham	mercy	SB 4.21.36

anugraham	favor	SB 10.16.59

anugraham	mercy	SB 10.24.36

anugraham	benefit	SB 10.27.16

anugraham	mercy	SB 10.28.8

ati-anugraham	an act of extreme kindness	SB 10.38.7

anugraham	mercy	SB 10.88.9

anugrahāṇām	of those who are specifically favored	SB 3.5.51

yat-anugrahaṇe	to receive her favor	SB 3.15.21

anugrahaṇīya-śīlāḥ	trained to get favors	SB 1.19.13

mat-anugrahasya	which has shown mercy to me	SB 10.14.2

anugrahāt	by the favor of	SB 1.1.8

tat-anugrahāt	by his mercy	SB 1.3.44

anugrahāt	by the mercy of	SB 1.6.24

anugrahāt	by the causeless mercy	SB 1.6.31

anugrahāt	mercy of	SB 1.7.44

anugrahāt	by the mercy of	SB 1.14.9

anugrahāt	by the mercy	SB 1.18.1

anugrahāt	by the mercy of	SB 2.8.9

anugrahāt	by the mercy of	SB 2.9.29

anugrahāt	by causeless mercy	SB 2.9.32

anugrahāt	by mercy	SB 3.16.19

tvat-anugrahāt	by Your mercy	SB 3.25.8

bhavat-anugrahāt	by Your grace	SB 3.25.30

anugrahāt	by mercy	SB 4.30.17

anugrahāt	by the mercy or by drinking the breast milk	SB 5.2.21

anugrahāt	by the mercy	SB 5.17.22-23

anugrahāt	the mercy	SB 6.12.11

ācārya-anugrahāt	by the mercy of the spiritual master	SB 9.1.40

mat-anugrahāt	by my special favor	SB 10.10.20-22

anugrahāt	from the mercy	SB 10.10.37

hareḥ anugrahāt	by the mercy of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 10.11.24

anugrahāt	by the mercy	SB 10.16.65-67

anugrahāt	because of the mercy	SB 11.24.11

anugrahāt	by causeless mercy	CC Adi 1.52

anugrahāt	by the mercy	CC Adi 2.1

anugrahāt	by causeless mercy	CC Madhya 25.109

anugrahataḥ	by the mercy of	SB 2.10.12

anugrahataḥ	by the mercy	SB 10.87.17

mat-anugrahāya	just to show me favor	BG 11.1

anugrahāya	due to being compassionate towards them	SB 3.5.3

sat-anugrahāya	for the sake of the devotees	SB 3.9.2

sat-anugrahāya	to show Your causeless mercy	SB 3.9.11

anugrahāya	for showing mercy	SB 3.20.25

anugrahāya	for bestowing mercy	SB 3.21.20

anugrahāya	just to show mercy	SB 4.22.16

anugrahāya	for the matter of showing you mercy	SB 4.24.27

tat-anugrahāya	to show His mercy	SB 5.17.14

anugrahāya	to show favor	SB 5.19.9

anugrahāya	just to show favor	SB 6.15.18-19

anugrahāya	for the special favor	SB 7.8.56

anugrahāya	to show mercy	SB 8.24.27

anugrahāya	just to show mercy	SB 9.24.61

anugrahāya	for the purpose of showing mercy	SB 10.14.20

anugrahāya	to show mercy	SB 10.33.36

anugrahāya	for the benediction	SB 10.34.14

anugrahāya	for showing mercy	SB 10.86.24

anugrahāya	for showing mercy	SB 12.8.32

anugrahāya	to show favor	CC Adi 3.111

anugrahāya	for showing favor	CC Adi 4.34

anugraheṇa	by causeless mercy	SB 1.5.26

anugraheṇa	by the mercy	SB 3.9.21

tvat-para-anugraheṇa	by compassion like Yours	SB 4.7.29

anugraheṇa	by the mercy of	SB 4.8.13

anugraheṇa	by the mercy of	SB 4.22.46

bhagavat-anugraheṇa	by the special mercy of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 5.9.3

yat-anugraheṇa	by the mercy of that elephant	SB 8.2.22

anugraheṇa	by the mercy	SB 10.80.43

anugrahītaḥ	shown mercy	SB 10.52.1

anugrāhya	being very merciful	SB 9.8.27

anugṛhāṇa	please show kindness	SB 4.3.14

anugṛhāṇa	favor	SB 4.7.38

anugṛhāṇa	be merciful	SB 4.25.30

anugṛhāṇa	please bless me	SB 10.69.18

anugṛhāṇa	please show mercy	SB 10.84.26

icchā-anugṛhīta-rūpam	accepting form according to desire	SB 3.14.50

haya anugṛhīta	was given the mercy	CC Antya 6.161

saṃyoga-anugṛhītāḥ	supported by the combined efforts	SB 5.23.3

anugṛhītaḥ	very much favored	SB 9.5.17

anugṛhītaḥ	very much favored	SB 9.5.20

anugṛhītaḥ	favored	SB 10.14.29

anugṛhītaḥ	shown mercy	SB 10.27.13

anugṛhītaḥ	shown great mercy	SB 12.6.2

anugṛhītaḥ	favored	CC Madhya 6.84

anugṛhītaḥ	favored	CC Madhya 11.104

anugṛhītaiḥ	receiving benedictions	SB 8.6.19

anugṛhītam	being favored by	SB 4.24.59

anugṛhītam	being blessed	SB 7.7.16

anugṛhītam	being favored	SB 8.24.38

anugṛhītānām	being favored	SB 4.6.52

anugṛhītānām	which have received the mercy	SB 12.7.12

anugṛhītvā	sufficiently benedicting	SB 4.20.34

anugṛhṇadbhiḥ	showing their favor (to me)	SB 6.13.5

anugṛhṇāmi	I show My mercy	SB 8.22.24

anugṛhṇāmi	favor	SB 10.88.8

anugṛhṇantaḥ	accepted	SB 9.16.35

anugṛhṇanti	do any favor	SB 3.14.43

anugṛhṇatā	by the merciful Lord	SB 3.2.33

sādhu anugṛhṇatā	showing mercy in goodness	SB 3.5.18

anugṛhṇatā	acting to show mercy to you	SB 10.27.15

anugṛhṇate	give blessings	SB 4.12.51

anugṛhṇāti	favors by causeless mercy	SB 4.29.46

anugṛhṇāti	shows special favor	CC Madhya 11.118

anugṛhṇātu	may please show mercy	SB 10.53.38

anugṛhṇīṣva	please show mercy	SB 10.16.52

anugṛhṇītām	should please show mercy	SB 10.64.19-20

anugṛhya	just to show them favor	SB 7.10.57

anugṛhya	showing favor	SB 10.83.1

anugṛhyeta	may be favored	SB 3.16.19

anugṛṇan	constantly describing	SB 7.9.18

tat-kāla-anuguṇaḥ	according to the particular time	SB 7.1.8

anuguṇam	as far as possible	SB 8.17.18

anuguṇam	suitable	SB 10.50.5-6

anuguṇān	conforming to the instructions for liberation	SB 5.6.13

anuguṇita	extending through	SB 10.74.46

anuguṇitam	accompanied by	SB 3.28.31

anuḥ	Anu, another son	SB 9.18.41

anuḥ	Anu	SB 9.24.5

anuḥ	Anu	SB 9.24.20

anuhrādam	Anuhlāda	SB 6.18.12-13

anuhrādasya	of Anuhlāda	SB 6.18.16

anuja	the younger brothers	SB 1.10.3

anuja	younger brothers	SB 3.1.14

vasudeva-anuja	of the younger brothers of Vasudeva	SB 9.24.25

anujā	younger sister	SB 10.1.45

yama-anujā	the River Yamunā, who is considered the younger sister of Yamarāja	SB 10.3.50

anujā	the younger sister	SB 10.4.9

anuja	his brothers	SB 10.74.27-28

anuja	younger brother	CC Adi 10.33

he rāma-anuja	O younger brother of Lord Balarāma	MM 44

harīndra-anujābhyām	accompanied by the king of the monkeys, Hanumān, and His younger brother Lakṣmaṇa	SB 9.10.4

anujagāma	followed	SB 1.13.30

anujagrāha	showed His favor	SB 5.24.22

anujagrāha	showed mercy	CC Madhya 19.120

saha-anujaḥ	along with his younger brothers	SB 1.13.3-4

sa-anujaḥ	along with younger brothers	SB 1.13.38

anujaḥ	younger brother	SB 1.14.7

sa-anujaḥ	with his younger brothers	SB 1.14.26

anujaḥ	younger brother	SB 1.14.28-29

anujaḥ	younger brother	SB 1.15.9

sa-dayitā-anujaḥ	along with His wife and younger brother	SB 2.7.23

anujaḥ	younger brothers	SB 3.1.11

anujaḥ	younger brother	SB 3.17.20

anujaḥ	the younger	SB 7.1.40

sa-anujaḥ	with Your younger brother	SB 10.11.16

bakī-baka-anujaḥ	the younger brother of Pūtanā and Bakāsura	SB 10.12.14

anujaḥ	the younger brother	SB 10.30.6

rāma-anujaḥ	Kṛṣṇa, the younger brother of Balarāma	SB 10.30.12

sa-anujaḥ	with His younger brother (Lord Kṛṣṇa)	SB 10.38.37-38

anujāḥ	younger	SB 10.44.40

anujaḥ	Your younger brother	SB 10.65.3

anujaḥ	younger brothers	SB 10.76.14-15

anujaḥ	(Dhṛtarāṣṭra's) younger brother (Vidura)	SB 10.84.57-58

rāma-anujaḥ	Lord Balarāma's younger brother (Kṛṣṇa)	CC Antya 15.51

saha-anujaiḥ	with his younger brothers	SB 1.10.1

anujaiḥ	assisted by his younger brothers	SB 3.3.18

anujajñe	took birth	SB 4.15.6

anujalpati	He chatters in imitation	SB 10.15.10-12

saha-anujam	with his younger brothers	SB 1.8.3

anujam	younger brother	SB 1.14.5

anujam	Arjuna	SB 1.14.24

aruṇa-anujam	the younger brother of Aruṇa (Garuḍa, on Lord Kṛṣṇa's flag)	SB 10.77.11

anujam	his younger brother, Vidūratha	SB 10.78.13-15

anujana	to the devotee	SB 5.1.41

anujānatām	of those who supposedly know	SB 10.87.30

anujānatām	of those who follow this philosophical calculation	CC Madhya 19.143

anujānīhi	please let me know	SB 3.13.14

anujānīhi	may we have permission	SB 10.10.37

anujānīhi	please give leave	SB 10.14.39

anujānīhi	please order	SB 10.34.16

anujānīhi	please give leave	SB 10.64.27-28

anujānīhi	please give leave	SB 10.69.39

anujānīhi	please give your permission	SB 12.6.6

anujanma	spiritual birth, or repeated incarnations	SB 3.13.37

anujapati	chants	SB 5.18.29

anujasya	of His younger brother	SB 10.16.16

vidureṇa anujena	by his younger brother Vidura	SB 1.13.29

kāma-anujena	by the younger brother of lust (anger)	SB 3.15.31

anujīvinaḥ	living at the mercy of	SB 1.8.37

anujīvinaḥ	always living	SB 1.14.38

anujīvinaḥ	employees	SB 10.41.38

anujīvinaḥ	his servants	SB 10.87.12-13

anujīviṣu	to the followers	SB 4.27.10

tam anujñāpya	taking permission from Vasudeva	SB 10.5.32

anujñāpya	giving permission	SB 10.14.42

anujñāpya	taking permission	SB 10.34.18

anujñāpya	taking permission	SB 10.47.64

anujñāpya	taking permission	SB 10.71.12

anujñāpya	taking leave of	SB 10.71.13

anujñāpya	requesting leave	SB 10.74.49

anujñāpya	taking permission	SB 10.75.25-26

anujñāpya	taking leave	SB 10.77.6-7

anujñāpya	taking permission to leave	SB 10.84.27

anujñāpya	taking leave	SB 10.84.55-56

anujñāpya	giving permission	SB 12.6.8

anujñātāḥ	being permitted	SB 3.4.1

anujñātaḥ	being permitted to leave	SB 3.22.26-27

anujñātaḥ	being ordered	SB 5.4.8

anujñātaḥ	ordered (by the spiritual master)	SB 7.12.5

anujñātaḥ	being asked	SB 7.12.13-14

anujñātaḥ	being permitted	SB 8.16.44-45

tat-anujñātaḥ	being permitted by Him (Lord Vāmana)	SB 8.23.11-12

anujñātaḥ	by their permission	SB 9.4.33-35

tat-anujñātaḥ	being permitted by the King to beget a son	SB 9.9.38

anujñātaḥ	taking permission	SB 10.4.28

anujñātaḥ	given permission	SB 10.27.28

anujñātaḥ	given leave	SB 10.64.30

anujñātaḥ	given permission to leave	SB 10.79.16-17

anujñātāḥ	given permission	SB 10.82.11

mat-anujñātaḥ	given permission by Me	SB 11.30.39

guru-anujñātaḥ	invited by his spiritual master	SB 12.8.7-11

anujñātam	that which is permitted	SB 11.17.28

anujñātau	given leave	SB 10.45.49

anujñātuḥ	of the supporter	SB 4.21.26

anujñayā	taking permission	SB 4.13.29

anujñayā	by the order	SB 6.14.24

anujñayā	with the permission	SB 6.19.2-3

tat-anujñayā	with their permission	SB 6.19.23

anujñāya	accepting	SB 7.5.51

anujuṣan	gratifying	SB 11.26.6

anukālam	eternally	SB 8.3.8-9

anukālam	forever	SB 10.2.21

samaveta-anukalpena	by substituting the direct meaning of such incidents	SB 5.13.26

anukampā-artham	to show special mercy	BG 10.11

anukampā	by compassion	SB 6.9.41

anukampā	causeless mercy	SB 7.9.26

anukampā	show of mercy	SB 10.60.46

anukampā	of showing mercy	SB 10.66.5

anukampā	mercy	CC Antya 9.76

sa-anukampāḥ	feeling compassion	SB 10.44.6

anukampām	compassion	SB 10.14.8

anukampām	compassion	CC Madhya 6.261

sa-anukampam	with great affection	CC Madhya 24.349

anukampām	compassion	CC Antya 9.77

anukampanaḥ	very merciful	SB 8.16.21

anukampate	is compassionate	SB 4.27.26

anukampayā	by the mercy of	SB 3.7.12

anukampayā	with compassion	SB 3.29.17

anukampayā	out of compassion	SB 4.6.48

anukampayā	being compassionate	SB 4.8.39

anukampayā	with compassion	SB 5.8.7

anukampayā	out of compassion	SB 5.8.24

anukampayā	by causeless mercy	SB 5.19.9

bhagavat-anukampayā	by the compassion of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 5.24.1

bhagavat-anukampayā	by the causeless mercy of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 5.24.18

anukampayā	by the mercy	SB 6.18.65

anukampayā	or by compassion (teach them real life)	SB 7.15.38-39

anukampayā	by the mercy	SB 8.11.1

anukampayā	with compassion	SB 10.16.35

anukampayā	by the mercy	SB 10.73.12-13

anukampayā	mercifully	SB 12.6.70

anukampayā	by the mercy of	CC Adi 9.1

anukampī	very compassionate by nature	SB 10.26.25

anukampī	compassionate	SB 10.63.33

ārta-anukampinā	compassionate for persons in distress	SB 4.22.42

anukampinā	who is merciful	SB 11.29.38

bhūta-anukampinām	who are very sympathetic toward the suffering living entities	SB 6.10.5

anukampita-ātmā	the all-compassionate Lord	SB 3.2.15

anukampita-dhiyā	out of compassion	SB 3.28.29

nija-jana-anukampita-hṛdayaḥ	whose heart is always filled with mercy for His devotees	SB 5.24.27

anukampitā	being shown mercy	SB 11.7.56

anukampitaḥ	being favored by Him	SB 1.6.25

anukampitaḥ	being favored	SB 8.4.5

anukampitam	how sympathetic	SB 1.9.22

anukampitam	those to whom You are always favorably disposed	SB 4.30.27

tava anukampitām	due to Your causeless mercy upon us	SB 10.2.38

anukampitam	the mercy	SB 10.73.35

anukampitam	the mercy shown	SB 10.89.62

anukampitāyāḥ	always affectionate and compassionate	SB 7.6.11-13

anukampyaḥ	should be shown mercy	SB 10.14.10

anukampyāḥ	to be shown compassion	SB 10.48.29

anukampyāḥ	deserve the mercy	SB 11.5.4

anukampyānām	of the objects of mercy	SB 3.14.36

dāsya-anukāra	the conception of being a servant	CC Adi 6.55-56

anukāra	imitating	CC Adi 17.118

anukaraṇa	imitating	CC Antya 18.6

anukāritāḥ	caused to perform	SB 7.8.55

anukarma-cetaḥsu	whose hearts are attracted by fruitive activities	SB 4.6.49

anukaroti	used to follow and imitate	SB 4.25.62

anukaroti	imitates	SB 11.22.53

anukartum	do the same	SB 3.14.21

anukāryate	imitates	SB 4.29.17

anukāryate	is made to imitate	SB 11.22.53

īśa-anukathāḥ	the science of God	SB 2.10.1

īśa-anukathāḥ	a description of the incarnations of the Lord	CC Adi 2.91-92

anukathana	to regularly recite	SB 4.29.39-40

anukathanam	discussion	SB 11.3.30

anukathanam	the detailed description	SB 12.12.19

anukathanam	the narration	SB 12.12.22

guṇa-anukathane	describing the glories	SB 2.1.7

guṇa-anukathane	in describing the transcendental attributes of the Lord	SB 2.4.11

guṇa-anukathane	always engaged in talking about Your pastimes	SB 10.10.38

tīrthapada-anukīrtanam	glorifying the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is known as Tīrthapada	SB 6.13.22-23

anukīrtanam	constantly glorifying	SB 11.11.34-41

anukīrtanam	chanting the glories	SB 11.19.20-24

anukīrtanam	the reciting in sequence	SB 12.12.21

anukīrtanāt	by chanting	SB 3.33.6

anukīrtanāt	than constantly chanting under the direction of the bona fide spiritual master	SB 6.2.46

bhagavat-nāma-rūpa-anukīrtanāt	by glorifying the transcendental form, name, attributes and paraphernalia of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 6.8.27-28

anukīrtanāt	by chanting My names and qualities	SB 10.23.33

anukīrtanāt	by subsequent chanting	SB 10.29.27

anukīrtanāt	and thereafter from chanting	CC Madhya 16.186

anukīrtanāt	and thereafter from chanting	CC Madhya 18.125

anukīrtaya	please describe	SB 3.25.3

anukīrtayanti	they chant	SB 8.4.15

anukīrtayet	should narrate	SB 4.7.61

anukīrtayet	may chant or repeat	SB 5.25.11

anukīrtayet	repeats	SB 6.2.47-48

anukīrtitāḥ	repeatedly described	SB 1.5.9

anukīrtitāḥ	described	CC Madhya 23.76

anukīrtyeta	is described	SB 8.23.31

līlā-anukrama	the pastimes in chronological order	CC Adi 12.93

anukrama	chronological order	CC Adi 14.4

anukrama	in chronological order	CC Adi 14.95

anukrama	in chronological order	CC Adi 17.3

anukrama	chronological order	CC Madhya 9.6

anukrama	consecutively	CC Madhya 12.159

devatā-anukramaḥ	one demigod after another	SB 2.6.26

anukramaṇaḥ	whose devotional service	SB 7.5.13

anukramaṇaḥ	His movements	SB 8.3.6

anukramantaḥ	enumerating	SB 10.51.38

anukramāt	by a gradual process of differentiation	SB 3.7.21

anukramāt	consecutively	SB 4.31.17

anukramāt	respectively	SB 6.18.3-4

anukramāt	one after another	SB 8.11.7

anukrame	one after another	CC Madhya 20.381

anukramiṣyāmaḥ	we shall outline one after another	SB 5.26.7

anukramiṣyan	trying to enumerate	SB 11.4.2

anukramiṣyati	will follow in order	SB 3.25.25

anukramiṣyati	will follow one after another	CC Adi 1.60

anukramiṣyati	will follow one after another	CC Madhya 22.86

anukramiṣyati	will follow one after another	CC Madhya 23.16

anukramiṣye	shall state one after another	SB 2.6.46

anukramya	by correction and repetition	SB 1.7.8

anukrośa-hṛdayaḥ	very kindhearted	SB 4.24.32

anukrośa	benediction or mercy	SB 4.24.58

sa-anukrośa	compassionate	SB 10.38.28-33

anukrośam	compassion	SB 4.8.34

ańghri-yugmam anukṛṣya	dragging Their legs	SB 10.8.22

anukṛṣyamāṇau	being dragged	SB 10.8.24

anukṛta	made similar	SB 7.7.36

anukṛtiḥ	imitating	SB 10.87.19

anukṛtya	imitating	SB 10.11.39-40

anukṛtya	imitating	CC Adi 5.138

anukṣaṇa	momentary	SB 11.13.32

anukṣaṇa	constantly	CC Adi 3.108

anukṣaṇa	always	CC Adi 6.69-70

anukṣaṇa	always	CC Adi 6.90

anukṣaṇa	again and again	CC Adi 7.20-21

anukṣaṇa	always	CC Adi 7.77

anukṣaṇa	always	CC Adi 8.53

anukṣaṇa	always	CC Adi 17.197

anukṣaṇa	incessantly	CC Madhya 1.86

anukṣaṇa	constantly	CC Madhya 2.22

anukṣaṇa	always	CC Madhya 7.100

anukṣaṇa	constantly	CC Madhya 8.252

anukṣaṇa	always	CC Madhya 9.77

anukṣaṇa	always	CC Madhya 9.144

anukṣaṇa	continuously	CC Madhya 25.276

śunāya anukṣaṇa	was always causing to hear	CC Antya 8.29

bhaje anukṣaṇa	engages in devotional service twenty-four hours a day	CC Antya 9.76

anukṣaṇa	every moment	CC Antya 14.46

anukṣaṇe	every moment	CC Antya 19.31

anukṣīyamāṇa	gradually being decreased	SB 5.14.21

anuktvā	not stating	CC Adi 2.74

anuktvā	without mentioning	CC Adi 16.58

anukūjati	He imitates the cuckooing	SB 10.15.10-12

anukūjati kūjitam	imitates the cooing	SB 10.15.10-12

sa-anukūla	all favorable	SB 1.12.12

anukūla-īśvara-vipra-guptāḥ	protected by brāhmaṇas, by whose favor the supreme controller is always present	SB 8.17.16

anukūlā	faithful	SB 11.7.69

anukūla-vāte	in a favorable breeze	CC Adi 4.253

anukūla	of what is favorable	NBS 11

anukūlaḥ	offering favorable conditions	SB 5.22.12

anukūlaḥ	very favorable	SB 5.22.15

anukūlaḥ	favorably disposed	SB 10.53.25

kāla-anukūlaiḥ	following the circumstances presented by time	SB 6.11.2-3

anukūlam	favorable to our mentality	SB 2.3.25

sparśa-anukūlām	happy for the touch	SB 3.9.20

anukūlam	dwelling place	SB 6.4.32

anukūlam	favorably	SB 10.35.20-21

anukūlatā	being favorably disposed towards her husband	SB 7.11.25

anukūlena	with favorable	SB 11.20.17

kṛṣṇa-anukūleṣu	who were always protected by Kṛṣṇa	SB 6.10.28

ānukūlyasya	of anything that assists devotional service to the Lord	CC Madhya 22.100

ānukūlye	favorably	CC Madhya 19.168

ānukūlyena	favorable	CC Madhya 19.167

anukurvan	imitating	SB 10.83.6-7

anulepa	sandalwood	SB 9.6.45-46

anulepa	with ointments	SB 10.42.3

anulepa	of ointment	SB 10.48.6

anulepaiḥ	and ointments	SB 10.16.65-67

divya-gandha-anulepanaiḥ	by many kinds of pulp, like sandalwood and aguru, to smear upon the body of Lord Vāmanadeva	SB 8.21.6-7

anulepanaiḥ	and sandalwood paste	SB 10.41.44

anulepanaiḥ	and ointments	SB 10.70.11

anulepanaiḥ	and sandalwood paste	SB 10.70.13

anulepanaiḥ	and sandalwood paste	SB 10.84.7

anulepanaiḥ	and fragrant pastes	SB 10.85.37

anulepanam	smeared with	BG 11.10-11

anulepanam	ointment	SB 10.42.2

anulepanam	ointment	SB 10.42.4

anulepena	with an ointment	SB 5.25.5

anulepena	by anointing Them with sandalwood pulp and other fragrant substances	SB 12.8.38

anulipta-ańgaḥ	with sandalwood pulp smeared all over the body	SB 7.13.41

anulipta	and anointed with (sandalwood pulp)	SB 10.34.21

anulipta	anointed	SB 10.38.28-33

su-anuliptāḥ	anointed with auspicious sandalwood pulp	SB 10.24.29

anullańghita-bhagavat-śāsanaḥ	who never oversteps the Supreme Personality of Godhead's order	SB 5.26.6

anullańghita	undefied	SB 12.1.9

anuloma-jam	birth in a mixed family in which the father is superior in social status to the mother	SB 11.20.2

pratiloma-anulomābhyām	in both direct and reverse order	SB 11.24.29

anulomataḥ	by progressive function	SB 11.20.22

anum	Anu	SB 9.18.33

anum	his son named Anu	SB 9.19.22

anumāna	by logic	SB 11.13.33

anumāna-garbhiṇyā	conceived by logic	SB 12.5.9

anumāna	conjecture	CC Adi 2.73

anumāna	consideration	CC Adi 3.13

anumāna	a plan	CC Adi 12.39

anumāna	guess	CC Adi 14.81

anumāna	called anumāna (hypothesis)	CC Adi 16.83

anumāna	a guess	CC Madhya 6.25

anumāna pramāṇa	evidence by hypothesis	CC Madhya 6.82

anumāna	guess	CC Madhya 15.38

anumāna kari	I hope	CC Madhya 15.227

kari anumāna	I can conjecture	CC Antya 1.87

anumāna	guess	CC Antya 2.157

kari anumāna	I make a guess	CC Antya 5.44

anumāna	guess	CC Antya 15.37

kari anumāna	I guess	CC Antya 16.72

kari anumāna	I can infer	CC Antya 20.92

anumānābhyām	and application of logic	SB 11.7.20

anumānam	logical induction	SB 11.19.17

anumānam	logic	SB 11.28.18

anumānataḥ	by the process of logical deduction	SB 11.7.23

anumāne	by deduction	CC Madhya 4.114

anumāne	by hypothesis	CC Madhya 6.81

anumāne	by hypothesis	CC Madhya 6.81

kaila anumāne	guessed	CC Antya 2.155

anumānena	by logical deduction	SB 11.28.9

anumānena	by the logical inference	SB 11.28.32

anumāni	we can imagine	CC Madhya 8.116

anumāni	I imagine	CC Madhya 17.172

anumāni	we can imagine	CC Madhya 21.95

anumāni	I guess	CC Antya 1.196

anumāni'	guessing	CC Antya 12.40

anumāni'	guessing	CC Antya 15.39

ānumānikaḥ	engaged in impersonal speculation	SB 11.19.1

anumanmahi	we accept	SB 3.16.25

anumantā	permitter	BG 13.23

anumantavyam	to be understood	SB 4.29.67

anumantraiḥ	by joking words	SB 4.27.3

anumantritaḥ	being permitted	SB 4.7.16

anumantrya	taking instruction from	SB 6.19.2-3

anumanvānaḥ	deciding	SB 10.79.29

anumanvate	regard favorably	SB 10.23.31

anumānya	after learning	SB 3.16.28

anumanyamānaḥ	accepting as	SB 5.4.8

anumanye	I guess like that	SB 5.10.21

na anumanyeta	would not welcome	SB 3.22.18

anumanyeta	he should obey	SB 3.24.13

anumāpakaiḥ	by hypothesis	SB 2.2.35

anumaraṇe	to die along with him	SB 4.28.50

anumariṣyatī	who wanted to die with him and become satī	SB 9.8.3

anumata	approved	SB 4.20.15

anumataḥ	with his approval	SB 1.9.49

anumataḥ	is approved	SB 3.16.3

anumataḥ	took permission	SB 3.33.12

anumataḥ	taking permission	SB 4.13.37

anumataḥ	sanctioned	SB 10.86.9

anumātaraḥ	exactly like mothers (who allowed their nipples to be sucked by Kṛṣṇa)	SB 10.6.34

anumatena	by the permission	SB 5.1.22

anumatena	permitted by the mercy of the glance (time)	SB 7.9.21

anumatena	by the order	SB 8.8.30

nārada-anumatena	by the order of Nārada	SB 8.11.46

anumatena	in order to fulfill the desires	SB 11.24.5

anumatiḥ	Anumati	SB 4.1.34

anumatiḥ	Anumati	SB 5.20.10

anumatiḥ	Anumati	SB 6.18.3-4

anumatyā	with a full-moon day when the moon is slightly less than completely full	SB 7.14.20-23

anumeya-tattvaḥ	understood by the Vedas	SB 4.1.57

anumeya-tattvaḥ	the Absolute Truth can be guessed	SB 4.24.65

anumeya	hypothesis	SB 10.2.36

buddhi-anumeya-lakṣaṇaiḥ	by real intelligence and by such symptoms	SB 10.3.14

anumeyaḥ	to be inferred	SB 6.11.23

anumeyam	to be inferred	SB 5.12.8

anumeyau	can be surmised	SB 11.22.49

anumīmāṃsate	he considers	SB 6.1.48

anumimīmahi	can accept it by argument and inference	SB 5.22.1

anumitaḥ	measured	SB 3.11.3

heya-anumitam	concluded to be inferior	SB 5.11.3

anumīyāt	can be deduced	SB 11.25.9

anumīyate	is measured	SB 2.8.12

anumīyate	can be imagined	SB 4.29.63

anumīyate	is perceived	SB 5.22.12

anumīyate	it is inferred	SB 6.1.46

anumīyate	becomes manifested	SB 10.2.35

anumīyate	one can guess	CC Antya 1.91

anumlocā śańkhapālaḥ	Anumlocā and Śańkhapāla	SB 12.11.38

anumodadhvam	kindly approve of my proposal	SB 4.21.26

anumodadhvam	should accept	SB 8.6.24

anumodamānāḥ	all approving	SB 1.19.19

anumodanam	taking great pleasure	SB 11.11.34-41

anumodante	they encourage	SB 12.10.29

anumodanti	take to heart	SB 11.26.29

anumodataḥ	thus appreciating	SB 2.7.53

anumodatām	please allow	SB 10.53.46

anumodatām	may please grant	SB 10.59.35

anumodatām	please sanction	SB 10.70.41

anumodate	takes pleasure	SB 3.19.37

anumodate	approves	SB 10.69.45

anumodayanti	make fragrant	SB 5.16.22

anumoderan	may they kindly be pleased	SB 11.23.30

anumodeta	he should agree	SB 7.14.6

anumoditā	the sanctioner	SB 10.69.40

anumoditaḥ	being permitted	SB 1.5.25

vāsudeva-anumoditaḥ	confirmed by Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa	SB 1.9.49

anumoditaḥ	being sanctioned	SB 4.1.2

anumoditaḥ	approved	SB 8.21.32

anumoditaḥ	being approved	SB 8.23.24

kosala-indra-anumoditaḥ	approved by the King of Kosala, Lord Rāmacandra	SB 9.10.29

anumoditaḥ	approved of	SB 10.22.25

anumoditāḥ	advised	SB 10.33.38

anumoditaḥ	congratulated	SB 10.50.35-36

anumoditaḥ	allowed	SB 10.58.28

anumoditaḥ	given leave	SB 10.63.51

anumoditāḥ	sanctioned	SB 10.68.5

anumoditaḥ	sanctioned	SB 10.74.6

anumoditāḥ	approved	SB 10.75.38

anumoditaḥ	praised when performed by others	SB 11.2.12

anumoditaḥ	permitted	SB 11.17.37

anumoditaḥ	accepted	CC Adi 14.69

anumoditam	agreed with	SB 10.63.46

anumodituḥ	of the person who approves	SB 11.27.55

anumṛgam	behind the animals	SB 9.1.23-24

anumṛgya	the destination	SB 2.4.13

anunādayan	causing to resound	SB 4.10.6

anunamayan	making bow down	SB 10.16.29

anunaya-kovidaḥ	one who is very expert in flattery	SB 4.26.20

anunaya	in winning over	SB 5.2.17

anunaya	in the art of conciliation	SB 10.47.16

anunaya	in conciliation	SB 10.65.16

anunaya kari'	with great humility	CC Antya 2.134

prabhure kare anunaya	entreated the Lord	CC Antya 9.42

anunayan	pacifying	SB 3.14.16

anuninye	began to flatter	SB 4.26.20

anunirjagmuḥ	left home by following the elder	SB 1.15.45

anunirjihānam	having come out	SB 7.8.18

anuniśamya	after hearing	SB 10.7.25

anunītaḥ	pacified	SB 6.6.1

anunītau	humbly requested	SB 10.64.19-20

anunītena	pacified	SB 4.7.1

anunīyamānaḥ	being offered all respect	SB 4.14.29

anunmardana	without any massage	SB 5.9.9-10

anupacan	always digesting	SB 8.5.35

anupacite	not proceeded	SB 3.20.47

anupadam	every step	SB 1.5.26

anupadam	with every step	SB 5.2.5

madhukara-anupadavīm	the road followed in pursuance of devotees who are attached like bumblebees	SB 5.14.1

anupadavīm	the path	SB 6.5.30

anupadavīm	on the path	SB 10.60.41

gṛha-anupāgatam	now returned home	SB 1.11.31

anupahataḥ	without being affected	SB 3.9.20

anupakāriṇe	irrespective of return	BG 17.20

anupakramaḥ	without endeavor	SB 11.8.3

anupalabdhe	in that which cannot be directly perceived	SB 11.20.4

anupalabhamānaḥ	not finding	SB 5.3.18

anupalabhya	without finding	SB 10.7.25

anupalakṣita	described	SB 5.17.1

anupalakṣita-sthānāya	unto You, whose position is not discernible	SB 5.18.30

anupalakṣitaḥ	without being seen	SB 4.13.47

anupalakṣya	inconceivable	SB 2.4.12

anupalakṣya	rarely to be seen	SB 2.7.26

anupālanam	giving protection always	SB 1.17.16

tava ājñā-anupālanam	to obey Your order	SB 8.23.17

anupālaye	I sustain	SB 10.47.30

anupama-vallabha	Anupama, or Vallabha	CC Adi 10.84

anupama	Anupama	CC Adi 10.85

anupama	extraordinary	CC Adi 16.67

anupāma	exquisite	CC Madhya 1.166

anupama	unparalleled	CC Madhya 8.181

anupama-guṇā	having unparalleled qualities	CC Madhya 8.182

anupama	without comparison	CC Madhya 15.91

anupama	unparalleled	CC Madhya 17.113

anupama mallika	Anupama Mallika	CC Madhya 19.36

anupama	his brother Anupama	CC Madhya 20.66

rūpa-anupama-kathā	news about his younger brothers, Rūpa Gosvāmī and Anupama	CC Madhya 25.211

anupama-bhāi	brother named Anupama	CC Antya 4.30

śrī-vallabha-anupama	named Śrī Vallabha or Anupama	CC Antya 4.227

anupamena	Anupama	CC Madhya 19.120

anupamera	of Anupama	CC Antya 1.37

anupamera lāgi'	on account of the passing away of Anupama	CC Antya 1.39

anupamera	of Anupama	CC Antya 1.52

anupamera	of Anupama	CC Antya 4.27

anupapanna-artham	in which the desired results are never obtained	SB 5.14.5

anupapāṭha	recited	SB 7.5.3

anuparata	continuous	SB 5.17.3

anuparata-vegā	whose force is uninterrupted	SB 5.17.7

anuparikrāman	by circumambulating	SB 5.1.30

anuparitaḥ	surrounding	SB 5.16.29

anuparyakrāmat	circumambulated	SB 5.1.30

anuparyeti	passes through	SB 5.22.16

anupāsita	without worshiping	SB 5.3.14

anupaśrutiḥ	the failure to hear	SB 10.42.28-31

anupaśyāmi	do I foresee	BG 1.31

anupaśyanti	can see	BG 15.10

anupaśyanti	does see by following authorities	SB 2.4.21

anupaśyanti	constantly see	SB 10.41.31

anupaśyataḥ	was always looking	SB 8.12.23

anupaśyataḥ	seeing	SB 10.41.5

anupaśyataḥ	of one who sees through authority, or one who sees constantly like that	Iso 7

anupaśyati	one tries to see through authority	BG 13.31

anupaśyati	sees properly	BG 14.19

anupaśyati	thinks	SB 4.7.52

anupaśyati	observes	SB 5.14.5

anupaśyati	he views	SB 11.22.41

anupaśyati	observes in a systematic way	Iso 6

anupaśye	do I see	SB 7.9.44

anupatan agāt	going up	SB 3.11.5

anupatanti	grieving	SB 1.17.8

anupatha	on the path	SB 3.16.21

anupatha	walking alongside	SB 10.82.29-30

anupathāḥ	followers	SB 4.25.27

anupathāḥ	his attendants	SB 4.28.23

bhavat-niyama-anupathāḥ	who are always obedient to your order	SB 5.10.4

anupathāḥ	following	SB 5.22.4

anupatham	along the path	SB 5.1.8

anupatham	as He passed through	SB 5.5.30

anupatham	the path	SB 5.24.26

anupatham	the pathway	SB 6.5.33

anupatham	following that path	SB 9.8.19

anupatham	following You along the path	SB 10.15.6

anupatham	useful for serving	SB 10.87.22

anupathān	the attendants of Hiraṇyakaśipu	SB 7.8.31

anupathānām	who are Your servants	SB 5.3.4-5

anupathāt	from the way of life	SB 5.8.29

anupathena	following	SB 10.89.51

anupaṭhitaḥ	subsequently chanted	SB 11.2.12

anupetam	without being reformed by the sacred thread	SB 1.2.2

anupoṣaṇam	the care	SB 10.29.24

anuprabhavam	potent	SB 10.87.32

anuprakṛtiḥ	followed by ministers and other officers	SB 6.14.50-51

anuprāṇam	breathing	SB 1.6.29

anuprāṇanti	follow the living symptoms	SB 2.10.16

anuprapannāḥ	following	BG 9.21

anuprāptaḥ	arrived	SB 7.3.17

anuprāptaḥ	having achieved in that way	SB 9.1.36

anuprāptāḥ	achieved	SB 9.24.9

anuprāptam	appearing on the scene	SB 10.44.26

anuprāptau	approached	SB 10.34.29

anuprāpte	being situated	SB 4.8.76

anuprāpya	receiving as a result	SB 10.1.39

anuprāsa	alliteration	CC Adi 16.46

anuprāsa	alliteration	CC Adi 16.67

anuprāsa	alliteration	CC Adi 16.73

anuprāsa	alliteration	CC Adi 16.75

anupraśānti	and subsequent liberation from suffering	SB 11.5.12

anuprasthāpita	sending after	SB 10.39.36

anupraveśāt	because of the entrance (as subtle causes within gross manifestations, and vice versa)	SB 11.22.7

anupraviṣṭaḥ	entering afterwards	SB 3.5.6

anupraviṣṭaḥ	thus entering later on	SB 3.6.3

anupraviṣṭāḥ	entered	SB 3.32.10

anupraviṣṭaḥ	entering afterward	SB 4.24.64

anupraviṣṭaḥ	entered within	SB 5.11.13-14

anupraviṣṭaḥ	entered into	SB 7.9.12

anupraviṣṭaḥ	entering into	SB 7.9.30

anupraviṣṭaḥ	You enter	SB 8.6.11

anupraviṣṭaḥ	entering	SB 10.49.29

anupraviṣṭām	fixing her vision	SB 10.16.21

anupraviṣṭam	entering in pursuit	SB 10.66.41

anupraviṣṭam	and entered	SB 10.87.26

anupraviśya	entering within	SB 10.85.5

anupraviśya	entering	SB 10.87.50

anupraviśya	subsequently entering	SB 12.10.31-32

anupravṛtta	following	SB 3.2.14

anupravṛttaḥ	taking place everywhere	SB 1.17.32

anupravṛttaḥ	following behind	SB 4.29.54

anupravṛttam	following	SB 3.25.37

anupravṛttebhyaḥ	who exactly follow his path	SB 5.1.38

anupṛcchasi	you have inquired one after another	SB 1.16.25

anupṛcchasi	as you have inquired	SB 2.6.33

anupṛcchasi	again are asking	SB 10.87.10

anupṛcchatām	asking	SB 3.14.7

anupṛcchate	after he (Indra) inquired	SB 6.8.3

anupṛcchati	goes on inquiring	SB 2.8.29

anupṛcchati	inquiring	SB 2.9.43

anupṛkta	touched	SB 10.21.8

anupṛṣṭānām	as you inquired	SB 1.15.22-23

anupūjayet	one should worship one after another	SB 11.27.27

puńkha-anupuńkha	one arrow after another	SB 6.10.24

anupūrtyā	being perfectly done	SB 4.23.11

yathā-anupūrvam	in chronological order	SB 5.1.33

anupūrvam	successively, according to the gradation	SB 7.15.50-51

anupūrvaśaḥ	from the beginning	SB 2.8.24

anupūrvaśaḥ	systematically	SB 3.5.22

anupūrvaśaḥ	in chronological order	SB 6.6.38-39

anupūrvaśaḥ	according to order, or from the beginning to the end	SB 7.5.52

anupūrvaśaḥ	consecutively	SB 7.15.55

anupūrvaśaḥ	in consecutive order	SB 10.90.30

ānupūrvaśaḥ	one after another	SB 11.25.2-5

anupūrvaśaḥ	in the appropriate order	SB 11.27.6

anupūrvaśaḥ	in order of the seniority of the deceased	SB 11.31.22

ānupūrvyāt	continually	SB 4.9.16

ānupūrvyāt	one after another	SB 6.8.4-6

ānupūrvyāt	by the gradual process of purificatory ceremonies	SB 11.17.22

ānupūrvyeṇa	the beginning to the end	SB 2.8.29

ānupūrvyeṇa	from beginning to end	SB 3.10.2

ānupūrvyeṇa	according to acts performed previously	SB 5.19.19

anurāddhām	attained	SB 7.8.46

anurādhā	the nakṣatra named Anurādhā	SB 7.14.20-23

anurāga	feelingly	SB 1.9.11

anurāga	attachment	SB 3.2.14

anurāga	attachment	SB 3.3.7

anurāga-hāsa	with kind smiling	SB 3.4.10

anurāga	with great affection	SB 3.8.6

anurāga	attraction	SB 3.15.25

anurāga-kalayā	loving	SB 3.16.11

sa-anurāga-avalokanam	one who is looking toward the devotees with great affection	SB 4.8.51

sa-anurāga	affectionate	SB 4.16.9

anurāga	attachment	SB 4.26.23

anurāga	in great ecstasy	SB 5.3.6

anurāga	of attachment	SB 5.7.12

anurāga	out of love	SB 5.8.25

anurāga-āveśita-cittaḥ	the brāhmaṇa who was absorbed in love for his son	SB 5.9.6

anurāga	lustful	SB 5.24.16

anurāga	of attachment	SB 5.25.5

anurāga	affectionate	SB 10.30.2

anurāga	affectionate	SB 10.39.16

anurāga	with loving affection	SB 10.39.29

anurāga	by affection	SB 10.49.27

anurāga	affection	SB 10.51.23-26

sa-anurāga	affectionate	SB 10.58.3

anurāga	loving attraction	SB 10.59.44

anurāga	loving attraction	SB 10.61.5

anurāga	love	CC Adi 4.170

anurāga	attachments	CC Adi 4.175

anurāga	attachment	CC Adi 7.143

anurāga	affection	CC Madhya 8.103

kṛṣṇa-anurāga	attraction for Kṛṣṇa	CC Madhya 8.169

anurāga	attachment	CC Madhya 11.50

gāḍha anurāga	deep affection	CC Madhya 11.149

anurāga	further attachment	CC Madhya 19.178

anurāga	subattachment	CC Madhya 23.42

anurāga paryanta	up to subecstatic love	CC Madhya 24.33

anurāga-anta	up to the end of subecstatic love	CC Madhya 24.33

kathana-anurāga	attracted to discussions	CC Madhya 24.88

anurāga	of attachment	CC Antya 2.168

anurāga	attachment	CC Antya 20.19

anurāga	affection	CC Antya 20.49

anurāga	of sentiments of attractions	MM 42

anurāgaḥ	affection	SB 4.21.50

jāta-anurāgāḥ	experiencing a great longing or attraction	SB 10.13.33

anurāgaḥ	loving affection	SB 10.26.13

anurāgaḥ	steady attraction	SB 10.60.46

anurāgaḥ	attachment	SB 11.2.40

anurāgaḥ	the love	CC Adi 4.131

anurāgaḥ	attachment	CC Adi 7.94

anurāgaḥ	attachment	CC Madhya 9.262

anurāgaḥ	attachment	CC Madhya 23.41

anurāgaḥ	attachment	CC Madhya 25.141

anurāgaḥ	attachment	CC Antya 3.179

anurāgaḥ	attachment	CC Antya 20.16

anurāgaḥ	fondness	NBS 16

sa-anurāgam	with great affection	SB 5.4.4

anurāgam	popularity	SB 5.4.5

anurāgam	the loving attraction	SB 10.46.29

anurāgam	the great affection	SB 10.49.5-6

nava-anurāgam	new attachment	CC Antya 1.136

anurāgam	loving attraction	NBS 49

anurāgāt	out of love	MM 41

anurāgataḥ	by feeling	SB 4.7.11

anurāgāya	for loving attraction	SB 10.23.32

anurāge	attraction	CC Madhya 2.48

anurāge	attraction	CC Madhya 9.149

anurāge	with transcendental feeling	CC Madhya 21.119

anurāgeṇa	with love	SB 6.18.27-28

putra-anurāgeṇa	because of affection for the son	SB 9.7.15

anurāgeṇa	with affection	SB 10.47.65

gāḍha-anurāgera	of one who has deep attachment	CC Antya 4.62

anurāgera	of real affection	CC Antya 10.6

anurāgī	affectionate	CC Madhya 12.31

anurāgī	a deeply attached devotee	CC Antya 4.62

anurāgi	attached	NoI 8

anurajyate	is becoming attached	BG 11.36

anuraktā	being attached	SB 1.16.32-33

anurakta	beloved	SB 4.9.66

anurakta-lokaḥ	being loved by the citizens	SB 4.20.15

sevā-anurakta	attracted by the loving service	SB 5.14.44

anurakta	because of attachment	SB 5.24.8

anurakta-cittaḥ	a person whose mind is attracted	SB 7.6.11-13

anurakta	attracted	SB 8.8.41-46

anurakta-manasaḥ	their minds very much attached to Him	SB 10.16.20

anurakta	loving	SB 10.21.7

anurakta	very much attached	SB 10.44.15

anurakta	completely attracted	SB 10.46.27

anurakta	attached to Him	SB 10.68.53

anurakta	attracted	SB 10.83.29

anurakta-dhiyām	for those whose minds are naturally attached in a favorable way	SB 11.5.48

anurakta	constantly attached	SB 11.12.10

anurakta-cetasaḥ	mind constantly attached	SB 11.14.17

ati-anurakta	extremely attached	SB 11.29.7

anurakta	loving	CC Adi 4.155

sevā-anurakta	engaged in the service	CC Madhya 9.269

anuraktāḥ	firmly attached	SB 1.18.22

anuraktaḥ	attached	SB 3.23.38

bhṛtya-anuraktaḥ	very favorably disposed towards devotees	SB 4.9.18

anuraktāḥ	firmly attached	SB 10.29.30

anuraktaiḥ	loving	SB 10.25.33

guṇa-anuraktam	being attached to the material modes of nature	SB 5.11.8

anuraktasya	attached to them	SB 1.5.29

anuraktasya	although attached	SB 3.4.10

anuraktāya	very much attentive	SB 4.17.6-7

anuraktāya	who loves You	SB 11.11.26-27

anuraktāya	who is very attached	SB 11.27.5

anurañjanāḥ	pleasing	SB 4.12.37

anurañjanam	satisfying	CC Madhya 17.210

anurañjanena	by the act of pleasing	CC Adi 4.224

anurañjanena	by the act of pleasing	CC Madhya 8.144

anurañjita	being colored	SB 6.9.41

anurañjitāḥ	pleased	SB 10.39.34

anurañjitau	anointed	SB 10.42.5

anurasyate	is relished	CC Madhya 23.100

anurata	constantly attached to Him abalā-gaṇaḥ

anurata	to whom are attracted	CC Madhya 14.158

anurataḥ	assuming the role	SB 1.2.34

anurauti sma	He would call out in imitation of	SB 10.15.13

anuroddhum	to direct	SB 4.14.21

anurodha	entreaty	CC Adi 4.188

anurodha	acceptance of someone's opinion	CC Madhya 2.86

anurodhāt	from compliance due to being grossly attached to the body, senses and mind	SB 5.10.22

anurodhāya	who sanctions	SB 10.16.42-43

sampradāya-anurodhe	but for the sake of our party	CC Adi 7.136

anurodhe	being obliged	CC Adi 17.170

kārya-anurodhe	because of different duties	CC Antya 4.9

bhakta-anurodhe	on the request of the devotees	CC Antya 4.116

krama-anurodhena	in order of chronology	SB 4.29.68

karma-anurodhena	with consideration of the activities performed	SB 6.1.43

anurodhena	according to the prescribed regulations	SB 11.20.19

anuruddham	controlled	SB 5.11.4

anuruṇaddhi	causes	SB 4.17.33

anurundhānāḥ	exactly following his policy	SB 10.2.3

anurundhataḥ	who was imitating	SB 10.7.3

anurundhe	do you wish	SB 10.47.20

sattva-anurūpā	according to the existence	BG 17.3

anurūpa	befitting	SB 1.10.19

anurūpa	in suitable forms	SB 3.20.25

anurūpā	befitting	SB 3.31.12

anurūpa	equal to His bodily beauty	SB 8.18.26

anurūpa	just befitting His position and beauty	SB 9.10.6-7

anurūpa	corresponding	SB 10.60.9

anurūpa	suitable	SB 10.90.49

anurūpā	suitable	SB 11.7.69

sva-sva-prema-anurūpa	according to one's own love	CC Adi 4.143

anurūpa	exactly to the proportion	CC Madhya 8.92

anurūpa	according to	CC Madhya 9.155

kārya-anurūpa	according to the program of activities	CC Madhya 13.64

bhāva-anurūpa	following the ecstatic emotions	CC Madhya 13.167

anurūpa	according to	CC Madhya 15.170

tat-anurūpa	accordingly	CC Madhya 19.12

brahmāṇḍa-anurūpa	according to the size of a universe	CC Madhya 21.86

anurūpa	suitable	CC Madhya 21.101

vyākhyā-anurūpa	a suitable explanation	CC Madhya 25.97

śloka-anurūpa pada	other verses following that particular verse	CC Antya 1.76

prabhura ruci-anurūpa	very tasteful for Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu	CC Antya 10.137

bhāva-anurūpa	befitting the emotion	CC Antya 17.5

bhāva-anurūpa	according to the ecstatic emotion	CC Antya 17.6

tṛṣṇā-anurūpa	according to one's thirst	CC Antya 20.88

anurūpa	according to	Bs 5.54

yuga-anurūpābhyām	(by particular names and forms) suitable for each age	SB 11.5.35

anurūpāḥ	fitting	SB 1.10.19

anurūpaḥ	exactly to match	SB 3.3.8

anurūpaḥ	proper	SB 3.22.15

anurūpaḥ	the fit person	SB 9.6.44

na anurūpāḥ	not exactly like the father	SB 9.20.34

anurūpam	which of them is right	SB 1.17.20

anurūpām	suitable	SB 3.22.11

anurūpam	according to different living entities	SB 4.18.9-10

samaya-anurūpam	according to the time and circumstances	SB 4.19.37

anurūpam	to his liking	SB 4.25.11

anurūpam	suitable for you	SB 6.5.9

sevā-anurūpam	according to the category of service one renders to the Lord	SB 7.9.27

śraddhā-anurūpam	according to one's faith and devotion	SB 8.17.17

anurūpam	suitable	SB 10.60.17

anurūpam	suitable	SB 10.60.43

anurūpam	in accordance	SB 10.72.6

anna-anurūpām	according to the food	CC Antya 1.92

anurūpam	in accordance with	Bs 5.44

anurūpam	according to	MM 5

anurūpān	exactly like	SB 5.7.2

tat-anurūpāṇi	words suitable to reply to theirs	SB 5.9.9-10

tat-anurūpāṇi	suitable for the occasion	SB 10.15.18

guṇa-karma-anurūpāṇi	according to His attributes and activities	SB 10.26.18

anurūpataḥ	suitably	SB 10.41.40

anurūpāya	who are suitable	SB 3.21.27

anurūpayā	befitting the King's position	SB 3.21.48

tat-anurūpāya	to follow the instruction of the śāstras	SB 6.5.20

nija-anurūpe	who exactly followed the principles of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu	CC Madhya 19.121

anuśādhi	please direct	SB 7.8.48

anuśādhi	teach	SB 11.7.16

anuśādhi	please instruct	SB 11.29.40

anusāgaram	following the vibrations of the sea waves	SB 10.3.6

anuṣajjate	one necessarily engages	BG 6.4

anuṣajjate	becomes attached	BG 18.10

anuṣajjate	becomes addicted	SB 4.20.5

anuṣajjate	one becomes engaged	CC Madhya 24.160

anuṣajjeta	will become attached	SB 11.23.23

anuṣaktam	who followed very closely	SB 3.18.9

anuṣaktam	as if touching Durvāsā Muni's back	SB 9.4.50

anuśaṃsam	considering	SB 10.16.33

anusaṃsargāt	last touch	SB 3.5.37

anusaṃsmaraṇa	constantly remembering	SB 4.23.11

anusaṃsṛṣṭam	thus created	SB 3.5.36

anusaṃsṛtim	almost perpetual rotation and transmigration in different types of bodies	SB 6.1.51

anusaṃsthayā	by following her husband	SB 5.9.7

nija-anusandhāna	understanding about His personal self	CC Madhya 13.65

anusandhāna	inquiry	CC Madhya 14.15

tāra anusandhāna	inquiring about him	CC Madhya 14.16

kare sarva-anusandhāna	takes all information of	CC Antya 8.42

ei anusandhāna	this inquiry	CC Antya 8.76

sanātana-anusandhāne	to search for Sanātana Gosvāmī	CC Madhya 25.208

anusandhatte	knew	SB 7.4.38

anusandhāya	just to search out	SB 2.2.20

anusandhyam	during each junction or twilight	SB 6.8.22

anuṣańga	by intimate contact	SB 11.12.12

ānuṣańga-karma	secondary work	CC Adi 4.14

ānuṣańga	secondary	CC Adi 4.36-37

anuṣańga-phale	as a simultaneous result	CC Madhya 15.109

kṛta-anuṣańgaḥ	having developed attachment	SB 5.8.11

anuṣańgataḥ	due to His affection	SB 10.77.28

ānusańge	as a secondary motive	CC Adi 4.223

ānuṣańge	simultaneously	CC Madhya 8.280

ānuṣańge	simultaneously	CC Madhya 20.144

anuṣańgeṇa	by constant absorption	SB 5.8.26

anuṣańgeṇa	simultaneously	SB 7.15.73

ānuṣańgika	concomitant	CC Antya 3.180

ānuṣańgiṇī	secondary	SB 6.18.73

anusańkhyātum	be enumerated	SB 10.51.36

anusańkīrtanam	constantly chanting the holy name	SB 8.23.16

anusantasthuḥ	was rigidly followed	SB 4.2.31

anusantatam	expanded	SB 4.13.8-9

anusantatāni	extended	BG 15.2

anusāntvitaḥ	carefully pacified	SB 10.86.11

anusarasi	You follow	SB 6.9.37

anusārataḥ	in accordance with	SB 2.10.51

anusārataḥ	in accordance with	SB 11.21.11

anusārataḥ	in accordance with	SB 12.7.8

anusārataḥ	by following in the footsteps	CC Madhya 22.158

anusāre	following	CC Adi 13.47

anusāre	in accordance	CC Madhya 8.312

anusāre	according to	CC Antya 1.12

ei anusāre	in this way	CC Antya 20.76

anusāreṇa	as it was necessary, minimum	SB 4.8.72

sva-anusargaḥ	creation of material opulences	SB 4.23.1-3

anusargam	the subsequent creation	SB 6.4.1-2

anusargān	later generations	SB 3.7.25

śraddhā-anusārī	according to the proportion of faith	CC Madhya 22.64

anusārīṇi	favoring	SB 10.54.16

anusāriṇīḥ	according to	SB 11.17.15

pada-anusarpaṇe	walking to those places	SB 9.4.18-20

pada-anusarpaṇe	in walking to	CC Madhya 22.137-139

loka-anuśāsana-artham	just to instruct the people	SB 5.5.28

tat-anuśāsana-paraḥ	engaged in governing the globe	SB 5.7.1

anuśāsana-nirbandhāt	from the endeavor to teach	SB 5.9.8

anuśāsana	of sometimes chastising them for their mistakes	SB 5.15.7

anuśāsanaiḥ	the order of their father	SB 3.12.6

anuśāsanam	traditional discipline	SB 1.4.28-29

anuśāsanam	rulings	SB 1.7.53-54

anuśāsanam	under your rule	SB 1.17.37

anuśāsanam	ruling over the citizens	SB 4.21.50

anuśāsanam	the order	SB 5.1.20

yoga-anuśāsanam	only to be achieved by practicing devotional service	SB 5.14.39

anuśāsanam	the worship	SB 6.16.50

anuśāsanam	because it is Your order	SB 8.23.17

anuśāsanam	command	SB 10.16.61

anuśāsanam	the instruction	SB 10.27.7

anuśāsanam	order	SB 10.27.17

anuśāsanam	(Your) command	SB 10.74.2

anuśāsanam	the order	SB 10.74.3

veda-anuśāsanam	the instruction of the Vedas	SB 10.78.36

anuśāsanam	instruction	SB 10.87.42

ātma-ānuśāsanam	instruction in the science of the Self	SB 10.87.44

anuśāsanam	guidance	SB 11.3.44

anuśāsanam	instruction	NBS 84

anuśāsane	under the control of	SB 3.1.45

tat-anuśāsane	according to his order	SB 5.2.1

anusasāra	entrusted	SB 1.10.22

anusasāra	began to follow	SB 5.1.38

anusasāra ha	followed	SB 9.2.5-6

anuśaśāsa	ruled	SB 5.1.23

anuśaśāsa	he ruled over	SB 5.4.16

anuśāsataḥ	instruction	SB 1.5.15

anuśāsītā	commander	SB 10.68.39

anuśāsitaḥ	just learning from you	SB 2.5.8

anuśāsitaḥ	being ordered	SB 4.20.17

anuśāsitaḥ	instructed	SB 11.17.3-4

anuśāsitāram	the controller	BG 8.9

anusasmāra	perfectly understood and always remembered	SB 5.15.4

anuśāsti	directs	SB 2.7.21

anuśāsya	after giving instruction	SB 4.11.35

anuśāsya	after instructing	SB 5.5.28

anuśāsya	instructing	SB 5.9.6

anusava-abhinavam	constantly new	SB 10.44.14

anusava-abhinavam	constantly new	CC Adi 4.156

anusava-abhinavam	constantly new	CC Madhya 21.112

anusavam	constantly	SB 1.5.28

anusavam	at every moment	SB 10.69.13

anusavam	constantly	SB 10.90.50

anusavana	three times in a day	SB 5.7.13

anusavanam	regularly three times (morning, noon and evening)	SB 1.13.53

anusavanam	three times	SB 4.8.43

anusavanam	at every moment	SB 5.3.8

anusavanam	always	SB 5.4.18

anusavanam	without stopping	SB 5.6.17

anusavanam	almost always	SB 5.7.5

anusavanam	constantly	SB 5.17.2

anusavanam	regularly	SB 6.4.21

anusavanam	more and more	SB 9.19.18

anusavanam	at each of the junctures of the day (sunrise, noon and sunset)	SB 12.6.68

anuśayaḥ	desire	SB 7.7.36

anuśayāḥ	whose persistent desires	SB 10.87.22

anuśayam	designation	SB 4.23.18

anuśayam	the resultant contamination	SB 11.14.25

caraṇa-anuśayana	surrendering unto the lotus feet	SB 5.1.36

anuśayanam	the lying down of the puruṣa incarnation Mahā-Viṣṇu in mystic slumber	SB 2.10.6

anuśayī	the living entity	SB 4.23.18

anuśayī	embracing her	SB 10.87.50

anuśāyinām	merged into the body of the Lord	SB 2.8.22

anuśāyinam	underlying	SB 10.85.11

anuśāyinam	the underlying personality	SB 12.7.18

anuśayīta	lies down next to	SB 10.87.38

anuśerate	serve the Lord while He sleeps	SB 3.7.37

anuśerate	lie	SB 3.9.43

tvat-caraṇa-ambuja-anusevām	service to the lotus feet of Your Lordship	SB 6.9.39

anusevām	steady service	SB 10.65.10

anusevanayā	by devoted service	SB 3.23.7

anusevatām	of those always engaged in serving	SB 7.9.42

anusevayā	bringing into use	SB 1.1.15

anusevayā	by dint of rendering continuous service	SB 1.12.4

caraṇa-anusevayā	by the service of the lotus feet	SB 5.15.7

kāma-anusevayā	by enjoying acquired desired objects	SB 10.20.21

anuśikṣamāṇaḥ	teaching by example	SB 5.4.8

anuśikṣāmi	I have learned	SB 11.7.36

anuśikṣan	setting the example	SB 4.11.12

anuśikṣayan	teaching	SB 5.6.6

anuśikṣayan	in effect instructing	SB 10.64.31

anuśikṣita-arthāḥ	deciding to follow the instructions	SB 6.7.24

guru-anuśikṣitam	that which was taught by their teachers	SB 7.8.1

anuśikṣitam	practiced	SB 8.3.1

anuśikṣitam	learned	SB 11.29.41-44

anuśikṣitau	instructed	SB 12.2.38

kṛṣṇa-anuśīlana	cultivation of Kṛṣṇa consciousness	CC Madhya 19.168

kṛṣṇa-anuśīlanam	cultivation of service in relationship to Kṛṣṇa	CC Madhya 19.167

anuśīlayan	imitating	SB 10.23.37

anuśīlayanti	and imitate	SB 11.3.32

anuśiṣṭaḥ	instructed	SB 3.22.7

kaṃsa-anuśiṣṭaḥ	sent by Kaṃsa	SB 10.12.14

anuśiṣṭān	highly educated in culture	SB 5.5.28

anuśiṣṭena	taught to follow the regulative principles	SB 5.9.4

anuśiṣyāt	should instruct	SB 5.5.15

anusmara	go on remembering	BG 8.7

anusmara	think repeatedly and then describe them	SB 1.5.13

anusmaran	remembering	BG 8.13

anusmaran	thinking after	SB 1.13.36

anusmaran	thinking within	SB 1.15.2

anusmaran	remembering	SB 3.2.3

anusmaran	remembering	SB 3.30.21

anusmaran	thinking of	SB 7.1.28-29

anusmaran	always thinking of	SB 7.4.4

anusmaran	thinking about	SB 8.19.6

anusmaran	remembering	SB 8.21.18

anusmaran	keeping in mind	SB 10.44.10

anusmaran	remembering	SB 10.51.44

anusmaran	always remembering	SB 10.61.23

anusmaran	always remembering	SB 10.69.43

anusmaran	remembering constantly	SB 11.11.23-24

anusmaraṇa	constantly remembering	SB 5.8.29

anusmaraṇa	by constant meditation	SB 10.82.47

anusmaraṇam	the constant remembrance	SB 11.30.36

anusmaraṇāt	constantly remembering	SB 4.20.29

anusmarantaḥ	remembering	SB 5.26.22

anusmarantau	continuing to remember	SB 10.79.28

anusmaranti	constantly remembers	SB 1.5.36

anusmaranti	constantly remembers	SB 3.1.23

anusmarantī	she was thinking of her son	SB 10.7.24

na anusmaranti	do not remember	SB 10.82.19

anusmarantīḥ	constantly remembering	SB 10.83.40

anusmarantyaḥ	remembering	SB 10.47.36

anusmarataḥ	of one remembering constantly	SB 11.14.27

na anusmaratha	all of you do not remember	SB 10.82.18

anusmarati	always remembers	SB 4.30.9

anusmaret	always thinks of	BG 8.9

anusmaret	remembers	SB 10.57.42

anusmaret	one gains his proper remembrance	SB 12.4.33

anusmareta	regularly remembers	SB 10.79.34

anusmaryate	is always remembered	SB 4.30.28

anusmṛta	remembered	SB 5.9.3

mat-anusmṛtaye	for the sake of remembrance of Me	SB 10.27.15

pada-anusmṛti	constant remembrance of the lotus feet of the Lord	SB 3.5.13

ātma-anusmṛti	of remembrance of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 5.24.22

tat-anusmṛti-uda-śravaḥ	as they remembered their sons, tears began to roll down from their eyes	SB 10.13.34

anusmṛtiḥ	constantly thinking	SB 4.22.31

janma-anusmṛtiḥ	remembrance of the incident before his death	SB 5.8.27

anusmṛtiḥ	the opportunity to remember his past devotional service	SB 8.4.11-12

anusmṛtiḥ	the power of recollection	SB 10.85.10

anusmṛtiḥ	(there is) subsequent remembrance	SB 11.3.39

anusmṛtya	properly remembering	SB 2.4.11

anusmṛtya	remembering	SB 5.8.28

anusmṛtya	remembering	SB 6.15.18-19

anusmṛtya	coming to their senses	SB 10.23.38

anusmṛtya	thinking back upon	SB 10.23.52

anusmṛtya	remembering	SB 10.45.28

anusmṛtya	remembering	SB 10.49.14

anusmṛtyoḥ	and in remembering	NoI 8

mā anuśoca	do not be aggrieved	SB 10.4.21

anuśocāmi	lamenting	SB 1.16.31

anuśocan	thinking	SB 3.1.21

anuśocan	continuously thinking of	SB 5.8.15

anuśocantam	lamenting	SB 5.8.27

anuśocanti	lament	BG 2.11

anuśocanti	they lament	SB 4.27.25

anuśocanti	lament very much	SB 9.19.2

anuśocantyā	lamenting for	SB 7.2.53

anuśocatām	who were lamenting	SB 6.16.1

anuśocatām	who were lamenting	SB 10.63.1

anuśocatha	you cry for	SB 7.2.44

anuśocatī	lamenting about	SB 4.28.18

anuśocati	laments over	SB 6.15.2

anuśoce	just lamenting	SB 3.1.41

anuśoce	I pity	SB 3.5.14

anuśocitum	to lament	BG 2.25

anuśocyāt	the pitiable	SB 11.8.32

anuśoka	remorse	SB 10.16.10

anuspṛśatāt	let Him give	SB 3.9.22

anuśraddhayā	with faith	SB 5.6.16

ānuśravam	consisting of the process of hearing from bona fide authority	SB 11.6.19

anuśravaṇa	constantly hearing	SB 5.8.29

anuśravaṇam	thinking	SB 3.13.4

anuśravaṇāt	from hearing	SB 3.29.18

ānuśravika	according to scripture	SB 3.25.32

anuśrāvyam	must one hear	SB 4.23.35

anusṛjāma	we also create	SB 6.9.25

anusṛjate	set into motion	SB 11.10.31

anuśṛṇoti	hears	SB 3.33.37

anuśṛṇoti	hears from the authority	SB 5.6.16

anuśṛṇoti	always hears, following the path of devotional service	SB 5.14.46

anuśṛṇoti	properly hears	SB 10.85.59

anuśṛṇuyāt	hears	SB 10.33.39

anuśṛṇuyāt	hears from the proper source	SB 12.12.59

anuśṛṇuyāt	continually hears in the paramparā system	CC Antya 5.48

anuśṛṇvataḥ	and also hears	SB 8.12.46

anuśṛṇvataḥ	so that he could hear	SB 8.22.18

anuśṛṇvataḥ	as they listened carefully	SB 10.84.8

anuśṛṇvatām	hearing after	SB 1.9.25

anuśṛṇvatām	were carefully listening	SB 11.19.11

anusṛṣṭāḥ	being created one after another	SB 3.5.48

anusṛta	followed	SB 11.2.36

anusṛtā	following	CC Madhya 22.154

anusṛtam	being so contacted	SB 3.5.33

anusṛtya	following	SB 10.8.22

anusṛtya	imitating	SB 10.57.9

anusṛtya	searching out	CC Madhya 8.107

anuśrutaḥ	being heard from a bona fide spiritual master	SB 5.25.8

anuśrutān	heard from Vedic authority	SB 11.22.38

anuśrutya	overhearing	SB 1.15.33

yukta-anuṣṭhāna	by proper performance of duties	SB 3.33.24-25

anuṣṭhānāt	by executing	SB 4.21.23

karma-anuṣṭhānena	the performance of activities	SB 5.14.30

anuṣṭhāya	having carried out	SB 3.21.30

anuṣṭheyam	is right to be attempted	SB 3.13.17

anuṣṭheyam	to be executed	SB 5.8.9

anuṣṭheyam	what should be done	SB 10.16.53

anuṣṭheyam	what is to be done	SB 10.70.46

anuṣṭheyam	has to be arranged	CC Madhya 15.269

su-anuṣṭhitaḥ	perfectly performed	SB 9.5.10

sv-anuṣṭhitaḥ	excellently performed	SB 11.10.22

su-anuṣṭhitaḥ	properly executed	CC Antya 5.10

anuṣṭhitam	executed	SB 1.5.39

anuṣṭhitam	performed	SB 4.19.31

anuṣṭhitam	executed	SB 5.1.37

anuṣṭhitam	executed	SB 10.73.34

anuṣṭhitam	executed	SB 10.88.31

anuṣṭhitam	done	CC Madhya 15.269

su-anuṣṭhitāt	perfectly done	BG 3.35

su-anuṣṭhitāt	perfectly done	BG 18.47

anuṣṭhitena	conducted or managed	SB 6.13.8-9

anuṣṭhīyamānena	the process being executed	SB 11.17.1-2

anuṣṭup	another type of poetic meter	SB 3.12.45

gāyatrī uṣṇik anuṣṭup ca	known as Gāyatrī, Uṣṇik and Anuṣṭup	SB 11.21.41

anuśuśruma	I have heard by disciplic succession	BG 1.43

anuśuśruma	heard in succession	SB 3.14.2

anuśuṣyanti	gradually become weaker and weaker, with less potency	SB 10.10.16

anuśuṣyatīḥ	drying up	SB 10.20.10

anusūyāmaḥ	do we find fault	SB 10.73.9

sarva-anusyūtam	entered into everything	SB 3.27.11

anutāpa	repentance	SB 3.15.36

anutāpa	mercy	SB 3.15.47

anutāpaḥ	regret	SB 6.2.24-25

jāta-anutāpāḥ	feeling remorse	SB 10.19.3

kṛta-anutāpaḥ	repentant for misbehavior	CC Madhya 8.107

anutāpaiḥ	with remorse	SB 10.51.57

anutāpam	remorse	SB 10.20.12

anutāpanaḥ	Anutāpana	SB 6.6.29-31

anutāpanam	the experience of remorse	SB 12.12.31-33

anutāpena	by penitence	SB 3.14.44-45

anutāpitaḥ	distressed	SB 11.23.14

anutapta	lamenting sympathetically after mother Yaśodā	SB 10.7.25

anutaptaḥ	regretting	SB 1.18.49

anutaptāḥ	lamenting	SB 10.23.39

anutapya-mānaḥ	repenting	SB 5.8.28

anutapyamānaḥ	feeling remorse	SB 10.56.39

anutarkaye	I consider	SB 8.18.32

anutiṣṭhan	following	SB 3.12.31

anutiṣṭhan	executing	SB 10.16.53

anutiṣṭhan	executing	SB 10.90.28

anutiṣṭhantaḥ	executing	SB 4.24.69

anutiṣṭhanti	execute regularly	BG 3.31

anutiṣṭhanti	regularly perform	BG 3.32

anutiṣṭhanti	just to follow	SB 2.8.25

anutiṣṭhanti	those who follow	SB 11.20.37

anutiṣṭhatām	executing	SB 4.24.53

anutiṣṭhatām	of those performing	CC Madhya 23.95-98

anutiṣṭhati	follows	SB 6.5.31

anutiṣṭhati	perform	SB 10.24.6

anutpādita-doṣa-dṛṣṭayaḥ	not finding fault	SB 4.3.16

anutṛpyanti	will become satisfied	SB 10.41.13

na anutṛpye	I am not yet satiated	SB 11.3.2

anuttamā	unexcelled	SB 10.47.25

anuttamā	unexcelled	SB 12.13.17

anuttamā	superexcellent	Bs 5.58

anuttamaḥ	the greatest	SB 11.13.3

anuttamām	the highest	BG 7.18

anuttamam	the finest	BG 7.24

anuttamam	perfect to the fullest extent	SB 1.11.30

anuttamām	supreme	SB 9.8.30

anuttamam	unexcelled	SB 11.6.23

anuttamam	unsurpassable	SB 11.31.14

anuttamam	unsurpassed	SB 12.12.53

anuttamam	the best	CC Madhya 11.151

anutuṣyati	is satisfied	SB 3.13.12

guṇa-anuvāda	of the transcendental name, form, qualities, pastimes, entourage and paraphernalia, etc.	SB 3.7.14

anuvāda-paribhāṣayā	by explanatory repetition of words spoken previously by the King	SB 5.10.14

guṇa-anuvāda	of the chanting of the qualities	SB 12.12.54

anuvāda	subjects	CC Adi 2.6

anuvāda	the subject	CC Adi 2.7

anuvāda	the subject	CC Adi 2.75

anuvāda	the subject	CC Adi 2.75

anuvāda	the subject	CC Adi 2.76

anuvāda	subject	CC Adi 2.77

anuvāda	the subject	CC Adi 2.80

anuvāda	the subject	CC Adi 2.82

anuvāda	the known	CC Adi 16.56

anuvāda	known things	CC Adi 16.57

anuvāda	repetition	CC Adi 17.311

anuvāda	repetition	CC Adi 17.312

anuvāda	a review	CC Madhya 25.242

anuvāda kaile	by reviewing in that way	CC Madhya 25.242

kailuń anuvāda	I have made repetition	CC Madhya 25.262

hṛdaya-anuvāda	expression of feelings	CC Antya 1.117

antya-līlā-gaṇera kari anuvāda	I beg to repeat all the facts of this Antya-līlā	CC Antya 20.102

anuvāda kaile	if it is repeated	CC Antya 20.102

anuvāda haite	by repeating	CC Antya 20.140

uttama-śloka-guṇa-anuvādaḥ	discussion of the pastimes and glories of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 5.12.13

guṇa-anuvādaḥ	constant chanting of the glories	SB 6.2.12

anuvādaḥ	the recounting	SB 12.3.15

sukha-anuvādaiḥ	pleasure derived from mundane topics	SB 3.5.12

guṇa-anuvādam	transcendental glorification	SB 3.13.26

vinā anuvādam	without proper analytical study	SB 10.3.18

anuvādam	the subject	CC Adi 2.74

anuvādam	things already known	CC Adi 16.58

anuvadan	began to repeat	SB 4.21.20

guṇa-anuvādane	in glorifying	SB 4.22.20

anuvādāt	than narrations	SB 3.15.23

guṇa-anuvādāt	from describing such activities	SB 10.1.4

anuvāde	discussion	SB 4.15.23

anuvahati	carries out	SB 12.6.67

anuvākaiḥ	by Vedic hymns	SB 3.13.33

svarṇa-gharma-anuvākena	by the chapter of the Vedas known as Svarṇa-gharma	SB 11.27.30-31

anuvaktā	the speaker	SB 7.2.44

anuvaktā	the speaker	SB 7.2.45

anuvanam	from one forest to another	SB 9.10.4

guṇa-anuvarṇanam	description of the transcendental qualities of	SB 1.5.22

anuvarṇanam	constant recitation	SB 1.6.34

anuvarṇanam	describing	SB 6.13.22-23

anuvarṇanam	description within the disciplic succession	SB 7.10.43-44

guṇa-anuvarṇanam	describing the transcendental qualities	SB 8.12.46

anuvarṇane	in describing	SB 4.16.2

vaikuṇṭha-guṇa-anuvarṇane	describing the glories of Kṛṣṇa	SB 9.4.18-20

anuvarṇane	in the matter of description	CC Madhya 2.1

vaikuṇṭha-guṇa-anuvarṇane	in describing the transcendental character of Kṛṣṇa	CC Madhya 22.137-139

anuvarṇayan	nicely describing	SB 3.9.39

anuvarṇayanti	describe	SB 5.23.4

anuvarṇayiṣyāmaḥ	I shall explain	SB 5.26.3

arhasi anuvarṇayitum	please describe factually	SB 5.16.3

anuvarṇita	described	SB 3.15.46

anuvarṇitaḥ	so constantly described	SB 1.5.9

anuvarṇitaḥ	described, following in the footprints of previous ācāryas	SB 4.31.26

anuvarṇitāḥ	described accordingly	SB 5.25.14

anuvarṇitāḥ	have been described	SB 6.1.3

anuvarṇitam	described	SB 5.26.38

anuvarṇitam	the statements about devotional life	SB 7.8.1

anuvarṇitam	fully described	SB 8.1.6

anuvarṇitam	described	SB 12.10.40

anuvarṇite	described respectively	SB 2.10.35

anuvarṇitena	being chanted or recited	SB 7.9.12

anuvarṇitum	to explain by following in the footsteps of previous ācāryas	SB 1.1.13

anuvarṇyate	is elaborately described	SB 12.5.1

anuvarṇyate	is fittingly described	SB 12.6.4

anuvarṇyate	is being described	CC Madhya 2.1

anuvartamānāḥ	who are pursuing	SB 3.31.16

sva-dharmam anuvartamānaḥ	being perfectly situated in his own occupational duty	SB 5.7.4

anuvartamānaḥ	imitating	SB 10.16.23

anuvartamānaḥ	following	SB 10.69.44

anuvartamānām	serving	SB 3.16.21

anuvartamānam	following	SB 5.15.1

anuvartana-vaśāt	as the effect of following	SB 12.13.2

anuvartante	would follow	BG 3.23

anuvartante	follow	BG 4.11

anuvartante	follow	CC Adi 4.20

anuvartante	follow	CC Adi 4.178

anuvartante	follow	CC Madhya 8.91

anuvartantyāḥ	following	SB 6.18.40

anuvartatā	following	SB 4.30.15

anuvartatām	for those who follow You faithfully	SB 10.87.32

anuvartate	follows in the footsteps	BG 3.21

anuvartate	follows	SB 3.11.23

anuvartate	follow	SB 4.4.19

anuvartate	follow	SB 5.4.15

anuvartate	follows	SB 6.2.4

anuvartate	follows	SB 7.2.47

anuvartate	he follows	SB 10.24.16

anuvartate	follows	SB 11.21.20

anuvartate	follows	SB 11.22.37

anuvartate	follow	CC Adi 3.25

anuvartate	follow	CC Madhya 17.178

anuvartate	pursue	Bs 5.61

anuvartatīm	to Your obedient servant (Lakṣmī)	SB 4.7.34

anuvartatīm	one gopī who was imitating	SB 10.30.18

anuvartayan	engaging them properly	SB 4.16.4

anuvartayati	adopt	BG 3.16

anuvartī	follower	SB 10.63.45

ātma-anuvartinā	which is received according to his desire and past activities	SB 7.7.47

dharma-anuvartinaḥ	those who are pious and act according to the regulative principles or Vedic injunctions	SB 5.26.37

chanda-anuvartinaḥ	who are followers of the whims of death	SB 8.16.4

rantideva-anuvartinaḥ	the followers of King Rantideva (that is, his servants, his family members, his friends and others)	SB 9.21.18

anuvartinaḥ	who tended to follow	SB 10.49.4

rāma-kṛṣṇa-anuvartinaḥ	following Balarāma and Kṛṣṇa	SB 10.63.3-4

anuvartinaḥ	followers	SB 10.68.34

anuvartinaḥ	personal associates	SB 10.90.45

anuvartinām	those who approached Him to receive and welcome	SB 1.11.21

kṛṣṇa-anuvartinām	those who follow the codes of Kṛṣṇa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 1.17.12

anuvartinām	followers	SB 2.10.5

anuvartinām	following the path	SB 4.11.10

anuvartinām	who are experiencing the consequences	SB 10.24.15

anuvartinām	of those who serve	SB 10.27.9

anuvartini	obedient	SB 1.5.24

anuvartiṣu	followers	SB 4.22.62

anuvartitā	follower	SB 1.12.18

anuvartita	dwelling	SB 3.31.16

anuvartitaḥ	being followed by them	SB 1.10.3

anuvartitum	to follow in the footsteps	SB 3.14.46

anuvartma arhati	able to follow the path	SB 5.14.42

anuvaśaḥ	under control	SB 6.14.20

anuvaśān	to obedient and perfect sons	SB 7.4.46

anuvāsayati	makes fragrant	SB 5.16.18

anuvāsayati	makes sweetly flavored	SB 5.16.23

anuvāsayati	makes fragrant	SB 5.20.24

anuvatsaraḥ	orbit of the moon	SB 3.11.14

anuvatsaraiḥ	Anuvatsaras	SB 5.22.16

anuvatsaram	year after year	SB 5.2.20

anuvatsaram	every year	SB 5.14.4

anuvatsaram	Anuvatsara	SB 5.22.7

anuvatsaram	year after year	SB 10.1.56

anuvelam	occasionally	SB 3.16.20

anuveṇu-juṣṭam	possessed of flutes	CC Adi 4.155

anuviddhayā	attached	SB 3.29.5

anuviddhebhyaḥ	from these seven principles, roused into activity	SB 3.26.51

anuviddhena	being increased	SB 5.10.8

anuvidhāḥ	faithful followers	SB 10.87.17

anuvidhasya	who is imitating	SB 10.50.29

anuvidhema	I perform	SB 3.9.4

anuvidhema	we offer obeisances, following in the footsteps of the ācāryas	CC Madhya 25.38

anuvidhema	I perform	CC Antya 5.124-125

anuvidhīyate	becomes constantly engaged	BG 2.67

anuvidhīyate	it is so described	SB 2.10.45

anuvidhyamānā	being saturated	SB 5.16.20-21

anuvihitaḥ	as desired	SB 1.9.17

anuvikasat	blossoming	SB 3.15.17

anuvindanti	experience	SB 4.14.24

anuvindate	can eventually gain	SB 11.7.20

anuvindate	obtains	SB 12.12.63

vindya-anuvindyau	Vindya and Anuvindya	SB 10.58.30

anuviṣṭaḥ	was entered	SB 3.20.17

anuviśya	then after entering	SB 4.9.7

anuviśya	entering	SB 10.86.45

anuviśya	entering it	SB 11.31.11

anuviveśayatoḥ	causing to enter one forest after another	SB 10.21.7

anuviveśayatoḥ	causing to enter one forest from another	CC Adi 4.155

anuvrajāmi	follow	SB 11.14.16

anuvrajan	wandering	SB 3.31.43

anuvrajat	began to follow	SB 8.12.23

anuvrajataḥ	goes after	SB 2.3.22

anuvraje	will follow along	SB 10.25.7

anuvrajet	he may obtain	SB 3.30.4

anuvraji'	following behind	CC Madhya 7.135

anuvraji'	following	CC Antya 16.30

anuvrajya	following Her	SB 8.12.28

anuvrajya	following	SB 10.39.34

anuvrajya	walking	SB 10.81.13

anuvrajyā	following	CC Madhya 22.122

anuvratā	faithfully engaged in service	SB 4.1.65

anuvrata	Anuvrata	SB 5.20.27

anuvrata	of a friend	SB 10.23.22

anuvrataḥ	a follower in His footsteps	SB 1.12.24

anuvratāḥ	devotees	SB 2.9.10

anuvrataḥ	very obedient	SB 2.9.41

anuvrataḥ	constant follower	SB 3.3.18

anuvrataḥ	serving	SB 3.3.23

anuvrataḥ	followers	SB 3.6.31

anuvratāḥ	all faithful	SB 3.14.14

anuvrataḥ	followed	SB 3.20.3

tat-anuvratāḥ	his (Dakṣa's) followers	SB 4.3.24

anuvrataḥ	a follower of	SB 4.13.39

tat-anuvratāḥ	their followers	SB 6.14.60

tat-anuvratāḥ	followed Lord Śiva (remained silent)	SB 6.17.9

anuvrataḥ	favorable or pleased	SB 7.5.12

anuvratāḥ	following in your footsteps	SB 7.10.21

anuvrataḥ	following in their footsteps	SB 10.1.46

kaṃsam anuvratāḥ	even though apparently followers of Kaṃsa	SB 10.1.61

anuvrataḥ	imitating	SB 10.48.4

anuvratāḥ	following	SB 10.82.23-26

anuvrataḥ	a faithful follower	SB 11.6.40-41

anuvratāḥ	strict followers	CC Madhya 20.270

anuvrataiḥ	devoted to	SB 3.16.3

anuvrataiḥ	along with His companions	SB 10.15.10-12

anuvrataiḥ	by the faithful (gopīs)	SB 10.33.2

anuvratam	follower	SB 1.11.39

anuvratam	follower	SB 5.2.16

anuvratam	following the instruction of the brāhmaṇas	SB 8.15.34

anuvratān	who were actually followers of the father's principles	SB 5.1.33

anuvratān	who are ready to follow you	SB 10.4.37

anuvratānām	the followers	SB 3.7.36

anuvratāya	unto one who is a follower	SB 3.8.9

anuvṛtta	received by disciplic succession	SB 4.20.15

anuvṛttaḥ	followed	SB 1.18.6

anuvṛttam	following	SB 4.1.9

yuga-anuvṛttam	according to the different millenniums	SB 7.9.38

anuvṛttāyām	ordinary	SB 3.11.29

anuvṛttaye	for the loving propensity	SB 10.32.21

anuvṛttaye	to increase regard for	CC Adi 4.176

anuvṛtti	propensity (for pure love)	SB 10.32.20

apramattā anuvṛttibhiḥ	by executing services without being bewildered	SB 9.3.10

anuvṛttibhiḥ	by the submissive acts	SB 10.45.33

uparata-anuvṛttiḥ	who was acting as if giving up His material body	SB 5.6.6

anuvṛttiḥ	being similarly disposed (to treat them well for the satisfaction of the husband)	SB 7.11.25

anuvṛttiḥ	the following	SB 10.29.32

anuvṛttiḥ	faithful service	SB 10.60.54

anuvṛttim	the privilege of following	SB 10.90.49

anuvṛttyā	favorably	SB 1.3.38

anuvṛttyā	following in the footsteps	SB 1.11.7

vṛddha-anuvṛttyā	by serving those who are advanced in knowledge	SB 1.18.18

pādma-anuvṛttyā	by the request of the one who is born from the lotus	SB 3.1.26

vijaya-anuvṛttyā	by the service of Arjuna	SB 3.1.36

viśada-anuvṛttyā	by unflinching devotion	SB 3.4.12

anuvṛttyā	following in the footsteps	SB 3.15.25

sat-ānuvṛttyā	by our gentle behavior	SB 4.30.39-40

premṇā anuvṛttyā	because of service rendered to the husband with love and faith	SB 9.10.55

anuvṛttyā	by constant practice	SB 11.2.43

anuvṛttyā	by faithful service	SB 11.3.22

anuvṛttyā	by following in the footsteps	SB 11.28.40

ṛṣabha-anuvṛttyā	by practicing the best means of spiritual life	CC Madhya 24.88

anuvṛtyā	by following	SB 5.5.10-13

anuyajñam	continually sacrificing	SB 4.24.10

anuyānam	the following	SB 7.2.34

anuyāntam	following	SB 1.4.5

anuyanti	understand	SB 10.87.19

anuyāpitaḥ	unusually severely suffered	SB 8.22.29-30

anuyāti	follows	SB 3.31.31

anuyāyī	accordingly	CC Adi 6.91

anuyāyinaḥ	followers	SB 10.74.44

anuyayuḥ	was followed by	SB 9.6.53

anuyugam	in terms of the age	SB 2.7.36

anuyugam	according to the yugas	SB 3.29.44

anuyugam	according to different millenniums	SB 4.1.26-27

anuyugam	according to the age	SB 8.14.8

anuyugam tanūḥ	transcendental bodies according to the different yugas	SB 10.8.13

anuyuñjīta	one should fix	SB 11.13.13

anya-apanuttaye	for avoiding misery	SB 7.13.26

nanu anyathā	otherwise	SB 3.1.44

apahnuvānān	those who avoid	MM 24

apanudan	driving away	SB 5.8.20

apānudat	extirpated	SB 1.16.34

apānudat	wiped away	SB 10.38.17

apanudyāt	can drive away	BG 2.8

anya-apanuttaye	for avoiding misery	SB 7.13.26

apanuttaye	for counteracting	SB 10.22.19

apanuttaye	in order to alleviate	SB 10.27.21

apanuttaye	in order to dispel	SB 10.82.3-6

apanuttaye	in order to dispel	SB 10.85.50

apanuttaye	for the cessation	SB 12.2.17

aparādha kainu	I have committed offenses	CC Antya 7.130

manuja-apasadāḥ	the most condemned men	SB 5.6.10

āpnuvan	experienced	SB 10.27.25

āpnuvan	obtaining	CC Antya 1.177

āpnuvan	can approach	Iso 4

āpnuvanti	attain	BG 8.15

āpnuvanti	achieve	SB 2.2.23

āpnuvanti	can achieve	SB 8.3.19

āpnuyām	may have	BG 3.2

āpnuyāt	one should achieve	SB 4.23.38

āpnuyāt	achieves	SB 4.31.31

āpnuyāt	may obtain	SB 6.14.18

āpnuyāt	can obtain	SB 6.16.58

āpnuyāt	very easily obtains	SB 7.7.21

āpnuyāt	obtains	SB 10.16.61

āpnuyāt	achieves	SB 12.12.65

āpnuyāt	one can attain	Bs 5.60

āpnuyuḥ	can achieve	SB 8.24.46

apramattā anuvṛttibhiḥ	by executing services without being bewildered	SB 9.3.10

āra dhanu	another rainbow	CC Antya 15.66

manuja-arbha-māyinaḥ	of Kṛṣṇa, who appeared as the son of Nanda Mahārāja and Yaśodā, being compassionate upon them	SB 10.12.38

arcana-anubhāvena	because of worshiping	SB 8.4.11-12

arhasi anuvarṇayitum	please describe factually	SB 5.16.3

anuvartma arhati	able to follow the path	SB 5.14.42

pralambaḥ dhenukaḥ ariṣṭaḥ	Pralamba, Dhenuka and Ariṣṭa	SB 10.46.26

ārta-anukampinā	compassionate for persons in distress	SB 4.22.42

artha-anudarśinā	whose instructions were quite befitting	SB 8.15.32

mat-anugraha-arthaḥ	thinking that to achieve My mercy is the aim of life	SB 5.5.15

anuśikṣita-arthāḥ	deciding to follow the instructions	SB 6.7.24

anukampā-artham	to show special mercy	BG 10.11

loka-anuśāsana-artham	just to instruct the people	SB 5.5.28

anupapanna-artham	in which the desired results are never obtained	SB 5.14.5

anugraha-artham	to show His causeless mercy	SB 6.4.33

anugraha-artham	to show favor	SB 8.24.15

anugraha-arthāya	for the sake of obliging	SB 1.12.16

anugraha-arthāya	for the purpose of giving special mercy	SB 10.10.7

aruṇa-anujam	the younger brother of Aruṇa (Garuḍa, on Lord Kṛṣṇa's flag)	SB 10.77.11

citra-bhānuḥ vṛkaḥ aruṇaḥ	Citrabhānu, Vṛka and Aruṇa	SB 10.90.33-34

na aśaknuran	they were not able	SB 10.64.4

aśaknuvan	being unable to bear	SB 3.22.25

niranugrahaḥ asi	you have no mercy in your heart	SB 5.12.7

dhanuḥ-śūla-iṣu-carma-asi	with bow, trident, arrows, shield and sword	SB 10.4.9

dhanuḥ-asī	the carrier of the bow and the sword	SB 10.6.21

manuḥ āsīt	became the Vaivasvata Manu	SB 9.1.2-3

aśnute	achieves	BG 3.4

aśnute	enjoys	BG 5.21

aśnute	attains	BG 6.28

aśnute	one tastes	BG 13.13

aśnute	he enjoys	BG 14.20

aśnute	achieves	SB 4.20.10

aśnute	enjoys	SB 4.29.58

aśnute	suffers	SB 5.26.30

aśnute	enjoys	SB 6.1.50

aśnute	he enjoys	SB 6.3.20-21

aśnute	one enjoys	SB 7.15.47

aśnute	incurs	SB 10.44.10

aśnute	experiences	SB 10.80.31

aśnute	enjoys	SB 10.88.4

aśnute	he experiences	SB 11.3.7

aśnute	enjoys	Iso 11

aśnute	enjoys	Iso 14

aśnuvate	enjoy	SB 3.25.37

aśnuvate	enjoy	SB 8.23.7

aśnuvīta	would obtain	SB 5.19.6

bhagavat-āśrita-āśrita-anubhāvaḥ	the consequence of taking shelter of a devotee who has similarly taken shelter of a spiritual master in the paramparā system (one is sure to get out of the great nescience of the bodily concept of life)	SB 5.13.25

bhagavat-āśrita-āśrita-anubhāvaḥ	the consequence of taking shelter of a devotee who has similarly taken shelter of a spiritual master in the paramparā system (one is sure to get out of the great nescience of the bodily concept of life)	SB 5.13.25

ātanuta	extended	SB 5.24.22

ati-anugraham	an act of extreme kindness	SB 10.38.7

ati-mānuṣīm	beyond human capacity	SB 10.45.37

ati-anurakta	extremely attached	SB 11.29.7

atibhānuḥ	Atibhānu	SB 10.61.10-12

anukampita-ātmā	the all-compassionate Lord	SB 3.2.15

ātma-jaya-anubhāvita	perceivable by conquering the mind	SB 3.13.39

ātma-tanum	your body	SB 3.20.28

brahma-ātma-anubhavaḥ	perception of his own position as the Supreme Spirit	SB 5.15.7

ātma-anusmṛti	of remembrance of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 5.24.22

ātma-anuvartinā	which is received according to his desire and past activities	SB 7.7.47

ātma-anubhūtau	unto self-realization	SB 7.13.44

ātma-anubhūtyā	simply by understanding his constitutional position	SB 9.19.25

ātma-ānuśāsanam	instruction in the science of the Self	SB 10.87.44

ātma-anubhava	by direct perception of the soul	SB 11.7.10

ātma-anubhāvena	which is the Lord's own potency	SB 11.9.17-18

ātma-anubhāvena	by your own experience of ecstasy	SB 12.10.16

anubhava-ātmanaḥ	of the purely conscious	SB 2.9.1

anubhava-ātmani	which is always thought of (beginning from the lotus feet and gradually progressing upward)	SB 6.2.41

sva-anubhūti-ātmani	in self-realization	SB 7.13.44

atṛpnuma	I am satisfied	SB 3.5.10

avaloka-anugateḥ	from moving only after glancing	SB 5.10.2

sa-anurāga-avalokanam	one who is looking toward the devotees with great affection	SB 4.8.51

avāpnuhi	regain	SB 9.10.15

avāpnuyāt	may obtain	SB 11.15.12

avatāra-anucaritam	activities performed in His different incarnations	SB 8.23.30

avatāra-anugītam	the listing of the incarnations of the Supreme Lord	SB 12.12.7

manu-antara-avatāra	the incarnations who appear during the reign of each Manu	CC Madhya 20.246

manu-antara-avatāra	the incarnations who appear during the reign of each Manu	CC Madhya 20.319

manu-antara-avatāra	incarnations who appear during the reign of each Manu	CC Madhya 20.322

manu-antara-avatārāḥ	the particular incarnations of the Supreme Personality of Godhead in each manv-antara	SB 12.12.19

hanumān-āveśe	in the emotion of being Hanumān	CC Madhya 15.33

anurāga-āveśita-cittaḥ	the brāhmaṇa who was absorbed in love for his son	SB 5.9.6

bakī-baka-anujaḥ	the younger brother of Pūtanā and Bakāsura	SB 10.12.14

bakī-baka-anujaḥ	the younger brother of Pūtanā and Bakāsura	SB 10.12.14

manuja-bālakaḥ	exactly like the child of a human being	SB 10.8.36

dhanur-bāṇa haste	with arrows and bow in hand	CC Madhya 24.235

anu-bandhanāḥ	entangled	SB 10.51.56

vaira-anu-bandhāyām	a relationship of enmity with others	SB 5.14.40

tanu-bhā	the effulgence of His transcendental body	CC Adi 1.3

tanu-bhā	the effulgence of His transcendental body	CC Adi 2.5

bhagavat-tanuḥ	part of the body of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 4.19.30

bhagavat-anugraheṇa	by the special mercy of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 5.9.3

bhagavat-āśrita-āśrita-anubhāvaḥ	the consequence of taking shelter of a devotee who has similarly taken shelter of a spiritual master in the paramparā system (one is sure to get out of the great nescience of the bodily concept of life)	SB 5.13.25

bhagavat-anubhāva-upavarṇanam	which describes the process of God realization	SB 5.19.10

bhagavat-anukampayā	by the compassion of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 5.24.1

bhagavat-anukampayā	by the causeless mercy of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 5.24.18

parihīṇa-bhagavat-anugrahaḥ	being without the favor of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 5.24.26

anullańghita-bhagavat-śāsanaḥ	who never oversteps the Supreme Personality of Godhead's order	SB 5.26.6

bhagavat-nāma-rūpa-anukīrtanāt	by glorifying the transcendental form, name, attributes and paraphernalia of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 6.8.27-28

anupama-bhāi	brother named Anupama	CC Antya 4.30

anugraha-bhājanaḥ	object of favor	SB 3.4.14

bhaje anukṣaṇa	engages in devotional service twenty-four hours a day	CC Antya 9.76

karinu bhakṣaṇa	ate	CC Madhya 15.58

bhakta-anurodhe	on the request of the devotees	CC Antya 4.116

rāgānugā-bhakti	spontaneous devotional service	CC Madhya 22.108

rāgānugā-bhakti	spontaneous devotional service to Kṛṣṇa	CC Madhya 22.164

bhakti vinu	without devotional service	CC Madhya 24.92

rāgānugā-bhaktira	of spontaneous devotional service	CC Madhya 22.148

dhanuka bhāńga	break your bow	CC Madhya 24.256

dhanuka bhāńgi'	breaking the bow	CC Madhya 24.258

dhanuka bhāńgile	if I break my bow	CC Madhya 24.257

sāmba-pradyumna-cāru-bhānu-gada-ādayaḥ	Sāmba, Pradyumna, Cāru, Bhānu, Gada and others	SB 10.64.1

sahasrajit-śatajit-bhānu-mukhyaḥ	headed by Sahasrajit, Śatajit and Bhānu	SB 11.30.17

citra-bhānuḥ	the fire-god	SB 5.24.17

bhānuḥ	Bhānu	SB 6.6.4

bhānuḥ	(from Prativyoma) a son named Bhānu	SB 9.12.10

bhānuḥ subhānuḥ svarbhānuḥ	Bhānu, Subhānu and Svarbhānu	SB 10.61.10-12

dīptimān bhānuḥ	Dīptimān and Bhānu	SB 10.90.33-34

sāmbaḥ madhuḥ bṛhat-bhānuḥ	Sāmba, Madhu and Bṛhadbhānu	SB 10.90.33-34

citra-bhānuḥ vṛkaḥ aruṇaḥ	Citrabhānu, Vṛka and Aruṇa	SB 10.90.33-34

bhānuḥ	the sun	SB 12.2.29

bhānumān	Bhānumān	SB 9.12.11

bhānumān	Bhānumān	SB 9.13.19

bhānumān	Bhānumān	SB 9.23.16

prabhānaḥ bhānumān	Prabhānu and Bhānumān	SB 10.61.10-12

bhānumataḥ	from Bhānumān	SB 9.12.11

bhānunā	by the brilliant sun	SB 6.13.19-20

bhānuvindaḥ	Bhānuvinda	SB 10.76.14-15

bhartsinu	chastised	CC Adi 5.180

bhāva-anurūpa	following the ecstatic emotions	CC Madhya 13.167

bhāva-anurūpa	befitting the emotion	CC Antya 17.5

bhāva-anurūpa	according to the ecstatic emotion	CC Antya 17.6

manyuḥ, manuḥ, mahinasaḥ, mahān, śivaḥ, ṛtadhvajaḥ, ugaretāḥ, bhavaḥ, kālaḥ, vāmadevaḥ, dhṛtavrataḥ	all names of Rudra	SB 3.12.12

anu-bhavam	life after life	SB 10.83.12

bhavat-anugrahāt	by Your grace	SB 3.25.30

bhavat-niyama-anupathāḥ	who are always obedient to your order	SB 5.10.4

manuṣya-bhāvena	appearing as if an ordinary person	SB 11.5.49

hanu-bheda-bhīṣaṇam	causing fear due to the separation of the jaws	SB 7.8.19-22

hanu-bheda-bhīṣaṇam	causing fear due to the separation of the jaws	SB 7.8.19-22

anubhāvera bhitara	within the category of subordinate ecstasies	CC Madhya 23.51

bhokhe mari' genu	I am dying from hunger	CC Antya 12.20

tanu-bhṛt	a living entity who has accepted a material body	SB 5.1.12

tanu-bhṛt	one who has accepted a material body	SB 5.11.15

tanu-bhṛt	the living entities embodied in material nature	SB 8.3.17

tanu-bhṛt	resembling the embodied living beings	SB 11.31.11

tanu-bhṛtaḥ	embodied living entities	SB 4.7.30

tanu-bhṛtaḥ	the embodied living entities	SB 10.87.30

tanu-bhṛtaḥ	the embodied living beings	SB 11.6.14

tanu-bhṛtaḥ	conditioned souls with material bodies	SB 11.7.17

tanu-bhṛtaḥ	who have accepted material bodies	CC Madhya 19.143

tanu-bhṛtām	of the embodied	SB 4.1.28

tanu-bhṛtām	of the embodied	SB 4.9.10

tanu-bhṛtām	of the living entities who have accepted material bodies	SB 7.9.19

tanu-bhṛtām	with reference to living entities possessing material bodies	SB 7.9.24

tanu-bhṛtām	for all embodied living beings	SB 10.29.32

tanu-bhṛtām	of the embodied living beings	SB 11.4.4

tanu-bhṛtām	of those who are embodied	SB 11.29.6

tanu-bhṛtām	of all embodied living beings	SB 12.8.40

tanu-bhṛtām	of those who are embodied	CC Adi 1.48

tanu-bhṛtām	of those who are embodied	CC Madhya 22.48

tanu-bhṛtsu	embodied living beings	SB 11.5.10

tanu-bhṛtsu	among the living entities	CC Madhya 24.207

bhṛtya-anuraktaḥ	very favorably disposed towards devotees	SB 4.9.18

bhrū-dhanu-nartana	dancing of the eyebrows	CC Madhya 21.105

ā-jānu-lambita-bhuja	arms that reach the knees	CC Adi 3.44

bhūta-anugraha-kātarāḥ	very much anxious to bestow benedictions upon the fallen conditioned souls	SB 6.5.39

bhūta-anukampinām	who are very sympathetic toward the suffering living entities	SB 6.10.5

manuṣya-bhūtaiḥ	in the form of human beings (their relatives, disciples and so on)	SB 11.28.29

brahma-ātma-anubhavaḥ	perception of his own position as the Supreme Spirit	SB 5.15.7

brahma-kula-anugaḥ	following the directions of the brāhmaṇas	SB 7.11.15

brahma-tanum	having assumed the form of a brāhmaṇa-brahmacārī	SB 8.20.12

brahma-sukha-anubhūtyā	with Kṛṣṇa, the source of brahma-sukha (Kṛṣṇa is Parabrahman, and from Him originates His personal effulgence)	SB 10.12.7-11

brahmāṇḍa-anurūpa	according to the size of a universe	CC Madhya 21.86

bṛhadbhānu	the avatāra named Bṛhadbhānu	CC Madhya 20.328

bṛhadbhānuḥ	Bṛhadbhānu	SB 8.13.35

bṛhadbhānuḥ	Bṛhadbhānu	SB 9.23.11

candrabhānuḥ bṛhadbhānuḥ	Candrabhānu and Bṛhadbhānu	SB 10.61.10-12

bṛhaddhanuḥ	Bṛhaddhanu	SB 9.21.22

sāmbaḥ madhuḥ bṛhat-bhānuḥ	Sāmba, Madhu and Bṛhadbhānu	SB 10.90.33-34

buddhi-anumeya-lakṣaṇaiḥ	by real intelligence and by such symptoms	SB 10.3.14

manuṣya-buddhi	considering an ordinary human being	CC Antya 10.19

anugrahaḥ ca	and false ego or the demigods	SB 7.9.48

dhanuḥ ca	and the bow	SB 8.20.30

vaṃśa-anucaritāni ca	and their dynasties and characteristics	SB 9.1.4

parīkṣiḥ sudhanuḥ jahnuḥ niṣadhaḥ ca	Parīkṣi, Sudhanu, Jahnu and Niṣadha	SB 9.22.3

anugrahaḥ ca	and the maintainer	SB 10.2.28

gāyatrī uṣṇik anuṣṭup ca	known as Gāyatrī, Uṣṇik and Anuṣṭup	SB 11.21.41

caitanyera anucara	a follower of Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu	CC Adi 6.93

manuḥ cākṣuṣaḥ	the Manu named Cākṣuṣa	SB 6.6.15

candrabhānuḥ bṛhadbhānuḥ	Candrabhānu and Bṛhadbhānu	SB 10.61.10-12

caraṇa-anuśayana	surrendering unto the lotus feet	SB 5.1.36

caraṇa-anusevayā	by the service of the lotus feet	SB 5.15.7

tvat-caraṇa-ambuja-anusevām	service to the lotus feet of Your Lordship	SB 6.9.39

dekhinu caraṇe	I have seen Your lotus feet	CC Antya 4.24

dhanuḥ-śūla-iṣu-carma-asi	with bow, trident, arrows, shield and sword	SB 10.4.9

sāmba-pradyumna-cāru-bhānu-gada-ādayaḥ	Sāmba, Pradyumna, Cāru, Bhānu, Gada and others	SB 10.64.1

anukarma-cetaḥsu	whose hearts are attracted by fruitive activities	SB 4.6.49

anurakta-cetasaḥ	mind constantly attached	SB 11.14.17

chāḍinu	I abandon	CC Antya 9.100

chanda-anuvartinaḥ	who are followers of the whims of death	SB 8.16.4

sat-cit-ānanda-tanu	Kṛṣṇa's body is transcendental, full of knowledge, bliss and eternity	CC Madhya 8.136

citra-bhānuḥ	the fire-god	SB 5.24.17

citra-bhānuḥ vṛkaḥ aruṇaḥ	Citrabhānu, Vṛka and Aruṇa	SB 10.90.33-34

anurāga-āveśita-cittaḥ	the brāhmaṇa who was absorbed in love for his son	SB 5.9.6

anurakta-cittaḥ	a person whose mind is attracted	SB 7.6.11-13

cyuta-prasūna-anugatiḥ	she was followed by the flowers falling after her	SB 10.9.10

daitya-indra-anucaraiḥ	by the followers of Hiraṇyakaśipu, the King of the Daityas	SB 7.2.16

dhenu-dakṣiṇāḥ	cows and other gifts as remuneration	SB 10.24.27

diti-ja-danu-ja-ādayaḥ	the demoniac sons of Diti, and the Dānavas, another type of demon	SB 6.9.40

danu-jāḥ	O sons of demons	SB 7.6.16

danuḥ	Danu	SB 6.6.24-26

pāinu daraśana	I saw	CC Antya 15.60

pāinu daraśana	have gotten your interview	CC Antya 16.21

darśanāt anu	after seeing	SB 6.2.43

dāsa-anudāsaḥ	the servant of Your servant	SB 6.11.24

dāsa-anudāsa-sańga	association with the servant of the servant	CC Madhya 2.83

dāsa-anudāsaḥ	the servant of the servant	CC Madhya 13.80

daśa-manuṣya	ten men	CC Antya 1.22

dāsera anudāsa	most obedient servant of Your servants	CC Madhya 14.18

dāsya-anukāra	the conception of being a servant	CC Adi 6.55-56

sa-dayitā-anujaḥ	along with His wife and younger brother	SB 2.7.23

anu-deham	with each change of body	SB 11.17.53

ki dekhinu	what did I see	CC Adi 5.198

dekhinu	I have seen	CC Adi 17.232

dekhinu	I have seen	CC Adi 17.232

dekhinu	I saw	CC Madhya 2.37

dekhinu	I have seen	CC Madhya 2.39

śrī-kṛṣṇake dekhinu	saw Lord Kṛṣṇa personally	CC Madhya 4.45

dekhinu	saw	CC Madhya 18.87

dekhinu	have studied	CC Madhya 18.202

dekhinu caraṇe	I have seen Your lotus feet	CC Antya 4.24

dekhinu svapana	saw a dream	CC Antya 12.94

nā pāinu dekhite	I could not see	CC Antya 14.111

deva-manuṣyayoḥ	of the men and the demigods	SB 4.4.19

deva-anugāḥ	the inhabitants of other planets following the principles of the demigods	SB 6.13.2

deva-anugānām	the inhabitants of the upper planets like the Gandharvas and Cāraṇas, who follow the demigods	SB 8.8.26

deva-anucarāḥ	the followers of the demigods	SB 11.4.13

devakī-tanuja	the son of Devakī	CC Madhya 20.175

devatā-anukramaḥ	one demigod after another	SB 2.6.26

dhanada-anugasya	of the follower of the rich Kuvera	SB 2.7.33

bhrū-dhanu-nartana	dancing of the eyebrows	CC Madhya 21.105

indra-dhanu	like a rainbow	CC Madhya 21.109

dhanu	just like bows	CC Madhya 21.129

indra-dhanu	the bow of Indra (a rainbow)	CC Antya 15.66

āra dhanu	another rainbow	CC Antya 15.66

indra-dhanu	the rainbow	CC Antya 19.39

dhanuḥ	bow	BG 1.20

dhanuḥ-dharaḥ	the carrier of the bow and arrow	BG 18.78

dhanuḥ-vedaḥ	knowledge in the art of manipulating bows and arrows	SB 1.7.44

dhanuḥ te	the same bow	SB 1.15.21

dhanuḥ	arrows and bow	SB 1.18.24-25

dhanuḥ-koṭyā	with the front of the bow	SB 1.18.30

dhanuḥ dvāri	bow on the door	SB 3.1.16

dhanuḥ-rahasyaḥ	one who understands the intricacies of military art	SB 3.1.31

dhanuḥ	the bow	SB 3.1.40

dhanuḥ-vedam	military science	SB 3.12.38

dhanuḥ	his bow	SB 4.10.16

dhanuḥ	his bow	SB 4.16.23

dhanuḥ-koṭyā	by the power of his bow	SB 4.18.29

dhanuḥ	bow	SB 6.1.34-36

dhanuḥ	bow	SB 6.4.35-39

sapta-dhanuḥ	a distance measured by seven bows (approximately fourteen yards)	SB 6.11.11

dhanuḥ	bow	SB 7.10.65-66

dhanuḥ	unto the bow	SB 7.10.65-66

dhanuḥ	the bow	SB 7.15.42

dhanuḥ	a bow	SB 8.15.6

dhanuḥ ca	and the bow	SB 8.20.30

dhanuḥ divyam	a first-class or transcendental bow	SB 9.6.15-16

dhanuḥ-pāṇiḥ	taking his bow and arrows	SB 9.7.16

dhanuḥ	the bow	SB 9.10.6-7

dhanuḥ	the bow	SB 9.10.42-43

dhanuḥ-dharam	carrying a bow	SB 9.15.29

dhanuḥ-veda-viśāradaḥ	very expert in the art of archery	SB 9.21.35

dhanuḥ-śūla-iṣu-carma-asi	with bow, trident, arrows, shield and sword	SB 10.4.9

dhanuḥ-asī	the carrier of the bow and the sword	SB 10.6.21

dhanuḥ-śatam	the extent of one hundred bow-lengths	SB 10.16.7

dhanuḥ	the bow (rainbow)	SB 10.20.18

dhanuḥ-yāgaḥ	the bow sacrifice	SB 10.36.26

dhanuḥ-makha	the bow sacrifice	SB 10.36.37

dhanuḥ	of bow-lengths	SB 10.37.4

dhanuḥ	the bow	SB 10.42.15

dhanuḥ	the bow	SB 10.42.16

dhanuḥ-vedam	the science of military weapons	SB 10.45.34

dhanuḥ	the bow	SB 10.46.25

dhanuḥ	with bows	SB 10.50.25-28

dhanuḥ	his bow	SB 10.54.24

dhanuḥ	his bow	SB 10.54.26

dhanuḥ	bow	SB 10.54.27

dhanuḥ	(Rukmī's) bow	SB 10.54.28

dhanuḥ	his bow	SB 10.58.13-14

dhanuḥ	a bow	SB 10.58.26

śārńga-dhanuḥ	from His bow, named Śārńga	SB 10.63.10-11

dhanuḥ	the bow	SB 10.77.3

dhanuḥ	the bow	SB 10.77.33

dhanuḥ	the bow	SB 10.83.25-26

dhanuḥ	his bow	SB 10.86.10

dhanuḥ-dharaḥ	holding his bow in his hand	SB 10.89.26-27

dhanuḥ	bow	SB 10.89.32

dhanuḥ	on the bow	SB 10.89.41

dhanuḥ	the bow	SB 11.16.20

dhanuḥ-matām	among those who wield the bow	SB 11.16.20

dhanuḥ	bow	SB 11.27.27

dhanuḥ	His bow	SB 12.11.14-15

dhanuḥ-tīrthe snāna	bathing at the holy place known as Dhanus-tīrtha	CC Madhya 9.199

dhanuḥ-tīrtha	Dhanus-tīrtha	CC Madhya 9.311

dhanuḥ	by which the bow	CC Madhya 14.194

smara-dhanuḥ	the bow of Cupid	CC Antya 1.171

dhanuḥ-mataḥ	of the bowman	CC Antya 1.195

dhanuḥṣu	on the bows	SB 9.15.33

dhanuka bhāńga	break your bow	CC Madhya 24.256

dhanuka bhāńgile	if I break my bow	CC Madhya 24.257

dhanuka bhāńgi'	breaking the bow	CC Madhya 24.258

dhanur-guṇa	the string of the bow	CC Madhya 21.129

dhanur-bāṇa haste	with arrows and bow in hand	CC Madhya 24.235

dhanurbhiḥ	with bows	SB 11.30.14

dhanuṣā	by that bow also	SB 1.15.7

dhanuṣaḥ	bow	SB 2.7.25

dhanuṣaḥ	of the bow	SB 10.4.32

dhanuṣaḥ	of the bow	SB 10.42.15

dhanuṣaḥ	of the bow	SB 10.42.18

dhanuṣaḥ	of the bow	SB 10.42.26-27

dhanuṣaḥ	bow-lengths	SB 10.43.8

dhanuṣi	upon his bow	SB 4.11.1

dhanuṣi	on his bow	SB 4.11.3

dhanuṣi	on the bow	SB 4.17.15

dhanuṣī	two bows	SB 5.2.7

dhanuṣi	on the bow	SB 7.10.57

dhanuṣi	on the bow	SB 7.10.67

dhanuṣi	on the bow	SB 9.10.23

sva-dhanuṣi	upon his bow	SB 12.8.25

dhanuḥ-dharaḥ	the carrier of the bow and arrow	BG 18.78

manu-vaṃśa-dharaḥ	as the descendant of the Manu dynasty	SB 2.7.20

dhanuḥ-dharaḥ	holding his bow in his hand	SB 10.89.26-27

dhanuḥ-dharam	carrying a bow	SB 9.15.29

dharinu	I caught	CC Madhya 5.149

dharma-anuvartinaḥ	those who are pious and act according to the regulative principles or Vedic injunctions	SB 5.26.37

dharma-sūnunā	by the son of Yamarāja, religion personified (King Yudhiṣṭhira)	SB 10.77.6-7

sva-dharmam anuvartamānaḥ	being perfectly situated in his own occupational duty	SB 5.7.4

dhenu-matyām	in the womb of Dhenumatī, the wife of Devadyumna	SB 5.15.3

dhenu-dakṣiṇāḥ	cows and other gifts as remuneration	SB 10.24.27

dhenu	of cows	SB 10.58.50-51

kāma-dhenu	cows that can fulfill all desires	CC Madhya 14.223

kāma-dhenu	of kāma-dhenu cows that can deliver unlimited milk	CC Madhya 14.228

kāma-dhenu	of desire cows	CC Madhya 15.179

dhenu-gaṇa	all the cows	CC Madhya 17.196

dhenu	the cows	CC Madhya 17.197

dhenu	cows	CC Antya 14.107

vastra-ābharaṇa-dhenubhiḥ	with clothing, ornaments and many cows	SB 8.16.53

srak-abhīṣṭa-dhenubhiḥ	by offering flower garlands and very desirable cows	SB 10.7.5

dhenuka	of the demon Dhenuka	SB 10.15.40

dhenukaḥ	the jackass demon, Dhenuka	SB 10.43.25

pralambaḥ dhenukaḥ ariṣṭaḥ	Pralamba, Dhenuka and Ariṣṭa	SB 10.46.26

dhenukaiḥ	by Dhenuka	SB 10.2.1-2

dhenukasya	of Dhenuka	SB 10.15.36

dhenukasya	of Dhenuka	SB 12.12.30

dhenukena	by Dhenuka	SB 10.15.22

dhenum	a cow of plenty	SB 3.21.15

dhenuṣu	among cows	SB 11.16.14

dhenuṣu	the cows	SB 12.2.12-16

anukampita-dhiyā	out of compassion	SB 3.28.29

anurakta-dhiyām	for those whose minds are naturally attached in a favorable way	SB 11.5.48

manyuḥ, manuḥ, mahinasaḥ, mahān, śivaḥ, ṛtadhvajaḥ, ugaretāḥ, bhavaḥ, kālaḥ, vāmadevaḥ, dhṛtavrataḥ	all names of Rudra	SB 3.12.12

dhunuta	remove	SB 10.25.6

dhunute	gives up	SB 7.15.62

dhunute	destroys	SB 9.24.62

dhyāna-anubhāvena	by meditation	SB 5.1.23

anu-dina	gradually, day after day	CC Madhya 8.194

anu-dinam	day after day	SB 4.23.39

anu-dinam	every day	MM 40

dīptimān bhānuḥ	Dīptimān and Bhānu	SB 10.90.33-34

diti-ja-danu-ja-ādayaḥ	the demoniac sons of Diti, and the Dānavas, another type of demon	SB 6.9.40

divya-gandha-anulepanaiḥ	by many kinds of pulp, like sandalwood and aguru, to smear upon the body of Lord Vāmanadeva	SB 8.21.6-7

dhanuḥ divyam	a first-class or transcendental bow	SB 9.6.15-16

anutpādita-doṣa-dṛṣṭayaḥ	not finding fault	SB 4.3.16

dravya-manuṣya	articles and men	CC Antya 6.258

dṛḍhahanuḥ	Dṛḍhahanu	SB 9.21.23

anutpādita-doṣa-dṛṣṭayaḥ	not finding fault	SB 4.3.16

anugraha-dṛṣṭi	merciful glance	SB 2.7.28

manuṣya-dṛṣṭyā	seeing Him as an ordinary man	SB 10.23.10-11

duḥkha-śoka-tamaḥ-nudam	to minimize their unlimited unhappiness and lamentation, which are caused by ignorance	SB 9.24.61

duḥkha anubhaviyā	feeling unhappy	CC Antya 6.283

duranujñātam	not given proper permission	SB 10.64.35

duryodhana-vaśa-anugau	subservient to Duryodhana	SB 10.58.30

dhanuḥ dvāri	bow on the door	SB 3.1.16

jānu-dvayam	up to the knees	SB 3.28.23

ei anusandhāna	this inquiry	CC Antya 8.76

ei anusāre	in this way	CC Antya 20.76

eka-tanu	one body	CC Adi 5.175

eka anucara	one follower	CC Madhya 16.161

nanu eṣaḥ	certainly by this only	SB 1.10.23

sāmba-pradyumna-cāru-bhānu-gada-ādayaḥ	Sāmba, Pradyumna, Cāru, Bhānu, Gada and others	SB 10.64.1

gāḍha anurāga	deep affection	CC Madhya 11.149

gāḍha-anurāgera	of one who has deep attachment	CC Antya 4.62

manuṣya-gahane	in the crowd	CC Adi 10.142

karinu gamana	went	CC Antya 17.25

dhenu-gaṇa	all the cows	CC Madhya 17.196

divya-gandha-anulepanaiḥ	by many kinds of pulp, like sandalwood and aguru, to smear upon the body of Lord Vāmanadeva	SB 8.21.6-7

antya-līlā-gaṇera kari anuvāda	I beg to repeat all the facts of this Antya-līlā	CC Antya 20.102

anu-gańgam	from Gańgādvārā (Hardwar)	SB 12.1.35

gańgāyām anu	from the mouth of the Ganges to the source	SB 9.20.23

anumāna-garbhiṇyā	conceived by logic	SB 12.5.9

śaryātiḥ śantanuḥ gayaḥ	Śaryāti, Śantanu and Gaya	SB 12.3.9-13

gāyatrī uṣṇik anuṣṭup ca	known as Gāyatrī, Uṣṇik and Anuṣṭup	SB 11.21.41

genu	I have become	CC Madhya 1.55

genu	I went	CC Madhya 10.123

genu	went	CC Madhya 10.124

jhuri' genu	I became dried up	CC Madhya 13.113

genu	I went	CC Madhya 16.278

bhokhe mari' genu	I am dying from hunger	CC Antya 12.20

genu	went	CC Antya 14.106

uttarā-hanuvat ghanam	on the cloud resembling the upper lips	SB 10.12.20

svarṇa-gharma-anuvākena	by the chapter of the Vedas known as Svarṇa-gharma	SB 11.27.30-31

anu-ghāsam	increasingly with each morsel	SB 11.2.42

gīta-anubhāvaḥ	whose glories are described	SB 9.8.27

gońāinu	I have passed	CC Madhya 20.99

gopāla-sūnum	Kṛṣṇa, the son of a cowherd man	SB 10.11.50

gopī-ānugatya	subservience to the gopīs	CC Madhya 8.230

gṛha-anupāgatam	now returned home	SB 1.11.31

gṛha-anubandhaḥ	I who am bound by attachment to family life, or worldly life	SB 5.10.20

gṛhītā nu	just to draw towards	SB 3.5.12

guṇa-anuvarṇanam	description of the transcendental qualities of	SB 1.5.22

guṇa-anukathane	describing the glories	SB 2.1.7

guṇa-anukathane	in describing the transcendental attributes of the Lord	SB 2.4.11

guṇa-anuvāda	of the transcendental name, form, qualities, pastimes, entourage and paraphernalia, etc.	SB 3.7.14

guṇa-anuvādam	transcendental glorification	SB 3.13.26

guṇa-anuvādane	in glorifying	SB 4.22.20

guṇa-anuraktam	being attached to the material modes of nature	SB 5.11.8

guṇa-karma-anubaddham	bound by the modes of nature and the reactions of material activities	SB 5.11.8

uttama-śloka-guṇa-anuvādaḥ	discussion of the pastimes and glories of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 5.12.13

guṇa-vatsa-snuta-udhāḥ	earth becoming like a cow whose udders flowed upon seeing Gaya's qualities in ruling over the citizens	SB 5.15.10

guṇa-anubhāvaḥ	possessing transcendental qualities and glories	SB 5.25.13

guṇa-anuvādaḥ	constant chanting of the glories	SB 6.2.12

guṇa-anuvarṇanam	describing the transcendental qualities	SB 8.12.46

vaikuṇṭha-guṇa-anuvarṇane	describing the glories of Kṛṣṇa	SB 9.4.18-20

guṇa-anuvādāt	from describing such activities	SB 10.1.4

guṇa-karma-anu-rūpāṇi	according to His attributes and activities	SB 10.8.15

guṇa-anukathane	always engaged in talking about Your pastimes	SB 10.10.38

guṇa-karma-anurūpāṇi	according to His attributes and activities	SB 10.26.18

guṇa-anuvāda	of the chanting of the qualities	SB 12.12.54

anupama-guṇā	having unparalleled qualities	CC Madhya 8.182

dhanur-guṇa	the string of the bow	CC Madhya 21.129

vaikuṇṭha-guṇa-anuvarṇane	in describing the transcendental character of Kṛṣṇa	CC Madhya 22.137-139

kāla-guṇān anu	according to seasonal changes	SB 10.3.33

anukūla-īśvara-vipra-guptāḥ	protected by brāhmaṇas, by whose favor the supreme controller is always present	SB 8.17.16

guru-anuśikṣitam	that which was taught by their teachers	SB 7.8.1

guru-anujñātaḥ	invited by his spiritual master	SB 12.8.7-11

anusasāra ha	followed	SB 9.2.5-6

ha-inu	became	CC Madhya 11.144

ha-inu	I have become	CC Antya 9.139

pavitra ha-inu	have become purified	CC Antya 16.21

ha-inu	I have become	CC Antya 16.21

anubhava haila	there was perception	CC Madhya 21.79

hainu	became	CC Adi 5.183

anuvāda haite	by repeating	CC Antya 20.140

anugata hañā	following in the footsteps	CC Madhya 9.133

hanu-bheda-bhīṣaṇam	causing fear due to the separation of the jaws	SB 7.8.19-22

hanuḥ	his jaws	SB 4.14.44

hanum	jaw	SB 6.12.27-29

uttarām hanum	the upper jaw	SB 6.12.27-29

hanumān	His Grace Hanumānjī	SB 5.19.1

hanumān	the great devotee Hanumān	SB 11.12.3-6

hanumān	Hanumān	SB 11.16.29

hanumān	the village deity Hanumān	CC Madhya 8.300

hanumān-āveśe	in the emotion of being Hanumān	CC Madhya 15.33

hanumān	Hanumān	CC Madhya 15.156

hanumat	Hanumān	SB 9.10.16

hanumat-yutaḥ	accompanied by Hanumān	SB 9.10.32

uttarā-hanuvat ghanam	on the cloud resembling the upper lips	SB 10.12.20

adharā-hanuvat	resembling the lower lips	SB 10.12.20

hārāinu	I have lost	CC Antya 15.79

hareḥ anugrahāt	by the mercy of the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 10.11.24

hari-tanum	the transcendental body of the Lord	CC Adi 5.224

harīndra-anujābhyām	accompanied by the king of the monkeys, Hanumān, and His younger brother Lakṣmaṇa	SB 9.10.4

anurāga-hāsa	with kind smiling	SB 3.4.10

dhanur-bāṇa haste	with arrows and bow in hand	CC Madhya 24.235

haya anugṛhīta	was given the mercy	CC Antya 6.161

he rāma-anuja	O younger brother of Lord Balarāma	MM 44

heya-anumitam	concluded to be inferior	SB 5.11.3

tanu-hīna	without a body	CC Madhya 2.22

hṛdaya-anuvāda	expression of feelings	CC Antya 1.117

anukrośa-hṛdayaḥ	very kindhearted	SB 4.24.32

nija-jana-anukampita-hṛdayaḥ	whose heart is always filled with mercy for His devotees	SB 5.24.27

hṛṣyat-tanuḥ	having transcendental ecstatic bliss manifested in the body	SB 7.9.6

icchā-anugṛhīta-rūpam	accepting form according to desire	SB 3.14.50

anugraha-īkṣitam	due to the merciful glance	SB 10.15.52

manuṣya-indra	O ruler of men	SB 4.29.76-77

daitya-indra-anucaraiḥ	by the followers of Hiraṇyakaśipu, the King of the Daityas	SB 7.2.16

kosala-indra-anumoditaḥ	approved by the King of Kosala, Lord Rāmacandra	SB 9.10.29

manuṣya-indra	O Your Majesty, best of human beings	SB 9.18.43

manuṣya-indra	O great ruler of men	SB 12.6.24

indra-anucaraiḥ	by the followers of Indra	SB 12.8.30

indra-dhanu	like a rainbow	CC Madhya 21.109

indra-dhanu	the bow of Indra (a rainbow)	CC Antya 15.66

indra-dhanu	the rainbow	CC Antya 19.39

manuja-indrāṇām	of the daughters of worldly kings	SB 9.6.41-42

la-inu	I take	CC Adi 11.12

ha-inu	became	CC Madhya 11.144

la-inu śaraṇa	I have taken shelter	CC Antya 7.130

ha-inu	I have become	CC Antya 9.139

pavitra ha-inu	have become purified	CC Antya 16.21

ha-inu	I have become	CC Antya 16.21

īśa-anukathāḥ	the science of God	SB 2.10.1

kaḥ nu īśa	O my Lord	SB 3.4.15

īśa-anukathāḥ	a description of the incarnations of the Lord	CC Adi 2.91-92

anugraha-iṣitam	to bestow benediction	SB 1.10.27

dhanuḥ-śūla-iṣu-carma-asi	with bow, trident, arrows, shield and sword	SB 10.4.9

anukūla-īśvara-vipra-guptāḥ	protected by brāhmaṇas, by whose favor the supreme controller is always present	SB 8.17.16

manuja-īśvara	O lord of men (Nimi)	SB 11.5.38-40

snuṣā iyam tava	this child will be your daughter-in-law, the wife of your future son	SB 10.4.4

manu-ja	of those born in human society	SB 5.2.6

diti-ja-danu-ja-ādayaḥ	the demoniac sons of Diti, and the Dānavas, another type of demon	SB 6.9.40

diti-ja-danu-ja-ādayaḥ	the demoniac sons of Diti, and the Dānavas, another type of demon	SB 6.9.40

jaghnuḥ	began to beat	SB 8.11.1

jaghnuḥ	killed	SB 8.21.16-17

jaghnuḥ	killed them	SB 9.10.20

jaghnuḥ	killed	SB 9.16.11

jaghnuḥ	killed	SB 9.20.34

jaghnuḥ	they struck	SB 10.54.6

jaghnuḥ	they killed	SB 10.77.4

jaghnuḥ	they attacked	SB 11.9.2

jaghnuḥ	they killed	SB 11.30.17

jaghnuḥ	they killed	SB 11.30.18

jaghnuḥ	they attacked	SB 11.30.21

manu-jaḥ	a descendant of Manu (a man)	SB 2.3.23

manu-jaḥ	a man	SB 5.5.15

danu-jāḥ	O sons of demons	SB 7.6.16

manu-jaḥ	appearing as a human being	SB 9.10.12

jahnuḥ	by the name Jahnu	SB 9.15.1

parīkṣiḥ sudhanuḥ jahnuḥ niṣadhaḥ ca	Parīkṣi, Sudhanu, Jahnu and Niṣadha	SB 9.22.3

manu-jaiḥ	by men	SB 5.14.5

anuloma-jam	birth in a mixed family in which the father is superior in social status to the mother	SB 11.20.2

manu-jān	humans	SB 10.62.17

nija-jana-anukampita-hṛdayaḥ	whose heart is always filled with mercy for His devotees	SB 5.24.27

tanu-jānām	sons	SB 10.90.35

manuṣya-janama	birth as a human being	CC Madhya 8.33

jāninu	I have understood	CC Madhya 7.67

jāninu	I understand	CC Madhya 9.161

jāninu	I can understand	CC Antya 8.75

janma-anusmṛtiḥ	remembrance of the incident before his death	SB 5.8.27

pāiyā mānuṣa janma	anyone who has gotten the form of a human body	CC Adi 13.123

janma-tanu-mana	their births, bodies and minds	CC Madhya 21.114

manuṣye janmiyā	taking birth in human society	CC Antya 3.264

jānu-dvayam	up to the knees	SB 3.28.23

jānu	knees	SB 4.24.51

jānu	knees	SB 5.12.5-6

jānu	knees	SB 10.6.21

jānu-yugam	whose two knees	SB 10.39.49-50

ā-jānu-lambita-bhuja	arms that reach the knees	CC Adi 3.44

jānu	knees	CC Adi 14.21

aghṛṣṭa-jānubhiḥ	without the help of crawling on Their knees	SB 10.8.26

jānubhyām	on the ankles	SB 2.5.40-41

jānubhyām	with its two knees	SB 8.11.15

jānubhyām	by the strength of Their knees	SB 10.8.21

jānubhyām	their knees	SB 10.44.3

se jānuka	let him know	CC Madhya 21.25

se jānuka	he may know	CC Antya 3.87

jānunī	two knees	SB 2.1.27

jānuni	on his knee	SB 4.6.38

jānuni	on the knees	SB 8.20.23

jānunī	against the opponent's knees	SB 10.44.3

jānunoḥ	on the two knees	SB 6.8.4-6

jāta-anurāgāḥ	experiencing a great longing or attraction	SB 10.13.33

jāta-anutāpāḥ	feeling remorse	SB 10.19.3

manuṣya-jāti	entities born as human beings	CC Madhya 19.145

ātma-jaya-anubhāvita	perceivable by conquering the mind	SB 3.13.39

tanu-je	in his son, Jaḍa Bharata	SB 5.9.6

jhuri' genu	I became dried up	CC Madhya 13.113

jininu	conquered	CC Madhya 6.230

anu-veṇu-juṣṭam	possessed of flutes	SB 10.21.7

anuveṇu-juṣṭam	possessed of flutes	CC Adi 4.155

kaḥ nu īśa	O my Lord	SB 3.4.15

kahinu	shall speak	CC Madhya 25.106

anubhava kaila	perceived	CC Madhya 4.78

kaila anumāne	guessed	CC Antya 2.155

anuvāda kaile	by reviewing in that way	CC Madhya 25.242

anuvāda kaile	if it is repeated	CC Antya 20.102

kailuń anuvāda	I have made repetition	CC Madhya 25.262

kainu	made	CC Adi 7.54

kainu	I did	CC Adi 12.40

kainu	have done	CC Adi 12.45

kainu	did	CC Adi 17.201-202

kainu	did	CC Madhya 6.200

kainu	I did	CC Madhya 11.42

kainu	I have made	CC Antya 6.129

aparādha kainu	I have committed offenses	CC Antya 7.130

kainu	I made	CC Antya 9.122

kāla-anugatena	in due course of time	SB 3.8.13

kāla-anukūlaiḥ	following the circumstances presented by time	SB 6.11.2-3

tat-kāla-anuguṇaḥ	according to the particular time	SB 7.1.8

kāla-guṇān anu	according to seasonal changes	SB 10.3.33

manyuḥ, manuḥ, mahinasaḥ, mahān, śivaḥ, ṛtadhvajaḥ, ugaretāḥ, bhavaḥ, kālaḥ, vāmadevaḥ, dhṛtavrataḥ	all names of Rudra	SB 3.12.12

anu-kālam	all the time	SB 10.64.42

anurāga-kalayā	loving	SB 3.16.11

kāma-anujena	by the younger brother of lust (anger)	SB 3.15.31

kāma-anusevayā	by enjoying acquired desired objects	SB 10.20.21

kāma-dhenu	cows that can fulfill all desires	CC Madhya 14.223

kāma-dhenu	of kāma-dhenu cows that can deliver unlimited milk	CC Madhya 14.228

kāma-dhenu	of desire cows	CC Madhya 15.179

kaṃsa-anuśiṣṭaḥ	sent by Kaṃsa	SB 10.12.14

kaṃsam anuvratāḥ	even though apparently followers of Kaṃsa	SB 10.1.61

anu kandukam	after her ball	SB 12.8.26-27

śrī-kānu ṭhākura	Śrī Kānu ṭhākura	CC Adi 11.40

kānu-paṇḍita	Kānu Paṇḍita	CC Adi 12.61

kānu-prema-viṣe	the poison of love of Kṛṣṇa	CC Madhya 3.124

kānu pāń	I can get Kṛṣṇa	CC Madhya 3.125

kānu-ṭhāme	before Kṛṣṇa	CC Madhya 8.194

anudvega-karam	not agitating	BG 17.15

kare anugati	follows	CC Madhya 22.153

kare sarva-anusandhāna	takes all information of	CC Antya 8.42

prabhure kare anunaya	entreated the Lord	CC Antya 9.42

kari anubhava	I can understand	CC Adi 4.241

anumāna kari	I hope	CC Madhya 15.227

kari anumāna	I can conjecture	CC Antya 1.87

anunaya kari'	with great humility	CC Antya 2.134

kari anumāna	I make a guess	CC Antya 5.44

kari anumāna	I guess	CC Antya 16.72

kari anumāna	I can infer	CC Antya 20.92

antya-līlā-gaṇera kari anuvāda	I beg to repeat all the facts of this Antya-līlā	CC Antya 20.102

karinu	did	CC Adi 5.174

karinu	I did	CC Adi 5.199

karinu	attempted	CC Adi 8.77

nā karinu	I did not execute	CC Adi 17.184

karinu	did	CC Madhya 6.230

karinu	I have done	CC Madhya 10.123

karinu	have done	CC Madhya 10.175

karinu bhakṣaṇa	ate	CC Madhya 15.58

karinu	I did	CC Madhya 15.281

karinu gamana	went	CC Antya 17.25

karinu vandana	I have prayed to	CC Antya 20.101

karma-anubaddhaḥ	bound by the results of his past deeds	SB 5.5.9

guṇa-karma-anubaddham	bound by the modes of nature and the reactions of material activities	SB 5.11.8

karma-anuṣṭhānena	the performance of activities	SB 5.14.30

karma-anurodhena	with consideration of the activities performed	SB 6.1.43

karma-anugaḥ	following the reactions of his own fruitive activities	SB 10.1.39

guṇa-karma-anu-rūpāṇi	according to His attributes and activities	SB 10.8.15

karma-anubandhanam	which is simply the basis of bondage to material activity	SB 10.23.35

guṇa-karma-anurūpāṇi	according to His attributes and activities	SB 10.26.18

ānuṣańga-karma	secondary work	CC Adi 4.14

kārya-mānuṣaḥ	who was acting like a human being	SB 10.16.60

kārya-anurūpa	according to the program of activities	CC Madhya 13.64

kārya-anurodhe	because of different duties	CC Antya 4.9

bhūta-anugraha-kātarāḥ	very much anxious to bestow benedictions upon the fallen conditioned souls	SB 6.5.39

anugraha-kātaram	eager to show mercy	CC Antya 10.1

rūpa-anupama-kathā	news about his younger brothers, Rūpa Gosvāmī and Anupama	CC Madhya 25.211

kathana-anurāga	attracted to discussions	CC Madhya 24.88

manuja-kāyaiḥ	the bodies of men	CC Adi 3.66

kevala-anubhava-ānanda-svarūpaḥ	Your form is sac-cid-ānanda-vigraha [Bs. 5.1], and whoever perceives You becomes transcendentally blissful	SB 10.3.13

khāinu	I have eaten	CC Antya 11.30

ki dekhinu	what did I see	CC Adi 5.198

ki śuninu	what did I hear	CC Adi 5.198

kila anucaritam	pastimes as a paramahaṃsa, above all regulative varṇāśrama principles	SB 5.6.9

kim nu	what to speak of	BG 1.32-35

kim nu	what then	SB 10.38.42

kim nu	why indeed	SB 10.47.16

kim nu	what then to speak of	SB 10.80.11

kim nu	what to speak of	SB 11.30.3

tava anucara-kińkarau	because of being servants of Your most confidential devotee Nārada Muni	SB 10.10.37

anu-kīrtitaḥ	is glorified	SB 12.12.25-26

kosala-indra-anumoditaḥ	approved by the King of Kosala, Lord Rāmacandra	SB 9.10.29

dhanuḥ-koṭyā	with the front of the bow	SB 1.18.30

dhanuḥ-koṭyā	by the power of his bow	SB 4.18.29

anunaya-kovidaḥ	one who is very expert in flattery	SB 4.26.20

krama-anurodhena	in order of chronology	SB 4.29.68

kṛśānunā	by the fire	MM 22

kṛṣṇa-anuvartinām	those who follow the codes of Kṛṣṇa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead	SB 1.17.12

kṛṣṇa-anubhāva	rapt in thought of Kṛṣṇa	SB 2.4.3-4

kṛṣṇa-anukūleṣu	who were always protected by Kṛṣṇa	SB 6.10.28

kṛṣṇa-anubhāvaḥ	the unlimited potency of Lord Kṛṣṇa (by which He can deliver a devotee)	SB 8.4.14

kṛṣṇa-anubhāvena	because of the mercy of Lord Kṛṣṇa	SB 9.22.34

kṛṣṇa-anucarasya	and the servant of Kṛṣṇa (Uddhava)	SB 10.46.44

kṛṣṇa-anucaram	the servant of Lord Kṛṣṇa (Uddhava)	SB 10.47.1-2

rāma-kṛṣṇa-anuvartinaḥ	following Balarāma and Kṛṣṇa	SB 10.63.3-4

kṛṣṇa-tanu-sama	exactly like the transcendental body of Kṛṣṇa	CC Adi 5.18

kṛṣṇa-anurāga	attraction for Kṛṣṇa	CC Madhya 8.169

kṛṣṇa-anuśīlanam	cultivation of service in relationship to Kṛṣṇa	CC Madhya 19.167

kṛṣṇa-anuśīlana	cultivation of Kṛṣṇa consciousness	CC Madhya 19.168

kṛṣṇa pāinu	I have gotten Kṛṣṇa	CC Antya 14.20

kṛṣṇa-tanu	the body of Kṛṣṇa	CC Antya 19.40

śrī-kṛṣṇake dekhinu	saw Lord Kṛṣṇa personally	CC Madhya 4.45

vaira-anubandha-kṛt	determined to continue such enmity	SB 10.2.23

kṛta-manu-kṛta-vatyaḥ	in the act of copying the movements	SB 1.9.40

kṛta-manu-kṛta-vatyaḥ	in the act of copying the movements	SB 1.9.40

kṛta-anugraha	manifested by His grace	SB 4.7.24

kṛta-anuṣańgaḥ	having developed attachment	SB 5.8.11

kṛta-anutāpaḥ	repentant for misbehavior	CC Madhya 8.107

anugrahaḥ kṛtaḥ	this was a great favor done by him to you	SB 10.10.40

anu-kṣaṇam	constantly	SB 10.13.35

anukūjati kūjitam	imitates the cooing	SB 10.15.10-12

brahma-kula-anugaḥ	following the directions of the brāhmaṇas	SB 7.11.15

kula-vara-tanu	of the family women	CC Antya 1.167

kūrma-tanum	the body of a tortoise	SB 5.18.29

kūrma-ākāra-anubhāvera	of ecstatic emotion in the form of a tortoise	CC Antya 20.131

la-inu	I take	CC Adi 11.12

la-inu śaraṇa	I have taken shelter	CC Antya 7.130

anupamera lāgi'	on account of the passing away of Anupama	CC Antya 1.39

lainu	I have taken	CC Madhya 5.47

buddhi-anumeya-lakṣaṇaiḥ	by real intelligence and by such symptoms	SB 10.3.14

ā-jānu-lambita-bhuja	arms that reach the knees	CC Adi 3.44

ājānu-lambita	reaching down to the knees	CC Madhya 17.108

tanu-latā	of creeperlike bodies	MM 4

līlā-tanubhiḥ	by different pastime forms	SB 7.7.34

līlā-anukrama	the pastimes in chronological order	CC Adi 12.93

antya-līlā-gaṇera kari anuvāda	I beg to repeat all the facts of this Antya-līlā	CC Antya 20.102

manuṣya-lińgam	appearing just like a human being	SB 7.10.48

manuṣya-lińgam	as if an ordinary human being	SB 7.15.75

loka-anugataḥ	following the conditioned souls	SB 3.21.16

loka-anugatān	the followers of worldly affairs	SB 3.21.17

loka-anuśāsana-artham	just to instruct the people	SB 5.5.28

sakala-loka-anubhāvasya	who is auspicious for all planetary systems	SB 5.24.30

tri-loka-manohara-anubhāva	O You who are perceived as the most beautiful within the three worlds	SB 6.9.40

anurakta-lokaḥ	being loved by the citizens	SB 4.20.15

mānuṣam lokam	the human form of life	SB 11.7.74

lokān anu	throughout the universe	SB 4.30.11

manuṣya-loke	in the world of human society	BG 15.2

mā anuśoca	do not be aggrieved	SB 10.4.21

sāmbaḥ madhuḥ bṛhat-bhānuḥ	Sāmba, Madhu and Bṛhadbhānu	SB 10.90.33-34

madhukara-anupadavīm	the road followed in pursuance of devotees who are attached like bumblebees	SB 5.14.1

mahā-anubhāvān	great souls	BG 2.5

mahā-anubhāva	of the Supreme Personality of Godhead Śrī Kṛṣṇa	SB 1.5.21

mahā-anubhāvāḥ	great minds	SB 1.19.8

mahā-anubhāvaḥ	expanded influence	SB 3.14.48

mahā-anubhāvaḥ	the great soul	SB 4.16.27

mahā-anubhāvaḥ	the great personality	SB 5.5.28

mahā-anubhāvaḥ	a great soul	SB 5.10.1

mahā-anubhāvasya	who was an exalted devotee	SB 5.24.26

mahā-anubhāva	the supremely opulent	SB 6.9.33

mahā-anubhāvāya	the most perfect realized soul, or the Supersoul	SB 6.16.25

mahā-anubhāvāya	the most powerful	SB 6.19.7

mahā-anubhāvāya	whose existence is inconceivable	SB 8.6.8

mahā-anubhāvāḥ	the exalted brāhmaṇas	SB 8.15.4

mahā-anubhāvaḥ	Bali Mahārāja, who was a great and exalted soul	SB 8.23.1

mahā-anubhāvaḥ	the possessor of great powers of perception	SB 10.77.28

mahā-anubhāvena	with the supremely compassionate Lord	SB 10.81.36

mahā-anubhāvam	almighty	SB 10.89.54-56

mahā-anubhāva	O mighty Lord	SB 11.19.10

mahā-anubhūtiḥ	full of transcendental consciousness	SB 11.28.35

mahā-anubhāvera	of a great personality	CC Madhya 7.72

mahā-anubhāvam	the wise person	NBS 46

manyuḥ, manuḥ, mahinasaḥ, mahān, śivaḥ, ṛtadhvajaḥ, ugaretāḥ, bhavaḥ, kālaḥ, vāmadevaḥ, dhṛtavrataḥ	all names of Rudra	SB 3.12.12

mahānubhavera	of those who are advanced in realization	CC Antya 5.78

mahat-anugraham	the mercy of the Lord	SB 3.31.15

mahat-anugrahaḥ	compassion by the Supreme	SB 7.9.42

mahat-anubhava	the conception of great souls	CC Adi 6.54

manyuḥ, manuḥ, mahinasaḥ, mahān, śivaḥ, ṛtadhvajaḥ, ugaretāḥ, bhavaḥ, kālaḥ, vāmadevaḥ, dhṛtavrataḥ	all names of Rudra	SB 3.12.12

dhanuḥ-makha	the bow sacrifice	SB 10.36.37

anupama mallika	Anupama Mallika	CC Madhya 19.36

mām anu	as my follower or servant	SB 9.18.28

tanu-mana	body and mind	CC Madhya 2.76

janma-tanu-mana	their births, bodies and minds	CC Madhya 21.114

tanu-mana	mind and body	CC Antya 5.35-36

tanu-mana	the minds and bodies	CC Antya 19.96

tanu-mana	body and mind	CC Antya 20.48

tanu-mana	mind and body	CC Antya 20.50

anudvigna-manāḥ	without being agitated in mind	BG 2.56

anutapya-mānaḥ	repenting	SB 5.8.28

putra-sneha-anubaddha-manāḥ	who was obliged by affection for his son	SB 5.9.4

anurakta-manasaḥ	their minds very much attached to Him	SB 10.16.20

utphullita tanu-mane	the body and mind become jubilant	CC Madhya 25.278

tanu-manera	of the mind and body	CC Madhya 2.64

tanu-māninaḥ	of a person in the bodily concept of life	SB 10.2.22

tanu-vāk-manobhiḥ	by the body, words and mind	CC Madhya 8.67

tri-loka-manohara-anubhāva	O You who are perceived as the most beautiful within the three worlds	SB 6.9.40

manu-putrāḥ	all the descendants of Manu	SB 1.3.27

kṛta-manu-kṛta-vatyaḥ	in the act of copying the movements	SB 1.9.40

manu-jaḥ	a descendant of Manu (a man)	SB 2.3.23

manu-vaṃśa-dharaḥ	as the descendant of the Manu dynasty	SB 2.7.20

manu	the father of mankind	SB 2.7.39

manu-antareṣu	after the dissolution of each and every Manu	SB 3.11.25

manu-antareṣu	in each change of Manu	SB 3.11.27

manu-ādibhiḥ	as Manus	SB 3.11.27

manu-putrau	sons of Manu	SB 4.1.9

manu-vat	like Svāyambhuva Manu	SB 4.22.61

manu-antaram	up to the end of one Manu	SB 4.28.31

manu-antara	of the manvantara millennium	SB 5.1.28

manu-ja	of those born in human society	SB 5.2.6

manu-jaḥ	a man	SB 5.5.15

manu-jaiḥ	by men	SB 5.14.5

manu-antaraḥ	the change of Manus [in one day of Brahmā there are fourteen Manus]	SB 6.1.3

manu-antarāṇi	changes of Manu	SB 8.13.7

manu-ādayaḥ	the Manus and others	SB 8.14.1

manu-putrāḥ	all the sons of Manu	SB 8.14.2

manu-ādayaḥ	the Manus and others	SB 8.14.3

manu-jaḥ	appearing as a human being	SB 9.10.12

manu-jān	humans	SB 10.62.17

manu-tīrtham	to Manu-tīrtha	SB 10.79.19-21

manu-antaram	the reign of each Manu	SB 12.7.15

manu-putrāḥ	the sons of Manu	SB 12.7.15

manu-antara	lifetimes of Manu	SB 12.8.14

manu-antara	of reigns of the various Manus	SB 12.12.19

manu-antara-avatārāḥ	the particular incarnations of the Supreme Personality of Godhead in each manv-antara	SB 12.12.19

manu-antara	prescribed duties given by the Manus	CC Adi 2.91-92

manu-antara	period of a Manu	CC Adi 3.8

manu-antara	periods of Manu	CC Adi 3.8

manu-antara	period of Manu	CC Adi 3.9

yuga-manu-antare	in the ages and millenniums of Manu	CC Adi 5.113

manu-antara-avatāra	the incarnations who appear during the reign of each Manu	CC Madhya 20.246

manu-antara-avatāra	the incarnations who appear during the reign of each Manu	CC Madhya 20.319

manu-antara	changes of Manu	CC Madhya 20.320

manu-antara-avatāra	incarnations who appear during the reign of each Manu	CC Madhya 20.322

manu-rūpaiḥ	in the form of mantras	Bs 5.5

manuḥ	the father of mankind	BG 4.1

manuḥ	the father of mankind	SB 2.1.36

manuḥ	Svāyambhuva	SB 2.7.43-45

manuḥ	Manu	SB 3.11.24

manyuḥ, manuḥ, mahinasaḥ, mahān, śivaḥ, ṛtadhvajaḥ, ugaretāḥ, bhavaḥ, kālaḥ, vāmadevaḥ, dhṛtavrataḥ	all names of Rudra	SB 3.12.12

manuḥ	the father of mankind	SB 3.12.54

manuḥ	the father of mankind	SB 3.13.6

manuḥ uvāca	Śrī Manu said	SB 3.13.14

manuḥ	Manu	SB 3.20.1

svāyambhuvaḥ manuḥ	and Svāyambhuva Manu	SB 3.20.10

manuḥ	Svāyambhuva Manu	SB 3.21.25

manuḥ	Svāyambhuva Manu	SB 3.21.36

manuḥ	Manu	SB 3.22.2

manuḥ	Svāyambhuva Manu	SB 3.22.31

manuḥ	Lord Svāyambhuva Manu	SB 4.1.10

manuḥ	Svāyambhuva Manu	SB 4.1.11

manuḥ	Svāyambhuva Manu	SB 4.8.21

manuḥ	Svāyambhuva Manu	SB 4.11.6

manuḥ uvāca	Manu said	SB 4.11.7

manuḥ	Lord Manu	SB 4.11.35

manuḥ	Manu	SB 4.29.42-44

manuḥ	Svāyambhuva Manu	SB 4.30.41

manuḥ	Svāyambhuva Manu	SB 5.1.22

manuḥ	Svāyambhuva Manu	SB 6.3.20-21

manuḥ cākṣuṣaḥ	the Manu named Cākṣuṣa	SB 6.6.15

manuḥ	Manu, King Satyavrata	SB 6.9.23

manuḥ	Manu himself	SB 6.17.12

śrī-manuḥ uvāca	Svāyambhuva Manu chanted	SB 8.1.9

manuḥ	Manu	SB 8.1.19

manuḥ	he became the Manu	SB 8.1.23

manuḥ	became the Manu	SB 8.1.27

manuḥ	Manu	SB 8.5.2

manuḥ	Manu	SB 8.5.7

manuḥ	Manu	SB 8.13.1

manuḥ	the eighth Manu	SB 8.13.11

manuḥ	the Manu	SB 8.13.18

manuḥ	will be Manu	SB 8.13.21

manuḥ	the Manu	SB 8.13.24

manuḥ	Manu	SB 8.13.27

manuḥ	the Manu	SB 8.13.30

manuḥ	the Manu	SB 8.13.33

vaivasvataḥ manuḥ	Vaivasvata Manu	SB 8.24.58

manuḥ āsīt	became the Vaivasvata Manu	SB 9.1.2-3

manuḥ śrāddhadevaḥ	the Manu named Śrāddhadeva	SB 9.1.11-12

manuḥ	Manu	SB 9.1.16

manuḥ vaivasvataḥ	Vaivasvata Manu, known as Śrāddhadeva	SB 9.2.1

manuḥ	Vaivasvata Manu	SB 9.2.2

manuḥ	Vaivasvata Manu	SB 11.4.18

manuḥ	Manu	SB 11.16.14

svāyambhuvaḥ manuḥ	the great prajāpati Svāyambhuva Manu	SB 11.16.25

manuḥ	the Manu	SB 12.7.15

svāyambhuvaḥ manuḥ	Svāyambhuva Manu	SB 12.12.11

manuja-apasadāḥ	the most condemned men	SB 5.6.10

manuja-ākṛtim	appearing as a human being	SB 5.19.8

manuja-ādayaḥ	the human beings and so on	SB 6.14.3

manuja-indrāṇām	of the daughters of worldly kings	SB 9.6.41-42

manuja-bālakaḥ	exactly like the child of a human being	SB 10.8.36

manuja-arbha-māyinaḥ	of Kṛṣṇa, who appeared as the son of Nanda Mahārāja and Yaśodā, being compassionate upon them	SB 10.12.38

manuja-īśvara	O lord of men (Nimi)	SB 11.5.38-40

manuja-kāyaiḥ	the bodies of men	CC Adi 3.66

manujaḥ	mankind (the sons of Manu)	SB 2.1.36

manujaḥ	among human beings	SB 9.14.23

manujāḥ	all human beings	SB 10.2.22

manujāḥ	people	SB 10.82.2

manujāḥ	human beings	SB 11.5.25

manujāḥ	humans	SB 11.5.38-40

manujāḥ	humans	SB 11.7.19

manujaḥ	a human being	SB 11.8.29

manujāḥ	men	SB 12.3.42

manujāḥ	men	Bs 5.36

manujāḥ	O humans	MM 40

manujāḥ	people	MM 42

manujaiḥ	by human beings	SB 6.16.63

manujaiḥ	by the citizens	SB 9.4.24

manujaiḥ	by human beings, descendants of Manu	SB 10.87.40

manujaiḥ	human beings	SB 11.5.35

manujam	ordinary man	SB 1.11.37

manujam	appearing like a human being	SB 10.17.22

manujān	mankind	SB 3.11.21

ā-manujāt	extending to the human beings	SB 10.87.26

manujatvam	the form of a human being	SB 10.38.10

māyā-manuje	who appeared by His own energy in His eternal humanlike form	SB 7.1.28-29

manujeṣu	among the humans	SB 10.62.18-19

manum	Manu, the father of man	SB 1.3.15

manum	Manu	SB 3.22.34

manum	thinker	SB 4.6.39

manum	Cākṣuṣa Manu	SB 4.13.15-16

manum	Svāyambhuva Manu	SB 4.18.12

manum	Manu	SB 6.6.20

manum	to Manu	SB 6.6.40

manum	the Manu	SB 6.6.41

manunā	by the father of mankind	SB 2.7.2

manunā	the would-be Vaivasvata Manu	SB 2.7.12

manunā	and with Manu	SB 3.13.20

manunā	by Manu	SB 5.1.21

manunā	with the mantra	Bs 5.3

mānuṣa	human beings	SB 3.7.27

mānuṣa	human	SB 5.19.19

mānuṣa	humanlike	SB 10.16.65-67

pāiyā mānuṣa janma	anyone who has gotten the form of a human body	CC Adi 13.123

mānuṣa	the man	CC Adi 17.256

sannyāsī mānuṣa	in the renounced order of life	CC Antya 12.73

sannyāsī mānuṣa	a person in the renounced order of life	CC Antya 13.15

mānuṣaḥ	human being	SB 1.1.20

mānuṣāḥ	pertaining to other men	SB 3.22.37

mānuṣaḥ	human	SB 9.9.28

kārya-mānuṣaḥ	who was acting like a human being	SB 10.16.60

mānuṣaḥ	appearing as a human being	SB 10.50.5-6

mānuṣaḥ	human	SB 11.2.29

mānuṣaiḥ	and those of ordinary humans	SB 10.50.31

mānuṣam	human	BG 11.51

mānuṣam	of human beings	SB 5.1.41

mānuṣam	human	SB 7.6.1

mānuṣam	a human being	SB 7.8.17

mānuṣam	exactly like a man	SB 10.1.11

mānuṣam	as if playing as a human child	SB 10.7.3

mānuṣam	and humankind	SB 10.24.16